All Cadillac Repair and Service Manuals

For full manual go to https://repairmanualnow.
com/
2019-2023 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT

Active Noise Cancellation System - XT4
SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION WIRING SCHEMATICS
Active Noise Cancellation
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES

DTC B0560 (UQS)
Diagnostic Instructions
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions
DTC Descriptor
DTC B0560
Tachometer Circuit
Symptom Byte Information: Symptom Byte List
Diagnostic Fault Information
Short to Open/High Short to Signal

Circuit Ground Resistance Voltage Performance
Signal circuit B0560 08 B0560 08 - B0560 08
1 of 10
Circuit/System Description
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Active Noise Cancellation Description and Operation
Circuit Description
The control module input circuit has an internal resistance
Signal circuit
connected to ground.
Component Description
The active noise cancellation system uses microphones and
K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module the vehicle speakers to acoustically cancel out certain
unpleasant frequencies.
The Audio Amplifier receives audio inputs which it then
T3 Audio Amplifier
outputs as amplified signals to the appropriate speakers.
Conditions for Running the DTC
• Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode

• Battery Voltage = 9 to 16 V
Conditions for Setting the DTC
• Engine Running
• Engine Speed Signal Performance = Less than 300 RPM - Greater than 9000 RPM
Actions Taken When the DTC Sets
Active Noise Cancellation - Disabled
Conditions for Clearing the DTC
Greater than 300 RPM & Less than 9000 RPM
Reference Information
Schematic Reference
Active Noise Cancellation Wiring Schematics
Connector End View Reference
Master Electrical Component List , or Component Connector End Views - Index
Electrical Information Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Connector Repairs
• Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
2 of 10
Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions
Circuit/System Testing
1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X3 @ K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module/T3 Audio Amplifier
3. Engine Running @ 600 RPM
4. Test for 575 to 800 Hz between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 & Ground
If not between 575 and 800 Hz
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: @ K20 Engine Control Module
3. Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 & Ground
If 1 V or greater - Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
Go to next step: If less than 1 V
6. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 & Ground
If less than infinite resistance - Repair the short to ground on the circuit.
Go to next step: If infinite resistance
7. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 & The other end of the
circuit
If 2 ohms or greater - Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
Go to next step: If between 575 and 800 Hz
5. Test or replace the component: K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module/T3 Audio Amplifier
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification
For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to: Control Module References
DTC B0560 (UQG)

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B0560
Tachometer Circuit
3 of 10

B0560 11
Signal circuit B0560 12 B0560 11 -
B0560 12
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Active Noise Cancellation Description and Operation
Circuit Description
Signal circuit
The Audio Amplifier receives audio inputs which it then
outputs as amplified signals to the appropriate speakers.
T3 Audio Amplifier The active noise cancellation system uses microphones and
the vehicle speakers to acoustically cancel out certain
unpleasant frequencies.
• Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode

• Battery Voltage = 9 to 16 V
• Engine Running
• Engine Speed Signal Performance = Less than 300 RPM - Greater than 9000 RPM
Active Noise Cancellation - Disabled
Greater than 300 RPM & Less than 9000 RPM
Schematic Reference
4 of 10
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 @ K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module/T3 Audio Amplifier
3. Engine Running @ 600 RPM
4. Test for 575 to 800 Hz between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 8 & Ground
If not between 575 and 800 Hz
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: @ K20 Engine Control Module
6. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 8 & Ground
7. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 8 & The other end of the
circuit
Go to next step: If between 575 and 800 Hz
5. Test or replace the component: K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module/T3 Audio Amplifier
Repair Instructions
DTC B126F, B1277, B127C, OR B127D

• Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure.
5 of 10
• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.
• Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provide an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptors
DTC B1277
Microphone 1 Input Signal Circuit
DTC B127C
DTC B127D
DTC B126F
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List

Microphone High Signal Circuit
B1277 02 B1277 04 B1277 01 B1277 1A
(LF)
Microphone Low Signal Circuit
B1277 02 B1277 04 B1277 01 B1277 1A
(LF)
B127C 02 B127C 04 B127C 01 B127C 1A
(RF)
B127C 02 B127C 04 B127C 01 B127C 1A
(RF)
B127D 02 B127D 04 B127D 01 B127D 1A
(LR)
B127D 02 B127D 04 B127D 01 B127D 1A
(LR)
B126F 02 B126F 04 B126F 01 B126F 1A
(RR)
B126F 02 B126F 04 B126F 01 B126F 1A
(RR)
The active noise cancellation system uses four microphones in the vehicle headliner: one above each front
seating position, and two above the rear seats. The Audio Amplifier/Active Noise Cancellation Module provides
a bias voltage to each microphone (+) and (-) signal circuits for operation of the microphone. The microphones
monitor the vehicle cabin for undesirable engine sounds. The Audio Amplifier uses the microphone inputs and
an engine RPM signal to determine the frequency of the undesirable sound.
6 of 10
The Audio Amplifier/Active Noise Cancellation Module performs a self diagnostic of the microphone circuits
16 seconds after initial power up, then periodically every 400 milliseconds thereafter.
DTC B1277 01, B127C 01, B127D 01, B126F 01
• DTC B1325 is not current

• A short to voltage is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit for more than 1.5 seconds
DTC B1277 02, B127C 02, B127D 02, B126F 02

• A short to ground is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit for more than 1.5 seconds
DTC B1277 04, B127C 04, B127D 04, B126F 04

• An open is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit for more than 1.5 seconds
DTC B1277 1A, B127C 1A, B127D 1A, B126F 1A

• An out of range voltage is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit for more than 1.5 seconds
Action Taken When the DTC Sets
The active noise cancellation system is disabled.
• A current DTC clears when the self diagnostic passes on the next ignition cycle.
• A history DTC clears when the ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold without a repeat of the
malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• Installation of aftermarket replacement speakers, additional speakers/subwoofers, or aftermarket exhaust

systems can cause undesirable behavior of the active noise cancellation system.
• The noise reduction microphones have foam blocks above them to seal the microphones and aid in the
reduction of headliner vibration. Missing or out of place foam blocks can impact system performance.
Schematic Reference
7 of 10
Description and Operation
Active Noise Cancellation Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate B77 Radio Volume Compensator
Interior Noise Microphone. Ignition ON.
2. Test for 7.8 - 8.8 V between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If less than 7.8 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the T3 Audio Amplifier/K108 Active Noise
Cancellation Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground in the circuit.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the T3 Audio Amplifier/K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module.
If greater than 8.8 V
Cancellation Module. Ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
Go to next step: If less than 1 V, replace the T3 Audio Amplifier/K108 Active Noise
Go to next step: If between 7.8 - 8.8 V
3. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If greater than 1 V
1. Ignition OFF, X3 harness connector at the T3 Audio Amplifier/K108 Active Noise Cancellation
Module. Ignition ON.
8 of 10
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage in the circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the T3 Audio Amplifier/K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module.
5. Test for infinite resistance between the B77 Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone
signal circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If less than infinite resistance
Repair the short to ground in the circuit

If 2 Ω or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit
Go to next step: If less than 2 Ω

7. Replace the B77 Radio Volume Compensator Interior Noise Microphone.
8. Ignition ON
9. Verify the DTC does NOT set.
If the DTC sets
Replace the T3 Audio Amplifier/K108 Active Noise Cancellation Module.
Go to next step: If the DTC does not set

10. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.
• Active Noise Cancellation Microphone Replacement

• Control Module References for Audio Amplifier replacement, programming, and setup.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The entertainment system on this vehicle may have several different configurations. To determine the specific
configuration of the vehicle, please see the Service Parts ID Label, and refer to RPO Code List .
The main components of the Active Noise Cancellation system are:
• Microphones in the vehicle headliner. Use schematics to determine the number of microphones in each
vehicle.
• A discrete engine speed (RPM) signal from the engine control module to the amplifier/active noise
cancellation module.
9 of 10
• Active Noise Cancellation electronics and software integrated into the audio amplifier/active noise
cancellation module.
• The vehicle speaker system, connected to the amplifier/active noise cancellation module, to output the
desired cancellation frequencies.
The Active Noise Cancellation system is operational under the following conditions:
• The amplifier/active noise cancellation module has passed all self diagnostic checks
• All doors are closed
• Battery voltage is between 9.5 V and 16 V
• The vehicle cabin temperature is less than 140Â°F (60Â°C)
• Engine speed is between 550 and 3000 RPM
The Active Noise Cancellation system is a method used to reduce the perception of certain undesirable sounds
generated by the engine into the vehicle cabin. The systems uses microphone and engine speed signals, software
integrated into the amplifier/active noise cancellation module, and the vehicle speakers to determine and
generate the correct frequencies needed to achieve the desired reduction.
The microphones are located in the headliner to monitor noise/sounds in the vehicle cabin, and are directly
connected to the amplifier/active noise cancellation module. The amplifier/active noise cancellation module
also receives a discrete engine speed (RPM) signal from the engine control module. The amplifier/active noise
cancellation module processes these inputs to determine the frequency of the undesirable sound. The
amplifier/active noise cancellation module then calculates the appropriate cancellation frequency and outputs a
cancellation signal (audio tone) to the vehicle speakers to reduce the perception of undesirable sounds by the
vehicle occupants so the vehicle cabin appears quieter and without vibration.
ESE Engine Sound Enhancement (if equipped with NKD)
The ESE feature improves the natural sounds of powertrain and exhaust systems. It uses the microphones and
tachometer inputs (under heavy acceleration conditions) to modify the sound and play it back through the
speakers. This feature is always enabled and there are no controls to enable or disable the system.
Article GUID: A01198682
10 of 10
Cellular, Entertainment, And Navigation - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS
FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS
Single Use Non-Threaded Fasteners/Components

NOTE:
All
fasteners/components
listed in this table
MUST BE
DISCARDED and
replaced with NEW
after removal.
Application
High Frequency Antenna Retainer
Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Application Metric (English)
Communication Interface Module Battery Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Communication Interface Module Bracket Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
High Frequency Antenna Bolt 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Bolt 1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Radio AM Antenna Signal Filter Module Bolt 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Radio Antenna Amplifier Bolt 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Radio Bracket Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Control Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Front Center Speaker Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Front Side Door Speaker Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Front Speaker Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Rear Side Door Speaker Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Speaker Amplifier Nut 6 N.m (53 lb in)
Steering Wheel Radio Control Switch Bracket Screw 1.1 N.m (8 lb in)
Steering Wheel Radio Control Switch Screw 1.1 N.m (8 lb in)

RADIO/NAVIGATION SYSTEM WIRING SCHEMATICS
1 of 177
Radio Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Microphones
Amplifier Power, Ground, Serial Data, Remote and Mute Control
Radio to Amplifier (UQG)
2 of 177
Speakers (UQG)
Front Speakers (UQS)
Rear Speakers (UQS)
3 of 177
Antennas
Infotainment Control
Auxiliary Input
4 of 177
ONSTAR/TELEMATICS WIRING SCHEMATICS
Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Antennas (UE1)
Controls and Audio Signals (UE1)

DTC B1023
• Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check -
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1023
5 of 177
Integral Switch
The Infotainment Control Switch is located in the front center console. It utilizes a dial and buttons to duplicates the
functions of the primary controls available on the radio.
System Voltage = 9 to 16 V
The Infotainment Control Switch detects a switch has been pressed for 30 s or longer.
• The conditions for setting the DTC no longer exist.
Diagnostic Aids
• Before replacing the part check for a physically stuck switch.

• If DTC B1023 is set as history do not replace any parts.
Schematic Reference
Radio/Navigation System Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References
Circuit/System Verification
1. Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode

2. Clear the DTCs.
3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Verify DTC B1023 is not set.
If the DTC is set
Replace the component: S165 Infotainment Control Switch
6 of 177
Go to next step: If the DTC is not set
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B1024
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1024
Printed Circuit Board Temperature Sensor
The internal fault detection is handled inside the control module. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Ignition On
Voltage = 9 to 16 V
Control Module Temperature Sensor - Limits Out of Range
Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode = For greater than 30 s

2. Verify no other DTCs are set.
If other DTCs are set
Refer to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
Go to next step: If no other DTCs are set

3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the
conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
7 of 177
4. Verify DTC B1024 is not set.
If DTC B1024 is set
1. Perform all necessary programming and setup procedures for the control module: Appropriate control
module.
2. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Replace the component: Appropriate control module.

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B1025-B1135
DTC Descriptors
DTC B1025
Audio Output 1 Circuit
DTC B1045
DTC B1065
DTC B1075
DTC B1085
DTC B1095
DTC B1105
8 of 177
DTC B1115
For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List .

Audio Output 1 Signal Circuits (Left
B1025 02 B1025 04 B1025 01 -
Front Door and Tweeter)
Audio Output 3 Signal Circuits
B1045 02 B1045 04 B1045 01 -
(Right Front Door and Tweeter)
B1065 02 B1065 04 B1065 01 -
(Center I/P)
B1075 02 B1075 04 B1075 01 -
and Right Rear Surround Speakers)
B1085 02 B1085 04 B1085 01 -
Rear Door and Tweeter)
B1095 02 B1095 04 B1095 01 -
(Right Rear Door and Tweeter)
B1105 02 B1105 04 B1105 01 -
I/P)
B1115 02 B1115 04 B1115 01 -
(Right I/P)
The Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST) is a high-speed multimedia network technology. The serial MOST
bus uses a ring topology and synchronous data communication to transmit audio, video, data and control information
between any devices attached.
The audio amplifier is a participant on the MOST network. The audio amplifier receives audio inputs and control
information from the MOST bus.
Each of the audio output channel circuits (+) and (-), at the audio amplifier have a DC bias voltage that is
approximately one half of the battery voltage. When using a DMM, each of the audio output channel circuits will
measure approximately 6.5V DC. The audio being played on the system is produced by a varying AC voltage that is
centered around the DC bias voltage on the same circuit. The AC voltage is what causes the speaker cone to move
and produce sound.
Diagnostic Aids
• Improper speaker mounting or loose trim may cause an audible buzz or distortion. Inspect the appropriate
speaker and the surrounding interior trim for proper and secure mounting.
The EL-50334-6 Audio System Diagnostic CD contains audio tracks that can be used to duplicate and isolate
such concerns. Tracks 11 and 12 contain audio sweep tones for testing for speaker and grill rattles.
If the speaker or surrounding interior trim is found to be loose or improperly secured, correctly secure the item.
9 of 177
• The test tones on the CD may be copied to a USB drive or other device to use during testing.
• Some audio output circuits are connected to more than one speaker, defendant on vehicle equipment. It may be
necessary to disconnect one or more speakers during testing of some circuits.
NOTE: DTC B1325 must not be set as current for the amplifier to run any of the following
tests.
DTC B1025 01, B1045 01, B1065 01, B1075 01, B1085 01, B1095 01, B1105 01, B1115 01
The test is run initially upon amplifier wake-up, and periodically every one second after amplifier operation begins.
DTC B1025 02, B1045 02, B1065 02, B1075 02, B1085 02, B1095 02, B1105 02, B1115 02
DTC B1025 04, B1045 04, B1065 04, B1075 04, B1085 04, B1095 04, B1105 04, B1115 04
The test is run once during amplifier wake-up.
DTC B1025 01, B1045 01, B1065 01, B1075 01, B1085 01, B1095 01, B1105 01, B1115 01
A short to voltage is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit
DTC B1025 02, B1045 02, B1065 02, B1075 02, B1085 02, B1095 02, B1105 02, B1115 02
A short to ground is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit
DTC B1025 04, B1045 04, B1065 04, B1075 04, B1085 04, B1095 04, B1105 04, B1115 04
An open is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit
The amplifier mutes the output channel and no sound is present from the speaker (s) that have a current circuit fault.
• The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.

• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Schematic Reference
10 of 177
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
EL-50334-50 USB Cable and Adapter Kit
1. Ignition ON, infotainment system ON, mute OFF.

2. Verify clear audio is heard from each speaker, adjusting fade and balance controls to test each speaker
individually.
If audio is inoperative from one or more speakers, or the audio emitted is not clear
Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Go to next step: If clear audio is heard from all speakers

3. All OK.
NOTE: Some circuits supply audio signals to more than one speaker. It may be
necessary to disconnect all speakers on the affected audio circuit when
performing circuit tests.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate P19 Speaker. Ignition ON, infotainment
system ON, mute OFF.
2. Test for 5 - 7 V between the appropriate signal circuit terminals listed below and ground.
• door, tweeter, surround, subwoofer, and I/P speakers audio (-) circuit terminal 1
• door, tweeter, surround, subwoofer, and I/P speakers audio (+) circuit terminal 2
If less than 5 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 and X2 harness connectors at the T3 Audio Amplifier.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the T3 Audio Amplifier.
If greater than 7 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 and X2 harness connectors at the T3 Audio Amplifier. Ignition ON.
11 of 177
If less than 1 V, replace the T3 Audio Amplifier.
Go to next step: If 5 - 7 V
3. Test or replace the P19 Speaker.
Repair Instructions
• Speaker Replacement Reference

• Control Module References for audio amplifier replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B124B
• Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category.
DTC Descriptor
DTC B124B
USB 1 Circuit

B+ B124B, 1, 3 1, 2 - -
USB Cable B124B B124B B124B -
Ground - 1 - -
1. USB port Inoperative
2. Fault may affect one or more components, defendant on fault location
3. Fault affects multiple components, defendant on vehicle equipment
The infotainment system has a auxiliary jack and USB receptacle assembly. The auxiliary jack and USB receptacle
assembly receives fused battery voltage and ground from the harness to power the internal hub device as well as
providing additional amperage to power USB devices. The internal hub device interfaces directly with the radio via a
standard USB cable.
Auxiliary Audio Input Jack (if equipped)
When a portable audio playback device is connected to the 3. 5 mm (1/8 in.) auxiliary audio input jack an internal
switch opens the detection signal circuit. The radio detects the device and AUX becomes available as an audio
source. Audio signals from the device are sent to the radio from the auxiliary input jack via the left, right, and
common audio signal circuits.
12 of 177
USB Port
The USB receptacle interfaces directly with the radio via a standard USB cable. A Mini type USB connector is used
to connect the cable at the radio and at the auxiliary jack and USB receptacle assembly. USB male to female
connections are typically used for connecting USB cables together where an in-line connection is required. An in-
line cable connection is typically found between the console and I/P harness.
The USB port allows connectivity to the infotainment system from portable media players or a USB storage device
(memory stick/ flash drive). When a device is connected to the USB port, the system detects the device and USB
becomes available as an audio source. Once connected, the device can be controlled from the radio controls.
Not all portable media player devices or file types are compatible. Refer to the owner's manual for information on
USB devices, control, and operation.
Refer to the owner manual for information on the Navigation system.
SD Card Reader (if equipped)
The infotainment system uses the SD card reader for the Navigation map data.
Refer to the owners manual for information on the navigation system.
• Ignition is ON or in the ACC position

• The system voltage is 9-16 V
• The infotainment system is ON
• The test is run once per second when the infotainment system is operating
The radio detects an excessive current condition on the USB 5 V circuit.
The USB port is inoperative while the DTC is current.

Diagnostic Aids
This DTC may be set due to the connection of an incompatible or faulty USB device.
Schematic Reference
13 of 177
Radio/Audio System Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
• EL-50334-50 USB Cable and Adapter Kit

• EL-50334-14 Infotainment Test Cable
1. Verify DTC B124B is not set. Since occurrences of this DTC can be caused by an incompatible or faulty USB
device, review with the customer the conditions under which their concern occurred.
If DTC B124B is set.
Refer to Circuit/System testing.
Go to next step: If DTC B124B is not set.

2. Ignition ON, infotainment system ON.
3. Connect a compatible USB device to the USB port and attempt to play audio from a comparable know good
vehicle.
4. Verify audio is heard through the infotainment system while operating the USB device.
If audio is not heard
USB device is not compatible, try a different USB device.
Go to next step: If audio is heard

5. Connect a compatible USB device to the USB port and attempt to play audio from the customers vehicle.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing
Go to next step: All OK
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input.
14 of 177
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 3 and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.
If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
3. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the B+ circuit end to end.
Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates
4. Verify the USB cable is properly connected at all components and any in-line connections, and there is no
damage to the cable or connections.
If connection problems or cable damage is noted.
Perform the appropriate repair or replacement to correct any issues.
Go to next step: If no connection problems or cable damage is noted.

5. Replace the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input. Connect all harness connectors.
7. Connect a compatible USB device to the USB port and attempt to play audio.
1. Replace the USB cable assembly.
If audio is not heard, replace the A11 Radio.
Go to next step: If audio is heard.
4. All OK.
9. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Multimedia Receptacle Replacement

• Control Module References control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B124F
15 of 177
DTC Descriptor
DTC B124F
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Programming
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List .
Certain devices in the entertainment system must be programmed with specific software and other information to
operate correctly. This DTC is the result of an unsuccessful USB programming event of the device. The symptom
byte information is for engineering reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved
Once upon each USB Programming Event.
The programming event was incomplete, or completed with errors.
The entertainment system has limited or no functionality.
The programming event completes successfully.
Diagnostic Aids
DTC B124F could set if a programming attempt was made when the module already had the latest update available
installed.
1. Ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode.

2. Verify DTC B124F is not set.
If DTC B124F is set
1. Program the device that set the DTC.
If DTC is set, replace the device that set the DTC.
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC B124F is not set
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
16 of 177
Control Module References for device replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B125A
DTC Descriptors
DTC B125A 02
Antenna Signal Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B125A 04
Antenna Signal Circuit Open Circuit

Radio Antenna Coax B125A 02 B125A 04 1 -
Antenna Module Ground - 1 - -
1. May exhibit possible AM/FM interference.
The antenna amplifier receives both AM and FM signals from the antenna. The radio antenna amplifier is enabled
when the radio is turned on. The radio provides battery voltage to the antenna amplifier using the center conductor of
the antenna coaxial cable. When a 12 V signal is seen by the amplifier on the center conductor of the antenna coax,
both AM and FM signals are amplified.
• Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.

• Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
B125A 02
The radio detects a short to ground in the antenna signal circuit center conductor.
B125A 04
The radio detects an open in the antenna signal circuit center conductor.
Radio reception may be poor or not available.
17 of 177
• The condition responsible for setting the DTC no longer exists.
• A history DTC will clears after 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
Poor AM and FM radio reception may be due to multiple influences, some of which may not be vehicle related.
Areas which have high RF traffic or block the signal path may cause a degradation in radio reception. Radio
reception may also be influenced by items within the vehicle, but not part of the radio system. Such examples are
aftermarket electrical accessories or other items which may generate noise in the vehicle electrical system.
Aftermarket window tinting, especially when there is a metallic in the film, may reduce radio reception.
AM reception is highly dependent on the antenna amplifier receiving battery voltage from the radio and being
properly grounded. The antenna amplifier boosts both AM and FM reception. When the antenna amplifier does not
receive power, AM stations may not be received and FM reception will be limited. If the amplifier is not properly
grounded, excessive interference in the signal may occur, or reception may be limited.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the radio antenna coax cable from the A11 Radio and from the T23
Radio Antenna Amplifier.
2. Verify the antenna coax cable passes the coax cable component test. Refer to Component Testing.
If the coax cable does not pass the test
Replace the antenna coax cable
Go to next step: If the coax cable passes the test

3. Connect the antenna coax cable to the A11 Radio. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, A11 Radio ON.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the antenna coax cable center terminal and ground at the T23 Radio
18 of 177
Antenna Amplifier connector.
Replace the A11 Radio.

5. Test or replace the T23 Radio Antenna Amplifier.
Component Testing
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution .
NOTE: Before testing the coax cable, check the cable exterior for being pinched, cut,
damaged, or having loose connections at the components, which can cause
reception issues.
To prevent false reading when testing the center coax terminals, use care not to
ground the test probe on the outer housing/shield.
Coax Cable Test
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the coax cable at both components.

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between coax cable center terminal end to end.
If 5 Ω or greater
Replace the coax cable

3. Test for less than 5 Ω between the coax cable outer shield end to end.
If 5 Ω or greater

4. Test for infinite resistance between the coax cable center terminal and the coax cable outer shield.

5. All OK
Repair Instructions
• Radio Antenna Amplifier Replacement

• Control Module References for radio replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B125B
19 of 177
DTC Descriptors
DTC B125B 02
Antenna 2 Signal Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B125B 04
Antenna 2 Signal Circuit Open Circuit

Radio Antenna Coax B125B 02 B125B 04 1 -
1. May exhibit possible FM interference.
The system utilizes a multi-band antenna located on the roof of the vehicle and a radio antenna amplifier. The multi-
band antenna houses an AM/FM antenna element and a FM2 antenna element. The antenna amplifier receives the
signals from antenna elements. The antenna amplifier is connected to the radio by 2 coaxial cables.
The radio antenna amplifier is enabled when the radio is turned on. The radio provides battery voltage to the antenna
amplifier using the center conductor of the antenna coaxial cable. When a 12 V signal is seen by the module on the
center conductor of the antenna coax, the received signals are amplified.
• Ignition ON.
B125B 02
The radio detects a short to ground in the FM2 antenna signal circuit center conductor.
B125B 04
The radio detects an open in the FM2 antenna signal circuit center conductor.
20 of 177
Diagnostic Aids
Poor radio reception may be due to multiple influences, some of which may not be vehicle related. Areas which have
high RF traffic or block the signal path may cause a degradation in radio reception. Radio reception may also be
influenced by items within the vehicle, but not part of the radio system. Such examples are aftermarket electrical
accessories or other items which may generate noise in the vehicle electrical system.
AM reception is highly dependent on the antenna module receiving battery voltage from the radio and being properly
grounded. When the antenna module does not receive power, AM stations may not be received and FM reception
may be limited. If the module is not properly grounded, excessive interference in the signal may occur, or reception
may be limited.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the radio antenna coax cable from the A11 Radio and from the T23 Radio Antenna
Amplifier.

3. Connect the antenna coax cable to the A11 Radio. Ignition ON, infotainment system ON.
21 of 177

Component Testing
reception issues.
Coax Cable Test

If 5 Ω or greater

If 5 Ω or greater


5. All OK
Repair Instructions
Radio Antenna Amplifier Replacement
Control Module References for radio replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B125C
22 of 177
DTC Descriptors
DTC B125C 01
Satellite Antenna Circuit Short to Battery
DTC B125C 02
Satellite Antenna Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B125C 04
Satellite Antenna Circuit Open
The digital radio receiver, located inside the radio, receives digital radio information from the digital radio antenna
located on the outside of the vehicle. The digital radio receiver is connected to the digital radio antenna via a shielded
coax cable. The digital radio antenna contains an amplifier which is powered by the radio through the coax cable.
This DTC is run every 300 milliseconds.
The radio detects a circuit fault in the digital radio antenna.
The radio displays No XM Signal or Check Antenna.
• A current DTC clears when the condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
• A history DTC clears after 100 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Diagnostic Aids
The digital radio antenna requires a clear line of sight to the sky to operate properly. Reception may be limited,
intermittent, or unavailable inside structures.
Schematic Reference
23 of 177
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
EL-48028 Digital Radio Test Antenna
1. With the vehicle outside in an area with an unobstructed view of the southern sky, tune to XM.
2. Verify DTC B125C is not set as current and the No XM Signal message is not displayed on the radio.
If DTC B125C is set as current or the No XM Signal message is displayed.
If the customer complaint indicates certain XM channels are missing or certain XM channels have
no audio
Refer to Missing XM Channels or No Audio On Certain XM Channels
Go to next step: If DTC B125C is not set as current and the No XM Signal message is not
displayed and all expected channels are present and functioning correctly.
3. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the digital radio antenna coax cable from the A11 Radio. Connect the
EL-48028 Digital Radio Test Antenna to the radio and place on the roof of the vehicle.
2. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, radio tuned to XM channel 1.
3. Verify DTC B125C is not set as current and XM reception is improved.
If DTC B125C is set as current or XM reception is not improved
Go to next step: If DTC B125C is not set as current and XM reception is improved
4. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the digital radio antenna coax cable from the T2RR Antenna - Roof
Rear.
5. Verify the digital radio antenna coax cable passes the coax cable component test. Refer to Component Testing.

6. Test or replace the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
Missing XM Channels or No Audio On Certain XM Channels
1. Locate vehicle with a clear view of the southern and western sky while channel 1 is playing audio.
2. Record the XM Radio ID from channel 0. If there is no channel 0, the XM Radio ID can be found by tuning to
24 of 177
the XM band then under System Settings select Manage.
3. Call XM at US: www. xmradio. com or 1-800-556-3600 prompt 2 or Canada: 1-877-438-9677 and verify the
customer's account is properly setup for the customer and has active XM service for the vehicle. Note: For
concerns with missing channels, it is necessary to verify channel status with XM (some channels may be
moved or deleted by XM and some are package specific or are listed as Online listening only).
4. Perform an Ignition/RAP Power cycle
5. Verify that "no audio" or "missing channels" condition still exists (Review all channels and documenting those
channels that are missing or have no audio).
6. Call XM again and request the XM advisor to deactivate the service. From there, verify that the deactivation
was received by the receiver by verifying they only have Channels 0 and 1 available. This process could take
5+ minutes.
7. Perform an Ignition/RAP Power cycle (Should still see only channel 0 and channel 1 present after this power
cycle).
8. Call XM and Activate the receiver with the SiriusXM programming package appropriate for the capability of
the audio system.
9. The activation can take up to 30 minutes to complete. Do not attempt to change from channel 1 until the XM
advisor says it is ok to change channels. (Note: A slight mute in the audio may be heard on some models
during the activation).
10. Once other channels appear, wait a few more minutes for all channels to load properly, then turn the radio off.
12. Check activation status (Proceeded with checking ALL available channels for no audio condition).
13. Power cycle vehicle.
14. Recheck activation status (Checked all previously suspect channels written down earlier in step 4).
NOTE: If the concern is still present after following the previous steps. It may be
necessary to perform a 24hr deactivation and then reactivate to resolve.
15.
Component Testing
reception issues.
Coax Cable Test
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable at both components.

If 5 Ω or greater

25 of 177
If 5 Ω or greater


5. All OK
Repair Instructions
• High Frequency Antenna Replacement

DTC B125E
DTC Descriptors
DTC B125E
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) Circuit
The digital audio broadcast receiver, located inside the radio, receives digital radio information from the digital radio
antenna located on the outside of the vehicle. The digital audio broadcast receiver is connected to the digital radio
antenna via a shielded coax cable. The digital radio antenna contains an amplifier which is powered by the radio
through the coax cable.
The digital radio has limited or no reception.
26 of 177
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the digital radio antenna coax cable from the T2RR Antenna Roof - Rear and the A11
Radio.

3. Replace the T2RR Antenna Roof - Rear.
4. Ignition ON, A11 radio ON, tune to digital band.
5. Verify DTC B125E is not set as current and digital reception is improved.
If DTC B125E is set as current or digital reception is not improved
Go to next step: If DTC B125E is not set as current and digital reception is improved
6. All OK.
Component Testing
27 of 177
reception issues.
Coax Cable Test

If 5 Ω or greater

If 5 Ω or greater


5. All OK
Repair Instructions

DTC B1271
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1271 00
Theft Protection Active
When the Control Module is initially installed in the vehicle, the Control Module receives VIN information via serial
data. The Control Module stores a portion of the VIN and compares this sequence to the VIN information received
28 of 177
each time the Control Module powers on. The VIN in the Control Module is a single one-time learn.
The Control Module theft deterrent system is intended to disable or limit Control Module functionality if incorrect
vehicle information is received by the Control Module. The Control Module disables functionality if the VIN
information received by the Control Module does not match the VIN information that has been learned by the
Control Module. This DTC is generated by the module when the Theft Protection is activated.
This DTC test runs when the radio changes from OFF to ON.
The Control Module has learned a correct VIN sequence and the VIN information received via serial data does NOT
match the learned VIN sequence.
• The Control Module may be disabled or have limited functionality.

• The display will indicate that theft protection is active.
The Control Module receives the correct VIN information via serial data.
Diagnostic Aids
A possible cause of incorrect VIN info could be the Control Module was originally installed in another vehicle.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
29 of 177
1. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode. Control Module ON.
2. Verify DTC B1271 is not set in Control Module.
If DTC B1271 is set in Control Module
Replace the Control Module.
Go to next step: If DTC B1271 is not set in Control Module

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for Control Module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B1277
DTC Descriptors
DTC B1277 02
Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B1277 04
Cellular Phone Microphone Circuit Open/High Resistance

Signal B1277 02 B1277 04 B1277 04 -
Low Reference B1277 02 B1277 04 B1277 04 -
The radio provides the cellular phone microphone with a supplied voltage on the cellular phone microphone high
signal circuit. When the microphone is in use, voice data from the user is sent back to the radio on the cellular
microphone low signal circuit.
• The ignition must be in the RUN or ACC position/vehicle in Service Mode.

• The system voltage is at least 9. 5 V and no more than 15. 5 V.
• All the above conditions are present for greater than 10 s.
30 of 177
B1277 02
The radio detects a short to ground in the cellular phone microphone high signal circuit for 10 s or greater.
B1277 04
The following conditions will set this DTC:
• The radio detects an open/high resistance in the cellular phone microphone high signal circuit for 10 s or
greater.
• The radio detects an open/high resistance in the microphone low signal circuit for 10 s or greater.
• The radio will not receive a signal from the cellular phone microphone.
• Calls can be placed but the caller cannot be heard.

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B24LF Mobile Telephone Microphone -
Left Front, ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for 9-11 V between the signal circuit terminal B and ground.
If less than 9 V
31 of 177
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2A harness connector at the A11 Radio.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the A11 Radio.
If greater than 11 V
2. Ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode, test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
Go to next step: If less than 1 V, replace the A11 Radio.
Go to next step: If between 9-11 V
3. Test for less than 1 V between the low reference circuit terminal A and ground.
If greater than 1 V
2. Ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode, test for less than 1 V between the low reference circuit and
ground.
If less than 1 V, replace the A11 Radio
4. Test for greater than 9 V between the signal circuit terminal B and the low reference circuit terminal A.
If less than 9 V
2. Test for infinite resistance between the low reference circuit and ground.
Go to next step: If greater than 9 V
5. Test or replace the B24LF Mobile Telephone Microphone - Left Front.
Repair Instructions
• Mobile Telephone Microphone Replacement

• Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement,
programming and setup.
DTC B127C
32 of 177
DTC Descriptors
DTC B127C 02
Microphone 2 Input Signal Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B127C 04
Microphone 2 Input Signal Circuit Open/High Resistance

Signal B127C 02 B127C 04 - -
Low Reference - B127C 04 B127C 04 -
The radio provides the microphone 2 with a supplied voltage on the microphone high signal circuit. When the
microphone is in use, voice data from the user is sent back to the radio on the microphone low signal circuit. This
microphone is used for driver side hands free calling enhancement, as well as a reference microphone for the primary
microphone.
• The ignition must be in the RUN or ACC position/vehicle in Service Mode.

B127C 02
The radio detects a short to ground in the microphone high signal circuit for 5 s or greater.
B127C 04
• The radio detects an open/high resistance in the microphone high signal circuit for 10 s or greater.
• The radio detects an open/high resistance in the microphone low signal circuit for 10 s or greater.
• The radio will not receive a signal from the microphone.
33 of 177
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B24RF Mobile Telephone Microphone -
Right Front, ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for 9-11 V between the signal circuit terminal B and ground.
If less than 9 V
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the X2A or X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio.
Go to next step: If less than 1 V, replace the A11 Radio.
Go to next step: If between 9-11 V
If greater than 1 V
34 of 177
2. Test for less than 1 V between the low reference circuit and ground.
If less than 1 V, replace the A11 Radio
If less than 9 V
If greater than 9 V
5. Test or replace the B24RF Mobile Telephone Microphone - Right Front.
Repair Instructions

DTC B127E
DTC Descriptor
DTC B127E 00
Front Video Display Output Signal - General failure
DTC B127E 06
Front Video Display Output Signal - Short to ground or open
The infotainment display and controls are a separate component from the radio, combined into an assembly. The
assembly is supplied battery voltage and ground from the vehicle harness. The radio communicates digital video data
for on-screen display through a dedicated cable containing the LVDS data circuits.
Control information, touch communications and dimming level for the display are communicated via a LIN serial
data circuit to the radio.
35 of 177
If the radio detects the display is not responding to the output on the LVDS circuits, the radio sets the DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
Malfunctions may include a flickering or distorted image or a blank screen.
A momentary spike in volume upon start up may be due to the radio accessing the guest profile before switching to
an established customer user profile. The radio will remember the set volume level the last time it was shut down in
the guest profile mode, which is a normal operating characteristic. To alleviate the issues turn the radio on and
proceed to the guest profile. Turn the volume level down to a lower level and power down the vehicle, the radio will
retain the lower volume level upon the next start up.

• The test is continuously when the infotainment system is operating
The radio detects the display is not responding to the output on the LVDS circuits.
• The radio sets this DTC

• No images are shown on the Info Display Module
• The radio detects a properly synced digital video signal.

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
36 of 177
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify no other DTCs are present.

If any other DTCs are present
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
Go to next step: If no other DTCs are present

3. Using a scan tool, under control functions select Info Display Test.
If the Info Display can not display the test image.
Go to next step: If the Info Display can display the test image.
4. All OK
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the P17 Info Display Module.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
4. Verify the LVDS interface cable is properly connected at the P17 Info Display Module and the A11 Radio and
there is no damage to the cable or connections.
5. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, infotainment system ON.
6. Verify the P17 Info Display Module displays an image.
If the P17 Info Display Module does not display an image.
Replace LVDS interface cable from the P17 Info Display Module to the A11 Radio.

37 of 177
Replace the P17 Info Display Module.

Go to next step: If the P17 Info Display Module displays an image
Go to next step: All OK.
Go to next step: If the P17 Info Display Module displays an image.

7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B1446 OR B1447 (UI3)

DTC Descriptors
DTC B1446
Replace Backup Power Source Below Minimum Threshold
DTC B1447
Backup Power Source Open or Short to Ground

Backup Battery B+ - B1447 06 - -
Backup Battery Low Reference - B1447 06 - -
The backup power source provides voltage to the telematics communication interface control module, to be able to
successfully place a call in the event of a main battery disconnect during a collision event.
38 of 177
B1446 00
• Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.

• DTC B1325 is not set.
B1447 06

B1446 00
The Back-up Battery no longer meets the minimum requirements to successfully place a call in the event of a main
battery disconnect.
B1447 06
The telematics communication interface control module detects an open or short to ground in the backup battery
circuits.
B1446 00
The OnStarÂ® status LED turns red.
B1447 06
• The OnStarÂ® status LED turns red.
• A current DTC B1446 00 will clear when the telematics communication interface control module determines
the back-up battery meets the minimum requirements to successfully place a call in the event of a main battery
disconnect.
• A current DTC B1447 06 will clear when the telematics communication interface control module detects no
open or short to ground in the back-up battery circuits.
Diagnostic Aids
• Shorting the backup power source positive voltage circuit to the backup power source ground circuit or chassis
ground will activate the internal circuit protection of the backup power source, rendering the backup power
source inoperative.
• DTC B1447 may set if the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module has been incorrectly
disconnected or serviced. When disconnecting the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module,
disconnect the harness connector X1 at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module prior to
39 of 177
disconnecting any other harness connectors. This will ensure the backup power source is preserved when
voltage is removed from the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
Schematic Reference
OnStar/Telematics Wiring Schematics
OnStar Description and Operation (UI3).

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
1. Ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode

2. Verify DTC B1446 or B1447 is not set in the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
If DTC B1446 or B1447 is set
Replace the C3 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module Battery
1. Verify DTC B1446 or B1447 is not set in the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
2. If DTC B1446 or B1447 is set
Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
Go to next step: If DTC B1446 or B1447 is not set
Go to next step: If DTC B1446 or B1447 is not set

3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC B1446 OR B1447 (UE1)

40 of 177
DTC Descriptors
DTC B1446 03
Replace Backup Power Source Voltage Below Threshold
DTC B1447 04
Backup Power Source Open Circuit
DTC B1447 07
Backup Power Source Voltage Above Threshold
DTC B1447 54
Backup Power Source Temperature Above Threshold

Backup Battery B+ - B1447 04 - -
Backup Battery Low Reference - B1447 04 - -
The backup power source provides voltage to the telematics communication interface control module, to be able to
successfully place a call in the event of a main battery disconnect during a collision event. The backup power source
is under an access cover on the telematics communication interface control module.
B1446
• Vehicle is ON.
• System voltage is between 9. 5 and 15. 5 V.
B1447
• Vehicle is ON.
• System voltage is between 9. 5 and 15. 5 V.
• The above conditions are present for greater than 10 s.
B1446 03
41 of 177
The telematics communication interface control module detects that the backup power source voltage has dropped
below the minimum threshold value. Threshold voltage is checked once every ignition On cycle. There is a counter
in memory which counts the number of passes and fails. On the first fail the DTC sets as current. The counter must
record 10 consecutive passes before the DTC current status clears. This counter carries over across ignition On/Off
cycles.
B1447 04
The telematics communication interface control module detects no voltage from the backup power source. Voltage is
checked every 10 m during ignition On cycle
B1447 07
The telematics communication interface control module detects voltage above the threshold from the backup power
source.
B1447 54
The telematics communication interface control module detects temperature above the threshold from the backup
power source.
B1446
B1447

• The telematics communication interface control module will be unable to place a call in the event of a main
battery disconnect during a collision event.
• A current DTC B1446 will clear when the telematics communication interface control module detects the
voltage of the backup power source is above the minimum threshold value. This may take up to 10 consecutive
ignition cycles to run the DTC pass/fail test.
• A current DTC B1447 will clear when the telematics communication interface control module detects voltage
from the backup power source. Voltage is checked every 10 m during ignition On cycle.
Diagnostic Aids
• Shorting the backup power source positive voltage circuit to the backup power source ground circuit or chassis
ground will activate the internal circuit protection of the backup power source, rendering the backup power
source inoperative.
• DTC B1447 may set if the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module has been incorrectly
disconnected or serviced. When the backup power source mode is enabled due to a loss of vehicle battery
power the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module will wait 10 seconds before placing an
emergency call. If an emergency call is deemed not necessary the K73 Telematics Communication Interface
Control Module will disconnect the C3 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module Battery
preventing the discharge of the backup power source.
42 of 177
Schematic Reference
OnStar Description and Operation (UE1)

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
1. Verify DTC B1446/B1447 is not set.

If DTC B1446/B1447 is set
Test or replace the C3 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module Battery.
2. Verify DTC B1446/B1447 is not set.

If DTC B1446/B1447 is set
Test or replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
Go to next step: If DTC B1446/B1447 is not set

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Communication Interface Module Battery Replacement

DTC B2455
DTC Descriptors
43 of 177
DTC B2455 02
DTC B2455 04

Signal Terminal B B2455 02 B2455 04 - -
Low Reference Terminal A B2455 02 B2455 04 - -
The telematics communication interface control module provides the cellular phone microphone with a supplied
voltage on the cellular phone microphone signal circuit. When the microphone is in use, voice data from the user is
sent back to the telematics communication interface control module on the cellular microphone low reference circuit.

B2455 02
The telematics communication interface control module detects a short to ground in the cellular phone microphone
signal circuit for 10 s or greater.
B2455 04
• The telematics communication interface control module detects an open/high resistance in the cellular phone
microphone signal circuit for 10 s or greater.
• The telematics communication interface control module detects an open/high resistance in the microphone low
reference circuit for 10 s or greater.
• The telematics status LED turns red.

• The telematics communication interface control module will not receive a signal from the cellular phone
microphone.
44 of 177
Schematic Reference
OnStar Description and Operation (UI3), or OnStar Description and Operation (UE1)
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
2. Test for 8. 0-10. 5 V between the signal circuit terminal B and ground.
If less than 8. 0 V
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
If greater than 10. 5 V
Interface Control Module, ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
Go to next step: If less than 1 V, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module.
Go to next step: If between 8. 0-10. 5 V
45 of 177
If greater than 1 V
If less than 1 V, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
If less than 8 V
If less than 2 Ω, replace the vehicle K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B245C
DTC Descriptors
DTC B245C
Telematics Audio Output circuit

External Speaker Signal B245C 02, 1 B245C 04, 1 B255C 01, 1, 2 -
46 of 177
1. No or reduced audio from speaker (s) on the affected audio circuit.
2. Noticeable audio distortion may be present.
The telematics communication interface control module utilizes the vehicles infotainment systems speaker to
broadcast audio in the case of emergency road assistance. In the event the infotainment system becomes inoperable
there is an emergency backup speaker connected directly to the telematics communication interface control module.
Each of the audio output channel circuits (+) and (-), at the telematics communication interface control module have
a DC bias voltage that is approximately one half of battery voltage. When using a DMM, each of the audio output
channel circuits will measure approximately 6. 5 V DC. The audio being played on the system is produced by a
varying AC voltage that is centered around the DC bias voltage on the same circuit. The AC voltage is what causes
the speaker cone to move and produce sound. The frequency (Hz) of the AC voltage signal is directly related to the
frequency of the input. Both the DC bias voltage and the AC voltage signals are needed for the system to properly
produce sound.

• The test is run once every 10 s
B245C 01
The telematics communication interface control module detects a short to voltage on the audio signal (+) or (-)
circuit.
B245C 02
The telematics communication interface control module detects a short to ground on the audio signal (+) or (-)
circuit.
B245C 04
The telematics communication interface control module detects an open on the audio signal (+) or (-) circuit.
The red LED status indicator is illuminated.
• A current DTC clears when the conditions for setting the DTC are no longer present and the ignition has been
cycled from OFF to ON.
Schematic Reference
47 of 177
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition/Vehicle Off and all vehicle systems Off, disconnect the harness connector at the P50 Emergency/Call
Backup Speaker. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for 5 - 7 V between each audio signal circuit terminal 1 and terminal 2 and ground.
If less than 5 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector X1 and X2 at the K73 Telematics Communication
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuits and ground.
If greater than 7 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector X1 and X2 at the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
Go to next step: If between 5 - 7 V
3. Test or replace the P50 Emergency/Call Backup Speaker.
Repair Instructions
DTC B2462
48 of 177
DTC Descriptors
DTC B2462 02
Global Positioning System (GPS) Signal Short to Ground
DTC B2462 04
Global Positioning System (GPS) Signal Open Circuit
The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module receives information from the GPS antenna located on the
outside of the vehicle. The GPS antenna is connected to the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module via
a shielded coaxial cable. The telematics communication interface control module supplies 5 V through the coax cable
to power the internal antenna amplifier.
• Ignition is in the RUN or ACC position.

• System voltage is between 9. 5 V and 15. 5 V.
• The above conditions are present for greater than 1 second.
B2462 02
The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module detects a short to ground on the GPS antenna signal
circuit.
B2462 04
The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module detects an open/high resistance on the GPS antenna signal
circuit.

• The OnStarÂ® Call Center cannot locate the vehicle.
• The K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module detects the presence of a GPS antenna.
Schematic Reference
49 of 177
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
EL-49903 GM OnStar Antenna Diagnostic Tool Kit
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the GPS coax cable connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
2. Attach both leads of the EL-49903 - 1 OnStar test antenna to the EL-49903 - 5 combiner. Using the EL-49903
- 6 coax cable attach the grey connector to the combiner and the brown connector to the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition ON.
3. Verify DTC B2462 is not set or that the OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle.
If DTC B2462 is set or the advisor can not locate the vehicle
Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
Go to next step: If DTC B2462 is not set or that the OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle.
4. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the EL-49903-1 OnStar Test Antenna, Navn-Cell Comn from the K73
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
5. Disconnect the GPS coax cable at the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
6. Test the coax cable between the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module and the T2RR
Antenna - Roof Rear. Refer to component testing.
Replace the coax cable.

Component Testing
50 of 177
CAUTION: Refer to Test Probe Caution
NOTE: • Before testing the coax cable, check the cable exterior for being pinched, cut,
reception issues.
• To prevent false readings when testing the center coax terminals, use care not
to ground the test probe on the outer housing/shield.
Coax Cable Test

2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the coax cable center terminal end to end.
If 5 Ω or greater

3. Test for greater than 5 Ω between the coax cable outer shield end to end.
If 5 Ω or greater


5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

• Control Module References for Telematics Communication Interface Control Module replacement,
DTC B2470
DTC Descriptors
DTC B2470 02
51 of 177
Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Short to Ground
DTC B2470 04
Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit
The primary cellular phone antenna element is connected to the telematics communication interface control module
(violet connector) via a shielded coaxial cable. Cellular communication takes place on both the primary cellular
antenna signal circuit and the GPS/secondary cellular antenna signal circuit. This diagnostic only applies to the
primary cellular antenna signal circuit. Internal to the antenna on the cellular antenna signal circuit resistance is used
to apply a load, which the telematics communication interface control module uses to detect the presence of the
antenna.
• Ignition in the RUN or ACC position.

B2470 02
The telematics communication interface control module detects a short to ground on the primary cellular antenna
signal circuit.
B2470 04
• The telematics communication interface control module detects an open or high resistance on the primary
cellular antenna signal circuit.
• The telematics communication interface control module detects the presence of a cellular antenna.
Schematic Reference
52 of 177
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn
NOTE: • The vehicle may be equipped with sectioned coax. Test each section and
replace only the faulty section, not the entire length of coax.
• The following verification requires the vehicle to be outside with an
unobstructed view of the southern sky. Allow 5 min after turning the ignition
ON for the GPS satellites to acquire vehicle signal.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the violet primary cellular coax cable
connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all
vehicle systems to power down.
2. Using the EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn connect the violet coax cable to the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition
ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Verify the DTC does not set or a call can be completed to the OnStar Call Center while operating the vehicle
within the conditions for running the DTC.
If the DTC sets or a call can not be completed to the OnStar Call Center
Replace the K73 Telematics Communications Interface Control Module.
Go to next step: If the DTC does not set or a call can be completed to the OnStar Call Center
4. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF.
5. Disconnect the EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn from the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module
6. Test the coax cable. Refer to Component Testing.

Component Testing
53 of 177
reception issues.
Coax Cable Test
If 5 Ω or greater

If 5 Ω or greater


4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair procedure.

• Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement, setup, and
programming
DTC B2476 OR B2482

DTC Descriptors
DTC B2476 04
Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open
54 of 177
DTC B2476 59
Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Protection Time-out
DTC B2482 00
Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance

10 V Reference B2476 02 B2476 04 B2476 04 -
B2476 59, B2482
Signal Terminal 17 B2476 02 B2476 04 B2476 59
00
Ground - B2476 04 - -
The OnStarÂ® button assembly consists of 3 buttons: Call/Answer, OnStarÂ® Call Center, and OnStarÂ®
Emergency. The telematics communication interface control module supplies the OnStarÂ® button assembly with 10
V via the 10 V reference circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a
specific voltage to be returned to the telematics communication interface control module over the keypad signal
circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the telematics communication interface control module is able to
identify which button has been pressed.
• Vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.

B2476 04
The telematics communication interface control module detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply
voltage circuit.
B2482 and B2476 59
The telematics communication interface control module detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for longer
than 15 s. If one of the OnStarÂ® buttons is held or stuck for 15 s or greater, the telematics communication interface
control module will set this DTC.

• No calls can be placed.
• The telematics communication interface control module will ignore all inputs from the OnStarÂ® button
assembly.
55 of 177
Diagnostic Aids
After any repair is made to the 10 V reference circuit or button signal circuit the fuse to the telematics
communication interface control module must be removed for 30 s to reset the control module. Failure to do so could
result in incorrect diagnosis.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: • 10 V reference circuit measurement may vary with vehicle battery voltage.
• Test for voltage range with vehicle battery measuring at a minimum of 11.5 V
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A98 Front
Overhead Console Assembly. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF.
3. Vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
4. Test for 8. 0 - 10. 5 V between the 10 V reference circuit terminal 16 and ground.
If less than 8. 0 V
56 of 177
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 10 V reference circuit and ground.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the 10 V reference circuit end to end.
Interface Control Module, vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 10 V reference circuit and ground.
Go to next step: If between 8. 0 - 10. 5 V
6. Test for 500 - 900 Ω between the signal circuit terminal 17 and ground.
If less than 500 Ω
1. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
If infinite resistance, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
If greater than 900 Ω
1. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module,
vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
3. Vehicle OFF.
Go to next step: If between 500 - 900 Ω
7. Test or replace the A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly.
Repair Instructions
• Roof Console Replacement

DTC B248A
57 of 177
DTC Descriptors
DTC B248A
Wireless LAN Antenna
The infotainment system has two WiFi antennas, one internal to the radio and one external, connected to the radio
via coax cable. This diagnostic refers to the external Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) or WiFi /Wireless
Communication Antenna. The internal antenna is for in - vehicle WiFi connections. The external antenna is for
outside of the vehicle WiFi connections and mainly used for OTA (Over The Air) updates as well as a backup to the
internal antenna if too many devices are connected to the internal antenna at the same time. The Radio supplies 5 V
through the coax cable to power the internal antenna amplifier.
• Radio On.
• System voltage is greater than 9 V and less than 16 V.
• The Radio tests the antenna every 10 seconds.
B248A 02
The Radio detects a short to ground on the WLAN antenna signal circuit.
B248A 04
The Radio detects an open/high resistance on the WLAN antenna signal circuit.
• Internet access may be inoperative.

Diagnostic Aids
• The WLAN antenna requires a clear line of sight to the sky to operate properly. The Wireless LAN antenna
may have limited, intermittent, or no reception near tall buildings or inside structures.
58 of 177
Schematic Reference
• Radio/Navigation System Wiring Schematics
• Radio/Audio System Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the coax cable connector at the T4T Wireless Communication Antenna - WLAN and
at the A11 Radio.
2. Verify the coax cable passes the coax cable component test. Refer to Component Testing.

3. Test or replace the T4T Wireless Communication Antenna - WLAN.
4. Verify DTC B248A is not set.
If DTC B248A is set
Go to next step: If DTC B248A is not set

5. All OK.
Component Testing
reception issues.
59 of 177
Coax Cable Test

If 5 Ω or greater

If 5 Ω or greater


5. All OK
Repair Instructions
SYMPTOMS - CELLULAR COMMUNICATION
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table.
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that all of
the following are true:
• There are no DTCs set.
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data link.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to OnStar
Description and Operation (UI3), or OnStar Description and Operation (UE1).
Visual/Physical Inspection
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System.
• Inspect for easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .
Symptom List
60 of 177
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom:
• Bluetooth Malfunction
• No Global Positioning System (GPS) Reception
• OnStar Microphone Malfunction
• OnStar Button LED Malfunction
• OnStar Call Center Remote Function Requests Malfunction
• OnStar Button Malfunction
• Unable to Contact OnStar Call Center
SYMPTOMS - ENTERTAINMENT
IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom table.
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that all of
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Radio/Audio
System Description and Operation.
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Radio/Audio System.
• Inspect for easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Symptom List
• Application Malfunction
• Auxiliary Audio Input Malfunction
• Bluetooth Malfunction
• Digital Radio Poor or No Reception
• Phone Projection Malfunction (Apple CarPlay), or Phone Projection Malfunction (Android Auto)
• No Global Positioning System (GPS) Reception
• Radio Information Display Malfunction
• Radio Poor Reception
• Speaker Malfunction (UQS), or Speaker Malfunction (UQG)
• Voice Recognition Malfunction
APPLICATION MALFUNCTION
61 of 177
The term application refers to any piece of software that works on a system (hardware) that is being operated by its
own software. Applications are typically small software programs which uses the hardware to perform a specific
task, as opposed to operating the entire system.
Diagnostic Aids
• For an application to be used, it must be installed on both the vehicle infotainment system and a compatible
mobile device.
• The application must work correctly on the device to work with the vehicle infotainment system.
• The user may be required to log-in to the application on the mobile device before using the application from
the vehicle controls.
• Applications use the mobile device and connection to a service provider to operate. Connection quality issues,
or service provider data transmission issues can give the appearance of a vehicle malfunction.
• The device must be connected to the system. This may be done wirelessly via Bluetooth Â®, or via the vehicle
USB port.
When a mobile device is connected via BluetoothÂ®, some or all of the device controls may be unavailable
from the radio controls. This varies dependent upon the device being used. Refer to the vehicle owner manual,
supplements, and the device manufacturer's information for information on devices, control, and operation.
Refer to the device manufacturer's information for the preferred connection method.
• The device must be unlocked, and any additional applications should be closed.
• If the device has any sound enhancement features such as noise reduction or echo control, these features
should be turned off.
• A low battery condition in the mobile device may not allow the device to connect to the system, or can create
communication issues with the device. Verify the device battery state of charge and re-charge or replace as
needed.
• If a 'Please See Device' or similar type error message is displayed, this may indicate the device has lost its
connection to the vehicle, or the device has lost its external data connection. Force close the application on the
device and reopen application.
• If a cable is used for connection, attempt to connect the device using a different cable; cables can deteriorate
over time or become damaged.
Schematic Reference
62 of 177
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify the application is installed on the mobile device and is up to date.

If the application is not installed or is not up to date.
Install or update the application on the device.
Go to next step: If the application is installed on the mobile device and is up to date
2. Verify the application operates correctly on the mobile device.
If the application is not operating correctly on the mobile device.
Refer to the application web site.
Go to next step: If the application is operating correctly on the mobile device.

3. Verify the A11 Radio calibrations are current.
If the calibrations are not current
Reprogram the A11 Radio and re-evaluate the concern.
Go to next step: If no update calibrations are available

4. Verify the application is installed on the A11 Radio and is up to date.
If the application is not installed or is not up to date.
Install or update the application and re-evaluate the concern.
Go to next step: If the application is installed and is up to date

5. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode. Infotainment system ON.
6. Verify the mobile device can connect to the infotainment system. Refer to the owner manual for information
on the preferred connection method for the device.
If the mobile device cannot connect to the vehicle infotainment system.
• If unable to connect via Bluetooth, refer to Bluetooth Malfunction.
• If unable to connect via USB, refer to Auxiliary Audio Input Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the mobile device connects to the vehicle infotainment system.
7. Launch the application.
63 of 177
8. Verify the application operates properly with the vehicle infotainment system.
If the application does not function properly
Refer to diagnostic aids.
Go to next step: If the application functions properly

9. All OK.
Application Error Codes

Error Message on Radio
Action
Information Display Description
Back office needs to be engaged. Contact
CLI 000 Back office is having issues for
Technical Assistance Center for further
CLI 001 the API being invoked
information.
Task was cancelled for some
Contact Technical Assistance Center for
CLI 003 reason other than a connection
further information.
issue
Issue with an app or user profile For OnStar account issues instruct customer
authentication with back office. to contact OnStar to reactivate their account
Possible causes- server down, or they can reset their password through the
401
connectivity time out, inactive OnStar website. If issue persists or for all
user profile or expired OnStar other issues contact Technical Assistance
password. Center for further information.
Repair Instructions
AUXILIARY AUDIO INPUT MALFUNCTION

DTC Descriptor
DTC B124B
USB 1 Circuit

B+ B124B, 1, 3 1, 2 - -
USB Cable B124B B124B B124B -
Ground - 1 - -
64 of 177
1. USB port Inoperative
2. Fault may affect one or more components, defendant on fault location
3. Fault affects multiple components, defendant on vehicle equipment
The infotainment system has a auxiliary jack and USB receptacle assembly. The auxiliary jack and USB receptacle
assembly receives fused battery voltage and ground from the harness to power the internal hub device as well as
providing additional amperage to power USB devices. The internal hub device interfaces directly with the radio via a
standard USB cable.
Auxiliary Audio Input Jack (if equipped)
When a portable audio playback device is connected to the 3. 5 mm (1/8 in.) auxiliary audio input jack an internal
switch opens the detection signal circuit. The radio detects the device and AUX becomes available as an audio
source. Audio signals from the device are sent to the radio from the auxiliary input jack via the left, right, and
common audio signal circuits.
USB Port
The USB receptacle interfaces directly with the radio via a standard USB cable. A Mini type USB connector is used
to connect the cable at the radio and at the auxiliary jack and USB receptacle assembly. USB male to female
connections are typically used for connecting USB cables together where an in-line connection is required. An in-
line cable connection is typically found between the console and I/P harness.
(memory stick/ flash drive). When a device is connected to the USB port, the system detects the device and USB
becomes available as an audio source. Once connected, the device can be controlled from the radio controls.
Not all portable media player devices or file types are compatible. Refer to the owner's manual for information on
USB devices, control, and operation.
Refer to the owner manual for information on the Navigation system.
SD Card Reader (if equipped)
The infotainment system uses the SD card reader for the Navigation map data.
Refer to the owners manual for information on the navigation system.

• The test is run once per second when the infotainment system is operating
The radio detects an excessive current condition on the USB 5 V circuit.
65 of 177
The USB port is inoperative while the DTC is current.

Diagnostic Aids
This DTC may be set due to the connection of an incompatible or faulty USB device.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
• EL-50334-50 USB Cable and Adapter Kit

• EL-50334-14 Infotainment Test Cable
1. Verify DTC B124B is not set. Since occurrences of this DTC can be caused by an incompatible or faulty USB
device, review with the customer the conditions under which their concern occurred.
If DTC B124B is set.
Refer to Circuit/System testing.
Go to next step: If DTC B124B is not set.

3. Connect a compatible USB device to the USB port and attempt to play audio from a comparable know good
vehicle.
66 of 177
USB device is not compatible, try a different USB device.

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
4. Verify the USB cable is properly connected at all components and any in-line connections, and there is no
damage to the cable or connections.

5. Replace the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input. Connect all harness connectors.
1. Replace the USB cable assembly.
67 of 177
If audio is not heard, replace the A11 Radio.
4. All OK.
9. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Multimedia Receptacle Replacement

• Control Module References control module replacement, programming, and setup.
BLUETOOTH MALFUNCTION
Bluetooth Â® wireless technology is a short-range communications technology intended to replace the cables
connecting portable and/or fixed devices while maintaining high levels of security. The operating range of the signal
is approximately 30 feet.
The available features and functions are determined by the type of device and the software within the devices being
used. For a feature or function to operate, it must be supported in both devices.
The Bluetooth Â® hardware is internal to the radio. The radio supports interfacing with cellular phones for hands-
free features.
Refer to the vehicle owner manual, supplements, and the device manufacturer's information for information on
devices, control, operation. and pairing instructions.
Diagnostic Aids
• Verify the mobile device is properly configured for the feature being used. Refer to the device manufacturer's
information.
• Verify the device has the latest software available. Refer to the device manufacturer's information.
• Verify the function/feature that is being used is supported by the mobile device.
• The device must be paired to the radio to use the available Bluetooth Â® feature (s). The pairing process must
only be performed once for each device, unless that device's information is deleted.
• The system can store pairing information for multiple devices, certain radios can have up to two devices
actively connected at any given time, refer to owners manual for further details.
• For features that require a cellular connection make sure to perform tests in an area where the customers
device has a strong signal.
• Close all other applications running in the background on the phone.
• If issue persists unpair the phone in both the phone and radio settings, then start the pairing process over from
the beginning.
68 of 177
• Before beginning testing, if available verify the customers device can pair with a like vehicle, meaning: Same
year, same model, same radio RPO and same radio software level.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify no DTCs are present.

If any DTCs are present
Go to next step: If no DTCs are present

2. Verify the A11 Radio calibrations are current.
If the radio calibrations are not current
Reprogram the A11 Radio and re-evaluate the concern.
Go to next step: If no update calibrations are available

4. Verify the infotainment system successfully pairs with a compatible mobile device.
If the infotainment system does not successfully pair with the compatible mobile device.
1. Perform the 3 vehicle Factory Resets located in Setting>System>Return to Factory Settings.
2. Verify the infotainment system successfully pairs with a compatible mobile device.
If the infotainment system does not successfully pair with a compatible mobile device.
Go to next step: If the infotainment system successfully pairs with a compatible mobile device.
69 of 177
5. Verify audio can be heard while streaming from the device.
If audio can be heard while streaming from the device but the audio is distorted.
Refer to Speaker Malfunction (UQS), or Speaker Malfunction (UQG)
If audio can not be heard while streaming from the device
Go to next step: If audio can be heard while streaming from the device.
6. Verify the customers device can be paired with the infotainment system.
If the device can not be paired with the infotainment system.
Perform a reset on the device. Refer to device manufacture's information.
Verify the customers device can be paired with the infotainment system.
If the device still will not pair inform the customer the issue is with the device.
Go to next step: If the device successfully pairs with the infotainment system.
7. Verify audio can be heard while streaming from the device.
If audio can not be heard while streaming.
Ensure the volume on the device is turned up to an adequate level.
Go to next step: If audio can be heard while streaming.

8. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for radio replacement, programming, and setup
INFOTAINMENT CONTROL SWITCH MALFUNCTION

Vehicle
An infotainment CAN bus is used to monitor for serial data communications between the A11 Radio and the S165
Infotainment Control Switch during normal vehicle operation. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that
allow speeds up to 2 Mbit/s. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 Ω resistors, one is internal to the A11 Radio
and the other is internal to the S165 Infotainment Control Switch. The resistors are used as the load for the
infotainment CAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The infotainment CAN bus is a differential bus. The
infotainment CAN serial data [+] and infotainment CAN serial data [-] circuits are driven to opposite extremes from
a rest or idle level of approximately 2.5 V. Driving the lines to their extremes, adds 1 V to the infotainment CAN
serial data [+] circuit and subtracts 1 V from the infotainment CAN serial data [-] circuit. If serial data is lost, devices
will set a no communication code against the non-communicating device. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does
70 of 177
not represent a failure of the device that set it.
Schematic Reference

• Control Module References
Data Link Communications Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.

2. Verify DTC U0073 - U007E is not set.
If any of the DTCs are set
Go to next step: If none of the DTCs are set

3. Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S165 Infotainment Control Switch.
2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ground circuit terminal 5 and B+.
Repair the open/high resistance in the ground circuit or ground connection.

4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 10 and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is good
1. Test for an open/high resistance in the B+ circuit.
71 of 177
If an open/high resistance is found, repair the fault on the circuit.
Go to next step: If an open/high resistance is not found
2. Verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the circuit fuse is open
1. Test for a short to ground in the B+ circuit.
If a short to ground is found, repair the fault in the circuit.
Go to next step: If a short to ground is not found
2. Replace the S165 Infotainment Control Switch.
5. Test for less than 4. 5 V between each of the infotainment CAN bus serial data circuit terminals listed below
and ground.
• Terminal 1
• Terminal 6
If 4. 5 V or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the A11 Radio.
2. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the infotainment CAN bus serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage in the serial data circuit.
If less than 1 V, replace the A11 Radio.
Go to next step: If less than 4. 5 V
6. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9. 8 ft) away
from vehicle. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
7. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the infotainment CAN bus serial data circuit terminals listed
below and ground.
• Terminal 1
• Terminal 6
If 100 Ω or less
1. Disconnect the harness connectors at the A11 Radio.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the infotainment CAN bus serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground in the serial data circuit.
If infinite resistance, replace the A11 Radio.
Go to next step: If greater than 100 Ω
8. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between the infotainment CAN bus serial data circuit terminals 1 and 6.
If less than 110 Ω
2. Test for infinite resistance between the pair of the infotainment CAN bus serial data circuit terminals.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short together between the serial data circuits.
If infinite resistance, replace the A11 Radio.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the infotainment CAN bus serial data circuits end to end between the
S165 Infotainment Control Switch and the A11 Radio.
72 of 177
• S165 Infotainment Control Switch terminal 1 and A11 Radio terminal 16 X2
• S165 Infotainment Control Switch terminal 6 and A11 Radio terminal 17 X2
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair: Diagnostic Repair Verification .
For control module replacement, programming, and setup, refer to: Control Module References
DIGITAL RADIO POOR OR NO RECEPTION

DTC Descriptors
DTC B125C 01
Satellite Antenna Circuit Short to Battery
DTC B125C 02
Satellite Antenna Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B125C 04
Satellite Antenna Circuit Open
The digital radio receiver, located inside the radio, receives digital radio information from the digital radio antenna
located on the outside of the vehicle. The digital radio receiver is connected to the digital radio antenna via a shielded
coax cable. The digital radio antenna contains an amplifier which is powered by the radio through the coax cable.
The radio displays No XM Signal or Check Antenna.
73 of 177
Diagnostic Aids
The digital radio antenna requires a clear line of sight to the sky to operate properly. Reception may be limited,
intermittent, or unavailable inside structures.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
EL-48028 Digital Radio Test Antenna
1. With the vehicle outside in an area with an unobstructed view of the southern sky, tune to XM.
2. Verify DTC B125C is not set as current and the No XM Signal message is not displayed on the radio.
If DTC B125C is set as current or the No XM Signal message is displayed.
If the customer complaint indicates certain XM channels are missing or certain XM channels have
no audio
Refer to Missing XM Channels or No Audio On Certain XM Channels
Go to next step: If DTC B125C is not set as current and the No XM Signal message is not
displayed and all expected channels are present and functioning correctly.
3. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the digital radio antenna coax cable from the A11 Radio. Connect the
74 of 177
EL-48028 Digital Radio Test Antenna to the radio and place on the roof of the vehicle.
2. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, radio tuned to XM channel 1.
3. Verify DTC B125C is not set as current and XM reception is improved.
If DTC B125C is set as current or XM reception is not improved
Go to next step: If DTC B125C is not set as current and XM reception is improved
4. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the digital radio antenna coax cable from the T2RR Antenna - Roof
Rear.

Missing XM Channels or No Audio On Certain XM Channels
1. Locate vehicle with a clear view of the southern and western sky while channel 1 is playing audio.
2. Record the XM Radio ID from channel 0. If there is no channel 0, the XM Radio ID can be found by tuning to
the XM band then under System Settings select Manage.
3. Call XM at US: www. xmradio. com or 1-800-556-3600 prompt 2 or Canada: 1-877-438-9677 and verify the
customer's account is properly setup for the customer and has active XM service for the vehicle. Note: For
concerns with missing channels, it is necessary to verify channel status with XM (some channels may be
moved or deleted by XM and some are package specific or are listed as Online listening only).
5. Verify that "no audio" or "missing channels" condition still exists (Review all channels and documenting those
channels that are missing or have no audio).
6. Call XM again and request the XM advisor to deactivate the service. From there, verify that the deactivation
was received by the receiver by verifying they only have Channels 0 and 1 available. This process could take
5+ minutes.
7. Perform an Ignition/RAP Power cycle (Should still see only channel 0 and channel 1 present after this power
cycle).
8. Call XM and Activate the receiver with the SiriusXM programming package appropriate for the capability of
the audio system.
9. The activation can take up to 30 minutes to complete. Do not attempt to change from channel 1 until the XM
advisor says it is ok to change channels. (Note: A slight mute in the audio may be heard on some models
during the activation).
10. Once other channels appear, wait a few more minutes for all channels to load properly, then turn the radio off.
12. Check activation status (Proceeded with checking ALL available channels for no audio condition).
13. Power cycle vehicle.
14. Recheck activation status (Checked all previously suspect channels written down earlier in step 4).
NOTE: If the concern is still present after following the previous steps. It may be
necessary to perform a 24hr deactivation and then reactivate to resolve.
75 of 177
15.
Component Testing
reception issues.
Coax Cable Test
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable at both components.

If 5 Ω or greater

If 5 Ω or greater


5. All OK
Repair Instructions

PHONE PROJECTION MALFUNCTION (APPLE CARPLAY)

76 of 177
Apple CarPlay is a new phone integration feature that enables iPhone users to display certain apps and functionality
from their phone on the vehicles infotainment display. Users can control the apps and functions via the vehicle's
infotainment system touchscreen or voice commands. Vehicles equipped with RPO PPW have wireless phone
projection.
Diagnostic Aids
• It is not required to download an app to your device for Apple CarPlay.

• It is recommended to use the device's factory provided USB cable. Aftermarket or third - party cables may not
work.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with RPO PPW have wireless phone projection and it is not
required to connect the device to the USB port.
• Visit for a list of Apple CarPlay compatible apps. This does not guarantee the functionality of the app.
• Before beginning diagnostics, if available verify Apply CarPlay works from the customers device on a like
vehicle, meaning: Same year, same model, same radio RPO and same radio software level.
NOTE: Verify if the customer is using their cellular data plan or the vehicle's OnStar
data plan.
• Determine if the issue occurs in the same location or if it occurs in multiple locations.
• Devices may lose wireless phone projection connectivity from the vehicle due to interference from external
WiFi signals.
• It is required for the device to be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth and WiFi in order for wireless phone
projection to operate.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
77 of 177
1. Verify no DTC's are present.
If any DTC's are present.
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
Go to next step: If no DTC's are present.

2. Verify the correct settings on the radio and the connected device that will allow Apple CarPlay functionality.
If the settings are not correct.
Refer to the vehicle and devices owner manual or manufacturers website for details on enabling CarPlay.
Go to next step: If the settings are correct.

3. Verify Bluetooth and WiFi are turned ON in both the device and the radio.
4. Verify the software is up to date on the connected device, refer to the device's owner manual or manufacturers
website.
If the connected device software is not up to date.
Recommend the customer update their device to the newest software version.
Go to next step: If the connected device software has the newest version.
If audio is not heard.
Refer to Auxiliary Audio Input Malfunction

7. Verify the A11 Radio detects the connected device when plugged in by noting a change in the Phone
Projection/Apple CarPlay icon on the Home screen.
If the A11 Radio does not show a change in the Phone Projection/Apple CarPlay icon.
1. Verify the device's cable is recommended or approved by the device manufacture and there is no damage
to the cable or terminals.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with RPO PPW have wireless phone projection and it
is not required to connect the device to the USB port.
If the cable is not the correct part or damage is noted advise the customer.
Go to next step: If no issues with the cable
2. Perform a device rest by holding both the Home and Power buttons on the device.
3. Attempt to launch the application by pressing the Phone Projection/Apple CarPlay icon within the Home
screen.
If the application does not launch
Go to next step: If the A11 Radio does show a change in the Phone Projection/Apple CarPlay icon.
8. Attempt to launch the application by pressing the Phone Projection/Apple CarPlay icon within the Home
screen.
78 of 177
Go to next step: If the application does launch
Repair Instructions
• Control Module References for control module replacement, programming, and setup.
PHONE PROJECTION MALFUNCTION (ANDROID AUTO)

Android Auto is a phone integration feature that enables Android users to display certain apps and functionality from
their phone on the vehicles infotainment display. Users can control the apps and functions via the vehicle's
infotainment system touchscreen, button control or voice commands. Vehicles equipped with RPO PPW have
wireless phone projection.
Diagnostic Aids
• Listed below are some common Android Auto Error Messages or Error Codes -
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with radio RPO IOR, error messages will not be
displayed on the vehicle or device screen.
Google Play Services error: Android Auto could not connect with Google Play Services
Likely cause: Something went wrong while setting up Android Auto.
Suggested solutions:
Connect your phone to your vehicle with a USB cable first, before attempting to open the Android
Auto app on your phone.
After you have connected your phone to the vehicle open Android Auto and follow the getting
started flow and accept all permissions.
If it still does not work, uninstall Google Play Services update and re-update then follow the steps
above.
Communication error 6: If phone battery below 20% Android Auto will not work.
Likely cause: Radio software or Google Play version out of date.
Suggested solutions: Update to Google Play version 12. 6. 85 or beyond and check for any radio
updates.
Communication error code 7: Android Auto failed to set up a secured communication with the head unit.
79 of 177
Suggested solution: Make sure Google Play services is up to date and try a different recommended USB
cable.
Communication error 8: Authentication failed between the car and the phone.
Likely cause: This is most likely caused by the incorrect date on the radio.
Suggested solutions: Disconnect your phone from the vehicle. In radio settings set the correct date.
Make sure it matches the settings on your phone.
Communication error 12: Vehicle is not responding
Likely cause: Transient software failure. If this occurs frequently it could be caused by a faulty USB
cable.
Suggested solution: Try a new USB cable approved by the manufacture.
For additional information refer to "Android Auto Help" site.

• Visit for a list of Android Auto compatible apps. This does not guarantee the functionality of the app.
• Android Auto will only automatically launch the first time it is time it is connected to the system within a key
cycle.
• It is required the device be connected to the vehicles USB port. It is recommended to use the device's factory
provided USB cable. Aftermarket or third - party cables may not work.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with RPO PPW have Wireless Phone Projection.
• The device Location needs to be set to On for Wireless Phone Projection to work. Ensure the customers device
Location is ON by going to Settings > Biometrics and Security > Location.
• Before beginning diagnostics, if available verify Android Auto works from the customers device on a like
vehicle, meaning: Same year, same model, same radio RPO and same radio software level.
NOTE: Verify if the customer is using their cellular data plan or the vehicle's OnStar
data plan.
• Determine if the issue occurs in the same location or if it occurs in multiple locations.
• Devices may lose wireless phone projection connectivity from the vehicle due to interference from external
WiFi signals.
• It is required for the device to be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth and WiFi in order for wireless phone
projection to operate.
Schematic Reference
80 of 177
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
NOTE: Before launching Android Auto verify transmission is in park or parking brake on
for manual transmission vehicles.
1. Verify the vehicle date matches the device date.

If dates do not match
Change vehicle date to match device date and reattempt to launch Android Auto
Go to next step: If dates match

2. Verify the device is Bluetooth paired to the vehicle before launching Android Auto
If the device is not Bluetooth paired
Pair the device to Bluetooth and reattempt to launch Android Auto
Go to next step: If the device is Bluetooth paired

3. Verify no DTC's are present.
If any DTC's are present.
Go to next step: If no DTC's are present.

4. Verify the correct settings on the radio and the connected device that will allow Android Auto functionality.
Verify Bluetooth and WiFi are turned ON in both the device and the radio.
If the settings are not correct.
Radio Setting - Settings>Apps>Android Auto = ON
Phone Setting - Open Android Auto>Settings>Connected Cars>Add cars to Android Auto = ON
For RPO PPW, Phone Setting - Settings > Biometrics and Security > Location = ON.
Go to next step: If the settings are correct.

5. Verify the software is up to date on the connected device, refer to the device's owner manual or manufacturers
website.
If the connected device software is not up to date.
Recommend the customer update their device to the newest software version.
Go to next step: If the connected device software has the newest version.
81 of 177
6. Verify the device's cable is recommended or approved by the device manufacture and there is no damage to the
cable or terminals.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with RPO PPW have wireless phone projection and it is not
required to connect the device to the USB port.
If the cable is not the correct part or damage is noted advise the customer.
Go to next step: If no issues with the cable
8. Verify audio from the USB device is heard through the vehicles speakers.
If audio is not heard through the vehicles speakers.
Refer to Auxiliary Audio Input Malfunction
Go to next step: If audio is heard through the vehicles speakers.

9. Verify the radio detects the connected device when plugged in by automatically launching Android Auto or
noting a change in the Phone Projection/Android Auto icon on the Home screen.
If the radio does not automatically launch Android Auto or no change in the Phone
Projection/Android Auto icon.
1. Perform a device reset by holding both the Home and Power buttons on the device.
2. Verify the radio detects the connected device when plugged in by automatically launching Android Auto
or noting a change in the Phone Projection/Android Auto icon on the Home screen.
If the radio does not automatically launch Android Auto or no change in the Phone
Projection/Android Auto icon.
3. Attempt to launch the application by pressing the Phone Projection/Android Auto icon within the Home
screen.
5. Attempt to launch the application by pressing the Phone Projection/Android Auto icon within the Home
screen.
Go to next step: If the application does launch
Go to next step: If the radio does automatically launch Android Auto.

10. All OK.
Repair Instructions
ONSTAR MICROPHONE MALFUNCTION

82 of 177
DTC Descriptors
DTC B2455 02
DTC B2455 04

Signal Terminal B B2455 02 B2455 04 - -
Low Reference Terminal A B2455 02 B2455 04 - -
The telematics communication interface control module provides the cellular phone microphone with a supplied
voltage on the cellular phone microphone signal circuit. When the microphone is in use, voice data from the user is
sent back to the telematics communication interface control module on the cellular microphone low reference circuit.

B2455 02
The telematics communication interface control module detects a short to ground in the cellular phone microphone
signal circuit for 10 s or greater.
B2455 04
• The telematics communication interface control module detects an open/high resistance in the cellular phone
microphone signal circuit for 10 s or greater.
• The telematics communication interface control module detects an open/high resistance in the microphone low
reference circuit for 10 s or greater.
• The telematics status LED turns red.

• The telematics communication interface control module will not receive a signal from the cellular phone
83 of 177
microphone.

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
2. Test for 8. 0-10. 5 V between the signal circuit terminal B and ground.
If less than 8. 0 V
84 of 177
Go to next step: If less than 1 V, replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module.
Go to next step: If between 8. 0-10. 5 V
If greater than 1 V
If less than 8 V
If less than 2 Ω, replace the vehicle K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
Repair Instructions

NO GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) RECEPTION

DTC Descriptors
DTC B2462 02
Global Positioning System (GPS) Signal Short to Ground
DTC B2462 04
85 of 177
Global Positioning System (GPS) Signal Open Circuit
The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module receives information from the GPS antenna located on the
outside of the vehicle. The GPS antenna is connected to the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module via
a shielded coaxial cable. The telematics communication interface control module supplies 5 V through the coax cable
to power the internal antenna amplifier.
• Ignition is in the RUN or ACC position.

• The above conditions are present for greater than 1 second.
B2462 02
The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module detects a short to ground on the GPS antenna signal
circuit.
B2462 04
The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module detects an open/high resistance on the GPS antenna signal
circuit.

• The OnStarÂ® Call Center cannot locate the vehicle.
• The K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module detects the presence of a GPS antenna.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
86 of 177
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
EL-49903 GM OnStar Antenna Diagnostic Tool Kit
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the GPS coax cable connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
2. Attach both leads of the EL-49903 - 1 OnStar test antenna to the EL-49903 - 5 combiner. Using the EL-49903
- 6 coax cable attach the grey connector to the combiner and the brown connector to the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition ON.
3. Verify DTC B2462 is not set or that the OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle.
If DTC B2462 is set or the advisor can not locate the vehicle
Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
Go to next step: If DTC B2462 is not set or that the OnStar advisor can locate the vehicle.
4. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the EL-49903-1 OnStar Test Antenna, Navn-Cell Comn from the K73
5. Disconnect the GPS coax cable at the T2RR Antenna - Roof Rear.
6. Test the coax cable between the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module and the T2RR
Antenna - Roof Rear. Refer to component testing.

Component Testing
reception issues.
Coax Cable Test

87 of 177
If 5 Ω or greater

If 5 Ω or greater


5. All OK.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for Telematics Communication Interface Control Module replacement,
ONSTAR BUTTON LED MALFUNCTION


10 V Reference B2476 02 B2476 04 B2476 04 -
Red LED Control Terminal 14 1 1 2 -
Green LED Control Terminal 15 1 1 2 -
Ground - B2476 04 - -
1. OnStarÂ® LED Inoperative
2. LED Illuminated At All Times
Circuit Description
The OnStarÂ® status LEDs are located with the OnStar buttons. The green LED is illuminated when the system is
ON and operating normally. When the green LED is green and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress.
When the red LED is illuminated, a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and the
OnStarÂ® system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call. The OnStarÂ® LEDs are
88 of 177
controlled by the telematics communication interface control module via the keypad green LED signal circuit and the
keypad red LED signal circuit.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: • If the green LED is off with the ignition ON and the LED does not function
when commanded with the scan tool, contact the OnStar Center to confirm the
vehicle has a current subscription.

2. Verify no DTCs are set.
If any DTCs are set
Go to next step: If no DTCs are set

3. Verify that the green LED turns ON and OFF when commanding the Green Indicator ON and OFF with a scan
tool.
If the green LED does not turn ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Green LED Test
Go to next step: If the green LED turns ON and OFF

4. Verify that the red LED turns ON and OFF when commanding the Red Indicator ON and OFF with a scan tool.
If the red LED does not turn ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Red LED Test
89 of 177
Go to next step: If the red LED turns ON and OFF
5. All OK.
Green LED Test
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A98 Front
Overhead Console. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Doors closed, courtesy
lamps OFF.
If 10 Ω or greater
4. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 15 and ground while commanding the Green
Indicator OFF with a scan tool.
If 1 V or greater
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 15 and ground.
5. Test for greater than 8 V between the control circuit terminal 15 and ground while commanding the Green
Indicator ON with a scan tool.
If 8 V or less
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal 15 and ground.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.
6. Test or replace the A98 Front Overhead Console.
Red LED Test
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF, and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A98 Front
Overhead Console. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Doors closed, courtesy
lamps OFF.
90 of 177
If 10 Ω or greater
4. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 14 and ground while commanding the Red Indicator
OFF with a scan tool.
If 1 V or greater
5. Test for greater than 8 V between the control circuit terminal 14 and ground while commanding the Red
Indicator ON with a scan tool.
If 8 V or less
6. Test or replace the A98 Front Overhead Console.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
ONSTAR CALL CENTER REMOTE FUNCTION REQUESTS MALFUNCTION

91 of 177
The telematics communication interface control module has the capability of commanding the horn, initiating door
lock/unlock, or operating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions are commanded by the
OnStarÂ® Call Center per a customer request.
Diagnostic Aids
The customer concern may have been due to a lack of cellular service in a given area, or a failure in the National
Cellular Network infrastructure that has since been corrected.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: • It is necessary to inform the OnStarÂ® Call Center advisor that this call is for
vehicle diagnostic purposes.
• It is necessary to have the vehicle in an open outside area where a cellular call
can be successfully placed and GPS data can be received from satellites.
1. Ignition ON/vehicle in Service Mode.

2. Verify that the horn, lights, and the door locks on the vehicle operate properly.
If an applicable vehicle system does not operate properly
Refer to Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle .
Go to next step: If all applicable vehicle systems operate properly

3. Verify that a call can be successfully placed to the OnStar Call Center by pressing the blue OnStar button.
If unable to contact the OnStarÂ® call center
92 of 177
Refer to Unable to Contact OnStar Call Center
Go to next step: If able to contact the OnStar Call Center

4. Verify with the OnStar advisor that all remote functions (door locks, lights, and horn) work.
If the remote functions do not operate when requested
Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
Go to next step: If the remote functions operate when requested

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement, programming and
setup.
ONSTAR BUTTON MALFUNCTION

DTC Descriptors
DTC B2476 04
Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Open
DTC B2476 59
Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Protection Time-out
DTC B2482 00
Cellular Phone Select Service Switch Range/Performance

10 V Reference B2476 02 B2476 04 B2476 04 -
B2476 59, B2482
Signal Terminal 17 B2476 02 B2476 04 B2476 59
00
Ground - B2476 04 - -
The OnStarÂ® button assembly consists of 3 buttons: Call/Answer, OnStarÂ® Call Center, and OnStarÂ®
Emergency. The telematics communication interface control module supplies the OnStarÂ® button assembly with 10
V via the 10 V reference circuit. Each of the buttons, when pressed, completes the circuit across a resistor allowing a
93 of 177
specific voltage to be returned to the telematics communication interface control module over the keypad signal
circuit. Depending upon the voltage range returned, the telematics communication interface control module is able to
identify which button has been pressed.
• Vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.

B2476 04
The telematics communication interface control module detects an open/high resistance on the keypad supply
voltage circuit.
B2482 and B2476 59
The telematics communication interface control module detects a valid signal on the keypad signal circuit for longer
than 15 s. If one of the OnStarÂ® buttons is held or stuck for 15 s or greater, the telematics communication interface
control module will set this DTC.

• No calls can be placed.
• The telematics communication interface control module will ignore all inputs from the OnStarÂ® button
assembly.

Diagnostic Aids
After any repair is made to the 10 V reference circuit or button signal circuit the fuse to the telematics
communication interface control module must be removed for 30 s to reset the control module. Failure to do so could
result in incorrect diagnosis.
Schematic Reference
94 of 177
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: • 10 V reference circuit measurement may vary with vehicle battery voltage.
• Test for voltage range with vehicle battery measuring at a minimum of 11.5 V
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A98 Front
Overhead Console Assembly. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
4. Test for 8. 0 - 10. 5 V between the 10 V reference circuit terminal 16 and ground.
If less than 8. 0 V
Go to next step: If between 8. 0 - 10. 5 V
6. Test for 500 - 900 Ω between the signal circuit terminal 17 and ground.
95 of 177
If less than 500 Ω
1. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module,
vehicle in Service Mode/Ignition ON.
3. Vehicle OFF.
7. Test or replace the A98 Front Overhead Console Assembly.
Repair Instructions

RADIO INFORMATION DISPLAY MALFUNCTION

assembly is supplied battery voltage and ground from the vehicle harness. The radio communicates digital video data
for on-screen display through a dedicated cable containing the LVDS data circuits.
data circuit to the radio.
Diagnostic Aids
Malfunctions may include a flickering or distorted image or a blank screen.
A momentary spike in volume upon start up may be due to the radio accessing the guest profile before switching to
an established customer user profile. The radio will remember the set volume level the last time it was shut down in
the guest profile mode, which is a normal operating characteristic. To alleviate the issues turn the radio on and
96 of 177
proceed to the guest profile. Turn the volume level down to a lower level and power down the vehicle, the radio will
retain the lower volume level upon the next start up.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the P17 Info Display Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle
systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the fuse is good
1. Vehicle OFF/Ignition OFF
If less than 2 Ω, verify there is voltage at the fuse. Refer to Power Mode Mismatch
5. Reconnect harness connector X1 at the P17 Info Display Module.
97 of 177
1. Engine running, parking brake applied, transmission in REVERSE.
2. Verify the P17 Info Display Module displays a rear view image.
If the P17 Info Display Module displays a rear view image.
Replace the A11 Radio
Go to next step: If the P17 Info Display Module does not display a rear view image.
3. Replace LVDS interface cable from the P17 Info Display Module to the A11 Radio.

Replace A11 Radio.
Go to next step: If the P17 Info Display Module displays an image.

8. All OK.
Repair Instructions
RADIO POOR RECEPTION

DTC Descriptors
DTC B125A 02
Antenna Signal Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B125A 04
Antenna Signal Circuit Open Circuit

98 of 177
Radio Antenna Coax B125A 02 B125A 04 1 -
1. May exhibit possible AM/FM interference.
The antenna amplifier receives both AM and FM signals from the antenna. The radio antenna amplifier is enabled
when the radio is turned on. The radio provides battery voltage to the antenna amplifier using the center conductor of
the antenna coaxial cable. When a 12 V signal is seen by the amplifier on the center conductor of the antenna coax,
both AM and FM signals are amplified.

B125A 02
The radio detects a short to ground in the antenna signal circuit center conductor.
B125A 04
The radio detects an open in the antenna signal circuit center conductor.

Diagnostic Aids
Poor AM and FM radio reception may be due to multiple influences, some of which may not be vehicle related.
Areas which have high RF traffic or block the signal path may cause a degradation in radio reception. Radio
reception may also be influenced by items within the vehicle, but not part of the radio system. Such examples are
aftermarket electrical accessories or other items which may generate noise in the vehicle electrical system.
Aftermarket window tinting, especially when there is a metallic in the film, may reduce radio reception.
AM reception is highly dependent on the antenna amplifier receiving battery voltage from the radio and being
properly grounded. The antenna amplifier boosts both AM and FM reception. When the antenna amplifier does not
receive power, AM stations may not be received and FM reception will be limited. If the amplifier is not properly
grounded, excessive interference in the signal may occur, or reception may be limited.
Schematic Reference
99 of 177
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the radio antenna coax cable from the A11 Radio and from the T23
Radio Antenna Amplifier.

3. Connect the antenna coax cable to the A11 Radio. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, A11 Radio ON.

Component Testing
reception issues.
Coax Cable Test
100 of 177
If 5 Ω or greater

If 5 Ω or greater


5. All OK
Repair Instructions
• Radio Antenna Amplifier Replacement

SPEAKER REPLACEMENT REFERENCE
Component Repair Instruction

Front Door Speakers Radio Front Side Door Speaker Replacement
Center I/P Speaker Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement
Front I/P Tweeter Speaker Radio Front Speaker Replacement
Rear Trim Speakers Radio Quarter Speaker Replacement
Rear Door Speakers Radio Rear Side Door Speaker Replacement
SPEAKER MALFUNCTION (UQS)

DTC Descriptors
DTC B1025
101 of 177
DTC B1045
DTC B1065
DTC B1075
DTC B1085
DTC B1095
DTC B1105
DTC B1115

B1025 02 B1025 04 B1025 01 -
Front Door and Tweeter)
B1045 02 B1045 04 B1045 01 -
(Right Front Door and Tweeter)
B1065 02 B1065 04 B1065 01 -
(Center I/P)
B1075 02 B1075 04 B1075 01 -
and Right Rear Surround Speakers)
B1085 02 B1085 04 B1085 01 -
Rear Door and Tweeter)
B1095 02 B1095 04 B1095 01 -
(Right Rear Door and Tweeter)
B1105 02 B1105 04 B1105 01 -
I/P)
B1115 02 B1115 04 B1115 01 -
(Right I/P)
The Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST) is a high-speed multimedia network technology. The serial MOST
bus uses a ring topology and synchronous data communication to transmit audio, video, data and control information
102 of 177
between any devices attached.
The audio amplifier is a participant on the MOST network. The audio amplifier receives audio inputs and control
information from the MOST bus.
measure approximately 6. 5V DC. The audio being played on the system is produced by a varying AC voltage that is
and produce sound.
Diagnostic Aids
NOTE: DTC B1325 must not be set as current for the amplifier to run any of the following
tests.
DTC B1025 01, B1045 01, B1065 01, B1075 01, B1085 01, B1095 01, B1105 01, B1115 01
DTC B1025 02, B1045 02, B1065 02, B1075 02, B1085 02, B1095 02, B1105 02, B1115 02
DTC B1025 04, B1045 04, B1065 04, B1075 04, B1085 04, B1095 04, B1105 04, B1115 04
The test is run once during amplifier wake-up.
DTC B1025 01, B1045 01, B1065 01, B1075 01, B1085 01, B1095 01, B1105 01, B1115 01
A short to voltage is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit
DTC B1025 02, B1045 02, B1065 02, B1075 02, B1085 02, B1095 02, B1105 02, B1115 02
A short to ground is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit
DTC B1025 04, B1045 04, B1065 04, B1075 04, B1085 04, B1095 04, B1105 04, B1115 04
An open is detected on the specified (+) or (-) signal circuit
103 of 177
The amplifier mutes the output channel and no sound is present from the speaker (s) that have a current circuit fault.

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools

individually.

3. All OK.
NOTE: Some circuits supply audio signals to more than one speaker. It may be
necessary to disconnect all speakers on the affected audio circuit when
performing circuit tests.
104 of 177
2. Test for 5 - 7 V between the appropriate signal circuit terminals listed below and ground.
• door, tweeter, surround, subwoofer, and I/P speakers audio (-) circuit terminal 1
• door, tweeter, surround, subwoofer, and I/P speakers audio (+) circuit terminal 2
If less than 5 V
If greater than 7 V
Go to next step: If 5 - 7 V
Repair Instructions

SPEAKER MALFUNCTION (UQG)


1 1 1, 2 -
(Left Front Door)
1 1 1, 2 -
(Right Front Door)
1 1 1, 2 -
(Left Front I/P)
1 1 1, 2 -
(Center I/P)
1 1 1, 2 -
(Right Front I/P)
105 of 177
1 1 1, 2 -
(Left Rear Door)
1 1 1, 2 -
(Right Rear Door)
1. No or reduced audio from speaker (s) on the affected audio circuit.
2. Noticeable audio distortion may be present.
and produce sound. The frequency (Hz) of the AC voltage signal is directly related to the frequency of the input
(audio source playing) to the audio system. Both the DC bias voltage and the AC voltage signals are needed for the
audio system to properly produce sound.
Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
106 of 177
Special Tools

individually.

3. All OK.
One Speaker
2. Test for 5 - 7 V between each audio signal circuit terminal 1 and terminal 2 and ground.
If less than 5 V
If greater than 7 V
3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector at the T3 Audio Amplifier.
4. Ignition ON, A11 Radio ON, mute OFF. Test for 5 - 7 V between each appropriate audio signal circuit from
the A11 Radio and Ground.
If less than 5 V
1. Ignition OFF, Disconnect the appropriate speaker harness connector at the A11 Radio.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuits and ground.
107 of 177
If greater than 7 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate speaker harness connector at the A11 Radio. Ignition ON.
All Speakers
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the T3 Audio Amplifier.

If 10 Ω or greater
1. Remove the test lamp.
4. Disconnect the X2 harness connector at the T3 Audio Amplifier.
5. Ignition ON, A11 Radio ON.
6. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal 6 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2B harness connector at the A11 Radio.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.
7. Test for 5 - 7 V between any audio signal circuit from the A11 Radio and Ground.
If not between 5 - 7 V
Test or replace the A11 Radio.
108 of 177
8. Test or replace the T3 Audio Amplifier.
Repair Instructions

UNABLE TO CONTACT ONSTAR CALL CENTER

DTC Descriptors
DTC B2470 02
Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Short to Ground
DTC B2470 04
Cellular Phone Antenna Circuit Malfunction Open Circuit
The primary cellular phone antenna element is connected to the telematics communication interface control module
(violet connector) via a shielded coaxial cable. Cellular communication takes place on both the primary cellular
antenna signal circuit and the GPS/secondary cellular antenna signal circuit. This diagnostic only applies to the
primary cellular antenna signal circuit. Internal to the antenna on the cellular antenna signal circuit resistance is used
to apply a load, which the telematics communication interface control module uses to detect the presence of the
antenna.
• Ignition in the RUN or ACC position.

B2470 02
The telematics communication interface control module detects a short to ground on the primary cellular antenna
signal circuit.
B2470 04
• The telematics communication interface control module detects an open or high resistance on the primary
cellular antenna signal circuit.
109 of 177
• The telematics communication interface control module detects the presence of a cellular antenna.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn
NOTE: • The vehicle may be equipped with sectioned coax. Test each section and
replace only the faulty section, not the entire length of coax.
• The following verification requires the vehicle to be outside with an
unobstructed view of the southern sky. Allow 5 min after turning the ignition
ON for the GPS satellites to acquire vehicle signal.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the violet primary cellular coax cable
connector at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all
vehicle systems to power down.
2. Using the EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn connect the violet coax cable to the K73 Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. Place the test antenna on the roof of the vehicle, ignition
ON/vehicle in Service Mode.
110 of 177
3. Verify the DTC does not set or a call can be completed to the OnStar Call Center while operating the vehicle
within the conditions for running the DTC.
If the DTC sets or a call can not be completed to the OnStar Call Center
Replace the K73 Telematics Communications Interface Control Module.
Go to next step: If the DTC does not set or a call can be completed to the OnStar Call Center
5. Disconnect the EL-49903-1 Test Antenna Navn-Cell Comn from the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module
6. Test the coax cable. Refer to Component Testing.

Component Testing
reception issues.
Coax Cable Test
If 5 Ω or greater

If 5 Ω or greater


4. All OK.
111 of 177
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module replacement, setup, and
programming
NAVIGATION SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (AND SD CARD ERRORS)
For issues with the Navigation system follow the steps below before proceeding to the error code chart:
• Verify the radio has the latest software installed

• Verify the SD Card is fully installed and seated into the SD Card slot
• Verify the SD Card installed in the vehicle has the correct region and part number
• Verify nothing is plugged into any of the infotainment USB ports. An unapproved device or cable could cause
false error codes to set.
• Check for DTC's, if any are present diagnose those first Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
• Test the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input, and if equipped the X92 USB Receptacle with a compatible USB device
for audio playback.
If no audio is heard refer to Auxiliary Audio Input Malfunction
• Ensure the SD Card is not removed with the ignition ON, this can corrupt the SD Card and cause navigation
related errors. Only remove the card with the key off and the driver's door open, which will cancel Retained
Accessory Power.
• Ensure that SD Cards are not swapped from vehicle to vehicle, SD Cards are VIN specific.
• If the Read/Write (Lock) switch on the side of the SD card is in the incorrect position any of the following
notification messages may repetitively appear on the instrument cluster driver information center (DIC) and/or
the radio display- "SD Card Error - Launch Nav on Radio for details" or "Nav SD Card Message - Once
initialized, this NAV SD card can only be used for navigation in this vehicle" or "Navigation Service Expired"
and a loss of the current navigation route may be experienced if the ignition is cycled. If the switch is in the
Read-only/locked (down) position then this may be the reason for the messages. The switch needs to be placed
in the Write/unlocked position (up towards the contacts). After placing the switch in the correct position, re-
insert the SD card, wait for the vehicle go to sleep, and verify the condition is no longer present. Be careful to
insert the SD card straight on into the slot, if inserted from the side the switch may contact the side of the slot
and dislodge it from the Write/unlocked position. Be sure to emphasize to the customer the SD card should not
be removed from the SD card slot.
In the event of an error code being displayed on the Radio Information Display the information below can assist in
diagnosing the issue
The following is an example of how to analyze the error code:
Example error code: 0x1. 9845. 9876. 1123. 9876
• 0x1 - Error code (see reference table)

• 9845 - Last 4 digits of originally paired VIN or "0x" if the value is null
• 9876 - Last 4 digits of originally paired SD Card ID or "0x" if value is null
• 1123 - Last 4 digits of currently obtained VIN or "0x" if the value is null
112 of 177
• 9876 - Last 4 digits of currently obtained SD Card ID or "0x" if the value is null
In this example the SD Card is paired to a vehicle with VIN ending in 9845 but it is installed in a vehicle with VIN
ending in 1123. Therefore, the SD Card is not valid and cannot be used for the vehicle with VIN ending with 1123.
The table below contains the error messages and error codes displayed on the Radio Information Display and the
recommended action.
NOTE: Before proceeding to the error code chart below, perform the bullet point items at
the beginning of this document.
Navigation Error Codes

Action
Information Display Error Code
SD card is not functioning Replace A11 Radio
0x4
properly
Replace SD Card
Click on the Navigation icon to load the
application
If error code returns replace the X83
SD card is not functioning Auxiliary Audio Input
0x8
properly Test the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input with
with a compatible USB device for audio
playback
If error code returns replace the A11
Radio
Replace SD Card
Please restart Nav app to application
0x20000
dismiss the error
If error code returns replace the X83
Auxiliary Audio Input
Replace X83 Auxiliary Audio Input

Test the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input with a
compatible USB device for audio
playback
If error code returns, replace the USB
cable between the X83 Auxiliary Audio
0x8000 Input and the A11 Radio
SD Card has been removed Test the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input with a
playback
If the error code returns replace the SD
Card.
Replace X83 Auxiliary Audio Input

0x40000
Test the X83 Auxiliary Audio Input with a
113 of 177
Action
Information Display Error Code
playback
If error code returns replace X92
Test the X83 and X92 Auxiliary Audio
Input with a compatible USB device for
audio playback
If error code returns replace the A11
Radio
Verify the region is correct on the SD

Card, if incorrect replace SD Card with
the correct region
0x1 Verify the correct SD Card part number is
being used, if incorrect replace the SD
Card with the correct part number
Replace the SD Card

0x40 application
0x80
If the error code returns replace the X83
This SD card is not valid in this
vehicle for this navigation.
0x100 Replace the SD Card
Contact Dealer
0x200
0x400 Replace the A11 Radio
Replace the SD Card

0x10000 application
If the error code returns replace the X83
Check connections at all USB ports, if no

0x40040 issues found replace SD Card
Repair Instructions
• For control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to: Control Module References
VOICE RECOGNITION MALFUNCTION

114 of 177
When voice recognition for the infotainment system is started, voice signals from the cellular phone microphone are
passed through the telematics communication interface control module to the Radio via the voice recognition audio
circuits.
Diagnostic Aids
• Refer to the Owners Manual and/or the Navigation System Owners Manual for voice recognition use and
commands.
• When the system recognizes the command the system will either perform the function or ask to confirm the
choice by clearly saying "yes" or "no".
• If experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing a command, confirm that the command is correct.
• Background noise such as a climate control fan positioned on high, open windows, or very loud outside noises,
can cause voice commands to be misunderstood.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: For detailed component/system information, refer to the following Owner/User

Manual section: Voice Recognition - Helpful Hints for Speaking Commands
1. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode. Infotainment system ON.

2. Press the steering wheel controls voice recognition button and clearly speak an available voice command.
3. Verify the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to the command.
115 of 177
1. Clearly speak a different command.
If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to any commands, refer to Circuit/System
Testing.
Go to next step: If the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
3. Refer to the Owners Manual and/or the Navigation System Owners Manual for hints on speaking
commands.
Go to next step: If the infotainment system responds correctly to the command.
4. All OK
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2A harness connector at the A11 Radio.
Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal listed below and ground.
• Voice recognition audio signal terminal 14
• Voice recognition audio low reference terminal 15
If 1 V greater
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit.

4. Ignition OFF.
5. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuits listed below and ground:
• Voice recognition audio signal terminal 14
• Voice recognition audio low reference terminal 15
Repair the short to ground on the circuit.

6. Test for less than 5 Ω between the terminals listed below:
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module signal circuit terminal 15 X1 and the other
end of the circuit.
• K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module low reference circuit terminal 14 X1 and the
other end of the circuit.
If 5 Ω greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.

7. Replace the A11 Radio. Connect all harness connectors.
NOTE: Refer to the Owners Manual and/or the Navigation System Owners Manual for
voice recognition use and commands.
8. Begin voice recognition for the infotainment system and clearly speak one of the available commands.
116 of 177
If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to the command
1. Clearly speak a different command.
If the infotainment system does not respond correctly to any commands, replace the K73
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
Go to next step: If the infotainment system responds correctly to the command
10. All OK
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for Radio or telematics communication interface control replacement, programming
and setup.
SD CARD SETUP
After a new SD Card has been installed, whether if be for the first time during new car prep or a replacement part for
service, a series of on screen questions will need to be answered to properly setup the new SD Card. Failure to
answer the questions correctly will result in the Navigation system being inoperative. Follow the steps below:
NOTE: Do not remove the SD Card with the ignition ON as this could corrupt the SD
Card and cause navigation related errors.
NOTE: Do not swap SD Cards from vehicle to vehicle, SD Cards are VIN specific.
NOTE: When inserting the SD card ensure the read/write switch on the side of the
card is in the UP position (towards the contacts). Insert the card straight and
not at an angle to ensure the card does not rub on the side of the slot
changing the position on the switch. If the switch is in the incorrect (down)
position unexpected messages and a loss of navigation features may occur.
1. Ignition OFF
2. Remove the old SD Card from the SD Card slot if needed, insert the new SD Card into the slot making sure it
is fully seated.
4. The first screen to appear will read, Access and Input Data Permissions. Select Show Permissions
5. The next 4 screens will ask for certain access and permission. Select ALLOW on all screens.
NOTE: If DENY is selected on any screen the Navigation system will be inoperative.
6. If successful, the last screen will display a Navigation Map.
BACKUP BATTERY RESET
The Backup Battery Timer Reset needs to be performed anytime a new OnStar backup battery is replaced. The
OnStar module monitors certain elements of the backup battery (including age) and failure to perform this reset
procedure could result in future needless replacement of the backup battery.
1. Using a scan tool, in the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module under Configuration/Reset
117 of 177
Functions perform the Backup Battery Timer Reset procedure.
2. Follow the scan tool directions to complete the procedure.
3. At the end of the procedure clear any DTC's
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
MOBILE TELEPHONE MICROPHONE REPLACEMENT
Callout Component Name

Preliminary Procedure
Roof Console Replacement
Mobile Telephone Microphone
1 Procedure
Release the retaining tabs.
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE MICROPHONE REPLACEMENT

118 of 177
Communication Interface Module Microphone
1 Procedure
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE REPLACEMENT

Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator Replacement - Left Side
Communication Interface Module
Procedure
1 1. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
2. Release the retaining tabs.
3. Perform the necessary programming and setup procedure: Control Module References
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE BATTERY REPLACEMENT
119 of 177
Communication Interface Module Replacement
Communication Interface Module Battery Bolt
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Communication Interface Module Battery
2 Procedure
Perform the backup battery reset. Backup Battery Reset
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator-Left Side (2) - Remove - Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel
Insulator Replacement - Left Side
2.
120 of 177
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Access Hole Cover (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Fuse Block Access Hole
Cover Replacement
3.
Instrument Panel Upper Trim Panel (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Upper Trim Panel Replacement
4.
Communication Interface Module Bracket Bolt (1) - Remove
5.
121 of 177
Communication Interface Module Bracket Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
6. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring harness as necessary.
7. Communication Interface Module Bracket (2) - Remove
8. Transfer components as necessary.
Installation Procedure
1.
Communication Interface Module Bracket (2) - Install
2. Attach the wiring harness and connect the electrical connectors as necessary.
CAUTION: Fastener Caution
3. Communication Interface Module Bracket Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
4.
Communication Interface Module Bracket Bolt (1) - Install and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
5.
122 of 177
Instrument Panel Upper Trim Panel (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Upper Trim Panel Replacement
6.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Access Hole Cover (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Fuse Block Access Hole
Cover Replacement
7.
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator-Left Side (2) - Install - Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel
Insulator Replacement - Left Side
123 of 177
RADIO BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Instrument Panel Compartment Door Replacement
Radio Bracket Bolt [3x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Bracket
Procedure
2
1. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring harness as necessary.
RADIO REPLACEMENT
124 of 177
Preliminary Procedures
1. Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator Replacement - Right Side

2. Instrument Panel Lower Airbag Replacement - Passenger Side
Radio
Procedure
RADIO CONTROL ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement - Right Side
125 of 177
Radio Control Bolt [4x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Control Assembly
Procedure
2
1. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE GRILLE REPLACEMENT

Active Noise Cancellation Microphone Grille [4x]
1 Procedure
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION MICROPHONE REPLACEMENT
126 of 177
It is only necessary to lower the headlining. Only do those steps in the headlining procedure that will allow
access to the component being removed. Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (With C3U) , or Headlining
Trim Panel Replacement (Without C3U)
Active Noise Cancellation Microphone [4x]
Procedure
1
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
RADIO SPEAKER AMPLIFIER REPLACEMENT

Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel Replacement
Radio Speaker Amplifier Nut [3x]
1
CAUTION:
127 of 177
Fastener
Caution
Tighten
6 N.m (53 lb in)
Radio Speaker Amplifier
Procedure
2
MULTIMEDIA RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT

Front Floor Console Trim Plate Replacement
Multimedia Receptacle
Procedure
1
RADIO ANTENNA AMPLIFIER REPLACEMENT
128 of 177
Liftgate Upper Center Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Radio Antenna Amplifier Bolt
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
Radio Antenna Amplifier
2 Procedure
Disconnect the electrical connectors.
RADIO AM ANTENNA SIGNAL FILTER MODULE REPLACEMENT

Liftgate Upper Center Trim Finish Panel Replacement
129 of 177
Radio AM Antenna Signal Filter Module Bolt
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
Radio AM Antenna Signal Filter Module
Procedure
2
INFOTAINMENT CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT

Infotainment Control Switch
1 Procedure
RADIO FRONT CENTER SPEAKER REPLACEMENT
130 of 177
Radio Front Center Speaker Grille Replacement
Radio Front Center Speaker Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Front Center Speaker
2 Procedure
Disconnect the electrical connector.
RADIO FRONT CENTER SPEAKER GRILLE REPLACEMENT

Radio Front Center Speaker Grille
1 Procedure
131 of 177
Use a flat bladed plastic tool to remove.
RADIO FRONT SPEAKER REPLACEMENT

Instrument Panel Extension Replacement (UV6) , or Instrument Panel Extension Replacement (UEU) ,
or Instrument Panel Extension Replacement (Base)
Radio Front Speaker Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Front Speaker
2 Procedure
WINDSHIELD SIDE GARNISH MOLDING SPEAKER GRILLE REPLACEMENT
132 of 177
Windshield Garnish Molding Replacement
Windshield Side Garnish Molding Speaker Grille
1 Procedure
HIGH FREQUENCY ANTENNA REPLACEMENT

It is only necessary to lower the headlining. Only do those steps in the headlining procedure that will allow
access to the component being removed. Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (With C3U) , or Headlining
Trim Panel Replacement (Without C3U)
High Frequency Antenna Bolt
CAUTION:
1 Fastener
Caution
133 of 177
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
High Frequency Antenna Retainer
NOTE:
Install a
2 NEW
retainer. Do
NOT reuse
the old
retainer.
High Frequency Antenna
Procedure

2. Fully remove the old bolt and retainer prior to removing antenna through roof.
3. New antenna bolt and retainer will fit through roof opening prior to tightening the bolt and
compressing the retainer.
RADIO QUARTER SPEAKER REPLACEMENT

Quarter Upper Trim Panel Replacement
Quarter Window Trim Finish Panel Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
134 of 177
2 Radio Quarter Speaker
RADIO FRONT SIDE DOOR SPEAKER REPLACEMENT

Front Side Door Trim Replacement
Radio Front Side Door Speaker Bolt
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Front Side Door Speaker
Procedure
2
2. Reposition the wiring harness.
RADIO CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT - STEERING WHEEL

Removal Procedure
1.
135 of 177
Remove the steering wheel airbag access hole cover (1). Steering Wheel Airbag Access Hole Cover
Replacement
2. Steering Wheel Airbag - Remove - Steering Wheel Airbag Replacement
3.
Remove the steering wheel. (1) Steering Wheel Replacement
4.
136 of 177
Steering Wheel Shroud (1) - Remove - Steering Wheel Shroud Replacement
5.
NOTE: Use a flat bladed plastic tool to release the manual shift auxiliary position
switch retaining tabs.
Remove the manual shift auxiliary position switch -steering wheel (1). Automatic Transmission Manual
Shift Auxiliary Position Switch Replacement (Tap up) , or Automatic Transmission Manual Shift
Auxiliary Position Switch Replacement (Tap down)
6.
Remove the steering wheel radio control switch bracket screw (1).
7.
137 of 177
8. Radio Control Switch- Steering Wheel (1) - Remove
9.
Remove the 3 steering wheel radio control switch screws (3).
10. Remove the steering wheel radio control switch (1) from the steering wheel radio control switch bracket (2).
1.
138 of 177
Install the steering wheel radio control switch (1) to the steering wheel radio control switch bracket (2).
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution .
2. Install the 3 steering wheel radio control switch screws (3) and tighten to 1.1 N.m (8 lb in).
3.
Radio Control Switch- Steering Wheel (1) - Install
4. Connect the electrical connector.
5.
139 of 177
Install the steering wheel radio control switch bracket screw (1) and tighten to 1.1 N.m (8 lb in).
6.
Install the manual shift auxiliary position switch -steering wheel (1). Automatic Transmission Manual Shift
Auxiliary Position Switch Replacement (Tap up) , or Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Auxiliary
Position Switch Replacement (Tap down)
7.
Steering Wheel Shroud (1) - Install - Steering Wheel Shroud Replacement
140 of 177
8.
Install the steering wheel. (1) Steering Wheel Replacement
9. Steering Wheel Airbag - Install - Steering Wheel Airbag Replacement
10.
Install the steering wheel airbag access hole cover (1). Steering Wheel Airbag Access Hole Cover
Replacement
RADIO REAR SIDE DOOR SPEAKER REPLACEMENT
141 of 177
Rear Side Door Trim Replacement
Radio Rear Side Door Speaker Bolt
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Radio Rear Side Door Speaker
Procedure
2

ONSTAR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (UI3)
The Emergency Road Assistance Global Navigation Satellite System (ERA GLONASS) consists of the following
components:
• Telematics communication interface control module

• Telematics two button assembly
• Microphone
• Cellular antenna
• GPS antenna
• Back up battery
• Backup speaker
142 of 177
This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system.
The ERA Glonass system uses Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) to communicate data and voice
signals over the national cellular network. The module is capable of up to 3G speeds and houses 2 technology
systems, one to process Global Positioning System (GPS/Glonass) data, and another for cellular information.
The telematics communication interface control module has two antenna inputs, a cellular signal and a GPS/Glonass
signal. The ERA Glonass system uses the Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS), which is a combination of
United States Global Positioning System (GPS) signals and Russian Glonass satellite system. GPS/Glonass signals
are used to provide location on demand.
Dedicated circuits are used to connect the telematics communication interface control module to a microphone,
button assembly, radio, backup speaker and Back Up Battery (BUB). The telematics communication interface control
module communicates with the rest of the vehicle over the single wired low speed CAN bus. Power is provided by a
dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached to the module. The
power mode state is determined by the telematics communication interface control module through serial data
messaging. The telematics communication interface control module will power down 3 seconds after the button
assembly LED shuts off.
ERA Glonass Two Button Assembly
The two button assembly may be part of the rear view mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button assembly is
comprised of 2 buttons and one status LED. The buttons are defined as follows:
The "SOS" button, when pressed allows the user to start a manual emergency call.
The TEST button, which has two functions. First it allows the user to cancel an emergency call before the call
has been established with the call center. Second, if pressed longer than 4 seconds allows the user to enter the
system test mode.
When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific voltage to be returned to the
telematics communication interface control module on the keypad signal circuit. Depending on the voltage range
returned the module is able to identify which button has been pressed.
The status LED is located near the buttons on the button assembly. The LED is green when the system is ON and
operating normally. When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. When the LED is
illuminated and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress. In the event there is a malfunction and the
system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call however, the call functionally might be
limited related to the issue that is present. During night mode the module provides a PWM signal to dim the
brightness of the LED.
When the "SOS" button is pressed the LED will start blinking green and a voice prompt will instruct the customer to
either press the "SOS" button again to continue with the emergency call, or press the "TEST" button to cancel. If the
user does not press either of the buttons in a certain amount of time the module will go back into standby mode and
inform the customer via a voice prompt.
In the case of a callback from the call center the LED will be solid red or green. A solid red LED indicates an
emergency call related DTC has been set by the telematics communication interface control module, otherwise the
LED will be solid green.
After a call to the call center the module will stay in callback mode for 20 minutes with the ignition ON of OFF and
the LED will be on solid during this time. After 20 minutes there will be a voice prompt and the LED will turn off.
After that the module will stay registered to the network for an additional 100 minutes.
143 of 177
ERA Glonass Test Mode
After entering Test Mode the telematics communication interface control module will test the functionally of the
keypad, LED indicator, microphone, and audio. At the end of Test Mode the module will send a Minimum Set of
Data (MSD) message to the call center.
The MSD message contains control data, vehicle information, direction, position and time. When an emergency call
is connected to the call center the MSD message is sent by in-band transmission by default. In the event in-band
transmission is unsuccessful, Short Message Service (SMS) will be used as a backup.
To enter the Test Mode turn ignition ON and make sure the vehicle has not moved for at least 1 minute, then press
and hold the TEST button for longer than 4 seconds. A series of voice prompts will instruct the user to perform
certain functions. At the end of Test Mode one of two messages will be played, TEST OK or Emergency Call System
Test Indicates a Failure.
Microphone
The microphone is located in the headliner or roof console. The telematics communication interface control module
supplies approximately 10V to the microphone on the microphone signal circuit. The microphone modifies the 10V
depending on the volume and voice being detected. A microphone low reference circuit or a drain wire provides a
ground for the microphone. The microphone signal circuits pass through the telematics communication interface
control module to support entertainment voice recognition. Thus, the module uses the same microphone as the
infotainment system. In the event the infotainment system uses two microphones only one will pass through the
telematics communication interface control module.
Cellular and GPS/Glonass Antennas
The antenna will have any of the following functions when equipped with ERA Glonass:
• Input cellular element

• Output cellular element
• GPS/Glonass element
The ERA Glonass system uses the input and output cellular antenna elements to send and receive cellular data. The
cellular signal is carried by a coax cable that connects the antenna directly to the telematics communication interface
control module.
The GPS/Glonass antenna element is used to collect the signals of the orbiting satellites. The GPS/Glonass signal is
carried by a coax cable that connects directly to the telematics communication interface control module.
Back-up Battery
NOTE: Do not disconnect the main vehicle battery or remove the telematics fuse with the
ignition key in any position other than OFF. Disconnecting power to the telematics
communication interface control module in any way while the ignition is ON or with
retained accessory power activated may cause activation of the Back-Up Battery.
This action is per design as the back-up battery is designed to provide power to the
telematics communication interface control module so an emergency notification
call can be made after an event where the main battery is disabled or unable to
supply sufficient voltage to drive the module. The telematics communication
interface control module naturally chooses the main supply voltage as it's default
supply. If an emergency call is active, or the network de-registration timer has not
expired, and the main supply is removed or lost for any reason the module will use
the Back-Up Battery as a power supply to continue the emergency call as long as
144 of 177
the default supply can not be detected. If the module is in standby mode and the
vehicle battery is disconnected the module will switch to the backup battery for
three seconds. If there is no collision event or emergency button press within the
three seconds the module will switch off to prevent damage to the backup battery.
The back-up battery is not rechargeable and must be replaced if the diagnostics for
the DTC (Replace Backup Power Source) indicate it is needed.
Audio System Interface
In the case of an emergency call the radio is muted and the telematics communication interface control module will
use the external backup speaker which is connected directly to the module.
ERA Glonass Limitations
The proper operation of the ERA Glonass system is dependent on several elements outside the components
integrated into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure and the GPS/Glonass.
Making an SOS key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will
result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the Call
Center. In this case the module will uses backup mechanism to store the MSD message into history. When the
module succeeds in connecting to the network the stored MSD message will be sent to the call center.
ONSTAR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (UE1)
This OnStarÂ® system consists of the following components:
• Telematics communication interface control module

• OnStarÂ® three button assembly
• Microphones
• Cellular antenna
• Navigation antenna
• Back up battery
• WiFi Support
• TTY (Teletypewriter)
• FOTA (Firmware Over The Air)
This system also interfaces with the factory installed vehicle audio system.
The OnStar Telecommunications Platform (TCP) system communicates with various infotainment components via
Ethernet. The OnStar TCP uses Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) to communicate data and voice
signals over the national cellular network. The telematics communication interface control module supports
entertainment WiFi hotspots by providing a connection to the cellular network for Internet access. The module is
capable of up to 4G LTE speeds and houses 2 technology systems, one to process Global Positioning System (GPS)
data, and another for cellular information. The module sends and receives all cellular communications over two
cellular antennas and cellular antenna coax cables.
The OnStar TCP system has two antenna inputs, a primary cellular signal and a combined GPS/secondary cellular
signal. OnStar can receive signals from multiple global navigation satellite systems, including the United States
developed Global Positioning System (GPS) and Russian developed Global Navigation Satellite System
(GLONASS).
145 of 177
The module also has the capability of activating certain features such as, the horn, remote engine starting, initiating
door lock/unlock, or activating the exterior lamps using the serial data circuits. These functions can be commanded
by the OnStarÂ® Call Center per a customer request or mobile device app depending on vehicle and customer
subscription.
Dedicated circuits are used to connect the telematics communication interface control module to a microphone, the
button assembly, and radio. When equipped, the telematics communication interface control module may contain a
back up battery (BUB) which is internal to the control module and replaceable through an access cover. The
telematics communication interface control module communicates with the rest of the vehicle over the serial data bus
and Ethernet.
Power is provided by a dedicated, fused B+ circuit. Ground is provided through the vehicle wiring harness attached
to the module. The power mode state is determined by the telematics communication interface control module
through serial data messaging.
OnStarÂ® Three Button Assembly
• The OnStarÂ® button assembly may be part of the rearview mirror, or a separate, stand alone unit. The button
assembly is comprised of 3 buttons or 3 capacitive touch buttons and status LED's or an error indicator. The
buttons are defined as follows:
The answer/end button, which is black with a white phone icon or a white driver figure seated with voice
signals near its face, allows the user to answer and end calls or initiate speech recognition.
The blue OnStarÂ® call center button, which displays the OnStarÂ® logo, allows the user to connect to
the OnStarÂ® call center.
The emergency button, which displays white letters "SOS" with red background, sends a high priority
emergency call to the OnStarÂ® call center when pressed.
If the LED does not illuminate, this may indicate that the customers OnStarÂ® subscription is not active or has
expired. Push the blue OnStar button to connect to an advisor who can then verify the account status.
The telematics communication interface control module supplies 10 volts to the OnStarÂ® button assembly on the
keypad supply voltage circuit. When pressed, each button completes a circuit across a resistor allowing a specific
voltage to be returned to the telematics communication interface control module on the keypad signal circuit.
Depending upon the voltage range returned the telematics communication interface control module is able to identify
which button has been pressed.
The OnStarÂ® status LED or error indicator is located near the buttons. The LED is green when the system is ON
and operating normally. When any indicator is illuminated and flashing, it is an indication that a call is in progress.
When the LED is red, this indicates a system malfunction is present. In the event there is a system malfunction and
the OnStarÂ® system is still able to make a call, the LED will flash red during the call.
Each LED or error indicator is controlled by either the telematics communication interface control module over
dedicated LED signal circuits or by low speed GM LAN serial data depending on the inside rearview mirror option.
Ground for the LED is provided by the wiring harness attached to the button assembly.
Secondary OnStarÂ® Controls
Some vehicles may have an additional button that when pushed can engage the OnStarÂ® system. The button may
be a symbol of a face with sound waves, or may say MUTE, or be a symbol of a radio speaker with a slash through
it.
By engaging the OnStarÂ® system with this feature, the user can interact with the system by use of voice
commands. A complete list of these commands is supplied in the information provided to the customer. If the
146 of 177
information is not available for reference, at any command prompt the user can say "HELP" and the telematics
communication interface control module will return an audible list of available commands.
Microphones
This system utilizes two hands free audio microphones, the primary microphone on the driver side and a
secondary/reference microphone for the front passenger side. The primary microphone is connected directly to the
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. It is also connected by an analog pass-through circuit to the
radio from the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. The secondary microphone is connected
directly to the radio.
The primary microphone is used for emergency and OnStar calls. During normal operating conditions it also
provides Bluetooth calls and speech recognition to the radio. The secondary microphone is used as a reference for the
primary microphone for Barge-in and Passenger Interference Cancellation during speech recognition and also to
enhance the driver side hands free calls. For MY18 and beyond the secondary microphone can also be used for front
passenger hands free phone calls. Barge-in allows a user to speak over the system prompts. Passenger Interference
Cancellation ignores unwanted inputs from cabin noise that is not related to the prompts given by the user.
The front passenger secondary microphone is never used as a direct source for an OnStar call. The second
microphone input modifies the primary microphone input to reduce background noise and other interference. An
OnStar call requires the microphone to be directly connected to the Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module. During a normal (non-emergency) OnStar call the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
receives an audio signal from the primary microphone and sends the signal to the radio via the Ethernet connection.
The radio processes the OnStar call audio and sends it back to the Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module via the Ethernet connection. During an emergency button call the Telematics Communication Interface
Control Module contacts the OnStar call center directly and does not send the signal to the radio.
Cellular and GPS Antennas
The combination antenna will have any of the following antenna elements when equipped with OnStar:
• Primary cellular element

• Secondary cellular element
• GPS element
• Digital radio element
• AM/FM element
The OnStarÂ® TCP system uses 2 cellular antenna elements to send and receive cellular data, the primary cellular
element and the secondary cellular element. The primary cellular signal is carried by a coax cable that connects the
antenna directly to the telematics communication interface control module. Details of the secondary cellular signal
are further described below.
The GPS antenna element is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. GPS signals are output from the
telematics communication interface control module on Ethernet or GMLAN. Other modules on Ethernet may use the
GPS latitude, longitude and satellite time data broadcast by the telematics communication interface control module.
Using positioning information from the vehicle Ethernet avoids the use of a coaxial signal splitter to pass the analog
GPS signal to other modules. Within the antenna is housed a low noise amplifier that allows for a more broad and
precise reception of this data. Also housed within the antenna is circuitry to combine the GPS signal and the
secondary cellular signal. The combination GPS/secondary cellular signal is carried by a coax cable that connects
directly to the telematics communication interface control module. The cable also provides a path for DC current for
powering the antenna.
Compass Heading
147 of 177
The telematics communication interface module has a compass feature to calculate vehicle direction which is
displayed via the instrument panel cluster or designated display. The compass heading is determined by dead
reckoning until the GPS 3d fix is established. The dead reckoning is accomplished by using the yaw rate sensors and
wheel ticks to determine heading changes from a GPS known heading. The GPS 3d fix heading is determined by the
deferential of two locations.
BluetoothÂ®
With the OnStar TCP system BluetoothÂ® resides in the radio. Refer to Radio/Audio System Description and
Operation for further details.
Phantom Phone Calls
A customer may report that the OnStarÂ® system is attempting and/or completing phone calls which the operator of
the vehicle did not initiate.
It is important to know which type of reported phantom phone call the operator is reporting. Some phone calls of this
nature are considered normal and cannot be addressed other than through education, while others may require some
remedial action to resolve. When attempting resolve, it is very important to determine under which circumstances the
reported Phantom Phone call resulted.
The following are different scenarios:
• The vehicle may receive an incoming call just like any other phone. Typically the customer will hear the phone
ringing in the vehicle. This scenario also includes incoming Bluetooth calls.
• Because the button assembly and associated wiring feeds voltage back to the OnStarÂ® system based on the
amount of voltage drop through each of the buttons, should the return line be partially shorted to voltage the
system could interpret this voltage as a key press. If one of the buttons voltage is simulated, such as the Blue
button. The system will make a phone call just as if the button had been pressed by the operator of the vehicle.
Refer to the OnStar Button Malfunction document for diagnostics.
• Internal module fault. Some customers may report a condition where "Phone Unavailable" message is heard
after the vehicle door is opened or key is cycled. The technician may find a DTC stored in the Telematics
module (example: U1500 or B1000). Refer to diagnostics for the DTC making sure to follow any applicable
Bulletins or PIs.
• Unwanted Hands free calling activation. A customer may report that the "Ready!" or "OnStarÂ® Ready!"
message is heard while driving. The customer may also advise that this seems to happen mostly while making
a turn. In some cases it has been found that the customer is inadvertently pressing the "push to talk" button on
the steering wheel controls. On rare occasions, other issues in the steering column or Steering Wheel Control
system may induce this event.
The majority of reported Phantom Phone Calls can be attributed to accidental button presses or customer induced
concern. In some cases an incoming call may be mistaken as a phantom call concern. It is important to verify all
aspects of the customer concern in order to properly duplicate and diagnose the condition. If the concern points to
normal operation and customer induced concern, please communicate to the customer this condition is a normal
operating characteristic of their vehicle.
Back-up Battery
In some vehicles, the Telematics system is equipped with a Back-Up Battery (BUB) installed inside the TCICM.
This battery is a two-cell lithium-ion rechargeable battery assembly, connected with a short electrical harness, to the
circuit board in the module. Contained within this two-cell battery package are a temperature-sensing thermistor,
automatic-resetting circuit-overload protection, and a low-pressure vent valve. Nominal voltage of the battery pack is
7. 3 Volts.
148 of 177
The BUB is only switched into service when the Telematics system is in normal On condition, vehicle power mode
of either Run or On, and main vehicle battery power (B+) at the TCICM suddenly becomes near-zero. At this time
BUB power is connected to the main circuit board power using solid-state power switching circuits. After initiating
BUB for module power, the GMLAN bus is monitored for a message confirming a collision-event, or near-collision
event, has occurred. If a confirmation message is received, the TCICM continues to use BUB as the power supply
until it is depleted. If a confirmation message is not received within 10 seconds, the BUB power circuits are
internally disconnected, preventing inadvertent dis-charge of the battery.
Charging circuitry within the TCICM maintains the state of charge of the BUB. BUB charging occurs as determined
by the module software, primarily based on temperature and state of charge. Battery state of charge is measured by
the telematics module circuitry, and remaining energy capacity calculated by the module software. On-board
diagnostic tests check for circuit faults, over-temperature conditions, and low-energy capacity. Current DTCs will set
for each of these conditions. No component checks are required, and are not recommended, for BUB diagnosis.
WiFi Support
The telematics communication interface control module supports entertainment WiFi hotspots by providing a
connection to the cellular network for Internet access. The radio acts as the central WiFi router and connects
hardwire Ethernet to the telematics communication interface control module. The telematics communication
interface control module completes the connection to the Internet through the cellular network. It has the ability to
connect up to 7 devices at one time.
Audio System Interface
When the OnStarÂ® requires audio output, a serial data message is sent to the audio system to mute all radio
functions and transmit OnStarÂ® originated audio. The OnStarÂ® audio is transmitted to the vehicle audio system
by the Ethernet and GMLAN circuits.
The audio system will mute and an audible ring will be heard though the speakers if the vehicle receives a call with
the radio ON.
On some vehicles, the HVAC blower speed may be reduced when the OnStarÂ® system is active to aid in reducing
interior noise. When the system is no longer active, the blower speed will return to its previous setting.
OnStarÂ® Sleep Cycle
The OnStarÂ® system uses a unique sleep cycle to allow the system to receive cellular calls while the ignition is in
the OFF position and retained accessory power mode has ended. This cycle enables the telematics communication
interface control module to perform remote functions, such as door unlock, as commanded over the air by the
OnStarÂ® Call Center, and to continue to maintain an acceptable level of battery electrical drain.
The OnStarÂ® system uses 4 states of readiness, depending upon the type of cellular market the vehicle is in when
the ignition is put into the OFF state:
• High power
• Low power
• Sleep
• Digital standby
The high power state is in effect whenever the ignition is in the ON or RUN position, or retained accessory power is
enabled, and the OnStarÂ® system is sending or receiving calls or when the system is performing a remote function.
The low power state is in effect when the OnStarÂ® system is idle with the ignition in the ON or RUN position, or
with retained accessory power enabled.
149 of 177
The digital standby power state is entered after the vehicle has been shut off and the retained accessory power has
timed out while in a digital cellular area. When in digital standby mode, the OnStarÂ® module is able to perform all
remote functions as commanded by an OnStarÂ® advisor at any time, for a continuous 120 hours. After 120 hours,
the OnStarÂ® module will go into sleep mode until a wake up signal from the vehicle is seen by the telematics
communication interface control module. If the OnStar module loses the digital cellular signal it will revert to analog
mode and follow the standard sleep state (9 minutes OFF, 1 minute standby) based on the time of the GPS signals,
this will continue until a digital cellular signal is again received.
If the OnStarÂ® system loses battery power while the system is in a standby or sleep mode, the system will remain
OFF until battery power is restored and the ignition is turned to the ON or RUN position.
Features
OnStarÂ® Personal Calling
The hands free, OnStarÂ® personal calling cellular phone feature is an additional feature of the OnStarÂ® system.
This feature is embedded within the telematics communication interface control module; however it must be
activated by an OnStarÂ® advisor. OnStarÂ® personal calling operates similar to most hand held cellular phones in
that the availability for its usage is based on minutes or units. The customer must have a current OnStarÂ®
subscription, as this feature cannot be utilized without it. To use OnStarÂ® personal calling, the customer must also
purchase units (minutes) as outlined in the owners guide provided with the OnStarÂ® system. Units begin to deplete,
1 unit is equal to 1 minute, as the customer makes outbound phone calls, answers inbound phone calls, or while
connected to the OnStarÂ® virtual advisor. In addition, units may also have an expiration date, depending upon the
type of units purchased.
Turn by Turn Navigation (if equipped)
Turn by Turn Navigation allows the driver to contact OnStarÂ® to obtain directions for driving from a current
location to a desired location. The Turn by Turn Navigation system stores your planned route and continually checks
your position along that route, when you deviate from the planned route, the system will recognize this and prompt
the driver with verbal prompts for how to proceed.
Teletypewriter (TTY) Users
OnStar has the ability to communicate to deaf, hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired customers while in the vehicle.
The available dealer-installed TTY system can provide in-vehicle access to all of the OnStar services, except Virtual
Advisor and OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
Deactivated OnStarÂ® Accounts
In the event a customer has not renewed their OnStarÂ® account after expiration or the account was never activated,
OnStarÂ® will make a discrete cellular call to the vehicle to deactivate the OnStarÂ® system. Before taking this
action, customers are notified that the OnStarÂ® system in their vehicle will be deactivated unless they elect to
renew the account. After the OnStarÂ® account has been deactivated, customers will experience the following:
• The OnStarÂ® status LED will not illuminate.

• The OnStarÂ® system will NOT attempt to connect to the OnStarÂ® Call Center in the event of a collision or
if the vehicle's front air bags deploy for any other reason.
• An emergency button press will play a demo message indicating the service has been deactivated.
• An OnStarÂ® Call Center button press will connect the customer with a dedicated sales team who can sell an
OnStarÂ® subscription and reactivate the vehicle. Depending on the type of OnStarÂ® hardware in the
vehicle, the customer may first hear a demonstration message stating there is no current OnStarÂ®
subscription for the vehicle, and directing the customer what to do to activate services.
150 of 177
• OnStarÂ® personal calling will not be available, as this feature requires the customer to have a current
OnStarÂ® account. Attempts to use this feature may result in cellular connection failure messages and the
inability to connect to the number dialed.
Certain vehicles that have never had an active OnStarÂ® account, or that have been deactivated, may be unable to
establish a connection with the OnStarÂ® Call Center. When normal published diagnostic procedures do not indicate
a possible cause for the no connect concern, the vehicle may have been deactivated. For deactivated vehicles, a no
connect response should be considered normal operation. Further diagnosis and subsequent repair is only necessary
should the customer elect to become an active OnStarÂ® subscriber or renew the account subscription.
OnStarÂ® Cellular, GPS, and Diagnostic Limitations
The proper operation of the OnStarÂ® System is dependent on several elements outside the components integrated
into the vehicle. These include the National Cellular Network Infrastructure, the cellular telephone carriers within the
network, and the GPS.
The cellular operation of the OnStarÂ® system may be inhibited by factors such as the users range from an analog or
digital cellular tower, the state of the cellular carrier's equipment, and the location where the call is placed. Making
an OnStarÂ® key press in areas that lack sufficient cellular coverage or have a temporary equipment failure will
result in either the inability of a call to complete with a data transfer or the complete inability to connect to the
OnStarÂ® Call Center. The OnStarÂ® system may also experience connection issues if the identification numbers
for the module, station identification number, electronic serial number or manufacturers electronic ID, are not
recognized by the cellular carriers local signal receiving towers.
The satellites that orbit earth providing the OnStar system with GPS data have almost no failures associated with
them. In the event of a no GPS concern, the failure will likely lie with the inability of the system to gain GPS signals
because of its location, i. e. in a parking structure, hardware failure, or being mistaken with an OnStarÂ® call which
has reached the Call Center without vehicle data.
During diagnostic testing of the OnStarÂ® system, the technician should ensure the vehicle is located in an area that
has a clear unobstructed view of the open sky, and preferably, an area where analog or digital cellular calls have been
successfully placed. These areas can be found by successfully making an OnStarÂ® keypress in a known good
OnStarÂ® equipped vehicle and confirming success with the OnStarÂ® Call Center advisor. Such places can be
used as a permanent reference for future OnStarÂ® testing.
Mobile Identification Number and Mobile Directory Number
The telematics communication interface control module utilizes 2 numbers for cellular device identification, call
routing and connection, a mobile identification number and a mobile directory number. The mobile identification
number represents the number used by the cellular carrier for call routing purposes while the mobile directory
number represents the number dialed to reach the cellular device.
Firmware Over The Air
The Firmware Over The Air feature was designed to reflash software remotely. Remote reflash is an in-vehicle
feature that enables the installation of a software package to update the infotainment system without requiring
service test equipment to be physically connected to the vehicle. Remote reflash will utilize a long range or short
range connection from the host module to a remote IT system. There must be an active OnStar account to receive
Over The Air programming or updates. To verify the status of the account perform a blue button press and verify the
account is active and connects with data and location. Customers need to accept the OnStar terms and conditions,
and must have an active OnStar account to receive any Over The Air programming or updates.
NOTE: A data plan is not required to receive Over The Air programming or updates. Also
the programming or updates do not consume a customers available data.
151 of 177
NOTE: Fleet vehicles must be activated as a Fleet account (not a business account) and
require a separate Terms and Conditions agreement to be completed. Please see
your fleet administrator for assistance with completing this agreement.
RADIO/AUDIO SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The entertainment system on this vehicle may have several different configurations available to it. To determine the
specific configuration of the vehicle, please see the Service Parts ID Label, and refer to RPO Code List .
Each item in the list below represents topics covered in detail below.
• Demo Mode
• Data Communications
• Remote Radio Receiver
• Speaker Operation
• Antenna System
• Radio Reception
• Auto Volume Control (If equipped)
• Microphones
• Bluetooth Â® (if equipped)
• WiFi
• Back Office Registration
• Applications (if equipped)
• Speech Recognition
• Navigation System Components and Features (if equipped)
• Locations Services
• Valet Mode
• Teen Driver
• Theft Deterrent
• Audio Amplifier (if equipped)
• Infotainment Controls and Display
• Steering Wheel Controls (If equipped)
• SD Card Reader, USB and Auxiliary port
• OnStar Â®
• FOTA (Firmware Over The Air)
• Compass Data
• Media Disc Player (if equipped)
• Digital Rearview Camera (if equipped)
Demo Mode
The radio on new unsold vehicles received at the dealer will be in Demo Mode. In Demo Mode a phone will only
stay paired for the current key cycle and lose pairing to the radio after the vehicle shuts down and restarted after 10
min. Additional operational characteristics of Demo Mode include no retention of the following:
• Stored favorites
152 of 177
• Last station tuned
• Bluetooth synced devices
• Volume level
• Last app or screen view
• Audio/equalizer settings
NOTE: If a device was originally paired while in Demo Mode, a similar condition could
occur that randomly continues to drop Bluetooth pairing after exiting Demo Mode. If
the vehicle is not in Demo Mode, but it is believed the device was originally paired
while in Demo Mode, then delete the device from the radio, delete the radio from the
device, and perform the pairing process again.
Loss of functionality on the above items may be due to the design intent of the vehicle while in Demo Mode, no
correction is needed for these conditions. This is the normal operating characteristic of the Demo Mode of the
vehicle. Once the vehicle is sold, select the option labeled "Not a Demo Vehicle" to exit Demo Mode.
Data Communications
The infotainment system communicates with other devices on multiple serial data networks during operation.
Ethernet AVB
At the core of the infotainment system is the Radio Ethernet AVB (Audio Video Bridging) switch, which
communicates directly to each contributing Infotainment module terminator. The Ethernet harness consists of twisted
pair wires from point to point. Each module on the Ethernet infotainment system sends/receives data at 100 megabit
per second (Mbps) to/from a specified port at the Radio. Some system configurations support a 1 Gigabit per second
(Gbps) connection at the Radio to/from the TCP (Telematics) module. The Radio/Ethernet will also be used to
program USB S/W update files to the modules connected to the Ethernet ports. Some of the data services performed
over Ethernet AVB include: Chime, Service Programming via Over-The-Air updates, OnStar Turn-by-Turn
directions and all other OnStar data services.
Local Interconnect Network (LIN)
The Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus is a single wire communication system. This bus is used to exchange
information between a master control module and other smart devices which provide supporting functionality.
The Remote Radio Receiver, Information Display, Infotainment Controls and the Multifunction (tunnel) Controls all
communicate on the LIN bus.
GMLAN
The Radio will communicate with other modules and systems in the vehicle via GMLAN. Diagnostic Trouble Codes
will be read on GMLAN to diagnose Ethernet, LIN and system faults. GMLAN will also be used for programming
calibrations using TIS2Web/SPS.
For additional information refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation
Controller Area Network (CAN)
The Radio will communicate with other modules and systems in the vehicle via CAN and CAN5. Diagnostic Trouble
Codes will be read on CAN/CAN5 to diagnose Ethernet, LIN and system faults. CAN will also be used for
programming calibrations using TIS2Web/SPS. CAN takes the place of GMLAN on Global-B architecture systems.
CAN5 is a sub-system of the entire CAN network on a vehicle and is the specific network that connects the
Infotainment modules on the vehicle.
153 of 177
Remote Radio Receiver
Overview
The Radio is the Ethernet master. The radio also communicates with other components and systems within the
vehicle via GMLAN/CAN/CAN5 and LIN. The remote radio receiver communicates with the info display module
via the LIN bus for control information, touch communications and dimming level. Digital video data is sent to the
display through a dedicated video cable.
The Radio receiver contains internal antennas for Bluetooth Â® and WiFi. The Radio also has an external WiFi
antenna (on applicable systems) that is used to receive local WiFi signals at increased distances. This is mainly used
to support Over-the-Air updates. The Radio must be mounted properly to obtain proper wireless signals and GPS
position. The remote radio receiver is responsible for receiving all broadcast audio bands. Broadcast signals from
AM, FM, XM and DAB bands are transmitted to the radio via the vehicle antenna systems. The remote radio
receiver is also responsible for the following: Video for the infotainment display, Bluetooth Â®, USB, memory card
reader, and speech recognition functions.
The Radio has phone projection capabilities that can transmits information directly to the vehicle infotainment
system through Bluetooth or a USB connection. Downloadable applications will be available based on distracted
driver safety requirements.
Radio Power
The radio receives battery power and ground from the vehicle harness.
The radio does not use a discrete ignition feed circuit for power moding. The power mode master provides the
system power mode to the radio via serial data messages. The power mode master determines the system power
mode by processing power mode information from ignition switch inputs. Serial data power modes supported by the
radio are OFF, ACCESSORY, RUN, and CRANK REQUEST.
The radio can be turned ON with the ignition OFF. After 10 minutes of inactivity the radio will power down. If any
setting (e. g. changing the station) or volume has been changed or if the radio has been powered OFF than back ON
the 10 minute timer will reset from that point.
Radio Audio Outputs
When not equipped with an amplifier, the radio outputs all audio signals to the speakers via the vehicle wiring
harness.
When equipped with an amplifier, the radio outputs all audio signals digitally over Ethernet.
Speaker Operation
Speakers turn electrical energy into mechanical energy to move air, using a permanent magnet and an electromagnet.
The electromagnet is energized when the radio or amplifier (if equipped) delivers current to the voice coil on the
speaker. The voice coil will form a north and south pole that will cause the voice coil and the speaker cone to move
in relation to the permanent magnet. The current delivered to the speaker is rapidly changing alternating current
(A/C). This causes the speaker cone to move in two directions producing sound.
Antenna System
Multi-Band Antenna
The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle. This type of antenna may be used with the AM/FM
radio, but is primarily for cellular, GPS signals, and XM, if the vehicle has these features. Keep this antenna clear of
154 of 177
snow and ice for clear reception. If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the system may be affected if the
sunroof is open. Loading items onto the roof of the vehicle can interfere with the performance of the system, ensure
the multi-band antenna is not obstructed.
Diversity Antenna
The diversity antenna system uses antennas applied as appliqu e s to the rear glass and two antenna amplifiers. The
right antenna 1 receives both AM and FM signals, while the left antenna 2 may receive FM and DAB signals only.
The antenna amplifier receives the signals from the glass antenna. Each antenna amplifier is connected to the radio
by a coaxial cable.
The radio antenna amplifier is enabled when the radio is turned on. The radio provides battery voltage to the antenna
amplifier using the center conductor of the antenna coaxial cable. When a 12 V signal is seen by the amplifier on the
center conductor of the antenna coax, the received signals are amplified.
When the AM band is selected on the radio, the antenna 1 amplifier connects the AM antenna to the radio. When the
FM band is selected, both antenna amplifiers provide FM signals to the radio. The radio switches between the two
FM antennas, monitoring the signal strength and combines the signals to create one stronger signal.
Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna
The global positioning system (GPS) antenna is part of the multi-band antenna located on the roof of the vehicle. The
GPS antenna is used to collect the signals of the orbiting GPS satellites. Within the antenna is housed a low noise
amplifier that allows for a more broad and precise reception of this data. The GPS antenna amplifier is powered
through the coaxial cable.
The GPS antenna is connected to the telematics communication interface control module via a coax cable. The GPS
signal is sent to the navigation radio via an Ethernet harness
External WiFi Antenna
On some system configurations, an external WiFi antenna is connected to the radio to support longer range reception,
compared to the internal Wifi antenna. Over-the-air updates is the main feature supported by this antenna. Data
transfers used for consumer media will also be supported by this antenna when connected to a local network. The
antenna is connected to the radio via coaxial cable.
Radio Reception
AM/FM Radio Signal
The radio signal is sent from a broadcast station and is then received by an antenna. The strength of the signal
received depends on the following:
• The power output (wattage) of the broadcasting station

• The location of the vehicle (or receiver) relative to the broadcast tower.
• Height of the broadcast antenna
• Height of the receiving antenna
• Obstacles between the tower and the receiver
• Atmospheric conditions
• What band (AM or FM) the station is broadcasting
• Type of antenna and the ground plane
Sirius XM (SXM) Digital Radio Receiver (If equipped)
155 of 177
A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service.
The XM satellite receiver is integrated into the radio. XM satellite radio provides digital radio reception. The XM
signal is broadcast from two satellites and, where necessary, terrestrial repeaters. The high power satellites allow the
antenna to receive the XM signal even when foliage and other partial obstructions block the antennas view of the
satellite. Terrestrial repeaters are used in dense urban areas. These repeaters will receive the satellite signal and re-
broadcast them at much higher power levels in order to ensure reception in areas with densely packed tall buildings.
Even with repeaters the signal can be compromised resulting in loss of XM.
SiriusXM 360L
SiriusXM with 360L interface has enhanced in-vehicle listening experience for subscribers. The experience now
offers more categories and system learned recommendations toward discovering more personalized content.
To use the full SiriusXM 360L program, including streaming content and listening recommendations, OnStar
Connected Access is required. Connected vehicle services vary by model and require a complete working electrical
system, cell reception, and GPS signal. An active OnStar connected plan is required, if the customer declines OnStar
Terms and Conditions the following message can be displayed: Connection Unavailable, Please call OnStar Agent.
Reference the SiriusXM user guide for use and subscription information.
High Definition (HD) Radio (If equipped)
HD Radio delivers subscription free local broadcasting in a digital format which may include song title, artist name,
album art, weather, traffic data, etc., on AM/FM bands. Up to four stations could be available on a single frequency
for e. g. if radio station is 96. 9 FM, the HD enabled radio would have additional broadcasts on 96. 9 HD1, HD2,
HD3 and HD4. The digital technology allows for clear reception quality and additional information.
Auto Volume Control (If equipped)
With auto volume control, the audio system will adjust automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you
drive, by increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases. To use auto volume control, set the volume at the desired
level, and then select either Off, Low, Medium-low, Medium, Medium-high or High.
Microphones
This system utilizes two hands free audio microphones, the primary microphone on the driver side and a
secondary/reference microphone for the front passenger side. The primary microphone is connected directly to the
Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. It is also connected by an analog pass-through circuit to the
radio from the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module. The secondary microphone is connected
directly to the radio.
The primary microphone is used for emergency and OnStar calls. During normal operating conditions it also
provides Bluetooth calls and speech recognition to the radio. The secondary microphone is used as a reference for the
primary microphone for Barge-in and Passenger Interference Cancellation during speech recognition and also to
enhance the driver side hands free calls. For MY18 and beyond the secondary microphone can also be used for front
passenger hands free phone calls. Barge-in allows a user to speak over the system prompts. Passenger Interference
Cancellation ignores unwanted inputs from cabin noise that is not related to the prompts given by the user.
The front passenger secondary microphone is never used as a direct source for an OnStar call. The second
microphone input modifies the primary microphone input to reduce background noise and other interference. An
OnStar call requires the microphone to be directly connected to the Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module. During a normal (non-emergency) OnStar call the Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
receives an audio signal from the primary microphone and sends the signal to the radio via the Ethernet connection.
156 of 177
The radio processes the OnStar call audio and sends it back to the Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module via the Ethernet connection. During an emergency button call the Telematics Communication Interface
Control Module contacts the OnStar call center directly and does not send the signal to the radio.
Bluetooth Â® (If equipped)
Bluetooth Â® wireless technology is a short-range communications technology intended to replace the cables
connecting portable and/or fixed devices while maintaining high levels of security. The operating range of the signal
is approximately 30 feet.
The available features and functions are determined by the type of device and the software within the devices being
used. For a feature or function to operate, it must be supported in both devices.
The first connection between devices is established through a process called pairing. In order to pair two devices, a
password (passkey) has to be exchanged between the two devices. One device will generate the password, the other
device accepts the password to complete the process. Once the devices are paired, future connections between the
devices will occur automatically when the devices are on and within range of each other.
The Bluetooth Â® hardware is internal to the Remote Radio Receiver. The antenna is internal to the Remote Radio
Receiver. The Remote Radio Receiver supports streaming of data (music, voice, information) from cellular phones
and other mobile devices that support those features. The Remote Radio Receiver is also capable of interfacing with
cellular phones for hands-free features.
• The device must be paired to the system to use the available Bluetooth Â® feature (s). The pairing process
must only be performed once for each device, unless that device's information is deleted.
• Depending on model year up to 10 devices can be paired, refer to owners manual for details.
• Streaming Audio allows playing music from the mobile device wirelessly. Music stored on the mobile device
can be viewed and controlled from the display.
• To stream audio from a mobile device, the device must be unlocked, and any additional applications should be
closed.
Refer to the owners manual, supplements, and the device manufacturers information for pairing instructions.
WiFi
The WiFi hardware is internal to the Remote Radio Receiver. The WiFi or WLAN antenna is called the Wireless
Communication Antenna which is connected to the Remote Radio Receiver. WiFi expands the abilities of the vehicle
as described below:
• Connect to home WiFi to update software

• When used with OnStar 4G LTE Hotspot service, it provides Internet access to devices in the vehicle when
connected to the Hotspot
• Enables in-vehicle networking between passengers' devices, like home WiFi network
• Allows remote access to external connected device application data for vehicle Internet application use
Back Office Registration
The Radio must be registered with the GM Back Office in order to receive downloaded information such as
approved applications, module software updates, weather and traffic information for current location. The vehicle
must have a Cellular or WiFi connection to complete the initial registration process. This process will verify the
assembly plant factory feed data from the BCM, CGM and Radio serial numbers to the VIN and if the security
checks are met, then the user must complete the registration process by entering email and required personal
information. The registration status can be verified through the Radio "Setting - About selection.
157 of 177
When any of these secured ECU's are replaced, a new serial number will be recorded during the service calibration
process and appended to the vehicles history data for uninterrupted back office connection.
If the Radio is replaced, the user can recover settings/applications by reregistering the email account. During the
initial registration process the user will enter an email/password. The user will then be sent a follow up verification
email link to setup the account completely. If the complete account setup is not performed the password reset
security questions will not be entered, which will prevent reregistering this email account in the future if the
password is forgotten. The radio will operate in Demo Mode or as Guest until a user profile has been set up.
Applications (If equipped)
When the system is equipped with Bluetooth Â® or WiFI, the system is capable of using applications, commonly
referred to as apps.
The term application refers to any piece of software that works on a system (hardware) that is being operated by it's
own software. Applications are typically small software programs which uses the hardware to perform a specific
task, as opposed to operating the entire system.
• For an application to be used, it must be installed on both the vehicle infotainment system and a compatible
mobile device.
• The device must be connected to the system. this may be done wirelessly via Bluetooth Â®, WiFi, or via the
vehicle USB port. Refer to the device manufacturers information for the proper connection method.
• When the device is connected, the vehicle infotainment system is used to remotely access and control the
application on the mobile device.
• The application must work correctly on the device to work with the vehicle infotainment system.
• The user may be required to log-in to the application on the mobile device before using the application from
the vehicle controls.
• Using applications will use the device's data plan.
• The device must be unlocked, and any additional applications should be closed.
Refer to the owners manual and supplements for information on mobile devices, control, and operation.
Speech Recognition
The Speech Recognition feature is implemented only in a Mid/High System Radio- CSM module. There is no
Speech Recognition in a Low System. Speech Recognition allows the user to command various features of the radio
via voice commands. For addition information refer to the owners manual. For model year 2018 (and forward)
Mid/High systems, part of the speech recognition functionality is controlled via off-board cloud connection. A
speech icon in the radio allows user to see if an utterance has been received by the off-board cloud. Points-of-interest
(POIs) data are also stored off-board. Any disruption in the connection to the cloud will cause a partial loss of
functionality for these systems.
For model year 2018 (and forward) there will also be a new speech recognition feature called Barge-in. This allows
the user to speak over the voice prompts generated by the system. This feature is turned off by default from the
factory and must be enabled by the user.
Navigation System Components and Features (if equipped)
The radio receiver provides full navigation functionality, if equipped. The Radio provides the following:
• A global positioning system (GPS) signal, which provides the vehicle location information.
• Map data for navigation and map route guidance, stored on the SD card memory.
158 of 177
• Route guidance with verbal prompts to the operator.
• Traffic and weather information for display on the navigation system map (with active subscription, where
available).
• Periodic Map updates can be performed by inserting an updated SD card.
GPS signals are output from the telematics communication interface control module on Ethernet or GMLAN. Other
modules on Ethernet, such as the radio may use the GPS latitude, longitude and satellite time data broadcast by the
telematics communication interface control module.
The On-board navigation feature uses an on-board navigation engine with an optimized map display that is
calculated and rendered locally.
Route Guidance
The map will display the route to the selected destination. Voice prompts alert the operator of upcoming events
(turns) and arrivals at the destination. The navigation system will automatically recalculate if the route is not
followed. The remote radio receiver uses data received from the global positioning system (GPS) satellites, the
vehicle speed signal, and serial data information to accurately display the current position of the vehicle.
Points of Interest
The map database provides point of interest information. Points of interests are locations that are frequently visited.
Points of interest can be can be displayed on the map or set as a destination. The following are some of the available
Points of interests:
• Gas Station
• Restaurant
• College
• Police Station
Locations Services
"Locations Services Off" also referred to as Location Masking, is a feature in select 2019 and beyond Infotainment 3
systems that allows customers to enable or disable location services in their vehicle. This allows customers to control
what data is being sent from their vehicle, and has important implications for other connected services.
The default setting is "Locations Services On", however, customers can enable or disable Locations Masking in two
ways:
1. Press and hold the white button next to the blue OnStarÂ® button in the overhead console.
2. In the Setting menu, select System>Privacy>Location Services>ON or OFF.
• Look for the white LOCATIONS SERVICES icon in the status bar on the Home Screen, next to the clock and
outside temperature in the lower right corner of the screen.
• When Locations Services are On, there will be no circle around the icon.
• When the Locations Services are Off, the icon will be circled in red.
Certain functions that require the vehicle's location may not operate properly when Location Services are Off,
including:
• Connected Navigation services, if equipped and active, will not work (the system will operate as a non-
connected Navigation system)
159 of 177
• Speech recognition may not offer full functionality
• OnStar advisors will be unable to provide Turn-by-Turn Navigation services
• Customers may receive error messages in their myChevrolet, myBuick, myGMC, or myCadillac mobile app
when trying to use Vehicle Locate.
• Some features of Smart Driver may be inoperable or not work properly, including the score being replaced by
dashes
NOTE: Emergency services, such as Automatic Crash Notification and Stolen Vehicle
Assistance, are NOT impacted by Location Masking.
Valet Mode
Valet Mode is a customer enabled feature of the infotainment system, found in the settings menu, if equipped. The
customer creates and inputs a four digit code using the infotainment controls. Confirming the code and selecting
LOCK will lock the infotainment system, steering wheel controls and other vehicle features, dependent on vehicle
equipment. The vehicle will remain in valet mode until the same four digit code is reentered.
In the event that the four digit code is forgotten, it can be sent via Bluetooth to the currently paired phone or the scan
tool under Radio>Configuration/Reset Functions>Erase Valet Mode Code can be used to clear the Valet Mode Code.
Teen Driver
The teen driver feature puts the vehicle into a mode that can only be unlocked with a valid PIN. It allows various
restrictive features for safer driving. Some of the features include Speed Limiter, Speed Warning, Register Key,
Report Card, etc. For additional information refer to owners manual.
In the event that the four digit code is forgotten, it can be sent via Bluetooth to the currently paired phone or the scan
tool under BCM can be used to reset the Teen Driver PIN.
Theft Deterrent
The radio theft deterrent system is intended to disable or limit radio functionality if incorrect vehicle information is
received by the radio. The radio disables functionality if the VIN information received by the radio does not match
the VIN information that has been learned by the radio. The radio receives this information via serial data. A possible
cause of incorrect VIN info could be the radio was originally installed in another vehicle.
The radio has the following theft operating modes as part of the theft deterrent system:
• Normal Mode: The radio has learned a correct VIN sequence and the VIN information received via serial data
matches the learned VIN sequence. In this mode the radio has full functionality.
• No VIN Mode: The radio has not received or learned a correct VIN sequence. In this mode the radio has
limited functionality.
• Theft Detected Mode: The radio has learned a correct VIN sequence and the VIN information received via
serial data does NOT match the learned VIN sequence. In this mode the radio may be disabled or have limited
functionality. The radio display will indicate that theft protection is active.
Audio Amplifier (If equipped)
Amplifier Interface
A fused battery voltage circuit provides the main amplifier power. The audio amplifier (when equipped) is a
participant on the Ethernet bus. The audio amplifier receives audio signals and control information from the Radio.
The Amplifier receives battery power and ground from the vehicle harness, and also communicates on GMLAN.
160 of 177
Amplifier Operation
The purpose of the amplifier is to increase the power of a voltage or current signal. The output signal of an amplifier
may consist of the same frequencies as the input signal or it may consist of only a portion of the frequencies as in the
case of a subwoofer or midrange speaker. The audio amplifier amplifies the signal and sends it to the appropriate
speakers.
and produce sound. Both the DC bias voltage and the AC voltage signals are needed for the audio system to properly
produce sound.
The audio amplifier is also responsible for operation of active noise cancellation if equipped. Refer to Active Noise
Cancellation Description and Operation for more information.
Infotainment Controls and Display
assembly contains the control knobs and buttons for all audio and HVAC functions and the information display. The
assembly is supplied battery voltage and ground from the vehicle harness.
data circuit to the Radio.
The remote radio receiver sends the display digital video data for on-screen display through a dedicated video cable.
The information display provides a feedback on the touch screen and certain controls.
The controls communicate via a LIN serial data circuit with the remote radio receiver. Messages communicated
include the following:
• Wake-up/power state messages

• Diagnostic information
• Button presses/knob rotations
• Commands for the state of indicators
• Back-lighting dimming level
HVAC data for controls and status indicators is communicated between the HVAC controls and the HVAC control
module with a separate LIN serial data circuit. HVAC status screen information from the HVAC control module is
transmitted to the radio on the GMLAN serial data circuit.
On some system configurations for model year 2019 (and forward), the Infotainment Controls and Display are
connected only via dedicated video cable (LVDS cable). All data communication previously transmitted via LIN and
GMLAN will be sent via LVDS cable on these systems. Programming/reprogramming of the Infotainment Controls
and Display will be performed through USB port and sent from the Radio to the Display via the LVDS cable.
Steering Wheel Controls (If equipped)
Some audio functions are available using the steering wheel controls. The steering wheel controls duplicate the
function of the primary controls available on the radio.
161 of 177
For additional information on steering wheel controls, refer to Steering Wheel Controls Description and Operation.
USB Port, SD Card Reader and Auxiliary port (If equipped)
The infotainment system may contain an assembly that has either a USB port, Auxiliary port, and may even have an
SD card reader located within the drivers reach. The assembly interfaces with a hub device, internal to the auxiliary
jack, USB, and memory card receptacle assembly. The auxiliary jack, USB, and memory card receptacle assembly
receives fused battery voltage and ground from the harness to power the internal hub device as well as providing
additional amperage to power USB devices.
The internal hub device interfaces directly with the remote radio receiver via a standard USB cable. A Mini type
USB connector is used to connect the cable at the USB port and at the remote radio receiver and at the auxiliary jack,
USB, and memory card receptacle. Standard USB male to female connections are typically used for connecting USB
cables together where an in-line connection is required. An in-line cable connection is typically found between the
console and I/P harness.
USB Port
(memory stick/ flash drive). When a device is connected to the USB port, the device can be controlled from the radio
controls.
Not all portable media player devices or file types are compatible. Connection to USB HUB devices is not supported.
Refer to the owner's manual for information on USB devices, control, and operation.
SD Card Reader
On Navigation vehicles the SD card will contain the Map information for the vehicle region. The Map data will be
updated either by replacing the SD card with the latest release or in regions that support it, OTA wireless updates via
WiFi on MY18> vehicles.
Refer to the owners manual for information on the Navigation system.
Auxiliary Audio Input Jack
The infotainment system may have a 3.5mm (1/8 in.) auxiliary audio input jack located in the center console. The
auxiliary audio input jack interfaces directly with the radio. When a portable audio playback device is connected to
the auxiliary jack, an internal switch detects the connection and the radio will switch to AUX as the audio source.
Audio signals from the device are sent to the radio from the auxiliary jack via USB.
• When a device is first connected to the 3.5mm (1/8 in.) input jack the infotainment system automatically
switches to that device. If an auxiliary device has already been connected, press the AUX or CD/AUX button
to select the device.
• Playback of an audio device that is connected to the 3.5mm jack can only be controlled using the controls on
the device.
• The volume control on the device may need to be adjusted eo ensure sufficient playback volume through the
infotainment system.
OnStar Â® (If equipped)
When OnStar is activated, a serial data message is sent to the radio that activates default audio settings. The fade will
be set to the front, Bass and Treble are set to the mid range, the outputs are mono, when the audio source is OnStar.
OnStar takes priority over any other audio source.
162 of 177
For additional OnStar information, refer to OnStar Description and Operation.
Firmware Over The Air
The Firmware Over The Air feature was designed to reflash software remotely. Remote reflash is an in-vehicle
feature that enables the installation of a software package to update the infotainment system without requiring
service test equipment to be physically connected to the vehicle. Remote reflash will utilize a long range or short
range connection from the host module to a remote IT system. There must be an active OnStar account to receive
Over The Air programming or updates. To verify the status of the account perform a blue button press and verify the
account is active and connects with data and location. Customers need to accept the OnStar terms and conditions,
and must have an active OnStar account to receive any Over The Air programming or updates.
NOTE: A data plan is not required to receive Over The Air programming or updates. Also
the programming or updates do not consume a customers available data.
NOTE: Fleet vehicles must be activated as a Fleet account (not a business account) and
require a separate Terms and Conditions agreement to be completed. Please see
your fleet administrator for assistance with completing this agreement.
Compass Data
With the Base Radio the Telematics Control module provides compass and GPS position information on the LS-
GMLAN / Info-CAN bus when it is present.
In a Mid / High Radio System configuration without a Telematics Control Module and equipped with GPS, the radio
shall provide the GPS and heading information on LS-GMLAN / Info-CAN as shown below.
An external Remote Compass Module (RCM) is required to transmit the heading and position information on LS-
GMLAN / Info-CAN if either:
• The Base Radio is present in a system configuration with no Telematics control module.
• The radio variant without GPS is present in a system configuration with no Telematics control module.
Media Disc Player (if equipped)
The Remote Media Player feature sends information through a USB connection to the Rear Seat Infotainment and
outputs digital audio/video to vehicle displays and to the Radio over the Ethernet bus. The Rear Seat Infotainment
system also has a USB hub with an auxiliary port for digital media file access.
The media disc player receives battery power and ground from the vehicle harness, and also communicates on
GMLAN.
Digital Rearview Camera (if equipped)
For model year 2018 (and forward), the digital rearview camera is a direct input to the radio via coaxial cable.
Camera and image activation are driven by reverse gear signal from the reverse lamp input. This function is used for
reverse guidance. For radio systems that manage the camera signal, the system does not have video bypass module,
as this functionality is managed onboard the radio.
SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

SPECIAL TOOLS
Illustration Tool
163 of 177
Number/Description
EL - 50334 - 20
Multi-Media
Interface Tester
(MIT)
164 of 177
EL - 50334 - 50
USB Cable and
Adapter Kit
165 of 177
EL-48028
Digital Radio Test
Antenna
166 of 177
EL-49903 - 1
Test Antenna, Navn-
Cell Comn
167 of 177
EL-49903 - 2
Adapter Cable-UHF
RT Angle
168 of 177
EL-49903 - 3A
Combiner Kit, Test
Antenna
169 of 177
EL-50334 - 12
Infotainment Test
Cable - RSE
170 of 177
EL-50334 - 13
Infotainment Test
Cable - RSE Splitter
171 of 177
EL-50334 - 14
Infotainment Test
Cable
172 of 177
EL-50334 - 15
Video Bypass Cable
173 of 177
EL-52552
COAX FAKRA
Cable Adapter Kit
SPECIAL TOOLS (MIT TOOL INSTRUCTIONS)

Bluetooth Pairing for Vehicles with Radio RPO: UF7
Either reset the pin code on the radio to 0000, or go under Device Info on the radio and see what the pin code is (to
enter it later on the MIT).
1. Turn the BT discoverable ON in the radio Bluetooth settings.

2. Press Pair Device on radio (DO NOT PRESS SEARCH BLUETOOTH DEVICES ON THE RADIO).
3. Press the Pair button on the MIT.
4. When the three LED lights begin flashing on the MIT, enter the pin code (either 0000 if you reset it to that or
what the radio pin code was).
5. MIT will then automatically connect with the radio and should show "MIT Connected" message.
Make test call and the audio streaming test.
Holden Radio Bluetooth Pairing Instructions
1. Using the radio controls, place the radio into "Discoverable Mode".
2. Place the MIT into Bluetooth mode by pressing TEST SELECTOR until the Bluetooth LED is illuminated.
174 of 177
3. With the MIT in Bluetooth mode Press and Release the #1 button (the Bluetooth LED will begin to slowly
blink).
4. Now Press and release the PAIR/CALL button on the MIT (the Bluetooth LED will begin to blink a little
faster).
5. On the radio Enter the PASSKEY when prompted: (press "0000" then Press "OK").
6. The MIT and radio will PAIR and CONNECT (the Bluetooth LED will be Fast Flashing).
7. Use as regular MIT at this point.
For all other Radios
Testing the Bluetooth Function
1. Verify connection of the MIT to the USB port.

2. Press and release the TEST SELECTOR button until the Bluetooth LED illuminates.
3. Disable all other Bluetooth devices present in the vehicle (ie. cell phones, laptops, etc.).
Standard Bluetooth Pairing/Bonding
1. Use the vehicle controls to place the radio into Bluetooth Pairing mode. The vehicle will prompt you with a
security code.
2. Press and release the PAIR/CALL button. The Bluetooth LED will blink slowly while preparing to have a
security code entered.
3. Wait for the all three LEDs to blink confirming it is ready to have the security code entered.
4. Enter the code with the MIT keypad and hit ENTER.
5. The Bluetooth LED will blink slowly while pairing/bonding and move to a quick flash once paired/bonded.
The vehicle should confirm pairing/bonding is complete.
Streaming Audio
1. Confirm pairing/bonding is complete - the Bluetooth LED will be in a quick flash mode.
2. On some radios the MIT automatically begins streaming audio via A2DP. The audio playback will confirm
that the Bluetooth connection using streaming and the audio is working correctly.
3. On other radios you will need to select Bluetooth Audio from the Source menu to verify Audio Streaming.
4. Audio playback confirms that the Bluetooth connection using Streaming Audio is working correctly.
5. Placing a test call will temporarily stop the streaming audio function, but upon disconnection of that test call,
the streaming audio from the MIT will resume.
To Place a Test Call
1. Confirm pairing/bonding is complete - the Bluetooth LED will be in a quick flash mode. If the vehicle is
equipped with streaming audio, and the radio is set to play a Bluetooth audio file, the streaming audio
playback will be audible.
2. Press and release PAIR/CALL button to place a test call. Streaming audio will be temporarily turned off.
3. Use the vehicle controls to answer the call.
NOTE: If the call is not answered within several rings, the MIT's audio files will not
transmit, even though an active call is occurring.
4. Audio playback confirms that the Bluetooth connectivity is working correctly.
175 of 177
NOTE: The MIT will remain paired/bonded when the call is ended by the vehicle. To re-
test the call function, place the MIT in Bluetooth mode and press and release
the Pair button to reconnect. When testing is completed, delete MIT from the
audio system before returning the vehicle to the customer.
5. Use the vehicle controls to end the call. If applicable, streaming audio will resume.
Testing the AUX/Line-In Function
1. Verify connection of the MIT as stated above.

2. Press and release the TEST SELECTOR button until the MIT AUX LED illuminates.
3. Use the vehicle controls to put the audio system into Audio (Line-In) mode.
4. Audio playback confirms that the audio input is working correctly.
Testing the USB Function
1. Verify connection of the MIT as stated above.

2. Press and release the TEST SELECTOR button until the MIT USB LED illuminates.
3. Use the vehicle controls to put the audio system into USB mode.
NOTE: Volume levels may vary dependent upon vehicle audio system.
4. Audio playback confirms that the USB is working correctly.
Troubleshooting Guide
If the MIT unit is still not working properly after following the below troubleshooting, the unit is malfunctioning and
should be repaired or replaced.
Unit not Working
• Verify the MIT is powered on correctly as indicated by the green Power LED.
• If Power LED is not illuminated, verify USB power source is working properly.
• If USB power adapter is being used to power the MIT, check and, if necessary, replace the fuse in adapter.
Problem with Aux/Line-In Test
• Verify Aux/Line- In test cable is inserted properly into the vehicle audio input jack. Verify the MIT is in
Aux/Line-In mode as indicated by the red AUX LED.
• Verify the vehicle audio system is in Auxiliary or Line-in mode. Verify the vehicle audio system volume is
turned up and not in mute mode.
Problem with USB Test
• Verify MIT is in USB mode as indicated by the red USB LED. Verify the vehicle audio system is in USB
mode.
• Verify the vehicle audio system volume is turned up and not in mute mode.
Problem with Bluetooth Pairing
• Delete previous devices stored in the device list of the radio and the pair the MIT
• Remove USB cable, and then reconnect to reset the MIT. Carefully follow the bonding instructions for the
176 of 177
correct Passkey procedure.
Problem with Bluetooth Test Call Audio
• Verify the MIT is paired with the vehicle. This is indicated by the quick flashing Bluetooth LED.
• Audio system should have indicated the MIT is bonded.
177 of 177
Cruise Control System - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Cruise Control Switch Bracket Screw 1.1 N.m (10 lb in)

CRUISE CONTROL WIRING SCHEMATICS
Cruise Control

DTC B3623, B3794, P0564, P0565, P0567, P0568, P056C, P0580, P0581, P0589, P0592, P0593, P155A-
P155C, OR P162C
Check - Vehicle
1 of 40
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3623
Steering Wheel Controls Distance Sensing Cruise Control Gap Up/Down Signal Circuit
DTC B3794
Cruise Control Function Request Circuit
DTC P0564
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch Circuit
DTC P0565
Cruise Control Switch Circuit
DTC P0567
Cruise Control Resume Switch Circuit
DTC P0568
Cruise Control Set Switch Circuit
DTC P056C
Cruise Control Cancel Switch Circuit
DTC P0580
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0581
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0589
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch 2 Circuit
DTC P0592
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch 2 Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0593
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch 2 Circuit High Voltage
DTC P155A
2 of 40
Cruise Control Switch State Undetermined
DTC P155B
Cruise Control Set/Coast Switch 2 Circuit
DTC P155C
Cruise Control Resume/Accelerate Switch 2 Circuit
DTC P162C
Vehicle Speed Limiting/Warning Switch Circuit
Short to Open/High Short to

Circuit Ground Resistance Voltage Signal Performance
12 V Reference 1 1 - -
B3794,
Cruise Control Set/Coast/Resume B3794, P0564,
1, P0580 B3794, P0565 P0567,
/Accelerate Switch Signal P155A
P0568, P0581
Distance Sensing Cruise Control P155A,
P155A, P155B 1 -
Gap Up/Down Switch Signal P155B
1. Cruise Control = Malfunction
Typical Scan Tool Data
Body Control Module-Scan Tool Parameter

Cruise Control Switch Status Cruise Control Switch 2 -
Circuit - Parameter Parameter
12 V Reference = Normal Function Inactive Idle
12 V Reference = Open Circuit Open/Short to Ground Idle
12 V Reference = Short to Ground Undetermined State Undefined
12 V Reference = Short to Voltage Inactive Idle

Cruise Control Set/Coast/Resume
Inactive/Cruise Control On/Set
/Accelerate Switch Signal = Normal Idle
/Resume/Cancel
Function
/Accelerate Switch Signal = Open Open/Short to Ground Idle
Circuit
/Accelerate Switch Signal = Short to Open/Short to Ground Idle
Ground
3 of 40
/Accelerate Switch Signal = Short to Short to Battery Idle
Voltage

Distance Sensing Cruise Control Gap
Up/Down Switch Signal = Normal Inactive Idle/Gap Down
Function
Open/Short to Ground Inactive
Up/Down Switch Signal = Open Circuit
Up/Down Switch Signal = Short to Undetermined State Undefined
Ground
Up/Down Switch Signal = Short to Inactive Short to Battery
Voltage
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Cruise Control Description and Operation
• Ignition/Vehicle = On
• Vehicle Speed = Greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
• Cruise Control = On
Frequency the DTC runs = Continuously - After the running conditions are met - For greater than 5 s
B3623
Distance Sensing Cruise Control Follow Gap Set Circuit - Invalid Signal Received
B3794, P0564, P0565, P0567, P0568, P056C, P0580, P0581
Cruise Control Switch Circuit - Invalid Signal Received
P0589, P0592, P0593, P155B, P155C
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch 2 Circuit - Invalid Signal Received
P155A
P162C
4 of 40
Vehicle Speed Limiting/Warning Switch Circuit - Undetermined State
• Cruise Control System Status = Disabled

• DTCs listed in the DTC Descriptor Category = Type C DTC
DTCs listed in the DTC Descriptor Category = Type C DTC
Diagnostic Aids
The cruise control system can be inhibited or disengaged for a number of reasons. These reasons may be a
normal function of the vehicle or as a result of action the driver has taken. The cruise control system may also
be inhibited or disengaged because of a fault in a vehicle system. The K20 Engine Control Module has a scan
tool data list available that can help identify what may have caused a cruise control inhibit or disengage. The
scan tool ECM Cruise Control Disable History Data list identifies conditions that will inhibit cruise control.
When the cruise control system is inhibited the cruise control system will be prevented from engaging when
requested by the driver, or the cruise control system will disengage, if the driver was actively utilizing the
system.
When attempting to diagnose the system, it is important to discuss with the customer the conditions under
which the apparent malfunction occurred. This is critical to help identify those scenarios where the inhibit or
disengage is the result of a driver action or normal system response and clarify how the function works. It is
also critical to identify when the apparent malfunction occurred when attempting to replicate the condition. The
parameters in the scan tool ECM Cruise Control Disable History Data list can be used to help isolate what is
causing an inhibit or disengage condition. The scan tool ECM Cruise Control Disable History Data list has
parameters that identify the last eight causes of an inhibit and the last eight causes of a disengage. For each
Cruise Control Inhibit History and Cruise Control Disengage History parameter, extra information is included in
additional parameters: Odometer at First Malfunction, Odometer at Last Malfunction, Diagnostic Status,
Malfunction Counter, and Ignition Cycles Since Last Diagnostic Event. The scan tool parameters are a rolling
snapshot of the last eight inhibit and disengage reasons, however, if the same condition causes an inhibit or
disengage, the reason will not be logged in the next parameter. Instead, the Malfunction Counter parameter will
increment and the Odometer at Last Malfunction parameter will update with the most recent odometer value
that the condition occurred. When diagnosing an inhibit or disengage concern, especially in the case of an
intermittent condition, these parameters are useful in helping determine the cause. Recurring causes will have a
larger number in the Malfunction Counter parameter and will likely have a wide variance between the
Odometer at First Malfunction and Odometer at Last Malfunction value, indicating the condition has occurred
over a period of time driving the vehicle.
Schematic Reference
Cruise Control Wiring Schematics
5 of 40
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with RPO KSG, it also has Adaptive Cruise Control.
Refer to the Object Detection or the Driver Assistance Systems subsection for
schematics, diagnostics, and description and operation related to Adaptive
Cruise Control functions.

2. Verify the condition does not exist: Cruise Control System Status = Inhibit by ECM
Cruise Control System Status = Inhibit by ECM
If a condition exists - Repair or replace as necessary
Go to next step: Cruise Control System Status Inhibit by ECM

3. Verify the component works as specified: Cruise Control Switch Assembly
4. Refer to: Body Control Module-Scan Tool Parameter
If a condition exists
Go to next step: If no condition exists

5. Verify that no DTC listed in the DTC Descriptor Category is set.
If a related DTC is set
Go to next step: If a related DTC is not set

6. All OK.
Cruise Control Switch Signal

2. Disconnect the component: K9 Body Control Module
6 of 40
3. Disconnect the component: Cruise Control Switch Assembly
5. Test for less than 1 V between the test points:
• 12 V Reference circuit & Ground
• Cruise Control Switch Signal & Ground
6. Ignition/Vehicle - Off
7. Test for infinite resistance between the test points:
8. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points:
• 12 V Reference circuit @ Component harness & The other end of the circuit @ Control module
harness
• Cruise Control Switch Signal @ Component harness & The other end of the circuit @ Control
module harness
Go to next step: If less than 2 ohms
9. Test or replace the component: Cruise Control Switch Assembly
10. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets
Replace the component: K9 Body Control Module

11. All OK.
Distance Sensing Cruise Control Gap Up/Down Switch Signal

• Distance Sensing Cruise Control Gap Up/Down Switch Signal & Ground
7 of 40
harness
• Distance Sensing Cruise Control Gap Up/Down Switch Signal @ Component harness & The other
end of the circuit @ Control module harness
If the DTC sets

11. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC P0572 OR P0573

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0572
Brake Switch Circuit 1 Low Voltage
DTC P0573
Brake Switch Circuit 1 High Voltage

8 of 40
Cruise Control Brake Pedal Signal C0297,
P0572 P0573 P0703
Circuit P0572
DTC P0572
Brake Pedal Position Circuit Signal - Open/Short to Ground
DTC P0573
Brake Pedal Position Circuit Signal - Short to Voltage

Schematic Reference
• Cruise Control Wiring Schematics

• Exterior Lights Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
9 of 40
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the component works as specified: Brake Pedal Position Sensor


4. All OK.
1. Use the schematics to identify the items/configurations listed below:

• Brake Pedal Position Sensor Signal @ K20 Engine Control Module
3. Disconnect the component: K20 Engine Control Module
5. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Brake Pedal Position Sensor Signal & Ground
6. Slowly press and release the brake pedal.
Verify the test lamp turns On and Off.
If the test lamp is always Off

3. {If equipped} Disconnect all components on the circuit: Brake Pedal Position Sensor Signal
4. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 12 @ K9 Body Control
Module X5 & Ground
10 of 40
5. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 12 @ K9 Body Control
Module X5 & The other end of the circuit
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K9 Body Control Module
If the test lamp is always On
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 12 @ K9 Body Control
Module X5 & Ground
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K9 Body Control Module
Go to next step: If the test lamp turns On and Off
7. Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
Repair Instructions
DTC P0575
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0575
Cruise Control Switch Signal Message Counter Incorrect
• For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Cruise Control Description and Operation
• The K9 sends a serial data message to the K20 indicating the S70 function that has been requested.
11 of 40
Cruise Control Switch Signal = Invalid Serial Data
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify there are no other DTCs set, except for DTC P0575.
If any other DTCs are set

3. Replace the component: K9 Body Control Module
4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. - Verify the DTC does not set.
If DTC P0575 is set
12 of 40
Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC P0703
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0703
Brake Switch Signal Message Counter Incorrect
• For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Cruise Control Description and Operation
• The K9 sends a serial data message to the K20 indicating the B22 function that has been requested.
Brake Pedal Position Sensor Signal = Invalid Serial Data

13 of 40
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify there are no other DTCs set, except for DTC P0703.

If DTC P0703 is set

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC P1553
14 of 40
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P1553
Distance Sensing Cruise Control Signal Message Counter Incorrect
Distance Sensing Cruise Control Communication Malfunction
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
15 of 40
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC P1553 is not set.
If the DTC is set
1. Replace the appropriate component:
• {If equipped} K14 Distance Sensing Cruise Control Module
• {If equipped} K124 Active Safety Control Module
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC P158A
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P158A
Cruise Control Calibration Incorrect
16 of 40
Engine Control Module Configuration Status in BCM = Cruise Control Configuration Mismatch

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify there are no other DTCs set, except for DTC P158A.
NOTE: During the programming procedure, follow the Service Programming
17 of 40
System (SPS) prompts for the correct ignition switch position.
3. Reprogram ECU - K9 Body Control Module & K20 Engine Control Module
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
SYMPTOMS - CRUISE CONTROL
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables.
1. Before using the symptom diagnostic table, perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in order to
verify the following conditions:
• The module can communicate via the serial data.
2. Review the system operation in order to understand the system functions. Refer to Cruise Control
Description and Operation.
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which can affect the operation of the Cruise Control System.
• Inspect the accessible system components or the visible system components for obvious damage or for
obvious conditions which can cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Symptom List
• Cruise Control Indicator Malfunction

• Cruise Control Malfunction
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
18 of 40
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Perform the scan tool control function: Instrument Panel Cluster Assembly - Illuminate All Indicators
3. Verify the component turns On and Off: Cruise Control Indicator
If the component does not turn On and Off
Replace the component: Instrument Panel Cluster Assembly
Go to next step: If the component turns On and Off

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
CRUISE CONTROL MALFUNCTION

19 of 40
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3623
Steering Wheel Controls Distance Sensing Cruise Control Gap Up/Down Signal Circuit
DTC B3794
Cruise Control Function Request Circuit
DTC P0564
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch Circuit
DTC P0565
Cruise Control Switch Circuit
DTC P0567
Cruise Control Resume Switch Circuit
DTC P0568
Cruise Control Set Switch Circuit
DTC P056C
Cruise Control Cancel Switch Circuit
DTC P0580
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0581
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0589
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch 2 Circuit
DTC P0592
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch 2 Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0593
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch 2 Circuit High Voltage
20 of 40
DTC P155A
DTC P155B
Cruise Control Set/Coast Switch 2 Circuit
DTC P155C
Cruise Control Resume/Accelerate Switch 2 Circuit
DTC P162C
Vehicle Speed Limiting/Warning Switch Circuit

12 V Reference 1 1 - -
B3794,
Cruise Control Set/Coast/Resume B3794, P0564,
1, P0580 B3794, P0565 P0567,
/Accelerate Switch Signal P155A
P0568, P0581
Distance Sensing Cruise Control P155A,
P155A, P155B 1 -
Gap Up/Down Switch Signal P155B
1. Cruise Control = Malfunction
Body Control Module-Scan Tool Parameter

12 V Reference = Normal Function Inactive Idle
12 V Reference = Open Circuit Open/Short to Ground Idle
12 V Reference = Short to Ground Undetermined State Undefined
12 V Reference = Short to Voltage Inactive Idle

Inactive/Cruise Control On/Set
/Accelerate Switch Signal = Normal Idle
/Resume/Cancel
Function
/Accelerate Switch Signal = Open Open/Short to Ground Idle
Circuit
/Accelerate Switch Signal = Short to Open/Short to Ground Idle
Ground
21 of 40
/Accelerate Switch Signal = Short to Short to Battery Idle
Voltage

Up/Down Switch Signal = Normal Inactive Idle/Gap Down
Function
Open/Short to Ground Inactive
Up/Down Switch Signal = Open Circuit
Up/Down Switch Signal = Short to Undetermined State Undefined
Ground
Up/Down Switch Signal = Short to Inactive Short to Battery
Voltage
B3623
Distance Sensing Cruise Control Follow Gap Set Circuit - Invalid Signal Received
B3794, P0564, P0565, P0567, P0568, P056C, P0580, P0581
Cruise Control Switch Circuit - Invalid Signal Received
P0589, P0592, P0593, P155B, P155C
Cruise Control Multifunction Switch 2 Circuit - Invalid Signal Received
P155A
P162C
22 of 40
Vehicle Speed Limiting/Warning Switch Circuit - Undetermined State

Diagnostic Aids
The cruise control system can be inhibited or disengaged for a number of reasons. These reasons may be a
normal function of the vehicle or as a result of action the driver has taken. The cruise control system may also
be inhibited or disengaged because of a fault in a vehicle system. The K20 Engine Control Module has a scan
tool data list available that can help identify what may have caused a cruise control inhibit or disengage. The
scan tool ECM Cruise Control Disable History Data list identifies conditions that will inhibit cruise control.
When the cruise control system is inhibited the cruise control system will be prevented from engaging when
requested by the driver, or the cruise control system will disengage, if the driver was actively utilizing the
system.
When attempting to diagnose the system, it is important to discuss with the customer the conditions under
which the apparent malfunction occurred. This is critical to help identify those scenarios where the inhibit or
disengage is the result of a driver action or normal system response and clarify how the function works. It is
also critical to identify when the apparent malfunction occurred when attempting to replicate the condition. The
parameters in the scan tool ECM Cruise Control Disable History Data list can be used to help isolate what is
causing an inhibit or disengage condition. The scan tool ECM Cruise Control Disable History Data list has
parameters that identify the last eight causes of an inhibit and the last eight causes of a disengage. For each
Cruise Control Inhibit History and Cruise Control Disengage History parameter, extra information is included in
additional parameters: Odometer at First Malfunction, Odometer at Last Malfunction, Diagnostic Status,
Malfunction Counter, and Ignition Cycles Since Last Diagnostic Event. The scan tool parameters are a rolling
snapshot of the last eight inhibit and disengage reasons, however, if the same condition causes an inhibit or
disengage, the reason will not be logged in the next parameter. Instead, the Malfunction Counter parameter will
increment and the Odometer at Last Malfunction parameter will update with the most recent odometer value
that the condition occurred. When diagnosing an inhibit or disengage concern, especially in the case of an
intermittent condition, these parameters are useful in helping determine the cause. Recurring causes will have a
larger number in the Malfunction Counter parameter and will likely have a wide variance between the
Odometer at First Malfunction and Odometer at Last Malfunction value, indicating the condition has occurred
over a period of time driving the vehicle.
Schematic Reference
23 of 40
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the condition does not exist: Cruise Control System Status = Inhibit by ECM
Cruise Control System Status = Inhibit by ECM
Go to next step: Cruise Control System Status Inhibit by ECM

3. Verify the component works as specified: Cruise Control Switch Assembly
4. Refer to: Body Control Module-Scan Tool Parameter
If a condition exists
Go to next step: If no condition exists


6. All OK.
Cruise Control Switch Signal

24 of 40
harness
• Cruise Control Switch Signal @ Component harness & The other end of the circuit @ Control
module harness
If the DTC sets

11. All OK.
Distance Sensing Cruise Control Gap Up/Down Switch Signal

25 of 40
harness
• Distance Sensing Cruise Control Gap Up/Down Switch Signal @ Component harness & The other
end of the circuit @ Control module harness
If the DTC sets

11. All OK.
Repair Instructions
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1.
Remove the steering wheel airbag access hole cover (1). Steering Wheel Airbag Access Hole Cover
26 of 40
Replacement
2. Steering Wheel Airbag - Remove - Steering Wheel Airbag Replacement
3.
4.
Steering Wheel Shroud (1) - Remove - Steering Wheel Shroud Replacement
5.
27 of 40
NOTE: Use a flat bladed plastic tool to release the manual shift auxiliary position
switch retaining tabs.
Remove the manual shift auxiliary position switch - steering wheel (1). Automatic Transmission
Manual Shift Auxiliary Position Switch Replacement (Tap up) , or Automatic Transmission Manual
Shift Auxiliary Position Switch Replacement (Tap down)
6.
Remove the cruise control switch bracket screw (1).
7.
28 of 40
8. Cruise Control Switch (1) - Remove
9.
Remove the 3 cruise control switch screws (1).
10. Remove the cruise control switch (3) from the cruise control switch bracket (2).
1.
29 of 40
Install the cruise control switch (3) to the cruise control switch bracket (2).
CAUTION: Fastener Caution .
2. Install the 3 cruise control switch screws (1) and tighten to 1.1 N.m (10 lb in).
3.
Cruise Control Switch (1) - Install
5.
30 of 40
Install the cruise control switch bracket screw (1) and tighten to 1.1 N.m (10 lb in).
6.
Install the manual shift auxiliary position switch - steering wheel (1). Automatic Transmission Manual
Shift Auxiliary Position Switch Replacement (Tap up) , or Automatic Transmission Manual Shift
Auxiliary Position Switch Replacement (Tap down)
7.
31 of 40
Steering Wheel Shroud (1) - Install - Steering Wheel Shroud Replacement
8.
9. Steering Wheel Airbag - Install - Steering Wheel Airbag Replacement
10.
32 of 40
Install the steering wheel airbag access hole cover (1). Steering Wheel Airbag Access Hole Cover
Replacement

CRUISE CONTROL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Cruise control is a speed control system that maintains a desired vehicle speed under normal driving conditions
at speeds above 40 km/h (25 mph). Steep grades may cause variations in the selected vehicle speeds.
The following are the main components of the Cruise Control System:
• The accelerator pedal

• The brake pedal position (BPP) sensor
• The body control module (BCM)
• The cruise on/off switch
• The cruise control cancel switch
• The + RES switch (equivalent to resume/accelerate switch)
• The - SET switch (equivalent to set/coast switch)
• The engine control module (ECM)
• The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor (gasoline engines only)
• The vehicle speed sensor
The body control module (BCM) monitors the signal circuit of the cruise control switches, which are located on
the steering wheel. The BCM relays the cruise control switch status to the engine control module (ECM) via the
serial data circuit. The ECM uses the status of the cruise control switch to determine when to capture and
maintain the vehicle speed. The ECM monitors the vehicle speed signal circuit in order to determine the desired
vehicle speed.
33 of 40
Voltage is supplied to the cruise control switch via the steering wheel control switch reference voltage circuit
supplied by the BCM. The cruise control function switches are arranged in a resistive ladder design, with each
cruise control function switch having a different resistance value. The BCM detects a specific voltage value that
is associated with the cruise control function switch being activated. The BCM sends a serial data message to
the ECM indicating that the on/off switch is active. Similarly, when the normally open + RES switch or the
normally open - SET switch are pressed, the switch closes and the BCM detects the predetermined voltage
signal on the cruise control resume/accel and set/coast switch signal circuit. The BCM sends a serial data
message to the ECM indicating that the + RES switch or the - SET switch is active.
Cruise Control Engaged
The Cruise Control System will engage and adjust vehicle speeds, based on the activation of the following
cruise control switches, which are located on the steering wheel:
• On/Off
• + RES
• - SET
To engage the Cruise Control System, ensure that the vehicle speed is above 40.2 km/h (25 mph), turn the cruise
On/Off switch ON and momentarily press the - SET switch. The ECM will engage the Cruise Control System
and record the vehicle speed. The ECM sends a serial data message to the instrument panel cluster (IPC) in
order to illuminate the Cruise Engaged indicator in the IPC. Refer to the vehicle owner's manual for the location
and operation of the cruise control On/Off indicators and driver information center (DIC) messages.
Pressing the accelerator pedal while the Cruise Control System is engaged, allows the driver to override the
Cruise Control System in order to accelerate the vehicle beyond the current set vehicle speed. When the
accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will decelerate and resume the current set vehicle speed.
The driver can also override the current set vehicle speed via the - SET switch and the + RES switch. When the
Cruise Control System is engaged, pressing and holding the - SET switch will allow the vehicle to decelerate
from the current set vehicle speed without deactivating the Cruise Control System. When the - SET switch is
released, the ECM will record the vehicle speed and maintain the vehicle speed as the new set vehicle speed.
When the Cruise Control System is engaged, momentarily pressing the - SET switch will allow the vehicle to
decelerate at a vehicle specific calibratable increment, commonly 1 km/h or 1 mph, each time that the - SET is
momentarily pressed, with a minimum vehicle speed of 38 km/h (24 mph). Refer to the vehicle Owner's Manual
for more information.
Pressing and holding the + RES switch, when the Cruise Control System is engaged, will allow the vehicle to
accelerate to a greater vehicle speed than the current set vehicle speed. When the + RES switch is released, the
ECM will record the vehicle speed and maintain the vehicle speed as the new set vehicle speed. When the
Cruise Control System is engaged, momentarily pressing the + RES switch will allow the vehicle to accelerate
at a vehicle specific calibratable increment, commonly 1 km/h or 1 mph, each time that the + RES switch is
momentarily pressed. Momentarily activating the + RES switch will recall the previous vehicle speed, after the
cruise control system has been disengaged by pressing the brake pedal, or CANCEL switch. Refer to the vehicle
Owner's Manual for more information.
Cruise Control Disengaged
The engine control module (ECM) disengages the cruise control operation based on the signals from the
following switches:
34 of 40
• The brake pedal position (BPP) sensor
• The On/Off switch
• The cruise control cancel switch
The Cruise Control System will disengage when the brake pedal is applied. The body control module (BCM)
monitors the BPP sensor via the BPP sensor signal circuit as the voltage signal increases while the pedal is
further applied. The ECM monitors the BPP signal through a discrete input and a serial data message signal
from the BCM indicating the brake status. When either signal indicates the brake pedal is applied, the ECM will
disengage the cruise control system.
The Cruise Control System will also disengage when the cruise control on/off switch is switched OFF, or the
cruise control cancel switch is activated. The body control module (BCM) determines when the cruise control
cancel switch is activated. When the normally open cancel switch is closed, the BCM detects the predetermined
voltage signal on the cruise control function switch circuit. The vehicle speed stored in the memory of the
engine control module will be erased when the cruise control On/Off switch is turned OFF, or the ignition
switch is turned OFF. The BCM sends a serial data message to the ECM in order to disengage the cruise control
system. When the Cruise Control System has been disengaged, the ECM sends a serial message to the
instrument panel cluster (IPC) in order to turn OFF the Cruise Engaged indicator.
Every time the Cruise Control System is disengaged, the ECM will keep track of the reason for system
disengagement. The last 8 disengagement reasons will be recorded within the ECM memory. The scan tool will
display the last 8 Cruise Disengage History parameters, in which one out of approximately 50 possible reasons
will be displayed in each of these 8 parameters. For the disengagement reason to be displayed within the scan
tool parameter the Cruise Control System is active and disengagement is requested.
When engagement of the system is requested but an engagement inhibit is present, the most recent inhibit
reason is recorded in the ECM history. The scan tool will display the most recent inhibit reason, in which one
out of approximately 50 possible reasons will be displayed.
Cruise Control Inhibited
The engine control module (ECM) inhibits the cruise control operation when any of the following conditions
exist:
• The ECM has not detected a brake pedal activation from the body control module (BCM) this ignition
cycle.
• A Cruise Control System DTC has been set.
• The vehicle speed is less than 38.6 km/h (24 mph).
• The vehicle speed is too high.
• The vehicle is in PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or 1st gear.
• The engine RPM is low.
• The engine RPM is high.
• The system voltage is not between 9 volts and 16 volts.
• The Antilock Brake System (ABS)/Traction Control System (TCS) is active for more than a calibratable
time (typically 0.3 to 0.7 seconds).
Cruise Control Inhibit Reasons
35 of 40
This is a general list of inhibit reasons. Not every inhibit reason is applicable to all vehicles. Refer to the scan
tool inhibit reason list for the last 8 reasons that have been recorded during the current ignition cycle.
Scan Tool Name Description Long Description

The vehicle acceleration rate is too
Acceleration Rate too High High acceleration
high.
The trailer brake system has been
TRAILER BRAKES APPLIED Trailer brakes applied
activated.
Cruise torque request rate limiting
Acceleration Time Rate limiting fault
active too long.
The cruise control type (adaptive
cruise or conventional cruise) is
Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive cruise control option
mismatched between the engine
Configuration Incorrect mismatch
control module (ECM) and the body
control module (BCM).
The antilock braking system was
Antilock Braking System
Antilock Braking System Active active. Only reported on enhanced
Active
cruise control vehicles.
An engine control module to
Automatic Braking Engine Automatic braking engine torque electronic brake control module
Torque Request Signal request signal communication (EBCM) serial data fault is active or
Communication Malfunction malfunction communication has been lost between
the modules.
The electronic brake control module
has detected a failure that does not
Automatic Braking Malfunction Brake system malfunction
allow automatic braking to be
performed.
The adaptive cruise control is being
inhibited by the ECM because a serial
Axle Torque Serial Axle Torque Serial
data signal timeout error has occurred
Communication Malfunction Communication Malfunction
with the hybrid max/min torque
signals.
The ignition voltage is too high at the
Voltage above high voltage
Battery Voltage Too High engine control module (typically 18
threshold
volts).
The ignition voltage is low at the
Voltage below low voltage
Battery Voltage Too Low engine control module (typically 9
threshold
volts).
Brake Pedal Applied Brake pedal apply The brake pedal was applied.
The brake pedal has not been seen as
applied prior to driver request to
engage cruise with set switch. A brake
pedal apply must be seen before
Brake Pedal Not Initialized Brake before cruise allowing cruise engagement during
each key cycle. On a vehicle equipped
with a manual transmission, a clutch
pedal apply may satisfy the brake
pedal apply criteria.
36 of 40
Brake Pedal Position Brake pedal position signal A brake pedal apply circuit fault has
Malfunction invalid been detected.
DTC P0703 is active or A serial data fault is active or
Brake Pedal Position Signal maximum time elapsed without communication has been lost with the
Malfunction receiving a valid Brake Pedal module sending the brake pedal apply
Position signal. state.
A brake pedal apply has been detected
Brake pedal driver applied based on brake pedal pressure as
Brake Pedal Pressure Detected
pressure detected measured by the electronic brake
control module.
Brake Pedal Released Position Brake apply sensor home The brake pedal position sensor
Not Learned position not learned released position is not learned.
Adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control automatic
Brake System Malfunction
automatic braking failed braking inoperative.
The engine torque calculation is
Calculated Torque Calculated engine torque
incorrect.
Clutch Pedal Applied Clutch switch active The clutch pedal was applied.
The Set/Coast switch was depressed
and the vehicle slowed below the
Coast Below Minimum Speed Coast below low speed inhibit
minimum cruise control operating
speed.
Cruise control is in coast mode with
Coast Mode Coast disengage the Set/Coast switch depressed and is
requesting no throttle.
A scan tool is plugged into the Data
Control Function Active DLC override
Link Connector (DLC) connector.
Control Module Memory A control module memory failure has
Memory failure
Malfunction been detected.
Control Module Processor Processor integrity fault (random An engine control module software
Malfunction access memory corruption) error has occurred.
Crawl mode is active and inhibiting
Crawl Mode Active Crawl Mode Active
cruise control.
Cruise Control Cancel Switch The cruise control cancel switch was
Cancel switch active
Active depressed.
Cruise Control Software A cruise control software execution
Sequence of completion checks
Malfunction error has occurred.
The cruise control On/Off switch is
Cruise Control Switch Inactive On/Off switch in Off state
turned off.
Analog cruise switch input out of The cruise control switch voltage
Cruise Control Switch Invalid
range signal is in an invalid range.
The cruise control switch serial data
Cruise Control Switch Serial Serial data fault (cruise switch fault is active or communication has
Communication Malfunction serial communication fault) been lost with the module sending
cruise control switch states.
The vehicle deceleration rate is too
Deceleration Rate Too High High deceleration
high.
37 of 40
Diagnostic Trouble Code Malfunction in PCM/ECM (DTC A DTC is active or in history that
(DTC) Set active) inhibits cruise control operation.
Adaptive cruise control is being
Distance Sensing Cruise Distance Sensing Cruise Control
inhibited by the ECM because a brake
Control Brake Pedal Applied Brake Pedal Applied
pedal apply has occurred.
inhibited by the ECM because the
Control Cancel Switch Active Cancel Switch Active
driver applied the cancel switch.
A distance sensing cruise control
Serial data fault for adaptive
module serial data fault is active or
cruise control throttle control and
Distance Sensing Cruise communication has been lost between
brake control signals sent by the
Control Data the distance sensing cruise control
distance sensing cruise control
module and the engine control
module
module.
Distance Sensing Cruise Distance sensing cruise control The distance sensing cruise control
Control Inhibit inhibited system is inhibited.
inhibited by the ECM because an
invalid sequence of cruise control
Control Invalid Engage Invalid Engage
applies, brake pedal applies, or an
invalid speed range has been detected.
Distance Sensing Cruise Distance Sensing Cruise Control inhibited by the ECM because the
Control Off Off driver has turned off the cruise on/off
switch.
inhibited by the ECM due to a fault
Control Reduced Engine Power Reduced Engine Power
resulting in "Reduced Engine Power".
The driven wheel speed is greater than
Driven Wheel Speed Higher Driven wheel speed greater
the non driven wheel speed (slip
Than Non Driven Wheel Speed (wheel slip detection)
detection).
PCM/ECM inhibit (RAM Engine control module internal
Engine Control Module
corruption) communication error.
Engine Control Module (ECM) An engine control module running
ECM running reset
Reset reset has occurred.
Engine Overspeed Protection Injectors disabled (engine Engine RPM limiter active with fuel
Active overspeed fuel cut-off active) cut off active.
Engine Overtemperature The engine is over temperature. The
Engine metal overtemp active
Protection Active engine is overheated.
The engine has not been running long
Engine Run Time Engine run time not elapsed
enough, typically five seconds.
The engine RPM is too low (near stall)
Engine Speed Engine speed too low or too high or too high (near engine RPM fuel
shutoff).
The driver has overridden cruise
Excessive Accelerator Position Pedal greater than cruise control set speed with accelerator
Override (override) pedal for greater than an allowable
38 of 40
time.
1st Gear First Gear Transmission is engaged in 1st gear.
Gear Change without Applied Manual transmission out of gear Manual transmission shifted to Neutral
Clutch Pedal with no clutch pedal apply without clutch pedal being applied.
Hill Descent Control System The hill descent control system has
Hill Descent Control Active
Active gone active.
An electronic brake control module
Hill Descent Control Serial Hill Descent Control Serial serial data fault is active or
Communication Malfunction Communication Malfunction communication has been lost between
the EBCM and ECM.
Cruise control is inhibited on hybrid
applications when "Regen on
Hybrid/EV System Hybrid Cruise Disengage
Demand" is requested by the driver via
the tap-up/tap-down paddles.
The cruise control mode is incorrect
Illegal Mode Illegal cruise mode
based on switch states.
Lane Center Control Serial Data Lane Center Control Serial inhibited by the ECM because a serial
Error Communication Malfunction data error has been detected on a
vehicle with Lane Center Control.
Non Driven Wheel Speed
The non driven wheel speed is greater
Higher Than Drive Wheel Non-driven wheel speed greater
than the driven wheel speed.
Speed
This disengagement reason may be
None None displayed after a dead battery repair or
module replacement.
Park Brake Applied Park brake switch signal active The parking brake is applied.
The Power Take Off (PTO) system is
Power Take-Off Active Power Take Off active
active.
Rear Axle in Low Range Rear axle in low The rear axle is in low range.
Set/Coast and
SET and RESUME switches The Set/Coast and Resume/Accelerate
Resume/Accelerate Switches
simultaneously active switches were pressed simultaneously.
Active Simultaneously
The Set/Coast switch is selected,
Set/Coast Switch Active With
vehicle speed is above set speed and
Vehicle Speed Higher Than Set Over schedule tap-down
does not decrease. May be due to
Point
traveling down hill.
Driver has turned on the Speed
Speed Limiting/Warning Speed limiter/warning On/Off Limiter/Warning on/off switch. Cruise
System On switch turned on is disabled/inhibited and cruise on/off
switch will be set to Off.
The electronic throttle control system
Throttle Actuator Control Electronic throttle control
has detected a failure in the throttle
System prevents cruise operation
control hardware.
The traction control system was
Traction Control Active Traction control active
active.
39 of 40
Traction Control System Traction Control System A fault is present in the traction
Malfunction Malfunction control system.
The traction control system has been
Traction Control System Off Traction Control System Off
turned off by the driver.
Transfer Case in 4WD Low
Transfer case in 4WD Low The transfer case is in low range.
Range
A transmission DTC is active or in
Transmission Gear Ratio
Transmission gear fault history, that inhibits cruise control
Malfunction
operation.
Transmission Not in Forward Transmission in neutral, reverse The transmission gear selector is not
Gear or park in a forward gear.
Vehicle Overspeed Protection MPH limited fuel (vehicle The vehicle overspeed protection is
Active overspeed fuel cut-off active) active with fuel cut off active.
Vehicle speed has exceeded driver
selected set speed by more than an
Vehicle Speed Higher Than Set allowable amount. This may occur
Over schedule
Point while driving down a significant grade
or driver overriding cruise while
performing a passing maneuver.
The vehicle speed is below cruise
Vehicle Speed Lower Than Set
Under schedule control set speed by more than an
Point
allowable amount.
Vehicle speed exceeds high Vehicle speed has exceeded maximum
Vehicle Speed Too High
speed threshold cruise operating speed.
Vehicle speed dropped below the
cruise control minimum operating
speed. May be due to hilly terrain and
Vehicle speed drops below low
Vehicle Speed Too Low low vehicle speed. Manual
speed threshold
transmission gear selection and engine
torque may contribute to this
disengagement reason.
The vehicle stability control system
Vehicle Stability System Active Vehicle stability control active
was active.
Vehicle Stability System Vehicle Stability System A fault has been detected in the
Malfunction Malfunction vehicle stability control system.
The vehicle stability control system
Vehicle Stability System Off Vehicle Stability System Off
has been turned off by the driver.
40 of 40
Data Communications - Data Link Communications Description And Operation - XT4

DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
NOTE: This is an overview of different serial data buses used by GM devices to

communicate with each others. Use Data Communication Wiring Schematics to
find out which serial data buses are configured for a specific vehicle.
Data Link Communications Overview
There are many components in a vehicle that rely on information from other sources, transmit information to
other sources, or both. Serial data communication networks provide a reliable, cost effective, way for various
components of the vehicle to "talk" to one another and share information.
GM uses a number of different communication buses to insure the timely and efficient exchange of information
between devices. When compared to each other, some of these buses are different in nature as far as speed,
signal characteristics, and behavior. An example of this is the High Speed GMLAN and Low Speed GMLAN
Buses.
On the other hand, when other buses are compared to each other they have similar characteristics and simply
operate in parallel. In this case they are used to group together components which have high interaction.
Examples are the High Speed GMLAN, Powertrain Expansion, and Chassis Expansion Buses. This allows them
to communicate with each other on a bus with reduced message congestion insuring faster and the more timely
exchange of information than if all vehicle devices were on a single bus.
The majority of information that exists within a given network generally stays local; however some information
will have to be shared on other networks. Control modules designated as Gateway's perform the function of
transferring information between the various buses. A Gateway module is connected to at least 2 buses and will
interact with each network according to its message strategy and transmission models.
GMLAN provides the capability for a receiving device to monitor message transmissions from other devices in
order to determine if messages of interest are not being received. The primary purpose is to allow reasonable
default values to be substituted for the information no longer being received. Additionally, a device may set a
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) to indicate that the device it is expecting information from is no longer
communicating. A lost communication DTC typically is set in devices other than the device with a
communication failure.
K9 Body Control Module (BCM)
The K9 Body Control Module has discrete input and output terminals to control the vehicle's body functions.
The K9 Body Control Module is wired to the High Speed GMLAN Bus, Low Speed GMLAN Bus and multiple
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Buses and acts as a gateway between them. The various K9 Body Control
Module input and output circuits are illustrated in the corresponding functional areas on the K9 Body Control
Module electrical Wiring schematics. Refer to the Body Control System Wiring Schematics for more detailed
information.
Power Mode Master
1 of 9
The K9 Body Control Module functions as the power mode master. The ignition switch is a low current switch
with multiple discrete ignition switch signals to the power mode master for determining the power mode that
will be sent over the serial data circuits to the other devices that need this information; the power mode master
will activate relays and other direct outputs of the power mode master as needed. Refer to Power Mode
Description and Operation for a complete description of power mode functions.
Gateway
The K9 Body Control Module functions as a gateway or translator. The purpose of the gateway is to translate
serial data messages between the High Speed GMLAN Bus and the Low Speed GMLAN Bus for
communication between the various devices. The gateway will interact with each network according to that
network's transmission protocol. All communication between the K9 Body Control Module and a scan tool is
done through the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus.
K56 Serial Data Gateway Module (Gen 3)
NOTE: The Data Bus Diagnostic Tool will not work with vehicles equipped with K56
Serial Data Gateway Module gen 3.
This vehicle is equipped with a K56 Serial Data Gateway Module gen 3. The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module
is used to handle communications between multiple GMLAN buses and functions as a gateway to isolate the
secure networks from the unsecured networks. It was created to mitigate bus loading to support cyber security
and new active/advanced safety features (if equipped). The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module is used as a
frame-to-frame gateway for all functional messages. Communication between the K56 Serial Data Gateway
Module and a scan tool is done through the primary High Speed GMLAN bus. When the K56 Serial Data
Gateway Module is not communicating, the scan tool can not communicate with the vehicle.
The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module has two microprocessors within the electronic control unit. Each
microprocessor is diagnosed/programmed independently via the scan tool because the two microprocessors do
not talk internally. Each of these processors are responsible for managing the traffic for specific communication
buses on the vehicle. The two particular buses that they will manage are high speed and low speed. If
communication does not exist or the particular micros have not been programmed, control modules won't be
able to communicate with or through the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
Low speed Microprocessor
• The low speed microprocessor is programmable via the X84 Data Link Connector (DLC) terminal 1. This
low speed bus between the X84 Data Link Connector and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module is called
the Low Speed DLC Bus.
• The low speed microprocessor is capable of gating signals between the Low Speed DLC, the primary
Low Speed GMLAN, and the Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN Buses.
• The low speed microprocessor is also capable of gating signals between the Object High Speed DLC Bus
(DLC terminals 3 & 11) and the Object High Speed GMLAN Bus.
High speed Microprocessor
• The high speed micro is programmable via the X84 Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals 6 & 14. This
high speed bus between the X84 Data Link Connector and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module is called
High Speed DLC Bus.
• The high speed micro is capable of gating signals between the High Speed DLC, the primary High Speed
2 of 9
GMLAN, the Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN, and the Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN
Buses.
• The high speed micro is also capable of gating signals between the Chassis High Speed DLC Bus (DLC
terminals 12 & 13) and the Chassis High Speed GMLAN Bus.
High Speed GMLAN Bus (Circuits 2500 & 2501)
NOTE: Continuity check cannot be performed between the X84 Data Link Connector
and control modules on the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus.
A primary High Speed GMLAN Bus is used where data needs to be exchanged at a high enough rate to
minimize the delay between the occurrence of a change in sensor value and the reception of this information by
a control device using the information to adjust vehicle system performance.
The primary High Speed GMLAN serial data network consists of two twisted wires. One signal circuit is
identified as GMLAN-High and the other signal circuit is identified as GMLAN-Low. At each end of the data
bus there is a 120 Ω termination resistor between the GMLAN-High and GMLAN-Low circuits.
Data symbols (1's and 0's) are transmitted sequentially at a rate of 500 Kbit/s. The data to be transmitted over
the bus is represented by the voltage difference between the GMLAN-High signal voltage and the GMLAN-
Low signal voltage.
When the two wire bus is at rest the GMLAN-High and GMLAN-Low signal circuits are not being driven and
this represents a logic "1". In this state both signal circuits are at the same voltage of 2.5 V. The differential
voltage is approximately 0 V.
When a logic "0" is to be transmitted, the GMLAN-High signal circuit is driven higher to about 3.5 V and the
GMLAN-Low circuit is driven lower to about 1.5 V. The differential voltage becomes approximately 2.0 (+/-
0.5) V.
High Speed DLC Bus (Circuits 1978 & 1979)
Between the X84 Data Link Connector (DLC) terminals 6 & 14 and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module
terminals 15 X1 & 16 X1, there is a high speed bus called the High Speed DLC Bus. The High Speed DLC Bus
is similar to the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus. Between the GMLAN-High and GMLAN-Low circuits,
there is a 120 Ω termination resistor internal to the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module. There is no terminating
resistor at the DLC.
The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module uses its high speed microprocessor to gate signals between the High
Speed DLC, the primary High Speed GMLAN, the Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN, and the Gateway
Isolated High Speed GMLAN Buses.
Chassis High Speed GMLAN Bus (Circuits 6105 & 6106) (if equipped)
and control modules on the Chassis High Speed GMLAN Bus.
The Chassis High Speed GMLAN Bus (or Chassis Expansion Bus) is basically a copy of the High Speed
GMLAN Bus except that its use is reserved for chassis components. This implementation splits message
congestion between two parallel buses helping to insure timely message transmission and reception. Sometimes
communication is required between the Chassis High Speed GMLAN Bus and the primary High Speed
GMLAN Bus. This is accomplished by using the K17 Electronic Brake Control Module as the Gateway
3 of 9
module. Since the Chassis High Speed GMLAN Bus and primary High Speed GMLAN Bus operate in the same
manner, the diagnostics for each are similar.
Chassis High Speed DLC Bus (Circuits 1980 & 1981)
terminals 17 X1 & 18 X1, there is a high speed bus called the Chassis High Speed DLC Bus. The Chassis High
Speed DLC Bus is similar to the Chassis High Speed GMLAN Bus. Between the GMLAN-High and GMLAN-
Low circuits, there is a 120 Ω termination resistor internal to the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module. There is no
terminating resistor at the DLC.
The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module uses its high speed microprocessor to gate signals between the Chassis
High Speed DLC Bus and the Chassis High Speed GMLAN Bus.
Powertrain High Speed GMLAN Bus (Circuits 7493 & 7494) (if equipped)
and control modules on the Powertrain High Speed GMLAN Bus.
The Powertrain High Speed GMLAN Bus (or Powertrain Expansion Bus) is basically a copy of the High Speed
GMLAN Bus except that its use is reserved for Powertrain components. The bus is optional based upon feature
content. Sometimes communication is required between the Powertrain High Speed GMLAN Bus and the
primary High Speed GMLAN Bus. This is accomplished by using the K20 Engine Control Module as the
Gateway module. Since the Powertrain High Speed GMLAN Bus and the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus
operate in the same manner, the diagnostics for each are similar.
Powertrain Sensor High Speed GMLAN Bus (Circuits 4498 & 4499) (if equipped)
and control modules on the Powertrain Sensor High Speed GMLAN Bus.
The Powertrain Sensor High Speed GMLAN Bus is basically a copy of the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus
except that its use is reserved for Powertrain components. The bus is optional based upon feature content.
Sometimes communication is required between the Powertrain Sensor High Speed GMLAN Bus and the
primary High Speed GMLAN Bus. This is accomplished by using the K20 Engine Control Module as the
Gateway module. Since the Powertrain Sensor High Speed GMLAN Bus and the primary High Speed GMLAN
Bus operate in the same manner, the diagnostics for each are similar.
Object High Speed GMLAN Bus (Circuits 3811 & 3813) (if equipped)
and control modules on the Object High Speed GMLAN Bus.
The Object High Speed GMLAN Bus is basically a copy of the High Speed GMLAN Bus except that its use is
reserved for the enhanced safety system. This implementation is used to isolate the heavy communication
among the enhanced safety system devices from the other vehicle buses, reducing congestion. The K124 Active
Safety Control Module is connected to the Object High Speed GMLAN Bus as well as the primary High Speed
GMLAN Bus, the Chassis High Speed GMLAN Bus, and the Low Speed GMLAN Bus. The K124 Active
Safety Control Module acts as a Gateway module for all required communication between the Object High
Speed GMLAN Bus devices and devices on these other vehicle buses. The Object High Speed GMLAN Bus
operates in the same manner as the Chassis High Speed GMLAN and primary High Speed GMLAN buses and
so the diagnostics are similar. The Object High Speed GMLAN Bus is physically partitioned into a Front Object
4 of 9
Bus and a Rear Object Bus with each partition having its own communication enable circuit to activate the
partition, but functional operation of both is identical. The Front Object Bus standard devices are the K124
Active Safety Control Module, the K109 Frontview Camera Module (or B174W Frontview Camera -
Windshield), and the B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range. The Front Object Bus optional devices are
the B233LF Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Left Front and the B233RF Radar Sensor Module - Short
Range Right Front. The Rear Object Bus is optional and when present will have the K124 Active Safety Control
Module, B233LR Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Left Rear, and B233RR Radar Sensor Module - Short
Range Right Rear on the bus. All Object High Speed GMLAN Bus components are powered by the K124
Active Safety Control Module via the communication enable circuits, except the K109 Frontview Camera
Module (or B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield) which is powered directly by battery.
Object High Speed DLC Bus (Circuits 2089 & 2090)
terminals 13 X1 & 14 X1, there is a high speed bus called the Object High Speed DLC Bus. The Object High
Speed DLC Bus is similar to the Object High Speed GMLAN Bus. Between the GMLAN-High and GMLAN-
Low circuits, there is a 120 Ω termination resistor internal to the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module. There is no
terminating resistor at the DLC.
The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module uses its low speed microprocessor to gate signals between the Object
High Speed DLC Bus and the Object High Speed GMLAN Bus.
Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN Bus (Circuits 1304 & 1305)
NOTE: Continuity check cannot be performed between the X84 Data Link Connector (or
control modules on the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus) and control modules
on the Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN Bus.
The Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN Bus is an extension of the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus
except it is separated from the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus by the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module for
cybersecurity protection. The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module verifies data messages being transmitted from
the control modules on the Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN Bus back to the primary High Speed
GMLAN Bus are good with valid transmitter messages. This bus does not terminate to the X84 Data Link
Connector.
The Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN Bus consists of two twisted wires. One signal circuit is identified as
GMLAN-High and the other signal circuit is identified as GMLAN-Low. At each end of the data bus there is a
120 Ω termination resistor between the GMLAN-High and GMLAN-Low circuits.
Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN Bus (Circuits 3935 & 3936)
control modules on the primary High Speed GMLAN Bus) and control modules
on the Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN Bus.
The Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN Bus is not cybersecurity protected and does not terminate at the
X84 Data Link Connector. This expansion bus is created to alleviate the throughput on the primary High Speed
GMLAN Bus.
The Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN Bus consists of two twisted wires. One signal circuit is identified
as GMLAN-High and the other signal circuit is identified as GMLAN-Low. At each end of the data bus there is
a 120 Ω termination resistor between the GMLAN-High and GMLAN-Low circuits.
5 of 9
Ethernet Bus (if equipped)
At the core of the infotainment system is the Radio Ethernet Audio Video Bridging switch which communicates
directly to each contributing Infotainment module terminator. The Ethernet harness consists of twisted pair
wires from point to point. Each device on the Ethernet infotainment system sends/receives data at 100 Mbit/s
to/from a specified port at the A11 Radio. The Radio/Ethernet will also be used to program USB software
update files to the devices connected to the Ethernet ports.
The A11 Radio is the Ethernet master. The Radio communicates with other devices and systems in the vehicle
via GMLAN and LIN buses. Diagnostic Trouble Codes will be read on GMLAN to diagnose Ethernet, LIN and
system faults. GMLAN will also be used for programming calibrations.
Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST) Bus (Circuits 3997 & 3998) (if equipped)
The MOST Infotainment network is a dedicated high speed multimedia streaming data bus independent from
GMLAN. The MOST Bus will be configured in a physical hardwired loop with each device within the bus
sends and receives data on an assigned MOST addresses in a set order. Each device on the MOST Bus will be
required to have twisted pair copper wires (2 transmit TX, 2 receive RX, and 1 electronic control line which is a
12 V wakeup signal line). The A11 Radio is the MOST Master and will monitor the bus for vehicle
configuration, Infotainment data messages and errors on the bus. The MOST initialization consists of a short
100 ms low voltage pulse on the electronic control line (or MOST control line) connected to all devices
contained on the MOST ring. This wakeup message once received by each device, will first respond with a
generic device response. Once these initial responses on the MOST Bus are reported successfully without error
to the A11 Radio, the second data request will record the MOST device addresses, their functionality
requirements and capabilities within. The A11 Radio will learn this information and also record the address
node sequence on the MOST Bus at this point. This node address list will now be stored within the A11 Radio
as the MOST Bus configuration (called "Last Working MOST ID of Node 1 - 9" on scan tool data display).
When MOST receive, transmit, or control line faults are detected, transmit/receive messages will not received
as expected from the wakeup request. The A11 Radio and the K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module
will then perform diagnostics to isolate these MOST faults. If the MOST control line is shorted low to 0 V for
excess amount of time, the A11 Radio will set a U2098 DTC and K74 Human Machine Interface Control
Module will set a U0029 02 DTC. At this point the MOST Bus will be unable to communicate until the shorted
MOST control line is repaired.
Once the shorted MOST control line diagnostics pass, the A11 Radio will attempt to resend the initial short
pulse attempts up to 3 times on the MOST control line. If the expected responses are not received, the A11
Radio continues into a failure mode setting a U0028 DTC and will continue on to send one 300 ms long pulse,
which will enable the furthest upstream transmitting device to become the surrogate MOST Master in this
MOST fault/diagnostic mode. When the A11 Radio receives this new MOST Master identity, the surrogate
MOST master device can be identified based on scan tool data parameter "Surrogate MOST Master Node
Upstream Position". The scan tool should be used to determine the MOST Bus configuration and direction by
utilizing the "Last Working MOST ID of Node 1 - 9" parameters from the A11 Radio data display. When a fault
is present, it will indicate the newly enabled "Surrogate MOST Master Node Upstream Position" from the A11
Radio. This will assist in determining where the MOST bus/control is at fault. The MOST device upstream from
the surrogate MOST master device, transmit, receive, or control lines will be the suspect areas for diagnostics at
this point. These faults can be associated with any of the MOST transmit, receive, or control line twisted copper
wires or possibly an internal device fault.
The K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module will set a U0029 00 DTC when it diagnoses a MOST bus
not communicating properly after one attempt. When the DTC U0029 00 is set by the K74 Human Machine
Interface Control Module without the corresponding DTC U0028 from the A11 Radio, it will be an indication
6 of 9
of an intermittent wiring/device condition.
FlexRay Bus (if equipped)
The FlexRay Bus is developed for safety related applications and higher data rate in real time application. The
communication is time triggered. The FlexRay serial data network consists of two unshielded twisted wires to
connect FlexRay nodes together. A FlexRay node is a device connected to a FlexRay Bus.
The FlexRay serial data network features 2 communication channels: channel A and channel B. Each channel
may be operated at a data rate of up to 10 Mbit/s. FlexRay nodes can be connected to either both channels or a
single channel. Each FlexRay channel consists of multiple branches. Each branch is a private bus. At each end
of a branch, there is a 100 Ω terminating resistor connected between the pair of FlexRay serial data circuits. The
terminating resistors can be external or internal to a FlexRay device.
The second FlexRay channel can be used as a redundant channel for fault toleration or to increase data rate of
up to 20 Mbit/s. The dual channel configuration consists of two independent data channels for fault-tolerance.
When one channel fails, the communication can still continue with reduced bandwidth.
Low Speed GMLAN Bus (Circuit 5060)
and control modules on the Low Speed GMLAN Bus.
Low Speed GMLAN Bus is used in applications where a high data rate is not required which allows for the use
of less complex components. It is typically used for operator controlled functions where the response time
requirements are slower than those required for dynamic vehicle control.
The Low Speed GMLAN Serial Data Network consists of a single wire, ground referenced bus with high side
voltage drive. During on road vehicle operation data symbols (1's and 0's) are transmitted sequentially at the
normal rate of 33.3 Kbit/s. For component programming only, a special high speed data mode of 83.3 Kbit/s
may be used.
Unlike the high speed dual wire networks, the single wire low speed network does not use terminating resistors
at either end of the network.
The data symbols to be transmitted over the bus are represented by different voltage signals on the bus. When
the Low Speed GMLAN Bus is at rest and is not being driven, there is a low signal voltage of approximately
0.2 V. This represents a logic "1". When a logic "0" is to be transmitted, the signal voltage is driven higher to
around 4.0 V or higher.
Low Speed DLC Bus (Circuit 2100)
Between the X84 Data Link Connector (DLC) terminal 1 and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module terminal 26
X1, there is a low speed bus called the Low Speed DLC Bus. The Low Speed DLC Bus is similar to the primary
Low Speed GMLAN Bus.
The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module uses its low speed microprocessor to gate signals between the Low
Speed DLC, the primary Low Speed GMLAN, and the Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN Buses.
Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN Bus (Circuit 1102)
control modules on the primary Low Speed GMLAN Bus) and control modules
7 of 9
on the Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN Bus.
The Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN Bus is an extension of the primary Low Speed GMLAN Bus except
it is separated from the primary Low Speed GMLAN Bus by the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module for
cybersecurity protection. The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module verifies data messages being transmitted from
the control modules on the Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN Bus back to the primary Low Speed
GMLAN Bus are good with valid transmitter messages. This bus does not terminate to the X84 Data Link
Connector.
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus
The Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus consists of a single wire with a transmission rate of 10.417 Kbit/s.
This bus is used to exchange information between a master control module and other smart devices which
provide supporting functionality. This type of configuration does not require the capacity or speed of either a
High Speed GMLAN Bus or Low Speed GMLAN Bus and is thus relatively simpler.
The data symbols (1's and 0's) to be transmitted are represented by different voltage levels on the
communication bus. When the LIN Bus is at rest and is not being driven, the signal is in a high voltage state of
approximately Vbatt. This represents a logic "1". When a logic "0" is to be transmitted, the signal voltage is
driven low to about ground (0.0 V).
Communication Enable Circuit Description
Devices on High Speed GMLAN Bus enable or disable communication based on the voltage level of the Serial
Data Communication Enable circuit or Accessory Wakeup Serial Data circuit. When the circuit voltage is high
(around 12 V), communications are enabled. When the circuit is low, communications are disabled.
X84 Data Link Connector (DLC)
The X84 Data Link Connector is a standardized 16-cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated
by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following:
• Terminal 1: Low Speed GMLAN Serial Data #3 terminal (Low Speed DLC Bus)
• Terminal 3: High Speed GMLAN Serial Data (+) (13) terminal (Object High Speed DLC Bus)
• Terminal 4: Scan tool power ground terminal
• Terminal 5: Common signal ground terminal
• Terminal 6: High Speed GMLAN Serial Data (+) (11) terminal (High Speed DLC Bus)
• Terminal 11: High Speed GMLAN Serial Data (-) (13) terminal (Object High Speed DLC Bus)
• Terminal 12: High Speed GMLAN Serial Data (+) (12) terminal (Chassis High Speed DLC Bus)
• Terminal 13: High Speed GMLAN Serial Data (-) (12) terminal (Chassis High Speed DLC Bus)
• Terminal 14: High Speed GMLAN Serial Data (-) (11) terminal (High Speed DLC Bus)
• Terminal 16: Scan tool power, battery positive voltage terminal
Serial Data Reference
The scan tool communicates over the various buses on the vehicle. When a scan tool is installed on a vehicle,
the scan tool will try to communicate with every device that could be optioned into the vehicle. If an option is
not installed on the vehicle, the scan tool will display No Comm (or Not Connected) for that optional device. In
order to avert misdiagnoses of No Communication with a specific device, refer to Data Link References for a
list of devices and the buses they communicate with. Use schematics and specific vehicle build RPO codes to
8 of 9
determine optional devices.
9 of 9
Data Communications - Diagnostic Information And Procedures (1 Of 2) - XT4

CONTROL MODULE U CODE LIST
This list includes all Data Communications related U-code DTCs in alphanumeric order with descriptors for all
devices. Not all DTCs listed will be applicable to all vehicles.
DTC DTC Descriptor

U0001 High Speed CAN Bus Malfunction
U0002 High Speed CAN Bus
U0009 High Speed CAN Bus [-] Shorted to Bus [+]
U0020 Low Speed CAN Bus
U0028 MOST Bus
U0029 MOST Bus Performance
Control Module Communication Bus A Off
U0073
Control Module Communication High Speed CAN Bus Off
Control Module Communication Bus B Off
U0074
Control Module Communication Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus Off
U0075 Control Module Communication Object Detection CAN Bus Off
U0076 Control Module Communication Powertrain Sensor CAN Bus Off
U0077 Control Module Communication Chassis Expansion CAN Bus Off
U0078 Control Module Communication Low Speed CAN Bus Off
U007A Control Module Communication High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus Off
U007B Control Module Communication High Speed Extension CAN Bus Off
U007C Control Module Communication High Speed Extension CAN Bus 2 Off
U007D Control Module Communication Low Speed Extension CAN Bus Off
U007E Control Module Communication FlexRay 1A Bus Off
U007F Control Module Communication FlexRay 1B Bus Off
U0100 Lost Communication With Engine Control Module
U0101 Lost Communication With Transmission Control Module
U0102 Lost Communication with Transfer Case Control Module
U0103 Lost Communication with Shift Lever Module
U0104 Lost Communication With Cruise Control Module
U0105 Lost Communication with Fuel Injector Control Module
U0106 Lost Communication with Glow Plug Control Module
Lost Communication with Fuel Pump Control Module (2013 and prior)
U0109
Lost Communication with Chassis Control Module (2014 and beyond)
U010C Lost Communication with Turbocharger Boost Control Module
U010E Lost Communication with Reductant Sensor Module
U010F Lost Communication with Air Conditioning Control Module
1 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
U0110 Lost Communication with Drive Motor Control Module
U0111 Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control Module
U0112 Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control Module
U0114 Lost Communication with Four Wheel Drive Clutch Control Module
U0115 Lost Communication with Engine Control Module B
U0117 Lost Communication With Power Take-Off Control Module
Lost Communication with Electronic Brake Control Module
U0121
Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module
U0122 Lost Communication With Vehicle Stability Control Module
U0123 Lost Communication with Yaw Rate Sensor Module
U0125 Lost Communication With Multi-Axis Acceleration Sensor Module
U0126 Lost Communication With Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module
U0128 Lost Communication With Park Brake Control Module
U0129 Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module
U012A Lost Communication With Chassis Control Module
U012B Lost Communication with Chassis Control Module - Auxiliary
U0130 Lost Communication With Power Steering Control Module
U0131 Lost Communication With Power Steering Control Module
U0132 Lost Communication With Suspension Control Module
U0133 Lost Communication With Air Suspension Control Module
U0134 Lost Communication with Power Steering Control Module - Rear
U0136 Lost Communication With Differential Control Module - Rear
U0137 Lost Communication with Trailer Brake Control Module
U0139 Lost Communication With Suspension Control Module 2
U0140 Lost Communication With Body Control Module
U0146 Lost Communication with Serial Data Gateway Module
U0151 Lost Communication With Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module
U0154 Lost Communication with Passenger Presence Module
U0155 Lost Communication With Instrument Cluster
U0158 Lost Communication With Head-Up Display
U0159 Lost Communication With Parking Assist Control Module
U0160 Lost Communication With Chime Alarm Control Module
U0164 Lost Communication with HVAC Control Module
U0166 Lost Communication with Auxiliary Heater Control Module
U0167 Lost Communication with Immobilizer Control Module
U0168 Lost Communication With Keyless Entry Control Module
U016B Lost Communication with Electric A/C Compressor Control Module
U0170 Lost Communication with Passenger Presence Detection Sensor Module
U017E Lost Communication with Seat Belt Retractor Motor Module
U0181 Lost Communication with Automatic Headlamp Leveling Control Module
U0182 Lost Communication With Lighting Control Module - Front
U0184 Lost Communication With Radio
U0186 Lost Communication With Speaker Amplifier Module
2 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
U0196 Lost Communication With Rear Audio Control Module
U0191 Lost Communication With Television
U0193 Lost Communication With Digital Radio Receiver Control Module
U0197 Lost Communication With Telephone Control Module
U0198 Lost Communication with Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
U019E Lost Communication With Transmission Range Control Module
U01A0 Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control Module 1
U01B0 Lost Communication with Battery Monitor Module
U01B4 Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module 2
U0201 Lost Communication with Passenger Door Switch Panel Control Module
U0203 Lost Communication With Left Rear Door Switch Panel Control Module
U0204 Lost Communication With Right Rear Door Switch Panel Control Module
U0207 Lost Communication With Moveable Roof Control Module
U0208 Lost Communication with Seat Memory Control Module
U0209 Lost Communication With Front Seat Heating Control Module
U0210 Lost Communication With Rear Seat Heating Control Module
U0230 Lost Communication With Liftgate Control Module
U0231 Lost Communication with Rain Sensor Module
U0232 Lost Communication with Side Object Detection Control Module - Left
U0233 Lost Communication with Side Object Detection Control Module - Right
U0236 Lost Communication With Steering Column Lock Module
U0237 Lost Communication With Multimedia Player Interface Module
Lost Communication With Vehicle Direction Camera Control Module (without
U023A UGN)
Lost Communication With Active Safety Control Module 1 (with UGN)
U023B Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 2
U023C Lost Communication with Night Vision Camera Control Module
U0241 Lost Communication With Left Headlamp High Beam Control Module
U0242 Lost Communication With Right Headlamp High Beam Control Module
U0248 Lost Communication with Remote Accessory Module
U0249 Lost Communication with Rear Seat Entertainment Control Module
U0250 Lost Communication with Impact Classification System Module
U0252 Lost Communication With Trailer Interface Control Module
U0253 Lost Communication with Accessory Protocol Interface Module
U0254 Lost Communication With Remote Start Module
U0255 Lost Communication With Info Display Module
U0256 Lost Communication With Infotainment Faceplate Control Module
3 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication With Info Display Module/Infotainment Faceplate Control
U0257
Module
U0259 Lost Communication with Special Purpose Vehicle Control Module
U025B Lost Communication with Special Purpose Vehicle Control Module "C"
U025C Lost Communication with Special Purpose Vehicle Control Module "D"
U0264 Lost Communication With Camera Module - Rear
U0265 Lost Communication with Left Front Short Range Radar Sensor Module
U0266 Lost Communication with Night Vision Camera
U0268 Lost Communication with Right Front Short Range Radar Sensor Module
U0269 Lost Communication with Front Long Range Object Sensor
U026A Lost Communication with Frontview Camera Module
Lost Communication with Rear Short Range Object Sensor
U026B
Lost Communication with Left Rear Short Range Radar Sensor Module
U026C Lost Communication with Right Rear Short Range Radar Sensor Module
U026D Lost Communication with Rear Middle Short Range Radar Sensor Module
U0284 Lost Communication with Active Grille Air Shutter 1 Motor Module
U0285 Lost Communication with Active Grille Air Shutter 2 Motor Module
U0293 Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module
U0298 Lost Communication with DC/DC Converter Control Module
U029D Lost Communication with NOx Sensor 1 Module
U029E Lost Communication with NOx Sensor 2 Module
U02A1 Lost Communication with NOx Sensor 3 Module
U02A3 Lost Communication With Particulate Matter Sensor Module
U02A9 Lost Communication with Charge Air Cooler Coolant Pump
U0301 Software Incompatibility with Engine Control Module
U0302 Software Incompatibility with Transmission Control Module
U0305 Software Incompatibility With Cruise Control Module
U0315 Software Incompatibility with Electronic Brake Control Module
U031C Software Incompatibility With Brake System Control Module 2
U0401 Invalid Data Received From Engine Control Module
U0402 Invalid Data Received From Transmission Control Module
U0403 Invalid Data Received From Transfer Case Control Module
U0405 Invalid Data Received From Cruise Control Module
U0411 Invalid Data Received From Drive Motor Control Module
U0412 Invalid Data Received From Battery Energy Control Module
U0414 Invalid Data Received From Four Wheel Drive Clutch Control Module
U0415 Invalid Data Received From Electronic Brake Control Module
U0416 Invalid Data Received From Vehicle Dynamics Control Module
U0417 Invalid Data Received From Park Brake Control Module
U0418 Invalid Data Received From Brake System Control Module
U0420 Invalid Data Received From Power Steering Control Module
U0421 Invalid Data Received From Suspension Control Module
U0422 Invalid Data Received From Body Control Module
U0423 Invalid Data Received From Instrument Cluster
4 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
U0424 Invalid Data Received From HVAC Control Module
U0428 Invalid Data Received From Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module
U042B Invalid Data Received From Chassis Control Module
U0431 Invalid Data Received From Body Control Module "A"
U0432 Invalid Data Received From Multi-axis Acceleration Sensor Module
U0435 Invalid Data Received From Power Steering Control Module - Rear
U0436 Invalid Data Received From Differential Control Module - Front
U0437 Invalid Data Received From Differential Control Module - Rear
U0438 Invalid Data Received From Trailer Brake Control Module
U0447 Invalid Data Received from Central Gateway Module
U0452 Invalid Data Received From Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module
U045A Invalid Data Received From Parking Assist Control Module "A"
U0465 Invalid Data Received From Power Take-Off Control Module
U0499 Invalid Data Received From Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
U0513 Invalid Data Received From Yaw Rate Sensor Module
U053B Invalid Data Received From Active Safety Control Module 1
U053C Invalid Data Received From Active Safety Control Module 2
U056B Invalid Data Received From Frontview Camera Module
U0585 Invalid Data Received From Active Grille Air Shutter 1 Motor Module
U0594 Invalid Data Received From Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module
Lost Communication with Particulate Filter Differential Pressure Sensor Circuit
U0601
Bank 1
Lost Communication with Particulate Filter Differential Pressure Sensor Circuit
U0602
Bank 2
U0606 Lost Communication With Throttle Position Sensor 1
U0607 Lost Communication With Throttle Position Sensor 2
U0608 Lost Communication With Throttle Position Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
U060F Lost Communication with Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Bank 1
U0611 Lost Communication With Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 - Bank 1
U0612 Lost Communication With Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 - Bank 2
U0615 Lost Communication with Engine Coolant Bypass Valve
U0617 Lost Communication With Engine Coolant Bypass Valve "C"
U0623 Lost Communication with Auxiliary Coolant Pump
U0625 Lost Communication With Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Bank 1
U062F Loss Communication with Low Temperature Loop Coolant Pump
U0632 Lost Communication with Engine Cooling Fan
U063E Lost Communication with Exhaust Heat Exchanger Exhaust Bypass Valve
U063F Lost Communication With Engine Coolant Flow Control Valve Position Sensor
Lost Communication With Turbocharger Wastegate Actuator Temperature Sensor
U0643
Bank 1
U0644 Lost Communication With Turbocharger Wastegate Position Sensor
U0646 Lost Communication with Motor Electronics Coolant Pump "A"
U064F Lost Communication With Intake Manifold Runner Control Valve Position Sensor
U0650 Lost Communication With Exhaust Pressure Control Valve "A" Sensor/Switch
5 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
U0653 Lost Communication with Exhaust Gas Recirculation 2 Position Sensor
U0656 Lost Communication with Turbocharger Boost Control Position Sensor
Lost Communication with Turbocharger/Supercharger Bypass Valve "A" Position
U0657
Sensor
U0672 Lost Communication with Engine Coolant Pump
U0674 Lost Communication With Turbocharger Wastegate Position Sensor Bank 2
U0680 Lost Communication With Barometric Pressure Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 1
U0688 Lost Communication With Throttle Position Sensor Bank 2 Sensor 2
Lost Communication With Turbocharger Wastegate Actuator Temperature Sensor
U0689
Bank 2
U068A Lost Communication With Barometric Pressure Sensor 2
U101B Lost Communication With Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor Bank 1 Sensor 2
U1032 Lost Communication with Vehicle Dynamic Sensor 1
U1033 Lost Communication with Vehicle Dynamic Sensor 2
U1067 Lost Communication with Digital Map Control Module
U1069 Lost Communication with Driver Monitoring System Control Module
Lost Communication with Multifunction Energy Storage Capacitor Control
U106A
Module
U106B Lost Communication with Multifunction Battery Isolator Control Module
U1112 Lost Communication with Left Headlamp Leveling Device
U1113 Lost Communication with Right Headlamp Leveling Device
U1114 Lost Communication with Left Headlamp Vertical Motor
U1115 Lost Communication with Right Headlamp Vertical Motor
U111A Lost Communication with Engine Block Coolant Valve
U111E Lost Communication with EVAP Purge Pump
U1343 Chassis Control Module LIN Bus 1
U1345 Engine Control Module LIN Bus 1 (or Bus 21)
U1347 Engine Control Module LIN Bus 3
U1349 Engine Control Module LIN Bus 5
U1359 Lost Communication with Transmission Range Indicator
U135A Lost Communication with Shift to Park Range Actuator
U135B Lost Communication with Sunload Sensor
U135C Lost Communication with Start-Stop Capacitor Control Module
Lost Communication with Transmission Control Module on Chassis Control
U135D
Module LIN Bus 2
Lost Communication with Transmission Control Module on Engine Control
U135E
Module LIN Bus 1
U1501 LIN Bus
U1502 LIN Bus
U1505 LIN Bus
U1509 LIN Bus
6 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
A26 HVAC Controls / P17 Info Display Module Lost Communication with K33
HVAC Control Module on LIN Bus
LIN Bus
U150E A22 Radio Controls / P17 Info Display Module Lost Communication with A11
Radio on LIN Bus
LIN Bus
A22 Radio Controls / P17 Info Display Module Lost Communication with K74
U150F Human Machine Interface Control Module on LIN Bus
K161 Vehicle Performance Data Recorder Lost Communication with K74 Human
Machine Interface Control Module on LIN Bus
A11 Radio Lost Communication with A20 Radio/HVAC Control / P17 Info
Display Module on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with B67 Ultrasonic Intrusion
Sensor / B165 Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Module on LIN Bus
K20 Engine Control Module Lost Communication with M96 Active Grille Air
Shutter Actuator / M60A Active Grille Air Shutter 1 Motor Module on LIN Bus
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with A26 HVAC Controls / A20
Radio/HVAC Controls / P17 Info Display Module on LIN Bus
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with A34 HVAC Controls -
U1510 Auxiliary on LIN Bus
K39 Liftgate Control Module Lost Communication with K171 Hands-Free Liftgate
Sensor Control Module / S45A Liftgate Control Switch - Exterior on LIN Bus
K124B Active Safety Control Module 2 Lost Communication with P51 Lane
Centering Indicators - Steering Wheel / B307 Touch Sensors - Steering Wheel on
LIN Bus
K160 Brake System Control Module Lost Communication with B80 Park Brake
Switch on LIN Bus
P16 Instrument Cluster Lost Communication with S70D Steering Wheel Controls
Switch - Right Upper / S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right on LIN Bus
K20 Engine Control Module Lost Communication with M60B Active Grille Air
Shutter 2 Motor Module on LIN Bus
K26 Headlamp Control Module / K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module Lost
Communication with E13L Headlamp - Left on LIN Bus
U1511 K40 Seat Memory Control Module Lost Communication with K99 Steering
Column Position Control Module on LIN Bus
K183 UHF Short Range Low Energy Remote Control Access Transceiver Lost
Communication with B342A UHF Low Energy Remote Control Access Sensor
Transceiver 1 on LIN Bus
Communication with E13R Headlamp - Right on LIN Bus
K124B Active Safety Control Module 2 Lost Communication with K187 Steering
U1512 Column Friction Control Module on LIN Bus
Communication with B342B UHF Low Energy Remote Control Access Sensor
7 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
U1513 K183 UHF Short Range Low Energy Remote Control Access Transceiver Lost
Communication with B342C UHF Low Energy Remote Control Access Sensor
Auxiliary on LIN Bus
U1514 K38 Chassis Control Module / K38A Chassis Control Module - Auxiliary Lost
Communication with K133 Trailer Brake Power Control Module on LIN Bus
Communication with B342D UHF Low Energy Remote Control Access Sensor
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M75 Windshield Wiper
Motor / M75L Windshield Wiper Motor Module - Left on LIN Bus
U1515 K183 UHF Short Range Low Energy Remote Control Access Transceiver Lost
Communication with B342E UHF Low Energy Remote Control Access Sensor
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with B110 Battery Sensor Module
U1516
on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K62 Sunroof Sunshade Motor
U1517
Module on LIN Bus
P16 Instrument Cluster Lost Communication with K78 Head-Up Display Module /
U1518
P29 Head-Up Display on LIN Bus
K40 Seat Memory Control Module Lost Communication with S52 Outside
Rearview Mirror Switch / S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver
on LIN Bus
U1519
K40 Seat Memory Control Module Lost Communication with K96 Mirror Control
Module / K96D Mirror Control Module - Driver / K96L Mirror Control Module -
Left on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with B117 Rain Sensor / B177
U151A
Rain/Ambient Light Sensor Module / B200 Rain Sensor Module on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K61 Sunroof Control Module
on LIN Bus
U151B
K40 Seat Memory Control Module Lost Communication with S79P Window
Switch - Passenger on LIN Bus
Auxiliary / K33A HVAC Control Module - Auxiliary on LIN Bus
U151C
K38A Chassis Control Module - Auxiliary Lost Communication with S76 Trailer
Brake Control Switch on LIN Bus
A11 Radio Lost Communication with A20 Radio/HVAC Controls / A22 Radio
U151F
Controls / P17 Info Display Module on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with P4 Security Siren / P25 Power
Sounder Content Theft Deterrent Alarm Module on LIN Bus
U1520
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with M6CR Air Temperature
Door Actuator - Center Console Right Auxiliary on LIN Bus
8 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver Lost Communication with K134D
Seat Bolster Memory Control Module - Driver on LIN Bus
K40P Seat Memory Control Module - Passenger Lost Communication with K134P
Seat Bolster Memory Control Module - Passenger on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S48E Multifunction Switch -
Center Console on LIN Bus
U1521
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K65 Tire Pressure Indicator
Module / B178 Tire Pressure Sensor Locator Module on LIN Bus
U1522
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with M6UR Air Temperature
Door Actuator - Right Upper Auxiliary on LIN Bus
U1523
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K29 Seat Heating Control
Module / K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front on LIN Bus
U1524
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with K10 Coolant Heater
Control Module on LIN Bus
K160 Brake System Control Module Lost Communication with K133 Trailer
Brake Power Control Module on LIN Bus
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with K10 Coolant Heater
U1525
Control Module on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K29R Seat Heating Control
U1526
Module - Rear on LIN Bus
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with M37B Mode Door
Actuator - Auxiliary on LIN Bus
K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver Lost Communication with S64D
U1528
Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver on LIN Bus
K40P Seat Memory Control Module - Passenger Lost Communication with S64P
Seat Adjuster Switch - Passenger on LIN Bus
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with B357 Inside Ambient Air
U1529
Quality Particulate Sensor Module on LIN Bus
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with M6UL Air Temperature
U152A
Door Actuator - Left Upper Auxiliary on LIN Bus
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with K32 Steering Wheel
U152B
Heating Control Module on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K18 Compass Module on
LIN Bus
U152C
K160 Brake System Control Module Lost Communication with S76 Trailer Brake
Control Switch on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with P2 Transmission Shift Lever
U152D
Position Indicator on LIN Bus
9 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
K33 HVAC Control Module Lost Communication with V1 Air Ionizer on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M35P Window Motor
U1530
Module - Passenger / M74P Window Motor - Passenger on LIN Bus
U1531
Communication with E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left on LIN Bus
U1532
Communication with E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M74D Window Motor -
U1534
Driver on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S79D Window Switch -
U1538
Driver / S146 Window/Outside Rearview Mirror Switch - Driver on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S79P Window Switch -
U153A
Passenger on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M74RR Window Motor -
U1540
Right Rear on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M74LR Window Motor - Left
U1544
Rear on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S79LR Window Switch - Left
U1548
Rear on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with M45 Rear Wiper Motor on
U1549
LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S79RR Window Switch -
U154A
Right Rear on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K49 Rear Seat Control
U154B
Module on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S31D Seat Heating and
U1550
Cooling Switch - Driver on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K33 HVAC Control Module
U1551
on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S100LR Seat Heating/Venting
U1555
/Cooling Switch - Left Rear on LIN Bus
K38 Chassis Control Module / K38A Chassis Control Module - Auxiliary Lost
U1556
Communication with K133 Trailer Brake Power Control Module on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S31P Seat Heating and
U1558
Cooling Switch - Passenger on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with K183 Short Range Remote
U1559
Control Transceiver on LIN Bus
K9 Body Control Module Lost Communication with S100RR Seat
U155D
Heating/Venting/Cooling Switch - Right Rear on LIN Bus
K38 Chassis Control Module Lost Communication with S3 Transmission Shift
U156D
Lever on LIN Bus
A11 Radio Lost Communication with A26 HVAC Controls / P17 Info Display
U15E1
Module on LIN Bus
K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module Lost Communication with P17
U15F0
Info Display Module on LIN Bus
10 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
A11 Radio Lost Communication with A20 Radio/HVAC Controls / A22 Radio
Controls / P17 Info Display Module on LIN Bus
K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module Lost Communication with K188
U15F1
Human Machine Interface Control Module Bypass Module on LIN Bus
K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module Lost Communication with K31
U15F3
Navigation Control Module on LIN Bus
U1653 Chassis Systems High Speed Communication Enable Circuit
Left Headlamp High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Left
U1725
Headlamp Low Beam Control Module
Right Headlamp High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Right
U1726
Headlamp Low Beam Control Module
Right Headlamp High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Right
U1727
Headlamp Leveling Actuator
Left Headlamp High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Left
U1728
Headlamp Leveling Actuator
Right High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Right Headlamp
U1729
Horizontal Motor
Left High Beam Control Module Lost Communication with Left Headlamp
U172A
Horizontal Motor
14V Power Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control
U1793
Module on Powertrain Expansion Communication Bus
U1795 14V Power Module Powertrain Expansion Communication Bus Off
U179A Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
Lost Communication with One or More Hybrid/EV Battery Interface Control
U179C
Modules
Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module 2 on Chassis Expansion
U179D
Bus
U1803 Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
U1804 Lost Communication with Inside Rearview Mirror Control Module
U1806 Battery Energy Control Module High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus Off
U1807 Battery Charger Control Module High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus Off
U180A Electric A/C Compressor Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off
U180B Battery Energy Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off
U180C Battery Charger Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off
U180D Electronic Brake Control Module Chassis Expansion CAN Bus Off
U1811 Battery Energy Control Module Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus Off
U1814 Powertrain Wake-Up Communication Circuit
Lost Communication with Drive Motor Control Module 1 on Powertrain
U1815
Expansion CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Drive Motor Control Module 2 on Powertrain
U1816
Expansion CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module on Powertrain
U1817
Expansion CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Engine Control Module on Powertrain Expansion
U1818
Communication Bus
11 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with 14V Power Module on Powertrain Expansion
U1821
Communication Bus
Lost Communication with Multi-Axis Acceleration Sensor Module on Powertrain
U1826
Expansion CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Steering Angle Sensor Module on Powertrain
U1827
Expansion CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control Module on Powertrain
U182A
Expansion CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Transmission Control Module on Powertrain Expansion
U182B
CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 on Powertrain
U182D
Expansion Communication Bus
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain
U182E
Control Module 2 on Powertrain Expansion Communication Bus
U182F
Control Module 2 on Powertrain Expansion Communication Bus
U1831
Control Module on Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Electronic Brake Control Module on Chassis Expansion
U1833
CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Battery Charger Control Module on High Voltage
U1838
Energy Management CAN Bus
Auxiliary Transmission Fluid Pump Control Module Lost Communication with
U1839
Lost Communication with Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
U183A
on High Speed CAN Bus
U183B
Transmission Control Module
U183C Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2 on Powertrain Expansion
Communication Bus
Lost Communication with Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
U183E
on Low Speed CAN Bus
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain
U1844
Control Module on Bus B
U1845
Control Module
U1846
Control Module
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control
U1847
Module on Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Transmission Control
U1849
Module
U184A Lost Communication with Body Control Module on Low Speed CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Remote Heater and Air Conditioning Control Module
U184B
on Low Speed CAN Bus
12 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
U184C Lost Communication with Instrument Cluster on Low Speed CAN Bus
U184D Lost Communication with Radio on Low Speed CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module on
U184E
Low Speed CAN Bus
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Lost Communication with Engine
U184F
Control Module
Drive Motor Control Module 2 Lost Communication with Transmission Control
U1850
Module
Electronic Brake Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV
U1858
Powertrain Control Module on Chassis Expansion CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control Module on High Voltage Energy
U185A
Management CAN Bus
U185B
Control Module 2 on High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus
Battery Charger Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain
U185C
Control Module 2 on High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus
U185D Fuel Injector Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control Module
U185E Fuel Injector Control Module Lost Communication with Body Control Module
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV
U1860
Powertrain Control Module 2
Battery Charger Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control
U1861
Module
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Central Gateway
U1862
Module
Electronic Brake Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control
U186A
Module
Electronic Brake Control Module Lost Communication with Transmission Control
U186B
Module
Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control
U1875
Module
U1876 Drive Motor Control Module 1 Lost Communication with Engine Control Module
U1879 Drive Motor Control Module 2 Lost Communication with Engine Control Module
U1885
Control Module
U1886 Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control Module
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module Lost Communication with Battery Energy
U1888
Control Module
Lost Communication with Coolant Temperature Control Module on High Voltage
U18A1
Energy Management CAN Bus
U18A2 Lost Communication with Fuel Pump Driver Control Module
U18A3 Lost Communication with Human Machine Interface Control Module
Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery DC Charging Communications
U18A4
Gateway Module on High Voltage Energy Management CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Fuel Injector Control Module on Powertrain Expansion
U18A5
CAN Bus
13 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
Lost Communication with Right Object Detection Control Module on Dedicated
U18A6
Bus 1
Lost Communication with Power Supply Transformer on Powertrain Expansion
U18A7
CAN Bus
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with Chassis Control
U18A9
Module on Chassis Expansion CAN Bus
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control
U18AA
Module
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with Chassis Control
U18AB
Module on High Speed CAN Bus
Lost Communication With Transmission Range Control Module on Chassis
U18AC
Expansion CAN Bus
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with Electronic Brake
U18AD
Control Module on Chassis Expansion CAN Bus
U18AE Lost Communication with Infotainment Control Touchpad on Dedicated Bus 1
Lost Communications With Telematics Communications Interface Control Module
U18AF
on Ethernet Bus
U18B0 Lost Communications With Instrument Cluster on Ethernet Bus
U18B1 Lost Communications With Audio Amplifier on Ethernet Bus
U18B2 Lost Communication with Rear Audio Control Module on Ethernet Bus
U18B3 Lost Communications With Navigation Control Module on Ethernet Bus
U18B4 Lost Communication with Radio on Ethernet Bus
Lost Communication With Hybrid Powertrain Control Module on Chassis
U18B5
Expansion CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 1 on Chassis Expansion
U18B6
CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 2 on Chassis Expansion
U18B7
CAN Bus
U18B8 Lost Communication with Body Control Module on High Speed CAN Bus
U18B9 Primary High Speed CAN Bus Subnet Configuration List
Lost Communication with Power Steering Control Module on High Speed CAN
U18BA
Bus
Lost Communication with Power Steering Control Module on Chassis Expansion
U18BB
CAN Bus
U18BF Secondary High Speed CAN Bus Subnet Configuration List
U18C0 Lost Communication with Suspension Control Module on High Speed CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Suspension Control Module on Chassis Expansion CAN
U18C1
Bus
U18C2 Lost Communication with Frontview Camera Module on Flexray Bus
Lost Communication with Video Processing Control Module on High Speed CAN
U18C3
Bus
Lost Communication with Video Processing Control Module on Low Speed CAN
U18C4
Bus
Lost Communication with Electronic Brake Control Module on High Speed CAN
U18C5
Bus
14 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
Transmission Range Selector Control Module Lost Communication with Engine
U18C6
Control Module on Powertrain Sensor CAN Bus
Transmission Range Selector Control Module Lost Communication with Engine
U18C7
Control Module on Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus
U18CA Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 1 on Flexray Bus
U18CB Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 2 on Flexray Bus
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with ECM on
U18CC
Powertrain Expansion Bus
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 1 on High Speed CAN
U18CF
Bus
Lost Communication with Active Safety Control Module 2 on High Speed CAN
U18D0
Bus
Lost Communication with Transmission Range Control Module on Powertrain
U18D1
Expansion CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Transmission Range Selector Control Module on
U18D2
Powertrain Sensor CAN Bus
Lost Communication with Transmission Range Selector Control Module on
U18D3
Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus
U18D4 Lost Communication with Fuel Level Sensor Control Module
U18D5 Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Engine Control Module
Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain
U18D6
Control Module 1
U18D7 Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Transmission Control Module
U18D8 Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Fuel Pump Control Module
U18D9 Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Chassis Control Module
U18DA Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Fuel Injector Control Module
Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain
U18DB
Control Module 2
Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module
U18DC
1
Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module
U18DD
2
U18DE Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Glow Plug Control Module
Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Auxiliary Heater Control
U18DF
Module
Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Battery Energy Control
U18E0
Module
U18E1 Glow Plug Control Module Lost Communication with Central Gateway Module
U18E9 Lost Communication with Serial Data Gateway Module on Low Speed CAN Bus
U1900 Lost Communication With Speech to Text Interface Module
U1901 Lost Communication with Infotainment Multifunction Switch Module
U2010 Network Configuration List Not Programmed - Engine Control Module LIN Bus 1
15 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
Network Configuration List Not Programmed - Electronic Brake Control Module
U2022
LIN Bus 1
Network Configuration List Not Programmed - Electronic Brake Control Module
U2023
LIN Bus 2
U2098 MOST Communication Enable Circuit
U2099 High Speed Communication Enable Circuit
U209E Object Detection Control Module High Speed Communication Enable Circuit 1
U209F Object Detection Control Module High Speed Communication Enable Circuit 2
U2100 CAN Bus Communication
U2101 CAN Bus Maximum List of Control Modules
U2103 Fewer Controllers On Bus Than Programmed
U2105 Lost Communication with Engine Control Module
U2106 Lost Communication with Transmission Control Module
U2107 Lost Communication with Body Control Module
U2108 Lost Communication with Electronic Brake Control Module
U2125 Lost Communication with Telematic Unit
U2127 Lost Communication with Front HVAC Control Module
U2139 Lost Communication with Column Integration Module
U2144 Lost Communication with Distance Sensing Cruise Control Module
U216A Lost Communication with Front Object Detection Control Module
U216B Lost Communication with Rear Object Detection Control Module
U2176 Lost Communication with Power Take-Off Control Module
U2178 Lost Communication With Trailer Interface Control Module
U2400 Fuel Injector Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off
U2401 Battery Energy Control Module Dedicated Bus 1 Off
U2409 Transmission Range Control Module High Speed CAN Bus Off
U240A Transmission Range Control Module Chassis Expansion CAN Bus Off
U240B Radio Dedicated Bus Off
U240D Transmission Range Selector Control Module Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus Off
U240E Transmission Range Selector Control Module Powertrain Sensor CAN Bus Off
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with EBCM on High
U240F
Speed CAN Bus
Transmission Range Control Module Lost Communication with BCM on High
U2410
Speed CAN Bus
U2411 Transmission Range Control Module Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus Off
U2412 Reductant Control Module Powertrain Sensor Bus Off
U2413 Central Gateway Module High Speed CAN Bus Off
U2414 Central Gateway Module High Speed Extension CAN Bus Off
U2415 Central Gateway Module Chassis Expansion CAN Bus Off
U2501 Invalid Data Received From Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
Invalid Data Received From Electronic Brake Control Module on Chassis
U2502
Expansion CAN Bus
U2503 Invalid Data Received From Object Detection Control Module
U2504 Invalid Data Received From Trailer Brake Driver Control Module
16 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
Invalid Data Received from Human Machine Interface Control Module on MOST
U2505
Bus
U2506 Invalid Data Received From Dual Battery Control Module
U2507 Invalid Data Received from Instrument Cluster on MOST Bus
U2508 Invalid Data Received from Audio Amplifier on MOST Bus
Invalid Data Received from Active Safety Control Module 1 on Chassis Expansion
U250B
CAN Bus
Invalid Data Received from Active Safety Control Module 2 on Chassis Expansion
U250C
CAN Bus
Invalid Data Received from Transmission Control Module on Chassis Control
U250D
Module LIN Bus 2
U250E Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamic Sensor 1
U250F Invalid Data Received from Vehicle Dynamic Sensor 2
Invalid Data Received from Multifunction Energy Storage Capacitor Control
U2510
Module
U2511 Invalid Data Received from Digital Map Control Module
U2512 Invalid Data Received from Video Processing Control Module
U2513 Invalid Data Received from Driver Monitoring System Control Module
Invalid Data Received from Active Safety Control Module 1 on High Speed CAN
U2520
Bus
U2602
Control Module 2
Battery Energy Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Battery
U2603
Interface Control Module 1
U2604
U2605
U2606
Electric A/C Compressor Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV
U2608
Powertrain Control Module
U2609
Control Module
U2611
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module
U2612
Control Module 2
Drive Motor 1 Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain
U2613
Control Module 2
Drive Motor 2 Control Module Lost Communication with Hybrid/EV Powertrain
U2614
Control Module 2
U2615
Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 2
U2616 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module Lost Communication with ECM
17 of 142
DTC DTC Descriptor
U2617
U2618
U2619
U2620
U2621
U2622
U2623
U2624
U2625
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication With Engine Control Module on
U2626
U2627 Reductant Control Module Lost Communication with Reductant Level Sensor
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication with Reductant Concentration
U2628
Sensor
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication with Reductant Tank Temperature
U2629
Sensor 1
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication with Reductant Tank Temperature
U2630
Sensor 2
U2631 Reductant Control Module Lost Communication with Reductant Pressure Sensor
U3000 Control Module
U3001 Control Module Improper Shutdown Performance
U3012 Control Module Improper Wake-up Performance
DTC B1000
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1000
Electronic Control Unit
18 of 142
The internal fault detection is handled inside the device. The symptom byte information is for engineering
reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
The device runs the program to detect an internal fault when power up is commanded. The only requirements
are voltage and ground. This program runs even if the voltage is out of the valid operating range.
The device has detected an internal malfunction.
The device refuses all additional inputs.
• A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.

• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50, without a
repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• This DTC may be stored as a history DTC without affecting the operation of the device.
• If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the device.
• If this DTC is retrieved as both a current and history DTC, replace the device that set the DTC.
Schematic Reference
• Data Communication Wiring Schematics

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
19 of 142
Scan Tool Reference

If DTC B1000 is set
Replace the device that sets the DTC.
Go to next step: If DTC B1000 is not set

3. All OK
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC B1001
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1001
Option Configuration
Some devices must be configured with serial numbers, vehicle options, or other information. If a device was not
properly configured after installation that device may set DTC B1001. The symptom byte information is for
engineering reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Battery voltage is between 9 - 16 V and data link communications operate normally.
The device is not configured properly.
20 of 142
• A history DTC clears when the device ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold, without a repeat
of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If DTC B1001 is set
1. Program the device that sets the DTC.
If the DTC sets, replace the device that sets the DTC.
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
21 of 142
DTC B101D
DTC Descriptor
DTC B101D
Electronic Control Unit Hardware
• The device runs the program to detect an internal fault when power up is commanded. The only
requirements are voltage and ground. This program runs even if the voltage is out of the valid operating
range.
• The keyless entry control module will set this DTC with symptom byte 39 when the keyless entry control
module antenna is activated.

Diagnostic Aids
• Do not replace a device based only on DTC B101D being set in history with the exception of the
following devices:
K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
K85 Passenger Presence Module
• If DTC B101D is set as current, replace the appropriate device.
22 of 142
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC B101D is not set as current.
If DTC B101D is set as current
Go to next step: If DTC B101D is not set as current or is set as history

3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC B101E
23 of 142
DTC Descriptor
DTC B101E
Electronic Control Unit Software
Some devices must be configured with specific software, serial numbers, vehicle options, or other information.
If a device was not properly configured after installation that module may set DTC B101E. The symptom byte
information is for engineering reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.

of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
24 of 142

2. Verify that DTC U0028 or U0029 is not set.

3. Verify DTC B101E is not set.
If DTC B101E is set
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC B101E is not set
4. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC B2B12 OR B2B13

DTC Descriptor
DTC B2B12
Central Gateway Module Control Module Memory Failure
DTC B2B13
Central Gateway Module Control Module Internal Performance Failure
25 of 142
This diagnostic applies to internal microprocessor integrity conditions within the device. The device monitors
its ability to read and write to the memory. No external circuits are involved.
• The ignition is ON.

• The system voltage is greater than 9.5 V.
The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module detects an internal malfunction.
DTC B2B12 and B2B13 are Type B DTCs.
DTC B2B12 and B2B13 are Type B DTCs.
Diagnostic Aids
If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the device.
Schematic Reference
Data Communication Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool References
26 of 142

2. Verify that DTC B2B12 or B2B13 is not set.
Replace the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.

3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC C0550
DTC Descriptor
DTC C0550
Electronic Control Unit
27 of 142
Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1,
P0560, or P0562 is not set.
Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle to diagnose those DTC's first.

3. Verify DTC C0550 is not set.
If DTC C0550 is set symptom byte 39 or 43
28 of 142
3. All OK.
If DTC C0550 is set with any symptom byte, except symptom byte 39 or 43
Go to next step: If DTC C0550 is not set

4. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC C056D
DTC Descriptor
DTC C056D
29 of 142
Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC C056D is not set.
If DTC C056D is set
Go to next step: If DTC C056D is not set

3. All OK
Repair Instructions
30 of 142
DTC C056E
DTC Descriptor
DTC C056E
Electronic Control Unit Software
If a device was not properly configured after installation that module may set DTC C056E. The symptom byte

of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference
31 of 142
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs

2. Verify DTC C056E is not set.
If DTC C056E is set
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC C056E is not set
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC P0601-P0607, P060A-P060C, P0610, P062F, P0630, P16E9-P16F3, P16F9, P16FD, P16FE, P262B,
P30D6-P30DD, P3186, OR P3996
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0601
Control Module Read Only Memory Performance
DTC P0602
Control Module Not Programmed
DTC P0603
32 of 142
Control Module Long Term Memory Reset
DTC P0604
Control Module Random Access Memory Performance
DTC P0605
Control Module Programming Read Only Memory Performance
DTC P0606
Control Module Processor Performance
DTC P0607
Control Module Performance
DTC P060A
Control Module Monitoring Processor Performance
DTC P060B
Control Module Analog to Digital Converter Performance
DTC P060C
Control Module Main Processor Performance
DTC P0610
Control Module Vehicle Options Incorrect
DTC P062F
Control Module Long Term Memory Performance
DTC P0630
VIN Not Programmed or Mismatched - Engine/Powertrain Control Module
DTC P16E9
Control Module Serial Peripheral Interface Bus 2
DTC P16EA
DTC P16EB
DTC P16EC
33 of 142
DTC P16ED
DTC P16EE
DTC P16EF
DTC P16F0
DTC P16F1
Control Module Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Signal Message Counter Incorrect
DTC P16F2
Control Module Transmission Direction Switch Input Circuitry Performance
DTC P16F3
Control Module Redundant Memory Performance
DTC P16FD
Control Module Wake-Up Not Detected
DTC P16FE
Control Module Unexpected Wake-Up Detected
DTC P262B
Control Module Power Off Timer Performance
DTC P30D6
Control Module Processor Serial Peripheral Interface Bus 1
DTC P30D7
DTC P30D8
DTC P30D9
34 of 142
DTC P30DA
DTC P30DB
DTC P30DC
DTC P30DD
DTC P3186
Control Module Security Peripheral Hardware Performance
This diagnostic applies to internal microprocessor integrity conditions within the control module. This
diagnostic also addresses if the control module is not programmed. The control module monitors its ability to
read and write to the memory. It also monitors a timing function. No external circuits are involved.
• The ignition is ON or the vehicle is in service mode.

• The system voltage is greater than 9.5 V.
The control module detects an internal malfunction or incomplete programming.
• DTCs P0601 - P0607, P060A - P060C, P0610, P16E9 - P16F0, P30D6 - P30DD, and P3186 are type A
DTCs.
• DTC P16FD and P262B are type B DTCs.
• DTC P062F and P16FE are type C DTCs.
• DTCs P0601 - P0607, P060A - P060C, P0610, P16E9 - P16F0, P30D6 - P30DD, and P3186 are type A
DTCs.
• DTC P16FD and P262B are type B DTCs.
• DTC P062F and P16FE are type C DTCs.
35 of 142
Diagnostic Aids
If stored only as a history DTC and not retrieved as a current DTC, do not replace the control module.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference

2. Verify that DTC P0602, P0610, or P0630 is not set.
1. Perform all necessary programming and setup procedures for the control module that sets the DTC.
If the DTC sets, replace the control module that sets the DTC.
3. All OK.
3. Verify DTC P0601, P0603, P0604, P0605, P0606, P0607, P060A, P060B, P060C, P062F, P16E9, P16EA,
P16EB, P16EC, P16ED, P16EE, P16EF, P16F0, P16F1, P16F2, P16F3, P16FD, P16FE, P262B, P30D6,
P30D7, P30D8, P30D9, P30DA, P30DB, P30DC, P30DD, or P3186 is not set.
36 of 142
Replace the control module that sets the DTC.

4. All OK
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup
DTC U0020
DTC Descriptors
DTC U0020
Low Speed CAN Bus
Devices connected to the GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal
vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
programmed information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits. The
messages are also supervised and some periodic messages are used by the receiver device as an availability
indication of the transmitter device.
Conditions for Running the DTCs
• Supply voltage to the devices is in the normal operating range.

• The vehicle power mode requires serial data communication to occur.
• The DTC U2100 does not have a current status.
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received.
Action Taken When the DTCs Sets
The device uses a default value for the missing parameter.

37 of 142
of the malfunction.
Diagnosis of this DTC is accomplished via the symptom or an additional DTC. Refer to Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device , or Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
DTC U0073 OR U2100

DTC Descriptors
DTC U0073
Control Module Communication Bus A Off
DTC U2100
CAN Bus Communication
The devices connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit numbers 2500 & 2501) monitor
for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus uses
terminating resistors that are in parallel with the high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.
Conditions for Running the DTCs
• Supply voltage to the devices is in the normal operating range.

• The vehicle power mode requires serial data communications.
The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3
times in 5 s.
Action Taken When the DTCs Sets
• The device suspends all message transmission.

• The device uses default values for all parameters received on the serial data circuits.
• In the transmission control module, DTC U0073 will cause the transmission to go into default gears.
• In the engine control module and transmission control module, DTC U0073 will cause the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate.
• If equipped with eAssist, DTC U0073 in the hybrid powertrain control module is a type B DTC and will
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to illuminate and result in the engine operating in conventional
38 of 142
engine mode and will maintain 14 V module operation.
• The device inhibits the setting of all other communication DTCs.
• The engine control module or transmission control module turns OFF the MIL after 4 consecutive
ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
• If equipped with eAssist, the hybrid powertrain control module turns off the MIL after the diagnostic runs
and does not fail during subsequent ignition cycles. Normal operation will resume 5 s after subsequent
ignition cycle.
1. Refer to Data Link References to determine which serial data communication system is used for a
specific device.
2. This DTC may not be retrieved with a current status. Diagnosis is accomplished using the symptom.
Refer to Symptoms - Data Communications .
DTC U0074
DTC Descriptor
DTC U0074 00
Control Module Communication Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus Off Malfunction

Powertrain High Speed GMLAN
U0074 U0074 U0074 -
Serial Data (+)
U0074 U0074 U0074 -
Serial Data (-)
The devices connected to the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data
communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among
the devices when the ignition switch is in any position other than OFF. The powertrain high speed GMLAN
serial data bus uses terminating resistors that are in parallel with the powertrain high speed GMLAN (+) and (-)
circuits.
39 of 142
• The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.

A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received for more
than 450 ms.
DTC U0074 is a type B DTC.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: Some devices with an internal terminating resistor have a loop in the harness
that connects the internal terminating resistor to the serial data circuit. When
40 of 142
wired this way, test these loop circuits for the appropriate failure mode short to
voltage, short to ground, or open/high resistance prior to replacing the device
for each of the following tests. Each device may need to be disconnected to
isolate a circuit fault. Use the schematics and connector end views to identify
the following:
• Powertrain high speed GMLAN devices and terminating resistors the

vehicle is equipped with
• Device locations on the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and powertrain high speed GMLAN
serial data circuit terminals
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft)
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors with the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial
data circuits at an easily accessible device that is not communicating. It may take up to 10 min for all
vehicle systems to power down. Refer to Data Link References to determine which devices are on the
powertrain expansion bus.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit at the device that
was just disconnected and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage.
Go to next step: If less than 4.5 V

away from vehicle. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
5. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit at the device
that was just disconnected and ground.
If 100 Ω or less
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground.

6. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the
device that was just disconnected:
If less than 110 Ω
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits.
Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance.

7. Refer to Testing the Device Circuits.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Voltage
41 of 142
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial
data circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage, ignition ON/Vehicle In
Service Mode.
2. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit at the device
connector that was just disconnected and ground.
If each serial data circuit is 4.5 V or less
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m
(9.8 ft) away from vehicle. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between each of the device's ground circuit terminals and ground.
If less than 10 Ω, replace the device that was disconnected.
Go to next step: If any serial data circuit is greater than 4.5 V
3. Repeat step 1 until one of the following conditions are isolated:
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to voltage on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short to Ground
2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to ground.
If each serial data circuit is 100 Ω or greater
Replace the device that was disconnected.
Go to next step: If any serial data circuit is less than 100 Ω

• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• A short to ground on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for a Short between the Circuits
2. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was previously disconnected.
device, in the direction of the circuit shorted together.
4. Test for greater than 110 Ω between each pair of powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the
device connector that was just disconnected.
If each pair of serial data circuits is 110 Ω or greater
42 of 142
Go to next step: If any pair of serial data circuits is less than 110 Ω
• Serial data circuits shorted together between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• Serial data circuits shorted together between a device and a terminating resistor.
• A shorted terminating resistor.
Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance
device, in the direction of the circuit with the open/high resistance.
4. Test for less than 130 Ω between each pair of the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
the device connector that was just disconnected.
If each pair of serial data circuits is 130 Ω or less
Go to next step: If any pair of serial data circuits is greater than 130 Ω
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between two devices or splice packs, if equipped.
• An open/high resistance on the serial data circuit between a device and a terminating resistor.
• An open/high resistance terminating resistor.
Testing the Device Circuits
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between each ground circuit terminal at the non communicating device that was
just disconnected and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF.
3. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse.
43 of 142
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit and ground.
If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected device.
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which has a fuse in the
circuit, and ground.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ignition circuit end to end.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit and ground.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal, which is controlled by a
control module, and ground.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the control
module that controls the ignition circuit and all devices that share the same ignition circuit.
4. Reconnect the control module that controls the ignition circuit, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service
Mode.
5. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate, replace the control module that controls the ignition
circuit.
6. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, reconnect the first device that shares the same ignition circuit, ignition
ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
If the test lamp does not illuminate, replace the device that was just connected.
If the test lamp illuminates and there are more devices to connect, connect the next device
44 of 142
and repeat step 6.7 until there are no more devices to connect.
7. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal or
the serial data communication enable circuit terminal and ground.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body
Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the accessory wakeup serial data circuit or the serial data communication
enable circuit end to end.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
9. Disconnect the harness connector at a powertrain high speed GMLAN device that is still communicating
and closest to the non communicating device.
10. Test for less than 2 Ω in each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit end to end between the
non communicating device and the device that was just disconnected.
If 2 Ω or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.

11. Replace the non communicating device.
Repair Instructions
DTC U0075
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC U0075 00
Control Module Communication Object Detection CAN Bus Off
Circuit Short to Open/High Short to Signal
45 of 142
Ground Resistance Voltage Performance
Object High Speed GMLAN
Serial Data (+) U0075, U0100 -
U0075 U0075 -
or High Speed GMLAN Serial U02FF*
Data (+) 4
Serial Data (-) U0075, U0100 -
U0075 U0075 -
Data (-) 4
* An open between the X84 Data Link Connector (DLC) and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module will
only affect the communication with the scan tool. The devices will still communicate. An open in only
one object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit may allow degraded communication between the
devices.
The devices connected to the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit numbers 3811 & 3813)
monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands
are exchanged among the devices when the S39 Ignition Switch (or S38 Ignition Mode Switch) is in any
position other than OFF. The object high speed GMLAN serial data bus uses terminating resistors that are in
parallel with the object high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
Specific subsystems will not function.

Schematic Reference

46 of 142
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC U0075 is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Object High Speed GMLAN Device .

3. All OK.
DTC U0076
DTC Descriptor
DTC U0076 00
Control Module Communication Powertrain Sensor CAN Bus Off

Serial Data (+)
U0076 U0076 U0076 -
[or High Speed GMLAN Serial
Data (+) 7]
Serial Data (-)
U0076 U0076 U0076 -
Data (-) 7]
47 of 142
The devices connected to the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data
communications during normal vehicle operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among
the devices when the ignition switch is in any position other than OFF. The powertrain high speed GMLAN
serial data bus uses terminating resistors that are in parallel with the powertrain high speed GMLAN (+) and (-)
circuits.

A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received for more
than 450 ms.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
48 of 142
Scan Tool Reference
the following:
• Powertrain high speed GMLAN devices and terminating resistors the

vehicle is equipped with
• Device locations on the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and powertrain high speed GMLAN
serial data circuit terminals
data circuits at an easily accessible device that is not communicating. Refer to Data Link References to
determine which devices are on the powertrain expansion bus.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit at the device that
was just disconnected and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

that was just disconnected and ground.
If 100 Ω or less

6. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the
device that was just disconnected:
If less than 110 Ω
49 of 142

7. Refer to Testing the Device Circuits.
data circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage, ignition ON/Vehicle In
Service Mode.
2. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit at the device
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m
(9.8 ft) away from vehicle. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between each of the device's ground circuit terminals and ground.
If less than 10 Ω, replace the device that was disconnected.

50 of 142
4. Test for greater than 110 Ω between each pair of powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the
device connector that was just disconnected.
4. Test for less than 130 Ω between each pair of the powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
the device connector that was just disconnected.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between each ground circuit terminal at the non communicating device that was
just disconnected and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
51 of 142
Mode.
circuit.
52 of 142
Control Module.
9. Disconnect the harness connector at a powertrain high speed GMLAN device that is still communicating
and closest to the non communicating device.
10. Test for less than 2 Ω in each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit end to end between the
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
DTC U0077
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
53 of 142
DTC U0077
Control Module Communication Chassis Expansion CAN Bus Off

Chassis High Speed GMLAN
U0077 U0077 -
Data (+) 2
U0077 U0077 -
Data (-) 2
* An open in only one chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit may allow degraded
communication between the devices. An open between the X84 Data Link Connector (DLC) and the K56
Serial Data Gateway Module will only affect the communication with the scan tool. The devices will still
communicate.
The devices connected to the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit numbers 6105 & 6106)
position other than OFF. The chassis high speed GMLAN serial data bus uses terminating resistors that are in
parallel with the chassis high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.
The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the chassis high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits more than 3 times.


of the malfunction.
54 of 142
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If the DTC is set
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device .

3. All OK.
DTC U0078
DTC Descriptor
DTC U0078
Control Module Communication Low Speed CAN Bus Off
55 of 142
The low speed GMLAN serial data bus is used to communicate information between the low speed GMLAN
devices. The serial data is transmitted over a single wire to the appropriate devices.
• Supply voltage to the devices are in the normal operating range.

The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the serial data circuits more than 3
times in 5 s.



If DTC U0078 is set
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device .
Go to next step: If DTC U0078 is not set

3. All OK
DTC U007B
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
56 of 142
DTC U007B 00
Control Module Communication High Speed Extension CAN Bus Off

Gateway Expansion High Speed
GMLAN Serial Data (+)
U007B U007B U007B -
or High Speed GMLAN Serial
Data (+) (8)
GMLAN Serial Data (-)
U007B U007B U007B -
Data (-) (8)
The devices connected to the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit numbers 3935
& 3936) monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. The K56 Serial Data
Gateway Module acts as the gateway module between devices on primary high speed GMLAN bus and devices
on gateway expansion high speed GMLAN bus. The gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data bus
uses terminating resistors that are in parallel with the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN (+) and (-)
circuits.



of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference
57 of 142
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC U007B is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN
Device .

3. All OK.
DTC U007C
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC U007C 00
Control Module Communication High Speed Extension CAN Bus 2 Off
58 of 142
Gateway Isolated High Speed
U007C U007C U007C -
Data (+) (9)
U007C U007C U007C -
Data (-) (9)
The devices connected to the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit numbers 1304 &
1305) monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. The K56 Serial Data Gateway
Module acts as the gateway module between devices on primary high speed GMLAN bus and devices on
gateway isolated high speed GMLAN bus. The gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data bus uses
terminating resistors that are in parallel with the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.



of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

59 of 142
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC U007C is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN
Device .

3. All OK.
DTC U007D
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC U007D 00
Control Module Communication Low Speed Extension CAN Bus Off

Gateway Isolated Low Speed
GMLAN Serial Data
U007D U0100-U02FF U007D -
or Low Speed GMLAN Serial
Data #2
60 of 142
The gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data bus is used to communicate information between the
devices. The serial data is transmitted over a single wire (circuit number 1102) to the appropriate devices. The
K56 Serial Data Gateway Module acts as the gateway module between devices on low speed GMLAN bus and
devices on gateway isolated low speed GMLAN bus.



of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
61 of 142

2. Verify DTC U007D is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN Device
.

3. All OK.
DTC U0100-U02FF
DTC Descriptor
For device DTC descriptors, refer to Control Module U Code List.

B+ U0100 - U02FF U0100 - U02FF - -
U0100 -
Ignition U02FF, U1814, U0100 - U02FF - -
U2099
High Speed GMLAN Serial
U0073, 2 U0100 - U02FF U0073, 2 -
Data (+)
U0073, 2 U0100 - U02FF U0073, 2 -
Data (-)
U0075 U0100 - U02FF U0075 -
Serial Data (+)
U0075 U0100 - U02FF U0075 -
Serial Data (-)
U0077 U0100 - U02FF U0077 -
Serial Data (+)
U0077 U0100 - U02FF U0077 -
Serial Data (-)
Low Speed GMLAN Serial
U0078, 1 U0100 - U02FF U0078, 1 -
Data
Ground - U0100 - U02FF - -
62 of 142
1. Scan tool does not communicate with most low speed GMLAN device
2. Scan tool does not communicate with most high speed GMLAN device
The serial data circuit is the means by which the devices in the vehicle communicate with each other. Once the
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the Data Link Connector (DLC), the scan tool can be
used to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC). Each
device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure that the device is
operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example if the device
loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit disappears. Other
devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect its absence; those
devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non-communicating device. The DTC
is unique to the device which is not communicating and one or more devices may set the same exact code. A
loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the stored code.
• Specific subsystems will not function.

• DTC U0100 in the Transmission Control Module will cause the transmission to go into default gears.
• Both DTC U0100 in the Transmission Control Module and DTC U0101 in the Engine Control Module
will cause the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to illuminate.
• The Engine Control Module or Transmission Control Module turns OFF the MIL after 4 consecutive
ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
Diagnostic Aids
• Sometimes, while diagnosing a specific customer concern or after a repair, you may notice a history U
code present. However, there is no associated "current" or "active" status. Loss of communication U
codes such as these can set for a variety of reasons. Many times, they are transparent to the vehicle
operator and technician, and/or have no associated symptoms. Eventually, they will erase themselves
automatically after a number of fault-free ignition cycles. This condition would most likely be attributed
to one of these scenarios:
A device on the data communication circuit was disconnected while the communication circuit is
awake.
63 of 142
Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis.
A low battery condition was present, so some devices stop communicating when battery voltage
drops below a certain threshold.
Battery power was restored to the vehicle and devices on the communication circuit did not all re-
initialize at the same time.
If a loss of communication U code appears in history for no apparent reason, it is most likely
associated with one of the scenarios above. These are all temporary conditions and should never be
interpreted as an intermittent fault, causing you to replace a part.
• A device may have a U code stored in history that does not require any repairs. Issues with late or
corrupted messages between devices can be temporary with no apparent symptom or complaint; this does
not mean the device is faulty. Do not replace a device based only on a history U code.
• Do not replace a device reporting a U code. The U code identifies which device needs to be diagnosed for
a communication issue.
• Communication may be available between some devices and the scan tool with either the low or high
speed GMLAN serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to those devices using multiple serial
data communication systems.
• Use Data Link References to determine what serial data communications the device uses.
• Some devices may not have internal protection for specific control circuits and may open a B+ or ignition
fuse. If a fuse is open and the B+ or ignition circuit is not shorted to ground, ensure none of the control
circuits are shorted to ground before replacing the device.
• Some intermittent communication concerns may be caused by fretting corrosion on the serial data circuit
terminals. Inspect all connectors at the device that set the communication DTC, the device that the
communication DTC was set against, and any inline harness connectors between the two devices. Do not
replace a device based only on fretting corrosion. Refer to bulletin 09-06-03-004 for assistance with the
diagnosis and repair of this condition, if applicable.
• This diagnostic can be used for any device that is not communicating, regardless of the type of serial data
circuit it is connected to, providing the vehicle is equipped with the device.
• This diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the common no communication DTCs: U0100, U0101,
U0102, U0103, U0104, U0105, U0106, U0109, U010E, U010F, U0111, U0112, U0115, U0117, U0121,
U0122, U0123, U0125, U0126, U0128, U0129, U012A, U0130, U0131, U0132, U0133, U0136, U0137,
U0139, U0140, U0146, U0151, U0155, U0158, U0159, U0160, U0164, U0166, U0167, U0168, U016B,
U0170, U0181, U0182, U0184, U0186, U0191, U0193, U0196, U0197, U0198, U0201, U0203, U0204,
U0207, U0208, U0209, U0210, U0230, U0232, U0233, U0236, U0237, U023A, U0248, U0249, U0250,
U0252, U0254, U025B, U0264, U0265, U0268, U0269, U026A, U026B, U0293, U029D, U029E,
U02A3, and other DTCs within U0100 - U02FF range.
Schematic Reference

64 of 142
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0076, U0077, U0078, U007A, U007B, U007C, U007D,
U1814, U2099, U2100, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899,
C12E1, P0560, P0562, P06E4, or P1EB9 is not set.

3. Determine the device that is not communicating. Refer to Control Module U Code List.
4. Refer to Data Link References to determine which data communication bus the non communicating
device is on.
If the device is on Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN bus
Device to diagnose that device.
If the device is on Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN bus
If the device is on Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN bus
to diagnose that device.
Go to next step: If the device is not on Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN bus,
Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN bus, and Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN bus
65 of 142
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the device's ground,
B+, ignition, accessory wakeup serial data, serial data communication enable,
and serial data circuit terminals.
away from vehicle. Disconnect all the harness connectors at the device that is not communicating. It may
take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between each ground circuit terminal and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
66 of 142
Mode.
circuit.
Control Module.
8. Test for less than 4.5 V between each GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater between a low speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device to test for a short
to voltage.
If 4.5 V or greater between a high speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device to test for a short
to voltage.
67 of 142
If 4.5 V or greater between a chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device to test
for a short to voltage.
If 4.5 V or greater between an object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Object High Speed GMLAN Device to test for
a short to voltage.

10. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 100 Ω or less between a low speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
to ground.
If 100 Ω or less between a high speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
to ground.
If 100 Ω or less between a chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
for a short to ground.
If 100 Ω or less between an object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Object High Speed GMLAN Device to test for
a short to ground.

11. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
12. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the non
communicating device and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
If 2 Ω or greater

13. Reconnect the harness connectors at the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
NOTE: The following test step is only applicable to a high speed GMLAN device
with 2 pairs of serial data circuits or a high speed GMLAN device with an
internal terminating resistor.
14. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of high speed GMLAN serial data circuits.
68 of 142
If less than 110 Ω
to ground or a short between the serial data circuits.
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device to test for an
open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.

15. Replace the device that is not communicating.
Repair Instructions
DTC U010C, U010E, U029D, U029E, OR U02A3

DTC Descriptor
DTC U010E
Lost Communication with Reductant Sensor Module
DTC U029D
Lost Communication with NOx Sensor 1 Module
DTC U029E
Lost Communication with NOx Sensor 2 Module
DTC U02A3
Lost Communication With Particulate Matter Sensor Module

U010E, U010E, U029D,
B+ U029D, - -
U029E, U02A3
69 of 142
U029E, U02A3
U010E,
U010E, U029D,
Ignition U029D, - -
U029E, U02A3
U029E, U02A3
P157A, P16D7- P157A, P16D7-
NOx Sensor 1 Control (Circuit P16D9, U010E, P16D9, U010E,
- -
3674) U029D, U029D, U029E,
U029E, U02A3 U02A3
Accessory Wakeup Serial Data U010E, U029D,
U1814 - -
(Circuit 5985) U029E, U02A3
Powertrain Sensor High Speed
GMLAN Serial Data (+) (Circuit
U010E, U029D,
4498) U0076 U0076 -
U029E, U02A3
Data (+) 7
GMLAN Serial Data (-) (Circuit
U010E, U029D,
4499) U0076 U0076 -
U029E, U02A3
Data (-) 7
U010E, U029D,
Ground - - -
U029E, U02A3
Devices connected to the Powertrain Sensor High Speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuits 4498 and 4499)
are exchanged among the devices. The devices have prerecorded information about what messages are needed
to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each virtual network. The messages are supervised and also,
some periodic messages are used by the receiver device as an availability indication of the transmitter device.
Each message contains the identification number of the transmitter device. A loss of serial data communications
DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the stored DTC.

70 of 142
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0076, U0078, U1814, U2099, U0106, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380,
B1424, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, P0562, P157A or P16D7-P16D9 is not set.

B+, ignition, NOx sensor 1 control, accessory wakeup serial data, and serial
data circuit terminals.
U010E
away from vehicle. Disconnect all the harness connectors at the K115 Reductant Control Module. It may
71 of 142
If 10 Ω or greater
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between each B+ circuit terminal and ground.
If infinite resistance, replace the K115 Reductant Control Module.
5. Verify a test lamp illuminates between each ignition circuit terminal and ground.
If infinite resistance, replace the K115 Reductant Control Module.
6. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and ground.
Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the accessory wakeup serial data circuit end to end.
7. Test for greater than 9 V between the NOx sensor 1 control circuit terminal and ground.
72 of 142
If 9 V or less and the circuit fuse is good
2. Test for less than 2 Ω between the NOx sensor 1 control circuit terminal and output terminal at the
F95UA Fuse at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
If 9 V or less and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at all devices that share the NOx sensor 1
control circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the NOx sensor 1 control circuit terminal and ground.
3. Install a new fuse at the F95UA Fuse.
4. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, reconnect a device that shares the NOx sensor 1 control circuit.
If 9 V or less, replace the device that was just connected.
If greater than 9 V and there are more devices to connect, repeat steps 7.4 to 7.6 until there
are no more devices to connect. If all devices are connected and the voltage is still greater
than 9 V, replace the K115 Reductant Control Module.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC. It may take up to 10
min for all vehicle systems to power down.
9. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the Powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end
between the K115 Reductant Control Module and the device setting the DTC.
If 2 Ω or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit between the K115 Reductant Control
Module and the device setting the DTC.

10. Reconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC.
11. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of Powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
the K115 Reductant Control Module.
If less than 110 Ω
Refer to DTC U0076 to test for a short to ground or a short between the serial data circuits.
Refer to DTC U0076 to test for an open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.

12. Replace the K115 Reductant Control Module.
73 of 142
U029D
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at the B195A Nitrogen Oxides Sensor 1. It may
If 10 Ω or greater
control circuit.
than 9 V, replace the B195A Nitrogen Oxides Sensor 1.
6. Test for 50 - 70 Ω between each pair of Powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the
B195A Nitrogen Oxides Sensor 1.
If less than 50 Ω
74 of 142
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit between the B195A Nitrogen Oxides
Sensor 1 and the first splice.

7. Replace the B195A Nitrogen Oxides Sensor 1.
U029E
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at the B195B Nitrogen Oxides Sensor 2. It may take
up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
control circuit.
than 9 V, replace the B195B Nitrogen Oxides Sensor 2.
75 of 142
B195B Nitrogen Oxides Sensor 2.
If less than 50 Ω
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit between the B195B Nitrogen Oxides
Sensor 2 and the first splice.

7. Replace the B195B Nitrogen Oxides Sensor 2.
U02A3
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at the B136 Exhaust Particulate Matter Sensor. It
may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
control circuit.
76 of 142
than 9 V, replace the B136 Exhaust Particulate Matter Sensor.
B136 Exhaust Particulate Matter Sensor.
If less than 50 Ω
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit between the B136 Exhaust Particulate
Matter Sensor and the first splice.

7. Replace the B136 Exhaust Particulate Matter Sensor.
Repair Instructions
• Control Module References for device replacement, programming and setup
DTC U01B0
DTC Descriptor
DTC U01B0 00
Lost Communication with Battery Monitor Module

B+ U01B0 U01B0 - -
77 of 142
Ignition U01B0 U01B0 - -
LIN Serial Data U01B0 U01B0 U01B0 -
Ground - U01B0 - -
The serial data is transmitted over a LIN circuit between a master control module and other LIN devices within
a particular subsystem. If serial data communication is lost between any of the LIN devices on the LIN bus
network, the master control module will set a no communication code against the non-communicating LIN
device.

Diagnostic Aids
awake.
78 of 142
• An open in the LIN bus serial data circuit between the splice pack and a LIN device will only affect that
specific LIN device. This type of failure will set a loss of communication DTC for each LIN device
affected and the other LIN devices will still communicate.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

P0560, P0562, P06E4, U0028, U0029, U0073 - U0078, U007A - U007D, U0100 - U02FF, U1814,
U2098, or U2099 is not set.

79 of 142
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the following:
• The master control module and the LIN devices on the same LIN serial
data circuit
• The master control module's LIN serial data circuit terminal and the LIN
device's B+, ignition, ground, and LIN serial data circuit terminals
NOTE: This diagnostic procedure is only used for B110 Battery Sensor Module
connected to LIN serial data circuit coming from K20 Engine Control Module.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at the B110 Battery Sensor Module. It may take up
to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the B110 Battery Sensor Module.
80 of 142
If infinite resistance, replace the B110 Battery Sensor Module.
Mode.
circuit.
7. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect all LIN devices that share the same LIN serial data circuit, ignition
NOTE: For accurate voltage reading, disconnect the battery charger prior to
performing the following test step.
8. Test for 2 - 12 V between the LIN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If less than 2 V
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data circuit and ground.
81 of 142
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the serial data circuit end to end.
4. Reconnect the K20 Engine Control Module, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
If less than 2 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If greater than 2 V, replace the LIN device that causes a current DTC to set when connected.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, ignition
2. Test for less than 1 V between the serial data circuit and ground.
3. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, reconnect the K20 Engine Control Module, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service
Mode.
If greater than 12 V, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 12 V, replace the LIN device that causes a current DTC to set when connected.
9. Replace the B110 Battery Sensor Module.
Repair Instructions
DTC U0300-U0336
DTC Descriptor
Refer to Control Module U Code List.
If a device was not properly configured after installation that device may set the appropriate communication
DTCs. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
82 of 142

of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC U0300-U0336 is not set.
If DTC U0300-U0336 is set
1. Program the device specified by the DTC descriptor.
If the DTC sets, replace the device specified by the DTC descriptor.
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC U0300-U0336 is not set
3. All OK
83 of 142
Repair Instructions
DTC U0400-U05FF
DTC Descriptor
Refer to Control Module U Code List.
Some devices are constantly receiving information from other devices through serial data communication
network. The invalid data code will be set when a receiving device detects a discrepancy in information it
receives from another device causing its integrity to be questioned. The symptom byte listed in the DTC
Descriptor is for engineering reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.

of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
This diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose these common DTCs: U0400, U0401, U0402, U0403,
U0404, U0405, U0406, U0407, U0408, U0409, U040D, U040F, U0410, U0414, U0415, U0416, U0417,
U0418, U041B, U041E, U0420, U0421, U0422, U0423, U0424, U0425, U0426, U0427, U0428, U0429,
U042B, U042E, U0430, U0431, U0432, U0433, U0435, U0436, U0437, U0438, U0439, U043A, U043B,
U043C, U0440, U0447, U0452, U0456, U0459, U045A, U0461, U0462, U0463, U0464, U0465, U0466,
U0467, U0468, U0469, U046A, U046B, U046C, U046D, U0481, U0482, U0483, U0485, U0486, U0492,
U0493, U0497, U0498, U0499, U04B1, U04B5, U0507, U0508, U0513, U0514, U0515, U052A, U0532,
U0533, U0534, U0536, U0537, U053B, U053C, U053D, U0546, U0549, U054B, U0551, U0555, U0558,
U0563, U0564, U0565, U056B, U056E, U0585, U0586, U0588, U0594, U0595, U0596, U059B, U05A1,
U05A2, and other DTCs within U0400 - U05FF range.
84 of 142
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Engine running for 10 s.

2. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode, engine OFF, verify DTC U0400-U05FF is not set.
If DTC U0400-U05FF is set along with other DTCs set or symptoms
Diagnose all other DTCs or symptoms first. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List -
Vehicle , or Symptoms - Vehicle .
If DTC U0400-U05FF is set without other DTCs set or symptoms

If the DTC sets, replace the appropriate device.
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC U0400-U05FF is not set
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC U0600-U06FF
85 of 142
DTC Descriptor

B+ U0600-U06FF U0600-U06FF - -
Ignition U0600-U06FF U0600-U06FF - -
LIN Serial Data U0600-U06FF U0600-U06FF U0600-U06FF -
Ground - U0600-U06FF - -
device.
The system voltage is between 9-16 V.

Schematic Reference

86 of 142
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Determine the LIN device that is not communicating. Refer to Control Module U Code List.
P0560, P0562, P06E4, P24EF, P24F0, P24F1, U0028, U0029, U0073-U0078, U007A-U007F, U0100-
U02FF, U1814, U2098, or U2099 is not set.

data circuit
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at a LIN device that is not communicating. It may
If 10 Ω or greater
87 of 142
If infinite resistance, replace the non-communicating LIN device.
If infinite resistance, replace the non-communicating LIN device.
88 of 142
4. Reconnect the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
circuit.
7. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, reconnect the first device that shares the same ignition circuit.
7. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect all LIN devices that share the same LIN serial data circuit.
9. Test for 3.5-12 V between the LIN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If less than 3.5 V
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the control module setting the DTC.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the LIN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the LIN serial data circuit end to end.
4. Replace the control module that sets the DTC.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the LIN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
Go to next step: If between 3.5-12 V
10. Verify how many LIN devices are connected to this LIN circuit.
If there is only one LIN device
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, inspect both harness and component connectors for contamination, corrosion,
and terminal tension.
89 of 142
2. Reconnect the harness connectors at the LIN device. Verify all connectors/terminals are fully
seated.
4. Verify the DTC is not set again.
If the DTC is set, replace the LIN device that is not communicating.
5. A fault is currently not present and may be an intermittent condition.
Go to next step: If there are two or more LIN devices
12. Reconnect the harness connectors at the first LIN device.
14. Test for 3.5-12 V between the LIN serial data circuit terminal at the control module setting the DTC and
ground.
If less than 3.5 V or greater than 12 V
Replace the LIN device that was just connected.

15. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, reconnect the harness connectors at another LIN device.
ground.

18. Repeat steps 15-17 for the remaining LIN devices until a faulty LIN device is identified. If there is no
faulty LIN device, replace the LIN device that is not communicating.
Repair Instructions
DTC U1026
DTC Descriptors
DTC U1026
90 of 142
Lost Communication with Transfer Case Control Module

B+ U0102, U1026 U0102, U1026 - -
Ignition U0102, U1026 U0102, U1026 - -
U1814, U2099,
Accessory WakeUp Serial Data U0102, U1026 - -
U0102, U1026
High Speed GMLAN Serial U0073, U0102,
U0073* U0073* -
Data (+) U1026*
High Speed GMLAN Serial U0073, U0102,
U0073* U0073* -
Data (-) U1026*
Ground - U0102, U1026 - -
* Other DTCs may set with this fault.
Devices connected to the serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle
operation. Operating information and commands are exchanged among the devices. The devices have
prerecorded information about what messages are needed to be exchanged on the serial data circuits, for each
virtual network. The messages are supervised and also, some periodic messages are used by the receiver device
as an availability indication of the transmitter device. Each message contains the identification number of the
transmitter device.

Schematic Reference

91 of 142
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0076, U0077, U0078, U2100, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330,
B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not
set.

B+, ignition, accessory wakeup serial data, and serial data circuit terminals.
1. Ignition OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away
from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K69 Transfer Case Control Module. It may take
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
92 of 142
If infinite resistance, replace the K69 Transfer Case Control Module.
If infinite resistance, replace the K69 Transfer Case Control Module.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control
Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit and ground.
7. Test for less than 4.5 V between each high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater
to voltage.
93 of 142
8. Ignition OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF, and all keys at least 3 m (9.8 ft) away
from vehicle. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
9. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 100 Ω or less
to ground.

10. Disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC.
11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each serial data circuits end to end between the K69 Transfer Case Control
If 2 Ω or greater

12. Replace the K69 Transfer Case Control Module.
Repair Instructions
DTC U1112-U1115
DTC Descriptor
DTC U1112
Lost Communication with Left Headlamp Leveling Device
DTC U1113
Lost Communication with Right Headlamp Leveling Device
DTC U1114
Lost Communication with Left Headlamp Vertical Motor
DTC U1115
Lost Communication with Right Headlamp Vertical Motor
94 of 142

Ignition U1112 - U1115 U1112 - U1115 - -
CAN Bus High Serial Data U1112 - U1115 U1112 - U1115 U1112 - U1115 -
CAN Bus Low Serial Data U1112 - U1115 U1112 - U1115 U1112 - U1115 -
Ground - U1112 - U1115 - -
The Headlamp Leveling Control Modules are connected via a private CAN bus to the Headlamp Control
Module. If the Headlamp Control Module cannot communicate with any Headlamp Leveling Control Modules
or headlamp actuators, an appropriate DTC will be set.
The system voltage is between 9 - 16 V
A supervised periodic message that includes the transmitter device availability has not been received for 200
ms.
Advanced Front Lighting System Fault indicator comes on solid.
A current DTC clears when the malfunction is no longer present.
Schematic Reference

• Headlights/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Wiring Schematics
95 of 142
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC U1114 is not set.
If DTC U1114 is set
Replace the E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left.

If DTC U1115 is set
Replace the E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right.

If DTC U1112 is set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left.

If DTC U1113 is set
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right.

6. All OK.
B+, ignition, and serial data circuit terminals. For E13LA Headlamp Assembly -
Left, use connector end view for X110 Body Harness to Left Headlamp Harness.
For E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right, use connector end view for X120 Body
Harness to Right Headlamp Harness.
E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left
96 of 142
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at the X110 Body Harness to Left Headlamp
Harness. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left.
5. Test for less than 4.5 V between each CAN bus serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the CAN bus serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If less than 1 V, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
7. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each CAN bus serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 100 Ω or less
1. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the CAN bus serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If infinite resistance, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
97 of 142
8. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between the pair of CAN bus serial data circuit terminals.
If less than 110 Ω
2. Test for infinite resistance between the pair of CAN bus serial data circuit terminals.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the CAN bus serial data circuits end to end.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
9. Replace the E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left.
E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at the X120 Body Harness to Right Headlamp
Harness. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right.
5. Test for less than 4.5 V between each CAN bus serial data circuit terminal and ground.
98 of 142
If 4.5 V or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
3. Test for less than 1 V between the CAN bus serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If less than 1 V, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
7. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each CAN bus serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 100 Ω or less
2. Test for infinite resistance between the CAN bus serial data circuit terminal and ground.
8. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between the pair of CAN bus serial data circuit terminals.
If less than 110 Ω
2. Test for infinite resistance between the pair of CAN bus serial data circuit terminals.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the CAN bus serial data circuits end to end.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
9. Replace the E13RA Headlamp Assembly - Right.
Repair Instructions
• Front Headlamp Replacement for E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left or E13RA Headlamp Assembly -
Right replacement
• Control Module References for K26 Headlamp Control Module replacement, programming and setup
DTC U111A
99 of 142
DTC Descriptor
DTC U111A 00
Lost Communication with Engine Block Coolant Valve

B+ U111A U111A - -
Ignition U111A U111A - -
LIN Serial Data U111A U111A U111A -
Ground - U111A - -
device.

Schematic Reference

100 of 142
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


data circuit
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at the Q74 Engine Coolant Bypass Valve. It may
If 10 Ω or greater
101 of 142
If infinite resistance, replace the Q74 Engine Coolant Bypass Valve.
If infinite resistance, replace the Q74 Engine Coolant Bypass Valve.
If less than 2 V
102 of 142
Mode.
8. Replace the Q74 Engine Coolant Bypass Valve.
Repair Instructions
DTC U111E
DTC Descriptor
DTC U111E 00
Lost Communication with EVAP Purge Pump

B+ U111E U111E - -
103 of 142
Ignition U111E U111E - -
LIN Serial Data U111E U111E U111E -
Ground - U111E - -
device.

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
104 of 142
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


data circuit
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at the G58 Evaporative Emission Purge Pump. It
If 10 Ω or greater
105 of 142
If infinite resistance, replace the G58 Evaporative Emission Purge Pump.
If infinite resistance, replace the G58 Evaporative Emission Purge Pump.
If less than 2 V
106 of 142
Mode.
8. Replace the G58 Evaporative Emission Purge Pump.
Repair Instructions
DTC U1124
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptors
DTC U1124
Lost Communication with Rear Drive Control Module

B+ U1124 U1124 - -
Ignition U1124 U1124 - -
Serial Data Communication Enable U2099* U1124 - -
High Speed GMLAN Serial Data
U0073* U1124 U0073* -
(+)
U0073* U1124 U0073* -
(-)
U0077* U1124 U0077* -
Serial Data (+)
U0077* U1124 U0077* -
Serial Data (-)
Ground - U1124 - -
107 of 142
transmitter device.

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
108 of 142
Scan Tool Reference

U1814, U2099, U2100, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899,

B+, ignition, serial data communication enable, and serial data circuit terminals.
away from vehicle. Disconnect all the harness connectors at the K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control
Module. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between each of the ground circuit terminals and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
4. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each of the B+ circuit terminals and ground.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse. Refer to Power
Mode Mismatch .
If infinite resistance, replace the K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module.
109 of 142
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each of the ignition circuit terminals and ground.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse. Refer to Power Mode
Mismatch .
If infinite resistance, replace the K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module.
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the serial data communication enable circuit terminal
and ground.
Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the serial data communication enable circuit end to end.
7. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the GMLAN serial data circuit terminals and ground.
to voltage.
If 4.5 V or greater between a chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
for a short to voltage.

9. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the GMLAN serial data circuit terminals and ground.
to ground.
If 100 Ω or less between a chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
110 of 142
for a short to ground.

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the K47 Rear
Differential Clutch Control Module and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
If 2 Ω or greater

12. Replace the K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module.
Repair Instructions
For control module replacement, programming, and setup, refer to: Control Module References .
DTC U1340-U135F
DTC Descriptor

B+ U1340-U135F U1340-U135F - -
Ignition U1340-U135F U1340-U135F - -
LIN Serial Data U1340-U135F U1340-U135F U1340-U135F -
Ground - U1340-U135F - -
device.
111 of 142

Diagnostic Aids
awake.
112 of 142
• This diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the common LIN DTCs: U1340, U1341, U1342,
U1343, U1344, U1345, U1346, U1347, U1348, U1349, U134A, U134B, U134C, U134D, U134E, U134F,
U1350, U1351, U1352, U1353, U1354, U1355, U1356, U1357, U1358, U1359, U135A, U135B, U135C,
U135D, U135E, and U135F.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
P0560, P0562, P06E4, U0028, U0029, U0073-U0078, U007A-U007D, U0100-U02FF, U1814, U2098, or
U2099 is not set.

113 of 142
data circuit
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the disconnected LIN device.
114 of 142
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit terminal and ground.
circuit.
If less than 3.5 V
115 of 142
seated.
ground.

ground.

Repair Instructions
116 of 142
DTC U1500-U15FF
DTC Descriptor

B+ U1500-U15BF U1500-U15BF - -
Ignition U1500-U15BF U1500-U15BF - -
LIN Serial Data U1500-U15BF U1500-U15BF U1500-U15BF -
Ground - U1500-U15BF - -
device.

Diagnostic Aids
117 of 142
awake.
• Communication will be available between the master control module and the scan tool if there is a loss of
communications with any of the other LIN devices on the LIN bus network.
• This diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the common LIN DTCs: U1500, U1501, U1502,
U1503, U1504, U1505, U1506, U1507, U1508, U1509, U150E, U150F, U1510, U1511, U1512, U1513,
U1514, U1515, U1516, U1517, U1518, U1519, U151A, U151B, U151C, U1520, U1521, U1522, U1523,
U1524, U1526, U1528, U152C, U152D, U1530, U1531, U1532, U1534, U1538, U153A, U1540, U1544,
U1548, U1549, U154A, U154B, U1550, U1556, U1558, U15E1, U15E3, U15F0, and other DTCs within
the U1500 - U15FF range.
Schematic Reference
118 of 142
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
P0560, P0562, P06E4, U0028, U0029, U0073-U0078, U007A-U007D, U0100-U02FF, U1814, U2098, or
U2099 is not set.

NOTE: • A DTC in U1501-U150F range is normally used to indicate a LIN bus off. If a
DTC in U1501-U150F range is set by itself, use the LIN schematics for the
device setting this DTC to identify the LIN slave device to diagnose it.
• For some vehicles, both headlamps may be connected to the same LIN
circuit through a splice. Or both LIN circuits to the headlamps may be
internally connected at the connector of the K26 Headlamp Control Module
(or K28 Headlamp Leveling Control Module). A short in one headlamp or
its LIN circuit may cause no communication to both headlamps. Ensure to
diagnose both LIN circuits and headlamps prior to replacing any
headlamp.
• Use the schematic to identify the following:
The master control module and the LIN devices on the same LIN
119 of 142
serial data circuit
The master control module's LIN serial data circuit terminal and the
LIN device's B+, ignition, ground, and LIN serial data circuit terminals
If 10 Ω or greater
120 of 142
circuit.
If less than 3.5 V
121 of 142
seated.
ground.

ground.

Repair Instructions
122 of 142
DTC U1653
DTC Descriptor
DTC U1653
Chassis Systems High Speed Communication Enable Circuit

U0100-U02FF,
Serial Data Communication Enable U2099 1 -
U1653
Serial Data (+) U0100-U02FF,
U0077 U0077 -
or High Speed GMLAN Serial U1653
Data (+) (2)
Serial Data (-) U0100-U02FF,
U0077 U0077 -
or High Speed GMLAN Serial U1653
Data (-) (2)
1. Battery drain condition may occur.
The Body Control Module (BCM) activates the ignition circuit, when the vehicle power mode is in
ACCESSORY mode or Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service mode. The ignition circuit wakes up the devices for
serial data bus communication.
The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the chassis high speed GMLAN
• The devices use a default value for the missing parameters until the next ignition cycle.
• The device(s) is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystem(s) will not function.
123 of 142

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC U0073 - U007F, U2100, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428,
B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.

NOTE: Use the schematic and the connector end view to identify the device's serial
data communication enable circuit and chassis high speed GMLAN serial data
circuit terminals.
124 of 142
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting this DTC, ignition
2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the serial data communication enable circuit terminal and ground.
Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data communication enable circuit and ground.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater
Refer to DTC U0077 to test for a short to voltage.

5. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
If 100 Ω or less
Refer to DTC U0077 to test for a short to ground.

6. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between
the harness connector at the device setting this DTC and the appropriate X84 Data Link Connector
terminals listed below.
• Chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal 12
• Chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal 13
If 2 Ω or greater

7. Replace the device setting this DTC.
Repair Instructions
125 of 142
DTC U1814
DTC Descriptor
DTC U1814
Powertrain Wake-Up Communication Circuit

Accessory Wakeup Serial Data U1814 02* U0100-U02FF - -
* Vehicle may not start.
The body control module (BCM) activates the accessory wakeup serial data circuit, when the ignition key is in
ACC, ON or START. The accessory wakeup serial data circuit wakes up the devices for serial data bus
communication.

• The vehicle power mode master requires serial data communication to occur.
The BCM senses a short to ground on the accessory wakeup serial data circuit.
• The output command is turned off while the malfunction is present.

• The vehicle will not start while the circuit is shorted to ground.

126 of 142
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: Use the schematics to determine which devices are connected to the K9 Body
Control Module's accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal 22 X4. Use the
connector end views to identify the accessory wakeup serial data circuit
terminal for each of those devices.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module. It may take up to
10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for greater than 100 Ω between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal 22 X4 and ground.
If 100 Ω or less
1. Disconnect the harness connectors at all devices that share the accessory wakeup serial data circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and ground.
3. Reconnect the first device that shares the share the accessory wakeup serial data circuit.
4. Test for greater than 100 Ω between the accessory wakeup serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 100 Ω or less, replace the device that was just connected.
If greater than 100 Ω and there are more devices to connect, connect the next device and
repeat step 2.4 until there are no more devices to connect.
127 of 142
3. Replace the K9 Body Control Module.
Repair Instructions
DTC U1833
DTC Descriptor
DTC U1833
Lost Communication with Electronic Brake Control Module on Chassis Expansion CAN Bus

U0121, U0129, U0121, U0129,
B+ - -
U1833 U1833
U0121, U0129, U0121, U0129,
Ignition - -
U1833 U1833
Accessory Wake-Up Serial Data U0121, U0129,
U1814 - -
(circuit 5985) U1833
Serial Data Communication Enable U0121, U0129,
U2099 - -
(circuit 5986) U1833
U0077* U0077* U0077* -
Serial Data [+] (circuit 6105)
U0077* U0077* U0077* -
Serial Data [-] (circuit 6106)
U0121, U0129,
Ground - - -
U1833
128 of 142
transmitter device.
The system voltage is at least 10 V.
• A driver information center message and/or a warning indicator may be displayed.

• The DTC U1833 is a type B DTC.
The DTC U1833 is a type B DTC.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

U1814, U2099, U2100, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899,
129 of 142

B+, ignition, accessory wake-up serial data, serial data communication enable,
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K17 Electronic Brake Control Module (or
K160 Brake System Control Module). It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the K17 Electronic Brake Control Module (or K160 Brake
System Control Module).
130 of 142
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the accessory wake-up serial data circuit terminal
(circuit 5985) and ground.
Control Module.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the accessory wake-up serial data circuit end to end.
Control Module.
the K17 Electronic Brake Control Module (or K160 Brake System Control Module) and the device
setting the DTC.
If 2 Ω or greater

10. Replace the K17 Electronic Brake Control Module (or K160 Brake System Control Module).
Repair Instructions
DTC U183A
131 of 142
DTC Descriptor
DTC U183A
Lost Communication with Telematics Communication Interface Control Module on High Speed CAN
Bus

B+ U183A U183A - -
Serial Data Communication Enable U1814, U2099 U183A - -
U007C U183A U007C -
Data (+) (9)
U007C U183A U007C -
Data (-) (9)
Ground - U183A - -
scan tool is connected to the serial data circuit through the X84 Data Link Connector (DLC), the scan tool can
be used to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). When
the vehicle is ON, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to
ensure that the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for
example if the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data
circuit disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message,
detect its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non
communicating device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices
that contain the stored DTC.
132 of 142
The device is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystems will not function.

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

U1814, U2099, U2100, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899,

133 of 142
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K73 Telematics Communication Interface
Control Module. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
134 of 142
and ground.
Control Module.
7. Test for less than 4.5 V between each gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal
and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater
Device to test for a short to voltage.

9. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
terminal and ground.
If 100 Ω or less
Device to test for a short to ground.

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each serial data circuits end to end between the K73 Telematics Communication
Interface Control Module and the device setting the DTC.
If 2 Ω or greater

12. Replace the K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module.
Repair Instructions
DTC U184A
135 of 142
DTC Descriptor
DTC U184A
Lost Communication with Body Control Module on Low Speed CAN Bus

B+ U184A U184A - -
U0078* U184A U0078* -
Data
Ground - U184A - -
* Scan Tool Does Not Communicate With Low Speed GMLAN Device
used to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). When the
vehicle is ON, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure
that the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example
if the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.

136 of 142
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0078, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517,
C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.

B+, ignition, and serial data circuit terminals.
If 10 Ω or greater
137 of 142
If infinite resistance, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
7. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the K9 Body
Control Module and the device setting the DTC.
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
138 of 142
DTC U184C
DTC Descriptor
DTC U184C
Lost Communication with Instrument Cluster on Low Speed CAN Bus

B+ U184C U184C - -
Ignition U184C U184C - -
GMLAN Serial Data
U007D U184C U007D -
Data #2
Ground - U184C - -
used to monitor each device for diagnostic purposes and to check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTC). When the
vehicle is ON, each device communicating on the serial data circuit sends a state of health message to ensure
that the device is operating properly. When a device stops communicating on the serial data circuit, for example
if the device loses power or ground, the state of health message it normally sends on the serial data circuit
disappears. Other devices on the serial data circuit, which expect to receive that state of health message, detect
its absence; those devices in turn set a DTC associated with the loss of state of health of the non communicating
device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that contain the
stored DTC.
139 of 142

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0078, U007B, U007C, U007D, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428,
B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.

B+, ignition, and serial data circuit terminals.
140 of 142
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the P16 Instrument Cluster. It may take up to 10
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
module that controls the ignition circuit.
141 of 142
If less than 2 Ω, replace the control module that controls the ignition circuit.
7. Test for less than 4.5 V between each gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
If 4.5 V or greater
to test for a short to voltage.

9. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal
and ground.
If 100 Ω or less
to test for a short to ground.

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between
the P16 Instrument Cluster and the device setting the DTC.
If 2 Ω or greater

12. Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
Repair Instructions
142 of 142
Data Communications - Diagnostic Information And Procedures (2 Of 2) - XT4

DTC U18A2
DTC Descriptors
DTC U18A2
Lost Communication with Fuel Pump Driver Control Module

B+ U18A2 U18A2 - -
Ignition U18A2 U18A2 - -
NOx Sensor 1 Control (circuit
U18A2 U18A2 - -
3674)
Powertrain Sensor Bus Enable
U18A2 U18A2 - -
(circuit 4320)
Fuel Pump Primary Relay Control
U18A2 U18A2 - -
(circuit 465)
Serial Data (+) (circuit 4498)
U0076* U0076* U0076* -
Data (+) 7
Serial Data (-) (circuit 4499)
U0076* U0076* U0076* -
Data (-) 7
Ground - U18A2 - -
1 of 158
transmitter device.

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0076, U0077, U0078, U007A, U007B, U007C, U007D, P06E4,
P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800,
2 of 158
C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.

B+, ignition, powertrain sensor bus enable, fuel pump primary relay control, and
serial data circuit terminals.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module. It
NOTE: If the control module's chassis ground is shared with any tail lamp
assembly, disconnect the harness connector at that tail lamp assembly to
remove the alternative path to ground before proceeding with this step.
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
3 of 158
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the NOx sensor 1 control circuit terminal (circuit
3674) and ground.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the NOx sensor 1 control circuit end to end.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the NOx sensor 1 control circuit and ground.
7. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between the powertrain sensor bus enable circuit terminal
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the K20 Engine
Control Module and all control modules connected to the powertrain sensor bus enable circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the powertrain sensor bus enable circuit terminal and ground.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the powertrain sensor bus enable circuit end to end.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
8. Verify if the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module is equipped with the fuel pump primary relay
control circuit (circuit 465).
If equipped
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connectors at the K20 Engine
Control Module.
4 of 158
3. Test for less than 1 V between the fuel pump primary relay control circuit terminal and ground.
5. Test for infinite resistance between the fuel pump primary relay control circuit terminal and ground.
6. Test for less than 2 Ω in the fuel pump primary relay control circuit end to end.
Go to next step: If NOT equipped
9. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
terminals and ground.
• Circuit 4498
• Circuit 4499
If 4.5 V or greater

11. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
• Circuit 4498
• Circuit 4499
If 100 Ω or less

13. Test for less than 2 Ω in each serial data circuits end to end between the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control
• Circuit 4498
• Circuit 4499
If 2 Ω or greater

14. Replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
5 of 158
17. Verify DTC U18A2 does not set again.
If DTC U18A2 sets
Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Go to next step: If DTC U18A2 does not set

18. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC U18A6
DTC Descriptor
DTC U18A6
Lost Communication with Right Object Detection Control Module on Dedicated Bus 1

B+ U18A6 U18A6 - -
Communication Enable U18A6 U18A6 - -
Serial Data (+) U18A6 U18A6 U18A6 -
Serial Data (-) U18A6 U18A6 U18A6 -
Ground - U18A6 - -
The side object sensor modules use radar to determine the presence of objects nearby. Side blind zone alert is
active when the vehicle is out of park or the parking brake is off on manual transmission vehicles. If a vehicle is
detected in the side blind zone, the warning symbols will illuminate on the appropriate side. There is a private
communication network between the B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left and the B218R Side Object
Sensor Module - Right.
6 of 158

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify that DTC U0073, U0075, U0078, U007B, U007C, U007D, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370,
B1380, B1424, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.

7 of 158
B+, and serial data circuit terminals.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right. It
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
5. If equipped, test for at least 6 V between the communication enable circuit terminal and ground.
If less than 6 V
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the B218L Side Object Sensor Module -
Left.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the communication enable circuit terminal and ground.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the communication enable circuit end to end.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left.
Go to next step: If 6 V or greater
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left. It
7. Test for less than 1 V between each of the serial data circuit terminals and ground.
8 of 158
If 1 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage in the serial data circuit.

8. Test for infinite resistance between each of the serial data circuit terminals and ground.
Repair the short to ground in the serial data circuit.

9. Test for infinite resistance between 2 serial data circuits.
Repair the short together between the serial data circuits.

10. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the serial data circuits end to end between the B218L Side Object Sensor
Module - Left and the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
If 2 Ω or greater
NOTE: Prior to replacing a module, visually inspect wiring connections to both

Side Object Sensor Modules for contamination, deformation, terminal
fretting corrosion, terminal tension, and chafing.
11. Replace the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
Repair Instructions
DTC U18A7
Check - Vehicle .
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis .
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions .
DTC Descriptor
DTC U18A7
Lost Communication with Power Supply Transformer on Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus
9 of 158

B+ U18A7 U18A7 - -
Ignition U18A7 U18A7 - -
Accessory Wakeup Serial Data U1814 U18A7 - -
U0074* U0074, U18A7* U0074* -
Serial Data (+)
U0074* U0074, U18A7* U0074* -
Serial Data (-)
Ground - U18A7 - -
transmitter device.

Schematic Reference

10 of 158
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517,

away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connector at the T19 Power Supply Transformer. It may take
If 10 Ω or greater
NOTE: If equipped with S38 Ignition Mode Switch (RPO BTM), the vehicle will not
power up after the T19 Power Supply Transformer is disconnected. Unplug
11 of 158
the connector with the ignition on/vehicle in service mode. Verify the
malfunction indicator lamp is illuminated on the driver information center
after disconnecting the connector to verify the vehicle is still powered up.
3. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode, verify the vehicle is not equipped with S38 Ignition Mode Switch
(RPO BTM).
If the vehicle is equipped with S38 Ignition Mode Switch
1. Reconnect the harness connector at T19 Power Supply Transformer.
3. Disconnect the harness connector at T19 Power Supply Transformer with the ignition still on.
4. Proceed to step 4.
Go to next step: If the vehicle is not equipped with S38 Ignition Mode Switch
If infinite resistance, replace the T19 Power Supply Transformer.
If infinite resistance, replace the T19 Power Supply Transformer.
ground.
Control Module.
12 of 158
7. Test for less than 4.5 V between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

9. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
If 100 Ω or less

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the
T19 Power Supply Transformer and the device setting the DTC.
If 2 Ω or greater

12. Replace the T19 Power Supply Transformer.
Repair Instructions
• Refer to Multifunction Power Supply Converter Replacement for T19 Power Supply Transformer
replacement.
• For device replacement, programming, and setup, refer to: Control Module References .
DTC U18AF-U18B4
DTC Descriptor
DTC U18AF
13 of 158
Lost Communications With Telematics Communications Interface Control Module on Ethernet Bus
DTC U18B0
Lost Communications With Instrument Cluster on Ethernet Bus
DTC U18B1
Lost Communications With Audio Amplifier on Ethernet Bus
DTC U18B2
Lost Communication with Rear Audio Control Module on Ethernet Bus
DTC U18B3
Lost Communications With Navigation Control Module on Ethernet Bus
DTC U18B4
Lost Communication with Radio on Ethernet Bus

U18AF -
B+ U18AF - U18B4 - -
U18B4
U18AF -
Ignition U18AF - U18B4 - -
U18B4
U18AF - U18AF -
Ethernet Serial Data (+) U18AF - U18B4 -
U18B4 U18B4
U18AF - U18AF -
Ethernet Serial Data (-) U18AF - U18B4 -
U18B4 U18B4
Ground - U18AF - U18B4 - -
At the core of the infotainment system is the Radio Ethernet Audio Video Bridging switch which communicates
directly to each contributing Infotainment control module terminator. The Ethernet harness consists of twisted
pair wires from point to point. Each control module on the Ethernet infotainment system sends/receives data at
100 Mbit/s to/from a specified port at the Radio. The Radio Ethernet will also be used to program USB software
update files to the control modules connected to the Ethernet ports.
14 of 158

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


15 of 158
NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the control module's
ground, B+, ignition, and serial data circuit terminals.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the control module specified by the DTC
descriptor. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the control module specified by the DTC descriptor.
If infinite resistance, replace the control module specified by the DTC descriptor.
16 of 158
Mode.
circuit.
Control Module.
8. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC.
10. Test for less than 4.5 V between each Ethernet serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

12. Test for infinite resistance between each Ethernet serial data circuit terminal and ground.
17 of 158

13. Test for infinite resistance between each pair of Ethernet serial data circuit terminals.
Repair the short together in the serial data circuits.

14. Test for less than 2 Ω in each Ethernet serial data circuit end to end.
If 2 Ω or greater

15. Replace the control module specified by the DTC descriptor.
Repair Instructions
DTC U18B9-U18BF
DTC Descriptor
DTC U18B9
Primary High Speed CAN Bus Subnet Configuration List
DTC U18BF
Secondary High Speed CAN Bus Subnet Configuration List
Devices on the high speed GMLAN serial data bus and the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data bus must be
programmed with software that specifically identifies the correct type and quantity of devices on the bus based
on RPO configuration. If a device was not properly configured after installation, the appropriate U Code may be
set for that device. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
18 of 158
• Voltage supplied to the device is in the normal operating voltage range.
• The device is not configured properly.

• Control unit recognises a programming error.
• CAN-Bus configuration is invalid

of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC U18B9-U18BF is not set.
If DTC U18B9-U18BF is set along with other DTCs set
Diagnose all other DTCs first. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
If DTC U18B9-U18BF is set without other DTCs set
19 of 158
2. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the scan tool, open and close the driver door. Wait 60 s.
5. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC U18B9-U18BF is not set
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC U18C5
DTC Descriptor
DTC U18C5
Lost Communication with Electronic Brake Control Module on High Speed CAN Bus

B+ U18C5 U18C5 - -
Ignition U18C5 U18C5 - -
Serial Data Communication Enable U1814, U2099 U18C5 - -
U0073* U0073, U18C5* U0073* -
(+)
High Speed GMLAN Serial Data (-) U0073* U0073, U18C5* U0073* -
Ground - U18C5 - -
20 of 158
transmitter device.

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

21 of 158

If 10 Ω or greater
22 of 158
and ground.
Control Module.
If 4.5 V or greater
to voltage.

If 100 Ω or less
to ground.

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the K17
Electronic Brake Control Module (or K160 Brake System Control Module) and the device setting the
DTC.
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
23 of 158
DTC U18C6
DTC Descriptor
DTC U18C6
Transmission Range Selector Control Module Lost Communication with Engine Control Module on

B+ U18C6 U18C6 - -
Ignition U18C6 U18C6 - -
Accessory Wakeup Serial Data U1814, U2099 U18C6 - -
U0076* U0076, U18C6* U0076* -
Data (+) 7]
U0076* U0076, U18C6* U0076* -
Data (-) 7]
Ground - U18C6 - -
transmitter device.
24 of 158

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC U0073-U0078, U007A-U007F, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424,
B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.

25 of 158
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K20 Engine Control Module. It may take up
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
26 of 158
ground.
Control Module.
7. Test for less than 4.5 V between each powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal
and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

9. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
If 100 Ω or less

10. Disconnect the harness connectors at the A97 Transmission Range Selector Controls.
11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end
between the K20 Engine Control Module and the A97 Transmission Range Selector Controls.
If 2 Ω or greater

12. Reconnect the harness connectors at the A97 Transmission Range Selector Controls.
13. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of the powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
the K20 Engine Control Module.
If less than 110 Ω
Refer to DTC U0076 to test for a short between the serial data circuits.
Refer to DTC U0076 to test for an open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.

14. Replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
27 of 158
DTC U18D2
DTC Descriptor
DTC U18D2
Lost Communication with Transmission Range Selector Control Module on Powertrain Sensor CAN Bus

B+ U18D2 U18D2 - -
Ignition U18D2 U18D2 - -
Accessory Wakeup Serial Data U1814, U2099 U18D2 - -
U0076* U0076, U18D2* U0076* -
U0076* U0076, U18D2* U0076* -
Ground - U18D2 - -
transmitter device.
28 of 158

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0076, U0077, U0078, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370,
B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.

29 of 158
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the A97 Transmission Range Selector Controls.
It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the A97 Transmission Range Selector Controls.
ground.
30 of 158
Control Module.
and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

If 100 Ω or less

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end
between the A97 Transmission Range Selector Controls and the device setting the DTC.
If 2 Ω or greater

12. Replace the A97 Transmission Range Selector Controls.
Repair Instructions
DTC U18D3
31 of 158
DTC Descriptor
DTC U18D3
Lost Communication with Transmission Range Selector Control Module on Powertrain Expansion CAN
Bus

B+ U18D3 U18D3 - -
Ignition U18D3 U18D3 - -
Accessory Wakeup Serial Data U1814, U2099 U18D3 - -
U0074* U0074, U18D3* U0074* -
Serial Data (+)
U0074* U0074, U18D3* U0074* -
Serial Data (-)
Ground - U18D3 - -
transmitter device.

32 of 158
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0076, U0077, U0078, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370,
B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or P0562 is not set.

away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the A97 Transmission Range Selector Controls.
If 10 Ω or greater
33 of 158
ground.
Control Module.
7. Test for less than 4.5 V between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and
34 of 158
ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

9. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and
ground.
If 100 Ω or less

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the
A97 Transmission Range Selector Controls and the device setting the DTC.
If 2 Ω or greater

12. Replace the A97 Transmission Range Selector Controls.
Repair Instructions
DTC U18D5
DTC Descriptors
DTC U18D5
Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Engine Control Module

35 of 158
B+ U18D5, U0100 U18D5, U0100 - -
Ignition U18D5, U0100 U18D5, U0100 - -
Accessory Wake Up Serial Data U1814, U2099 U18D5, U0100 - -
U0073* U0073* U0073* -
(+)
U0073* U0073* U0073* -
(-)
Ground - U18D5, U0100 - -
transmitter device.

Schematic Reference

36 of 158
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


B+, ignition, accessory wake up serial data, and serial data circuit terminals.
If 10 Ω or greater
37 of 158
ground.
Control Module.
If 4.5 V or greater
to voltage.

If 100 Ω or less
38 of 158
to ground.

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each serial data circuits end to end between the K20 Engine Control Module and
the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
DTC U18D7
DTC Descriptors
DTC U18D7
Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Transmission Control Module

B+ U18D7, U0101 U18D7, U0101 - -
Ignition U18D7, U0101 U18D7, U0101 - -
Accessory Wake Up Serial Data U1814, U2099 U18D7, U0101 - -
U0073* U0073* U0073* -
(+)
U0073* U0073* U0073* -
(-)
Ground - U18D7, U0101 - -
39 of 158
transmitter device.

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
40 of 158

away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K71 Transmission Control Module. It may
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the K71 Transmission Control Module.
41 of 158
If infinite resistance, replace the K71 Transmission Control Module.
ground.
Control Module.
If 4.5 V or greater
to voltage.

If 100 Ω or less
to ground.

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each serial data circuits end to end between the K71 Transmission Control
Module and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
If 2 Ω or greater

12. Replace the K71 Transmission Control Module.
Repair Instructions
42 of 158
DTC U18DC
DTC Descriptors
DTC U18DC
Central Gateway Module Lost Communication with Brake System Control Module 1

U18DC,
B+ U18DC, U0121 - -
U0121
U18DC,
Ignition U18DC, U0121 - -
U0121
Serial Data Communication Enable U1814, U2099 U18DC, U0121 - -
U0073* U18DC, U0121 U0073* -
(+)
High Speed GMLAN Serial Data (-) U0073* U18DC, U0121 U0073* -
Ground - U18DC, U0121 - -
transmitter device.
43 of 158

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899,
C12E1, P0560, P0562, P06E4, P1EB9, U0073 - U0078, U007A - U007D, U1814, or U2099 is not set.

44 of 158
If 10 Ω or greater
and ground.
45 of 158
Control Module.
If 4.5 V or greater
to voltage.

If 100 Ω or less
to ground.

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each serial data circuits end to end between the K17 Electronic Brake Control
Module (or K160 Brake System Control Module) and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
DTC U1980
DTC Descriptor
46 of 158
DTC U1980
Security Calibration Identification Mismatch
A security policy value called Not Before ID is stored in K56 Serial Data Gateway Module memory. This is a
hex number identifier used by cyber security calibrations to prevent programming an earlier model year security
calibration into a current or subsequent model year. If the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module is reprogrammed
with a security calibration that contains a security policy value greater than the value that is currently stored in
memory, then the security policy value is updated in memory to the new value. The value in memory can only
be incremented and can never be decremented. If the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module is reprogrammed with a
security calibration that contains a security policy value lower than the value stored in the memory, then DTC
U1980 will be set.
• Battery voltage is between 9 - 16 V.

• Vehicle power mode is Ignition/Vehicle OFF, ACCESSORY, or Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
On the first startup after the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module is reprogrammed, it detects that the security
policy value in the security calibration is lower than the value stored in the memory.
The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module will not gate any message from dirty buses to clean buses.
The security policy value in the memory is updated with the new value in the security calibration which shall be
equal to or greater than the value currently stored in the memory.
Schematic Reference

47 of 158
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If DTC U1980 is set
1. Program the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
If the DTC sets, replace the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC U2010-U2013
DTC Descriptor
DTC U2010
Network Configuration List Not Programmed - Engine Control Module LIN Bus 1
DTC U2011
DTC U2012
48 of 158
DTC U2013
The K20 Engine Control Module must be configured with LIN bus device ID information. If the K20 Engine
Control Module was not properly configured with correct LIN bus device ID information after installation, it
may set the appropriate communication DTCs. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
The K20 Engine Control Module is not configured properly.

of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
49 of 158
2. Verify that DTC U2010 - U2013 is not set.
1. Program the K20 Engine Control Module.
If the DTC sets, replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
3. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC U2022-U2023
DTC Descriptor
DTC U2022
Network Configuration List Not Programmed - Electronic Brake Control Module LIN Bus 1
DTC U2023
Network Configuration List Not Programmed - Electronic Brake Control Module LIN Bus 2
The K160 Brake System Control Module (or K17 Electronic Brake Control Module) must be configured with
LIN bus device ID information. If the K160 Brake System Control Module (or K17 Electronic Brake Control
Module) was not properly configured with correct LIN bus device ID information after installation, it may set
the appropriate communication DTCs. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
50 of 158
The K160 Brake System Control Module (or K17 Electronic Brake Control Module) is not configured properly.

of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that DTC U2022 or U2023 is not set.
1. Program the K160 Brake System Control Module (or K17 Electronic Brake Control Module).
If the DTC sets, replace the K160 Brake System Control Module (or K17 Electronic Brake
Control Module).
3. All OK.
3. All OK
51 of 158
Repair Instructions
DTC U2099
DTC Descriptor
DTC U2099
High Speed Communication Enable Circuit

Serial Data Communication Enable U2099* U0100-U02FF U0100-U02FF -
* Vehicle may not start.
The body control module (BCM) activates the serial data communication enable circuit, when the ignition key
is in ACC, ON or START. The serial data communication enable circuit wakes up the devices for serial data bus
communication.

The BCM senses a short to ground on the serial data communication enable circuit.
• The output command is turned off while the malfunction is present.

• The vehicle will not start while the circuit is shorted to ground.
52 of 158
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: Use the schematic to determine which devices are on the K9 Body Control
Module's serial data communication enable circuit terminal 23 X4. Use the
connector end view to identify the serial data communication enable circuit
terminal for each of those devices.
2. Test for greater than 100 Ω between the serial data communication enable circuit terminal 23 X4 and
ground.
If 100 Ω or less
1. Disconnect the harness connectors at all devices that share the serial data communication enable
circuit.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data communication enable circuit terminal and
ground.
53 of 158
3. Reconnect the first device that shares the share the serial data communication enable circuit.
4. Test for greater than 100 Ω between the serial data communication enable circuit terminal and
ground.
If 100 Ω or less, replace the device that was just connected.
If greater than 100 Ω and there are more devices to connect, connect the next device and
repeat step 2.4 until there are no more devices to connect.
Repair Instructions
DTC U209E
DTC Descriptor
DTC U209E
Object Detection Control Module High Speed Communication Enable Circuit 1

Ignition U209E U0100-U02FF U0100-U02FF -
The active safety control module activates the object detection ignition circuit, when the ignition is ON. The
object detection ignition circuit wakes up the devices for serial data bus communication.

The active safety control module senses a short to ground on the object detection ignition circuit.
54 of 158
The device(s) is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystem(s) will not function.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: Use the schematic to determine which devices are on the K124 active safety
control module's ignition circuit 9 X1. Use the connector end view to identify
the object detection ignition circuit terminal for each of those devices.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at an easily accessible device that shares the K124 active
safety control module's ignition circuit 9 X1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that the DTC U209E remains current.
If the DTC becomes history
Replace the device that was just disconnected.
Go to next step: If the DTC remains current

3. With the prior devices disconnected, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each device on the ignition circuit except the
K124 active safety control module.
4. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K124 active safety control module.
55 of 158
5. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit terminal 9 X1 at the K124 active safety control
module and ground.

6. Replace the K124 active safety control module.
Repair Instructions
DTC U209F
DTC Descriptor
DTC U209F
Object Detection Control Module High Speed Communication Enable Circuit 2

Ignition U209F U0100-U02FF U0100-U02FF -
The active safety control module activates the object detection ignition circuit, when the ignition is ON. The
object detection ignition circuit wakes up the devices for serial data bus communication.

The active safety control module senses a short to ground on the object detection ignition circuit.
56 of 158
The device(s) is never signaled. Therefore, the specific subsystem(s) will not function.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: Use the schematic to determine which devices are on the K124 active safety
control module's ignition circuit 10 X1. Use the connector end view to identify
the object detection ignition circuit terminal for each of those devices.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at an easily accessible device that shares the K124 active
safety control module's ignition circuit 10 X1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that the DTC U209F remains current.
If the DTC becomes history
Replace the device that was just disconnected.
Go to next step: If the DTC remains current

3. With the prior devices disconnected, repeat steps 1 and 2 for each device on the ignition circuit except the
K124 active safety control module.
4. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K124 active safety control module.
5. Test for infinite resistance between the ignition circuit terminal 10 X1 at the K124 active safety control
57 of 158
module and ground.

6. Replace the K124 active safety control module.
Repair Instructions
DTC U2101
DTC Descriptor
DTC U2101
CAN Bus Maximum List of Control Modules
Some devices must be programmed with software that specifically identifies the correct type and quantity of
devices on the serial data bus based on RPO configuration. If a device was not properly configured after
installation, the appropriate U Code may be set for that device. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
• The system voltage is in the normal operating voltage range.

• The device is not configured properly.

• Control unit recognizes a programming error.
• CAN Bus configuration is invalid.

of the malfunction.
58 of 158
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If DTC U2101 is set along with other DTCs set
If DTC U2101 is set without other DTCs set

2. Clear the DTC.
3. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, remove the scan tool, open and close the driver door. Wait 60 s.
5. All OK.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
59 of 158
DTC U2160-U2231
DTC Descriptor
For device DTC descriptors, refer to Control Module U Code List .

B+ U2160 - U2231 U2160 - U2231 - -
U2160 - U2231,
Ignition U2160 - U2231 - -
U1814, U2099
U0075 U2160 - U2231 U0075 -
Serial Data (+)
U0075 U2160 - U2231 U0075 -
Serial Data (-)
U0074, U0077 U2160 - U2231 U0074, U0077 -
Serial Data (+)
U0074, U0077 U2160 - U2231 U0074, U0077 -
Serial Data (-)
U0073, 2 U2160 - U2231 U0073, 2 -
Data (+)
U0073, 2 U2160 - U2231 U0073, 2 -
Data (-)
U0078, 1 U2160 - U2231 U0078, 1 -
Data
Ground - U2160 - U2231 - -
1. Scan tool does not communicate with most low speed GMLAN device
2. Scan tool does not communicate with most high speed GMLAN device
transmitter device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the devices that
contain the stored code.
60 of 158

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

U1814, U2099, U2100, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899,
61 of 158
3. Determine the device that is not communicating. Refer to Control Module U Code List .
4. Refer to Data Link References to determine which data communication bus the non communicating
device is on.
If the device is on Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN bus
If the device is on Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN bus
If the device is on Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN bus
to diagnose that device.
Go to next step: If the device is not on Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN bus,
Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN bus, and Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN bus
B+, ignition, accessory wakeup serial data, serial data communication enable,
away from vehicle. Disconnect all the harness connectors at the device that is not communicating. It may
If 10 Ω or greater
62 of 158
Mode.
circuit.
63 of 158
Control Module.
8. Test for less than 4.5 V between each GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater between a low speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
to voltage.
to voltage.

10. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each GMLAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 100 Ω or less between a low speed GMLAN serial data circuit and ground
to ground.
to ground.

12. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the non
communicating device and the device setting the DTC.
If 2 Ω or greater
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit between the non communicating device
and the device setting the DTC.

13. Reconnect the harness connectors at the device setting the DTC.
64 of 158
NOTE: The following test step is only applicable to a high speed GMLAN device
with 2 pairs of serial data circuits or a high speed GMLAN device with an
internal terminating resistor.
14. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of high speed GMLAN serial data circuits.
If less than 110 Ω
to ground or a short between the serial data circuits.
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device to test for an
open/high resistance in the serial data circuit.

15. Replace the device that is not communicating.
Repair Instructions
DTC U240B
DTC Descriptor
DTC U240B
Radio Dedicated Bus Off

B+ U240B U240B - -
Ignition U240B U240B - -
High Speed CAN Serial Data (+) U240B U240B U240B -
High Speed CAN Serial Data (-) U240B U240B U240B -
Ground - U240B - -
65 of 158
The A11 Radio communicates with the S165 Infotainment Control Switch through a private CAN bus.
The device suspends all message transmissions.

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

66 of 158
U2100, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800,

NOTE: Use the schematics and connector end views to identify the control module's
ground, B+, ignition, and serial data circuit terminals.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the S165 Infotainment Control Switch. It may
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the S165 Infotainment Control Switch.
5. Test for less than 4.5 V between each high speed CAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

67 of 158
7. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each high speed CAN serial data circuit terminal and ground.
If 100 Ω or less

8. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of high speed CAN serial data circuit terminals.
If less than 110 Ω
If greater than 130 Ω but less than infinite resistance
If infinite resistance

Repair Instructions
DTC U240D
DTC Descriptor
DTC U240D
Transmission Range Selector Control Module Powertrain Expansion CAN Bus Off

U0074, U0074,
Serial Data (+) U0074, U240D* -
U240D* U240D*
68 of 158
Data (+) 3]
Serial Data (-) U0074, U0074,
U0074, U240D* -
[or High Speed GMLAN Serial U240D* U240D*
Data (-) 3]
The powertrain high speed GMLAN serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information
between the devices. If this serial data system is inoperative, the devices will still communicate with the scan
tool due to other serial data systems but not with each other.

The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the powertrain high speed GMLAN


of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

69 of 158
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC U240D is not set.
If DTC U240D is set
Refer to DTC U0074 to diagnose powertrain expansion bus.
Go to next step: If DTC U240D is not set

3. All OK
DTC U240E
DTC Descriptor
DTC U240E
Transmission Range Selector Control Module Powertrain Sensor CAN Bus Off

GMLAN Serial Data (+) U0076, U0076,
U0076, U240E* -
[or High Speed GMLAN Serial U240E* U240E*
Data (+) 7]
GMLAN Serial Data (-) U0076, U0076,
U0076, U240E* -
[or High Speed GMLAN Serial U240E* U240E*
Data (-) 7]
70 of 158
The powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate
information between the devices. If this serial data system is inoperative, the devices will still communicate
with the scan tool due to other serial data systems but not with each other.

The device setting the DTC has attempted to establish communications on the powertrain sensor high speed
GMLAN serial data circuits more than 3 times.


of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
71 of 158
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC U240E is not set.
If DTC U240E is set
Refer to DTC U0076 to diagnose powertrain sensor bus.
Go to next step: If DTC U240E is not set

3. All OK
DTC U2412
DTC Descriptor
DTC U2412
Reductant Control Module Powertrain Sensor Bus Off

GMLAN Serial Data (+) U0076,
U0076, U2412* U0076, U2412* -
or High Speed GMLAN Serial U2412*
Data (+) (7)
GMLAN Serial Data (-) U0076,
U0076, U2412* U0076, U2412* -
or High Speed GMLAN Serial U2412*
Data (-) (7)
The powertrain sensor high speed GMLAN serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate
72 of 158
information between the devices. If this serial data system is inoperative, some devices may still be able to
communicate with the scan tool due to other serial data systems but not with each other.

The K115 Reductant Control Module has attempted to establish communications on the powertrain sensor high
speed GMLAN serial data circuits more than 3 times.


of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
73 of 158
If DTC U2412 is set
Refer to DTC U0076 .

3. All OK
DTC U2413
DTC Descriptor
DTC U2413
Central Gateway Module High Speed CAN Bus Off

High Speed GMLAN Serial Data U0073,
U0073, U2413* U0073, U2413* -
(+) U2413*
High Speed GMLAN Serial Data U0073,
U0073, U2413* U0073, U2413* -
(-) U2413*
The high speed GMLAN serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information between the
devices. If this serial data system is inoperative, some devices may still be able to communicate with the scan

The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module has attempted to establish communications on the high speed GMLAN
74 of 158


of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If DTC U2413 is set
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device.

3. All OK
DTC U2414
75 of 158
DTC Descriptor
DTC U2414
Central Gateway Module High Speed Extension CAN Bus Off

GMLAN Serial Data (+) U007B, U007B,
U007B, U2414* -
or High Speed GMLAN Serial U2414* U2414*
Data (+) (8)
GMLAN Serial Data (-) U007B, U007B,
U007B, U2414* -
or High Speed GMLAN Serial U2414* U2414*
Data (-) (8)
The gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate
information between the devices. If this serial data system is inoperative, some devices may still be able to
communicate with the scan tool due to other serial data systems but not with each other.

The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module has attempted to establish communications on the gateway expansion
high speed GMLAN serial data circuits more than 3 times.

76 of 158
of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If DTC U2414 is set
Refer to DTC U007B .

3. All OK
DTC U2415
DTC Descriptor
77 of 158
DTC U2415
Central Gateway Module Chassis Expansion CAN Bus Off

Chassis High Speed GMLAN U0077,
U0077, U2415* U0077, U2415* -
Serial Data (+) U2415*
Chassis High Speed GMLAN U0077,
U0077, U2415* U0077, U2415* -
Serial Data (-) U2415*
The chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits are serial data buses used to communicate information
between the devices. If this serial data system is inoperative, the devices will still communicate with the scan

The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module has attempted to establish communications on the chassis high speed
GMLAN serial data circuits more than 3 times.


of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

78 of 158
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If DTC U2415 is set
Refer to DTC U0077 .

3. All OK
DTC U2500-U25FF
DTC Descriptor
Refer to Control Module U Code List .
Some devices are constantly receiving information from other devices through serial data communication
network. The invalid data code will be set when a receiving device detects a discrepancy in information it
receives from another device causing its integrity to be questioned. The symptom byte listed in the DTC
Descriptor is for engineering reference only. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
79 of 158

of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: An invalid data DTC is normally set along with another DTC or symptom.
Diagnose other DTCs and/or symptoms before replacing any device.
1. Engine running for 10 s.

2. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode, engine OFF, verify DTC U2500-U25FF is not set.
If DTC U2500-U25FF is set along with other DTCs set
If DTC U2500-U25FF is set without other DTCs set
80 of 158
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC U2500-U25FF is not set
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC U2616
DTC Descriptors
DTC U2616
Fuel Pump Driver Control Module Lost Communication with ECM

B+ U2616, U0100 U2616, U0100 - -
Ignition U2616, U0100 U2616, U0100 - -
Accessory Wake Up Serial Data U1814, U2099 U2616, U0100 - -
U0074* U0074* U0074* -
Serial Data (+)
U0074* U0074* U0074* -
Serial Data (-)
Ground - U2616, U0100 - -
81 of 158
transmitter device.

Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

82 of 158

If 10 Ω or greater
83 of 158
ground.
Control Module.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module. It
the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
DTC U2626
DTC Descriptors
DTC U2626
Reductant Control Module Lost Communication With Engine Control Module on Powertrain Sensor
CAN Bus
84 of 158

B+ U2626 U2626 - -
Ignition U2626 U2626 - -
Accessory Wakeup Serial Data U1814, U2099 U2626 - -
U0076* U0076* U0076* -
Data (+) (7)
U0076* U0076* U0076* -
Data (-) (7)
Ground - U2626 - -
transmitter device.

Schematic Reference

85 of 158
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

U2100, U1814, U2099, B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800,

If 10 Ω or greater
86 of 158
ground.
Control Module.
and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

87 of 158
If 100 Ω or less

10. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K115 Reductant Control Module.
the K115 Reductant Control Module.
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
DTC U3000
DTC Descriptor
DTC U3000
Control Module
are voltage and ground.
88 of 158

Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode, engine OFF.

If DTC U3000 is set with symptom byte 43, 47, or 4B
89 of 158
3. All OK.
If DTC U3000 is set with any symptom byte, except 43, 47, or 4B

3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC U3012
DTC Descriptor
DTC U3012
Control Module Improper Wake-up Performance
are voltage and ground.
90 of 158
Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If DTC U3012 is set

3. All OK
Repair Instructions
SYMPTOMS - DATA COMMUNICATIONS
91 of 158
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that
all of the following are true:
• There are no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) set.
• The devices can communicate via the serial data links.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Data
Link Communications Description and Operation .
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems.
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Symptom List
• Scan Tool Does Not Power Up

• Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Vehicle
• Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device
• Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Chassis High Speed GMLAN Device
• Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Object High Speed GMLAN Device
• Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Low Speed GMLAN Device
• Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN Device
• Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN Device
• Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN Device
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT POWER UP


Data Link Connector B+ 1 1 - -
Data Link Connector Ground - 1 - -
92 of 158
1. Scan Tool Does Not Power Up
The data link connector (DLC) is a standardized 16 cavity connector. Connector design and location is dictated
by an industry wide standard, and is required to provide the following:
• Scan tool B+ voltage at terminal 16

• Scan tool ground at terminal 4
• Common ground at terminal 5
Diagnostic Aids
• The scan tool will power up with the ignition OFF. Some devices however, will not communicate unless
the ignition is ON and the power mode master device sends the appropriate power mode message.
• If the B+ circuit, ground circuits, and connections of the data link connector are functioning properly, the
malfunction must be due to the scan tool.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
away from vehicle. It may take up to 10 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω between each of the X84 Data Link Connector ground circuit terminals listed below
93 of 158
and ground.
• Ground circuit terminal 4
• Ground circuit terminal 5
If 2 Ω or greater
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 16 at the X84 Data Link Connector and
ground.
5. Refer to the scan tool user guide.
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH CHASSIS HIGH SPEED GMLAN DEVICE
Check - Vehicle

U0077 U0077 -
Data (+) 2
U0077 U0077 -
Data (-) 2
94 of 158
* An open in only one chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit may allow degraded
communication between the devices. An open between the X84 Data Link Connector (DLC) and the K56
Serial Data Gateway Module will only affect the communication with the scan tool. The devices will still
communicate.
The devices connected to the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit numbers 6105 & 6106)
position other than OFF. The chassis high speed GMLAN serial data bus uses terminating resistors that are in
parallel with the chassis high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify that the scan tool is communicating with vehicle.
If the scan tool is not communicating with vehicle
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Vehicle.
Go to next step: If the scan tool is communicating with vehicle

3. Attempt to communicate with all devices on the chassis high speed GMLAN bus. Refer to Data Link
95 of 158
References to determine how many devices should be communicating on the chassis high speed GMLAN
bus.
4. Verify two or more devices are not communicating on the chassis high speed GMLAN bus.
If only one device is not communicating
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Testing the Device Circuits.
Go to next step: If two or more devices are not communicating

5. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the scan tool from the X84 Data Link Connector. The following tests
will be done at the X84 Data Link Connector.
7. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the serial data circuit terminals listed below and ground.
• Terminal 12
• Terminal 13
If 4.5 V or greater
Repair the short to voltage in the serial data circuit between the X84 Data Link Connector and the
K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.

9. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the serial data circuit terminals listed below and ground.
• Terminal 12
• Terminal 13
If 100 Ω or less
Repair the short to ground in the serial data circuit between the X84 Data Link Connector and the

10. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between the serial data circuit terminals 12 and 13.
If less than 110 Ω
Repair the short together in the serial data circuits between the X84 Data Link Connector and the
Repair the open/high resistance in the serial data circuit between the X84 Data Link Connector and

11. Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Serial Data Starting Point.
96 of 158
the following:
• Chassis high speed GMLAN devices and terminating resistors the vehicle
is equipped with
• Device locations on the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and chassis high speed GMLAN serial
data circuit terminals
Serial Data Starting Point
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits (circuit numbers 6105 & 6106) at an easily accessible device that is not communicating.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at
the device connectors that was just disconnected and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

5. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals
at the device connectors that was just disconnected and ground.
If 100 Ω or less

6. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at
the device connectors that was just disconnected.
If less than 110 Ω

7. Replace the device that was just disconnected.
97 of 158
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage.
3. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each of the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at

2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
3. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals
at the device connectors that was just disconnected and ground.
If each serial data is 100 Ω or greater

2. Connect the harness connectors at the device that was disconnected.
4. Test for greater than 110 Ω between each pair of the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
terminals at the device connectors that was just disconnected.
98 of 158
4. Test for less than 130 Ω between each pair of the chassis high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals
at the device connectors that was just disconnected.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at a chassis high speed GMLAN device that is not
communicating. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
Mode Mismatch .
99 of 158
5. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each of the ignition circuit terminals, which has a fuse
in the circuit, and ground.
Mismatch .
6. If equipped, verify a test lamp illuminates between each of the ignition circuit terminals, which is
controlled by a control module, and ground.
Mode.
circuit.
100 of 158
ground.
Control Module.
and ground.
Control Module.
10. Disconnect the harness connectors at a chassis high speed GMLAN device that is still communicating and
closest to the non communicating device.
the non communicating device and the device that was just disconnected.
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH GATEWAY EXPANSION HIGH SPEED GMLAN
DEVICE
101 of 158
Check - Vehicle

U007B U007B U007B -
Data (+) (8)
U007B U007B U007B -
Data (-) (8)
The devices connected to the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit numbers 3935
& 3936) monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. The K56 Serial Data
Gateway Module acts as the gateway module between devices on primary high speed GMLAN bus and devices
on gateway expansion high speed GMLAN bus. The gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data bus
uses terminating resistors that are in parallel with the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN (+) and (-)
circuits.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
102 of 158


3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0076, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099,
B1325, B1330, B1370, B1380, B1424, B1428, B1440, B1441, B1517, C0800, C0899, C12E1, P0560, or
P0562 is not set.

4. Attempt to communicate with all devices on the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN bus. Refer to
Data Link References to determine which devices are on the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN
bus.
5. Verify two or more devices are not communicating on the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN bus.

• Terminal 6
• Terminal 14
If 4.5 V or greater

• Terminal 6
• Terminal 14
If 100 Ω or less
103 of 158

If less than 110 Ω

isolate a circuit fault. Use the schematic to identify the following:
• Gateway expansion high speed GMLAN devices and terminating resistors

the vehicle is equipped with
• Device locations on the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and gateway expansion high speed
GMLAN serial data circuit terminals
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits (circuit numbers 3935 & 3936) at an easily accessible device that is not
communicating. Refer to Data Link References to determine which devices are on the gateway
expansion high speed GMLAN bus.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
terminals at the device connectors that was just disconnected and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

104 of 158
5. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data
circuit terminals at the device connectors that was just disconnected and ground.
If 100 Ω or less

6. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
terminals at the device connectors that was just disconnected:
If less than 110 Ω

1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage.
3. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each of the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data circuit

2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to ground.
3. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data
circuit terminals at the device connectors that was just disconnected and ground.
105 of 158
another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted together.
4. Test for greater than 110 Ω between each pair of the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data
circuit terminals at the device connectors that was just disconnected.
another device, in the direction of the circuit with the open/high resistance.
4. Test for less than 130 Ω between each pair of the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN
device that is not communicating. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
106 of 158
If 10 Ω or greater
Mode Mismatch .
Mismatch .
107 of 158
Mode.
circuit.
ground.
Control Module.
and ground.
Control Module.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module. It may
10. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the gateway expansion high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end
between the non communicating device and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
If 2 Ω or greater
108 of 158

Repair Instructions
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH GATEWAY ISOLATED HIGH SPEED GMLAN
DEVICE
Check - Vehicle

U007C U007C U007C -
Data (+) (9)
U007C U007C U007C -
Data (-) (9)
The devices connected to the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit numbers 1304 &
1305) monitor for serial data communications during normal vehicle operation. The K56 Serial Data Gateway
Module acts as the gateway module between devices on primary high speed GMLAN bus and devices on
gateway isolated high speed GMLAN bus. The gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data bus uses
terminating resistors that are in parallel with the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.

109 of 158

of the malfunction.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0076, U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099,
P0562 is not set.
110 of 158

4. Attempt to communicate with all devices on the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN bus. Refer to Data
Link References to determine which devices are on the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN bus.
5. Verify two or more devices are not communicating on the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN bus.

• Terminal 6
• Terminal 14
If 4.5 V or greater

• Terminal 6
• Terminal 14
If 100 Ω or less

If less than 110 Ω

111 of 158
isolate a circuit fault. Use the schematic to identify the following:
• Gateway isolated high speed GMLAN devices and terminating resistors

the vehicle is equipped with
• Device locations on the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and gateway isolated high speed
GMLAN serial data circuit terminals
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits (circuit numbers 1304 & 1305) at an easily accessible device that is not
communicating. Refer to Data Link References to determine which devices are on the gateway isolated
high speed GMLAN bus.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
If 4.5 V or greater

5. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
If 100 Ω or less

6. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
terminals at the device connectors that was just disconnected:
If less than 110 Ω
112 of 158
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN
serial data circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage.
3. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each of the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuit

2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to ground.
3. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuit

another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted together.
4. Test for greater than 110 Ω between each pair of the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data
113 of 158
another device, in the direction of the circuit with the open/high resistance.
4. Test for less than 130 Ω between each pair of the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN device
that is not communicating. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
114 of 158
Mode Mismatch .
Mismatch .
Mode.
circuit.
115 of 158
ground.
Control Module.
and ground.
Control Module.
10. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the gateway isolated high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH GATEWAY ISOLATED LOW SPEED GMLAN
DEVICE
116 of 158
Check - Vehicle

GMLAN Serial Data
1 U0100-U02FF 1 -
Data #2 (Circuit #1102)
1. No communication with gateway isolated low speed GMLAN device, except K56 Serial Data Gateway
Module.
The gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data bus is used to communicate information between the
devices. The serial data is transmitted over a single wire (circuit number 1102) to the appropriate devices. The
K56 Serial Data Gateway Module acts as the gateway module between devices on low speed GMLAN bus and
devices on gateway isolated low speed GMLAN bus.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
117 of 158

3. Verify that DTC U0073, U0074, U0075, U0076 U0077, U0078, U007A, P06E4, P1EB9, U1814, U2099,
P0562 is not set.

4. Attempt to communicate with all devices on the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN bus. Refer to Data
Link References to determine which devices are on the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN bus.
5. Verify two or more devices are not communicating on the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN bus.

8. Test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

10. Test for greater than 100 Ω between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If 100 Ω or less

11. Test for less than infinite resistance between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.
118 of 158
Go to next step: If less than infinite resistance
NOTE: Use the schematic to identify the following:
• Gateway isolated low speed GMLAN devices the vehicle is equipped with
• Device and splice pack locations on the gateway isolated low speed
GMLAN serial data circuit
• The gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals for
each device or splice pack
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data circuit
terminals (circuit number 1102) and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

5. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data circuit
If 100 Ω or less

6. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, cut the appropriate harness at a gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data
splice closest to the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module, at least 40 mm (1.57 in) from the splice. Do not
cut the wires right at the splice because these wires need to be repaired after the test is done.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data circuits at
the splice and ground.
If any serial data circuit is 4.5 V or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, repair all serial data circuits at the tested splice except the faulted serial data
circuit, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
2. Verify the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN devices that are still not communicating to identify
119 of 158
the faulted serial data circuit.
3. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect all devices on the faulted serial data circuit, ignition ON/Vehicle
In Service Mode.
4. Test for less than 1 V between each section of the faulted serial data circuit and ground.
5. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, repair the faulted serial data circuit to the splice and connect the first device
on the faulted serial data circuit, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
6. Verify the scan tool communicates or not with the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data
circuit.
If the scan tool does not communicate, replace the device that was just connected.
If the scan tool communicates and there are more devices to connect, connect the next device
and repeat step 3.6.
Go to next step: If the scan tool communicates and there are no more devices to connect
7. All OK.
Go to next step: If each serial data circuit is less than 4.5 V
4. Inspect all gateway isolated low speed GMLAN splices for damage.
away from vehicle. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Cut the appropriate
harness at a gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data splice closest to the K56 Serial Data
Gateway Module, at least 40 mm (1.57 in) from the splice. Do not cut the wires right at the splice because
these wires need to be repaired after the test is done.
2. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at the splice and ground.
If any serial data circuit is 100 Ω or less
1. Repair all serial data circuits at the tested splice except the faulted serial data circuit, ignition
2. Verify the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN devices that are still not communicating to identify
the faulted serial data circuit.
3. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect all devices on the faulted serial data circuit.
4. Test for infinite resistance between each section of the faulted serial data circuit and ground.
5. Repair the faulted serial data circuit to the splice and connect the first device on the faulted serial
data circuit, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
6. Verify the scan tool communicates or not with the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data
circuit.
120 of 158
7. All OK.
Go to next step: If each serial data circuit is greater than 100 Ω
2. Disconnect the harness connectors at the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN device that is not
communicating and closest to the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
4. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit
number 1102) end to end between the non-communicating device and the K56 Serial Data Gateway
Module.
If 2 Ω or greater

6. Replace the non-communicating device that was disconnected.
9. Verify that all gateway isolated low speed GMLAN devices are communicating.
If the devices are not communicating
Go to next step: If the devices are communicating

10. All OK.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN device
that is not communicating. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between each of the ground circuit terminals at the device that was just
disconnected and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
121 of 158
Mode Mismatch .
Mismatch .
Mode.
122 of 158
circuit.
8. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the gateway isolated low speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end
If 2 Ω or greater

9. Replace the non communicating device that was disconnected.
Repair Instructions
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH HIGH SPEED GMLAN DEVICE
Check - Vehicle

1 U0100 - U02FF* 1 -
Data (+)
1 U0100 - U02FF* 1 -
Data (-)
123 of 158
* No communications with one or more high speed GMLAN devices. An open in only one high speed
GMLAN serial data circuit may allow degraded communication between the devices. An open between
the X84 Data Link Connector (DLC) and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module will only affect the
communication with the scan tool. The devices will still communicate.
1. No communication with any high speed GMLAN device
The devices connected to the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications
during normal vehicle operation. The serial data is transmitted on two twisted wires that allow speeds up to 500
kbit/s. The twisted pair is terminated with two 120 Ω resistors, one is internal to the K20 Engine Control
Module (ECM) and the other can be a separate resistor in a connector assembly or in another device. The
resistors are used as the load for the High Speed GMLAN bus during normal vehicle operation. The high speed
GMLAN is a differential bus. The high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) and high speed GMLAN serial data
(-) are driven to opposite extremes from a rest or idle level of approximately 2.5 V. Driving the lines to their
extremes, adds 1 V to the high speed GMLAN serial data bus (+) circuit and subtracts 1 V from the high speed
GMLAN serial data bus (-) circuit. If serial data is lost, devices will set a no communication code against the
non-communicating device. Note that a loss of serial data DTC does not represent a failure of the device that set
it.
Diagnostic Aids
awake.
• Communication may be available between some devices and the scan tool with the high speed GMLAN
serial data system inoperative. This condition is due to those devices using multiple serial data
communication systems.
• An open in the X84 Data Link Connector ground circuit terminal 5 will allow the scan tool to operate but
not communicate with the vehicle.
• The engine will not start when there is a total malfunction of the high speed GMLAN serial data bus.
124 of 158
• Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTC) and no high speed GMLAN communications with the scan tool.
• Some devices may not have internal protection for specific voltage outputs and may open a battery
positive voltage or ignition voltage source fuse. If a voltage input fuse is open and no short is found in
that circuit, ensure that no device output voltage circuit is shorted to ground before replacing the device.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


3. Attempt to communicate with all devices on the high speed GMLAN bus. Refer to Data Link
References to determine how many devices should be communicating on the high speed GMLAN bus.
4. Verify two or more devices are not communicating on the high speed GMLAN bus.

125 of 158
• Terminal 6
• Terminal 14
If 4.5 V or greater

• Terminal 6
• Terminal 14
If 100 Ω or less

If less than 110 Ω

isolate a circuit fault. Use the schematics to identify the following:
• High speed GMLAN devices and terminating resistors the vehicle is

equipped with
• Device locations on the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
126 of 158
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and high speed GMLAN serial data
circuit terminals
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
(circuit numbers 2500 & 2501) at an easily accessible device that is not communicating.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at the device
connectors that was just disconnected and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

5. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at the
device connectors that was just disconnected and ground.
If 100 Ω or less

6. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at the
device connectors that was just disconnected.
If less than 110 Ω

1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage.
3. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at the
127 of 158
2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another device, in
the direction of the circuit shorted to ground.
3. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at the

the direction of the circuit shorted together.
4. Test for greater than 110 Ω between each pair of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at
128 of 158
the direction of the circuit with the open/high resistance.
4. Test for less than 130 Ω between each pair of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at the
device connectors that was just disconnected.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at a high speed GMLAN device that is not
If 10 Ω or greater
Mode Mismatch .
129 of 158
Mismatch .
Mode.
circuit.
ground.
Control Module.
130 of 158
and ground.
Control Module.
10. Disconnect the harness connector at a high speed GMLAN device that is still communicating and closest
to the non communicating device.
11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the non
communicating device and the device that was just disconnected.
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH LOW SPEED GMLAN DEVICE
Check - Vehicle

1 U0100-U02FF* 1 -
Data
only affect the communication with the scan tool.
1. No communication with any low speed GMLAN device
131 of 158
The devices connected to the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits monitor for serial data communications
during normal vehicle operation. The serial data is transmitted over a single wire to the appropriate devices. The
transmission speed for GMLAN low speed is up to 83.33 kbit/s. Under normal vehicle operating conditions, the
speed of the bus is 33.33 kbit/s. The devices toggle the serial data circuit between 0 - 5 V during normal
communications. To wake the devices connected to the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit, a voltage wake
up pulse of 10 V is sent out. If serial data is lost, devices will set a no communication code against the non-
communicating device. A loss of serial data communications DTC does not represent a failure of the device that
set it.
Diagnostic Aids
awake.
Power to one or more devices was interrupted during diagnosis
• Communication may be available between the device and the scan tool with the low speed GMLAN serial
data system inoperative. This condition is due to the device using both the high and low speed GMLAN
systems.
• An open in the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit between the splice pack and a device will only
affect that specific device. This type of failure will set a loss of communication DTC for each device
affected, and the other devices will still communicate.
• The engine may not start when there is a total malfunction of the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
• Technicians may find various Local Area Network (LAN) communication Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTC) and no low speed LAN communications with the scan tool.
• These conditions may be caused by the installation of an aftermarket navigation radio device (see
bulletins). Some customers may comment of one or more of the following concerns:
Vehicle will not crank
Vehicle cranks but will not start
132 of 158
Vehicle stability enhancement system warning lights and messages
PRNDL gear indicator position errors
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


3. Attempt to communicate with all devices on the low speed GMLAN bus. Refer to Data Link References
to determine how many devices should be communicating on the low speed GMLAN bus.
4. Verify two or more devices are not communicating on the low speed GMLAN bus.

133 of 158
7. Test for less than 4.5 V between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater

9. Test for greater than 100 Ω between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If 100 Ω or less

10. Test for less than infinite resistance between the serial data circuit terminal 1 and ground.

NOTE: Each device may need to be disconnected to isolate a circuit fault. Use the
schematics and connector end views to identify the following:
• All low speed GMLAN devices the vehicle is equipped with

• Low speed GMLAN device and splice (or splice pack) locations on the low
speed GMLAN serial data circuit
• The low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals for each device or
splice pack
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals (circuit
number 5060) and ground.
If 4.5 V or greater
134 of 158
5. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals and
ground.
If 100 Ω or less

6. Refer to Testing the Serial Data Circuits for an Open/High Resistance.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, cut the appropriate harness at a low speed GMLAN serial data splice closest to the
K56 Serial Data Gateway Module, at least 40 mm (1.57 in) from the splice. Do not cut the wires right at
the splice because these wires need to be repaired after the test is done.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the splice and
ground.
If any serial data circuit is 4.5 V or greater
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, repair all serial data circuits at the tested splice except the faulted serial data
circuit, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
2. Verify the low speed GMLAN devices that are still not communicating to identify the faulted serial
data circuit.
3. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect all devices on the faulted serial data circuit, ignition ON/Vehicle
In Service Mode.
4. Test for less than 1 V between each section of the faulted serial data circuit and ground.
5. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, repair the faulted serial data circuit to the splice and connect the first device
on the faulted serial data circuit, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
6. Verify the scan tool communicates or not with the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
7. All OK.
Go to next step: If all serial data circuits are less than 4.5 V
4. Inspect all low speed GMLAN splices for damage.
away from vehicle. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down. Cut the appropriate
harness at a low speed GMLAN serial data splice closest to the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module, at least
135 of 158
40 mm (1.57 in) from the splice. Do not cut the wires right at the splice because these wires need to be
repaired after the test is done.
2. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits at the splice and
ground.
If any serial data circuit is 100 Ω or less
1. Repair all serial data circuits at the tested splice except the faulted serial data circuit, ignition
2. Verify the low speed GMLAN devices that are still not communicating to identify the faulted serial
data circuit.
3. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect all devices on the faulted serial data circuit.
4. Test for infinite resistance between each section of the faulted serial data circuit and ground.
5. Repair the faulted serial data circuit to the splice and connect the first device on the faulted serial
data circuit, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
6. Verify the scan tool communicates or not with the low speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
7. All OK.
Go to next step: If each serial data circuit is greater than 100 Ω
Testing the Serial Data Circuit for an Open/High Resistance
2. Disconnect the harness connectors at the low speed GMLAN device that is not communicating and
closest to the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
4. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit number 5060) end to
end between the non-communicating device and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
If 2 Ω or greater

6. Replace the non-communicating device that was disconnected.
9. Verify that all low speed GMLAN devices are communicating.
If the devices are not communicating
136 of 158
Go to next step: If the devices are communicating

10. All OK.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at the low speed GMLAN device that is not
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between each of the ground circuit terminals at the device that was just
disconnected and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
Mode Mismatch .
Mismatch .
137 of 158
Mode.
circuit.
8. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the low speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the non
communicating device and the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
If 2 Ω or greater

9. Replace the non communicating device that was disconnected.
Repair Instructions
138 of 158
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH OBJECT HIGH SPEED GMLAN DEVICE
Check - Vehicle

U0075 U0075 -
Data (+) 4
U0075 U0075 -
Data (-) 4
only affect the communication with the scan tool. The devices will still communicate. An open in only
one object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit may allow degraded communication between the
devices.
The devices connected to the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits (circuit numbers 3811 & 3813)
position other than OFF. The object high speed GMLAN serial data bus uses terminating resistors that are in
parallel with the object high speed GMLAN (+) and (-) circuits.
Schematic Reference

139 of 158
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


3. Attempt to communicate with all devices on the object high speed GMLAN bus. Refer to Data Link
References to determine how many devices should be communicating on the object high speed GMLAN
bus.
4. Verify two or more devices are not communicating on the object high speed GMLAN bus.

• Terminal 3
• Terminal 11
If 4.5 V or greater

• Terminal 3
• Terminal 11
If 100 Ω or less
140 of 158

If less than 110 Ω

the following:
• Object high speed GMLAN devices and terminating resistors the vehicle is
equipped with
• Device locations on the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits
• Each device's ground, B+, ignition, and object high speed GMLAN serial
data circuit terminals
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits (circuit numbers 3811 & 3813) at an easily accessible device that is not communicating.
3. Test for less than 4.5 V between each of the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at the
If 4.5 V or greater

141 of 158
5. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at
If 100 Ω or less

6. Test for 110 - 130 Ω between each pair of the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at
If less than 110 Ω

1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data
circuits at another device, in the direction of the circuit shorted to voltage.
3. Test for greater than 4.5 V between each of the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at

2. Disconnect the harness connectors with the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits at another
3. Test for greater than 100 Ω between each of the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals at
142 of 158
4. Test for greater than 110 Ω between each pair of the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit
4. Test for less than 130 Ω between each pair of the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuit terminals
at the device connectors that was just disconnected.
away from vehicle. Disconnect the harness connectors at an object high speed GMLAN device that is not
143 of 158
If 10 Ω or greater
Mode Mismatch .
Mismatch .
144 of 158
Mode.
circuit.
ground.
Control Module.
and ground.
Control Module.
10. Disconnect the harness connector at an object high speed GMLAN device that is still communicating and
closest to the non communicating device.
11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the object high speed GMLAN serial data circuits end to end between the
145 of 158
If 2 Ω or greater

Repair Instructions
SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH VEHICLE


B+ 1 1 - -
Ignition 1 1 - -
1 1 1 -
(+)
1 1 1 -
(-)
1 1 1 -
Serial Data (+)
1 1 1 -
Serial Data (-)
1 1 1 -
Serial Data (+)
1 1 1 -
Serial Data (-)
Low Speed GMLAN Serial Data 1 1 1 -
Ground - 1 - -
Ground (X84 Data Link
- 1 - -
Connector terminal 5)
1. No communication with the vehicle.
The K56 Serial Data Gateway Module is used to handle communications between multiple GMLAN busses and
functions as a gateway to isolate the secure networks from the unsecured networks. When the K56 Serial Data
Gateway Module is not communicating, the scan tool can not communicate with the vehicle.
146 of 158
Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 5 at the X84 Data Link Connector and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
147 of 158

5. All OK.
If 10 Ω or greater
If infinite resistance, replace the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
148 of 158
If infinite resistance, replace the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
6. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the serial data communication enable circuit terminal and ground.
Control Module.
7. Test for less than 4.5 V between each GMLAN serial data circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• Terminal 13 X1
• Terminal 14 X1
• Terminal 15 X1
• Terminal 16 X1
• Terminal 17 X1
• Terminal 18 X1
• Terminal 26 X1
If 4.5 V or greater

9. Test for infinite resistance between each GMLAN serial data circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• Terminal 13 X1
• Terminal 14 X1
• Terminal 15 X1
• Terminal 16 X1
• Terminal 17 X1
• Terminal 18 X1
• Terminal 26 X1

10. Test for infinite resistance between each pair of the GMLAN serial data circuit terminals listed below and
ground:
149 of 158
• Terminals 13 X1 and 14 X1

11. Test for less than 2 Ω in each GMLAN serial data circuit end to end between the K56 Serial Data
Gateway Module and the X84 Data Link Connector.
If 2 Ω or greater

12. Replace the K56 Serial Data Gateway Module.
Repair Instructions
DATA LINK REFERENCES
This table identifies which serial data link that a particular device uses for in-vehicle data transmission. Some
devices may use more than one data link to communicate. Some devices may have multiple communication
circuits passing through them without actively communicating on that data link. This table is used to assist in
correcting a communication malfunction. Not all devices listed will be applicable to all vehicles. Refer to the
schematics to determine which devices apply. For the description and operation of these serial data
communication circuits, refer to Data Link Communications Description and Operation .
Schematic Reference: Data Communication Wiring Schematics
Code Device Data Link Type Diagnostic Procedure

• Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with
• Gateway Isolated High
Gateway Isolated High
Speed GMLAN
Speed GMLAN Device
• Gateway Isolated Low
A11 Radio Speed GMLAN
Communicate with
• Ethernet Bus Gateway Isolated Low
• Local Interconnect Speed GMLAN Device
Network (LIN) • DTC U18AF-U18B4
• DTC U1500-U15FF
150 of 158
Communicate with
Speed GMLAN
A26 HVAC Controls Gateway Isolated Low
Network (LIN)
• DTC U1500-U15FF
• Powertrain High Speed

Transmission Range GMLAN • DTC U0074
A97 • Powertrain Sensor High • DTC U0076
Selector Controls
Speed GMLAN
Multifunction Intake Air Local Interconnect Network

B75C DTC U1500-U15FF
Sensor (LIN)
Local Interconnect Network
B110 Battery Sensor Module DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
B117 Rain Sensor DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
Communicate with
Gateway Expansion
High Speed GMLAN
• Gateway Expansion
Device
Low Speed GMLAN
Frontview Camera - • Scan Tool Does Not
B174W • Low Speed GMLAN
Windshield Communicate with Low
• Object High Speed Speed GMLAN Device
GMLAN
Communicate with
Object High Speed
GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not

Side Object Sensor Module
B218L Low Speed GMLAN Communicate with Low
- Left
Speed GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not
Side Object Sensor Module
B218R Low Speed GMLAN Communicate with Low
- Right
Speed GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not
Radar Sensor Module -
B233B Object High Speed GMLAN Communicate with Object
Long Range
High Speed GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not
B233LF Object High Speed GMLAN Communicate with Object
Short Range Left Front
Scan Tool Does Not
B233R Object High Speed GMLAN Communicate with Object
Short Range Rear
151 of 158
Scan Tool Does Not
B233RF Object High Speed GMLAN Communicate with Object
Short Range Right Front
Headlamp Leveling High
E13LA Headlamp Assembly - Left DTC U1112-U1115
Speed GMLAN
Headlamp Assembly - Headlamp Leveling High
E13RA DTC U1112-U1115
Right Speed GMLAN
Evaporative Emission Local Interconnect Network
G58 DTC U1500-U15FF
Purge Pump (LIN)
G59 Engine Coolant Pump DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
Communicate with High
• High Speed GMLAN
Speed GMLAN Device
• Low Speed GMLAN
K9 Body Control Module • Scan Tool Does Not
• Local Interconnect Communicate with Low
Network (LIN) Speed GMLAN Device
• DTC U1500-U15FF

• High Speed GMLAN Speed GMLAN Device
Suspension Control • Chassis High Speed • Scan Tool Does Not
K19
Module GMLAN Communicate with
Chassis High Speed
GMLAN Device

• Powertrain High Speed Communicate with High
GMLAN Speed GMLAN Device
K20 Engine Control Module • Powertrain Sensor High • DTC U0074
Speed GMLAN
• DTC U0076
• Local Interconnect
• DTC U1500-U15FF
Network (LIN)

• Gateway Expansion Communicate with
High Speed GMLAN Gateway Expansion
K26 Headlamp Control Module • Headlamp Leveling High Speed GMLAN
• DTC U1112-U1115
Seat Heating Control Local Interconnect Network

K29F DTC U1500-U15FF
Module - Front (LIN)
152 of 158
Seat Heating Control Local Interconnect Network
K29R DTC U1500-U15FF
Module - Rear (LIN)
Steering Wheel Heating Local Interconnect Network
K32 DTC U1500-U15FF
Control Module (LIN)
• Low Speed GMLAN
Communicate with Low
K33 HVAC Control Module • Local Interconnect Speed GMLAN Device
Network (LIN)
• DTC U1500-U15FF

Communicate with
Inflatable Restraint • Chassis High Speed Chassis High Speed
K36 Sensing and Diagnostic GMLAN GMLAN Device
Module • Low Speed GMLAN • Scan Tool Does Not
Speed GMLAN Device

• Low Speed GMLAN
K39 Liftgate Control Module • Local Interconnect Speed GMLAN Device
Network (LIN)
• DTC U1500-U15FF

• Low Speed GMLAN
Seat Memory Control • Local Interconnect
K40D Speed GMLAN Device
Module - Driver Network (LIN)
• DTC U1500-U15FF

• Low Speed GMLAN
Seat Memory Control • Local Interconnect
K40P Speed GMLAN Device
Module - Passenger Network (LIN)
• DTC U1500-U15FF

Power Steering Control • Chassis High Speed • Scan Tool Does Not
K43
Chassis High Speed
GMLAN Device

• High Speed GMLAN Communicate with High
Rear Differential Clutch • Chassis High Speed Speed GMLAN Device
K47
Control Module GMLAN • Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with
153 of 158
Chassis High Speed
GMLAN Device

Communicate with
Gateway Expansion
High Speed GMLAN
Device
Communicate with
• Gateway Expansion Gateway Isolated High
High Speed GMLAN Speed GMLAN Device
• Gateway Isolated High • Scan Tool Does Not
Speed GMLAN Communicate with High
Speed GMLAN Device
Serial Data Gateway • Gateway Isolated Low
K56 Communicate with
Module Speed GMLAN
Gateway Isolated Low
• Low Speed GMLAN Speed GMLAN Device
• Chassis High Speed • Scan Tool Does Not
GMLAN Communicate with Low
• Object High Speed Speed GMLAN Device
GMLAN • Scan Tool Does Not
Communicate with
Chassis High Speed
GMLAN Device
Communicate with
Object High Speed
GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not

Steering Column Lock
K60 Low Speed GMLAN Communicate with Low
Module
Speed GMLAN Device
Content Theft Deterrent Local Interconnect Network
K64 DTC U1500-U15FF
Transmission Control • Scan Tool Does Not
Module / Control Solenoid • High Speed GMLAN
K71 / Q8 / Communicate with High
Valve Assembly / • Local Interconnect Speed GMLAN Device
T12 Network (LIN)
Automatic Transmission • DTC U1500-U15FF
Assembly
154 of 158
Communicate with
• Gateway Isolated High Gateway Isolated High
Speed GMLAN Speed GMLAN Device
Telematics Communication • Gateway Isolated Low • Scan Tool Does Not
K73
Interface Control Module Speed GMLAN Communicate with
Speed GMLAN Device
• DTC U18AF-U18B4
Scan Tool Does Not

Keyless Entry Control
Module
Speed GMLAN Device
Scan Tool Does Not
Passenger Presence
Module
Speed GMLAN Device
Immobilizer Control Local Interconnect Network
K89 DTC U1500-U15FF
Module (LIN)
Steering Column Position Local Interconnect Network
K99 DTC U1500-U15FF
Fuel Pump Driver Control Powertrain Sensor High
K111 DTC U0076
Module Speed GMLAN
Communicate with
Gateway Expansion
High Speed GMLAN
Device
• Gateway Expansion
High Speed GMLAN • Scan Tool Does Not
• Low Speed GMLAN
Speed GMLAN Device
Active Safety Control • Object High Speed
K124 • Scan Tool Does Not
Module GMLAN
Communicate with
• Chassis High Speed Object High Speed
GMLAN GMLAN Device
Communicate with
Chassis High Speed
GMLAN Device
Seat Bolster Memory Local Interconnect Network

K134D DTC U1500-U15FF
Control Module - Driver (LIN)
Seat Bolster Memory
K134P Control Module - DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
Passenger
Video Processing Control • Gateway Isolated High • Scan Tool Does Not
K157
Module Speed GMLAN Communicate with
155 of 158
Speed GMLAN Device
• Gateway Isolated Low • Scan Tool Does Not
Speed GMLAN Communicate with
Gateway Isolated Low
Speed GMLAN Device

Brake System Control • Chassis High Speed • Scan Tool Does Not
K160
Chassis High Speed
GMLAN Device
Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor Local Interconnect Network

K171 DTC U1500-U15FF
Communicate with
• Chassis High Speed Chassis High Speed
Parking Assist Control GMLAN GMLAN Device
K182
Module • Low Speed GMLAN • Scan Tool Does Not
Speed GMLAN Device

M69 Sunroof Motor DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
M74D Window Motor - Driver DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
M74P Window Motor - Passenger DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
Active Grille Air Shutter Local Interconnect Network
M96 DTC U1500-U15FF
Actuator (LIN)
Communicate with
• Gateway Isolated High
Speed GMLAN
Speed GMLAN Device
P16 Instrument Cluster Speed GMLAN
Communicate with
Network (LIN) • DTC U18AF-U18B4
• DTC U1500-U15FF
156 of 158
Scan Tool Does Not
Gateway Isolated Low Speed Communicate with Gateway
P17 Info Display Module
GMLAN Isolated Low Speed GMLAN
Device
Power Sounder Content
P25 Theft Deterrent Alarm DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
Module
P29 Head-Up Display DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
Engine Coolant Flow Local Interconnect Network
Q97 DTC U1500-U15FF
Control Valve (LIN)
S3 Transmission Shift Lever DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
S32 Seat Heating Switch DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
Multifunction Switch - Local Interconnect Network
S48A DTC U1500-U15FF
Instrument Panel (LIN)
Steering Wheel Controls Local Interconnect Network
S70R DTC U1500-U15FF
Switch - Right (LIN)
S79D Window Switch - Driver DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
Window Switch - Local Interconnect Network
S79P DTC U1500-U15FF
Passenger (LIN)
Window Switch - Right Local Interconnect Network
S79RR DTC U1500-U15FF
Rear (LIN)
Seat Massage Switch - Local Interconnect Network
S98D DTC U1500-U15FF
Driver (LIN)
Seat Massage Switch - Local Interconnect Network
S98P DTC U1500-U15FF
Passenger (LIN)
Scan Tool Does Not
Infotainment Control Gateway Isolated Low Speed Communicate with Gateway
S165
Switch GMLAN Isolated Low Speed GMLAN
Device
• Gateway Isolated Low Communicate with
T3 Audio Amplifier Speed GMLAN Gateway Isolated Low
• Ethernet Bus Speed GMLAN Device
• DTC U18AF-U18B4
Powertrain High Speed

T19 Power Supply Transformer DTC U0074
GMLAN
V1 Air Ionizer DTC U1500-U15FF
(LIN)
157 of 158
158 of 158
Data Communications - Fastener Specifications - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Body Control Module Bracket Nut 6 N.m (53 lb in)
1 of 1
Data Communications - Repair Instructions - XT4
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
BODY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT

Front Floor Console Extension Panel Replacement - Right Side
Body Control Module
Procedure
1. Reposition the front floor panel carpet as necessary.

4. Perform the necessary programming and setup procedure: Control Module
References
BODY CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
1 of 7
Front Floor Console Extension Panel-Right Side (1) - Remove - Front Floor Console Extension Panel
Replacement - Right Side

4.
Body Control Module Bracket Nut (1) - Remove
5.
2 of 7
Front Floor Console Extension Panel-Left Side (1) - Remove - Front Floor Console Extension Panel
Replacement - Left Side
6.
Electronic Transmission Range Selector Manual Park Release Cable Handle Retaining Bolt (1) - Remove
- Electronic Transmission Range Selector Manual Park Release Cable Replacement
7. Reposition the front floor panel carpet as necessary.
8.
3 of 7
Body Control Module Bracket (1) - Remove
1.
Body Control Module Bracket (1) - Install
2.
4 of 7
Electronic Transmission Range Selector Manual Park Release Cable Handle Retaining Bolt (1) - Install -
Electronic Transmission Range Selector Manual Park Release Cable Replacement
3.
Front Floor Console Extension Panel-Left Side (1) - Install - Front Floor Console Extension Panel
4.
5 of 7
Body Control Module Bracket Nut (1) - Install and tighten to 6 N.m (53 lb in)
5. Connect the electrical connectors.
6.
Front Floor Console Extension Panel-Right Side (1) - Install - Front Floor Console Extension Panel
SERIAL DATA GATEWAY MODULE REPLACEMENT
6 of 7
Floor Front Air Outlet Duct Replacement - Left Side
Serial Data Gateway Module
Procedure

2. Release the retaining tab.
References
7 of 7
Data Communications - Schematic Wiring Diagrams - XT4

DATA COMMUNICATION WIRING SCHEMATICS
Data Link Connector and Serial Data Gateway Module Power and Ground
Low Speed GMLAN
Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN
1 of 12
High Speed GMLAN
Gateway Isolated High Speed GMLAN
2 of 12
Gateway Expansion High Speed GMLAN
Object High Speed GMLAN (UGN) 1 of 2
Object High Speed GMLAN (UGN) 2 of 2
3 of 12
4 of 12
Powertrain Sensor High Speed GMLAN
Headlamp CAN Bus (TR7)
Ethernet Bus
5 of 12
Accessory Wake-up - High Speed GMLAN
Communications Enable - High Speed GMLAN
6 of 12
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus - Body Control Module (1 of 2)
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus - Body Control Module (2 of 2)
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus - Steering Wheel Controls
7 of 12
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus - Powertrain
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus - Memory (A45)
8 of 12
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus - Seat (AF6/AVU)
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus - Liftgate (TC2)
Local Interconnect Network (LIN) Bus - Air Quality (KEM)/Heated Steering Wheel (KI3)
9 of 12
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING SCHEMATICS
Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Subsystem References (1 of 4)
Subsystem References (2 of 4)
10 of 12
11 of 12
12 of 12
Displays And Gauges - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Head-Up Display Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Head-Up Display Bracket Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Instrument Cluster Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR RESISTANCE
Ambient Air Temp Ambient Air Temp

Temperature Sensor Resistance (Min) Sensor Resistance (Max)
Â°F Â°C (kΩ) (kΩ)
100.4 38 1.6 1.8
98.6 37 1.7 1.9
96.8 36 1.8 2.0
95.0 35 1.8 2.1
93.2 34 1.9 2.2
91.4 33 2.0 2.3
89.6 32 2.1 2.4
87.8 31 2.2 2.5
86.0 30 2.3 2.6
84.2 29 2.4 2.7
82.4 28 2.5 2.8
80.6 27 2.6 2.9
78.8 26 2.7 3.0
77 25 2.8 3.2
75.2 24 2.9 3.3
73.4 23 3.1 3.5
71.6 22 3.2 3.6
69.8 21 3.4 3.8
68.0 20 3.5 4.0
66.2 19 3.7 4.2
1 of 137
Ambient Air Temp Ambient Air Temp
Temperature Sensor Resistance (Min) Sensor Resistance (Max)
Â°F Â°C (kΩ) (kΩ)
64.4 18 3.9 4.4
62.6 17 4.0 4.6
60.8 16 4.2 4.8
59.0 15 4.4 5.0
57.2 14 4.6 5.2
55.4 13 4.9 5.5
53.6 12 5.1 5.8
51.8 11 5.4 6.0
50.0 10 5.6 6.3

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WIRING SCHEMATICS
Power, Ground, Gauges, and Serial Data
Fuel Gauge
2 of 137
Indicators
Air Temperature, Driver Information Center, and Washer Fluid Level
3 of 137
HEAD-UP DISPLAY WIRING SCHEMATICS
Head-Up Display (UV6)
AUDIBLE WARNINGS WIRING SCHEMATICS

Audible Warnings

DISPLAYS AND GAUGES COMPONENT REPLACEMENT REFERENCE

B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Replacement
B37 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Replacement
Fuel Level Sensor Replacement (AWD) , or Fuel
B46 Fuel Level Sensor
Level Sensor Replacement (FWD)
4 of 137
B46B Fuel Level Sensor- Secondary (integrated in Fuel Tank Replacement (FWD) , or Fuel Tank
fuel tank) Replacement (AWD)
{9T50 M3H} Gear Shift Control Module
P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
Replacement
S39 Ignition Switch On/Off Vehicle Switch Replacement
Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing Oil Pressure Diagnosis and Testing
DTC B0550
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B0550
Odometer Circuit
• Symptom Byte: 32 - General Memory Malfunction
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Instrument Cluster Description and Operation
Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode
K9 Body Control Module = Internal Malfunction
Odometer = "---"
The conditions for setting the DTC no longer exist.
5 of 137
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If the DTC is set
1. Perform all necessary programming and setup procedures for the control module: K9 Body Control
Module
If the DTC sets - Replace the component: K9 Body Control Module
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B071F (WITHOUT EPH)

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
Transmission Range Indicator
• Symptom Byte: 32 - Internal Malfunction
The indicator has a series of LEDs that show in which range the transmission is. The device is controlled over a
serial data bus by the body control module.
6 of 137
K9 Body Control Module Detected Transmission Range Indicator = Internal Malfunction
No additional actions taken
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If the DTC is set
Replace the component: P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Displays and Gauges Component Replacement Reference
7 of 137
DTC B071F (WITH EPH)
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
Transmission Range Indicator
The indicator has a series of LEDs that show in which range the transmission is. The control module
communicates with the engine control module via serial data.
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Electronic Transmission Range Selector Description
K20 Engine Control Module Detected Transmission Range Indicator = Internal Malfunction
No additional actions taken
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
8 of 137

If the DTC is set
Replace the component: P2 Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B0931
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
Compass Circuit
The compass module uses low-field magnetic sensing to sense vehicle directional and heading information.
K9 Body Control Module Detected K18 Compass Module = Internal Malfunction
P17 Info Display Module or P16 Instrument Cluster Displays"--"
9 of 137
Schematic Reference
Instrument Cluster Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If the DTC is set
Replace the component: K18 Compass Module

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B124F
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
10 of 137
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Programming
• Symptom Byte: 41 - Not Programmed

• Symptom Byte: 42 - Configuration Not Programmed
• Symptom Byte: 44 - Security Access Not Activated
• Symptom Byte: 4A - Programming Checksum Error
The control module P16 performs software checks to validate a programming event has completed successfully.
No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
P16 Instrument Cluster = Programming Malfunction
• DTCs Stored
• Some functions will not work.
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If the DTC is set
11 of 137
1. Perform all necessary programming and setup procedures for the control module: P16 Instrument
Cluster
If the DTC sets - Replace the component: P16 Instrument Cluster
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B12AC

B+ U1518 00 U1518 00 - -
Serial Data 1, U1518 00 U1518 00 1, U1518 00 -
Video Signal 1 or B12AC 1 or B12AC 1 or B12AC 1 or B12AC
Switch Signal B361B 02 B361B 05 B361B 05 B361B 59
Switch Low Reference - B361B 05 - -
Ground - U1518 00 - -
1. Head-Up Display Malfunction
The head-up display projects a full color image onto the windshield and is only viewable from the driver seat.
The image location and brightness is adjustable using the head-up display switch. The image information is
received from the instrument cluster through a video cable.
The head-up display is a slave device to the instrument cluster. The head-up display is powered through ignition
voltage and ground. It communicates directly with instrument cluster via serial data and only has limited self-
diagnosis capacity. Head-up display DTCs are reported through the Instrument Cluster.
The head-up display switch is a multiplexed switch that controls the head-up display based on driver inputs. The
head-up display provides the switch with a low reference and monitors a signal circuit. The head-up display
switch is made up of a resistor ladder and three switches: Dim +/-, Up/Down, and Page. When a switch is
pressed, the signal voltage is pulled low through the resistor ladder. When pressed, each of the switches will
12 of 137
result in a different signal voltage seen by the head-up display, depending on the switch's location on the resistor
ladder.
Schematic Reference
Head-Up Display Wiring Schematics
Steering Wheel Secondary/Configurable Control Wiring Schematics
Instrument Cluster Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify a test pattern is displayed is displayed on the P29 Head-Up Display when performing the Head-Up
Display Pattern Check on the scan tool.
If the test pattern is not displayed
Refer to Inoperative Head-Up display Circuit/System Testing.
Go to next step: If the test pattern is displayed

3. While holding each switch listed below, verify the scan tool Head-Up Display Switch parameter is as
follows:
• DIM + Switch - HUD Dimming Up/Down Pressed
• DIM - Switch - HUD Dimming Up/Down Pressed
• UP Switch - HUD Movement
• DOWN Switch - HUD Movement
• PAGE Switch - HUD Page Switch
If the scan tool parameter does not equal the expected result with the switch in the
appropriate state
13 of 137
Refer to Inoperative Head-Up Display Switch Circuit/System Testing.
Go to next step: If the scan tool parameter equals the expected result with the switch in the
appropriate state
4. Verify the P29 Head-Up Display performs the following function with the switch in the appropriate state:
• DIM + Switch - Head-up display brightness increases
• DIM - Switch - Head-up display brightness decreases
• UP Switch - Head-up display image moves up
• DOWN Switch - Head-up display image moves down
• PAGE Switch - Head-up display image changes pages
If the P29 Head-Up Display does not perform the expected function with the switch in the
appropriate state
Replace the P29 Head-Up Display.
Go to next step: If the P29 Head-Up Display performs the expected function with the switch
in the appropriate state
5. All OK.
NOTE: Circuit/System Verification must be performed before proceeding with

Circuit/System Testing.
Inoperative Head-Up Display
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P16 Instrument Cluster and P29 Head-Up Display.
Ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the P16 Instrument Cluster harness connector X1 serial data circuit
terminal 20 and ground.
If greater than 1 V

3. Ignition OFF.
4. Test for infinite resistance between the P16 Instrument Cluster harness connector X1 serial data circuit
If less than infinite resistance repair the short to ground on the circuit.
5. Disconnect the harness connector at the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right. Ignition ON.
6. Test for less than 1 V between the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right serial data circuit
If greater than 1 V
14 of 137
7. Ignition OFF.
8. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data circuit terminal 3 and ground.

9. Replace the video cable between the P29 Head-Up Display and the P16 Instrument Cluster. Ignition ON.
If the test pattern is displayed
All OK.
Go to next step: If the test pattern is not displayed

11. Connect the harness connector at the P16 Instrument Cluster and S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch -
Right. Ignition ON.
12. Verify steering wheel controls function properly.
If steering wheel controls function properly
Replace P29 Head-Up Display.
Go to next step: If steering wheel controls do not function properly

13. Ignition OFF. Disconnect harness connector at the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right.
Connect the harness connector at the and P29 Head-Up Display. Ignition ON.
14. Verify head-up display functions properly.
If head-up display functions properly
Replace S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right.
Go to next step: If head-up display does not function properly

15. Replace P16 Instrument Cluster.
Inoperative Head-Up Display Switch
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S27 Head-Up Display
Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal 3 and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P29 Head-Up Display.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the P29 Head-Up Display.
3. Ignition ON.
15 of 137
If less than 4.8 V
Go to next step: If infinite resistance.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P29 Head-Up Display, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the P29 Head-Up Display.
5. Test or replace the S27 Head-Up Display Switch.
Component Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S27 Head-Up Display Switch.
2. Test for 3.4K - 4.2K Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3.
If not between 3.4K - 4.2K Ω
Replace the S27 Head-Up Display Switch.
Go to next step: If between 3.4K - 4.2K Ω

3. Test for 87 - 107 Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the Dim + switch
pressed.
If not between 87 - 107 Ω

4. Test for 291 - 356 Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the Dim - switch
pressed.

5. Test for 575 - 704 Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the Up switch
pressed.
16 of 137
6. Test for 1K - 1.2K Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the Down
switch pressed.
If not between 1K - 1.2K Ω
Go to next step: If between 1K - 1.2K Ω

7. Test for 1.7K - 2.1K Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the Page
switch pressed.

8. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Displays and Gauges Component Replacement Reference

• Control Module References for instrument cluster replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B361A
DTC Descriptor
DTC B361A 39
Head-Up Display Module Internal Malfunction
DTC B361A 4B
Head-Up Display Module Calibration Not Learned
Internal fault detection and calibration of the head-up display is handled within the instrument cluster. No
external circuit diagnosis is involved.
Ignition ON.
17 of 137
B361A 39
An internal electrical malfunction has been detected in the head-up display.
B361A 4B
The instrument cluster has not leaned a valid calibration for the head-up display.
Head-up display function is disabled.
The DTC will clear when the conditions for setting the DTC are no longer present.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC B361A 4B is not set.
If DTC B361A 4B is set
1. Program the P16 Instrument Cluster.
If the DTC sets, replace the P29 Head-Up Display.
18 of 137
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC B361A 4B is not set
3. Verify DTC B361A 39 is not set.
If DTC B361A 39 is set
Go to next step: If DTC B361A 39 is not set

4. All OK
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for Instrument Cluster replacement, programming and setup
DTC B361B
DTC Descriptor
DTC B361B 02
Head-Up Display Switch Short to Ground
DTC B361B 05
Head-Up Display Switch High Voltage/Open
DTC B361B 59
Head-Up Display Switch Protection Time-Out

Signal B361B 02 B361B 05 B361B 05 B361B 59
Low Reference - B361B 05 - -
19 of 137
ladder.
Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
B361B 02
The head-up display switch signal voltage is less than 1 V
B361B 05
The head-up display switch signal voltage is greater than 11.5 V
B361B 59
The head-up display switch is stuck
The head-up display ignores the head-up display switch inputs
The DTC will become history if the head-up display no longer detects a malfunction
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
20 of 137

2. While holding each switch listed below, verify the scan tool Heads Up Display Switch State parameter is
as follows:
appropriate state
appropriate state
3. All OK.

1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S27
Head-Up Display Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P29 Head-Up Display.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P29 Head-Up Display.
21 of 137
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P29 Head-Up Display, ignition
ON.
4. Test or replace the S27 Head-Up Display switch.
Component Testing
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S27 Head-Up Display Switch.

3. Test for 87 - 107 Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the DIM + Switch
pressed.
Replace the S27 Head-Up Display switch.

4. Test for 291 - 356 Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the DIM -
Switch pressed.
Replace the S27 Head-Up Display switch.

5. Test for 575 - 704 Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the UP Switch
pressed.

6. Test for 1K - 1.2K Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the DOWN
Switch pressed.

7. Test for 1.7K - 2.1K Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the PAGE (or
INFO) Switch pressed.
22 of 137

8. All OK.
Repair Instructions

DTC P0070
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0070
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit
Circuit Description
Signal circuit The sensor resistance varies with temperature.
Components
• B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

• P16 Instrument Cluster
The input voltage varies depending on the temperature of the sensor.
Ignition On
The internal fault detection is handled inside the control module. No external circuit diagnosis is involved.
23 of 137
DTCs listed in the DTC Descriptor Category = Type B DTC
Diagnostic Aids
DTC P0070 is set in case the battery was disconnected or the control module was re-programmed.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

If DTC B0158 is set

If the DTC is not set
24 of 137
All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC P0070 is set

4. Clear DTC P0070
All OK.

6. Ignition/Vehicle - Off - For greater than 3 h
Verify the following parameters are within 15Â°C (59Â°F) of each other:
• IAT Sensor 1
• Ambient Air Temperature
If not in the specified range
Replace the component: B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Go to next step: If in the specified range

All OK.

8. Perform all necessary programming and setup procedures for the control module: P16 Instrument Cluster
All OK.

10. Perform all necessary programming and setup procedures for the control module: K9 Body Control
Module
All OK.

12. Perform all necessary programming and setup procedures for the control module: K20 Engine Control
Module
All OK.
25 of 137
14. Replace the control module: K20 Engine Control Module
Repair Instructions
DTC P0071-P0074
DTC Descriptors
DTC P0071
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Performance
DTC P0072
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0073
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0074
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Intermittent

Signal P0072 P0073 P0073 P0071 or P0074
Low Reference - P0073 - P0071
The ambient air temperature sensor is located behind the grille. The engine control module (ECM) monitors the
ambient air temperature sensor utilizing a low reference circuit and signal circuit. The ECM monitors the
voltage drop across the sensor, which is inversely proportional to temperature. When the ambient air
temperature is cold, the resistance of the sensor is high. When the ambient air temperature is warm, the
resistance of the sensor is low. The ECM converts the voltage value to a temperature value. The ECM also
sends the temperature value to other control modules via serial data.
26 of 137
• Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode
• The 12 V battery voltage is greater than or equal to 10.2 V.
P0071
During the first 20 s of run time after the 1 hour soaking period, the difference between the outside air
temperature and the engine intake air temperature is greater than 30Â°C (86Â°F).
P0072
The ECM detects the sensor signal is more than 88Â°C (190Â°F).
P0073
The ECM detects the sensor signal is less than -40Â°C (-40Â°F).
P0074
The ECM detects an unrealistic signal variance.
• DTC P0071 - P0074 are type B DTCs.

• The DIC will display SERVICE A/C SYSTEM.
• The system operates using a default value.
The DTC will become history if the ECM no longer detects a malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
Following a Ambient Air Temperature Sensor disconnect or circuit fault, the temperature displayed in the
vehicle can take several ignition cycles to update to the current temperature. Driving the vehicle may also be
necessary.
Schematic Reference
27 of 137
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool ECM Ambient Air Temperature parameter is between -40Â°C (-40Â°F) and +88Â°C
(+190Â°F) and changes with air temperature changes.
If not between -40Â°C (-40Â°F) and +88Â°C (+190Â°F) or changes with air temperature
changes
Go to next step: If between -40Â°C (-40Â°F) and +88Â°C (+190Â°F) and changes with air
temperature changes
3. Perform the ECM Ambient Air Temperature Calculation Reset special function with the scan tool
4. Verify the scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is within five degrees of actual ambient air
temperature.
If not within five degrees of actual ambient air temperature
Go to next step: If within five degrees of actual ambient air temperature

5. All OK.

1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B9
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal B (or 2) and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connectors at the K20 Engine Control Module.
28 of 137
4. Verify the scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is less than -39Â°C (-38Â°F).
If -39Â°C (-38Â°F) or greater
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal A (or 1) and ground.
Go to next step: If less than -39Â°C (-38Â°F)
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal A (or 1) and the low reference circuit
terminal B (or 2).
6. Verify the scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is greater than 88Â°C (190Â°F).
If 88Â°C (190Â°F) or less
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire and disconnect the harness connectors at the
K20 Engine Control Module, ignition ON.
Go to next step: If warmer than 88Â°C (190Â°F)
7. Connect the component: B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
8. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC.
If the DTC sets
Test or replace the component: B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

10. All OK.
Component Testing
Static Test
1. Place the B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor in a stable, temperature-controlled area for at least 10
minutes, then measure the resistance between sensor signal terminal A (or 1) and the low reference circuit
terminal B (or 2).
2. Compare the readings with the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance
29 of 137

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions

DTC P0196-P0199
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0197
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0198
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0199
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Erratic

Signal P0197 P0198 P0198 P0199
Low Reference - P0198 - -
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 5 V.
Low Reference Grounded through the control module.
30 of 137
The temperature sensor is a negative temperature coefficient
B36 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
thermistor, a resistor which changes based on temperature.
The control module converts the analog voltage signal input
K20 Engine Control Module
to a temperature value.
P0197
• Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit = Less than 0.2 V - For greater than 10 s
P0198
• Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit = Greater than 4.8 V - For greater than 10 s
P0199
• Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit = Signal Erratic
• Type C DTC
• Temperature Indicator = On
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
31 of 137
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor = -39 to 120Â°C (-38 to 248Â°F) and
changes
If not the specified state
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
Go to next step: If the specified state

If the DTC sets

5. All OK.
NOTE: It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down before an
accurate ground or low reference circuit continuity test can be performed.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: B36 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Low Reference circuit terminal 1 & Ground
If 10 ohms or greater
1. Disconnect the electrical connector: K20 Engine Control Module
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Low Reference circuit terminal 1 @ Component
harness & The other end of the circuit
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor = Less than -34Â°C (-30Â°F)
If -34Â°C (-30Â°F) or warmer
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness
& Ground
32 of 137
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
Go to next step: If -35Â°C (-31Â°F) or colder
6. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 & Low Reference
circuit terminal 1
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor = Greater than 143Â°C (290Â°F)
If 143Â°C (290Â°F) or colder
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire(s)
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit @ Component harness & Ground
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit @ Component harness & The other
end of the circuit
Go to next step: If 144Â°C (291Â°F) or warmer
8. Test or replace the component: B36 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
Repair Instructions

DTC P01BB-P01BD
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P01BB
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P01BC
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage
33 of 137
DTC P01BD
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit Erratic

Signal P01BB P01BC P01BC P01BD
Low Reference - P01BC - -
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 5 V.
P01BB
• Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit = Less than 0.2 V - For greater than 10 s
P01BC
• Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit = Greater than 4.8 V - For greater than 10 s
P01BD
• Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit = Signal Erratic
• Type C DTC
• Temperature Indicator = On
34 of 137
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 2 = -39 to 120Â°C (-38 to 248Â°F) and
changes

If the DTC sets

5. All OK.
35 of 137
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: B36 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 2 = Less than -34Â°C (-30Â°F)
If -34Â°C (-30Â°F) or warmer
& Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
Go to next step: If -35Â°C (-31Â°F) or colder
circuit terminal 1
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 2 = Greater than 143Â°C (290Â°F)
If 143Â°C (290Â°F) or colder
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit @ Component harness & Ground
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit @ Component harness & The other
end of the circuit
Go to next step: If 144Â°C (291Â°F) or warmer
8. Test or replace the component: B36 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
Repair Instructions
36 of 137
DTC P0461-P0464 (FWD)

DTC Descriptors
DTC P0461
Fuel Level Sensor 1 Performance
DTC P0462
Fuel Level Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0463
Fuel Level Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0464
Fuel Level Sensor 1 Circuit Intermittent

Fuel Level Sensor 1 Signal P0462 P0463 P0463 P0461
Low Reference - 1 P0463, P0464 P0461
1. Fuel Gauge Malfunction
The fuel level sensor changes resistance based on fuel level. The Fuel Pump Driver Control Module monitors
the signal circuit of the fuel level sensor and sends the signal information to the Engine Control Module (ECM)
for all further handling. The ECM uses this value in order to determine the fuel level. When the fuel tank is full,
the resistance of the fuel level sensor is low and the ECM senses a low signal voltage on the signal circuit of the
fuel level sensor. When the fuel tank is empty, the resistance of the fuel level sensor is high and the ECM senses
a high signal voltage. The ECM uses the signal circuit of the fuel level sensor in order to calculate the
percentage of remaining fuel in the tank. The Fuel Pump Driver Control Module sends the fuel level percentage
via High Speed CAN-Bus to the body control module (BCM). The BCM then sends the fuel level percentage
via Low Speed CAN-Bus to the instrument cluster in order to control the fuel gauge.

• Battery voltage is between 11 - 32 V
37 of 137
P0461
• The ECM detects a change in fuel level of less than a specified amount (typically 3 - 10 L or 0.8 - 2.6 gal)
over a specified driving distance (typically 240 - 320 km or 150 - 200 miles).
P0462
• The ECM detects the signal voltage is less than 0.25 V.

• The above conditions must be met for 5 s.
P0463
• The ECM detects the signal voltage is greater than 4.7 V.

P0464
• The ECM detects the fuel level change is greater than 10% for a duration lasting less than 30 seconds.
• DTC P0464 runs and fails 2 out of 3 test cycles.
P0461, P0462, and P0463
• P0461, P0462, and P0463 are Type B DTCs

• The fuel gauge defaults to empty
• The low fuel indicator illuminates
P0464
• P0464 is a Type A DTC

Schematic Reference
38 of 137
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the DTC P0461, P0462, P0463, or P0464 are not set
If DTC P0461, P0462, P0463, or P0464 are set
Go to next step: If DTC P0461, P0462, P0463, or P0464 are not set
3. If equipped, verify the fuel level gauge sweeps when performing the scan tool Instrument Cluster Gauge
Sweep control function.
If the fuel level gauge does not sweep
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster
Go to next step: If the fuel level gauge sweeps

4. Verify the low fuel level indicator turns ON and OFF when commanding the scan tool All Indicators
control function ON and OFF.
If the low fuel level indicator does not turn ON and OFF
Go to next step: If the low fuel level indicator turns ON and OFF
5. Verify the ECM scan tool Fuel Level Sensor parameter is between 0.5 - 3.5 V and varies with fuel level.
If not between 0.5 - 3.5 V or does not vary with fuel level
Go to next step: If between 0.5 - 3.5 V and varies with fuel level
6. All OK.
39 of 137
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A7 Fuel Pump and
Level Sensor Assembly. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor parameter is greater than 4.8 V.
If 4.8 V or less
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 5 and ground.
Go to next step: If greater than 4.8 V
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 5 and the low reference circuit
terminal 6.
6. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor parameter is less than 0.2 V.
If 0.2 V or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module,
ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF
7. Test or replace the B46 Primary Fuel Level Sensor.
9. Verify the condition does not return.
If the condition returns
Go to next step: If the condition does not return

10. All OK.
40 of 137
Component Testing
1. Ignition OFF, remove the Primary Fuel Level Sender.

2. Sweep the Fuel Level Sensor through its full range of motion while measuring resistance between the
signal terminal 5 and the low reference terminal 6.
3. Test for a minimum resistance value of 37-43 Ω and a maximum value of 245-255 Ω without any spikes
or dropouts.
If minimum resistance is not 37-43 Ω, maximum resistance is not 245-255 Ω, or if there are
any spikes or dropouts
Replace the Fuel Level Sensor.
Go to next step: If minimum resistance is 37-43 Ω, maximum resistance is 245-255 Ω, and if

there are no spikes or dropouts
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for control module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P0461-P0464, P2066, P2067, OR P2068 (AWD)

DTC Descriptors
DTC P0461
DTC P0462
DTC P0463
DTC P0464
DTC P2066
41 of 137
DTC P2067
DTC P2068

Fuel Level Sensor 1/Primary/Right
P0462 P0463 P0463 P0461, 1
Signal
Fuel Level Sensor 2/Secondary/Left
P2067 P2068 P2068 P2066, 1
Signal
Low Reference - P0463, P2068 P0463, P2068 P0461, P2066, 1
The fuel level sensor changes resistance based on fuel level and is wired to the Fuel Pump Driver Control
Module. The Fuel Pump Driver Control Module sends the fuel level sensor reading to the Engine Control
Module (ECM) via serial data. The ECM monitors the fuel level sensor signal in order to determine the fuel
level. When the fuel tank is full, the resistances of both fuel level sensors are low. When the fuel tank is empty,
the resistances of the fuel level sensors are high. The ECM uses the signal voltages of the primary fuel level
sensor and the secondary fuel level sensor (integrated in the fuel tank) to calculate the percentage of remaining
fuel in the tank. The ECM sends the fuel level percentage via serial data to the body control module (BCM).
The BCM then sends the fuel level percentage via serial data to the P16 Instrument Panel Cluster Control
Module to control the fuel gauge.
• The engine is running

• The system voltage is between 11 - 16 V
P0461 or P2066
The ECM detects a change in fuel level of less than a specified amount (typically 3 - 10 L or 0.8 - 2.6 gal) over
a specified driving distance (typically 240 - 320 km or 150 - 200 miles).
P0462 or P2067
• The signal voltage is less than 0.25 V.

• The above conditions must be met for 5 seconds.
P0463 or P2068
• The signal voltage is greater than 4.7 V.

42 of 137
P0464
• The fuel level change is greater than 10%.

• P0461, P0462, P0463, P0464, P2066, P2067 and P2068 are Type B DTCs
• The DTC becomes history when the conditions for setting the DTC are no longer present.
• The history DTC clears after 40 malfunction-free warm-up cycles.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
43 of 137
2. Verify the DTC P0461, P0462, P0463, P0464, P2066, P2067, or P2068 are not set
Refer to Primary Fuel Level Sensor Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing
If DTC P2066, P2067, or P2068 are set
Refer to Secondary Fuel Level Sensor Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing
Go to next step: If DTC P0461, P0462, P0463, P0464, P2066, P2067, or P2068 are not set
3. If equipped, verify the fuel level gauge sweeps when performing the scan tool P16 Instrument Panel
Cluster Control Module Gauge Sweep control function.
Replace the P16 Instrument Panel Cluster Control Module.

4. Ignition ON, Verify the low fuel level indicator turns ON and OFF during Instrument Panel Cluster
initialization bulb check.
Replace the P16 Instrument Panel Cluster Control Module
5. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Right Tank parameter is between 0.5 - 3.5 V and varies with fuel
level.
6. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Left Tank parameter is between 0.5 - 3.5 V and varies with fuel
level.
7. All OK.

Primary Fuel Level Sensor Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A7 Fuel Tank Fuel
Pump Module. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
44 of 137
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Right Tank parameter is greater than 4.8 V.
If 4.8 V or less
terminal 6.
6. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Right Tank parameter is less than 0.2 V.
If 0.2 V or greater
ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF
7. Test or replace the B46A Primary Fuel Level Sensor.

10. All OK.
Secondary Fuel Level Sensor Malfunction
45 of 137
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Left Tank parameter is greater than 4.8 V.
If 4.8 V or less
terminal 8.
6. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Left Tank parameter is less than 0.2 V.
If 0.2 V or greater
ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF
7. Test or replace the B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary.

10. All OK.
Component Testing
Primary Fuel Level Sensor
46 of 137
or dropouts.
Replace the Primary Fuel Level Sensor.

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions

DTC P0521, P0522, OR P0523

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0521
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Performance
DTC P0522
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0523
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage

5 V Reference P0522 P0522 or 1 P0523 P0521 or 1
Signal P0522 P0522 or 1 P0523 P0521 or 1
47 of 137
Low Reference - P0523 or 1 - P0521 or 1
1. Low Engine Oil Pressure Indicator = Malfunction
Circuit Description
5 V Reference Regulated voltage supplied by the control module.
Signal
B37B Engine Oil Pressure Sensor or B37D The sensor is a capacitive pressure transducer. Electronics
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor - Engine Block in the sensor convert pressure into an analog voltage signal.
The K20 control module monitors the B37B Engine Oil
K20 Engine Control Module Pressure Sensor signal circuit. The control module input
circuit has an internal resistance connected to ground.
Engine Running
P0521
• Engine Oil Pressure = The actual value is not within a predetermined range of the calculated value. - For
greater than 4 s
P0522
• Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit = Less than 0.2 V - For greater than 10 s
P0523
• Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit = Greater than 4.8 V - For greater than 10 s
• Type C DTC
• Low Engine Oil Pressure Indicator = On
48 of 137
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Pressure = 0 kPa (0 PSI)

3. Verify the engine has the correct oil level and the correct oil pressure before continuing with this
diagnostic.
4. Engine Running
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Pressure = CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gauge

6. Verify the scan tool parameter: V = Engine Oil Pressure - Gauge @ P16 Instrument Cluster
Test or replace the component: P16 Instrument Cluster
49 of 137
7. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: B37B Engine Oil Pressure Sensor or B37D Engine Oil Pressure
Sensor - Engine Block
5. Test for 4.8 to 5.2 V between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal 3 & Low Reference circuit
terminal 2
If less than 4.8 V
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal 3 @ Component
harness & Ground
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal 3 @ Component
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal 3 @ Component
harness & Ground
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K20 Engine Control Module
Go to next step: If between 4.8 and 5.2 V
If greater than 0 kPa (0 PSI)
50 of 137
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness &
Ground
Go to next step: If 0 kPa (0 PSI) or less
7. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 & 5 V Reference
circuit terminal 3
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Pressure = Greater than 800 kPa (116 PSI)
If 800 kPa (116 PSI) or less
& Ground
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness &
The other end of the circuit
Go to next step: If greater than 800 kPa (116 PSI)
9. Test or replace the component: B37B Engine Oil Pressure Sensor or B37D Engine Oil Pressure Sensor -
Engine Block
Repair Instructions

DTC P0654 (WITH LTG OR LYX)

DTC Descriptor
DTC P0654
Engine Speed Output Circuit
51 of 137
DTC P06ED
Engine Speed Output Circuit Low Voltage
DTC B06EE
Engine Speed Output Circuit High Voltage
Short to Short to
High Resistance
Circuit Ground Open Voltage
Engine Speed Signal P06ED 1 P0654 P06EE
1. Tachometer Inaccurate or Inoperative
The engine control module (ECM) creates the engine speed signal by pulsing the engine speed signal circuit at a
rate of 2 pulses per engine revolution. The Radio converts the 2 pulses per engine revolution signal to an engine
speed value used for active noise cancellation purposes. The ECM monitors the voltage at the engine speed
signal circuit to determine when the voltage is out of the normal operating range.
• The engine speed is more than 400 RPM.

• The ignition voltage is between 9 - 18 volts.
• The ECM detects that the commanded state of the driver and the actual state of the signal circuit do not
match.
• The above condition must be present for a minimum of 5 seconds.
The ECM records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The ECM displays the failure
information in the Failure Records on the scan tool.
Schematic Reference
52 of 137
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the tachometer sweeps when performing the scan tool Instrument Cluster Gauge Sweep control
function.
If the tachometer does not sweep
Go to next step: If the tachometer sweeps

3. Engine running, verify the tachometer display matches the scan tool Engine Speed parameter in the ECM
Engine Data List.
If tachometer display does not match the Engine Speed parameter
Perform Circuit/System Testing.
Go to next step: If tachometer display matches the Engine Speed parameter

4. All OK.

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio.

2. Ignition ON, test for 9 - 11 volts between the engine speed signal circuit terminal 23 and ground.
If less than 9 volts
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal and ground.
53 of 137
If greater than 11 volts
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module,
ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal and ground.
Go to next step: If 9 - 11 volts
3. Test or replace the K20 Engine Control Module.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for the control module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P0654 (WITH LVL, LH7, OR LWW)

DTC Descriptor
DTC P0654
DTC P06ED
DTC B06EE
Short to Short to
High Resistance
The engine control module (ECM) creates the engine speed signal by pulsing the engine speed signal circuit to
ground at a rate of 2 pulses per engine revolution. The Instrument Cluster converts the 2 pulses per engine
54 of 137
revolution signal to a tachometer position indicating the engine speed. The engine speed is sent to the
Instrument Cluster over a discreet wire from the ECM. The tachometer signal is pulled up to B+ in the IPC. The
ECM monitors the voltage at the engine speed signal circuit to determine when the voltage is out of the normal
operating range.

match.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
55 of 137
1. Ignition ON.
function.

Engine Data List.

4. All OK.


1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, ignition
ON.
Repair Instructions
56 of 137
DTC P06ED (WITH LTG OR LYX)

DTC Descriptor
DTC P0654
DTC P06ED
DTC B06EE
Short to Short to
High Resistance

match.
57 of 137
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
function.

Engine Data List.

4. All OK.
58 of 137


ignition ON.
Repair Instructions
DTC P06ED (WITH LVL, LH7, OR LWW)

DTC Descriptor
DTC P0654
DTC P06ED
59 of 137
DTC B06EE
Short to Short to
High Resistance
operating range.

match.
Schematic Reference
60 of 137
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
function.

Engine Data List.

4. All OK.


61 of 137
ON.
Repair Instructions
DTC P06EE (WITH LTG OR LYX)

DTC Descriptor
DTC P0654
DTC P06ED
DTC B06EE
Short to Short to
High Resistance
62 of 137

match.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
function.
63 of 137

Engine Data List.

4. All OK.


ignition ON.
Repair Instructions
DTC P06EE (WITH LVL, LH7, OR LWW)

64 of 137
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0654
DTC P06ED
DTC B06EE
Short to Short to
High Resistance
operating range.

match.
65 of 137
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
function.

Engine Data List.

4. All OK.
66 of 137

ON.
Repair Instructions
DTC P1100
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
Fuel Level Sensor 2 Signal Message Counter Incorrect
The signal circuit is connected to the following control module: K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module
The control module communicates with the engine control module via serial data.
67 of 137
K20 Engine Control Module = K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module - Message Counter Incorrect
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


3. Replace the component: K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module
If the DTC is set

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
68 of 137
DTC P1200
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
Fuel Level Sensor 1 Signal Message Counter Incorrect
K20 Engine Control Module = K111 Fuel Pump Driver Control Module - Message Counter Incorrect
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
69 of 137


If the DTC is set

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC P1434
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
Fuel Level Sensor 1 Reference Feedback Performance
The signal circuit is connected to the following control module: K111 Fuel Pump Power Control Module
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 11 V
70 of 137
Invalid data received from K111 Fuel Pump Power Control Module
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


3. Replace the component: K111 Fuel Pump Power Control Module
If the DTC is set

5. All OK.
71 of 137
Repair Instructions
DTC P143E
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
Fuel Level Sensor 2 Reference Feedback Performance
Ignition Voltage = Greater than 11 V
Invalid Data Received From Fuel Pump Control Module
Schematic Reference
72 of 137
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


If the DTC is set

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC P250A (WITH LTG)

DTC Descriptor
DTC P250A
Engine Oil Level Switch Circuit
Circuit Short to Ground Open/High Short to Voltage
73 of 137
Resistance
Engine Oil Level Sensor Signal 2 P250A, 1 -
Engine Oil Level Sensor Ground - P250A, 1 -
1. DIC message Engine Oil Level Low always ON
2. DIC message Engine Oil Level Low always OFF
Engine Oil Level Switch

Circuit Short to Ground Open Short to Voltage
Operating Conditions: Ignition ON
Parameter Normal Range: OK
Engine Oil Level Sensor/Switch Signal OK Low OK
Engine Oil Level Sensor/Switch Ground - Low -
The engine oil level sensor/switch is normally-closed with proper engine oil level. The switch opens when the
engine oil level drops below a calibrated level. The engine control module (ECM) monitors the engine oil level
signal circuit when the ignition is ON, and the engine is OFF. With the switch in the closed position, the ECM
detects a low voltage on the signal circuit. With the switch in the open position, the ECM detects a high voltage
on the signal circuit. When high voltage is detected on the signal circuit, the ECM will send a serial data
message to the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The IPC will then display a message on the driver information
center (DIC) or illuminate a low engine oil level lamp.
The following information determines the message sent from the ECM to the IPC:
• The Low Engine Oil Level message lamp is displayed only after the ECM detects a high voltage on the
signal circuit for three consecutive ignition cycles, followed by an ignition OFF event from 15 minutes to
greater than 50 minutes, depending on engine oil temperatures.
• The Low Engine Oil Level message is turned OFF when the ECM detects a low voltage on the signal
circuit after an ignition OFF event for greater than 90 seconds, followed by an ignition ON event for less
than 1 second.
Ignition ON.
The ECM detects a high voltage on the signal circuit for three consecutive ignition cycles, followed by an
ignition OFF event from 15 minutes to greater than 50 minutes, depending on engine oil temperatures.
Engine Oil Level Low message activated.
The ECM detects a low voltage on the signal circuit after an ignition OFF event for greater than 90 seconds,
followed by an ignition ON event for less than 1 second.
74 of 137
Schematic Reference
Indicator/Warning Message Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Control Module References for scan tool information.
1. Verify proper engine oil level.

If not at proper level
Add oil as necessary.
Go to next step: If at proper level

2. Ignition ON, verify the scan tool Engine Oil Level parameter reads OK.
If not OK
Go to next step: If OK
3. All OK.
NOTE: Verify proper engine oil level before continuing with diagnosis.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B35 Engine Oil Level
Switch. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 (or B) and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module.
75 of 137
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Engine Oil Level Switch parameter reads Low.
If the Engine Oil Level Switch parameter reads OK
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 2 (or A) and ground.
Go to next step: If the Engine Oil Level Switch parameter reads Low
NOTE: If a short to voltage is found on the signal circuit, the fuse in the 3A jumper
wire will open.
5. Install a 3A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 2 (or A) and the ground circuit terminal
1 (or B).
6. Verify the scan tool Engine Oil Level Switch parameter reads OK.
If the Engine Oil Level Switch parameter reads Low
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K20 Engine Control Module, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance on the circuit.
Go to next step: If the Engine Oil Level Switch parameter reads OK
7. Test or replace the B35 Engine Oil Level Switch.
Repair Instructions

DTC P250A (WITH LH7)

76 of 137
DTC Descriptor
DTC P250A
Open/High
Circuit Short to Ground Resistance Short to Voltage

than 1 second.
Ignition ON.
77 of 137
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


If not OK
3. All OK.
78 of 137
If 5 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
wire will open.
5. Install a 3A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and the ground circuit terminal 2.
If less than 1 V
Repair Instructions

79 of 137
DTC P2C21
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
Engine Oil Temperature Sensors 1-2 Not Plausible
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 2
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
80 of 137
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference


3. Replace the component: B36 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor
If the DTC is set

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
SYMPTOMS - DISPLAYS AND GAUGES
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom diagnostic
tables.
1. Before using the symptom diagnostic tables, perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in order to
determine that there are no DTCs set, and that the control modules can communicate via the serial data
link.
2. Review the system operation in order to understand the system functions. Refer to the following
description and operations:
• Instrument Cluster Description and Operation
• Indicator/Warning Message Description and Operation
• Audible Warnings Description and Operation
81 of 137
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which can affect the operation of the instrument panel cluster or the
audible warning systems. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Inspect for the proper fluid levels.
Intermittent
Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections
Symptom List
• Fuel Gauge Malfunction (FWD), or Fuel Gauge Malfunction (AWD)

• Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Inaccurate or Inoperative
• Outside Air Temperature Display Malfunction
CHIME MALFUNCTION
Check - Vehicle
A11 Radio - Chime - Warning
The serial data circuits are used to exchange information between the control modules.
Audible notifications that would normally be sounded over the radio speakers are transmitted by the chime
alarm control module in case no radio is installed.
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Audible Warnings Description and Operation
Schematic Reference
Audible Warnings Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
82 of 137
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the component activates: Radio Speaker The balance and fade controls can be used to help isolate
an inoperative speaker or poor sound condition.
If the component does not activate
Refer to: Speaker Malfunction (UQS) , or Speaker Malfunction (UQG) .
Go to next step: If all components operate

3. B153D Seat Belt Buckle - Driver & B153P Seat Belt Buckle - Passenger - Buckled
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Seat Belt Status & Passenger Seat Belt Status = Buckled
Refer to: Seat Belt Indicator Malfunction - Driver .

4. Headlamp Switch - Off
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Headlamps On Switch = Inactive
Refer to: Headlamps Malfunction

6. Park Lamps Switch - Off
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Park Lamps Switch = Inactive
Refer to: Park, License, and/or Tail Lamps Malfunction

8. Turn Signal Switch - Off
9. Verify the scan tool parameter: Left Turn Signal Switch & Right Turn Signal Switch = Inactive
Refer to: Park, License, and/or Tail Lamps Malfunction

10. Close the doors and verify that the luggage compartment is empty.
83 of 137
11. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Ajar Switch & Passenger Door Ajar Switch & Left Rear
Door Ajar Switch & Right Rear Door Ajar Switch = Inactive
Refer to: Door Ajar Indicator Malfunction

12. All OK.
Repair Instructions
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE INACCURATE OR INOPERATIVE

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0521
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Performance
DTC P0522
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0523
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage

5 V Reference P0522 P0522 or 1 P0523 P0521 or 1
Signal P0522 P0522 or 1 P0523 P0521 or 1
Low Reference - P0523 or 1 - P0521 or 1
1. Low Engine Oil Pressure Indicator = Malfunction
84 of 137
Circuit Description
Signal
B37B Engine Oil Pressure Sensor or B37D The sensor is a capacitive pressure transducer. Electronics
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor - Engine Block in the sensor convert pressure into an analog voltage signal.
The K20 control module monitors the B37B Engine Oil
K20 Engine Control Module Pressure Sensor signal circuit. The control module input
circuit has an internal resistance connected to ground.
Engine Running
P0521
• Engine Oil Pressure = The actual value is not within a predetermined range of the calculated value. - For
greater than 4 s
P0522
• Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit = Less than 0.2 V - For greater than 10 s
P0523
• Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit = Greater than 4.8 V - For greater than 10 s
• Type C DTC
• Low Engine Oil Pressure Indicator = On
Schematic Reference
85 of 137
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference


3. Verify the engine has the correct oil level and the correct oil pressure before continuing with this
diagnostic.
4. Engine Running
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Pressure = CH-48027 Digital Pressure Gauge

6. Verify the scan tool parameter: V = Engine Oil Pressure - Gauge @ P16 Instrument Cluster
Test or replace the component: P16 Instrument Cluster

7. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: B37B Engine Oil Pressure Sensor or B37D Engine Oil Pressure
86 of 137
Sensor - Engine Block
5. Test for 4.8 to 5.2 V between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal 3 & Low Reference circuit
terminal 2
If less than 4.8 V
harness & Ground
harness & Ground
If greater than 0 kPa (0 PSI)
Ground
87 of 137
Go to next step: If 0 kPa (0 PSI) or less
7. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 & 5 V Reference
circuit terminal 3
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: Engine Oil Pressure = Greater than 800 kPa (116 PSI)
If 800 kPa (116 PSI) or less
& Ground
Go to next step: If greater than 800 kPa (116 PSI)
9. Test or replace the component: B37B Engine Oil Pressure Sensor or B37D Engine Oil Pressure Sensor -
Engine Block
Repair Instructions

FUEL GAUGE MALFUNCTION (FWD)

DTC Descriptors
DTC P0461
DTC P0462
DTC P0463
DTC P0464
88 of 137

Fuel Level Sensor 1 Signal P0462 P0463 P0463 P0461
Low Reference - 1 P0463, P0464 P0461
The fuel level sensor changes resistance based on fuel level. The Fuel Pump Driver Control Module monitors
the signal circuit of the fuel level sensor and sends the signal information to the Engine Control Module (ECM)
for all further handling. The ECM uses this value in order to determine the fuel level. When the fuel tank is full,
the resistance of the fuel level sensor is low and the ECM senses a low signal voltage on the signal circuit of the
fuel level sensor. When the fuel tank is empty, the resistance of the fuel level sensor is high and the ECM senses
a high signal voltage. The ECM uses the signal circuit of the fuel level sensor in order to calculate the
percentage of remaining fuel in the tank. The Fuel Pump Driver Control Module sends the fuel level percentage
via High Speed CAN-Bus to the body control module (BCM). The BCM then sends the fuel level percentage
via Low Speed CAN-Bus to the instrument cluster in order to control the fuel gauge.

• Battery voltage is between 11 - 32 V
P0461
• The ECM detects a change in fuel level of less than a specified amount (typically 3 - 10 L or 0.8 - 2.6 gal)
over a specified driving distance (typically 240 - 320 km or 150 - 200 miles).
P0462
• The ECM detects the signal voltage is less than 0.25 V.

P0463
• The ECM detects the signal voltage is greater than 4.7 V.

P0464
• The ECM detects the fuel level change is greater than 10% for a duration lasting less than 30 seconds.
P0461, P0462, and P0463
89 of 137
P0464

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the DTC P0461, P0462, P0463, or P0464 are not set
Go to next step: If DTC P0461, P0462, P0463, or P0464 are not set
90 of 137
3. If equipped, verify the fuel level gauge sweeps when performing the scan tool Instrument Cluster Gauge
Sweep control function.

4. Verify the low fuel level indicator turns ON and OFF when commanding the scan tool All Indicators
control function ON and OFF.
5. Verify the ECM scan tool Fuel Level Sensor parameter is between 0.5 - 3.5 V and varies with fuel level.
6. All OK.

1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A7 Fuel Pump and
Level Sensor Assembly. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor parameter is greater than 4.8 V.
If 4.8 V or less
91 of 137
terminal 6.
6. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor parameter is less than 0.2 V.
If 0.2 V or greater
ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF
7. Test or replace the B46 Primary Fuel Level Sensor.

10. All OK.
Component Testing

or dropouts.
Replace the Fuel Level Sensor.

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions

92 of 137
FUEL GAUGE MALFUNCTION (AWD)
DTC Descriptors
DTC P0461
DTC P0462
DTC P0463
DTC P0464
DTC P2066
DTC P2067
DTC P2068

Fuel Level Sensor 1/Primary/Right
P0462 P0463 P0463 P0461, 1
Signal
Fuel Level Sensor 2/Secondary/Left
P2067 P2068 P2068 P2066, 1
Signal
Low Reference - P0463, P2068 P0463, P2068 P0461, P2066, 1
The fuel level sensor changes resistance based on fuel level and is wired to the Fuel Pump Driver Control
93 of 137
Module. The Fuel Pump Driver Control Module sends the fuel level sensor reading to the Engine Control
Module (ECM) via serial data. The ECM monitors the fuel level sensor signal in order to determine the fuel
level. When the fuel tank is full, the resistances of both fuel level sensors are low. When the fuel tank is empty,
the resistances of the fuel level sensors are high. The ECM uses the signal voltages of the primary fuel level
sensor and the secondary fuel level sensor (integrated in the fuel tank) to calculate the percentage of remaining
fuel in the tank. The ECM sends the fuel level percentage via serial data to the body control module (BCM).
The BCM then sends the fuel level percentage via serial data to the P16 Instrument Panel Cluster Control
Module to control the fuel gauge.
• The engine is running

• The system voltage is between 11 - 16 V
P0461 or P2066
The ECM detects a change in fuel level of less than a specified amount (typically 3 - 10 L or 0.8 - 2.6 gal) over
a specified driving distance (typically 240 - 320 km or 150 - 200 miles).
P0462 or P2067
• The signal voltage is less than 0.25 V.

P0463 or P2068
• The signal voltage is greater than 4.7 V.

P0464
• The fuel level change is greater than 10%.

94 of 137
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the DTC P0461, P0462, P0463, P0464, P2066, P2067, or P2068 are not set
If DTC P2066, P2067, or P2068 are set
Go to next step: If DTC P0461, P0462, P0463, P0464, P2066, P2067, or P2068 are not set
3. If equipped, verify the fuel level gauge sweeps when performing the scan tool P16 Instrument Panel
Cluster Control Module Gauge Sweep control function.
Replace the P16 Instrument Panel Cluster Control Module.

4. Ignition ON, Verify the low fuel level indicator turns ON and OFF during Instrument Panel Cluster
initialization bulb check.
95 of 137
Replace the P16 Instrument Panel Cluster Control Module
5. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Right Tank parameter is between 0.5 - 3.5 V and varies with fuel
level.
6. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Left Tank parameter is between 0.5 - 3.5 V and varies with fuel
level.
7. All OK.

Primary Fuel Level Sensor Malfunction
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Right Tank parameter is greater than 4.8 V.
If 4.8 V or less
terminal 6.
96 of 137
6. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Right Tank parameter is less than 0.2 V.
If 0.2 V or greater
ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF
7. Test or replace the B46A Primary Fuel Level Sensor.

10. All OK.
Secondary Fuel Level Sensor Malfunction
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Left Tank parameter is greater than 4.8 V.
If 4.8 V or less
97 of 137
terminal 8.
6. Verify the scan tool Fuel Level Sensor Left Tank parameter is less than 0.2 V.
If 0.2 V or greater
ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF
7. Test or replace the B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary.

10. All OK.
Component Testing
Primary Fuel Level Sensor

or dropouts.
Replace the Primary Fuel Level Sensor.

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
98 of 137
HEAD-UP DISPLAY MALFUNCTION


B+ U1518 00 U1518 00 - -
Serial Data 1, U1518 00 U1518 00 1, U1518 00 -
Video Signal 1 or B12AC 1 or B12AC 1 or B12AC 1 or B12AC
Switch Signal B361B 02 B361B 05 B361B 05 B361B 59
Switch Low Reference - B361B 05 - -
Ground - U1518 00 - -
1. Head-Up Display Malfunction
diagnosis capacity. Head-up display DTCs are reported through the Instrument Cluster.
ladder.
Schematic Reference
99 of 137
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
If the test pattern is not displayed
Refer to Inoperative Head-Up display Circuit/System Testing.
Go to next step: If the test pattern is displayed

3. While holding each switch listed below, verify the scan tool Head-Up Display Switch parameter is as
follows:
appropriate state
Refer to Inoperative Head-Up Display Switch Circuit/System Testing.
appropriate state
4. Verify the P29 Head-Up Display performs the following function with the switch in the appropriate state:
• DIM + Switch - Head-up display brightness increases
• DIM - Switch - Head-up display brightness decreases
• UP Switch - Head-up display image moves up
• DOWN Switch - Head-up display image moves down
• PAGE Switch - Head-up display image changes pages
If the P29 Head-Up Display does not perform the expected function with the switch in the
appropriate state
100 of 137
Go to next step: If the P29 Head-Up Display performs the expected function with the switch
in the appropriate state
5. All OK.

Inoperative Head-Up Display
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P16 Instrument Cluster and P29 Head-Up Display.
Ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the P16 Instrument Cluster harness connector X1 serial data circuit
If greater than 1 V

3. Ignition OFF.
4. Test for infinite resistance between the P16 Instrument Cluster harness connector X1 serial data circuit
If less than infinite resistance repair the short to ground on the circuit.
5. Disconnect the harness connector at the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right. Ignition ON.
6. Test for less than 1 V between the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right serial data circuit
If greater than 1 V

7. Ignition OFF.
8. Test for infinite resistance between the serial data circuit terminal 3 and ground.

9. Replace the video cable between the P29 Head-Up Display and the P16 Instrument Cluster. Ignition ON.
If the test pattern is displayed
All OK.
101 of 137
Go to next step: If the test pattern is not displayed
11. Connect the harness connector at the P16 Instrument Cluster and S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch -
Right. Ignition ON.
12. Verify steering wheel controls function properly.
If steering wheel controls function properly
Replace P29 Head-Up Display.
Go to next step: If steering wheel controls do not function properly

13. Ignition OFF. Disconnect harness connector at the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right.
Connect the harness connector at the and P29 Head-Up Display. Ignition ON.
14. Verify head-up display functions properly.
If head-up display functions properly
Replace S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right.
Go to next step: If head-up display does not function properly

15. Replace P16 Instrument Cluster.
Inoperative Head-Up Display Switch
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S27 Head-Up Display
Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 4.8 V
Go to next step: If infinite resistance.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P29 Head-Up Display, ignition ON.
102 of 137
5. Test or replace the S27 Head-Up Display Switch.
Component Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S27 Head-Up Display Switch.

3. Test for 87 - 107 Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the Dim + switch
pressed.

4. Test for 291 - 356 Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the Dim - switch
pressed.

5. Test for 575 - 704 Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the Up switch
pressed.

6. Test for 1K - 1.2K Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the Down
switch pressed.

7. Test for 1.7K - 2.1K Ω between the signal terminal 4 and the low reference terminal 3 with the Page
switch pressed.
103 of 137
8. All OK.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for instrument cluster replacement, programming, and setup
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PROGRAMMING MALFUNCTION (WITH UDD ONLY)

The X22 USB Drive Data Connector is connected to the Instrument Cluster via a USB cable. The X22 USB
Drive Data Connector is only used for programming the Instrument Cluster via SPS programming.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
EL-50334-50 GM Infotainment Tester Kit
104 of 137
NOTE: This procedure should only be completed when the Instrument Cluster
fails to read the USB thumb drive during a USB programming event.
1. Verify the USB cable is properly connected and there is no damage to the cable or connections.

2. Connect the EL-50334-50 to the X22 USB Drive Data Connector and the Instrument Cluster connector
X2.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the Instrument Cluster completes USB Programming properly following SPS instructions..
If Instrument Cluster does not program properly
1. Replace the X22 USB Drive Data Connector.
2. Verify the Instrument Cluster completes USB Programming properly following SPS instructions.
If Instrument Cluster does not operate properly
Replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
Go to next step: If Instrument Cluster programs properly
Go to next step: If Instrument Cluster programs properly

5. Replace the USB harness.
Repair Instructions

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR DIAGNOSIS (WITH LTG)

DTC Descriptor
DTC P250A
105 of 137
Open/High

than 1 second.
Ignition ON.
106 of 137
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


If not OK
3. All OK.
107 of 137
2. Test for less than 5 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 1 (or B) and ground.
If 5 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 2 (or A) and ground.
wire will open.
5. Install a 3A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 2 (or A) and the ground circuit terminal
1 (or B).
If less than 1 V
Repair Instructions

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR DIAGNOSIS (WITH LH7)

108 of 137
DTC Descriptor
DTC P250A
Open/High

than 1 second.
Ignition ON.
109 of 137
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


If not OK
110 of 137
3. All OK.
If 5 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
wire will open.
5. Install a 3A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and the ground circuit terminal 2.
If less than 1 V
Repair Instructions
111 of 137
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE DISPLAY MALFUNCTION

DTC Descriptors
DTC P0071
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Performance
DTC P0072
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P0073
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit High Voltage
DTC P0074
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Circuit Intermittent

Signal P0072 P0073 P0073 P0071 or P0074
Low Reference - P0073 - P0071
The ambient air temperature sensor is located behind the grille. The engine control module (ECM) monitors the
ambient air temperature sensor utilizing a low reference circuit and signal circuit. The ECM monitors the
voltage drop across the sensor, which is inversely proportional to temperature. When the ambient air
temperature is cold, the resistance of the sensor is high. When the ambient air temperature is warm, the
resistance of the sensor is low. The ECM converts the voltage value to a temperature value. The ECM also
sends the temperature value to other control modules via serial data.

• The 12 V battery voltage is greater than or equal to 10.2 V.
112 of 137
P0071
During the first 20 s of run time after the 1 hour soaking period, the difference between the outside air
temperature and the engine intake air temperature is greater than 30Â°C (86Â°F).
P0072
The ECM detects the sensor signal is more than 88Â°C (190Â°F).
P0073
The ECM detects the sensor signal is less than -40Â°C (-40Â°F).
P0074
The ECM detects an unrealistic signal variance.
• DTC P0071 - P0074 are type B DTCs.

• The DIC will display SERVICE A/C SYSTEM.
• The system operates using a default value.
The DTC will become history if the ECM no longer detects a malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
Following a Ambient Air Temperature Sensor disconnect or circuit fault, the temperature displayed in the
vehicle can take several ignition cycles to update to the current temperature. Driving the vehicle may also be
necessary.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
113 of 137
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool ECM Ambient Air Temperature parameter is between -40Â°C (-40Â°F) and +88Â°C
(+190Â°F) and changes with air temperature changes.
If not between -40Â°C (-40Â°F) and +88Â°C (+190Â°F) or changes with air temperature
changes
Go to next step: If between -40Â°C (-40Â°F) and +88Â°C (+190Â°F) and changes with air
temperature changes
3. Perform the ECM Ambient Air Temperature Calculation Reset special function with the scan tool
4. Verify the scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is within five degrees of actual ambient air
temperature.
If not within five degrees of actual ambient air temperature
Go to next step: If within five degrees of actual ambient air temperature

5. All OK.

1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B9
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal B (or 2) and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
4. Verify the scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is less than -39Â°C (-38Â°F).
114 of 137
If -39Â°C (-38Â°F) or greater
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal A (or 1) and ground.
Go to next step: If less than -39Â°C (-38Â°F)
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal A (or 1) and the low reference circuit
terminal B (or 2).
6. Verify the scan tool Ambient Air Temperature parameter is greater than 88Â°C (190Â°F).
If 88Â°C (190Â°F) or less
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire and disconnect the harness connectors at the
K20 Engine Control Module, ignition ON.
Go to next step: If warmer than 88Â°C (190Â°F)
7. Connect the component: B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
If the DTC sets
Test or replace the component: B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor

10. All OK.
Component Testing
Static Test
1. Place the B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor in a stable, temperature-controlled area for at least 10
minutes, then measure the resistance between sensor signal terminal A (or 1) and the low reference circuit
terminal B (or 2).
2. Compare the readings with the Ambient Air Temperature Sensor Resistance

3. All OK.
115 of 137
Repair Instructions

SPEEDOMETER AND/OR ODOMETER MALFUNCTION

The instrument cluster displays the engine coolant temperature, fuel level, vehicle speed and the engine speed
based on the information from the engine control module (ECM). The ECM sends information via serial data to
the body control module (BCM). The BCM then sends the information via serial data to the instrument cluster
to display the engine coolant temperature, fuel level, the engine speed, the vehicle speed and the distance
travelled, either in kilometers or miles, based on the vehicle requirements. The instrument cluster will display
dashes when its VIN does not match the VIN received from the BCM.
Diagnostic Aids
If the VIN mismatch is corrected the odometer will once again be displayed in the instrument cluster. If the
vehicle is driven for a calibrated distance with a VIN mismatch, it will cause the instrument cluster odometer to
enter into an error mode and lock itself. When this occurs the dashes will remain on the display even after
correcting the VIN mismatch. The vehicle odometer status data display on the scan tool can be used to identify
a locked odometer. The only way to unlock the instrument cluster (clear the dashes from the display) is to
perform an SPS programming event. Failure to follow the diagnostic and programming procedures may result in
either an improper odometer value or a module replacement.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
116 of 137
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify no DTC is set.
If any DTC is set
Diagnose DTCs first. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

3. If applicable, verify the speedometer sweeps from low to high position when performing the Instrument
Cluster Gauge Sweep with the scan tool.
If speedometer does not sweep
Go to next step: If speedometer sweeps properly

4. Verify the speedometer gauge value matches the scan tool Vehicle Speed parameter while driving the
vehicle.
If the values do not match
Go to next step: If the speedometer value matches the scan tool parameter
5. Verify the odometer display and the displayed distance counts up while driving the vehicle.
If the odometer displays only "----" (dashes)
If the odometer display does not count up
Go to next step: If speedometer sweeps and displays the correct value, and the odometer
display counts up
6. All OK.
NOTE: • Circuit/System Verification must be performed before proceeding with

• If there are multiple modules not original to the vehicle and they are used
or incorrectly configured service parts, SPS may not be able to proper
117 of 137
read or recover the vehicle odometer value. Follow government rules and
documentation (including vehicle identification) regarding
inaccurate/unknown odometer values.
Correcting VIN mismatch: Instrument Cluster is Showing "----" (Dashes), odometer is still unlocked

2. Verify the scan tool Odometer Lock Status parameter is Unlocked (or Inactive).
If the reading is Locked (or Active)
Refer to correcting VIN mismatch - odometer locked.
Go to next step: If the reading is Unlocked (or Inactive)

3. Verify the scan tool BCM VIN parameter matches the vehicle's VIN placard.
If the VIN does not match
Reprogram the BCM, then proceed to Step 3.
Go to next step: If the VIN matches

4. Verify the scan tool Instrument Cluster Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) parameter matches the
vehicle's VIN placard.
Reprogram the instrument cluster. Then proceed with step 4.

5. Verify the instrument cluster is displaying the correct value.
If the instrument cluster is still displaying "----" (dashes)
Go to next step: If the instrument cluster is displaying the correct value

6. All OK.
Correcting VIN mismatch: Instrument Cluster is Showing "----" (Dashes), odometer is locked

2. Verify the scan tool Odometer Lock Status parameter is Locked (or Active).
If the reading is Unlocked (or Inactive)
Refer to Correcting VIN mismatch - odometer unlocked.
Go to next step: If the reading is Locked (or Active)

3. Verify the scan tool Instrument Cluster Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) parameter matches the
vehicle's VIN placard.
Reprogram the Instrument Cluster. Then proceed with step 3.
118 of 137
4. Perform the BCM setup procedure in SPS.
5. Verify the instrument cluster is displaying the correct value.
If the instrument cluster is still displaying "----" (dashes)
Go to next step: If instrument cluster is displaying the correct value

6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for instrument cluster, BCM or ECM replacement, programming, and setup.
TACHOMETER INACCURATE OR INOPERATIVE (WITH LTG OR LYX)

DTC Descriptor
DTC P0654
DTC P06ED
DTC B06EE
Short to Short to
High Resistance
119 of 137

match.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
function.
120 of 137

Engine Data List.

4. All OK.


ignition ON.
Repair Instructions
TACHOMETER INACCURATE OR INOPERATIVE (WITH LVL, LH7, OR LWW)

121 of 137
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0654
DTC P06ED
DTC B06EE
Short to Short to
High Resistance
operating range.

match.
122 of 137
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
function.

Engine Data List.

4. All OK.
123 of 137

ON.
Repair Instructions
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE CALCULATION RESET (WITH AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR WIRED TO ECM)
Check - Vehicle
Description
If equipped, This procedure resets the control module learned values of the component/system: B9 Ambient Air
Temperature Sensor Hardwired: K20 Engine Control Module
When to Perform the Procedure
NOTE: Failure to perform this procedure may result in poor system performance, DTCs
being set, or customer dissatisfaction. Not all ECMs have the Ambient Air
124 of 137
Temperature Calculation Reset function available in the scan tool. If not present
in the scan tool, a reset procedure in not necessary.
Perform this procedure when the following component has been serviced: B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
or K20 Engine Control Module or Battery - Replaced
Performing the Ambient Air Temperature Calculation Reset can aid in reducing the amount of time needed to
attain an accurate temperature display, but driving the vehicle may still be necessary.
Conditions for Running the Procedure
Engine = Off
Ignition = Run/Crank
Scan Tool Reference
With Scan Tool

2. Select: Module Diagnostics
3. Select: Engine Control Module
4. Select: Configuration/Reset Functions
5. Select: Reset Functions
6. Select: Ambient Air Temperature Calculation Reset
7. Follow the instructions on the scan tool.
Repair Instructions
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
125 of 137
Front Bumper Fascia Removal and Installation
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Procedure
1 1. Squeeze the tabs on the ambient air temperature sensor, and push ambient air
temperature sensor back out of the radiator air side baffle.
HEAD-UP DISPLAY SWITCH REPLACEMENT

Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Replacement
Head-Up Display Switch
1 Procedure
HEAD-UP DISPLAY REPLACEMENT
126 of 137
Instrument Panel Upper Trim Panel Replacement
Head-Up Display Bolt [4x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Head-Up Display
Procedure
2 1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
References
HEAD-UP DISPLAY BRACKET REPLACEMENT
127 of 137
Head-Up Display Replacement
Head-Up Display Bracket Bolt [3x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Head-Up Display Bracket
2 Procedure
Disconnect and reposition harness as necessary.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REPLACEMENT
128 of 137
Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate Replacement
Instrument Cluster Bolt [4x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Instrument Cluster
Procedure
References

AUDIBLE WARNINGS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The audible warnings alert the driver of a system concern or a critical vehicle condition. If equipped with an
serial data communicating audio amplifier, the audio amplifier generates the audible warnings through the
speakers. If not equipped with an audio amplifier, the radio generates the audible warnings through the
speakers. The radio or audio amplifier receives audible warning requests via serial data. If the radio or audio
amplifier receives multiple audible warning requests, the warning with the highest priority sounds first.
Different audible warnings may sound with a different frequency or a different chime pattern, depending on the
system or module making the request. The chime volume may be selectable through vehicle personalization.
Audible Warnings or Chimes
The following is a list of common audible warnings or chimes. For additional chimes or complete system
description, refer to the appropriate system's Description and Operation or the vehicle owner's manual.
• Driver Seat Belt Reminder - If the vehicle is started and the seat belt is unbuckled, the BCM requests the
radio or audio amplifier sound a chime to indicated that the belt is unbuckled. This is accompanied by a
flashing driver seat belt indicator on the instrument cluster. If the belt remains unbuckled, the chime cycle
may continue multiple times if the vehicle is driven and the indicator will remain on solid.
• Passenger Seat Belt Reminder - If the passenger presence system determines that their is an occupant in
the passenger seat and the vehicle is started with the passenger seat belt unbuckled, the BCM requests the
radio or audio amplifier sound a chime to indicated that the belt is unbuckled. This is accompanied by a
flashing passenger seat belt indicator. If the belt remains unbuckled, the chime cycle may continue
multiple times if the vehicle is driven and the indicator will remain on solid. If an object is placed on the
passenger seat, the passenger presence system may interpret this as a passenger occupying the seat.
Because the passenger seat belt is unbuckled, the passenger seat belt reminder chime will sound. To
129 of 137
correct this, remove the object from the passenger seat.
• Exterior Lamps On Warning - If the exterior lamps are left on after the ignition is turned off and the
driver door is opened, the BCM will request the radio or audio amplifier sound a chime as an indicator
that the exterior lamps are on.
• Electric Parking Brake (if equipped) - If the electric parking brake switch is pressed while the vehicle is
in motion, the parking brake control module will request the radio or audio amplifier sound a chime. To
release the parking brake, the brake pedal must be pressed when the electric parking brake switch is
pressed. If the brake pedal is not pressed, the parking brake control module will request the radio or audio
amplifier sound a chime. A message will also appear on the driver information center.
• Delayed Locking - If the keyless entry transmitter is not in the vehicle and the door lock switch is pressed
with the driver door open, the BCM will request the radio or audio amplifier sound a chime three times to
indicate that the vehicle has entered a delayed locking state. The doors will automatically lock five
seconds after the last door is closed.
• Object Detection - The object detection system sends various chime requests to the radio or audio
amplifier during normal operation.
Additional Warnings
The following warnings have an associated instrument cluster indicator or driver information center message:
• Turn Signal Indicators - The radio or audio amplifier activates the audible warning as requested by the
BCM.
• Vehicle Overspeed Message - The radio or audio amplifier activates the audible warning as requested by
the BCM.
• Fuel Level Low Message - The radio or audio amplifier activates the audible warning as requested by the
BCM.
• Oil Pressure Indicator - The radio or audio amplifier activates the audible warning as requested by the
BCM.
• Tire Pressure Low Indicator - The radio or audio amplifier activates the audible warning as requested by
the BCM.
• Antilock Brake Indicator - The radio or audio amplifier activates the audible warning as requested by the
electronic brake control module.
• Engine Cooling System Messages - The radio or audio amplifier activates the audible warning as
requested by the engine control module.
• Transmission Messages - The radio or audio amplifier activates the audible warning as requested by the
transmission control module.
Backup Alarm (with 8S3)
When transmission placed in reverse, the Body Control Module (BCM) activates the KR61 Trailer Backup
Lamps Relay which supplies 12V to the reverse lamps and the Backup Alarm simultaneously.
DRIVER INFORMATION CENTER (DIC) DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The driver information center is located in the lower middle portion of the instrument cluster, between the
speedometer and the tachometer. The driver information center displays information about the vehicle and
allows the operator to access applications. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected.
The driver information center is made up of three zones. The left zone is a list of the applications that can be
130 of 137
displayed. The right zone contains choices to customize what information is displayed for the respective
application chosen. In the middle is the interactive application display zone. The application display zone
allows access to the navigation application, audio application, phone application, or settings applications. The
information display zone contains multiple pages that display vehicle information. The compass and PRNDL
are displayed at all times in the lower portion of the display zone.
The driver information center can also be configured with several different themes. Changing the theme is
accomplished using the infotainment system faceplate settings page. The chosen theme is used for both the
faceplate and the driver information center displays.
HEAD-UP DISPLAY DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The head-up display projects an image on the windshield that is viewed from the driver seat. Information that is
relevant to what the drive is currently doing is displayed, as well as any safety-critical information as it is
happening.
The components of the head-up display are:
• Head-Up Display
• Instrument Cluster
• Head-Up Display Switch
Head-Up Display
diagnosis capacity. Head-up display DTCs are reported through the instrument cluster.
On some models, the head-up display image rotation is also adjustable in the DIC customizations using the
steering wheel controls.
Instrument Cluster
The instrument cluster sends the image information to the head-up display via a discrete video cable. The image
sent to the head-up display is closely related to the information currently being displayed on the instrument
cluster or driver information center. For example, if an incoming phone call is displayed in the cluster, this
information will be displayed on the head-up display. If a navigation alert is shown in the cluster, then a turn-
by-turn alert will display on the head-up display. When the operator interacts with the instrument cluster using
the steering wheel mounted driver information center switch, the head-up display also responds to the
interaction. If the operator dismisses the navigation alert on the instrument cluster, it is also removed from the
head-up display.
Head-Up Display Switch
131 of 137
ladder.
Head-Up Display Operation
In normal operation, the operator may select from three different display configurations. These display
configurations provide the operator with different information, with the vehicle speed being the primary item,
along with the following standard indicators:
• Turn signal indicators

• High beam indicator
• Lane departure warning indicator (if equipped)
• Vehicle detected ahead indicator (if equipped)
• Adaptive cruise control on indicator (if equipped)
Standard/Speed Configuration
The head-up display projects only the vehicle speed. Additionally, the outside air temperature, compass, and
time may also be displayed.
Audio Configuration
The head-up display will project the current audio information when listening to the audio system and the active
phone information if the operator is on a phone call.
Navigation Configuration
The head-up display will project navigation information. If a current route is being followed, turn by turn
instructions and arrows will be displayed. If no route is programed, the compass heading is displayed.
Performance Configuration
The head-up display will project RPM and PRNDL information.
Adaptive Cruise Control Configuration (if equipped)
The head-up display will project the selected following distance when adaptive cruise control is active.
INDICATOR/WARNING MESSAGE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

INDICATOR LIGHT ON
Refer to the OWNER'S MANUAL for the descriptions and explanations of all indicator lights.
For diagnosis and repair information related to an indicator light refer to the System Diagnosis and the
Description of Operation that the message relates to.
MESSAGE DISPLAYED
Refer to the OWNER'S MANUAL for descriptions and explanations of all messages displayed.
For diagnosis and repair information related to a displayed message refer to the System Diagnosis and the
Description of Operation that the message relates to.
132 of 137
CHANGE TIMING BELT MESSAGE (without LWN/LIH)
The Instrument Cluster monitors the odometer mileage to determine when timing belt (if equipped) replacement
may be necessary. After the vehicle has accumulated approximately 100, 000 miles (160, 000 kilometers), the
Instrument Cluster may display the CHANGE TIMING BELT message. After the engine timing belt has been
replaced, reset the CHANGE TIMING BELT message by locating and removing the fuses that supply power to
the Instrument Cluster for two minutes.
CHANGE TIMING BELT MESSAGE (LWN)
The Instrument Cluster monitors the odometer mileage to determine when timing belt replacement may be
necessary. After the vehicle has accumulated approximately 100, 000 miles (160, 000 kilometers), the
Instrument Cluster may display the CHANGE TIMING BELT message. After the engine timing belt has been
replaced, reset the CHANGE TIMING BELT message by performing the Instrument Cluster control function
Timing Belt Life Reset , using the scan tool.
CHANGE TIMING BELT MESSAGE (LIH)
The Instrument Cluster monitors the odometer mileage to determine when timing belt replacement may be
necessary. After the vehicle has accumulated 150, 000 miles (240, 000 kilometers), the Instrument Cluster may
display the CHANGE TIMING BELT message. After the engine timing belt and oil pump drive belts have been
replaced, reset the CHANGE TIMING BELT message by performing the Instrument Cluster control function
Timing Belt Life Reset , using the scan tool.
BRAKES OVERHEATED
The Electronic Brake Control Module monitors brake usage and compares it to an internal thermal model to
determine if the brakes could become overheated. If the Electronic Brake Control Module determines the brakes
pads have exceeded a desirable temperature based on the thermal model, it sends a serial data message to the
Instrument Cluster to display the BRAKES OVERHEATED message. The message remains displayed until the
estimated temperature returns to a desirable range.
Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator
The Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator (if equipped) is located on the center console and indicates the
current transmission shift lever position. The Transmission Shift Lever Position Indicator receives power and
ground and is controlled by the Body Control Module (BCM) via serial data. The Transmission Control Module
determines transmission shift lever position based on signals from the Transmission Internal Mode Switch and
sends the shift lever position information to the BCM via serial data.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Instrument Cluster (with RPO UDC)
The instrument cluster is a multifunction module that provides the vehicle operator with information that is
critical to vehicle operation, such as vehicle speed, engine RPM, oil pressure, battery voltage, fuel level, and
coolant temperature, using analog gauges. The instrument cluster also provides the operator with operational
warnings and message through various indicators and the driver information center. The driver information
center is a one color multifunction display that is located in the instrument cluster. The driver information center
has several screens that can be scrolled through by twisting the trip reset stem.
Instrument Cluster (with RPO UDD)
133 of 137
The instrument cluster is a multifunction module that provides the vehicle operator with information that is
critical to vehicle operation, such as vehicle speed, engine RPM, oil pressure, battery voltage, fuel level, and
coolant temperature, using analog gauges. The instrument cluster also provides the operator with operational
warnings and message through various indicators and the driver information center. The driver information
center is a full color multifunction display that is located in the instrument cluster. The driver information center
is also tightly integrated with the vehicle's infotainment system and is highly reconfigurable.
Instrument Cluster (with RPO UHS)
The instrument cluster is a multifunction module that provides the vehicle operator with information such as
vehicle speed and engine RPM using analog gauges. Oil pressure, battery voltage, fuel level, and coolant
temperature can also be displayed using an interactive LCD display. The instrument cluster is highly
reconfigurable, with four different themes available for selection. The instrument cluster also provides the
operator with operational warnings and message through various indicators and the driver information center.
Because the instrument cluster is an LCD display, driver information center elements are located in various
zones of the display, depending on how the instrument panel is configured.

AT Automatic Transmission
MT Manual Transmission
P16 P16 Instrument Cluster
P9 P9 Driver Information Center Display
S78 S78 Turn Signal/Multifunction Switch
B9 B9 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
B14A B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor
T12 T12 Automatic Transmission Assembly
B115 B115 Vehicle Speed Sensor
K20 K20 Engine Control Module
B46 B46 Fuel Level Sensor
A7 A7 Fuel Pump and Level Sensor Assembly
B37 B37 Engine Oil Pressure Switch
B46B B46B Fuel Level Sensor - Secondary
B34 B34 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
134 of 137
Indicators and Warning Messages
Refer to Indicator/Warning Message Description and Operation.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge (if equipped)
The instrument cluster displays the engine coolant temperature as determined by the engine control module
(ECM). The ECM sends the engine coolant temperature information via serial data to the body control module
(BCM). The BCM then sends the information via a serial data to the instrument cluster to display the engine
coolant temperature.
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge (if equipped)
The IPC displays the engine oil pressure as determined by the ECM. The engine oil pressure sensor changes
voltage based on the engine oil pressure. The engine oil pressure sensor is a 3-wire sensor comprising of the
signal circuit, the low reference circuit and the 5 V reference circuit. The ECM supplies 5 V to the engine oil
pressure sensor via the 5 V reference circuit and provides ground via the low reference circuit. The ECM
monitors the signal circuit of the engine oil pressure sensor to determine if the engine oil pressure sensor
voltage is within the normal operating range of approximately 1 - 4 V. When the engine oil pressure is high, the
engine oil pressure sensor voltage is high and the ECM senses a high signal voltage. When the engine oil
pressure is low, the engine oil pressure sensor voltage is low and the ECM senses a low signal voltage. The
ECM sends the engine oil pressure information to the instrument cluster via serial data. The instrument cluster
will illuminate or display the engine oil pressure indicator when the engine oil pressure is low. The engine oil
pressure gauge defaults to 0 kPa (0 psi) if:
• The ECM detects a malfunction in the engine oil pressure sensor signal circuit.
• The IPC detects a loss of serial data communication with the ECM.
Fuel Level Gauge
The K20 Engine Control Module monitors the fuel level sensor. When the fuel tank is full, the resistances of the
fuel level sensor is low and the control module senses a low signal voltage on the signal circuit of the fuel level
sensor. When the fuel tank is empty, the resistance of the fuel level sensor is high and the control module senses
a high signal voltage. The K20 Engine Control Module converts the signal input to a fuel level value. The ECM
sends the fuel level signal via serial data to the BCM. The BCM then sends the information via serial data to the
instrument cluster to display the fuel level.
The instrument cluster displays the fuel level based on the information from the ECM. If the fuel level falls
under 11% the instrument cluster will illuminate the low fuel level indicator. The fuel gauge defaults to empty
if:
• The ECM detects a malfunction in the fuel level sensor circuit.

• The BCM detects a loss of serial data communications with the ECM.
• The instrument cluster detects a loss of serial data communications with the BCM.
Speedometer
The instrument cluster displays the vehicle speed based on the information from the ECM. The ECM sends the
vehicle speed information via serial data to the BCM. The BCM then sends the vehicle speed information via
serial data to the instrument cluster to display the vehicle speed.
Odometer
135 of 137
The instrument cluster displays the vehicle odometer in the driver information center. The ECM send a distance
rolling count message via serial data to the body control module (BCM). The BCM uses this information to
calculate the vehicle odometer. This odometer value is then sent to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster
does not calculate the odometer.
The odometer value is stored in multiple modules. The instrument cluster is a secondary storage module for the
odometer, while the BCM is the primary storage and accumulator.
In addition to storing the odometer value for the vehicle, the instrument cluster and the BCM store the VIN.
Software checks are performed to ensure these modules, and their stored odometer information, can not be
move or transferred between different vehicles.
Tachometer
The instrument cluster displays the engine speed based on the information from the ECM. The ECM converts
the data from the crankshaft position sensor to an engine revolution signal. The ECM sends the engine speed
information via serial data to the BCM. The BCM then sends the information via serial data to the instrument
cluster to display the engine speed.
Compass (with UE1)
If equipped with this option, the vehicle compass information is gathered through the Telematics
Communication Interface Control Module. The Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
determines vehicle direction and communicates this with the BCM through serial data. The BCM sends the
compass information to the Instrument Cluster via serial data, where it is displayed.
Compass (without UE1)
If equipped with this option, the vehicle compass information is gathered through the Compass Module. The
Compass Module determines vehicle direction and communicates this with the BCM through serial data. The
BCM sends the compass information to the instrument cluster via serial data, where it is displayed.
Outside Air Temperature
The outside air temperature can be accessed through the driver information center Trip/Fuel switch function.
The driver information center shows the outside air temperature as a damped value. The time and rate of the
temperature update is based on an algorithm in the instrument cluster or ECM. Factors such as last temperature
reading, current temperature reading, length of time the vehicle was off, current vehicle speed, and the distance
driven effect when the displayed temperature is updated. To get the vehicle to display the most accurate
temperature faster, drive the vehicle. Constant moving traffic will update the display to the correct temperature
more quickly than stop and go traffic.
Driver Information Center Display
The driver information center is located in the lower middle portion of the instrument cluster, between the
speedometer and the tachometer. The driver information center displays information about the vehicle and
allows the operator to access applications. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected.
The driver information center is made up of three zones. The left zone is a list of the applications that can be
displayed. The right zone contains choices to customize what information is displayed for the respective
application chosen. In the middle is the interactive application display zone. The application display zone
allows access to the navigation application, audio application, phone application, or settings applications. The
136 of 137
information display zone contains multiple pages that display vehicle information. The compass and PRNDL
are displayed at all times in the lower portion of the display zone.
The driver information center can also be configured with several different themes. Changing the theme is
accomplished using the infotainment system faceplate settings page. The chosen theme is used for both the
faceplate and the driver information center displays.
137 of 137
Driver Assistance Systems - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Active Safety Control Module Bracket Nut 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Forward Collision Alert Display Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Forward Range Radar Bracket Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Forward Range Radar Sensor Nut 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Side Object Sensing Alert Module Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)

DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS WIRING SCHEMATICS
Lane Keep Assist (UHX-UGN) and Forward Collision Alert (UEU)
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (UFG) and Side Object Detection (UKC)
1 of 120
Safety Alert Seat (UKC)
Collision Avoidance - Module Power, Ground, and Serial Data (UGN)
2 of 120
Collision Avoidance - Controls and Camera (UGN)
Collision Avoidance - Front Short Range Radars (UGN)
Collision Avoidance - Rear Short and Long Range Radars (UGN)
3 of 120
DTC B094B OR B094C
DTC Descriptor
DTC B094C 32
Right Side Object Detection Control Module - General Memory Malfunction
DTC B094C 39
Right Side Object Detection Control Module - Internal Malfunction

Left Side Object Detection
B094C 39 B094C 39 B094C 39 -
Indicator Control Circuit
Left Side Object Detection
- B094C 39 - -
Indicator Ground Circuit
Right Side Object Detection
B094C 39 B094C 39 B094C 39 -
Indicator Control Circuit
Right Side Object Detection
- B094C 39 - -
Indicator Ground Circuit
4 of 120
The side blind zone alert system sensors are located behind the rear fascia and detect and report objects on
either side of the vehicle, within a specified blind zone. The system alerts with a visual indicator placed on each
side rear view mirror, to the presence of objects that may not be visible in the inside rearview mirror and outside
rearview mirrors. When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone while driving forward, independent
if passing a vehicle or being passed, an amber warning symbol will light up in the appropriate outside mirror.
This indicates that it may be unsafe to change lanes. If the driver then activates the turn signal, the amber
warning symbol starts flashing and a chime sounds to give an extra warning not to change lanes. The side object
sensor module provides the voltage to the outside rearview mirror to illuminate the side blind zone alert symbol
on the mirror.
Side blind zone alert is active from speeds of 10 km/h (6.2 MPH) up to 140 km/h (87 MPH). Driving faster
deactivates the system, indicated by low lighting warning symbols in the mirrors. Driving under this speed
again will turn off the warning symbols. If then a vehicle is detected in blind zone, the warning symbols will
illuminate normally on the appropriate side. When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays will
briefly come on to indicate that the system is operating.
Ignition ON.
The control module has detected a malfunction.
• The Side Blind Zone and Rear Cross Traffic Alert Systems will not function.
• The DIC will display "Service Side Detection System".

• A history DTC clears when the control module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50,
without a repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
If DTC B094B 58 or B094C 58 is set, check for anything that can interfere with the radar signal. Verify area in
front of radar is clean of mud, ice, snow, etc. Also verify the fascia panels in front of the radar are damage-free
and not obstructed by any add-on accessories such as emblems, etc.
Schematic Reference
Driver Assistance Systems Wiring Schematics
5 of 120
Side Blind Zone Alert Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that B094B 45 or B094C 45 is not set.
If DTC is set
1. Program the appropriate B218 Side Object Sensor Module.
If the DTC sets, replace the appropriate B218 Side Object Sensor Module.
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC is not set
3. Verify that B094B 00, B094C 00, B094B 08, B094C 08, B094B 54 or B094C 54 is not set.
If DTC is set
Replace the appropriate B218 Side Object Sensor Module.

4. Verify that B094B 58 or B094C 58 is not set.
If DTC is set
Verify the area in front of the sensor is clean, unobstructed, and damage-free.
If not clean, unobstructed, and damage-free, clean or repair as necessary.

If clean, unobstructed, and damage-free, replace the appropriate B218 Side Object Sensor Module.
5. Verify the side blind zone alert system indicators located in the outside rearview mirrors briefly turn ON
and then OFF during the system self test when ignition is turned ON.
If the side blind zone alert system indicators do not briefly turn ON and OFF
Go to next step: If both side blind zone alert indicators briefly turn ON and OFF
6. All OK.
6 of 120
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate A9
Outside Rearview Mirror. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
• X510 - Driver Door Harness to Outside Rearview Mirror
• X610 - Passenger Door Harness to Outside Rearview Mirror
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON, connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 15 and the ground circuit terminal 5.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Object Detection Alert Indicators On and
Off with a scan tool.
If the test lamp is always OFF
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
If the test lamp is always ON
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right,
ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.
If less than 1 V, replace the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
5. Test or replace the appropriate A9 Outside Rearview Mirror Glass.
Repair Instructions
Outside Rearview Mirror Glass Replacement
DTC B094D OR B094E

7 of 120
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B094D
Left Side Object Detection Indicator Circuit
DTC B094E
Right Side Object Detection Indicator Circuit

Control - Terminal 7 @ B218L
Side Object Sensor Module - B094D 02 1 1 -
Left
Control - Terminal 7 @ B218R
Side Object Sensor Module - B094E 02 1 1 -
Right
Ground - Terminal 5 X510 @
A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - - 1 - -
Driver
A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - - 1 - -
Passenger
1. Side Object Sensor - Malfunction
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Side Blind Zone Alert Description and Operation
The assembly has several functions:
• Side Blind Zone Alert

B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left
• Rear Cross Traffic Audible Alert
• Rear Cross Traffic Visual Alert

B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right
8 of 120
Ignition = On
Control Circuit = Short to Ground
• B218 Side Object Sensor Module = Inoperative

• Driver Information Display = Display "Service Side Detection System" Message
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Perform the scan tool control function: Right Side Object Detection Indicator - Active & Inactive
Verify the component activates: Right Side Object Detection Indicator = On and Off
9 of 120

3. Perform the scan tool control function: Left Side Object Detection Indicator - Active & Inactive
Verify the component activates: Left Side Object Detection Indicator = On and Off

4. All OK.

2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector:
• X510 @ A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver
• X610 @ A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 5 & Ground
1. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 5 @ Component harness
& Ground circuit terminal
If less than 2 ohms - Repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.
NOTE: Make sure to use the EL-35616-210 test lamp or equivalent when
performing the following test. The object detection indicators are LEDs
and do not require a large amount of current to illuminate. As such, the
following test will not illuminate a high impedance test lamp.
4. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 15 & Ground
5. Perform the appropriate scan tool control function:
• Right Side Object Detection Indicator - Active & Inactive
• Left Side Object Detection Indicator - Active & Inactive
6. Verify the test lamp turns On and Off.
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Test lamp
• B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left
• B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right
10 of 120
3. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 15 @ Component harness
& Control circuit terminal 7 @ Control module harness
4. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 15 @ Component
harness & Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: B218 Side Object Sensor Module
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 15 @ Component harness &
Ground
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: B218 Side Object Sensor Module
NOTE: Within each A9 Outside Rearview Mirror is a wiring harness that is part of
the mirror assembly. Connector repairs for this component harness are
not supported and wiring repair may be difficult due to accessibility
restrictions. Visually inspect the component wiring to ensure there is no
damage. If damage to the component harness is observed and repair is
not possible, it may be necessary to replace the appropriate A9 Outside
Rearview Mirror.
7. Test or replace the component: E17 Outside Rearview Mirror Glass
Repair Instructions
• Outside Rearview Mirror Glass Replacement

DTC B0987
DTC Descriptors
11 of 120
DTC B0987 01
Vehicle Direction Camera Indicator Circuit Short to Battery
DTC B0987 06
Vehicle Direction Camera Indicator Circuit Low Voltage/Open
DTC B0987 0B
Vehicle Direction Camera Indicator Circuit High Current

Lane Departure Warning Switch
B0987 06, 1 B0987 06, 1 - -
Indicator Ignition
Lane Departure Warning Switch B0987 01,
1 B0987 06, 1 -
Indicator Control B0987 0B
1. Lane Departure Warning Switch Indicator Malfunction
The lane departure warning is enabled and disabled through the lane departure warning switch. When enabled,
the Frontview Camera - Windshield will illuminate the indicator located in the switch. For the exact location of
the lane departure warning switch, refer to the Owner's Manual.
Ignition ON.
B0987 01
The Frontview Camera - Windshield detects a short to voltage in the control circuit.
B0987 06
The Frontview Camera - Windshield detects a short to ground or an open/high resistance in the control circuit.
B0987 0B
The Active Safety Control Module detects high current in the control circuit.
• Lane departure warning and forward collision alert features are disabled
• The driver information center displays "Service Front Camera".
12 of 120
The condition for setting the DTC is no longer present.
Schematic Reference
Forward Collision Alert Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B356A

3. Verify the lane departure warning indicator turns ON and OFF while pressing and releasing the lane
departure warning switch.
If the indicator does not turn ON and OFF
Go to next step: If the indictor turns ON and OFF

4. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF, and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48A Multifunction
Switch - Instrument Panel, ignition ON.
13 of 120
NOTE: Verify interior lighting dimming is turned all the way up.
2. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the BCM PWM control circuit terminal 10 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse. If the fuse is OK,
replace K9 Body Control Module.
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield.
3. Connect a test lamp between control circuit terminal 9 and B+.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Lane Departure Warning Indicator Status
parameter On and Off with a scan tool.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield,
ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield.
If infinite resistance, replace the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield.
5. Test or replace the S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument Panel.
Repair Instructions
Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair
• Hazard Warning Switch Replacement

14 of 120
DTC B1008
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1008
Calibration Data
Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode - B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield - Calibration Data = Invalid
The B174W Frontview Camera Module performs a self-test to verify if a critical malfunction exists within the
system. During the power-up mode, the Frontview Camera Module checks for a valid calibration data set.
Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
• B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield - Calibration Data = Invalid

• The frontview camera module has been replaced and programmed, but not calibrated.
• Lane Departure Warning = Disabled

• Forward Collision Alert = Disabled
• Driver Information Display - Service Front Camera/Service Lane Departure Warning
• B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield - All functions = Disabled
• A current DTC will clear when the diagnostic runs and passes.
• A history DTC will clear after 50 consecutive malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Diagnostic Aids
• This DTC will be set as current while performing calibration, and will remain set as current until
calibration can be completed
• The frontview camera will not calibrate if not properly installed or mounted.
15 of 120
Schematic Reference
• Forward Collision Alert Description and Operation

• Lane Departure Warning Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: This DTC can be set as a history DTC without affecting the operation of the
component: B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield

2. Verify DTC B101E 42 is not set.
If DTC B101E 42 is set
Perform the following procedure/test: B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield: Programming

and Setup

If DTC B1008 is set
1. Perform the following procedure/test: Front View Camera Module Learn.
If the DTC sets - Replace the component: B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield
3. All OK.
4. All OK.
16 of 120
Repair Instructions
DTC B1011
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1011 00
System Disabled Information Stored Malfunction
The frontview camera module permanently monitors the serial data bus for error messages. When a malfunction
is detected by the frontview camera module, the system will be disabled and an error message will be stored in
the frontview camera module disable history buffer which is used to store information about the front camera
features that are disabled.
• Ignition ON
• Frontview camera enabled
The frontview camera module detects a malfunction.
• The frontview camera module is disabled.

• The frontview camera module disable history buffer stores information why the system was disabled.
Diagnostic Aids
The frontview camera module disable history buffers are used to store information about the frontview camera
module features that are disabled. The buffers will only update if the disable condition changes.
Example: If the data received from the steering wheel angle sensor is Invalid across many ignition cycles then it
will only appear in 1 history buffer and not all history buffers. If this condition is the current reason why the
frontview camera module is disabled then it will be set in frontview camera module disable history buffer 1. If a
17 of 120
new reason occurs, such as vehicle speed validity is invalid, then the invalid steering wheel angle sensor fault
will shift into disable history buffer 2 and vehicle speed validity invalid will be in disable history buffer 1. Since
there are only 4 disable history buffers, the invalid steering wheel angle sensor will age out if 4 other disable
reasons occur since the last invalid steering wheel angle sensor event occurred. Frontview camera module
disable history buffer 1 contains the current reason that one of the frontview camera module features is disabled.
The frontview camera module disable history buffers can display the following values:
• Lane Departure Warning Indicator Malfunction

• Lane Departure Warning Switch Malfunction
• Camera Obstructed
• Accelerator Pedal Position Out of Range
• Driven Wheel Speed Signal Invalid
• Non-Driven Wheel Speed Signal Invalid
• Brake Pedal Moderate Travel Signal Invalid
• Brake Pedal Initial Travel Position Achieved
• Lost Communication with Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module
• Invalid Data Received From Steering Wheel Angle Sensor Module
• Forward Collision Alert Switch Malfunction
• Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Sensor Performance
• Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Sensor Performance
• Transmission Gear Engaged
• Acceleration Sensor Longitudinal Signal
• Invalid Data Received From Yaw Rate Sensor Module
• Power Mode Controlled by Backup Device
• System Power Mode
• Overvoltage
• Undervoltage
• Undefined
Schematic Reference
Component Connector End Views - Index
18 of 120
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: Do not replace B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield for this DTC. DTC
B1011 is an information DTC.
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify no other DTC is set except for DTC B1011.
Diagnose those first. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .
NOTE: When referring to Frontview Camera Disable History, some items such as
Non-Driven Wheel Speed Signal Invalid and Driven Wheel Speed Signal
Invalid may routinely be stored without B1011 being set. If B1011 has not
set, disregard any information stored in the buffers as it is not indicative of
a problem.
3. Refer to Diagnostic Aids and Frontview Camera Disable History for what caused B1011 to set. Diagnose
the system that set the malfunction.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for control module programming and setup
DTC B1015
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1015
19 of 120
Vehicle Identification Number Information
When the ignition is turned On, the control module receives the vehicle identification number (VIN) from the
K9 Body Control Module.
The control module will compare the VIN received to the VIN stored in memory.
Ignition On
The VIN stored in the control module and the VIN received via serial data from another control module are
different.
• Forward Collision Alert = Disabled

• Lane Departure Warning = Disabled
• B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield = Inoperative
• K124 Active Safety Control Module - If equipped = Inoperative
• Driver Information Center Display - Service Front Camera/Service Lane Departure Warning
A current DTC will clear when the diagnostic runs and passes.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
20 of 120
Scan Tool Reference

If the DTC is set
1. Program the control module: B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield or K124 Active Safety
Control Module
3. Verify DTC B1015 is not set. If the DTC is set
If the DTC is set
Replace the appropriate component: B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield or K124 Active
Safety Control Module

4. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B101D (FRONTVIEW CAMERA MODULE OR FRONTVIEW CAMERA - WINDSHIELD)

DTC Descriptor
DTC B101D
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List
The internal fault detection is handled within the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield. The symptom byte
21 of 120
Ignition ON.
DTC B101D 34, B101D 35, B101D 36, B101D 39
The B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield has detected an internal hardware malfunction
DTC B101D 3C
The B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield has detected a software malfunction
• Lane departure warning and/or lane keep assist is disabled

• A service message is displayed on the driver information center.

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify that DTC B101D 3C is not set as current.
22 of 120
If DTC B101D 3C is set as current
1. Program the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield.
3. Verify that DTC B101D 3C is not set as current.
If DTC B101D 3C is set as current, replace the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield.
Go to next step: If DTC B101D 3C is not set as current
4. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC B101D 3C is not set as current
2. Verify that DTC B101D 34, B101D 35, B101D 36, or B101D 39 is not set as current.
If DTC B101D 34, B101D 35, B101D 36, or B101D 39 is set as current
Replace the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield.
Go to next step: If DTC B101D 34, B101D 35, B101D 36, or B101D 39 is not set as current
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield replacement, programming, and
setup
DTC B172E OR B172F

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B172E
Driver Seat Cushion Left Rear Haptic Movement
DTC B172F
Driver Seat Cushion Right Rear Haptic Movement

Control - Terminal 4 @ K40D B172E 01, B172E
Seat Memory Control Module - B172E 02 B172E 01 -
02
23 of 120
Driver
Control - Terminal 5 X1 @
B172F 01, B172F
K40D Seat Memory Control B172F 02 B172F 01 -
02
Module - Driver
Ground - Terminal 2 @ P45LR
B172E 01, B172E
Seat Haptic Movement Motor - - - -
02
Driver Left Rear
Ground - Terminal 2 @ P45RR
B172F 01, B172F
Seat Haptic Movement Motor - - - -
02
Driver Right Rear
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Safety Alert Seat Description and Operation
Circuit Description
The output circuit is switched to 12 V to activate the
Control
component.
Ground Chassis Ground
Depending on the version, the control module can support
different functions:
• Driver Seat Left Rear Haptic Movement Motor Control

K40D Seat Memory Control Module - • Driver Seat Right Rear Haptic Movement Motor Control
Driver • Rear Cross Traffic Haptic Alert
The control module also reads various switches and sensors

and makes their values available via serial data.
The video camera and the control module are a single
serviceable component.
This camera delivers live video of what is in front of the
vehicle. The video can be used for several functions, like lane
K109 Frontview Camera Module
departure warning, lane keep assist, road sign recognition and
more.
24 of 120
• Brake Assist
• Automatic Collision Preparation
{If equipped} K124 Active Safety
Control Module • Rear Emergency Braking
• Distance Sensing Cruise Control Function

P45LR Seat Haptic Movement Motor -
Driver Left Rear & P45RR Seat Haptic An electric DC motor.
Movement Motor - Driver Right Rear
Ignition On
B172E 01
Control module K40D detects: Driver Seat Left Rear Haptic Movement Motor Control = Short to Voltage
B172E 02
Control module K40D detects: Driver Seat Left Rear Haptic Movement Motor Control = Short to Ground
B172F 01
Control module K40D detects: Driver Seat Right Rear Haptic Movement Motor Control = Short to Voltage
B172F 02
Control module K40D detects: Driver Seat Right Rear Haptic Movement Motor Control = Short to Ground
• Seat Cushion Haptic Motors = Inoperative

• Driver Information Center Display - Service Driver Assist
Diagnostic Aids
Verify the function: Seat Cushion Haptic Motors Disabled by Driver Personalization
25 of 120
Schematic Reference
Safety Alert Seat Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Perform the scan tool function: Driver Seat Cushion Left Rear Haptic Movement & Driver Seat Cushion
Right Rear Haptic Movement - On and Off
Verify the component produces a vibration that can be heard and felt.
Go to next step: If the component activates

3. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X5 @ K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver
• Control circuit terminal 4 & Ground
If 1 V or greater
26 of 120

6. Test for 27 to 51 ohms between the test points:
If less than 27 ohms
Replace the appropriate component: P45LR Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Left Rear or
P45RR Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Right Rear
If greater than 51 ohms

1. Test or inspect for the following: Ground Connection - Clean & Secure
If not correct
Repair as necessary
Go to next step: If correct

2. Replace the appropriate component: P45LR Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Left Rear or
Go to next step: If between 21 and 57 ohms
7. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points:
• Control circuit terminal 4 & B+
• Control circuit terminal 5 & B+
8. Verify the component turns On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire: P45LR Seat
Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Left Rear or P45RR Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Right Rear
Replace the appropriate component: P45LR Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Left Rear or

10. Connect the electrical connector at all components.
12. Perform the scan tool function: Driver Seat Cushion Left Rear Haptic Movement & Driver Seat Cushion
Right Rear Haptic Movement - On and Off
Verify the component produces a vibration that can be heard and felt.
Replace the appropriate component: K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver
27 of 120
13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Front Seat Lane Departure Warning Actuator Replacement - P45LR Seat Haptic Movement Motor -
Driver Left Rear or P45RR Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Right Rear
DTC B1A04
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1A04
Frontview Camera Module - Signal Invalid
The K160 Brake System Control Module monitors data from the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield.
Ignition On
Ignition On
• All system that operate with input from the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield are disabled.
• A service message may be displayed on the driver information center.
The frontview camera module is successfully aligned.
Schematic Reference
• Antilock Brake System Wiring Schematics

• Driver Assistance Systems Wiring Schematics
28 of 120
• ABS Description and Operation

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify there are no DTCs set, except for DTC B1A04.

3. Verify DTC B1A04 is not set
If DTC B1A04 is set
Go to next step: If DTC B1A04 is not set

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B1A05
29 of 120
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1A05
Active Safety Control Module 1 - Signal Invalid
The K160 Brake System Control Module monitors data from the K124 Active Safety Control Module.
Ignition On
Ignition On
• All features that operate with input from the K124 Active Safety Control Module are disabled.
Schematic Reference
• Antilock Brake System Wiring Schematics

• Driver Assistance Systems Wiring Schematics
• ABS Description and Operation

• Active Safety System Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
30 of 120
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify there are no DTCs set, except for DTC B1A05.

3. Verify DTC B1A05 is not set
If DTC B1A05 is set
Replace the K124 Active Safety Control Module.
Go to next step: If DTC B1A05 is not set

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B356A
DTC Descriptors
DTC B356A
Vehicle Direction Warning Switch Circuit

Signal - Terminal 7 @ S48A
Multifunction Switch - Instrument B356A 02 1 1 -
Panel
Ground - Terminal 5 @ S48A
Multifunction Switch - Instrument - 1 - -
Panel
31 of 120
1. Lane Keep Assist Switch Malfunction
The lane keep assist system is controlled by the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield. Lane keep assist is
enabled and disabled through a switch located on the S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument Panel. When
enabled, the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield will illuminate the indicator located in the switch. The
switch is a normally open momentary switch. The B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield applies voltage to
the signal circuit. With the switch open (not pressed), voltage seen at the B174W Frontview Camera -
Windshield remains high. When the switch is closed (pressed), the signal circuit is pulled to ground and voltage
monitored by the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield is low.
When the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield is operating and can detect the lane markings, the B174W
Frontview Camera - Windshield will request via serial data communications that the green lane keep assist
indicator be illuminated on the P16 Instrument Cluster. As the vehicle approaches an indicated lane marking,
the lane keep assist indicator on the P16 Instrument Cluster will change to yellow and the vehicle will gently
steer back toward the center of the lane. If the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield detects that the vehicle
has crossed a lane marking without the turn signal being used, it will request that the instrument cluster flash the
yellow lane keep assist indicator. An audible warning may also sound three times or the haptic seat (if
equipped) may pulse when the yellow lane keep assist indicator is flashing. The driver can select between
audible or haptic alerts in the vehicle personalization menu. See the Owner's Manual for more detailed
information on vehicle personalization.
Ignition ON.
The B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield has detected a short to ground on the signal circuit for greater than
10 s.
• Lane keep assist is disabled.

• A service message is displayed on the driver information center.

Diagnostic Aids
Pressing and holding the lane keep assist switch for an extended length of time will cause this DTC to set.
Schematic Reference
32 of 120
Lane Keep Assist Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Vehicle Direction Warning Switch Status parameter changes between On and Off
while cycling the lane keep assist switch.
If the parameter does not change
Go to next step: If the parameter changes

3. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S48A Multifunction
Switch - Instrument Panel. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Vehicle Direction Warning Switch Status parameter is Off.
If not Off
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B174W Frontview Camera Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument Panel signal circuit
33 of 120
If infinite resistance, replace the B174W Frontview Camera Module.
Go to next step: If Off
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 7 and the ground circuit terminal 5.
6. Verify the scan tool Vehicle Direction Warning Switch Status parameter is On.
If not On
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect harness connector at the B174W Frontview Camera Module, ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument Panel signal circuit
Go to next step: If less than 1 V.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the B174W Frontview Camera Module.
Go to next step: If On
Repair Instructions
• Hazard Warning Switch Replacement - S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument Panel

DTC B390A
DTC Descriptor
DTC B390A
Short Range Object Sensor Performance
The radar sensor module - short range performs internal fault detection on itself.
The radar sensor module - short range continually runs the program to detect faults.
34 of 120
The radar sensor module - short range has detected an internal malfunction.
The control module will not function and the Active Safety System will be inoperative.

• A history DTC clears when the control module ignition cycle counter reaches the reset threshold of 50,
without a repeat of the malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
• If DTC B900A 58 is set, verify the interior and exterior fascia areas of the radar sensor modules - short
range are clean and free of mud, ice, snow, etc., as well as being damage-free and unobstructed by any
add-on accessories, such as emblems or stickers. Additionally, if the vehicle's engine is running in a
garage-type environment, objects in close proximity to the radar sensor modules - short range, such as a
hoist, can also create a condition that will erroneously set DTC B900A 58. If this condition occurs, it can
be corrected by driving the vehicle for 4.8-8.0 km (3 - 5 miles) at a speed greater than 9 km/h (6 mph) in
normal traffic conditions.
• The radar sensor modules - short range cannot be swapped from side to side once they have been
installed. DTC B390A 67 may set if a radar sensor module - short range is reinstalled on the incorrect
side of the vehicle.
• If DTC B390A 45 is set, it is most often due to the radar not learning the vehicle position correctly rather
than an indication of an actual Software programming issue. To correct, run or re-run the set-up function
within the programming tool.
Schematic Reference
Active Safety System Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
35 of 120
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC B390A 08 or DTC B390A 45 is not set.
If either DTC is set
1. Verify the DTC did not set immediately after replacement or programming of the B233 Radar
Sensor Module - Short Range.
If the DTC set immediately after replacement or programming, ensure both the programming
and set-up steps have been completed in SPS.
Go to next step: If the DTC did not set immediately after replacement or programming
2. Program the appropriate B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range. Make sure to perform both the
programming and set-ups steps in SPS.
3. Verify DTC B390A 08 or DTC B390A 45 is not set after programming and set-up.
If either DTC sets after programming, replace the appropriate B233 Radar Sensor Module -
Short Range.
4. All OK.
Go to next step: If both DTCs are not set
If the DTC is set
Replace the appropriate B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range.

If DTC is set
1. Verify the area in front of the appropriate B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range is clean,
unobstructed, and damage-free.
If not clean, unobstructed, and damage-free, clean or repair as necessary.
Go to next step: If clean, unobstructed, and damage-free
2. Clear DTCs.
3. Driver the vehicle 4.8-8.0 km (3 - 5 miles) at speeds greater than 9 km/h (6 mph) in normal traffic
conditions.
4. Verify the DTC does not reset.
If the DTC resets, replace the appropriate B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range.
Go to next step: If the DTC does not reset.
5. All OK.
If the DTC is set in more than one B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range
1. Verify none of the B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range have not been swapped side to side.
36 of 120
If any B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range have been swapped, return them to their
original position.
Go to next step: If none of the B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range have been swapped
2. Replace the appropriate B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range.
If the DTC is set in only one B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range
Replace the appropriate B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short Range.

6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B390C
DTC Descriptor
DTC B390C
Long Range Radar Sensor Module
After replacement, the radar sensor module - long range must complete an alignment procedure. The alignment
procedure can be completed by driving the vehicle for approximately 30 min.
• Module alignment procedure started.

• Vehicle operating on the road.
The radar sensor module - long range was unable to complete alignment process within approximately 30 min
of drive time.
• The radar sensor module - long range is disabled.

• Any systems that rely on data from the radar sensor module - long range are disabled.
37 of 120
The radar sensor module - long range is successfully aligned.
Diagnostic Aids
• The B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range must be securely mounted. Verify it is secured properly
in it's mount.
• The harness, or other obstructions should not pass in front of the B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long
Range
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC B390C is not set
If the DTC is set
1. Perform the Radar Sensor Module - Long Range Learn procedure.
2. Verify DTC B390C is not set after the calibration procedure has been completed.
If the DTC is set after calibration, replace the B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range.
Go to next step: If the DTC is not set after calibration
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC B390C 66 is not set
3. All OK.
38 of 120
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for radar sensor module - long range replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B390D
DTC Descriptor
DTC B390D
Frontview Camera Module
The frontview camera module has determined that it is not properly mounted.
Vehicle operating on the road.
The frontview camera module is improperly mounted.
• All system that operate with input from the frontview camera module are disabled.
Diagnostic Aids
• The frontview camera module must be securely mounted. Verify it is secured properly in it's bracket.
• The frontview camera module must have a clear field of vision to the road ahead. Check for anything that
may impair the frontview camera module's ability to clear see the area in front of the vehicle.
Schematic Reference
39 of 120
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify there are no DTCs set, except for DTC B390D.
NOTE: Before performing the calibration, verify that the B174W Frontview Camera
- Windshield will not have difficulty seeing lane markings in front of the
vehicle. If the view of the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield is
blocked with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, if the windshield is damaged,
or if weather limits visibility, such as while driving in fog, rain, or snow
conditions, the calibration procedure may not be able to be completed.
3. Calibrate the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield. Refer to Front View Camera Module Learn.
4. Verify DTC B390D is not set
If DTC B390D is set
Go to next step: If DTC B390D is not set

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC P15F6
40 of 120
DTC Descriptors
DTC P15F6
Front Object Detection Control Module Torque Request Signal Message Counter Incorrect
The active safety control module is constantly sending a serial data message to the engine control module
requesting engine speed or torque reduction. The engine control module sets DTC P15F6 when it detects a
discrepancy in the structure of the message causing the integrity of the message to be questioned. An
intermittent fault in the serial data circuits will cause the engine control module to set DTC P15F6.
Engine running.
The engine control module detects that the engine speed and torque modification messages from the active
safety control module are either corrupted or intermittently missing.
• The active safety control module sends a serial data message to display the appropriate indicator message
• The active safety control module features are unavailable.
• The condition for the DTC is no longer present.

• The engine control module clears the history DTC when a current DTC is not detected in 40 consecutive
drive cycles.
Schematic Reference
41 of 120
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: • DTC P15F6 is an informational DTC.

• Diagnose all other K20 Engine Control Module DTCs prior to DTC P15F6.
1. Verify there are no other K20 Engine Control Module or communication DTCs set.
If a DTC is set
Go to next step: If a DTC is not set

2. Complete the diagnosis by looking for an intermittent serial data circuit fault. Refer to Scan Tool Does
Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device .
If an intermittent serial data circuit fault is found
Repair as necessary.
Go to next step: If an intermittent serial circuit fault is not found

3. Clear DTCs and operate the vehicle in the conditions that the customer experienced.
4. Verify DTC P15F6 does not set.
If the DTC sets
Replace K124 Active Safety Control Module

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for active safety control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC P15F7
42 of 120
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P15F7
Rear Object Detection Control Module Torque Request Signal Message Counter Incorrect
• Front Parking Assist

K182 Parking Assist Control Module • Rear Parking Assist

The vehicle speed is greater than 1 km/h (1 MPH).
The engine control module detects that the engine speed and torque modification messages from the rear
parking assist control module are either corrupted or intermittently missing.
• The rear parking assist control module sends a serial data message to display the appropriate indicator
message
• The rear parking assist control module features are unavailable.
• The condition for the DTC is no longer present.

• The engine control module clears the history DTC when a current DTC is not detected in 40 consecutive
drive cycles.
Schematic Reference
43 of 120
Parking Assist Description and Operation (UD7) , or Parking Assist Description and Operation (UD5)
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: • DTC P15F7 is an informational DTC.

• Diagnose all other K20 Engine Control Module DTCs prior to DTC P15F7.
1. Verify there are no other K20 Engine Control Module or communication DTCs set.
If a DTC is set
Go to next step: If a DTC is not set

2. Complete the diagnosis by looking for an intermittent serial data circuit fault. Refer to Scan Tool Does
Not Communicate with High Speed GMLAN Device .
If an intermittent serial data circuit fault is found
Repair as necessary.
Go to next step: If an intermittent serial circuit fault is not found

3. Clear DTCs and operate the vehicle in the conditions that the customer experienced.
4. Verify DTC P15F7 does not set.
If the DTC sets
Replace the appropriate component: K182 Parking Assist Control Module

5. All OK.
44 of 120
Repair Instructions
SYMPTOMS - DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables:
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that
all of the following are true: before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that all of the following
are true:
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions:
• Lane Departure Warning Description and Operation
• Lane Keep Assist Description and Operation
• Cross Traffic Alert Description and Operation
• Side Blind Zone Alert Description and Operation
• Safety Alert Seat Description and Operation
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which may affect the operation of the system.
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which may
cause the symptom.
• Make sure the parking assist sensors located on the vehicle front and rear bumper are clear. Remove any
snow, mud or ice that is blocking the sensors.
Intermittent
Symptom List
• Seat Haptic Signal Motor Malfunction

• Forward Collision Alert System Malfunction (UGN with KSG Only), or Forward Collision Alert
System Malfunction
• Rear Cross Traffic Alert System Malfunction
• Side Blind Zone Alert System Malfunction
• Lane Departure Warning System Malfunction
• Lane Keep Assist System Malfunction
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL MALFUNCTION
45 of 120
Sensor External
Component Sensor Blocked Sensor Misaligned Interference
B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long
1 1, 3 1
Range
B174W Frontview Camera -
1, 2 - 1, 2
Windshield
1. Adaptive Cruise: Temporarily Unavailable or ACC TEMP UNAVAILABLE Message Displayed
2. Lane Departure Warning: Unavailable or Lane Keeping Assist: System Unavailable LKA
UNAVAILABLE or LDW UNAVAILABLE Message Displayed
3. Service Driver Assist Message Displayed
Adaptive Cruise Control Description and Operation
Diagnostic Aids
System Disabled possible reasons
• Switchable cruise control (if equipped): Verify the Adaptive Cruise Control is enabled by observing the
corresponding indicator and message in the Driver Information Display. Switch between ACC and
Regular Cruise Control by pressing and holding the Cancel switch
• B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range Mounting/Alignment: For (some) vehicles the "SERVICE
DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM" message can be displayed without a DTC being set, when the long range
radar gets misaligned. Inspect the long range radar for proper mounting/alignment. In most cases, a
mounting/alignment issue may be caused by a front end impact/collision that may or may not be obvious.
Physically check the Long Range Radar Module bracket for damage and make sure it is in alignment.
Place the vehicle on a level surface. Use an angle gauge/level to make sure the bracket is mounted 90
degrees (+/- 3 degrees). After the Long Range Radar Module alignment has been checked and/or
corrected, perform the Radar Sensor Module - Long Range Learn
• B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield Mounting: Inspect the front view camera sensor, on the
windshield near the inside rearview mirror, to make sure it is attached properly to the windshield.
Calibrate the front camera module after repair. Refer to B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield: Scan
Tool Information
• Visually inspect the vehicle for any aftermarket add on equipment like bug deflectors, windshield
tint/banners, grille emblems, push bars, license plates, etc. These items could block the radar / camera's
view. Question the customer to see if this concern started after the installation of the aftermarket
equipment. Remove any aftermarket items and retest system for proper operation.
• The radars and front camera are continuously monitoring for a blocked condition and if it determines its
ability to "see" clearly is compromised, the radar/camera may become unavailable. When this occurs, the
cruise will disengage and/or no cruise engagement with an "Adaptive Cruise: Temporarily Unavailable"
46 of 120
message. Since the radars cannot visually "see" they rely on a complex blockage detection algorithm to
predict blockage. Also, keep in mind that the front camera cannot see through objects or debris, so the
camera can become visibly blocked. It is important to understand that disabling the adaptive cruise
control, as a result of sensor blockage, is a normal function of the system and is intended to protect the
driver from compromised system performance. Blockage detection is needed because if the radars/camera
were/was truly blocked, the adaptive cruise control would not function properly.
• Foul weather: Foul weather such as snow, ice, heavy rain, road spray conditions may limit the sensors
ability to "see". Also, a buildup of mud, snow, frost, dirt, bugs, etc. on the windshield or front fascia can
cause a blockage. This buildup can also occur on the back side of the fascia between the radar and back of
fascia. One example, if the windshield has a buildup of frost/snow/ice which covers the front camera, the
system may detect a blockage and disable the cruise. After the defroster warms the windshield and melts
away the frost/snow/ice the system will become operational. This example may appear to be an
intermittent issue.
• If driving in 4WD HI range (if equipped), adaptive cruise control will be disabled, which is normal.
(Adaptive cruise control will function in Auto 4WD.)
• Dark Rural Areas: In very dark rural areas, the front view camera may detect blockage.
• Very High Ambient Temperatures: Very high ambient temperatures may affect camera operation.
• Barren Environments: As part of the blockage detection algorithm, the radar may conclude it is blocked if
the radar does not "see" anything over a period of time. This can happen when driving in very bare
environments, such as deserts and rural areas where there are no large objects to detect like other vehicles,
bridges, building, trees, signs, mail boxes, guard rails, etc. Below is an example photo of an area where
the radar may determine a blockage because there are no objects in the environment for the radar to "see".
In these cases, if the system does not detect an object within approximately 60 seconds or 1.2 miles (2
km) the cruise will be disengaged and a "ADAPTIVE CRUISE TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE"
message. If there were other vehicles on the road for the radar to detect there would not be any issues.
Schematic Reference
Adaptive Cruise Control Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
47 of 120
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify there are no other DTCs set and that there are no communication DTCs set in the vehicle.
If any DTC's are set
Go to next step: If no DTC's are set

3. Verify the Active Safety Control Module scan tool parameter Adaptive Cruise Control Inhibit History
Data 1-6 and Adaptive Cruise Control Disengage History Data 1-6 indicate no current malfunction. Refer
to K124 Active Safety Control Module: Scan Tool Information
Diagnose the system that sets the malfunction.

4. Verify the scan tool parameter: B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range - Long Range Radar Sensor
Module Misaligned - Angled Down = No
If the parameter does not display the following: Long Range Radar Sensor Module
Misaligned - Angled Down = No
Align the B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range and perform the Radar Sensor Module -
Long Range Learn
Go to next step: If the parameter displays the following: Long Range Radar Sensor Module
Misaligned - Angled Down = No
Module Misaligned - Angled Left = No
Misaligned - Angled Left = No
Long Range Learn
Misaligned - Angled Left = No
Module Misaligned - Angled Right = No
Misaligned - Angled Right = No
Long Range Learn
Misaligned - Angled Right = No
Module Misaligned - Angled Up = No
48 of 120
Misaligned - Angled Up = No
Long Range Learn
Misaligned - Angled Up = No
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield Calibration Status = Calibrated.
Refer to B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield: Scan Tool Information
Perform the following learn procedure: Front View Camera Module Learn

9. All OK.
Repair Instructions
SEAT HAPTIC SIGNAL MOTOR MALFUNCTION

The haptic seats, also known as Active Safety Seats, provide a vibration to alert the driver in certain
circumstances. There are two motors in the driver's seat cushion. Either the right or left motor can run or both
depending on the alert. The K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver provides the output voltage for the
motors. The K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver receives serial data requests from other modules to
activate the appropriate seat motors with the number of pulses requested. While the motors are activated, the
K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver checks for either shorts to voltage or shorts to ground. Due to the
nature of the PWM signal, if a motor circuit is open, it may be reported as either a short to voltage or short to
ground.
Diagnostic Aids
The infotainment personalization menu allows the user to set alerts to be either haptic through the seats or audio
beeps through the radio. Refer to the Owner's Manual to verify this setting.
Schematic Reference
49 of 120
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the P45LR Seat Haptic Signal Motor - Driver Left Rear turns on and off when commanding the
Driver Seat Cushion Left Rear Haptic Movement On and Off with a scan tool.
If the motor does not function
Go to next step: If the motor functions

3. Verify the P45RR Seat Haptic Signal Motor - Driver Right Rear turns on and off when commanding the
Driver Seat Cushion Right Rear Haptic Movement On and Off with a scan tool.

4. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K40D Seat Memory Control Module, ignition
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• Terminal 4 - P45RR Seat Haptic Signal Motor - Driver Right Rear
• Terminal 5 - P45LR Seat Haptic Signal Motor - Driver Left Rear
If 1 V or greater
50 of 120
3. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF.
4. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the appropriate control circuit terminal listed below and B+.
• Terminal 4 - P45RR Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Right Rear
• Terminal 5 - P45LR Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Left Rear
5. Verify the appropriate P45 Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver turns on and off.
If the P45 Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver does not turn on and off
1. Verify the circuit ground connection is clean and secure.
If the ground connector is not clean or secure, repair as necessary.
Go to next step: If the circuit ground connection is clean and secure
2. Replace the appropriate P45 Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver.
Go to next step: If the P45 Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver turn on and off
6. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver, ignition
ON.
7. Verify the P45LR Haptic Signal Motor - Driver Left Rear turns on and off when commanding the Driver
Seat Cushion Left Rear Haptic Movement On and Off with a scan tool.
Replace the K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver.

8. Verify the P45RR Haptic Signal Motor - Driver Right Rear turns on and off when commanding the Driver
Seat Cushion Right Rear Haptic Movement On and Off with a scan tool.
Replace the K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver.

9. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Front Seat Lane Departure Warning Actuator Replacement - seat haptic movement motor - driver
replacement.
FORWARD COLLISION ALERT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (UGN WITH KSG ONLY)

51 of 120
Data to K124 Active Safety 1 2 1 -
Control Module
1. No communication to any low speed GMLAN device
2. Service Front Camera message will be displayed to driver
The B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield performs a self-test to verify if a malfunction exists within the
system. During the power-up mode, the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield also checks for a valid
calibration data set. If a malfunction or invalid calibration data is detected within the system, the Service Front
Camera message will be displayed on the driver information center.
The Service Front Camera message is also displayed when the K124 Active Safety Control Module is not
communicating with the instrument cluster on the low speed GMLAN serial data bus.
Diagnostic Aids
Inspect the front view camera sensor, on the windshield near the inside rearview mirror, to make sure it is
attached properly to the windshield.
Visually inspect the vehicle for any aftermarket add on equipment like bug deflectors, windshield tint/banners,
grille emblems, push bars, license plates, etc. These items could block the camera's view. Question the customer
to see if this concern started after the installation of the aftermarket equipment. Remove any aftermarket items
and retest system for proper operation
Foul weather such as snow, ice, heavy rain, road spray conditions may limit the sensors ability to "see". Also, a
buildup of mud, snow, frost, dirt, bugs, etc. on the windshield can cause a blockage. One example, if the
windshield has a buildup of frost/snow/ice which covers the front camera, the system may detect a blockage.
After the defroster warms the windshield and melts away the frost/snow/ice the system will become operational.
In some instances, a "Forward Collision System Reduced" message or "Automatic Collision Prep Reduced"
message may be displayed on the driver information center. This is a normal result of forward automatic
braking being set to "Alert" instead of "Alert and Brake" in vehicle personalization. No correction is necessary;
this is normal operation. Discuss with the customer the operating characteristics of the vehicle personalization
settings and set forward automatic braking to "Alert and Brake" if desired.
Schematic Reference
52 of 120
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: Refer to Diagnostic Aids before performing Circuit/System Verification.
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that no DTCs are set.
If any DTC is set

3. Verify the Active Safety Control Module scan tool parameter Adaptive Cruise Control Disengage History
Data 1-6 Odometer value indicates less than 1 kilometer or mile. Refer to K124 Active Safety Control
Module: Scan Tool Information
If Odometer value indicates greater than 1 kilometer or mile
Perform a frontview camera learn. Refer to Front View Camera Module Learn
Go to next step: If Odometer value indicates 0 kilometers or miles

4. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 @ K124 Active Safety Control Module
5. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Serial Data circuit terminal 7 @ K124 Active Safety
Control Module & Serial Data circuit terminal 1 @ X84 Data Link Connector
Go to next step: Replace the component: K124 Active Safety Control Module
Repair Instructions
FORWARD COLLISION ALERT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

53 of 120

Forward Collision Alert
1 1 - -
Indicators Ignition
Forward Collision Alert Switch
P0580, P0592 P0592 P0593 -
Signal
3 3 3 -
Dimming Control
2 1 1 -
Indicators Control
- 1 - -
Indicators Ground
1. Forward Collision Alert Indicators inoperable
2. Forward Collision Alert Indicators on all the time
3. Forward Collision Alert Indicator dimming malfunction
The forward collision alert system is controlled by the frontview camera module mounted on the windshield.
The system is designed to detect vehicles directly ahead, within a distance of approximately 60 meters (197 ft).
The forward collision alert system operates at speeds above 3 km/h (2 mph). When the system detects a vehicle
in the path ahead, the green vehicle ahead alert indicator in the driver information center is illuminated. When
approaching another vehicle too rapidly, the collision alert symbol will flash and the radio will beep or the
haptic seat will pulse, depending on user configuration. The red collision alert display will stay continuously
illuminated if the vehicle ahead remains much too close. These actions are requested by the frontview camera
module via serial data. The forward collision alert switch is part of the left steering wheel controls and is used to
adjust the timing sensitivity of the front collision alert system.
Diagnostic Aids
Camera Mounting: Inspect the front view camera sensor, on the windshield near the inside rearview mirror, to
make sure it is attached properly to the windshield. Calibrate the front camera module after repair. Refer to
Front View Camera Module Learn
Certain factors will affect the operation of the forward collision alert system. Forward collision alert is intended
to detect vehicles. It is not intended to warn the driver of any objects that are not detected as a vehicle such as
pedestrians, animals, signs, guard rails, bridges, construction barrels or other stationary or slow moving objects.
In few cases the camera may inadvertently detect a vehicle that is not in the path ahead, or the system may
occasionally provide unrealistic alerts. This could occur with a turning vehicle ahead, guard rails, traffic signs,
or other stationary objects. This is normal operation, the vehicle does not need service. When the system is
operating properly, the green vehicle ahead alert indicator will illuminate on the vehicle direction display when
the system detects a vehicle in the path ahead. This indicates that all of the required operating conditions are
met. The green vehicle ahead alert indicator will not appear when the system is having difficulty seeing other
vehicles on the road. This can occur if the front view camera is blocked with mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, if the
54 of 120
windshield is damaged, or when weather limits visibility, such as while driving in fog, rain, or snow conditions.
This is normal operation, the vehicle does not need service.
Additionally, the Front View Camera Disable History can give useful hints about what affected the operation of
the forward collision alert system. For the Front View Camera Disable History, refer to DTC B1011.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: Refer to Diagnostic Aids before performing Circuit/System Verification.
1. Ignition ON.
If any DTC is set

3. Verify the scan tool Frontview Camera Disable History 1 - 4 parameters does not have a current
Malfunction. Refer to B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield: Scan Tool Information
If the parameter is Malfunction
55 of 120
Diagnose the system that set the malfunction.
Go to next step: If the parameter is Normal

4. Verify the forward collision alert indicators illuminate momentarily when turning ignition OFF and then
ON.
If the indicators do not illuminate
Refer to DTC B0987.
Go to next step: If the indicators illuminate

5. Verify the driver information center forward collision alert distance indicator toggles between far,
medium, near and off.
If the setting does not change
Refer to DTC B356A.
Go to next step: If the setting changes

6. Verify the area of the K109 Frontview Camera Module is not contaminated.
If contaminated
Clean the windshield
Go to next step: If not contaminated

7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for control module replacement, programming and setup.
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION


Side Object Sensor - Left Ground - U0232 - -
Side Object Sensor - Left B+ - U0232 - -
Side Object Sensor - Left
1 U0232 1 -
Communication (terminal 7)
Side Object Sensor - Left
1 U0233 1 Â
Communication (terminal 2)
56 of 120
Side Object Sensor - Right Ground
- U0233 1 -
(terminal 8)
Side Object Sensor - Right Ground
- U0233 1 Â
(terminal 3)
Side Object Sensor - Right B+ 1 U0233 - -
Side Object Sensor - Right
1 U0233 1 -
Communication
1. Rear Cross Traffic Alert Malfunction
The side object sensor modules are located on each side of the vehicle behind the rear fascia and are not directly
visible from outside the vehicle. The same sensors are also used for side blind zone alert. The sensors use radar
to determine the presence of objects near the back of the vehicle. When an object is detected in the rear cross
traffic zone, the module will send out a signal through serial data communication to turn on the visual icons and
also audio chime or haptic notification. Each sensor is supplied B+ and ground. The right sensor receives an
additional ground. Both sensors communicate independently on the serial data line. The serial data enters the
left sensor in a pass-thru configuration, that connects to the right sensor. The scan tool is able to individually
communicate with each sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
• The rear cross traffic alert system uses the same sensors as side blind zone alert so a malfunction may
affect either or both systems.
• The conditions for disabling the rear cross traffic alert system are captured by DTCs. The drivers
information center will display Service Side Detection System if one of the sensors has failed. A B101E
47 Electronic Control Unit Software VIN Not Programmed DTC in history will not affect sensor
operation and the module should not be replaced for this DTC.
• The rear cross traffic system can be disabled if any off the following occur:
The driver has selected the Off mode through vehicle personalization menus. The selected mode is
retained over ignition cycles. A driver information center message stating that the Rear Cross
Traffic System Alert Off shall be displayed.
There is a loss of serial data communication with a sensor or between modules.
• The side blind zone may be temporarily unavailable due to the following:
A blockage condition exists (i.e. mud/snow buildup in front of the sensor). A driver information
message "Side Detection System Unavailable" will be displayed. The side blind zone system
transitions back to the normal operating state when the blockage is removed. Bumper sticks, fascia
damage, labels, and heavy rain storms may also cause this condition. The blockage determination is
performed with the vehicle in a drive gear.
The rear cross traffic alert system will read the GPS latitude and longitude on the serial data bus
and calculate if the vehicle is within a Radio Astronomy zone. These zones are located in Europe
and Japan and require the sensors to be turned off. The "Side Detection System Unavailable"
message will be displayed to the driver when this occurs.
• The rear cross traffic alert system is designed to ignore stationary objects; however, the system may
occasionally detect pedestrians, shopping carts, or other objects. This is normal system operation and
does not require service.
57 of 120
• The rear cross traffic alert system may indicate an object if a trailer is attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle
or object is extending out to either side of the vehicle. This is normal operation and does not require
service.
Schematic Reference
Cross Traffic Alert Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that none of the following are set:
• Service Side Detection System message in DIC
• DTC U0232 or U0233
If the message is displayed or DTCs are set
1. Inspect the Side Object Sensor harness and module connectors for signs of corrosion.
If corrosion is found, replace the harness and both modules.
NOTE: Dielectric grease should be applied to the new components to

prevent future corrosion.
If no corrosion is found, continue with Circuit/System Verification.

Go to next step: If no message is displayed or no DTCs are set
3. Verify the scan tool can communicate with the left side object sensor.
If the scan tool can not communicate with the left side object sensor
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Left Side Object Sensor Malfunction.
58 of 120
Go to next step: If the scan tool can communicate with the left side object sensor
4. Verify the scan tool can communicate with the right side object sensor.
If the scan tool can not communicate with the right side object sensor
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Right Side Object Sensor Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the scan tool can communicate with the right side object sensor
5. Verify that the rear cross traffic indicators turn ON and then turn OFF when commanding the Rear Cross
Traffic Visual Alert Indicators ON and OFF with a scan tool.
If alert indicators do not turn ON and OFF
1. Verify the system is enabled.
If disabled, refer to diagnostic aids for cause of disable.
If enabled test or replace the display.
Go to next step: If indicators turn ON and OFF
6. Verify that the audible alert turns ON and then turn OFF when commanding the Rear Cross Traffic
Audible Alert ON and OFF with a scan tool.
If the audible alert does not turn ON and OFF
1. Verify the system is enabled.
If disabled, refer to diagnostic aids for cause of disable.
If enabled refer to audio system malfunction.
Go to next step: If audible alert turns ON and OFF
7. All OK.
Left Side Object Sensor Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power
down. Disconnect the harness connector at the B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between ground circuit terminal 7 and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition Off.
59 of 120
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left.
down.
5. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the serial data circuits end to end between the control module harness
connector terminal 2 and the DLC terminal 1.
If 2 Ω or greater

6. Replace B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left.
Right Side Object Sensor Malfunction
down. Disconnect the harness connector at the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the following ground circuit terminals and ground.
• Terminal 3
• Terminal 8
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
down.
60 of 120
5. Test for less than 2 Ω in each of the serial data circuits end to end between the control module harness
connector terminal 7 and the DLC terminal 1.
If 2 Ω or greater

6. Replace B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right.
Repair Instructions
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle

Control - Terminal 7 @ B218L
Side Object Sensor Module - B094D 02 1 1 -
Left
Control - Terminal 7 @ B218R
Side Object Sensor Module - B094E 02 1 1 -
Right
A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - - 1 - -
Driver
A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - - 1 - -
Passenger
1. Side Object Sensor - Malfunction
B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left • Side Blind Zone Alert
61 of 120

B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right
Diagnostic Aids
• Review the system description and operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions.
• The side blind zone system can be disabled if any off the following occur:
Disabled by Driver Personalization
There is a loss of serial data communication with a sensor or between modules.
• The side blind zone may be temporarily unavailable due to the following:
A blockage condition exists (i.e. mud/snow buildup in front of the sensor). A driver information
message "Side Detection System Unavailable" will be displayed. The side blind zone system
transitions back to the normal operating state when the blockage is removed. Bumper sticks, fascia
damage, labels, and heavy rain storms may also cause this condition. The blockage determination is
performed with the vehicle in a drive gear.
The side blind zone alert system will read the GPS latitude and longitude on the serial data bus and
calculate if the vehicle is within a Radio Astronomy zone. These zones are located in Europe and
Japan and require the sensors to be turned off. The "Side Detection System Unavailable" message
will be displayed to the driver when this occurs.
• Because the sensors are identical, they may be swapped from one side of the vehicle to the other in an
attempt to isolate a concern. Sensors should NOT be swapped from one vehicle to another.
• The side blind zone system is designed to ignore stationary objects; however, the system may
occasionally detect guard rails, signs, trees, shrubs, or other stationary objects as an object in the blind
zone. This is normal system operation and does not require service.
• The side blind zone system may indicate an object in the blind zone if a trailer is attached to the vehicle,
or a bicycle or object is extending out to either side of the vehicle. This is normal operation and does not
require service.
• Lane Change Alert (LCA) can be disabled in vehicle personalized settings, this will also disable the Side
Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) system. When disabled, the bulb check of the mirror indicators will also be
disabled. A driver information center message will be displayed at start up when the LCA system is
disabled. This feature must be enabled prior to trying to diagnose the system.
Schematic Reference
62 of 120
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Perform the scan tool control function: Right Side Object Detection Indicator - Active & Inactive
Verify the component activates: Right Side Object Detection Indicator = On and Off

3. Perform the scan tool control function: Left Side Object Detection Indicator - Active & Inactive
Verify the component activates: Left Side Object Detection Indicator = On and Off

4. All OK.

• X510 @ A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver
• X610 @ A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger
& Ground circuit terminal
63 of 120
NOTE: Make sure to use the EL-35616-210 test lamp or equivalent when
performing the following test. The object detection indicators are LEDs
and do not require a large amount of current to illuminate. As such, the
following test will not illuminate a high impedance test lamp.
4. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 15 & Ground
5. Perform the appropriate scan tool control function:
• Right Side Object Detection Indicator - Active & Inactive
• Left Side Object Detection Indicator - Active & Inactive
6. Verify the test lamp turns On and Off.
& Control circuit terminal 7 @ Control module harness
4. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 15 @ Component
harness & Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: B218 Side Object Sensor Module
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 15 @ Component harness &
Ground
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: B218 Side Object Sensor Module
NOTE: Within each A9 Outside Rearview Mirror is a wiring harness that is part of
the mirror assembly. Connector repairs for this component harness are
not supported and wiring repair may be difficult due to accessibility
restrictions. Visually inspect the component wiring to ensure there is no
64 of 120
damage. If damage to the component harness is observed and repair is
not possible, it may be necessary to replace the appropriate A9 Outside
Rearview Mirror.
7. Test or replace the component: E17 Outside Rearview Mirror Glass
Repair Instructions

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM MALFUNCTION


B356A 02 1 B356A 05 -
Signal
- 1 - -
Ground
2 2 - -
Indicator Ignition
Lane Departure Warning Switch B0987 06, B0987 B0987 01,
2 -
Indicator Control 0B B0987 0B
1. Lane departure warning switch malfunction.
2. Lane departure warning switch indicator malfunction.
The lane departure warning system is enabled and disabled through the lane departure switch. When enabled,
the lane departure warning indicator will illuminate.
For vehicles without UGN, the switch and indicator are connected to the frontview camera module. The
frontview camera module supplies a reference voltage to the lane departure switch. When the switch is pressed,
the signal circuit is grounded. When enabled, the frontview camera module will illuminate the indicator located
in the switch when lane departure warning system is enabled.
With UGN, the indicator and switch are connected to the active safety control module. The active safety control
module receives input from several modules including the Parking Assist Control Module to provide additional
features. The lane departure warning alerts and DTCs are from the frontview camera module with the exception
of the indicator DTCs which are sent by the active safety control module. There are no switch DTCs for
vehicles with the active safety control module.
65 of 120
When the system is operating and can detect the lane markings, the frontview camera module will request via
serial data communications that the instrument cluster illuminate the green lane departure warning symbol. If
the frontview camera module detects that the vehicle unintentionally crosses a lane marking without the turn
signal being used, the module will request the instrument cluster to flash the amber lane departure warning
indicator. An audible warning will also sound three times when the amber lane departure warning indicator in
the instrument cluster is flashing.
Diagnostic Aids
Certain factors will affect the operation of the lane departure warning system. When the system is operating
properly, the indicator will illuminate on the instrument cluster. This indicates that all of the required operating
conditions to permit lane departure warning have been met. The indicator will not appear when the system is
having difficulty seeing the lines on the road or if the view of the frontview camera is blocked with mud, dirt,
snow, ice, or slush, if the windshield is damaged, or when weather limits visibility, such as while driving in fog,
rain, or snow conditions. This is normal operation, the vehicle does not need service. Additionally, lane
departure warnings may occasionally occur in a properly operating vehicle due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in
the road, or other road imperfections. This is normal system operation and the vehicle does not require service.
The driver information center may also display Lane Departure System Unavailable due to the temporary
conditions listed above.
Additionally, the Frontview Camera Disable History can give useful hints about what affected the operation of
the lane departure warning system. For the Frontview Camera Disable History, refer to Control Module
References for scan tool information.
Schematic Reference
Lane Departure Warning Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
66 of 120
2. Verify that DTC B356A is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B356A.

3. Verify that DTC B0987 is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B0987.

4. Verify the scan tool Frontview Camera System Status parameter is Normal.
If the parameter is Undefined or Malfunction
Refer to Diagnostic Aids.
Go to next step: If the parameter is Normal

5. Verify the scan tool Lane Departure Warning Switch Status parameter changes between Active and
Inactive when pressing the lane departure warning switch.
If the parameter does not change between Active and Inactive
Refer to DTC B356A.
Go to next step: If the parameter changes between Active and Inactive

6. Verify the scan tool Lane Departure Warning Indicator turns ON and OFF when commanding the Lane
Departure Warning Indicator On and Off with a scan tool.
If the indicator does not turn on and off
Refer to DTC B0987.
Go to next step: If the indicator turns on and off

7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
LANE KEEP ASSIST SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
67 of 120
Control - Terminal 4 @ S70L
B0987 06, B0987 B0987 01,
Steering Wheel Controls Switch B0987 06, 1 -
0B B0987 0B
- Left
Control - Terminal 5 X1 @ K9
1. 1. 1. -
Body Control Module
1. Lane Departure Warning Indicator Malfunction
The assembly contains individual switches. Each function has
S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch -
its own switch. The switches are connected to a resistor ladder
Left
so that a specific resistance is generated for each switch.
The video camera and the control module are a single
serviceable component.
This camera delivers live video of what is in front of the
vehicle. The video can be used for several functions, like lane
B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield
departure warning, lane keep assist, road sign recognition and
more.
• Exterior Illumination
• Interior Illumination
K9 Body Control Module • Steering Wheel Controls
• Power Mode Control

Diagnostic Aids
Refer to: Scan Tool Information - Frontview Camera Disable History 1-4
For more information see: Forward Collision Alert Description and Operation
For more information see: Lane Keep Assist Description and Operation
This procedure is required when the following component has been repaired, replaced, removed, or serviced:
B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield - Perform the following action: Front View Camera Module Learn
Schematic Reference
68 of 120
Lane Departure Warning Description and Operation
Lane Keep Assist Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If any DTC is set
Go to next step: If no DTC is set

3. Verify the component turns On and Off: Lane Departure Warning Indicator
- Lane Departure Warning Switch
Refer to: DTC B0987

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
FRONT SEAT LANE DEPARTURE WARNING ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT
69 of 120
Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Front Seat Back Side Facing Seam Tape
1 Procedure
Using a heat gun, apply low heat to soften the adhesive for removal.
Front Seat Lane Departure Warning Actuator
Procedure
2
Feed the front seat lane departure warning actuator wiring harness through the front seat
cushion pad.
FORWARD RANGE RADAR BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Forward Range Radar Bracket Bolt [3x]
1
CAUTION:
70 of 120
Fastener
Caution
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Forward Range Radar Bracket
Procedure
2
FORWARD RANGE RADAR SENSOR REPLACEMENT

Forward Range Radar Sensor Nut [3x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
Forward Range Radar Sensor
2 Procedure
71 of 120
References
FRONT SHORT RANGE RADAR SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1 Short Range Radar Sensor Clip [2x]
Front Short Range Radar Sensor [2x]
Procedure

2. Release the tab retainers and remove.
References
REAR SHORT RANGE RADAR SENSOR REPLACEMENT
72 of 120
Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement
1 Short Range Radar Sensor Clip
Rear Short Range Radar Sensor
Procedure

2. Release the tab retainers and remove.
References .
IMAGE PROCESSING MODULE REPLACEMENT

73 of 120
Active Safety Control Module
Procedure

References
ACTIVE SAFETY CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Active Safety Control Module Bracket Nut [2x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
Active Safety Control Module Bracket
Procedure
2
FORWARD COLLISION ALERT DISPLAY REPLACEMENT
74 of 120
Instrument Panel Extension Replacement (UV6) , or Instrument Panel Extension Replacement
(UEU) , or Instrument Panel Extension Replacement (Base)
Forward Collision Alert Display Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
2 Forward Collision Alert Display
SIDE OBSTACLE DETECTION CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT

75 of 120
Side Object Sensing Alert Module Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Side Object Sensing Alert Module [2x]
Procedure

2. Slide the module out of the retaining bracket.
References
FRONT VIEW DRIVER INFORMATION CAMERA BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Windshield Multifunction Sensor Mount Bracket Cover Replacement
Front View Driver Information Camera Bracket
Procedure
1
1. Release the retaining tabs and slide the bracket upward to disengage pins. Gently pull
from windshield.
76 of 120
3. Ensure the inside of the windshield is clean before reinstalling the bracket.
NOTE:
Do Not
remove or
service the
sensor farm
pins.
FRONT VIEW CAMERA REPLACEMENT

WARNING:
While
operating,
electrical
control
modules can
produce heat
and become
hotter than
their
surroundings.
To prevent
burns allow
sufficient
time for the
module to
cool before
removal.
Preliminary Procedure Windshield Multifunction Sensor Mount Bracket Cover Replacement
77 of 120
Front View Camera
Procedure

References
FRONT VIEW CAMERA MODULE LEARN

Calibration (without UGN)
The calibration process for the front view camera system is necessary when a front view camera module is
replaced by a new one. This process is required anytime the module is removed from it's bracket, or the
windshield glass has been replaced, and the frontview camera module has been mounted again properly. Any
maintenance, repair, or part replacement that impacts the vehicle ride height will also require frontview
camera calibration. This process shall be completed within 3 - 5 minutes when the correct driving conditions
are met. If conditions are not met, the front view camera module shall continuously run the service point
calibration until successfully completed. This process shall work across ignition cycles and shall not be required
to be re-initialized at start up. If the Lane Departure Warning Switch is pressed during calibration, the indictor
will flash momentarily and then stay out - this is normal operation.
During this time the Lane Departure Warning amber indicator will illuminate.
To calibrate the front camera, operate the vehicle in the following conditions until the calibration is complete:
• Clean windshield.
• Avoid lane changes.
• Maintain vehicle speeds between 56 - 90 km/h (35 - 56 MPH).
• Ensure the road contains visible references (well defined lane markings, curbs, etc.).
Calibration Procedure
1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Place the transmission in Park (if applicable)
3. Install scan tool
4. Navigate to the module diagnostics menu
5. Select Frontview Camera Module
6. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu Item
7. Select the Frontview Camera Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
8. Drive the vehicle to complete calibration.
Once the procedure is complete, the amber indicator will turn off. Shortly after the green ready to assist light
should turn on as long as all conditions are met for normal operation and the system is left ON. The system is
then ready to assist.
78 of 120
Calibration (with UGN)
New modules must be SPS programmed prior to calibration, refer to Control Module References
The calibration process for the front view camera system is necessary when a front view camera module is
replaced by a new one. This process is required anytime the module is removed from it's bracket, or the
windshield glass has been replaced, and the frontview camera module has been mounted again properly. Any
maintenance, repair, or part replacement that impacts the vehicle ride height will also require frontview
camera calibration. This process shall be completed within 3 - 5 minutes when the correct driving conditions
are met. If conditions are not met, the front view camera module shall continuously run the service point
calibration until successfully completed. This process shall work across ignition cycles and shall not be required
to be re-initialized at start up. If the Lane Departure Warning Switch is pressed during calibration, the indictor
will flash momentarily and then stay out - this is normal operation.
NOTE: Calibration is not required if the existing module was reprogrammed. This
procedure only needs to be conducted if the module was replaced.
Once SPS programming is complete, it is necessary to initiate the calibration using a scantool. During this time
the "Service Driver Assist" service message will be displayed.
To calibrate the front camera, operate the vehicle in the following conditions until the calibration is complete:
• Clean windshield.
• Avoid lane changes.
• Maintain vehicle speeds between 56 - 90 km/h (35 - 56 MPH).
• Ensure the road contains visible references (well defined lane markings, curbs, etc.).
NOTE: It is necessary to have the scan tool connected during the entire process.
Do not back out of the screen or press any other buttons.

2. Place the transmission in Park (if applicable)
3. Install scan tool
4. Navigate to the module diagnostics menu
5. Select Frontview Camera Module
6. Select Configuration/Reset Functions menu Item
7. Select the Frontview Camera Learn procedure and follow the directions displayed on the screen.
8. Do not disconnect the scan tool, drive the vehicle to complete calibration.
Once the procedure is complete, the service message will turn off and normal operation will resume. Shortly
after the green ready to assist light should turn on as long as all conditions are met for normal operation. The
system is then ready to assist.
If Slow to Calibrate
The ideal calibration condition is driving on a 2 lane divided highway with markings on both sides of the lane.
One or more of the following conditions may increase the length of time required to complete the self-
79 of 120
calibration procedure:
• Heavy traffic
• Stop and go traffic
• Mountain roads
• Curves in roadway
• Poor contrast lane markings
• Botts' Dots type lane markings
• Operating the vehicle speed is greater than 90 km/h (56 MPH)
• Driving through snow or fog, or driving directly into the sun
• Camera not properly installed. Verify it is snapped into tabs and is secure. Refer to Front View Camera
Replacement.
No Calibration
Conditions that will prevent completion of the self-calibration procedure:
• Dirty windshield glass or obstruction on windshield

• Operating the vehicle with speed less than 56 km/h (35 MPH)
• No visible lane markings
• Severe weather where lane markings cannot be seen
• Camera not properly installed. Verify it is snapped into tabs and is secure. Refer to Front View Camera
Replacement.
RADAR SENSOR MODULE - LONG RANGE LEARN
NOTE: An ADAPTIVE CRUISE TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE message may be

displayed on the driver information center if this calibration procedure is
required. The B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range may have become
misaligned.
After replacing and programming the B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range, it is necessary to perform a
calibration procedure to align the radar. This is indicated by DTC B101E 4B being set as current. Calibration is
performed while driving the vehicle with the scan tool connected. Calibration is initialized using a scan tool and
the scan tool must remain connected until calibration is complete. During this time the SERVICE DRIVER
ASSIST message will be displayed on the driver information center. Once the procedure is complete, the
message will turn off and normal operation will resume.
Calibration is not required if the existing B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range was only programmed.
Calibration needs to be conducted if the B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range was replaced or removed
and re-secured.
If calibration is not successful, it could be due to improper driving environment, radar and bracket assembly
bent out of position, or incorrect radar mounting. A typical driving environment is usually sufficient to calibrate
the module within 10 - 30 minutes. Visually inspect for damaged, bent, or broken B233B Radar Sensor Module
- Long Range bracket. Brackets out of level more than 2 degrees will not calibrate or self-learn. Discuss with
the customer about vehicle history and possible past accident. Replace bracket if damaged.
80 of 120
1. Verify no other DTCs, except for DTC B101E 4B, are set.
Diagnose any other DTCs first. Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

2. Prior to driving the vehicle make sure the surface in front of the B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long
Range is clean. Also, verify the mounting area is not damaged and allows the B233B Radar Sensor
Module - Long Range to face the intended direction.
3. Prepare the scan tool to be mobile for Long Range Radar Calibration driving phase. The scan tool needs
to stay connected during the driving phase of the calibration.
4. Engine running.
NOTE: Once calibration has begun, do not back out of screen or press any other
buttons on the scan tool until the calibration is complete.
5. Select Long Range Radar Sensor Module Learn on the scan tool and follow any on-screen instructions.
The driver information center will display the SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST message during calibration.
6. Drive the vehicle within the following conditions for 10 - 30 minutes or until calibration is complete. The
SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST message will turn off when calibration is complete.
• Drive at speeds greater than 56 kph (35 mph)
• Minimize tight curves
• Avoid extreme acceleration or deceleration
• Follow one or multiple vehicles. (typical vehicle traffic is sufficient, but vehicles 30 m - 50 m (100
- 165 ft) away are most effective at decreasing the calibration time)
• Drive in an environment that has stationary objects on the side of the road (street signs, guard rails,
mail boxes, fences, etc.)
7. Verify proper calibration by observing that the SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST message turns off within 10 -
30 minutes of normal driving.
If the SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST message fails to turn off
1. Verify DTC B390C 66 is not set
If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B390C.

2. Refer to If Slow to Calibrate below and repeat the calibration procedure following recommended
operating conditions.
Go to next step: If the SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST message turns off
8. Drive at speeds greater than 40 kph (25 mph) and verify engagement of adaptive cruise control.
If adaptive cruise control will not engage
Check vehicle for DTCs and correct as required.
81 of 120
Go to next step: If adaptive cruise control engages
9. All OK.
If Slow to Calibrate
The ideal calibration condition is driving on a freeway or two lane road with medium traffic. One or more of the
following conditions may increase the length of time required to complete the self-calibration procedure:
• Visually inspect for damaged, bent, or broken Long Range Radar bracket. Brackets out of level more than
2 degrees will not calibrate or self-learn. Discuss with the customer about vehicle history and possible
past accident. Replace bracket if damaged.
• Heavy traffic - following too close behind vehicles for long periods (more than 40 min)
• Stop and go or very slow traffic
• Mountain roads
• Constant sharp curves in roadway
• No traffic - if no traffic is available, may need to add vehicle ahead to support calibration
• Limited or no stationary structures on side of the road - need structures such as street signs, guard rails,
mail boxes, parked cars, etc.
• Driving in tunnels

ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The active safety system is a comprehensive feature set designed to help a driver avoid collisions or reduce
crash damage while driving, backing, and parking. The K124 Active Safety Control Module is the primary
controller for the active safety system. The active safety control module communicates on multiple serial data
busses to share information with various control modules throughout the vehicle. The active safety control
module uses various sensors and control modules to monitor the vehicle surroundings and take deliberate action
to avoid collisions or reduce crash damage. The active safety system tightly integrates the forward collision
alert, adaptive cruise control, parking assist, and active emergency braking systems into a single cohesive
system.
The active safety control module communicates via serial data on the object detection bus with the B174W
Frontview Camera - Windshield or K109 Frontview Camera Module, B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long
Range, radar sensor module - short range left front, and radar sensor module - short range right front to create a
virtual fusion image of the area in front of the vehicle. The active safety control module observes an actual
visual image of the area directly ahead of the vehicle, within 60 m (197 ft), with the frontview camera. The
radar sensor module - long range is used to measure the distance to objects that are up to 200 m (656 ft) in front
the vehicle and the two radar sensor modules - short range are used to measure the distance to objects that are
within 30 m (98 ft) of the front of the vehicle. Within 60 m (197 ft) of the vehicle, all of these inputs are
combined to create a fusion image of the area in front of the vehicle. At up to 200 m (656 ft), the radar sensor
module - long range will detect and begin tracking objects immediately in front of the vehicle. Within 60 m
(197 ft), the frontview camera will confirm objects that have been detected by the radar sensor module - long
range. The two radar sensor modules - short range improve cut-in detection, which are objects that enter the
vehicle path from the side and are not necessarily detected by the frontview camera and radar sensor module -
long range, who's focus are those object directly in front of the vehicle.
The fusion image created by the active safety control module is used to detect collision risks and take action
82 of 120
based on the immediacy of the risk. The a collision risk exists, the active safety control module will alert the
driver using the forward collision alert system. This will provide the driver with a visual and audible or haptic
alert that a collision risk has been detected. If the driver does not take action to reduce the risk of collision, such
as changing lanes or applying the brakes, the intelligent brake assist system will pre-fill the brake hydraulic
system to reduce system response time and increase pressure when quickly applying the brakes. If a collision
risk is imminent, the active safety control module will enter automatic collision preparation, which will
automatically apply the brakes in an effort to mitigate the collision or reduce collision damage.
The active safety control module communicates with the steering wheel angle sensor and the multi-axis
acceleration sensor via serial data on the chassis expansion bus. These sensors are used to determine the
intended vehicle path. Using the steering data and vehicle acceleration data, the active safety control module
will determine where the vehicle will be traveling and focus attention on objects in this path. An example would
be a driver quickly changing lanes to avoid a collision. This would mitigate the collision risk in the previous
lane and the active safety control module would quickly transition to tracking objects for any collision risk in
the new lane based on intended vehicle path. The active safety control module also communicates with the
electronic brake control module to instigate the braking functions of intelligent brake assist and automatic
collision preparation.
At the rear of the vehicle, the active safety control module uses the radar sensor module - short range left rear,
radar sensor module - short range right rear, and the parking assist control module as part of the backing
warning system and the rear automatic braking system. Typical rear parking assist utilizes the parking assist
control module and the four ultrasonic rear parking assist sensors to detect object when reversing at speed of up
to 8 km/h (5 mph). The backing warning systems utilizes both the four ultrasonic rear parking assist sensors, as
well as the radar sensor module - short range left rear and radar sensor module - short range right to detect
object at speeds above 8 km/h (5 mph). The rear automatic braking system is intended to help avoid or reduce
the harm caused by backing crashes or prevent the vehicle from being from being reversed into an object if the
vehicle is already stopped.
The Active Safety System analyzes data from the various control modules and sensors listed below:
• K124 Active Safety Control Module

• B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield or K109 Frontview Camera Module
• B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range
• B233LF Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Left Front - If equipped
• B233RF Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Right Front - If equipped
• B233LR Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Left Rear - If equipped
• B233RR Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Right Rear - If equipped
• B233CR Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Rear Middle - If equipped
• K182 Parking Assist Control Module
• K17 Electronic Brake Control Module
The active safety control module analyzes data from various modules, sensors, and switches to provide
enhanced safety features. In addition to providing alerts, the active safety control module will provide driver
assistance through integrated brake assist, automatic collision preparation, rear emergency braking, and
adaptive cruise control. Inputs and outputs can either be connected directly to the active safety control module
83 of 120
or communicate though serial data. The active safety control module communicates on a dedicated object
detection bus, as well as the chassis expansion bus and low speed GMLAN.
Forward collision alert, lane departure warning, and park assist alerts can be user selected to either a haptic
signal utilizing the driver's haptic signal motor seat or using beeps through the audio system. This setting can be
found in the vehicle personalization menus. See the owner's manual for more detailed information on vehicle
personalization.
If there is a DTC set in any of the modules that the active safety control module uses as inputs, it will send a
"Service Driver Assist" to the instrument cluster to alert the driver of a problem with the system. No other
specific details are given unless the driver attempts to activate a specific system. For example if the driver
attempts to turn on lane departure warning, the instrument cluster will display "Lane Departure Unavailable"
and the indictor will flash and then go out. A scan tool must be used to read the DTCs that are causing the
malfunction to help find the problem. Some of the inputs to the active safety control module can affect forward
facing features, rear facing features, or all features. Systems to check to determine which area to focus are rear
park assist for rear features, and lane departure warning and adaptive cruise control for front features. If none of
the active safety system features are operative, there may be an issue with another module on the vehicle not
providing the proper data to the active safety control module. If all active safety control module features are
inoperative, check the Adaptive Cruise Control Inhibit History and Disengage History scan tool data for the
reason for the malfunction. Definitions of parameters and suggestions on what to look for can be found in K124
Active Safety Control Module: Scan Tool Information . Any item with a "Yes" was the reason why the
adaptive cruise control system was inoperative at that time. In some cases verifying the module is the correct
part number, has the latest version of software is necessary, and is calibrated properly.
• Active safety control module inputs:

Frontview Camera
Radar sensor module - long range
Radar sensor module - short range left front
Radar sensor module - short range right front
Radar sensor module - short range left rear
Radar sensor module - short range right rear
Parking assist control module
Multi-axis acceleration sensor
Steering wheel angle sensor
Wheel speed sensors
Forward collision alert switch
Lane departure warning switch
Parking assist switch
• Active safety control module outputs:
Body control module
Electronic brake control module
Engine control module
Instrument cluster
Head-up display
Memory seat module (safety alert seats)
84 of 120
Lane departure warning switch indicator
Parking assist switch indicator
Infotainment system
Frontview Camera
The frontview camera is located behind the windshield, looking out at the road ahead and detects lane markings
and objects directly ahead, within a distance of approximately 60 meters (197 ft). The frontview camera is used
for lane departure warning and forward collision alert systems. The frontview camera communicates with the
active safety control module via serial data on the object detection bus.
Using information from the frontview camera, the active safety control module will provide forward collision
alert and lane departure warning to the driver when appropriate. The alerts and warnings can be user-selected to
be audible through the audio system or haptic using the active safety seat.
Radar Sensor Module - Long Range
The radar sensor module - long range is located behind the front grille emblem and is used in the 30 - 200 m (98
- 656 ft) range. The radar sensor module - long range communicates with the active safety control module via
serial data on the object detection bus. In addition to the wiring harness ground, the module is grounded through
the mounting bracket.
Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Front
There are two radar sensor module - short range front located behind the front fascia that detect objects up to
approximately 30 meters (98 ft). The radar sensor modules - short range front communicate with the active
safety control module via serial data on the object detection bus.
Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Rear
There are two radar sensor modules - short range rear located behind the rear fascia that detect objects up to
approximately 30 meters (98 ft). The radar sensor modules - short range rear communicate with the active
safety control module via serial data on the object detection bus.
Parking Assist Control Module
The parking assist control module uses ultrasonic object sensors located in the fascias to provide distance
measurements to nearby objects. The park assist module sends rear object data to the active safety control
module via serial data.
Electronic Brake Control Module
The electronic brake control module performs the braking activities of the active safety system. When requested
by the active safety control module, the electronic brake control module will prepare or apply the brakes as
necessary in response to an imminent collision.
Active Safety System Operation
The forward collision alert system is a convenience feature of the active safety control module, frontview
camera, radar sensor module - long range, radar sensor module - short range left front, and radar sensor module
- short range right front that issues a warning to the driver when a potential collision risk exists. When the
85 of 120
system detects a vehicle in the path ahead, the green vehicle ahead indicator is illuminated on the instrument
cluster. If the vehicle ahead is being followed too closely, the vehicle ahead indicator will be amber. When
approaching another vehicle too rapidly, the collision alert symbol will flash in the head-up display. An audible
alert sound will simultaneously sound or the safety alert seat will provide haptic feedback. The visual alert
cannot be changed, but the driver can select between audible or haptic alerts in the vehicle personalization
menus. Refer to the vehicle owner's manual for more detailed information on vehicle personalization.
Forward collision alert does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. Forward
collision alert may not detect a vehicle ahead if the frontview camera is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the
windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit
visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition.
Keep the windshield, headlamps, and frontview camera area clean and in good repair.
Forward collision alert may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that
are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service.
Intelligent Brake Assist
Intelligent brake assist is designed to pre-fill the brake hydraulic system to reduce system response time and
increase pressure when quickly applying the brakes. Using the active safety control module, frontview camera,
radar sensor module - long range, radar sensor module - short range left front, and radar sensor module - short
range right front, the system monitors the approach speed and distance to a vehicle ahead. If the Intelligent
brake assist system determines a collision risk exists, it will begin preparations to the brake hydraulic system.
When active, minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement may occur and this should be considered normal.
Intelligent brake assist will resort to normal braking operation after an intelligent brake assist even has occurred
when the brake pedal is released.
Automatic Collision Preparation
Automatic collision preparation system uses the active safety control module, frontview camera, radar sensor
module - long range, radar sensor module - short range left front, and radar sensor module - short range right
front to determine if an imminent collision risk exists. If the brakes have not been applied, the system will
automatically apply the brakes in an effort to mitigate the collision or reduce collision damage. The system has
a detection range of approximately 60 m (197 ft) and will only function when a vehicle is detected, as indicated
by the green vehicle ahead indicator is illuminated on the instrument cluster.
Automatic collision preparation is not a substitute for normal vehicle braking and should not be relied on to
brake the vehicle. Automatic collision preparation may not detect a vehicle ahead if the frontview camera is
blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or
hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield
are not cleaned or in proper condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and frontview camera area clean and in
good repair.
Backing Warning System
The backing warning system utilized the active safety control module, radar sensor module - short range left
rear, radar sensor module - short range right rear, and the parking assist control module to warn of rear objects
when backing up at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Utilizing the ultrasonic rear object sensors, the parking
assist control module can only detect object at seeps up to 8 km/h (5 mph). By utilizing the active safety control
module and radar sensor modules - short range along with the parking assist control module and the rear object
sensors, object can be detected at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).
86 of 120
While reversing at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph), the backing warning system will alert the driver with an
audible alert or through haptic feedback from the safety alert seat when an object is first detected. If the system
detects a potential collision risk, a series of audible beeps or haptic feedback pulses will be provided, as well as
a quick pulse of the brakes.
Rear Automatic Braking
The rear automatic braking system is designed to help avoid or reduce the harm caused by backing crashes. If
the system detects the vehicle is backing too fast to avoid a collision, it may automatically brake hard to a stop.
Utilizing the active safety control module, radar sensor module - short range left rear, radar sensor module -
short range right rear, and the parking assist control module, rear automatic braking attempts to avoid imminent
collision by automatically braking the vehicle when traveling in reverse. In conjunction with the backing
warning system, if the driver does not respond to the audible and haptic alerts while reversing, the system will
automatically brake the vehicle to a stop.
Rear automatic braking also prevents the vehicle from backing into an object if the vehicle is stopped and
shifted to R. If the system detects an object immediately behind the vehicle while attempting to reverse from a
stop, the brakes will be applied.
Pressing the brake pedal after the vehicle comes to a stop will release the rear automatic braking. It may be
necessary to release the electronic parking brake. When it is safe to do so, pressing the accelerator pedal firmly
at any time will override the rear automatic braking. If rear automatic braking is active and there is no object
behind the vehicle, make sure there is no snow, ice, or debris on the rear object sensors.
Lane Departure Warning/Lane Keep Assist
The lane departure warning system is a convenience feature that utilizes the frontview camera and active safety
control module to determine if the vehicle has unintentionally crossed a lane marking and issue a warning. The
frontview camera is located behind the windshield, looking out at the road ahead and detecting any lane
markings. When the vehicle unintentionally leaves a detected lane, visual and audible or haptic alerts are given
to the driver. The visual alert cannot be changed, but the driver can select between audible or haptic alerts in the
vehicle personalization menus.
Refer to Lane Departure Warning Description and Operation for more information about the Lane
Departure Warning function.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The adaptive cruise control system is an enhanced cruise control system with the ability to sense and react to
forward traffic. Compared to the common cruise control system found on many vehicles, the main functional
enhancement of the adaptive cruise control system is the ability to detect the presence of a vehicle in the path of
the adaptive cruise control vehicle. Adaptive cruise control retains the existing cruise control feature that
controls the vehicle speed to the driver selected speed. However, adaptive cruise control allows a driver to set
and maintain a following distance to the preceding nearest vehicle in the path ahead. The active safety control
module controller calculates a follow speed limit to ensure an acceptable distance is maintained to the preceding
vehicle in front, should one be present. The adaptive cruise control system automatically adjusts the speed when
the vehicle comes up behind a slower travelling vehicle in front. The system applies limited automatic braking
and throttle control without driver input when necessary to maintain the set following distance. The preceding
vehicle's speed and acceleration along with the active cruise control vehicle speed and acceleration and the
distance between the two vehicles are factors used by the active safety control module controller to determine
the follow speed limit. The vehicle speeds up to the original driver selected set speed when the pathway
87 of 120
becomes clear without driver input.
The adaptive cruise control functionality depends on various modules on the vehicle to function and each
module performs a function that is critical to the proper operation of the adaptive cruise control system.
Adaptive cruise control will not operate if any components fail. Communication between modules is via serial
data. The following is a functional description of the active safety control module and the other associated
components:
• Active Safety Control Module

• Body Control Module
• Digital Map Module
• Engine Control Module
• Electronic Brake Control Module
• Transmission Control Module
• Instrument Cluster
• Cruise Control Switch
• Gap Switch
The active safety control module analyzes data from various modules, sensors, and switches to provide
enhanced safety features. In addition to enhanced safety features, the active safety control module provides the
adaptive cruise control system functionality. The active safety control module analyzes data from the long range
radar sensor module, front short range radar sensor modules, and frontview camera module to identify and
classify objects in the road environment. The system scans the road environment to detect targets within its
specified field of view. The active safety control module then sends throttle and/or brake commands to the
engine control module (ECM) and electronic brake control module (EBCM) via serial data in order to control
the vehicle acceleration/deceleration based on the data from the modules. The ECM and EBCM provide throttle
control and automatic braking needed for proper cruise speed adjustment. The following is a list of the active
safety control module functions pertaining to the adaptive cruise control functionality:
• The active safety control module processes the road environment to get data concerning any vehicle
ahead of the adaptive cruise control vehicle. Detection, parameter estimation, tracking, object
classification and diagnostics are the primary functions. When an object is detected, the controller
calculates the object range, range rate, acceleration and azimuth angle parameters.
• The active safety control module performs adaptive cruise control state processing automatically -
distance control or speed control. The adaptive cruise control operates in 2 possible states - cruise or
follow. The normal operating state is cruise, whereby the vehicle speed is controlled to match the driver
selected set speed. When a preceding forward target is identified, the adaptive cruise control system will
automatically transition into the follow speed state to provide proper lane spacing behind the target
vehicle in front. The preceding vehicle's speed and acceleration, with the adaptive cruise control vehicle
speed, acceleration and distance between the two vehicles will be used to determine the adaptive cruise
control follow speed limit. The adaptive cruise control follow speed limit will ensure that an acceptable
distance is maintained to the preceding vehicle.
• The active safety control module determines the follow speed limit for throttle control by the ECM.
• The active safety control module arbitrates the adaptive cruise control system brake and throttle control
between the EBCM and the ECM.
• The active safety control module requests brake light activation during automatic braking.
88 of 120
• The active safety control module provides operational feedback to the vehicle driver. The active safety
control module sends signals for telltales and messages to be displayed on the instrument cluster or driver
information center.
Body Control Module
The following are the adaptive cruise control System functions provided by the body control module (BCM):
• The BCM provides a translating gateway for the high speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
• The BCM reads all cruise control switches and the gap switch. The active safety control module monitors
a variety of user operated switches from the BCM switch status information sent via the GMLAN serial
data circuit.
• The BCM illuminates the brake light based on a GMLAN message from the active safety control module
during automatic braking.
• The BCM measures the brake pedal position and sends brake pedal travel status via GMLAN serial data
circuit to the ECM. The ECM disengages the adaptive cruise control system when the brake is applied by
the driver pressing the brake pedal.
• The BCM serves as a gateway to the instrument cluster and driver information center. The BCM will
generate visual warnings based on high speed GMLAN serial data messages from the active safety
control module.
Digital Map Module
The following are the adaptive cruise control System functions provided by the Digital Map Module:
• The Digital Map Module (DMM) is capable of determining vehicle position and localization and then
communicating navigational and predictive data
• The Digital Map Module provides information to the Cruise system that the vehicle is on an acceptable
freeway or highway for engaging the feature
• The Digital Map Module provides road information to the Cruise system about road characteristics, like
exits and merge areas that will alert the system to changing road conditions
The following are the adaptive cruise control system functions performed by the engine control module (ECM):
• The ECM provides the electronic throttle control to the adaptive cruise control System. The ECM is also
responsible for determining when a driver is overriding the adaptive cruise control throttle position by
pressing the accelerator pedal.
• The ECM processes the cruise control switch requests received via the GMLAN serial data circuit from
the BCM. Engaging and disengaging the adaptive cruise control system are functions performed by the
ECM.
• The ECM determines the driver selected vehicle speed. Unless the adaptive cruise control module
requests a lower vehicle speed, the ECM will control the vehicle speed to the driver selected set speed.
• The ECM allows automatic braking without disengaging the adaptive cruise control.
Electronic Brake Control Module
The following are the adaptive cruise control System functions performed by the electronic brake control
89 of 120
module (EBCM):
• The EBCM controls the operation of the Antilock Brake System.

• The EBCM provides automatic braking for the adaptive cruise control system. The active safety control
module will request vehicle deceleration via high speed GMLAN serial data circuit.
• The EBCM determines when the driver - applied brake pressure is active. The EBCM will communicate
this status via the GMLAN serial data circuit to the BCM.
• The EBCM releases vehicle automatic braking when there is a throttle override by the driver pressing the
accelerator.
• The EBCM predicts brake temperatures. Due to automatic braking, the brake system may overheat. When
the brakes are overheated, the EBCM requests the adaptive cruise control System to be temporarily shut
down by the ECM until the brakes cool to a normal operating temperature.
Transmission Control Module
The transmission control module (TCM) provides a down shift to protect the brakes. When the TCM detects
some driver braking activity or adaptive cruise control automatic braking activity, the TCM down shifts the
vehicle transmission to increase engine braking. This helps reduce braking activity, extend brake pad life and
reduce brake system overheating.
Instrument Cluster
The driver information center is a part of the instrument cluster and displays the adaptive cruise control system
warning messages. The active safety control module requests messages to be displayed on the driver
information center by sending a GMLAN request to the BCM. The BCM sends a GMLAN serial data request to
the instrument cluster demanding the display of the warning message. When the message is acknowledged by
the driver and the cause of the message resolved, the driver information center turns the message off. The
adaptive cruise control system will not operate if the driver information center fails.
Cruise Control Switch
The cruise control switch, functionally is a common feature that is shared between the adaptive cruise control
system and the regular cruise control system. The adaptive cruise control system will not operate if any cruise
switch fails. The cruise control switch comprises the following cruise control function switches:
• On/Off switch
• Set/decrease switch
• Resume/increase switch
The cruise control function switches are arranged in a resistive ladder design whereby each switch function is
set up with different resistance values. The BCM through the cruise control switch signal circuit detects a
predetermined voltage value when any cruise control switch function is activated. The associated cruise control
function signal detected by the BCM is then sent to the engine control module (ECM) as a GMLAN serial data
circuit message. The ECM on receiving the message provides the cruise control function requested by the BCM.
The ECM is responsible for recognizing and responding to cruise control switch requests sent by the BCM. The
cruise control function switches are used by the ECM to communicate to the active safety control module the
driver selected vehicle speed. The driver selected vehicle speed is communicated through GMLAN serial data
circuit to the active safety control module and the BCM. The adaptive cruise control system engages and adjusts
vehicle speeds based on the activation of the following cruise control function switches:
90 of 120
Cruise Control On/Off Switch
The BCM monitors the switch signal circuit in order to determine when the On/Off switch is disabled or
activated. The BCM detects a predetermined voltage value on the switch signal circuit. The On/Off switch state
is then relayed to the ECM via the GMLAN serial data circuit. The ECM sends the On/Off switch input status
to the active safety control module. When the On/Off switch is turned ON, the adaptive cruise control system
enters either a standby enabled or a standby disabled mode. The standby enabled mode indicates that every
condition required for the adaptive cruise control system to function has been met, but the adaptive cruise
control is not engaged. When the adaptive cruise control is in the standby disabled mode, the conditions
necessary for the adaptive cruise control system to function has not been met. When the On/Off switch is turned
OFF, the adaptive cruise control will enter the disabled mode. The adaptive cruise control will not activate in
the disabled mode.
Cruise Control Set/Decrease Switch
The adaptive cruise control system is engaged when the adaptive cruise control On/Off switch is turned ON and
the set/decrease switch is momentarily pressed and released. When the set/decrease switch is pressed, the
selected vehicle speed is set to the current vehicle speed by the ECM. The vehicle speed must be at or greater
than 40 km/h (25 MPH). The selected vehicle speed is displayed by the driver information center. While in the
engaged state, the selected vehicle speed and the following distance can be adjusted. Pressing and holding the
set/decrease switch, when the adaptive cruise control system is engaged, will decrease the selected vehicle
speed without deactivating the adaptive cruise control. Momentarily pressing and releasing the set/decrease
switch, when the adaptive cruise control is engaged, decreased the selected vehicle speed by 1.6 km/h (1 MPH)
for each time that the set/decrease switch is pressed.
Cruise Control Resume/Increase Switch
The resume/increase switch is used in order to increase the selected vehicle speed when adaptive cruise control
is active. The amount selected vehicle speed can be increased from the resume/increase switch depends on how
long the switch is pressed. The presence of a slower moving vehicle in the path of the adaptive cruise control
vehicle will limit the extent to which the selected vehicle speed can be achieved. If there is no preceding vehicle
in front, limiting the adaptive cruise control vehicle acceleration, then the vehicle speed that is attained is the
new selected vehicle speed. The current selected vehicle speed is displayed by the driver information center.
Acceleration is terminated when the resume/increase switch is released. Momentarily pressing and releasing the
resume/increase switch will allow the selected vehicle to accelerate in at 1.6 km/h (1 MPH) increments for each
time that the resume/increase switch is momentarily pressed.
Gap Switch
The gap switch allows the driver to determine how closely the adaptive cruise control vehicle follows a target
vehicle while adaptive cruise control is engaged. When the adaptive cruise control vehicle speed is being
limited due to a slower travelling vehicle, the adaptive cruise control vehicle speed is automatically controlled
to the follow speed limit. The gap switch has 3 following distance selections that range from 1 - 2 s. The gap
switch following distance between the adaptive cruise control vehicle and the target vehicle is expressed in time
as opposed to actual distance. The distance maintained for a selected gap will vary based on vehicle speed. The
faster the vehicle speed, the further back you will follow. The gap setting can only be adjusted when the
adaptive cruise control system is engaged. The gap switch is hard-wired to the BCM. Based on voltage
variations, the BCM is able to read the gap switch selection and communicates the switch status on the
GMLAN serial data circuit to the active safety control module. The gap switch is a momentary switch.
The initial push of the gap switch recalls the current setting and activates the display. Subsequent pushes of the
91 of 120
gap switch will change the gap setting.
Driver Information Messages
Adaptive Cruise Control Temporarily Unavailable
The active safety control module will send this message if the adaptive cruise control has been disengage or
disabled. There are many reasons that can cause this, some will also set DTCs. Check vehicle for DTCs and also
check the adaptive cruise control enable and disengage scan tool data. Definitions of parameters can be found in
active safety control module scan tool information.
Service Driver Assist System
This message can be set by either the active safety control module if there is a problem with the driver assist
system or by the memory seat module if there is a problem with the haptic seat circuits. Check vehicle for
DTCs.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control and Service Front Camera
The message is set if the active safety control module is not communicating to the instrument cluster. Check
vehicle for DTCs.
Set Speed
The adaptive cruise control vehicle set speed is displayed at all times in the driver information center when
adaptive cruise control is engaged. The active safety control module set speed display request is sent to the
instrument cluster via the GMLAN serial data circuit.
Follow Distance
The driver information center displays the driver selected following distance when adaptive cruise control is
engaged and the gap switch is active. The current follow distance setting is displayed in the driver information
center for a few seconds after the gap switch is pressed to increase or decrease the following distance. The
active safety control module follow distance display request is sent to the instrument cluster via the GMLAN
serial data circuit.
Vehicle Ahead Indicator
The vehicle ahead indicator is displayed in the instrument cluster hen the radar identifies an in-path vehicle. The
vehicle ahead indicator is a warning to the driver that a vehicle is ahead. The indicator also serves as a feedback
to the driver that the radar is functioning properly. The active safety control module commands the display of
the vehicle ahead indicator via a GMLAN serial data message to the instrument cluster. The vehicle ahead
indicator only displays with the adaptive cruise control active and may sometimes display for stationary road
objects.
Digital Map Database
The Map Database Update Function shall take the received update data via 4G LTE Wireless connection and
uplink connectivity, verify the data received, then substitute or incrementally update the Map Database in the
next COMM_ENABLE cycle and inform the horizon provider of the successful update in order to trigger a
restart.
The map database update function will diagnose it's capability to update and report its status to the Diagnostic
92 of 120
Function.
The Digital Map Module shall be able initiate a map database update by establishing a connection to the
backend server and request information about the latest available map update
The Digital Map Module shall diagnose the Map Database with software logical detection within itself and look
for:
• Defects
• Age
• Correct Version
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Fig. 1: Identifying Rear Cross Traffic Alert System Block Diagram

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

B218R B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right
B218L B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left
A11 A11 Radio
93 of 120
K40 K40 Seat Memory Control Module
P45LR Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Left Rear
The rear cross traffic alert system is designed to provide enhanced customer visibility while backing up by
providing warnings to the driver on impending rear cross traffic. The rear cross traffic alert system is designed
to detect and track objects of interest within a specified coverage zone behind the vehicle. The system is
designed to alert the driver, with a visual display and either an audible sound or a haptic warning, to the
presence of objects of interest that may cause a collision with the host vehicle. Although the system is intended
to assist drivers in backing up, it does not replace driver's vision. The driver is responsible to check carefully for
objects outside of the coverage zone (e.g., a fast approaching vehicle) for a safe backing maneuver. In the event
that the system senses a malfunction through its diagnostic functions, the system will be disabled and the driver
will be visually notified.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert System Components
The side blind zone alert system is made up of the following components:
• Left side object sensor module (also used for side blind zone alert)
• Right side object sensor module (also used for side blind zone alert)
• Visual Display Icons located on the rear vision display screen
• Audio System chime or Haptic Seat notification
Side Object Sensor Modules
visible from outside the vehicle. The sensors use radar to determine the presence of objects nearby. When an
object is detected in the rear cross traffic zone, the module will send out a signal through serial data
communication to turn on the visual icons and also audio chime or haptic notification. Each sensor is supplied
B+ and ground. The right sensor receives an additional ground. Both sensors communicate independently on the
serial data line. The serial data enters the left sensor in a pass-thru configuration, that connects to the right
sensor. The scan tool is able to individually communicate with each sensor.
Display Icons
The rear cross traffic alert system visual alert display consists of two visual icons, one on each side of the
display screen of the rear vision camera, that are used to alert the driver on rear cross traffic from each side of
the host vehicle respectively.
Audio or Haptic Notification
The alert output type can be driver selected to either audio or haptic. The chime location will be left rear for left
rear cross traffic alert and right rear for right rear cross traffic alert. The haptic seat system response will be to
generate 3 repetitions of haptic vibration in the left rear area of the seat for left cross traffic alert and right rear
area of the seat for right cross traffic alert. If there is a problem with the haptic seats, the audio chime will be
substituted.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert Operation
The rear cross traffic alert system is designed to detect objects of interest as small as a 125cc motorcycle with
94 of 120
rider. The detection zone extends approximately 30 m (99 ft) from the rear corner of the car and covers an area
from behind the vehicle to 125 degrees towards the front at a height of 0.45 m (1.5 ft) to 2 m (6.5 ft) above
ground. The system operates when vehicle speed is 10 kph (6 mph) or less and is designed to detect objects
moving at speeds up to 36 kph (22 mph).
When the vehicle is backing up, the side object sensors receive energy that is reflected from external objects and
determine if the objects are objects of interest or not. The system may at times detect pedestrians, shopping
carts, or similar moving objects. This is normal and should not be considered as a false alert or problem with the
system. The rear cross traffic alert system will estimate vehicle travel trajectory and use the information in
conjunction with object travel trajectory information to determine if there is a potential collision between the
vehicle and the object of interest. The rear cross traffic alert function will only alert on objects of interest that
pose a potential collision with the host vehicle. The system is not designed to provide an alert to objects that
have no potential collision with vehicle. In addition, the system will not alert to stationary objects such as signs,
parked cars, etc.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert Driver Information Center Messages
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT OFF
This message indicates that the system has been disabled through the driver information center. Refer to the
vehicle owner's manual for instructions on how to set personalization options on the driver information center.
SERVICE SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM
This message indicates that the system requires service. Since the sensors are also used for side blind zone alert,
this feature will also be inoperative.
SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE
This message indicates that the system has been temporarily disabled because the sensor is blocked or can
otherwise not accurately detect vehicles or objects. Such instances may be mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush build-
up on the rear fascia, heavy rainfall, excessive road spray, fascia damage or stickers.
The rear cross traffic alert system will read the GPS latitude and longitude on the serial data bus and calculate if
the vehicle is within a Radio Astronomy zone. These zones are located in Europe and Japan and require the
sensors to be turned off. The "Side Detection System Unavailable" message will be displayed to the driver when
this occurs.
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS CONFIGURATION REFERENCE
During the course of vehicle diagnosis and repair, part replacement, or collision repair, components related to
advanced driver assistance systems may need to be accessed or removed. In some cases, a learn may need to be
performed after service to ensure proper operation of the system. Below is a list of available systems,
components involved in the system, and when these components require a learn procedure be performed. Refer
to the appropriate Service Information document for specific learn instructions, as well as any additional
programming operations needed if the component was replaced.
System Description
System RPO Abbreviation Description
Super Cruise is a driver assistance feature that
Super Cruise UKL - enhances Adaptive Cruise Control by allowing
hands-free driving under compatible highway driving
95 of 120
conditions while helping prompt the driver to pay
close attention to the road so they are ready to take
control. The Active Safety Control Module 1 is the
primary control module for Super Cruise operation,
while Active Safety Control Module 2 is a redundant
control module for backup operation.
The Super Cruise driver assistance feature uses
Global Positioning System (GPS) sensing, GPS-
enhanced data, a high-precision map and network of
cameras to maintain automatic control of vehicle
steering on compatible highways.
Super Cruise is available only on compatible
highways that are separated from opposing traffic.
The GPS uses real-time corrections and map data to
determine the vehicle's location while the Frontview
Camera - Windshield detects the marked lanes on the
road to help the vehicle automatically steer and
maintain lane position. Map data is provided by the
Digital Map Module.
The system works with Adaptive Cruise Control -
Advanced, which is designed to detect vehicles
traveling in the same direction in its path and
accelerate or brake the vehicle to maintain a driver-
selected following gap time from a vehicle ahead,
even in stop-and-go traffic conditions. The Long
Range Radar Sensor Module is used to detect other
vehicles.
When engaged, Super Cruise utilizes a Driver
Attention System. It provides feedback on system
status while tracking the driver's head position and
using alerts that prompt the driver to pay close
attention to the road and steer manually when
needed. The Driver Attention System uses the Driver
Monitoring System Control Module and Driver
Monitoring System Camera to monitor the driver.
Some vehicles with Super Cruise use two Short
Range Radar Sensor Modules in place of the Left
Side Object Sensor Module and Right Side Object
Sensor Module. These additional Short Range Radar
Sensor Modules integrate the traditional Lane
Change Alert with Side Blind Zone Alert into the
Super Cruise system and allow Super Cruise to
perform lane-change maneuvers.
Adaptive Cruise Adaptive Cruise Control - Advanced uses the Active

KSG with Safety Control Module, Frontview Camera -
Control - ACC
UGN Windshield, and Long Range Radar Sensor Module
Advanced
that look directly ahead to monitor vehicles that a
96 of 120
driver is following. This feature helps drivers follow
a vehicle ahead at the following gap they select (Far,
Medium, or Near) while they steer. This helps reduce
the driver's need to frequently brake and accelerate.
If the system does not detect a vehicle ahead,
Adaptive Cruise Control - Advanced works just like
regular cruise control and maintains a selected cruise
speed. When the system detects a vehicle ahead in
the driving lane, the VEHICLE AHEAD icon will
appear in green. When the vehicle detected ahead is
within the selected following gap setting, Adaptive
Cruise Control - Advanced can automatically slow
the vehicle down and adjust vehicle speed to follow
the vehicle ahead at the selected following gap.
Just like regular Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise
Control - Advanced uses the cruise control ON/OFF,
CANCEL, SET and RESUME buttons on the
steering wheel.
Adaptive Cruise Control - Camera uses the

Frontview Camera - Windshield that looks directly
ahead to monitor vehicles that a driver is following.
This feature helps drivers follow a vehicle ahead at
the following gap they select (Far, Medium, or Near)
while they steer. This helps reduce the driver's need
to frequently brake and accelerate.
If the system does not detect a vehicle ahead,
Adaptive Cruise Control - Camera works just like
Adaptive Cruise KSG regular cruise control and maintains a selected cruise
Control - without ACC speed. When the system detects a vehicle ahead in
Camera UGN the driving lane, the VEHICLE AHEAD icon will
appear in green. When the vehicle detected ahead is
within the selected following gap setting, Adaptive
Cruise Control - Camera can automatically slow the
vehicle down and adjust vehicle speed to follow the
vehicle ahead at the selected following gap.
Just like regular Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise
Control - Camera uses the cruise control ON/OFF,
CANCEL, SET and RESUME buttons on the
steering wheel.
Forward Collision Alert can alert the driver when it

detects a front-end collision is imminent with a
Forward UEU with vehicle ahead they are following. The system can
FCA also alert the driver if they are following a detected
Collision Alert UGN
vehicle much too closely.
Forward Collision Alert uses the Active Safety
97 of 120
Control Module, Frontview Camera - Windshield,
and Long Range Radar Sensor Module. Some
Cadillac vehicles also use two Short Range Radar
Sensor Modules.
Forward Collision Alert can alert the driver when it

detects a front-end collision is imminent with a
UEU vehicle ahead they are following. The system can
Forward also alert the driver if they are following a detected
without FCA
Collision Alert vehicle much too closely.
UGN
Forward Collision Alert uses the Frontview Camera -
Windshield.
Enhanced Automatic Emergency Braking can help

reduce a collision's severity or avoid the collision by
automatically applying hard, emergency braking if
the driver hasn't, or by enhancing driver hard
braking.
Enhanced Enhanced Automatic Emergency Braking uses the
Automatic Active Safety Control Module, Frontview Camera -
UGN EAEB
Emergency Windshield, and Long Range Radar Sensor Module.
Braking Some Cadillac vehicles also use two Short Range
Radar Sensor Modules. When in FORWARD gear,
these sensors look directly ahead to monitor vehicles
in the lane ahead; when a vehicle is detected ahead, a
green vehicle ahead icon is displayed.
Automatic Emergency Braking can help reduce a

collision's severity or avoid the collision by
automatically applying hard, emergency braking if
the driver hasn't, or by enhancing driver hard
Automatic braking.
Emergency UHY AEB Automatic Emergency Braking uses the Frontview
Braking Camera - Windshield. When in FORWARD gear,
these sensors look directly ahead to monitor vehicles
in the lane ahead; when a vehicle is detected ahead, a
green vehicle ahead icon is displayed.
Front Pedestrian Braking can alert the driver when a

collision is detected to be imminent with a pedestrian
directly ahead at speeds below 50 mph. It can also
help reduce the collision's severity or avoid the
Front Pedestrian collision by automatically applying the brakes if the
UKJ FPB
Braking driver has not already done so, or by enhancing
driver braking.
When in FORWARD or NEUTRAL gear between
5-50 mph, the Frontview Camera - Windshield looks
98 of 120
directly ahead to detect nearby pedestrians (up to
approximately 131 ft. away).
Reverse Automatic Braking can alert you in Reverse

when it detects a collision with a detected object
directly behind the vehicle is imminent, and if
Reverse necessary automatically apply hard emergency
Automatic UVZ RAB braking if you have not already.
Braking Reverse Automatic Braking uses one or two Short
Range Radar located at the rear of the vehicle, behind
the rear fascia, as well as the ultrasonic Parking
Assist Sensors to identify objects behind the vehicle.
Lane Keep Assist with Lane Departure Warning can

help drivers avoid crashes due to unintentionally
drifting out of their lane. It does this by providing
gentle steering wheel tuning assists when the system
Lane Keep detects the driver unintentionally drifting out of their
Assist with lane with no turn signal or steering activity. It can
UHX LKA also provide Lane Departure Warning alerts when a
Lane Departure
Warning lane marker is crossed.
Lane Keep Assist with Lane Departure Warning uses
the Frontview Camera - Windshield. It operates when
the vehicle is in Forward gear moving 37-112 mph
(60-180 kph).
Lane Departure Warning alerts when a detected lane

marker is crossed without first using the turn signal.
Lane Departure Lane Departure Warning uses the Frontview Camera
UFL LDW
Warning - Windshield. It operates when the vehicle is in
Forward gear moving 37-112 mph (60-180 kph).
Lane Change Alert with Side Blind Zone Alert can

provide lighted side-mirror alerts when a moving
vehicle is detected rapidly approaching or is in a side
blind zone.
Lane Change Lane Change Alert with Side Blind Zone Alert use
Alert with Side LCA with the Left Side Object Sensor Module and Right Side
UKC
Blind Zone SBZA Object Sensor Module, which are hidden radar
Alert sensors in the rear corners of the vehicle. When in
FORWARD gear, these sensors look for moving
vehicles located behind the side mirror in the next
lane over.
Side Blind Zone Alert can provide lighted side-

Side Blind Zone
UFT SBZA mirror alerts when a moving vehicle is detected in a
Alert
side blind zone.
99 of 120
Side Blind Zone Alert uses the Left Side Object
Sensor Module and Right Side Object Sensor
Module, which are hidden radar sensors in the rear
corners of the vehicle. When in FORWARD gear,
these sensors look for moving vehicles located
behind the side mirror in the next lane over.
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, Rear Cross Traffic

Alert can alert the driver of traffic crossing behind
the vehicle approaching from the left or right side.
Rear Cross Rear Cross Traffic Alert uses the Left Side Object
UFG RCTA
Traffic Alert Sensor Module and Right Side Object Sensor
Module, which are hidden radar sensors in the rear
corners of the vehicle.
IntelliBeam, auto high beam assist, is designed to

automatically turn the high-beams on or off,
depending on the ambient lighting conditions or other
vehicles on the road. This feature may turn the high-
IntelliBeam, TQ5 beams on when it's dark out, and turn them off when
Auto High UWH - the high-beams may impact other drivers (such as
Beam Assist UVG when an approaching vehicle is detected).
IntelliBeam use the Frontview Camera - Windshield
to determine ambient lighting conditions and identify
other vehicles on the road.
Rear Parking Assist can provide distance alerts to

nearby detected objects behind the vehicle to help
park and avoid collisions at low speeds when in
Rear Parking Reverse.
UD7 RPA
Assist Rear Parking Assist uses the Parking Assist Control
Module and 3 or 4 ultrasonic Parking Assist Sensors
located in the rear fascia or bumper.
Front and Rear Parking Assist can provide distance

alerts to nearby detected objects in front of or behind
the vehicle to help park and avoid collisions at low
Front and Rear speeds.
UD5 FRPA Front and Rear Parking Assist uses the Parking
Parking Assist
Assist Control Module and 8 ultrasonic Parking
Assist Sensors located in the front and rear fascias or
bumpers.
Automatic Parking Assist helps drivers parallel and

Automatic perpendicular park while moving at idle speed by
UFQ APA
Parking Assist automatically steering the vehicle into a detected
parking space while the driver follows text
100 of 120
commands, selects gears, performs braking, and
performs acceleration beyond idle speeds.
Automatic Parking Assist uses the Parking Assist
Control Module and 12 ultrasonic Parking Assist
Sensors located in the front and rear fascias or
bumpers.
While moving at idle speed (maximum speed of 3

mph), the available Automatic Parking Assist with
Braking feature helps the driver parallel and
perpendicular park by automatically steering and
Automatic braking the vehicle into a detected parking space.
UKG The driver follows text commands and must be
Parking Assist APA
UKZ prepared to override and take control if needed
with Braking
Automatic Parking Assist with Braking uses the
Parking Assist Control Module and 12 ultrasonic
Parking Assist Sensors located in the front and rear
fascias or bumpers.
Provides a view of the scene immediately ahead of

the vehicle on the infotainment display to help
Curb View drivers avoid nearby objects, such as curbs, poles and
Camera - UVJ - parked vehicles at low speeds.
Analog Analog Curb View Cameras can be identified by
multiple wires at the camera electrical connector.
Provides a high-resolution digital view of the scene

immediately ahead of the vehicle on the infotainment
Curb View display to help drivers avoid nearby objects, such as
Camera - UVA - curbs, poles and parked vehicles at low speeds.
Digital Digital Curb View Cameras can be identified by a
coax cable connection at the camera.
Surround Vision provides an analog, overhead bird's-

eye view of the scene around the vehicle at low
speeds to help drivers with low-speed maneuvers like
Surround Vision UVH - parking.
Analog Surround Vision Cameras can be identified
by multiple wires at the camera electrical connector.
High Definition (HD) Surround Vision provides a

high-resolution digital bird's-eye view of the scene
HD Surround UV2 UVI around the vehicle, as well as provides more views
- than the analog system. Some HD Surround Vision
Vision UVS UXP
systems may provide additional cameras related to
towing and trailers.
101 of 120
Digital Surround Vision Cameras can be identified by
a coax cable connection at the camera.
The Rear Vision Camera provides the driver with a

view of the scene directly behind the vehicle on the
infotainment system display (or inside rearview
mirror) to help park and avoid crashing into nearby
objects when in REVERSE. If the vehicle is
UVC equipped with a High Definition (HD) Rear Vision
Rear Vision
UVB - Camera, this feature provides the driver with a high
Camera
UXN resolution "digital" view.
Analog Rear Vision Cameras can be identified by
multiple wires at the camera electrical connector.
Digital Rear Vision Cameras can be identified by a
coax cable connection at the camera.
Compared to a traditional inside rearview mirror, the

Rear Camera Mirror may provide a wider, less
obstructed field of view. This helps when driving,
Rear Camera changing lanes, and checking for vehicles and traffic
DRZ - conditions. If equipped, drivers can zoom and make
Mirror
vertical tilt adjustments.
The system uses a rear-looking camera located in the
back of the vehicle at or near its center-line.
Night Vision is designed to provide the driver an

infrared night vision image of the area lit beyond the
headlamps that highlights and provides alerts of
detected pedestrians or large animals.
The system uses the Night Vision Camera, located in
Night Vision UV3 - the lower grille below the driver-side headlamp, and
a Night Vision Camera Control Module. Warmer
objects, such as pedestrians or large animals,
typically appear as whiter in appearance on the Night
Vision image.
Component Location
Component Location
The Frontview Camera - Windshield is located on the windshield, near the
Frontview Camera -
inside rearview mirror. A bracket is secured with adhesive to the
Windshield
windshield and the Frontview Camera - Windshield clips into the bracket.
On most vehicles, the Long Range Radar Sensor Module is located in the
Long Range Radar Sensor
center grill area, behind the brand emblem. On some vehicles, the Long
Module
Range Radar Sensor Module is located behind the lower fascia.
102 of 120
Component Location
On some Cadillac vehicles with UGN, two Short Range Radar Sensor
Modules are located behind the front fascia, one on the left and one on the
right.
Some vehicles may have one or two Short Range Radar Sensor Modules
located behind the rear fascia, one on the left and one on the right, or one
in the center.
Short Range Radar Sensor Some vehicles with Super Cruise also have two additional Short Range
Module Radar Sensor Modules instead of a Left Side Object Sensor Module and
Right Side Object Sensor Module. These Short Range Radar Sensor
Modules are located on the left and right vehicle body sides, behind the
rear fascia, or in the rear bumper.
Some vehicles with Super Cruise also have two Short Range Radar Sensor
Modules located behind the front fascia, one on the left and one on the
right.
Left Side Object Sensor
The Left Side Object Sensor Module and Right Side Object Sensor
Module
Module are located on the left and right vehicle body sides, behind the rear
Right Side Object Sensor
fascia, or in the rear bumper.
Module
Park Assist Sensor The park assist sensors are located in the front and rear fascias or bumpers.
The Curb View Cameras are located at the front of the vehicle, in the
Curb View Camera fascia or grill. On the display, the Curb View also uses the image from the
Rear Vision Camera.
The Surround Vision Cameras are located in the front grill or fascia area,
left outside rearview mirror, right outside rearview mirror, and at the rear
Surround Vision Camera center of the vehicle.
Some systems may have additional cameras for viewing the pickup bed
and provisions for trailer cameras.
Rear Vision Camera The Rear Vision Camera is located at the rear center of the vehicle.
The Rear Camera Mirror Camera is located at the rear center of the
Rear Camera Mirror Camera
vehicle.
Night Vision Camera The Night Vision Camera is located in the lower grille or fascia.
Learn
NOTE:
Unless
otherwise
noted, learn
is performed
using GDS2.
Component When Learn is Required Comment
SPS programming is required after
replacement. Some vehicles will
immediately begin the learn after
Frontview Camera - Frontview Camera - Windshield was programming. Other vehicles may
Windshield replaced require the learn to be started using
GDS2. Refer to Service
Information for specific
programming and learn instructions
103 of 120
NOTE:
Unless
otherwise
noted, learn
is performed
using GDS2.
after replacement.
Frontview Camera - Windshield was
-
removed from the bracket and reinstalled
Windshield was replaced or removed and
-
reinstalled
After collision repair in instances of
vehicle collision where damage exceeds
minor outer body panel cosmetic distortion -
or when collision damage requires a
suspension alignment be performed
After any airbag deployment -
Any of the following DTCs are set in the
Frontview Camera - Windshield:
• DTC B1008 - Calibration Data

• DTC B395D - Camera Misaligned Always refer to the appropriate
diagnostic procedure in Service
Information when diagnosing
Any of the following DTCs are set in the DTCs.
Active Safety Control Module:
• DTC B101E - Electronic Control

Unit Software

replacement. Refer to Service
Long Range Radar Sensor Module was
replaced
programming and learn instructions
after replacement.
Long Range Radar Sensor Module was
-
removed and reinstalled
Long Range Radar Because of the Long Range Radar
Sensor Module Sensor Module location at the front
After collision repair in instances of
of the vehicle, it is susceptible to
vehicle collision where damage exceeds
damage in even minor collisions.
minor outer body panel cosmetic distortion
Ensure appropriate scans are
or when collision damage requires a
performed in accordance with GM
suspension alignment be performed
Position Statements on pre- and
post-scan of collision vehicles.
After any airbag deployment -
104 of 120
NOTE:
Unless
otherwise
noted, learn
is performed
using GDS2.
Any of the following DTCs are set in the
Active Safety Control Module: Always refer to the appropriate
diagnostic procedure in Service
• DTC B390C - Long Range Radar Information when diagnosing
Sensor Module DTCs.
Because of the Short Range Radar

Sensor Modules location behind
the front and/or rear fascia/bumper,
it is susceptible to damage in even
minor collisions. Ensure
appropriate scans are performed in
Short Range Radar
No learn is required accordance with GM Position
Sensor Module
Statements on pre- and post-scan of
collision vehicles.
programming instructions.
Because of the Side Object Sensor
Modules location behind the rear
fascia/bumper, it is susceptible to
damage in even minor collisions.
Left Side Object Sensor The B218L Side Object Sensor
Module Module - Left and B218R Side
No learn is required
Right Side Object Sensor Object Sensor Module - Right are
Module always performing coarse and fine
learning during operation. No
specific learn is required as a part
of service, simply drive the vehicle
to begin the learn.
programming instructions.
Except 2013+ Chevrolet Spark, 2017+ Because of the Park Assist Sensors
Chevrolet Cruze, 2018+ Chevrolet location in the front and/or rear
Park Assist Sensor
Equinox, 2018+ GMC Terrain, and fascia/bumper, it is susceptible to
Buick Envision damage in even minor collisions.
105 of 120
NOTE:
Unless
otherwise
noted, learn
is performed
using GDS2.
No learn is required
Because of the Park Assist Sensors
2013+ Chevrolet Spark, 2017+ location in the front and/or rear
Chevrolet Cruze, 2018+ Chevrolet fascia/bumper, it is susceptible to
Equinox, 2018+ GMC Terrain, and damage in even minor collisions.
Buick Envision Ensure appropriate scans are
Learn required using GDS2 after performed in accordance with GM
replacement of the Parking Assist Sensor Position Statements on pre- and
Curb View Camera was replaced -
Curb View Camera was removed and
-
Curb View Camera - reinstalled
Analog Fascia, grill, or Curb View Camera
mounting location was removed or -
replaced
Curb View Camera -
No learn is required -
Digital
Surround Vision Camera was replaced -
Surround Vision Camera was removed and
-
reinstalled
Surround Vision Camera
- Analog Fascia, grill, bumper, applique, outside
rearview mirror, or Surround Vision
-
Camera mounting location was removed or
replaced
Surround Vision Camera
- Digital
Rear Vision Camera No learn is required -
Rear Camera Mirror
Camera
Night Vision Camera was replaced -
Night Vision Camera was removed and
-
reinstalled
Night Vision Camera Fascia, grill, or Night Vision mounting
-
location was removed or replaced
Vehicle ride height has significantly
-
changed from the factory position
Slow Learn
106 of 120
Component If slow to learn or learn will not complete
Make sure the vehicle is being driven in an area conducive to learn. An ideal learn
environment is a two-lane divide highway with lane makings on both side of the
lane, driving the vehicle between 56-90 km/h (35-56 MPH). Any of the following
conditions may increase the length of time require to complete the learn or result
in an inability to complete the learn:
• Heavy traffic
• Mountain roads
• Curves in the roadway
• No lane markings
• Poor lane markings
Frontview Camera - • Botts Dots-type lane markings
Windshield
• Dirty windshield glass
• Operating the vehicle outside the 56-90 km/h (35-56 MPH) range
• Driving in adverse weather, such as snow, fog, or extreme rain, or driving
directly into the sun
• Cracked or damaged windshield
• Frontview Camera - Windshield is not properly installed or is not fully
secured in the windshield bracket
• Vehicle add-on equipment that blocks the Frontview Camera - Windshield,
such as a windshield tint strip or vinyl banner, or equipment that blocks the
view of the road, such as bug deflectors or grill guards
• Windshield not properly centered in the windshield opening
107 of 120
Component If slow to learn or learn will not complete
Make sure the vehicle is being driven in an area conducive to learn. An ideal learn
environment has stationary objects on the roadside, such as mailboxes and street
signs, minimal curves and hills, multiple vehicles to follow at a distance of 30-50
m (100-165 ft) while driving the vehicle greater than 56 km/h (35 MPH). Any of
the following conditions may increase the length of time require to complete the
learn or result in an inability to complete the learn:
• Heavy traffic
Long Range Radar • No traffic
Sensor Module • Limited number of road side objects
• Mountain or hilly roads
• Sharp curves
• Tunnels
• Collision damage
• Incorrect collision repair
• Bent or damaged Long Range Radar Sensor Module bracket or mounting
surface
The Left Side Object Sensor Module and Right Side Object Sensor Module are
always performing coarse and fine learn during operation. As such, no specific
learn is required as a part of service. However, some operating conditions may
slow the learn process and result in limited system functionality:
Left Side Object • Operating the vehicle in an area with no traffic or a limited number of road
Sensor Module side objects
Right Side Object • Mud or slow build-up in the sensor area
Sensor Module
• Bumper stickers or labels on the rear fascia or bumper near the sensor
• Damage to the rear fascia, underlying vehicle body structure, or sensor
bracket
• Incorrect collision repair
FORWARD COLLISION ALERT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The forward collision alert system is a convenience feature of the frontview camera module that issues a
warning to the driver when a potential collision risk exists. The frontview camera module is located behind the
windshield, looking out at the road ahead and detecting vehicles directly ahead. When the system detects a
vehicle in the path ahead, the green vehicle ahead indicator is illuminated on the instrument cluster. When
approaching another vehicle too rapidly, the collision alert symbol will flash in the head-up display (if
equipped) or a series of red collision alert indicators will flash. An audible alert sound will simultaneously
sound or the safety alert seat will provide haptic feedback. The visual alert cannot be changed, but the driver
can select between audible or haptic alerts in the vehicle personalization menus. The forward collision alert
system can also be turned on or off through the vehicle personalization menus. See the vehicle owner's manual
for more detailed information on vehicle personalization.
108 of 120
Forward collision alert does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. Forward
collision alert may not detect a vehicle ahead if the frontview camera module is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or
if the windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can
limit visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper
condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and frontview camera module clean and in good repair.
Forward collision alert may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that
are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service.
Forward Collision System Reduced Message
This message displays when Forward Automatic Braking or Front Automatic Braking has been set to the
"Alert" setting. This setting disables most automatic braking functions. This is normal operation when the
Forward Collision System setting is set to OFF or ALERT . This message is not present when the Forward
Collision System is set to Alert and Brake .
Front Automatic Braking (UHY) (if equipped)
When the system detects a vehicle ahead in your path that is traveling in the same direction that you may be
about to crash into, it can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This can help avoid or
lessen the severity of crashes when driving in a forward gear. Depending on the situation, the vehicle may
automatically brake moderately or hard. This front automatic braking can only occur if a vehicle is detected.
The system works when driving in a forward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 60 km/h (37 mph), or on
vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control above 2 mph (4 km/h). It can detect vehicles up to approximately 60 m
(197 ft).
Pedestrian Collision Mitigation Braking (UKJ) (if equipped) is a feature subset of Front Impact
Mitigation that aims to reduce the likelihood of collisions or reduce the impact speed with pedestrians in
the forward direction by the following:
• Determining the forward path of the vehicle

• Monitoring this path with respect to pedestrians in or near the forward path
• When appropriate, providing pedestrian detection pedestrian and alerts to the driver, and if certain
conditions are met, providing autonomous braking to help avoid or reducing the impact speed of a
collision with the pedestrian
This system is not intended to replace the driver responsibility paying careful attention to the forward scene for
pedestrian, vehicle, and other potential hazards. Its function is limited to supplemental use only to assist rather
than replace the driver in responding to pedestrians in the forward scene.
The Pedestrian Collision Mitigation Braking system can detect and alert to up to 10 pedestrians in a forward
gear at speeds between 5 mph (8 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h). During daytime driving, the system detects
pedestrians up to a distance of approximately 40 m (131 ft). Pedestrians must be at least 31.5 inches (80 cm) tall
to be detected.
No added components are required for Front Automatic Braking, or Pedestrian Collision Mitigation Braking.
Refer to Owner's Manual - Driver Assistance Systems for more details.
The forward collision alert system is made up of the following components:
109 of 120
• Frontview camera module
• Forward collision alert switch
• Instrument cluster
• Collision alert indicators (without UV6)
• Head-up display (with UV6)
• Infotainment system
• Safety alert seat, if equipped
The frontview camera module detects vehicles in front of the vehicle. The frontview camera module
communicates with the instrument cluster via serial data to illuminate the appropriate amber or green vehicle
ahead indicator, collision alert symbol will flash in the head-up display, or collision alert indicators. The
frontview camera module also communicates via serial data with the infotainment system and memory seat
module to request audible or haptic alerts.
The forward collision alert switch provides an input to the frontview camera module to select the alert timing
sensitivity when approaching another vehicle too rapidly. The forward collision alert switch is part of the
steering wheel controls switch - left and provides inputs to the body control module (BCM), which then
communicates with the frontview camera module via serial data.
The BCM applies a reference voltage and monitors a low signal voltage from the normally open switch. When
the switch is pressed, the signal circuit is pulled low through a specific series of resistors, indicating that the
system has been requested to change the alert timing sensitivity. The first button press will show the current
alert timing setting on the driver information center. With every subsequent button press, the alert timing
sensitivity is changed.
Instrument Cluster
The instrument cluster communicates via serial data with the frontview camera module and will illuminate the
amber or green vehicle ahead indicator as requested by the frontview camera module. The instrument cluster
also controls the head-up display or the collision alert indicators.
Collision Alert Indicators (without UV6) (if equipped)
The collision alert indicators are a series of red LEDs that will flash when approaching another vehicle too
rapidly. The collision alert indicators are located in the upper instrument panel area and reflect off the
windshield when illuminated.
The collision alert indicators receive power and ground and are discretely controlled by the instrument cluster
through a pair of low control circuits. When requested by the frontview camera module, the instrument panel
will pulse the low control circuits, flashing the LEDs as a visual alert that another vehicle is being approached
too rapidly.
Head-up Display (with UV6) (if equipped)
The instrument cluster controls the head-up display via serial data. The instrument cluster will command the
head-up display to flash the collision alert indicator as a visual alert when approaching another vehicle too
110 of 120
rapidly as requested by the frontview camera module.
Infotainment System
The infotainment system controls the audible alerts for the forward collision alert system. If the host vehicle is
approaching another vehicle too rapidly, the frontview camera module will command the infotainment system
issue an audible alert to the driver.
Safety Alert Seat (if equipped)
The memory seat module controls the haptic alert provided by the seats. If the vehicle is approaching another
vehicle too quickly, the frontview camera module will command the memory seat module to pulse both sides of
the seat.
Forward Collision Alert System Driver Information Center Messages
Forward Collision System Reduced or Automatic Collision Prep Reduced
LANE CHANGE ALERT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
NOTE: When the vehicle is new, or the system has been programmed, there may be
intermittent false alerts for up to 644 km (400 miles). The system is in an auto
learn mode at this time.
Lane Change Alert (LCA) can be disabled in vehicle personalized settings, this will also disable the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system. When disabled, the bulb check of the mirror indicators will also be disabled. A
driver information center message will be displayed at start up when the LCA system is disabled. This feature
must be enabled prior to trying to diagnose the system.
This is a feature of the Side Blind Zone system, for more information, refer to Side Blind Zone Alert
Description and Operation. Lane Change Alert system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding
lane change crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone (similar to blind spot) areas or with
vehicles rapidly approaching these areas from behind. The Lane Change Alert warning display will light up in
the corresponding outside side mirror and will flash if the turn signal is on.
The Lane Change Alert sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle, or
3.5 m (11 ft). The height of the zone is approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning area starts at approximately the middle of the vehicle and goes back 5
m (16 ft). Drivers are also warned of vehicles rapidly approaching from up to 25 m (82 ft) behind the vehicle.
Feature Limitations
WARNING: LCA does not alert the driver to vehicles outside of the system detection zones,
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. It may not provide alerts when changing
lanes under all driving conditions. Failure to use proper care when changing
lanes may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. Before making a lane
change, always check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn
111 of 120
signals.
• Lane Change Alert displays may not come on when passing a vehicle quickly, for a stopped vehicle, or
when towing a trailer.
• Lane Change Alert may alert to objects attached to the vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle, or object
extending out to either side of the vehicle. Attached objects may also interfere with the detection of
vehicles.
• Lane Change Alert may not always alert the driver to vehicles in the next lane over, especially in wet
conditions or when driving on sharp curves.
• The system may light up due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects.
• Lane Change Alert may not operate when the B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left or B218R Side
Object Sensor Module - Right sensors in the corners of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow,
ice, or slush, or in heavy rainstorms.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The lane departure warning system is a convenience feature that utilizes the frontview camera module to
determine if the vehicle has unintentionally crossed a lane marking and issue a warning. The frontview camera
module is located behind the windshield, looking out at the road ahead and detecting any lane markings. When
the vehicle unintentionally leaves a detected lane, visual and audible or haptic (if equipped) alerts are given to
the driver. The visual alert cannot be changed, but the driver can select between audible or haptic alerts (if
equipped) in the vehicle personalization menus. Refer to the vehicle owner's manual for vehicle personalization
options.
The lane departure warning system utilizes the following components:
• Frontview camera module

• Lane departure warning switch
• Safety alert seat, if equipped
The frontview camera module detects visual queues such as lane markings. When it is determined that the
vehicle has unintentionally moved outside of the lane, visual and audible or haptic (if equipped) warning is
given to the driver. The frontview camera module receives an input from the lane departure warning switch and
controls the lane departure warning switch indicator output. The frontview camera module also communicates
via serial data with the instrument cluster, infotainment system, and memory seat module to request visual,
audible, and/or haptic alerts.
The lane departure warning switch provides an input to the frontview camera module to turn the lane departure
warning system on and off. The frontview camera module applies voltage and monitors the parking assist
switch signal circuit. The lane departure warning switch is a normally open switch. With the switch open,
voltage seen at the frontview camera module is high. When the lane departure warning switch is pressed, the
switch is closed and the signal circuit is pulled to ground. With the switch closed, voltage seen at the frontview
camera module is low. The frontview camera module will respond to this by activating or deactivating the lane
112 of 120
departure warning system.
The lane departure warning switch also utilizes the lane departure warning indicator, which is part of the lane
departure warning switch and is controlled by the frontview camera module to indicate the operational status of
the lane departure warning system. When the lane departure warning is enabled, the frontview camera module
will illuminate the indicator on the switch. The indicator receives voltage through a high control circuit from the
body control module (BCM) and is controlled through a low control circuit by the frontview camera module.
Instrument Cluster
The instrument cluster contains green and amber lane departure warning indicators. These indicators inform the
driver of the current status of the lane departure warning system and are controlled via serial data by the
frontview camera module. When the vehicle speed is above 56 km/h (35 MPH) and the system has detected the
required lane markings and is ready to assist, the green indicator will be illuminated. If the vehicle has
unintentionally left the lane, the amber indicator will flash.
Infotainment System
The infotainment system controls the audible alert for the lane departure warning. If the vehicle has
unintentionally left the lane, the frontview camera module will request via serial data an audible alert to the
driver through the infotainment system
Safety Alert Seat
The memory seat module controls the haptic alert provided by the seats. If the vehicle has unintentionally left
the lane, the memory seat module will command pulses to the left or right side of the seat, depending on the
lane departure direction.
Lane Departure Warning Operation
System Operational Modes
• Off State: The system has been turned off by the driver using the lane departure warning switch. The lane
departure warning indicator located on the lane departure warning switch will not be illuminated.
• Not Ready To Assist: The system is enabled and the lane departure warning indicator located on the lane
departure warning switch is illuminated, but the system is not ready to assist because one of the following
conditions is true:
Vehicle speed is less than 56 km/h (35 MPH). The system is designed to function at speeds greater
than 56 km/h (35 MPH).
The system cannot detect lane markings. This may be because there are no lane markings or the
lane markings cannot be determined due to snow, rain, or other driving conditions.
The windshield area in front of the camera or the camera lens is blocked by fog, dirt, damage to the
windshield, or other elements that may prevent the camera from detecting lane markings.
• Ready To Assist: The system is enabled and ready to warn of the unintentional lane crossing. The system
is ready to assist when the green lane departure warning indicator is illuminated on the instrument cluster.
Lane Crossing Alerts
• A lane crossing alert consists of the following:

The amber lane departure warning indicator located on instrument cluster will flash.
113 of 120
Three chimes are activated through the infotainment system or three pulses to the left or right side
of the seat, if equipped with safety alert seat
• When any of the following conditions occurs, the system will not give alerts:
The appropriate turn signal is activated. An activated turn signal is interpreted as an intentional lane
crossing.
The operator makes an intentional steering maneuver.
The operator makes an intentional accelerating maneuver.
The operator makes an intentional braking maneuver.
LANE KEEP ASSIST DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
NOTE: • The Lane Keep Assist system DOES NOT continuously steer the vehicle
• The Lane Keep Assist system replaces Lane Departure Warning System
• Lane Departure Warning will have more alerts than Lane Keep Assist
(visual, audible, and haptic warning
The system assists driver to keep vehicle in-lane by providing a steering push back to the vehicle when an
unintended lane departure is detected. See the user's manual for more detailed information on vehicle
personalization.
The lane keep assist system is made up of the following components:
• Front view camera module

• Lane Keep Assist switch / control indicator
• Instrument cluster / Vehicle Direction Display
• Radio
• Safety Alert Seat (if equipped)
• Yaw rate sensor
• Electric power steering
Front View Camera Module
The camera detects visual queues such as lane markings. When it is determined that the vehicle has
unintentionally moved outside of the lane, visual, and audible or haptic warning is given to the driver. The front
view camera module receives an input from the lane keep assist switch and controls the lane keep assist switch
indicator output. The front view camera module also communicates via serial data with the instrument cluster,
radio, and memory seat module to request visual, and audible or haptic alerts.
Lane Keep Assist Switch
The lane keep assist switch provides an input to the front view camera module to turn the lane keep assist
system ON and OFF. The front view camera module provides a signal voltage to the normally open momentary
switch. When the switch is pressed, the signal circuit is pulled to ground, indicating to the front view camera
module that the system has been requested to turn ON or OFF. The lane keep assist switch also contains the lane
keep assist switch indicator, which is controlled by the front view camera module to indicate the ON and OFF
status of the lane keep assist system. When the system has been enabled by the lane keep assist switch, the front
view camera module applies ground to the switch indicator and illuminates the LED. The location of the lane
114 of 120
keep assist switch can vary with different vehicles. For the exact location please refer to the user's manual.
Instrument Cluster
The vehicle direction display contains green and amber lane keep assist indicators. These indicate to the driver
the current status of the lane keep assist system and are controlled via serial data by the front view camera
module. When the vehicle speed is above 56 km/h (35 MPH) and the system has detected the required lane
markings and is ready to assist, the green indicator will be illuminated on the vehicle direction display. If the
vehicle has unintentionally left the lane, the amber indicator will flash.
Radio
The radio controls the audible alert for the lane keep assist. If the vehicle has unintentionally left the lane, the
radio will command three beeps as an audible alert to the driver.
Safety Alert Seat (if equipped)
The memory seat module controls the haptic alert provided by the seats. If the vehicle has unintentionally left
the lane, and the Electric Power Steering determines the corrective action requires an above threshold amount of
effort, the memory seat module will command three pulses to the left or right side of the seat, depending on the
lane departure direction.
Yaw Rate Sensor
The steering intervention is based on the forward looking sensor outputs, such as lateral offset of the vehicle,
relative yaw angle and time to line crossing. Over that, other vehicle dynamics signals are needed, e.g. velocity,
steering angle, yaw rate for the purpose of a driver suppression.
Electric Power Steering
The electric power steering uses a torque sensor to detect driver inputs and relays that information to the
frontview camera module. The electric power steering is used to provide steering push back.
Lane Keep Assist Operation
There is two stages of warning/intervention for the driver: The first stage is the steering push back, if the lane
keep assist system detects that the vehicle will cross the lane marking despite it is intervening, a second stage
warning shall be issued. The second stage warning is a chime or a haptic seat vibration, if equipped with haptic
seats. If a haptic seat vibration is used as stage 2 warning, the vibration shall take place on the side of the seat,
where the lane departure happened.
System operation can be described by the following modes:
• Off State: The system has been turned off by the driver using the lane keep assist switch. The lane keep
assist indicator will not be illuminated.
• Not Ready To Assist: The system is enabled and the lane keep assist indicator is illuminated, but not
ready to assist when any of the following conditions is true:
Vehicle speed is less than 37 MPH (60 km/h). The system is designed to function at speeds greater
than 37 MPH (60 km/h).
The system cannot detect lane markings. This may be because there are no lane markings, as on a
country road or that the lane markings cannot be determined due to snow, rain, or other driving
conditions.
115 of 120
The windshield area in front of the camera or the camera lens is blocked by fog, dirt, damage to the
windshield or other elements that may prevent the camera from detecting lane markings.
• Ready To Assist: The system is enabled and ready to warn of the unintentional lane crossing. The system
is ready to assist when the green lane keep assist indicator is illuminated on the vehicle direction display.
Lane Crossing Alerts
• When one of the following conditions are met, the system will not give alerts:
The correct turn signal is activated. An activated turn signal is interpreted as an intentional lane
crossing.
The operator makes an intentional steering maneuver.
The operator makes an intentional accelerating maneuver.
The operator makes an intentional braking maneuver.
• Lane crossing alert consists of the following:
The amber lane keep assist indicator will flash.
"push-back" steering torque input (or nudge) from Electric Power Steering to help prevent a lane
departure
Three chimes are activated through the radio.
or if equipped , three pulses to the left or right side of the seat.
Lane Keep Assist System Driver Information Center Messages
The front view camera module can command the driver information center to display the various messages to
alert the driver of a system concern or status information. For detailed information about the possible messages
please refer to the user's manual.
SAFETY ALERT SEAT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The safety alert seat provides a vibration in the driver's seat bottom cushion to alert the driver of a number of
concerns. Two seat haptic movement motors are utilized to create the vibration and are located on the left and
right sides of the seat cushion. Utilizing two motors allows the vibration to be localized to the left or right side
of the seat, depending on the side of the vehicle generating the alert, or to vibrate both simultaneously.
The active safety seat utilizes the following components:
• Seat Memory Control Module

• Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Left
• Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Left
Seat Memory Control Module
The seat memory control module receives serial data messages from other modules and provides voltage to
control the seat haptic movement motors. The seat memory control module will pulse the left, right, or both
motors with the number of pulses requested over serial data. The seat memory control module monitors the
control circuits for open, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions and will set DTCs if a circuit fault is
detected.
Seat Haptic Movement Motor
116 of 120
The seat haptic movement motor is DC motor located in the driver's seat bottom cushion. Two seat haptic
movement motors are used in the seat bottom cushion, positioned on the left and right side. An offset weight is
attached to the motor. When activated, the spinning offset weight creates a vibration felt by the driver through
the seat cushion.
Each seat haptic movement motor receives a constant chassis ground. The motor is controlled by the seat
memory control module providing voltage through a dedicated control circuit. When an alert is required, the
seat memory control module will apply voltage, activating the seat haptic movement motor.
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Fig. 2: Identifying Side Blind Zone Alert System Block Diagram


B218R B218R Side Object Sensor Module - Right
A9B A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger
A11 A11 Radio
B218L B218L Side Object Sensor Module - Left
A9A A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver
117 of 120
P45LR Seat Haptic Movement Motor - Driver Left Rear
NOTE: Not all items in block diagram may apply to specific vehicle. Refer to
schematics for specific vehicle wiring diagrams.
The side blind zone alert system shall detect and report "objects of interest" on either side of the vehicle, within
a specified "blind spot" zone. The system is designed to alert the driver, with a visual display placed on the side
view mirror, to the presence of objects of interest that may not be visible in the inside rearview mirror and
outside rear view mirrors. Although this system is intended to help drivers avoid lane change crashes, it does
not replace driver vision and therefore should be considered a lane change aid. Even with the side blind zone
alert system, the driver must check carefully for objects outside of the reporting zone (e.g., a fast approaching
vehicle) before changing lanes. In the event that the system senses a malfunction through its diagnostic routines,
the system will be disabled and the driver will be visually notified.
When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone while driving forward, an amber warning symbol will
light up in the appropriate outside mirror. This indicates that it may be unsafe to change lanes. If the driver then
activates the turn signal, the amber warning symbol starts flashing as an extra warning not to change lanes.
Side blind zone alert is active when the vehicle is out of park or the parking brake is off on manual transmission
vehicles and at speeds up to approximately 140 km/h (87 MPH). If a vehicle is detected in the blind zone, the
warning symbols will turn illuminate on the appropriate side. When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror
displays will briefly come on to indicate that the system is operating. The warning symbols will vary brightness
based on the ambient light conditions.
Side Blind Zone Alert System Components
The side blind zone alert system is made up of the following components:
• Left side object sensor module (also used for rear cross traffic alert)
• Right side object sensor module (also used for rear cross traffic alert)
• Driver outside rearview mirror
• Passenger outside rearview mirror
Side Object Sensor Modules
visible from outside the vehicle. The sensors use radar to determine the presence of objects nearby. When an
object is detected in the side blind zone, the side object sensor module supplies voltage to illuminate the visual
indicator on the appropriate side rear view mirror. Each sensor is supplied B+ and ground. The right sensor
receives an additional ground. Both sensors communicate independently on the serial data line. The serial data
enters the left sensor in a pass-thru configuration, that connects to the right sensor. The scan tool is able to
individually communicate with each sensor.
Outside Rearview Mirrors
The outside rearview mirrors contain an icon that is backlit with high intensity, amber-colored LED's located on
118 of 120
the mirror surface. The display brightness adapts to day/night conditions. The side blind zone alert indicator
icon in the left or right outside rearview mirror is illuminated if the left or right side object sensor module
detects a vehicle in the side blind zone to inform the driver that there is a vehicle driving in the blind spot zone.
Side Blind Zone Alert Operation
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays will briefly come on to indicate that the system is
operating. The system is designed to detect objects of interest as small as a 125cc motorcycle with rider. The
detection zone starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends out to 3.5 m (11 ft) at the back corner of the
vehicle and 3 m (10 ft) behind the vehicle at a height of 0.5 m (1.5 ft) to 2.0 m (6 ft) above the ground. The
system may light up an indicator due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects. This is
normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone while driving forward, independent if passing a vehicle
or being passed, an amber warning symbol will light up in the appropriate outside mirror. This indicates that it
may be unsafe to change lanes. If the driver then activates the turn signal, the amber warning symbol starts
flashing as an extra warning not to change lanes.
Foul weather may affect the operation of the side blind zone system. Occasional missed alerts can occur under
normal circumstances and will increase in wet conditions. The number of missed alerts will increase with
increased rainfall or road spray. Heavy rainfall, as well as mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush build-up on the rear
fascia, can completely disable the system.
If the vehicle is towing a trailer or has an object such as a bicycle rack attached to the rear of the vehicle, the
side blind zone system may not function properly and the indicators may illuminate intermittently or remain
illuminated all the time.
Side Blind Zone Alert Driver Information Center Messages
SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF
This message indicates that the system has been disabled through the driver information center. Refer to the
vehicle owner's manual for instructions on how to set personalization options on the driver information center.
SERVICE SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM
This message indicates that the system requires service. When the message is displayed, the indicators will
remain illuminated at all times, notifying the driver that the side blind zone system should not be relied upon
when changing lanes. Since the sensors are also used for rear cross traffic alert, this feature will also be
inoperative.
SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE
This message indicates that the system has been temporarily disabled because the sensor is blocked or can
otherwise not accurately detect vehicles or objects. Such instances may be mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush build-
up on the rear fascia, heavy rainfall, excessive road spray, fascia damage or stickers.
The rear cross traffic alert system will read the GPS latitude and longitude on the serial data bus and calculate if
the vehicle is within a Radio Astronomy zone. These zones are located in Europe and Japan and require the
sensors to be turned off. The "Side Detection System Unavailable" message will be displayed to the driver when
this occurs.
Lane Change Alert Operation (if equipped)
119 of 120
Lane Change Alert (LCA) can be disabled in vehicle personalized settings, this will also disable the Side Blind
Zone Alert (SBZA) system. When disabled, the bulb check of the mirror indicators will also be disabled. A
driver information center message will be displayed at start up when the LCA system is disabled. This feature
must be enabled prior to trying to diagnose the system.
The lane change alert system shall detect and report objects in the driver's blind zone, or approaching on either
side of the vehicle, within a specified lane change zone. The system is designed to alert the driver, with a visual
display placed on the side view mirror, to the presence of objects of interest that may not be visible in the inside
rearview mirror and outside rear view mirrors. Although this system is intended to help drivers avoid lane
change crashes, it does not replace driver vision and therefore should be considered a lane change aid. Even
with the lane change alert system, the driver must check carefully for objects outside of the reporting zone
before changing lanes. In the event that the system senses a malfunction through its diagnostic routines, the
system will be disabled and the driver will be visually notified.
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays will briefly come on to indicate that the system is
operating. The warning symbols will vary brightness based on the ambient light conditions. Lane change alert is
active when the vehicle is out of park or the parking brake is off on manual transmission vehicles. When the
system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone or approaching in the lane change alert zone while driving
forward, an amber warning symbol will light up in the appropriate outside mirror. This indicates that it may be
unsafe to change lanes. If the driver then activates the turn signal, the amber warning symbol starts flashing as
an extra warning not to change lanes.
The system is designed to detect objects of interest as small as a 125cc motorcycle with rider. The detection
zone starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends out to 3.5 m (11 ft) at the back corner of the vehicle and
70 m (230 ft) behind the vehicle at a height between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2.0 m (6 ft) above the ground. The
system may light up an indicator due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects. This is
normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
If the vehicle is towing a trailer or has an object such as a bicycle rack attached to the rear of the vehicle, the
lane change alert system may not function properly and the indicators may illuminate intermittently or remain
illuminated all the time. The driver information center may display "SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM
UNAVAILABLE".
Foul weather may affect the operation of the lane change alert system. Occasional missed alerts can occur under
normal circumstances and will increase in wet conditions. The number of missed alerts will increase with
increased rainfall or road spray. Heavy rainfall, as well as mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush build-up on the rear
fascia, can completely disable the system. The warning symbols will vary brightness based on the ambient light
conditions.
120 of 120
Fixed And Moveable Windows - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Front Side Door Window Channel Front Retainer Bolt 11 N.m (97 lb in)
Front Side Door Window Channel Retainer Bolt 11 N.m (97 lb in)
Front Side Door Window Frame Rear Applique Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor Screw 11 N.m (97 lb in)
Front Side Door Window Regulator Nut 11 N.m (97 lb in)
Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Rear Side Door Window Channel Retainer Rear Bolt 11 N.m (97 lb in)
Rear Side Door Window Frame Front Applique Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Motor Screw 11 N.m (97 lb in)
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Nut 11 N.m (97 lb in)
Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)

MOVEABLE WINDOW WIRING SCHEMATICS
Driver Door
1 of 106
Passenger Door
Rear Doors
DEFOGGER WIRING SCHEMATICS

Defogger
2 of 106
DTC B0283
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B0283
Rear Defogger Circuit

Control - Relay Coil B0283 02 B0283 05 B0283 05 -
Ground - Relay Coil - B0283 05 - -
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation
Circuit Description
B+ - Relay Switch Supplied from a fuse.
E18 Rear Defogger Grid Control - Component
component.
Control - Relay Coil
component.
E18 Rear Defogger Grid Ground - Component Chassis Ground
3 of 106
Circuit Description
Ground - Relay Coil Chassis Ground
KR5 Rear Defogger Relay A relay is a switch that is actuated by a solenoid.
Window defoggers are parallel resistive conductors in or on the
E18 Rear Defogger Grid
glass that heat up when electric power is applied.
The control module controls a series of actuators to ensure
optimal heating, ventilation and air conditioning of the
K33 HVAC Control Module passenger compartment. The control module does this by
reading values from a variety of sensors and interprets the data
and adjusts the actuators accordingly.
This device is the user interface to control the HVAC system.
A26 HVAC Controls Some buttons and indicators are hardwired, some functions use
serial data communication.
• B0283 02 Control Circuit = Short to Ground

• B0283 05 Control Circuit = Open or Short to Battery
• B0283 02 E18 Rear Defogger Grid = Disabled

• B0283 05 E18 Rear Defogger Grid = Disabled or Always On
Schematic Reference
Defogger Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
• Electrical Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) , or Electrical Relay Replacement (Within an
Electrical Center)
4 of 106
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Perform the scan tool control function: Rear Defogger - On and Off
Verify the component turns On and Off: E18 Rear Defogger Grid

3. All OK.

2. Remove the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
1. Ground Connection - Disconnect
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 85 & Ground Connection
4. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 & Ground circuit terminal 85

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K33 HVAC Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket &
Ground
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket &
Terminal 19 X2 @ Control module harness
5 of 106
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K33 HVAC Control Module
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket & Ground
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K33 HVAC Control Module
7. Test or replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
Component Testing
Relay Test
3. Test for 70 to 110 ohms between the test points: Component terminal 85 & 86
If not between 70 and 110 ohms
Replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay

• Component terminal 30 & 85

5. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Component terminal 86 & 12 V
Connect a jumper wire between the test points: Component terminal 85 & Ground
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Component terminal 30 & 87

7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
6 of 106
Electrical Center)
DTC B316B, B317A, B318A, OR B319A

Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B316B
Driver Window Switch
DTC B317A
Passenger Window Switch
DTC B318A
Left Rear Window Switch
DTC B319A
Right Rear Window Switch

Signal - Down @ M74D Window
B316B 02 1 1 -
Motor - Driver
Signal - Up @ M74D Window
B316B 02 2 2 -
Motor - Driver
Signal - Express @ M74D
3 3 3 -
Window Motor - Driver
Signal - Down @ M74P Window
B317A 02 4 4 -
Motor - Passenger
Signal - Up @ M74P Window
B317A 02 5 5 -
Motor - Passenger
Signal - Express @ M74P Window
6 6 6 -
Motor - Passenger
1. Driver Left Front Window Switch - Down = Inoperative
2. Driver Left Front Window Switch - Up = Inoperative
3. Driver Left Front Window Switch - Express = Inoperative
7 of 106
4. S79P Window Switch - Passenger - Down = Inoperative
5. S79P Window Switch - Passenger - Up = Inoperative
6. S79P Window Switch - Passenger - Express = Inoperative
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Power Windows Description and Operation
Circuit Description
B+ - M74D Window Motor - Driver Supplied from a fuse.
B+ - M74P Window Motor - Passenger Supplied from a fuse.
B+ - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear Supplied from a fuse.
B+ - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear Supplied from a fuse.
Signal - Down @ M74D Window Motor - The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the
Driver component.
Signal - Express @ M74D Window Motor - The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the
Driver component.
The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the
Signal - Up @ M74D Window Motor - Driver
component.
Signal - Down @ M74P Window Motor - The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the
Passenger component.
Signal - Express @ M74P Window Motor - The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the
Signal - Up @ M74P Window Motor - The output circuit is switched to ground to activate the
Control - Up @ M74LR Window Motor - The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate
Left Rear the component.
Control - Down @ M74LR Window Motor - The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate
Control - Up @ M74RR Window Motor - The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate
Right Rear the component.
Control - Down @ M74RR Window Motor - The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate
The S74D sends a serial data message to the K9 indicating the
S79D Window Switch - Driver
M74 function that has been requested.
• Power Window Control
M74D Window Motor - Driver • The control module also reads various switches and
sensors and makes their values available via serial data.
S79P Window Switch - Passenger The switch has a normally open contact.
8 of 106
M74P Window Motor - Passenger • The control module also reads various switches and
sensors and makes their values available via serial data.
S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear The switch has a normally open contact.
M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear An electric DC motor.
S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear The switch has a normally open contact.
M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear An electric DC motor.
Ignition/Vehicle = On
B316B 00
• Right Front Window Switch @ S79D Window Switch - Driver = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
• Left Rear Window Switch @ S79D Window Switch - Driver = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
• Right Rear Window Switch @ S79D Window Switch - Driver = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
B316B 02
• Driver Window Main Control Down Switch Signal = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
• Window Switch Driver Up Signal = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
B316B 39
S79D Window Switch - Driver = Signal Erratic
B317A 02
• Window Switch Passenger Down Signal = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
• Window Switch Passenger Up Signal = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
B318A 02
S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
B319A 02
S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear = Switch Stuck - For greater than 60 s
Window Switch - Malfunction
B316B 00, B316B 02, B317A 02, B318A 02, B319A 02
9 of 106
B316B 39
If set as a current DTC - Replace the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver
Schematic Reference
Moveable Window Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. S79D Window Switch - Driver-Driver Left Front Window Switch - Not Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter:
• Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive

• Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• Driver Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
Refer to: Circuit/System Testing - Test 1

3. S79D Window Switch - Driver - No Button Pressed
• Left Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive

• Left Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
• Left Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
• Right Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• Right Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
• Right Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
10 of 106
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
Test or replace the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver

4. Operate the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver-Driver Left Front Window Switch - Pressed & Pulled
• Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Active

• Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Active
• Driver Window Main Control Express Switch = Active

5. Operate the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver-Left Rear Window Switch - Pressed & Pulled
• Left Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Active

• Left Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Active
• Left Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Active

6. Operate the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver-Right Rear Window Switch - Pressed & Pulled
• Right Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Active

• Right Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Active
• Right Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Active

7. Operate the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver-Right Front Window Switch - Pressed & Pulled
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Down Switch = Active

• Front Passenger Window Main Control Express Switch = Active
11 of 106
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Up Switch = Active

8. S79P Window Switch - Passenger - Not Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Window Switch at Door = Inactive

9. Operate the component: S79P Window Switch - Passenger - Pressed & Pulled
• Passenger Window Switch at Door = Up

• Passenger Window Switch at Door = Express Up
• Passenger Window Switch at Door = Down
• Passenger Window Switch at Door = Express Down

10. S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear - Not Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Left Rear Window Switch at Door = Inactive
Test or replace the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear

11. Operate the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear - Pressed & Pulled
• Left Rear Window Switch at Door = Up

• Left Rear Window Switch at Door = Down
• Left Rear Window Switch at Door = Express Down
Test or replace the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear

12. S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear - Not Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Right Rear Window Switch at Door = Inactive
12 of 106
Test or replace the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear

13. Operate the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear - Pressed & Pulled
• Right Rear Window Switch at Door = Up

• Right Rear Window Switch at Door = Down
• Right Rear Window Switch at Door = Express Down
Test or replace the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear

14. All OK.
Test 1

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S79D Window Switch - Driver
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 24 @ Component harness &
Ground Connection
5. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 23 & Ground
If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is OK
If less than 2 ohms - Verify the fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
If the test lamp does not turn On and the circuit fuse is open
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 23 & Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver
13 of 106
Go to next step: If the test lamp turns On
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness &
Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
7. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 & Ground
circuit terminal 24
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Active

1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off & Remove - Jumper wire (s)
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Ground
Signal circuit terminal 7 @ M74D Window Motor - Driver
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
Ground
circuit terminal 24
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Active

14 of 106
Ground
10. Test for greater than 10 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 5 @ Component harness & Ground
If 10 V or less
Ground
11. Test or replace the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver
Test 2

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S79P Window Switch - Passenger
Ground Connection
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Window Switch at Door = Inactive
15 of 106
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74P Window Motor - Passenger
• Signal circuit terminal 11 @ Component harness & Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: M74P Window Motor - Passenger
6. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 11 @
Component harness & Ground
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Window Switch at Door = Up
Ground
Signal circuit terminal 3 @ M74P Window Motor - Passenger
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: M74P Window Motor - Passenger
8. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component
harness & Ground
9. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Window Switch at Door = Down
16 of 106
If 10 V or less
Ground
11. Test or replace the component: S79P Window Switch - Passenger
Repair Instructions
• Front Side Door Window Control Switch Replacement

• Front Side Door Window Switch Replacement - Right Side
• Rear Side Door Window Switch Replacement
• Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement
• Rear Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement
DTC B3205 OR B3210

Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3205
Driver Window Motor
DTC B3210
Passenger Window Motor
Circuit Description
17 of 106
Circuit Description
M74D Window Motor - Driver • The control module and the DC motor are one assembly.

M74P Window Motor - Passenger • The control module and the DC motor are one assembly.
B3205 00
M74D Window Motor - Driver = Incompatible Hardware or Equipment
B3205 39
M74D Window Motor - Driver = Internal Malfunction
B3205 42, B3210 42
Calibration Update = Failed
B3205 4B, B3210 4B
• Battery - Disconnected/Replaced
• Front Side Door Wiring Harness - Disconnected
• M74 Window Motor - Disconnected
B3210 00
M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Incompatible Hardware or Equipment
B3210 39
M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Internal Malfunction
B3205 00, B3205 39, B3205 42
M74D Window Motor - Driver = Inoperative
B3210 00, B3210 39, B3210 42
M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Inoperative
18 of 106
B3205 4B
• Window Express Up System Not Initialized

• Driver Information Display = Open, then Close Driver Window
B3210 4B
• Window Express Up System Not Initialized

• Driver Information Display = Open, then Close Passenger Window
B3205 00
M74D Window Motor - Driver - Replaced - A current DTC can be cleared after the procedure is performed.
B3205 39, B3205 42
M74D Window Motor - Driver - Replaced - A current DTC can be cleared after the procedure is performed.
B3210 00
M74P Window Motor - Passenger - Replaced - A current DTC can be cleared after the procedure is performed.
B3210 39, B3210 42
M74P Window Motor - Passenger - Replaced - A current DTC can be cleared after the procedure is performed.
B3205 4B
M74D Window Motor - Driver - Normalized - A current DTC can be cleared after the procedure is performed.
B3210 4B
M74P Window Motor - Passenger - Normalized - A current DTC can be cleared after the procedure is performed.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
19 of 106

2. Perform the scan tool control function: Driver Window Motor - Up & Down
Verify the component works as specified: M74D Window Motor - Driver = Up & Down
Test or replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver

3. Perform the scan tool control function: Driver Window Motor - Down
4. Operate the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver - Pulled = Up & Release
Verify the component works as specified: M74D Window Motor - Driver = Express Up
Use the following procedure: Window Motor Programming - Express Function

5. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off - For greater than 2 min
7. Perform the scan tool control function: Driver Window Motor - Down
8. Operate the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver - Pulled = Up & Release
Verify the component works as specified: M74D Window Motor - Driver = Express Up
Test or replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver

9. Perform the scan tool control function: Passenger Window Motor - Up & Down
Verify the component works as specified: M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Up & Down
Test or replace the component: M74P Window Motor - Passenger

10. Perform the scan tool control function: Passenger Window Motor - Down
11. Operate the component: S79P Window Switch - Passenger - Pulled = Up & Release
Verify the component works as specified: M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Express Up
20 of 106
Use the following procedure: Window Motor Programming - Express Function.

12. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off - For greater than 2 min
14. Perform the scan tool control function: Passenger Window Motor - Down
15. Operate the component: S79P Window Switch - Passenger - Pulled = Up & Release
Verify the component works as specified: M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Express Up
Test or replace the component: M74P Window Motor - Passenger

16. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor Replacement
SYMPTOMS - FIXED AND MOVEABLE WINDOWS
Important Preliminary Checks Before Starting:
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the symptom tables in order to verify that all of
2. Review the power window system operation or rear window defogger system operation in order to familiarize
yourself with the system functions. Refer to the following:
• Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation
• Power Windows Description and Operation
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the rear window defogger.
cause the symptom.
• Inspect the power window mechanical components for misalignment or binding which may prevent the
function of the power window.
Intermittent
NOTE: • Inspect for proper installation of electrical components if an intermittent

condition exists. Inspect for aftermarket theft deterrent devices, lights, and
cellular phones. Ensure that no aftermarket equipment is connected to the
class 2 circuit. If you can not locate an intermittent condition, a cellular phone
signal may cause the condition. Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be
21 of 106
the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent
Conditions and Poor Connections .
• The problem may or may not turn ON the SERVICE VEHICLE SOON indicator
or store a DTC. Do not use the symptom tables to diagnose intermittent
conditions. The malfunction must be present in order to locate the problem.
Poor electrical connections or wiring cause most intermittent conditions. Perform a careful visual/physical check for
the following conditions:
• Poor mating of the connector halves or a terminal not fully seated in the connector body
• An improperly formed or damaged terminal
• Reform or replace connector terminals in the problem circuit in order to ensure proper contact tension.
• Poor terminal to wire connection requires removing the terminal from the connector body in order to perform
the check.
Use a scan tool in order to help detect intermittent conditions. The scan tool has several features that can be used to
locate an intermittent condition. The snapshot feature can capture and store data parameters within the scan tool
when the malfunction occurs. This information can then be reviewed in order to see what caused the malfunction.
Symptom List
• Rear Window Defogger Malfunction

• Power Windows Malfunction
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER MALFUNCTION

Vehicle

B+ - Relay Switch 1 1 - -
Control - E18 Rear Defogger Grid 1 1 2 -
Ground - E18 Rear Defogger Grid - 1 - -
1. E18 Rear Defogger Grid - Inoperative
2. E18 Rear Defogger Grid - Always On
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Rear Window Defogger Description and Operation
22 of 106
Circuit Description
E18 Rear Defogger Grid Control - Component
component.
component.
E18 Rear Defogger Grid Ground - Component Chassis Ground
KR5 Rear Defogger Relay A relay is a switch that is actuated by a solenoid.
Window defoggers are parallel resistive conductors in or on the
E18 Rear Defogger Grid
glass that heat up when electric power is applied.
The control module controls a series of actuators to ensure
optimal heating, ventilation and air conditioning of the
K33 HVAC Control Module passenger compartment. The control module does this by
reading values from a variety of sensors and interprets the data
and adjusts the actuators accordingly.
The position of the defogger switch is read by the control
module A26 and, via CAN bus, forwarded to the control
A26 HVAC Controls
module K33, which translates the bus message into a control
signal for E18.
Schematic Reference
Defogger Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
Electrical Center)
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Operate the component: Rear Defogger Switch - Pressed
Verify the component turns On and Off: E18 Rear Defogger Grid
23 of 106

3. Perform the scan tool control function: Illuminate All Indicators - On and Off
Verify the component turns On and Off: Rear Defogger Indicator
Replace the component: A26 HVAC Controls

4. All OK.


2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 @ K33 HVAC Control Module
Ground
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket &
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K33 HVAC Control Module
24 of 106
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 86 @ Relay Socket & Ground
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K33 HVAC Control Module
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 30 @ Relay Socket & Output
terminal @ Fuse
3. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 & X2 @ E18 Rear Defogger Grid
Ground
5. Replace the component: Fuse
6. Install the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
7. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 1 X1 & Ground circuit terminal 1
X2
If the test lamp does not turn On and Off - Test or replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger
Relay
If the test lamp turns On and Off - Test or replace the component: E18 Rear Defogger Grid
8. Momentarily connect a 40 A fused jumper wire between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 30 & Control
circuit terminal 87
Verify the component does not turn On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire: E18 Rear
Defogger Grid
If the component turns On and Off
25 of 106
Test or replace the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
Go to next step: If the component does not turn On and Off

10. Install the component: KR5 Rear Defogger Relay
11. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 & X2 @ E18 Rear Defogger Grid
12. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 1 X2 & Ground
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 1 X2 @ Component harness &
Ground Connection
13. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 1 X1 & Ground circuit terminal 1 X2
Repair the open/high resistance in the circuit: Control Circuit
Repair the short to voltage on the circuit: Control Circuit

16. Test or replace the component: E18 Rear Defogger Grid
Component Testing
Relay Test
3. Test for 70 to 110 ohms between the test points: Component terminal 85 & Component terminal 86

26 of 106

5. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Component terminal 86 & 12 V
Connect a jumper wire between the test points: Component terminal 85 & Ground
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Component terminal 30 & Component terminal 87

7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Electrical Center)
POWER WINDOWS MALFUNCTION

Vehicle

B+ - S79D Window Switch -
U1538 00 U1538 00 - -
Driver
B+ - M74D Window Motor - U1530 00,
U1534 00 - -
Driver U1534 00
B+ - M74P Window Motor - U1530 00,
U1530 00 - -
Passenger U1534 00
B+ - S79LR Window Switch - Left U1530 00,
U1534 00 - -
Rear U1534 00
B+ - S79RR Window Switch - U1530 00,
U1530 00 - -
Right Rear U1534 00
U1534 00,
Serial Data - S79D Window
U1538 00, U1538 00 U1538 00 -
Switch - Driver
U153A 00
27 of 106
U1534 00,
Serial Data - M74D Window
U1538 00, U1534 00 U1534 00 -
Motor - Driver
U153A 00
U1534 00,
Serial Data - M74P Window
U1538 00, U153A 00 U153A 00 -
Motor - Passenger
U153A 00
Serial Data - S79LR Window U1534 00,
U1534 00 U1534 00 -
Switch - Left Rear U154A 00
Serial Data - S79RR Window U1534 00,
U154A 00 U154A 00 -
Switch - Right Rear U154A 00
Signal - Up @ M74D Window
B316B 02 1 1 B316B 39
Motor - Driver
Signal - Down @ M74D Window
1 1 1 B316B 39
Motor - Driver
Signal - Express @ M74D
B316B 02 1 1 B316B 39
Window Motor - Driver
Signal - Up @ M74P Window
B317A 02 2 2 -
Motor - Passenger
Signal - Down @ M74P Window
B317A 02 2 2 -
Motor - Passenger
Signal - Express @ M74P Window
B317A 02 2 2 -
Motor - Passenger
Control - M74LR Window Motor -
3 3 3 -
Left Rear
Control - M74RR Window Motor -
4 4 4 -
Right Rear
Ground - S79D Window Switch -
- U1538 00 - -
Driver
Ground - M74D Window Motor -
- U1534 00 - -
Driver
Ground - M74P Window Motor -
- U153A 00 - -
Passenger
Ground - S79P Window Switch -
- 2 - -
Passenger
Ground - S79LR Window Switch -
- 3 - -
Left Rear
Ground - S79RR Window Switch -
- 4 - -
Right Rear
1. M74D Window Motor - Driver = Inoperative
2. M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Inoperative
3. M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear = Inoperative
4. M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear = Inoperative
28 of 106
Circuit Description
B+ - S79D Window Switch - Driver Supplied from a fuse.
B+ - S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear Supplied from a fuse.
B+ - S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear Supplied from a fuse.
Signal - Down @ M74 Window Motor
component.
Signal - Express @ M74 Window Motor
component.
Signal - Up @ M74 Window Motor
component.
Control - Up @ M74LR Window Motor - The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate
Control - Down @ M74LR Window Motor - The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate
Control - Up @ M74RR Window Motor - The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate
Control - Down @ M74RR Window Motor - The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to activate
The module controls various vehicle functions like lighting,
K9 Body Control Module
central door locking, power windows, etc.
The motor M74 is a bidirectional DC motor that moves the
M74 Window Motor
component: Front Power Windows & Rear Power Windows
The S79D sends a serial data message to the K9 indicating the
M74 function that has been requested.
S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear The switch has a normally open contact.
S79P Window Switch - Passenger The switch has a normally open contact.
S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear The switch has a normally open contact.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
29 of 106
Scan Tool Reference

2. Perform the scan tool control function: Driver Window Motor - Up & Down
Verify the component operates in both directions: M74D Window Motor - Driver

3. Operate the component: Left Rear Window Switch @ S79D Window Switch - Driver - Pressed & Pulled
• Left Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive & Active
• Left Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive & Active
• Left Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive & Active
Replace the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver

4. Operate the component: Right Rear Window Switch @ S79D Window Switch - Driver - Pressed & Pulled
• Right Rear Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive & Active
• Right Rear Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive & Active
• Right Rear Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive & Active

5. Operate the component: Right Front Window Switch @ S79D Window Switch - Driver - Pressed & Pulled
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive & Active
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Express Switch = Inactive & Active
• Front Passenger Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive & Active
30 of 106
6. Verify DTC B3205 4B is not set.
If DTC B3205 4B is set

7. Operate the component: Driver Left Front Window Switch @ S79D Window Switch - Driver - Pressed &
Pulled
Verify the component works as specified:
• M74D Window Motor - Driver = Up

• M74D Window Motor - Driver = Express Up
• M74D Window Motor - Driver = Down
• M74D Window Motor - Driver = Express Down
If the component does not work as specified
Go to next step: If the component works as specified

8. Perform the scan tool control function: Passenger Window Motor - Up & Down
Verify the component operates in both directions: M74P Window Motor - Passenger

9. Verify DTC B3210 4B is not set.
If DTC B3210 4B is set

10. Operate the component: S79P Window Switch - Passenger - Pressed & Pulled
• M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Up

• M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Express Up
• M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Down
• M74P Window Motor - Passenger = Express Down

11. Operate the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear - Pressed & Pulled
31 of 106
• M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear = Up

• M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear = Down
• M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear = Express Down

12. Operate the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear - Pressed & Pulled
• M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear = Up

• M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear = Down
• M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear = Express Down

13. All OK.
Test 1

Ground Connection
32 of 106
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: S79D Window Switch - Driver
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Inactive
Ground
circuit terminal 24
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Down Switch = Active

Terminal 7 @ M74D Window Motor - Driver
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Inactive
Ground
circuit terminal 24
33 of 106
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Window Main Control Up Switch = Active

Ground
If 10 V or less
Ground
Test 2

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S79P Window Switch - Passenger
Ground Connection
34 of 106
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Window Switch at Door = Inactive
6. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 11 @
Component harness & Ground
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Window Switch at Door = Up
Ground
Terminal 3 @ M74P Window Motor - Passenger
8. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 @ Component
harness & Ground
9. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Window Switch at Door = Down
Terminal 7 @ M74P Window Motor - Passenger
35 of 106
If 10 V or less
Ground
11. Test or replace the component: S79P Window Switch - Passenger
Test 3

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
Ground Connection
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
36 of 106
7. Connect the electrical connector: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
8. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
9. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 1 & Control circuit terminal 2
11. Perform the scan tool control function: Left Rear Window Motor
Verify the test lamp state:
Left Rear Window Motor - Stop = Test lamp Off
Left Rear Window Motor - Up = Test lamp On
Left Rear Window Motor - Down = Test lamp On

• Control circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Ground
• Control circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Control circuit terminal 9 @ S79LR Window
Switch - Left Rear
• Control circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Control circuit terminal 10 @ S79LR Window
Switch - Left Rear
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
12. Test or replace the component: M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
Test 4
37 of 106
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
Ground Connection
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
7. Connect the electrical connector: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
8. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
11. Perform the scan tool control function: Right Rear Window Motor
Verify the test lamp state:
Right Rear Window Motor - Stop = Test lamp Off
Right Rear Window Motor - Up = Test lamp On
Right Rear Window Motor - Down = Test lamp On

38 of 106
• Control circuit terminal 1 @ Component harness & Control circuit terminal 9 @ S79RR Window
Switch - Right Rear
• Control circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Control circuit terminal 10 @ S79RR Window
Switch - Right Rear
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
12. Test or replace the component: M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
Test 5

• M74D Window Motor - Driver
• M74P Window Motor - Passenger
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: M74 Window Motor Ground circuit terminal 1 @
Component harness & Ground Connection
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: M74 Window Motor B+ circuit terminal 2 @ Output
terminal & Fuse
39 of 106
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: M74 Window Motor
6. Test or replace the component: M74 Window Motor
Component Testing
M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear/M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear or M74RR Window
Motor - Right Rear
3. Connect a 25 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control terminal 1 & B+
CAUTION: Complete the testing as quickly as possible in order to prevent overheating

and damaging the component.
4.
5. Momentarily connect a jumper wire between the test points: Control terminal 2 & Ground
Reverse the jumper wires 2 times between the terminals.
Verify the component works as specified: M74 Window Motor = Up & Down
Replace the component: M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear or M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear

6. All OK.
Repair Instructions

SIDE DOOR WINDOW MECHANICAL DIAGNOSIS
Cause Correction
DEFINITION: A mechanical condition that requires a correction for proper operation of the side door
window.
Refer to Symptoms - Fixed and Moveable Windows prior to beginning this table.
Check proper glass alignment/attachment and door seal installation.
Intermittent Operation Check switch and switch bezel to see if sticking.
Check wire harness for pinched/shorted wire.
40 of 106
Cause Correction
THIS STEP APPLIES TO ALL TWO PIN MOTOR CONNECTORS
ONLY. Perform electrical diagnostics, by first applying 12 volt power
supply to the regulator motor to verify motor function.
Check proper glass alignment/attachment.
Check for defective seal and/or proper seal installation.
Glass Binds
Check for debris in glass run channel.
Check for glass run channel position.
Check for loose fasteners and retorque if required.
Regulator/Glass Rattles Check that the glass is in the channel and reinstall if not positioned
correctly.
Check for other components in the glass path such as wire harness, impact
Noisy Operation foam, lock rods, or cables.
Check for proper glass alignment/attachment and door seal installation.
Windnoise Check seals, mirror patch, and glass alignment.
Check proper glass alignment.
False glass reversal, the glass goes Reinitialize the glass.
down unexpectedly. Check seals.
Check for debris in the glass run channel.
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
WINDSHIELD REPLACEMENT
Special Tools
• BO-24402-A Glass Sealant Remover (Cold Knife).

• Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GM 3651G.
Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools
Removal Procedure
WARNING: If broken glass falls into the defroster outlets, it can be blown into the passenger
compartment and cause personal injury.
WARNING: When working with any type of glass or sheet metal with exposed or rough edges,
wear approved safety glasses and gloves in order to reduce the chance of personal
injury.
WARNING: While operating, electrical control modules can produce heat and become hotter
than their surroundings. To prevent burns allow sufficient time for the module to
cool before removal.
NOTE: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape
around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim.
1. Open the hood.
2.
41 of 106
Windshield Wiper Arm (3) - Remove - Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement
3.
Air Inlet Grille Panel (2) - Remove - Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement
4.
Inside Rearview Mirror (2) - Remove - Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement
5. Cover to protect the following parts from broken glass:
42 of 106
• Upper Dash Pad
• The defroster outlets and A/C outlets
• The seats and carpeting
6. Remove the lower windshield supports from the cowl panel, if equipped.
7.
Using the appropriate tool, carefully cut around the lace (1), start in the center working from side to side of the
window to access the urethane adhesive bead, if equipped.
8.
NOTE: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the window.
This will allow the urethane adhesive to be separated from the windshield.
43 of 106
• Leave a base of urethane on the pinchweld flange.
• The only suitable lubrication is clear water.
• BO-24402-A Glass Sealant Remover (Cold Knife).
• Use commercially available glass cutting tool.
9.
With the aid of an assistant, remove the windshield (1) and locating pin (2) from the vehicle.
1. Windshield - Install - Adhesive Installation of Windshields
2.
Inside Rearview Mirror (2) - Install - Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement
3.
44 of 106
Air Inlet Grille Panel (2) - Install - Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement
4.
Windshield Wiper Arm (3) - Install - Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement
5. Close the hood.

6. Remove the double layer of masking tape around the perimeter of the painted surfaces.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
45 of 106
Front Side Door Water Deflector (2) - Remove - Front Side Door Water Deflector Replacement
2.
Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding
Replacement
3.
Front Side Door Inner Window Sealing Strip (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip
Replacement
46 of 106
4.
Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal
Molding Replacement
5.
Radio Front Side Door Speaker (2) - Remove - Radio Front Side Door Speaker Replacement
6.
Front Side Door Window Regulator Sash Retainer (1) - Release
47 of 106
7. Place the front side door window in the full up position and tape in place.
8. Place the front side door window regulator in the full down position.
9.
Front Side Door Window Channel Retainer Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
10.
Remove the masking tape holding the front side door window (1) and lower the window downward while
pulling up on the front to remove the window from the door frame.
1.
48 of 106
Place the front side door window (1) into the door frame.
2. Place the front side door window (1) in the full up position and tape in place.
3.
Front Side Door Window Channel Retainer Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] to 11 N.m (97 lb in)
4.
49 of 106
Radio Front Side Door Speaker (2) - Install - Radio Front Side Door Speaker Replacement
5.
Place the window regulator sash retainer (1) in the full up position.
6. Remove the tape holding the front side door window in the full up position.
7.
Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding (1) - Install - Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding
Replacement
8.
50 of 106
Front Side Door Inner Window Sealing Strip (1) - Install - Front Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip
Replacement
9.
Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding (1) - Install - Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding
Replacement
10.
Front Side Door Water Deflector (2) - Install - Front Side Door Water Deflector Replacement
51 of 106
11. Ensure the window system operates properly.
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1. Rear Side Door Water Deflector - Remove - Rear Side Door Water Deflector Replacement
2.
Rear Side Door Window Garnish Molding (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Window Garnish Molding
Replacement
3.
Rear Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip
Replacement
4.
52 of 106
Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding
Replacement
5.
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Sash Retainer (1) - Release
6. Place the rear side door window in the full up position and tape in place.
7. Place the rear side door window regulator in the full down position.
8.
53 of 106
Rear Side Door Window Channel Retainer Rear Bolt (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip
Replacement
9.
Remove the masking tape holding the rear side door window (1) and lower the window downward while
pulling up on the front to remove the window from the door frame.
1.
54 of 106
Place the rear side door window (1) into the door frame.
2. Place the rear side door window (1) in the full up position and tape in place.
3.
Rear Side Door Window Channel Retainer Rear Bolt (1) - Install and tighten to 11 N.m (97 lb in)
4.
Place the window regulator sash retainer (1) in the full up position.
5. Remove the tape holding the rear side door window in the full up position.
6.
55 of 106
Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding
Replacement
7.
Rear Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip
Replacement
8.
Rear Side Door Window Garnish Molding (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Window Garnish Molding
56 of 106
Replacement
9. Rear Side Door Water Deflector - Install - Rear Side Door Water Deflector Replacement
REAR WINDOW REPLACEMENT

Special Tools
Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GMW-15672
Removal Procedure
WARNING: Refer to Glass and Sheet Metal Handling Warning .
NOTE: Before cutting out a stationary window, apply a double layer of masking tape
around the perimeter of the painted surfaces and the interior trim.
1. Open the liftgate.

2. Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement - Remove
4. Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement - Remove
5. Rear End Spoiler Replacement (TB4) , or Rear End Spoiler Replacement (TB5) - Remove
6. Cover the seats and carpeting to protect from broken glass.
NOTE: Keep the cutting edge of the tool against the rear window from inside the
vehicle. This will allow the urethane adhesive to be separated from the window.
7. Use commercially available glass cutting tool in order to remove the window.
• Leave a base of urethane on the pinchweld flange.
• The only suitable lubrication is clear water.
8.
With an assistant, remove the locator pins (1) and rear window (2) from the vehicle.
57 of 106
WARNING: Refer to Window Retention Warning .
2. Rear Window - Install - Adhesive Installation of Rear Windows

3. Rear End Spoiler Replacement (TB4) , or Rear End Spoiler Replacement (TB5) - Install
4. Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement - Install
6. Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement - Install
7. Remove the tape.
8. Close the liftgate.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW CHANNEL FRONT RETAINER REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
2.
Radio Front Side Door Speaker (2) - Remove - Radio Front Side Door Speaker Replacement
3. Place the front side door window in the full up position.
58 of 106
4.
Front Side Door Window Channel Front Retainer Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
5. Front Side Door Window Channel Front Retainer (2) - Remove
1.
Front Side Door Window Channel Front Retainer (2) - Install
2. Front Side Door Window Channel Front Retainer Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] to 11 N.m (97 lb in)
3.
59 of 106
Radio Front Side Door Speaker (2) - Install - Radio Front Side Door Speaker Replacement
4.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW FRAME REAR APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
60 of 106
Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal
Molding Replacement
2.
NOTE: Pull the weatherstrip back to gain access to the side door window frame
applique bolts.
Front Side Door Window Frame Rear Applique Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
3. Slide the front side door window frame rear applique (2) down to release the top retaining clip, then lift up and
out of door panel.
1.
61 of 106
Place the bottom of the front side door window frame rear applique (2) down into the door panel first, then
push the top of the rear side door window frame rear applique into the top retaining clip until seated.
2. Front Side Door Window Frame Rear Applique Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
3.
Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding (1) - Install - Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding
Replacement
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW FRAME FRONT APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
62 of 106
Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding
Replacement
2.
NOTE: Pull the weatherstrip back to gain access to the side door window frame
applique bolts.
Rear Side Door Window Frame Front Applique Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
3. Slide the rear side door window frame front applique (2) down to release the top retaining clip, then lift up and
out of door panel.
1.
63 of 106
Place the bottom of the rear side door window frame front applique (2) down into the door panel first, then
push the top of the rear side door window frame front applique into the top retaining clip until seated.
2. Rear Side Door Window Frame Front Applique Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
3.
Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding
Replacement
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW FRAME REAR APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT
64 of 106
Rear Side Door Window Frame Rear Applique
Procedure
1
Using the appropriate tool, release the rear side door window frame rear applique from the door
panel.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH REPLACEMENT

Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement - Driver Side
Front Side Door Window Control Switch
Procedure
1 1. Release the switch assembly from the switch mount plate by depressing the tabs along
each side of the switch.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE
65 of 106
Front Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement - Passenger Side
Front Side Door Window Switch - Right Side
Procedure
1 1. Release the switch from the switch mount plate by depressing the tabs along each side of
the switch.
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW SWITCH REPLACEMENT

Rear Side Door Accessory Switch Mount Plate Replacement
Rear Side Door Window Switch
Procedure
1
Release the switch assembly from the switch mount plate by depressing the tabs along each side
of the switch.
66 of 106
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR REPLACEMENT

WARNING:
Disconnect
the power
window
switch when
working
inside the
door. When
operated,
the Express
Up/Down
Feature
allows the
door window
to move very
quickly,
without
stopping,
which could
cause
personal
injury.
1. Front Side Door Water Deflector Replacement

2. Using the proper tool, release the window regulator guide from the window sash.
3. Tape the window to the upper door frame.
Front Side Door Window Regulator Nut [5x]

1 CAUTION:
67 of 106
Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
11 N.m (97 lb in)
Front Side Door Window Regulator
Procedure

2. Transfer all parts as necessary.
3. When the replacement is completed, use a scan tool to perform the appropriate reset
functions. Window Motor Programming - Express Function
WINDOW MOTOR PROGRAMMING - EXPRESS FUNCTION
A window motor that has not been normalized may no longer perform the express up functions or may not index up
when the door is closed, this may occur during the following conditions:
• When a window motor has been disconnected or replaced

• When a door harness has been disconnected
When the battery has been disconnected or replaced, all window motors may no longer perform the express up
functions
NOTE: When DTC B3205 4B, B3210 4B, B3215 4B or B3220 4B are set, the following
warnings will be displayed on the driver information center:
• Open, then Close Driver Window

• Open, then Close Passenger Window
These warnings will clear once the windows have been "Normalized" and the
respective DTC will clear.
Single Window Motor Normalization Procedure
NOTE: The doors must be completely closed prior to normalizing the windows, a door
that is open or ajar may cause the power window to function abnormally or to
become inoperative while performing the normalizing procedure. If this occurs,
verify that the door is completely closed then repeat the normalizing
procedure.
1. Ignition ON.
2. Starting with the window completely UP, press and hold the power window switch until the window is fully
open and continue holding the switch down for approximately 5 seconds after the window is completely open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is fully closed and continue holding the switch up for
approximately 5 seconds after the window is completely closed.
68 of 106
The window should now be normalized and the window should perform the express up and express down functions
and should index normally when the door is opened and closed.
All Window Motors Normalization Procedure
NOTE: The doors must be completely closed prior to normalizing the windows, a door
that is open or ajar may cause the power window to function abnormally or to
become inoperative while performing the normalizing procedure. If this occurs,
verify that the door is completely closed then repeat the normalizing
procedure.
1. Ignition ON.
2. Starting with the left and right rear window completely UP, press and hold the appropriate power window
switch until the rear windows are fully open and continue holding the switch down for approximately 5
seconds after the rear windows are completely open.
3. Pull the power window switch up until the rear windows are fully closed and continue holding the switch up
for approximately 5 seconds after the rear windows are completely closed.
4. With the driver window completely UP, press and hold the appropriate power window switch until the driver
window is fully open and continue holding the switch down for approximately 5 seconds after the driver
window is completely open.
5. Pull the power window switch up until the driver window is fully closed and continue holding the switch up
for approximately 5 seconds after the driver window is completely closed.
6. With the front passenger window completely UP, press and hold the appropriate power window switch until
the front passenger window is fully open and continue holding the switch down for approximately 5 seconds
after the front passenger window is completely open.
7. Pull the power window switch up until the front passenger window is fully closed and continue holding the
switch up for approximately 5 seconds after the front passenger window is completely closed.
All the window motors should now be normalized and the windows should perform the express up and express down
functions and should index normally when the door is opened and closed.
Window Motor Relearn Procedure
A relearn procedure may need to be performed after the following repair procedures have been completed:
• When the window glass had to be realigned

• When the window glass has been replaced
• When the door has been replaced and the original window motor has been reused
• When the window regulator has been replaced and the original window motor has been reused
The technician may experience the following symptoms when performing the express up function:
• The glass may stop before reaching the top of the window frame
• The window may auto-reverse when reaching the top of the window frame
This is caused by the window motor still retaining the original travel settings prior to being reinstalled with the new
components
NOTE: Prior to performing the relearn procedure the vehicle must have all 4 wheels
properly inflated and mounted, the vehicle must be sitting on a level surface and all
doors must be completely closed.
69 of 106
To relearn the window motor, follow these steps:
1. Ignition ON.
2. With a scan tool, select Module Diagnosis, K9 Body Control Module, Configuration/Reset Functions and then
select the appropriate Clear Window Learn Values for the window motor requiring the relearn procedure.
3. After the learn procedure, exit the scan tool learn procedure completely, the power window cannot be
normalized and will not function until you exit the program.
4. Starting with the window completely UP, press and hold the power window switch until the window is fully
open and continue holding the switch down for approximately 5 seconds after the window is completely open.
5. Pull the power window switch up until the window is fully closed and continue holding the switch up for
approximately 5 seconds after the window is completely closed.
The window motor has now been calibrated to the new travel settings and will function normally.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR REPLACEMENT

Front Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor Screw [3x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
11 N.m (97 lb in)
70 of 106
Front Side Door Window Regulator Motor
Procedure
2 1. When the replacement is completed, use a scan tool to perform the appropriate reset
functions. Window Motor Programming - Express Function
2. Inspect the window for proper operation before installing the door trim.
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR REPLACEMENT

WARNING:
Refer to
Glass and
Sheet Metal
Handling
Warning .
WARNING:
Disconnect
the power
window
switch when
working
inside the
door. When
operated,
the Express
Up/Down
Feature
allows the
door window
to move very
quickly,
without
71 of 106
stopping,
which could
cause
personal
injury.
1. Rear Side Door Water Deflector Replacement

2. Place the rear side door window in the full up position and tape the window to the door frame.
3. Release the window from the sash retaining clip.
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Nut [3x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
11 N.m (97 lb in)
Rear Side Door Window Regulator
Procedure

2. Transfer all parts as necessary.
3. Inspect the window for proper operation, adjust if necessary before installing the door
trim.
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR REPLACEMENT
72 of 106
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Motor Screw [3x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
11 N.m (97 lb in)
Rear Side Door Window Regulator Motor
Procedure
2
2. Inspect the door window for proper operation before installing the door trim panel.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW CHANNEL RETAINER REPLACEMENT

WARNING:
Refer to
Glass and
Sheet Metal
Handling
Warning .
WARNING:
Disconnect
the power
window
switch when
73 of 106
working
inside the
door. When
operated,
the Express
Up/Down
Feature
allows the
door window
to move very
quickly,
without
stopping,
which could
cause
personal
injury.
1. Place the front side door window in the full up position.

2. Front Side Door Water Deflector Replacement
3. Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding Replacement
Front Side Door Window Channel Retainer Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
11 N.m (97 lb in)
Front Side Door Window Channel Retainer
2 Procedure
Transfer components as necessary.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW INNER SEALING STRIP REPLACEMENT
74 of 106
Front Side Door Window Garnish Molding Replacement
Front Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip
Procedure
1 1. Lift the front side door window inner strip off the pinch-weld flange.
2. Press firmly to insert the front side door window inner strip back on the door flange.
3. Inspect the window for proper operation before installing the door trim.
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW UPPER REVEAL MOLDING REPLACEMENT
Callous Component Name

Rear Side Door Window Upper Reveal Molding
Procedure
1
1. Apply masking tape to the outer applique and door frame.
2. Starting at the rear of the door and using the appropriate tool, separate the upper reveal
75 of 106
Callous Component Name
molding from the side door window weatherstrip.
3. Use a suitable lubricant to assist in sliding the reveal molding down the center of the
weatherstrip.
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW BELT REVEAL MOLDING REPLACEMENT

Rear Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding
Procedure
1 1. Place the rear side door window in the down position.

2. Using the appropriate tool, lift upward on one end of the rear side door window belt reveal
molding and work down the door flange until it fully releases.
3. Inspect the door window for proper operation.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW BELT REVEAL MOLDING REPLACEMENT
76 of 106
Front Side Door Window Belt Reveal Molding
CAUTION:
Refer to
Paint
Damage
Caution .
1
Procedure
1. Using the appropriate tool, lift the belt molding up to remove from the door flange.
2. Press firmly to insert the front side door window belt reveal molding back on the door
flange.
3. Inspect the window for proper operation.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW UPPER REVEAL MOLDING REPLACEMENT

Open the front side door.
Front Side Door Window Upper Reveal Molding
Procedure
1 Using the appropriate tool, release the upper reveal molding starting at the front working to the
rear of the front door. Slide molding rearward to release the hook clip from the rear of the front
door.
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW INNER SEALING STRIP REPLACEMENT
77 of 106
1. Place the rear door window in the full down position.

2. Rear Side Door Window Garnish Molding. Rear Side Door Window Garnish Molding Replacement
Rear Side Door Window Inner Sealing Strip
Procedure
1 1. Using the appropriate tool, lift upward on one end of the rear side door window inner
sealing strip, and work down the door flange until it fully releases.
2. Inspect the door window for proper operation.
FRONT SIDE DOOR WINDOW WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
Front Side Door Window (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Window Replacement
2.
78 of 106
Front Side Door Window Channel Front Retainer (2) - Remove - Front Side Door Window Channel Front
Retainer Replacement
3.
Front Side Door Window Frame Rear Applique (2) - Remove - Front Side Door Window Frame Rear
Applique Replacement
4.
Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Bolt (1) - Remove
79 of 106
5.
Release the front side door window weatherstrip (1) front retaining clip from the front door panel.
6.
Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip (1) - Remove
1.
Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip (1) - Install
80 of 106
2.
Push the front side door window weatherstrip (1) front retaining clip into the front door panel until seated.
3.
Front Side Door Window Weatherstrip Bolt (1) - Install and tighten to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
4.
Front Side Door Window Frame Rear Applique (2) - Install - Front Side Door Window Frame Rear
81 of 106
5.
Front Side Door Window Channel Front Retainer (2) - Install - Front Side Door Window Channel Front
6.
Front Side Door Window (1) - Install - Front Side Door Window Replacement
REAR SIDE DOOR WINDOW WEATHERSTRIP REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
82 of 106
Rear Side Door Window (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Window Replacement
2.
Rear Side Door Window Upper Reveal Molding (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Window Upper Reveal
Molding Replacement
3.
Rear Side Door Window Frame Front Applique (2) - Remove - Rear Side Door Window Frame Front
83 of 106
4.
Rear Side Door Window Frame Rear Applique (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Window Frame Rear
5.
Rear Side Door Window Channel Rear Retainer Rear Bolt (1) - Remove
6.
84 of 106
Release the rear side door window weatherstrip rear retaining clips (1) from the rear door panel (2).
7.
Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Bolt (1) - Remove
8. Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip (2) - Remove
1.
Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip (2) - Install
2. Rear Side Door Window Weatherstrip Bolt (1) - Install and tighten to 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
3.
85 of 106
Push the rear side door window weatherstrip rear retaining clips (1) into the rear door panel (2) until seated.
4.
Rear Side Door Window Channel Rear Retainer Rear Bolt (1) - Install and tighten to 11 N.m (97 lb in)
5.
Rear Side Door Window Frame Rear Applique (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Window Frame Rear Applique
86 of 106
Replacement
6.
Rear Side Door Window Frame Front Applique (2) - Install - Rear Side Door Window Frame Front
7.
Rear Side Door Window Upper Reveal Molding (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Window Upper Reveal
Molding Replacement
8.
87 of 106
Rear Side Door Window (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Window Replacement
REAR COMPARTMENT LIFT WINDOW WIRING HARNESS TERMINAL REPAIR

Removal Procedure
1. Liftgate Upper Side Trim Finish Panel - Remove - Liftgate Upper Side Trim Finish Panel Replacement
2.
Locate the original attachment point for the defogger terminal (1) on the rear window.
3. Mask off a small area on the rear window around the original attachment point for the defogger terminal (1).
4.
88 of 106
Prepare the rear window defogger buss bar (1) surface.
1. Prepare the surface of the rear window defogger buss bar (1) with 500 grit sandpaper, or Emery cloth. It
is not necessary to remove all of the original solder, but it should be scuffed sufficiently so that no
oxidation is present. Lightly sand the area to prep the defogger buss bar. DO NOT sand through the
defogger buss bar.
2. Wipe the prepared rear window defogger buss bar (1) area with Kent Automotive Acrysol or equivalent
to remove any residual oil or dirt.
NOTE: Use care when spraying primer to avoid getting primer on the rear
window or surrounding areas.
3. Spray the prepared rear window defogger buss bar (1) area with the Loctite 736 Primer.
5.
89 of 106
Locate the original defogger terminal (1) and disconnect it from the electrical connector.
6. Inspect the original defogger terminal (1). If the terminal is bent, damaged, or does not rest flush on the rear
window replace it with a NEW defogger terminal.
7.
Prepare the defogger terminal (1) for installation and install the defogger terminal on the defogger buss bar.
1. Prepare the surface of the defogger terminal (1) with 500 grit sandpaper or Emery cloth. Lightly sand the
contact points to remove any oxidation and to etch the surface for the adhesive. Use care when sanding
the terminal feet not to bend or deform the terminal.
2. Wipe the prepared defogger terminal (1) with Kent Automotive Acrysol or equivalent to remove any
90 of 106
residual oil or dirt.
3. Spray the defogger terminal (1) with the Loctite 736 Primer.
NOTE: Once the adhesive is applied to the defogger terminal (1), the terminal
needs to be installed on the rear window defogger bus bar immediately.
4. Apply a small drop of the Loctite 312 to the contact points of the defogger terminal (1).
NOTE: • If too much Loctite 312 adhesive was applied, the loctite Primer 736
can be reapplied while holding the terminal in place.
• Try to align the contact so that it is positioned with the same
orientation as the original terminal.
• The primer on the rear window defogger buss bar (1) should still be
wet when the defogger terminal is installed.
5. While the primer is still wet, press the terminal (1) onto the defroster grid and hold for 1 minute. After
releasing allow 5 minutes of curing time to form a secure bond.
8.
Prepare and apply tab bonding epoxy to the top of the terminal (1).
1. Mix the epoxy thoroughly for 45 seconds. There is a 2 minute work time once the epoxy is mixed.
2. Apply the epoxy to completely cover the terminal feet (1) and the prepared area of the defroster grid.
Smooth out the epoxy for a good contact between the terminal and defroster grid within the two minute
work time.
3. Remove the tape.
NOTE: Placing the opposite hand under the glass at the terminal (1) while
heating the terminal will prevent overheating the epoxy. Once the glass
becomes hot to the touch, remove the heat.
91 of 106
4. Apply light heat between 38 - 65Â°C (100 - 150Â°F) do not to exceed 65Â°C (150Â°F).
5. Recheck the epoxy in 10 minutes to verify the epoxy had firmed up. If the epoxy remains soft reapply
heat while touching the opposite side of the glass. The second application of heat only needs to be brief
enough to reach 38Â°C (100Â°F).
NOTE: Keep the vehicle stored indoors at a ambient temperature of around 24Â°C
(75Â°F) when waiting for the epoxy to fully cure.
9. Allow the epoxy to cure for 24 hours prior to installing the defogger terminal electrical connector.
10. Install the defogger tab electrical connector and inspect the rear window defogger for proper operation.
11. Liftgate Upper Side Trim Finish Panel - Install - Liftgate Upper Side Trim Finish Panel Replacement
ADHESIVE INSTALLATION OF WINDSHIELDS
1. Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GMW-15672.

2. Remove all mounds or loose pieces of urethane adhesive from the pinch-weld area.
3. If the original window is being reused, remove all but approximately 2 mm (3/64 in) of the existing bead of
urethane adhesive from the pinchweld flange by using a clean utility knife or razor blade scraper.
4. Inspect for any of the following problems in order to help prevent future breakage of the window:
• The flange of the window opening
• High weld
• Solder spots
• Hardened sealer
• Any other obstruction or irregularity in the pinchweld flange
NOTE: If corrosion of the pinch-weld flange is present or if sheet metal repairs or

replacements are required, the pinch-weld flange must be refinished in order
to restore the bonding area strength. If paint repairs are required, mask the
flange bonding area prior to applying the color coat in order to provide a clean
primer only surface. Materials such as BASF DE15Â®, DuPont 2610Â®,
Sherwin-Williams PSE 4600 and NP70Â® and Martin-Semour 5120 and 5130Â®
PPG DP90LF SPIES/HECKER 3688/8590 - 3688/5150 - 4070/5090 STANDOX
11158/13320 - 14653/14980 products are approved for this application.
5. After repairing the opening as indicated, perform the following steps:

1. Remove all traces of broken glass from the outer cowl panel, seats, floor, and defroster ducts.
2. Clean around the edge of the inside surface of the window with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and
water by volume on a dampened lint free cloth.
6. Verify all primers and urethane adhesive are within expiration dates.
7.
92 of 106
WARNING: Failure to prep the area prior to the application of primer may cause
insufficient bonding of urethane adhesive. Insufficient bonding of urethane
adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to be ejected from the vehicle
resulting in personal injury.
Apply the primer to the surface of the pinch-weld flange (1).
8. Allow the pinch-weld primer to dry per auto-adhesive instructions by the manufacturer's.
9. With an assistant, dry fit the window (2) to the opening in order to determine the correct position.
10.
Use masking tape in order to mark the locations (1) of the window (2) in the opening.
11. Cut the masking tape in the center and remove the window from the opening.
93 of 106
12.
Apply glass prep clear to the area approximately 10 - 16 mm (3/8 - 5/8 in) around the entire perimeter of the
window inner surface.
Immediately wipe the glass primed area using a clean, lint-free cloth.
13.
Apply bonded-glass primer and let dry per auto-adhesive instructions by the manufacturer's.
14.
94 of 106
Apply the auto-adhesive primer-application (2) around the perimeter of the window (1) per auto-adhesive
instructions by the manufacturer's.
15. Apply the glass primer black to the same areas that glass prep clear was applied.
16. Allow the glass primer to dry per auto-adhesive instructions by the manufacturer's.
17.
Use a cartridge-type caulking gun in order to apply a smooth, continuous bead of urethane adhesive.
Cut the applicator nozzle to provided a V cut to apply the auto-adhesive.
18.
95 of 106
Use the edge of the window as a guide for the nozzle in order to apply the urethane adhesive (1) to the inner
surface of the window (3).
19.
NOTE: If the locating pins were cut off it will be necessary to tape the window in place
until the auto-adhesive cures per auto-adhesive instructions by the
manufacturer's.
With an assistant, align the window locating pins (1) to the slots located in each corner of the pinch-weld
flange. Lower the window (2) to touch the auto-adhesive.
20. Gently depress the window on the auto-adhesive bead until the window reveal molding is seated.
96 of 106
21. Tape the window to the body in order to minimize movement and until the auto-adhesive cures per auto-
adhesive instructions by the manufacturer's.
22. Ensure all excess urethane adhesive is cleaned from the body before water test.
NOTE: Do not direct a hard stream of high pressure water to the freshly applied
urethane adhesive.
23. Use a soft spray of warm water in order to immediately water test the window.
24. Inspect the window for leaks.
25. If any leaks are found, use a plastic paddle in order to apply extra urethane adhesive at the leak point.
26. Retest the window for leaks.
WARNING: Insufficient curing of urethane adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to

be ejected from the vehicle resulting in personal injury.
• For the moisture-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 6

hours at 21Â°C (70Â°F) or greater and with at least 30 percent relative
humidity. Allow at least 24 hours for the complete curing of the urethane
adhesive.
• For the chemical-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 1
hour.
Do NOT physically disturb the repair area until after these minimum times have
elapsed.
27. Maintain the following conditions in order to properly cure the urethane adhesive:
• Partially lower a door window in order to prevent pressure buildups when closing the doors before the
urethane adhesive cures.
• Do NOT drive the vehicle until the urethane adhesive is cured.
• Do NOT use compressed air to dry the urethane adhesive.
28. Complete the window installation.
ADHESIVE INSTALLATION OF REAR WINDOWS
1. Use a urethane adhesive systems which meet GM Specification GMW-15672.

2. Remove all mounds or loose pieces of urethane adhesive from the pinch-weld area.
3. If the original window is being reused, remove all but approximately 2 mm (3/64 in) of the existing bead of
urethane adhesive from the pinch-weld flange and window by using a clean utility knife or razor blade scraper.
4. Inspect for any of the following problems in order to help prevent future breakage of the window:
• High weld
• Solder spots
• Hardened sealer
• Any other obstruction or irregularity in the pinch-weld flange
NOTE: If corrosion of the pinch-weld flange is present or if sheet metal repairs or

replacements are required, the pinch-weld flange must be refinished in order
to restore the bonding area strength. If paint repairs are required, mask the
97 of 106
flange bonding area prior to applying the color coat in order to provide a clean
primer only surface. Materials such as BASF DE15Â®, DuPont 2610Â®,
Sherwin-Williams PSE 4600 and NP70Â® and Martin-Semour 5120 and 5130Â®
11158/13320 - 14653/14980 products are approved for this application.
5. After repairing the opening as indicated, perform the following steps:

1. Remove all traces of broken glass from the outer cowl panel, seats, floor and defroster ducts.
2. Clean around the edge of the inside surface of the window with a 50/50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and
water by volume on a dampened lint free cloth.
WARNING: Refer to Window Retention Warning .
6. Verify all primers and urethane adhesive are within expiration dates.
WARNING: Failure to prep the area prior to the application of primer may cause
insufficient bonding of urethane adhesive. Insufficient bonding of urethane
adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to be ejected from the vehicle
resulting in personal injury.
NOTE: Do not apply the black primer to the existing bead (1) of the urethane adhesive
on the pinch-weld flange. Apply the primer only to nicks, scratches or the
primed surfaces.
7. Shake the pinch-weld primer black for at least 1 minute.

8. Use a new dauber in order to apply the primer to the surface of the pinch-weld flange.
9. Allow the pinch-weld primer to dry for approximately 10 minutes.
10.
With an assistant, dry fit the window (2) to the opening in order to determine the correct position.
11. Ensure that the locator pins (1) are positioned into the locator slots on the upper and lower pinch-weld flange.
12. Use masking tape to mark the locator slots.
13. Cut the masking in the center and remove the window from the opening.
NOTE: Use care when applying glass prep clear on the window. This primer dries
almost instantly, and may stain the viewing area of the window if not applied
98 of 106
evenly.
14. Use a new dauber in order to apply glass prep clear to the area approximately 18 mm (0.71 in) around the
entire perimeter of the window inner surface.
Immediately wipe the glass primed area using a clean, lint-free cloth.
15. Apply a second coat of the glass prep clear to the same area of the glass.
NOTE: The glass primer black is effective up to 8 hours after applying it to the glass.
The primed surface of the glass must be kept clean.
16. Shake the glass primer black for at least 1 minute.

17. Use a new dauber in order to apply the glass primer black to the same areas that glass prep clear was applied.
18. Allow the glass primer to dry for approximately 10 minutes.
19. Cut the applicator nozzle in order to provide a minimum urethane bead of 8 mm (0.31 in) wide and 16 mm
(0.63 in) high.
20. Use a cartridge-type caulking gun in order to apply a smooth, continuous bead of urethane adhesive.
21. Use the edge of the window as a guide for the nozzle in order to apply the urethane adhesive to the inner
surface of the window.
22.
With the aid of an assistant, place the window (2) and locator pins (1) in the opening.
23. Align the masking tape lines on the window and the body.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the window due to objects impacting an exposed edge,
upon installation, the window must rest 1 mm (0.040 in) below the surface of
the sheet metal.
24. Press firmly around the entire periphery of the window in order to wet-out the urethane bead.
25. Tape the window to the body in order to minimize movement until the urethane adhesive cures.
26. Clean any excess urethane adhesive from the body.
NOTE: Do not direct a hard stream of high pressure water to the freshly applied
urethane adhesive.
99 of 106
27. Use a soft spray of warm water in order to immediately water test the window.
28. Inspect the window for leaks.
29. If any leaks are found, use a plastic paddle in order to apply extra urethane adhesive at the leak point.
30. Retest the window for leaks.
WARNING: Insufficient curing of urethane adhesive may allow unrestrained occupants to

be ejected from the vehicle resulting in personal injury.
• For the moisture-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 6

hours at 21Â°C (70Â°F) or greater and with at least 30 percent relative
humidity. Allow at least 24 hours for the complete curing of the urethane
adhesive.
• For the chemical-curing type of urethane adhesive, allow a minimum of 1
hour.
Do NOT physically disturb the repair area until after these minimum times have
elapsed.
31. Maintain the following conditions in order to properly cure the urethane adhesive:
• Partially lower a door window in order to prevent pressure buildups when closing doors before the
urethane adhesive cures.
• Do not drive the vehicle until the urethane adhesive is cured. Refer to the above curing times.
• Do not use compressed air in order to dry the urethane adhesive.
32. Complete the window installation.

FULL-CUT METHOD DESCRIPTION
NOTE: • If corrosion of the pinch-weld flange is present, or if sheet metal repairs or

replacements are required, refinish the pinch-weld flange in order to present a
clean, primer-only surface.
• If paint repairs are required, mask the flange bonding area, prior to applying
the color coat, in order to provide a clean, primer-only surface.
• Appropriate materials for these primer applications are typically 2 component
catalyzed products. Use materials such as BASF DE15Â®, DuPont 2610Â®,
Sherwin-Williams PSE 4600 and NP70Â® and Martin-Semour 5120, 5130Â®,
11158/13320 - 14653/14980 products are approved for this application. Follow
the manufacturer's directions for the mix, the application, and the drying times.
• After repairing the opening as indicated, use adhesive systems which meet GM
Specification GMW-15672.
Use only the full cut method, also known in the field as full strip method, when installing windows.
This method includes the following:
• The replacement of a majority of the adhesive bead. Remove all but approximately 2 mm (3/64 in) of the
existing bead of adhesive from the pinch-weld flange.
100 of 106
• Apply pinch-weld primer to any exposed painted areas on the pinch-weld flange.
No mounds or loose pieces of adhesive should remain on the pinch-weld flange. Do not remove all traces of
adhesive.
POWER WINDOWS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Power Windows System Components
The power window system consists of the following components:
• Driver window switch

• Passenger window switch
• Left rear window switch
• Right rear window switch
• Window motors in each of the doors
• 30A Fuse
• 5A Fuse
• 30A Fuse
• Body control module (BCM)
Fig. 1: Identifying Power Windows AXG-AEF-AEQ System Block Diagram


S79D S79D Window Switch - Driver
M74D M74D Window Motor - Driver
K9 K9 Body Control Module
S79RR S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
101 of 106
S79LR S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
S79P S79P Window Switch - Passenger
M74P M74P Window Motor - Passenger
M74LR M74LR Window Motor - Left Rear
M74RR M74RR Window Motor - Right Rear
Driver and Passenger Express Up and Express Down Power Window Motors
The driver and passenger doors contains a window motor is smart motor that will detect excessive resistance while
performing the express up function and automatically reverse direction to prevent injury to any occupants that may
become trapped between the closing window and the door frame. The automatic reverse safety feature can be
overridden by pulling and holding the window switch.
The logic circuit within the window motor monitors the up, down and express signal circuits which are normally
equal to B+ voltage. When a switch is used on the window switch, the contacts close causing a voltage drop within
the appropriate signal circuit. The window motor will detect the voltage drop and will command the window to move
in the direction requested.
The driver window switch communicates to the BCM by a serial data circuit. When the driver wishes to control the
passenger window, the driver will use the appropriate switch on the driver window switch. When this switch is used,
a serial data message is sent to the BCM requesting the passenger window motor command, the BCM will then send
a serial data message to the passenger window motor which will then move in the direction requested.
Left Rear, Right Rear Express Down Window Motors
For the right rear and left rear doors, when their window switch is pressed in the down position, battery positive
voltage is applied to their respective window motor control circuit and ground to the other window motor control
circuit causing that window to open. When the individual window switch is pulled in the up position, voltage and
ground is applied to the window motor in the opposite direction causing that window to close. The return path to
ground is supplied through the inactive control circuit being normally grounded through the window switch.
Each rear window switch communicates to the BCM by a serial data circuit. When the driver wishes to control the
left rear or right rear window, the driver will use the appropriate switch on the driver window switch. When this
switch is used, a serial data message is sent to the BCM requesting a window motor command, the BCM will then
send a serial data message to the appropriate rear door window switch which will then command that window to
move in the direction requested.
Lockout Switch Feature
The driver power window switch contains a window lockout switch, when the driver presses the window lockout
switch, a serial data message is sent to the BCM which will send a disable command to the rear window switches,
deactivating them. The rear windows will still function normally from the switches on the driver window switch.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Rear Window Defogger System Components
The rear window defogger system consists of the following components:
• HVAC Control Module

• HVAC Controls
• Rear Defogger Relay
• Rear Defogger Grid
102 of 106
• Driver Outside Rearview Mirror
• Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror
• 40A Fuse
Fig. 2: Identifying A26-K33-X50A Defogger System Block Diagram


E17D E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass - Driver
E18 E18 Rear Defogger Grid
E17P E17P Outside Rearview Mirror Glass - Passenger
A26 A26 HVAC Controls
K33 K33 HVAC Control Module
Rear Window Defogger Operation
The rear defog control system utilizes a single zone backlight design, driven with a single relay configuration.
Additionally, up to two outside rear view mirrors can be heated if required. A switch for the customer to control the
system is provided within the HVAC controls. Also included in the HVAC controls is an indicator to inform the
customer with the current state of the system. The system is only operational when engine is running or during
remote start.
Pressing the heated rear window switch causes the HVAC controls to send a serial data message to the HVAC control
module requesting rear window defog operation. The HVAC control module upon receipt of the serial data message
will provide voltage to the coil side of the rear defogger relay, this will energize the relay causing the relay switch
contacts to close allowing B+ voltage to flow through the rear defogger grid control circuit to the rear defogger grid.
When the rear heated rear window switch is pressed and the engine is running, the rear window defogger grid will
activate and will turn off automatically depending upon the vehicle speed (refer to owner's manual for rear window
defogger operation cycles)
103 of 106
Heated Mirrors
The heated mirrors are also controlled through the rear defogger relay. Whenever the rear window defogger is turned
on battery voltage is supplied to the mirror heater elements through the left and right mirror heater element control
circuits.
STATIONARY WINDOW DESCRIPTION
Most stationary windows, specifically windshields, are retained to the body with adhesive which adheres the window
to the body, increasing structural integrity. The reinstallation of the windows with adhesive requires complete
replacement of the adhesive bead, and is known as the full cut method. All stationary windows must use a adhesive
systems which meet GM Specification GMW-15672.
URETHANE ADHESIVE DESCRIPTION
For replacement of any adhesive-installed window, use the full cut method only.
Use an adhesive that is approved by GM, Specification GMW-15672.
Use these materials based on specific manufacturer. Do NOT intermix primers or adhesives from one manufacturer
to another.
Always follow the system manufacturers instructions for application, handling, and curing.

SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool
Illustration Number/Description
104 of 106
Tool
BO-24402-A
J-24402-A
Glass Sealant Cold
Knife Remover
105 of 106
Tool
BO-39040
J-39040
Quarter Window
Remover
106 of 106
Horns And Pedestrian Alerts - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Horn Bolt 9 N.m (80 lb in)

HORN WIRING SCHEMATICS
Horn

DTC B2750
Check - Vehicle
1 of 15
DTC Descriptor
DTC B2750
Horn Relay Secondary Circuit

For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Horns System Description and Operation
Circuit Description
component.
X50A Fuse Block - Underhood The fuse block houses various fuses and relays.
KR3 Horn Relay - The component is commanded On
B2750 01
Control module K9 detects: Control - Relay Coil = Short to Voltage
B2750 02
Control module K9 detects: Control - Relay Coil = Short to Ground
B2750 04
Control module K9 detects: Control - Relay Coil = Open/High Resistance
B2750 01
P12L Horn - Left & P12R Horn - Right = Inoperative
2 of 15
B2750 02
P12L Horn - Left & P12R Horn - Right = Always On
B2750 04
P12L Horn - Left & P12R Horn - Right = Inoperative
Schematic Reference
Horn Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Perform the scan tool control function: Horn Relay Command - On and Off
Verify the component turns On and Off: P12L Horn - Left & P12R Horn - Right

3. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K9 Body Control Module
3 of 15
4. Momentarily connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control circuit terminal 19 X5 &
Ground
Verify the component turns On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire: P12 Horn

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 19 X5 @ Control module
harness & Ground
6. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 19 X5 @ Control
module harness & Ground
7. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 19 X5 @ Control module
harness & Terminal L2 X1 @ Fuse Block Harness
If less than 2 ohms - Test or replace the component: X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
Repair Instructions
• Engine Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement

SYMPTOMS - HORNS
The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables:
1. Perform Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle , before using the symptom tables in order
to verify that all of the following are true:
IMPORTANT: • There are no DTCs set
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data link
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions.
Refer to Horns System Description and Operation.
4 of 15
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the horn system.
cause the symptom.
• Perform the following if a horn buzzes or has a harsh tone.
Inspect for debris in the joint where the horn fastens to the vehicle.
Test the torque of the horn mounting hardware. The horn mounting hardware should be tightened to
a torque of 10 N.m (7 lb ft).
Intermittent
Symptom List
Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure Horns Malfunction in order to diagnose the symptom.
HORNS MALFUNCTION
Check - Vehicle

B+ - Relay Coil 2, 4 2, 4 - -
B+ - Relay Switch 2, 4 2, 4 - -
Signal - S33 Horn Switch 1, 3 5 5 -
Control - P12 Horn 2, 4 2, 4 1, 3 -
Ground - S33 Horn Switch - 5 - -
Ground - P12L Horn - Left - 2 - -
Ground - P12R Horn - Right - 4 - -
1. P12L Horn - Left = Always On
2. P12L Horn - Left = Inoperative
3. P12R Horn - Right = Always On
4. P12R Horn - Right = Inoperative
5. S33 Horn Switch = Inoperative
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Horns System Description and Operation
5 of 15
Circuit Description
B+ - Relay Coil Supplied from a fuse.
Signal - S33 Horn Switch
connected to 12 V.
Control - P12 Horn
component.
component.
Ground - S33 Horn Switch Chassis Ground
Ground - P12 Horn Chassis Ground
The horn has an electromagnet which pulls a diaphragm
inwards and simultaneously opens a contact which interrupts
P12 Horn the current through the magnet. When the diaphragm springs
back, the contact is closed and the cycle starts over. The
vibration of the diaphragm produces the sound.
The switch has a normally open contact. When the switch is
S33 Horn Switch activated, the signal circuit to the control module is
grounded.
Diagnostic Aids
Rotate the steering wheel while pressing the horn pad to identify intermittent and poor connections within the
steering column.
If the horn produces only a weak noise, inspect the following:
• Debris or water in the horn.

• Incorrect Mounting - Refer to: Fastener Specifications.
• Debris on the component.
• Vehicle components that vibrate while the horn is sounding.
Schematic Reference
Horn Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
6 of 15
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. S33 Horn Switch - Not Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Horn Switch = Inactive

3. Operate the component: S33 Horn Switch - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Horn Switch = Active

4. Perform the scan tool control function: Horn Relay Command - On and Off
Verify the component turns On and Off: P12L Horn - Left & P12R Horn - Right & The horn should emit
a clear and even tone.
If none of the components operate
P12 Horn - Inoperative or If an abnormal noise is present

Go to next step: If the component turns On and Off & If no abnormal noise is present
5. All OK.
Test 1
7 of 15
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S33 Horn Switch
& Ground Connection
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Horn Switch = Inactive
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X3 @ K9 Body Control Module
& Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: K9 Body Control Module
6. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 & Ground circuit
terminal 1
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Horn Switch = Active
Ground
8. Test or replace the component: S33 Horn Switch
Test 2
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X5 @ X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
8 of 15
4. Momentarily connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control circuit terminal G4 X5 &
B+
Verify the component turns On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire: P12L Horn -
Left & P12R Horn - Right

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: P12L Horn - Left & P12R Horn - Right
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal G4 X5 @ Component
harness & Ground
6. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal G4 X5 @ Component
harness & Ground
& Control circuit terminal G4 X5 @ Fuse Block Harness
If less than 2 ohms - Test or replace the component: P12L Horn - Left & P12R Horn - Right
5. Connect the electrical connector: X5 @ X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
Ground
Verify the component turns On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire: P12L Horn -
Left & P12R Horn - Right

harness & Ground
6. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 19 X5 @ Control
9 of 15
module harness & Ground
harness & Terminal L2 X1 @ Fuse Block Harness
Test 3

2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: P12L Horn - Left or P12R Horn - Right
5. Test for less than 1 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness &
Terminal G4 X5 @ Fuse Block Harness
6. Test or replace the component: P12 Horn
Component Testing
P12 Horn
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: P12L Horn - Left or P12R Horn - Right
3. Connect a jumper wire between the test points: Ground terminal 1 & Ground
4. Momentarily connect a 15 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control terminal 2 & 12 V
Verify the component turns On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire: P12 Horn
Replace the component: P12 Horn
10 of 15
5. All OK.
S33 Horn Switch
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S33 Horn Switch
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal terminal 2 & Ground terminal 1 - S33 Horn
Switch - Not Pressed
Replace the component: S33 Horn Switch

4. Test for less than 3 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 2 & Ground terminal 1 - S33 Horn
Switch - Pressed
Replace the component: S33 Horn Switch

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Horn Replacement - Left Side

• Horn Replacement - Right Side
• Steering Wheel Pad Accessory Wiring Harness Replacement
• Steering Wheel Airbag Replacement
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
HORN REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE
11 of 15
Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement - Left Side
Horn Bolt
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
Horn
2 Procedure
HORN REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE
12 of 15
Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement - Right Side
Horn Bolt
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
Horn
2 Procedure

HORNS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
System Description
The horn system consists of the following components:
• HORN fuse
• Underhood fuse block (contains PCB horn relay)
• Horn switch
• Horn-low note
• Horn-high note
13 of 15
Fig. 1: Identifying Horn System Block Diagram

K84 K84 Keyless Entry Control Module
S33 S33 Horn Switch
K73 K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
X50A X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
P12A P12A Horn - High Note
P12B P12B Horn - Low Note
System Operation
The vehicle horn system is activated under the following conditions:
• When the horn switch is depressed

• The BCM commands the horns ON under any of the following conditions:
When the content theft deterrent system detects a vehicle intrusion - For further information refer to
Theft Systems Description and Operation .
When the panic button is depressed on the remote control door lock transmitter - For further
information refer to Keyless Entry System Description and Operation (Without ATH) , or
Keyless Entry System Description and Operation (With ATH) .
When the keyless entry system is used to lock the vehicle, a horn chirp may sound to notify the
driver that the vehicle has been locked. The notification feature may be enabled or disabled through
personalization. For further information refer to Keyless Entry System Description and
14 of 15
Operation (Without ATH) , or Keyless Entry System Description and Operation (With ATH) .
When the OnStarÂ® system is used to sound the horns if equipped - For further information, refer
to OnStar Description and Operation (UI3) , or OnStar Description and Operation (UE1) .
Circuit Operation
Battery positive voltage is applied at all times to the horn relay coil and the horn relay switch. Pressing either of
the horn switches applies ground to the horn relay control circuit. The BCM may also apply ground to the horn
relay control circuit as described above. When the horn relay control circuit is grounded, the horn relay is
energized and battery positive voltage is applied to the horns through the horn control circuit. The horns sound
as long as ground is applied to the horn relay control circuit.
15 of 15
Image Display Cameras - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Front Grille Bolt 4.7 N.m (42 lb in)
Rearview Driver Information Camera Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Video Processing Module Nut 9 N.m (80 lb in)

IMAGE DISPLAY CAMERA WIRING SCHEMATICS
360 Degree Vision (UV2)
Rear Vision (UVB)
1 of 88
Inside Rearview Mirror Camera (DRZ)

DTC B0010
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B0010
Reverse Gear Signal Circuit
2 of 88
Reverse Gear Signal B0010 00 or B0010 00 or B0010 00 or
-
B0010 02 B0010 02 B0010 01
The control module K9 sends the gear selector lever position over serial data to the control module A11.
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Rear Vision Camera System Malfunction (UVB), or Rear
Vision Camera System Malfunction (UVC), or Rear Vision Camera System Malfunction (with UV2/UVI)
Circuit Description
Reverse Gear Signal Activated by Reverse Gear
The K9 sends a serial data message to the A11 indicating the reverse gear function that has been requested.
Reverse Gear Signal Serial Data
Rearview Camera Display = Malfunction
Schematic Reference
Image Display Camera Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
3 of 88
If the DTC is set
Refer to: DTC B2545 .

3. Inspect the following for debris or dirt: B87 Rearview Camera & Clean the components as necessary.
5. Engine Running & Transmission in Reverse
6. Verify the component activates: Backup Lamps
Refer to: Backup Lamps Malfunction .


2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 @ A11 Radio
5. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: Control circuit terminal 13 & Ground
If the test lamp does not turn On
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 13 @ Component harness &
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 13 & Ground
If infinite resistance - Test or replace the component: K9 Body Control Module
9. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 13 @ A11 Radio & Ground
10. Replace the component: A11 Radio
Repair Instructions
4 of 88
DTC B1015
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1015
Vehicle Identification Number Information
When the ignition is turned On, the control module receives the vehicle identification number (VIN) from the K9
Body Control Module.
The control module will compare the VIN received to the VIN stored in memory.
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Surround Vision Camera Description and Operation
Ignition On
The VIN stored in the control module and the VIN received via serial data from another control module are different.
Service Surround Vision Camera message = On
Night Vision System = On
A current DTC will clear when the diagnostic runs and passes.
Schematic Reference
5 of 88
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If the DTC is set
1. Program the control module: Control module that has set the DTC
3. Verify DTC B1015 is not set. If the DTC is set
If the DTC is set
Replace the component for which the DTC was set.

4. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B124B
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B124B
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Circuit
6 of 88

B+ circuit B124B or 1 1 - -
Universal Serial Bus Cable B124B B124B B124B -
Ground circuit - 1 - -
1. USB Receptacle Malfunction
Control module K157 detects: = USB Receptacle Malfunction
• DTCs Stored
• X20 Memory Card Receptacle = Inoperative

Diagnostic Aids
The customer's device may not be compatible or is defective.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
7 of 88

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 @ X20 Memory Card Receptacle
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 6 & The other end of the circuit
5. Poor connections or damaged USB cables can cause intermittent or no operation of USB devices. Inspect
connectors, terminals, and cables for damage and replace components as necessary. Ensure all USB inline
connections and connections at components are fully seated and connector position retainers/locks are secure.
6. Connect the special tool: EL-50334-50
7. Connect the tool between the test points: X2 @ X20 Memory Card Receptacle & X3 @ K157 Video
Processing Control Module
8. Ignition On
9. Verify the component activates: X20 Memory Card Receptacle
1. Test or replace the component: X20 Memory Card Receptacle
2. Verify the component activates: X20 Memory Card Receptacle
Test or replace the component: K157 Video Processing Control Module

10. Test or replace the component: Coax Cable
Repair Instructions
8 of 88
DTC B127B (WITH UVC)
DTC Descriptors
B127B
Rearview Camera Input Signal Circuit
Open/High
Ignition B127B 08, 1 B127B 08, 1 -
Camera Module signal + B127B 08, 1 B127B 08, 1 B127B 08, 2
Camera Module signal - B127B 08, 3 B127B 08, 1 B127B 08, 1
Ground - B127B 08, 1 -
Shield - 3 -
1. Rear vision camera inoperative
2. Rear vision camera image always displayed
3. Poor Quality Image
The Rearview Camera receives ignition voltage and a constant ground to power the camera. Video signal + and video
signal - circuits carry the video image from the Rearview Camera to the Radio. The Radio sends the video
information to the Info Display Module through an additional pair of video signal + and a video signal - circuits.
Additionally, the video signal circuits are shielded to prevent any interference which may lead to a loss of video
signal resolution and a degraded video image. The shield is provided a ground path by the rear vision camera. When
the transmission is placed into REVERSE, the Radio sends a request to the Info Display Module via serial data to
display the video image.
• Engine running
• Transmission in R
The video signal from the rearview camera has not been received by the Radio for 2.5 s.
• The Radio stores the DTC in memory.

• A service message may be displayed on the driver information center of info display module.
9 of 88
• A history DTC will clear once 40 malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
The rearview camera system is especially susceptible to interference from aftermarket electrical devices such as
charge cords, USB adapters, etc. To avoid mis-diagnosis, ensure any aftermarket electrical devices are
removed/disconnected before proceeding with this diagnostic.
A poor video image can be caused by ice, snow, and mud buildup on the lens of the rearview camera. Also, extreme
lighting conditions can affect performance, such as operating in the dark or with bright sunlight shining on the
camera. Extreme high or low temperatures can also affect the image quality. An open in the shield of the video signal
circuit can also cause a distorted screen.
Terminal fretting or incorrectly seated connectors can cause a poor image displayed condition. Check the circuit
terminals for fretting or incorrectly seated connector. If the condition is intermittent or cannot be duplicated,
disconnect the connectors and add Nyogel lubricant 760G. This procedure will correct the high resistance condition
due to terminal fretting corrosion.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: If the condition is intermittent or cannot be duplicated, disconnect the connectors

and add Nyogel lubricant 760G. This procedure will correct the high resistance
condition due to terminal fretting corrosion.
1. Verify P17 Info Display Module displays infotainment system information properly.
If infotainment system information does not display properly
Refer to Symptoms - Entertainment .
Go to next step: If infotainment system information displays properly

2. Verify there is no debris on the B87 Rearview Camera lens and that the bezel and bezel seal are not damaged.
10 of 88
If debris is found on the lens
Clean the lens. If the lens, bezel, or bezel seal are damaged, replace as necessary.
Go to next step: If there is no debris on the lens

4. Verify the backup lamps are illuminated.
If the backup lamps are not illuminated
Refer to Backup Lamps Malfunction .
Go to next step: If the backup lamps are illuminated

6. Verify a clear rear vision image is displayed on the P17 Info Display Module.
If a clear image is not displayed
Go to next step: If a clear image is displayed

7. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the B87 Rearview Camera harness connector. It may
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 5 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF.
Mismatch .
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the B87 Rearview Camera.
11 of 88
5. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio, ignition ON.
NOTE: Before testing the two signal circuits, inspect for the wires being pinched, cut,
damaged, or having loose/poor connections or terminal tension at all related
components, which can cause camera image issues.
6. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminals listed below and ground:
• A11 Radio (+) circuit terminal 12 X2
• A11 Radio (-) circuit terminal 13 X2
If 1 V or greater

7. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminals listed below and ground:

8. Test for less than 2 Ω between the A11 Radio (+) circuit terminal 12 X2 and the B87 Rearview Camera signal
(+) circuit terminal 1.
If 2 Ω or greater

9. Test for less than 2 Ω between the A11 Radio (-) circuit terminal 13 X2 and the B87 Rearview Camera signal
If 2 Ω or greater
Test the signal circuit for an open/high resistance.

10. Add Nyogel lubricant 760G to electrical terminals.
11. Reconnect all electrical connections.
If a blank blue screen or distorted image is displayed
1. Replace the B87 Rearview Camera.
If a clear rear vision image is not displayed
Go to next step: If a clear rear vision image is displayed
12 of 88
4. All OK.
If a blank black screen is displayed

14. Verify DTC B127B is not set.
If DTC B127B is set
Go to next step: If DTC B127B is not set

15. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B127B (WITH UVB)

Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B395A
Rearview Camera

Coax - Camera Video Signal B395A 08 or B395A 08 or 72 or B395A 08 or B395A 08 or 72 or
72 or 3A 3A 72 or 3A 3A
or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1
1. Rear vision camera image distorted or blue or black screen
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Rear Vision Camera Description and Operation (UVB)
This camera delivers live video of what is behind the vehicle to
B87 Rearview Camera
a display on the instrument panel.
13 of 88
The control module contains a microprocessor used to process
A11 Radio
input data to control outputs.
Video Input = Not Received
Rearview Camera Display = Inoperative
Diagnostic Aids
The following conditions could cause component performance issues: B87 Rearview Camera
• Ambient Light Intensity - High/Low

• Camera Blocked - Debris/Ice/Mud/Snow
• Temperature - High/Low
An open in the shield of the video signal circuit can cause a distorted screen.
An open in the backup lamp control circuit, defective backup lamps, or incorrect/aftermarket backup lamps can
cause erratic circuit behavior such as unwanted voltage on circuit when vehicle is no longer in REVERSE. The rear
vision image display remaining active after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE can also be an indication of
backup lamp control circuit issues.
Starting the vehicle and immediately placing the shifter in Reverse can also cause the Rear Vision Camera guidelines
to not be present during that Reverse cycle due to the system not being given enough time to fully initialize. If safely
coming to a stop, placing the transmission in Park for a moment, and then shifting to Reverse again restores the Rear
Vision Camera guidelines, this scenario is normal and no repair attempts should be made.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
14 of 88
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
• EL-52552 COAX FAKRA CABLE ADAPTER KIT

Refer to: Symptoms - Entertainment .

If the DTC is set

4. Inspect the following for debris or dirt: B87 Rearview Camera & Clean the components as necessary.
7. Verify the component activates: Backup Lamps
Refer to: Backup Lamps Malfunction .

8. Verify a clear rear vision image is displayed on the component: A11 Radio
If no clear image is displayed

9. All OK.

3. Wait for greater than 5 s.
4. Connect appropriate EL-52552 pinout tool to A11 Radio
15 of 88
6. Test for 7 to 11 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal OG @ A11 Radio & Ground (component
side)
If not between 7 and 11 V
Replace the component: A11 Radio
Go to next step: If between 7 and 11 V

8. Disconnect the electrical connector: B87 Rearview Camera
9. Locate the appropriate pinout adapter and load test loop adapter from EL-52552 COAX FAKRA Cable
Adaptor Kit.
10. Connect the 2 adapters together, measure and record the resistance between the terminals at the pinout adapter.
11. Disconnect the 2 adapters and connect each one to the appropriate end of the coax cable.
12. At the pinout adapter test terminals, measure the total resistance of the coax cable loop including the connected
load test adapter.
If not within 5 Ω of the reading from step 10.
Go to next step: If within 5 Ω of the reading from step 10.

13. Replace the component: B87 Rearview Camera
If the DTC is set

17. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Rearview Driver Information Camera Replacement

DTC B390F
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B390F
16 of 88
Frontview Camera

Coax - Camera Video Signal (B174
B399A 02 or B399A 05 or B390F 08, 4B, 39, 53,
Frontview Camera to K157 Video B399A 05 or 1
1 1 54, 58, 66, 3C or 1
Processing Control Module)
1. Frontview Camera image distorted or black
Circuit Description
Camera Video Signal Coaxial Camera Signal
DTC B390F 39, 3C, 58
The Video Processing Control Module has detected a Frontview Camera internal malfunction
DTC B390F 08
The Video Processing Control Module has detected a camera video signal circuit malfunction.
DTC B390F 66
The Video Processing Control Module has detected incorrect Frontview Camera mounting.
DTC B390F 4B
The Video Processing Control Module has determined Frontview Camera calibration not complete.
DTC B390F 53, 54
The Video Processing Control Module has determined the Frontview Camera temperature is outside normal
operating range.
17 of 88
Diagnostic Aids
The following conditions could cause component performance issues: B174G Frontview Camera - Grille

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
1. Verify no other Video Processor Control Module DTCs are present

If any other Video Processor Control Module DTCs are set
Go to next step: If no other Video Processor Control Module DTCs are set
2. Perform the following visual inspections:
• Misalignment of the components: B174G Frontview Camera - Grille
• Visible Damage
• Dirty
Go to next step: If none of the conditions exists
18 of 88
3. Refer to: Circuit/System Testing
Circuit/System Testing DTC B390F 39, 3C

2. Replace the component: B174G Frontview Camera - Grille
If DTC B390F is not set
All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC B390F is set

4. Replace the component: K157 Video Processing Control Module
Circuit/System Testing DTC B390F 08

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X5 @ K157 Video Processing Control Module
4. Connect appropriate EL-52552 pinout tool to K157 Video Processing Control Module
6. Test for 7 to 11 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal GN @ K157 Video Processing Control
Module & Ground (component side)
Replace the component: K157 Video Processing Control Module

NOTE: Before testing the coax cable, check the cable's exterior for being pinched, cut,
damaged, or having loose connections at the components, all of which can
cause reception issues.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector: B174G Frontview Camera - Grille

Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.

19 of 88
If the DTC is set

17. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing DTC B390F 66, 58, 4B

2. Operate the vehicle under the following conditions:
• During the day
• On a straight road
• Distance Traveled = Greater than 0.5 km (0.3 mi)
All OK.

7. Test or replace the component: B174G Frontview Camera - Grille
All OK.

9. Test or replace the component: K157 Video Processing Control Module
Circuit/System Testing DTC B390F 53, 54
NOTE: DTC B390F 53 and 54 can set due to extreme environment temperature
conditions and not necessarily due to a camera system defect.

2. Place vehicle in an area where a ambient temperature is 15 - 25Â°C (59 - 77Â°F) with engine OFF.
3. Wait at least 30 minutes.
All OK.

20 of 88
All OK.

Repair Instructions
• Front View Driver Information Camera Replacement

DTC B395A (WITH UVB)

• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach
• Diagnostic Procedure Instructions provides an overview of each diagnostic category
DTC Descriptor
DTC B127B
DTC B127B
Rearview Camera
DTC B395A
Rearview Camera

Camera Video Signal B127B 2B or B127B 2B or
B127B 2B or B127B 2B or B395A
B395A 08, 72 B395A 08, 72
B395A 08, 72 or 1 08, 72, 3A or 1
or 1 or 1
1. Rearview Camera = Malfunction
When the transmission is placed into REVERSE, a signal is sent to the Radio indicating that camera operation is
requested. The rearview camera sends video information to the radio through a coax cable. The coax cable also
provides power from the Radio to the rearview camera.
21 of 88
• Engine running
The video signal from the rearview camera has not been received by the Radio or is frozen for 2.5 s.


Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference
Rear Vision Camera Description and Operation (UVB)
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
22 of 88
Special Tools

Clean the lens using water and a soft cloth. If the lens, bezel, or bezel seal are damaged, replace as
necessary.

NOTE: An open in the backup lamp control circuit, defective backup lamps, or
incorrect/aftermarket backup lamps can cause erratic circuit behavior such as
unwanted voltage on circuit when vehicle is no longer in REVERSE. The rear
vision image display remaining active after the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE can also be an indication of backup lamp control circuit issues.


NOTE: A poor quality image is an image that has flickering, blinking, excessively
blue/yellow hue, and/or fog/haze such that it obstructs the driver's view out the
rear of the vehicle.

7. All OK.
23 of 88
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable connector at the B87 Rearview Camera, and wait for 5
sec.
2. Connect appropriate EL-52552 pinout tool to B87 Rearview Camera Harness Connector
3. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode, test for 7 - 11 V between the harness coax cable center conductor and the
ground shield.
If the value is within the range of 7 - 11 V
2. Engine Running, parking brake set, transmission in Reverse.
3. Verify the repair corrected the DTC/symptom.
If a DTC or symptom exists
Go to next step: If no DTC or symptom exists
Go to next step: If the value is outside range of 7 - 11 V

4. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect X5 harness coax connector at the A11 Radio and wait for 5 sec.
6. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode, test for 7 - 11 V at the A11 Radio.
If the value is outside of range of 7 - 11 V
Go to next step: If the value is within the range of 7 - 11 V

7. Replace the coax cable.
Component Testing
reception issues.
Coax Cable Test
Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.
24 of 88

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B395A (WITH UV2, IN VIDEO PROCESSING CONTROL MODULE)

Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B395A
Rearview Camera
Open/High Signal
Circuit Short to Ground Resistance Short to Voltage Performance
K157 Video K157 Video K157 Video K157 Video
Processing Processing Processing Processing Control
Coax - Camera Video Signal Control Module = Control Module = Control Module = Module = B395A
(B87 Rearview Camera to K157 B395A 08 or B395A 08 or B395A 08 or 08, 4B, 39, 53, 54,
Video Processing Control B399B 02 B399B 05 B399B 05 58, 66, 3C
Module) A11 Radio = A11 Radio = A11 Radio = A11 Radio =
B395A 08 or 72 B395A 08 or 72 B395A 08 or 72 B395A 08 or 72
or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1
Coax - Camera Video Signal A11 Radio = A11 Radio = A11 Radio =
(K157 Video Processing Control B395A 08 or 72 B395A 08 or 72 B395A 08 or 72 -
Module to A11 Radio) or 3A or 3A or 3A
Circuit Description
25 of 88
DTC B395A 39, 3C, 58
The Video Processing Control Module has detected a Rear Camera internal malfunction
DTC B395A 08
DTC B395A 66
The Video Processing Control Module has detected incorrect Rear Camera mounting.
DTC B395A 4B
The Video Processing Control Module has determined Rear Camera calibration not complete.
DTC B395A 53, 54
The Video Processing Control Module has determined the Rear Camera temperature is outside normal operating
range.
Diagnostic Aids
The following conditions could cause component performance issues: Rearview Camera

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
26 of 88
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools

• Misalignment of the components: B87 Rearview Camera
• Visible Damage
• Dirty
Circuit/System Testing DTC B395A 39, 3C

If DTC B395A is not set
All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC B395A is set

Circuit/System Testing DTC B395A 08

27 of 88
6. Test for 7 to 11 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2-RD @ K157 Video Processing Control


Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.

If the DTC is set

17. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing DTC B395A 66, 58, 4B

• During the day
28 of 88
All OK.

7. Test or replace the component: B87 Rearview Camera
All OK.

Circuit/System Testing DTC B395A 53, 54
NOTE: DTC B395A 53 and 54 can set due to extreme environment temperature

All OK.

All OK.

Repair Instructions

DTC B395A (WITH UV2, IN RADIO)

Vehicle
29 of 88
DTC Descriptor
DTC B395A
Rearview Camera
Open/High Signal
B395A 08 or 72 B395A 08 or 72 B395A 08 or 72 B395A 08 or 72
or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1
Coax - Camera Video Signal A11 Radio = A11 Radio = A11 Radio =
(K157 Video Processing Control B395A 08 or 72 B395A 08 or 72 B395A 08 or 72 -
Module to A11 Radio) or 3A or 3A or 3A
Circuit Description
The Radio has detected a video signal circuit malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
30 of 88
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
1. Verify no Video Processor Control Module DTCs are present


2. Verify the scan tool can communicate with the following component: K157 Video Processing Control Module
If the scan tool cannot communicate with the component
Refer to: Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Gateway Isolated Low Speed GMLAN Device
Go to next step: If the scan tool can communicate with the component


31 of 88
Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.

If the DTC is set

12. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B395B
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B395B
Sideview Camera - Left

Coax - Camera Video Signal (B225L B395B 08, 4B, 39,
Sideview Camera - Left to K157 B399C 02 or 1 B399C 05 or 1 B399C 05 or 1 53, 54, 58, 66, 3C or
Video Processing Control Module) 1
32 of 88
1. Left Sideview Camera image distorted or black
Circuit Description
DTC B395B 39, 3C, 58
The Video Processing Control Module has detected a Left Sideview Camera internal malfunction
DTC B395B 08
DTC B395B 66
The Video Processing Control Module has detected incorrect Left Sideview Camera mounting.
DTC B395B 4B
The Video Processing Control Module has determined Left Sideview Camera calibration not complete.
DTC B395B 53, 54
The Video Processing Control Module has determined the Left Sideview Camera temperature is outside normal
operating range.
Diagnostic Aids
The following conditions could cause component performance issues: Sideview Camera - Left

33 of 88
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools

• Misalignment of the components: Sideview Camera - Left
• Visible Damage
• Dirty
Circuit/System Testing DTC B395B 39, 3C

2. Replace the component: B225L Sideview Camera - Left
If DTC B395B is not set
34 of 88
All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC B395B is set

Circuit/System Testing DTC B395B 08

6. Test for 7 to 11 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1-TN @ K157 Video Processing Control

8. Disconnect the electrical connector: B225L Sideview Camera - Left

Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.

If the DTC is set

17. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing DTC B395B 66, 58, 4B
35 of 88
• During the day
All OK.

7. Test or replace the component: B225L Sideview Camera - Left
All OK.

Circuit/System Testing DTC B395B 53, 54
NOTE: DTC B395B 53 and 54 can set due to extreme environment temperature

All OK.

All OK.

Repair Instructions
36 of 88
• Side View Driver Information Camera Replacement

DTC B395C
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B395C
Sideview Camera - Right

Coax - Camera Video Signal (B225R B395C 08, 4B, 39,
B399D 02 or B399D 05 or
Sideview Camera - Right to K157 B399D 05 or 1 53, 54, 58, 66, 3C or
1 1
1. Right Sideview Camera image distorted or black
Circuit Description
DTC B395C 4B, 39, 53, 54, 3C
Component Internal Malfunction
DTC B395C 08
An internal evaluation logic has detected a malfunction of the circuit.
DTC B395C 66, 58
37 of 88
Incorrect Mounting Detected
DTC B395C 39, 3C, 58
The Video Processing Control Module has detected a Right Sideview Camera internal malfunction
DTC B395C 08
DTC B395C 66
The Video Processing Control Module has detected incorrect Right Sideview Camera mounting.
DTC B395C 4B
The Video Processing Control Module has determined Right Sideview Camera calibration not complete.
DTC B395C 53, 54
The Video Processing Control Module has determined the Right Sideview Camera temperature is outside normal
operating range.
Diagnostic Aids
The following conditions could cause component performance issues: B225R Sideview Camera - Right

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
38 of 88
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools

• Misalignment of the components: B225R Sideview Camera - Right
• Visible Damage
• Dirty
Circuit/System Testing DTC B395C 39, 3C

2. Replace the component: B225R Sideview Camera - Right
3. Verify DTC B395C is not set.
If DTC B395C is not set
All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC B395C is set

Circuit/System Testing DTC B395C 08

39 of 88

8. Disconnect the electrical connector: B225R Sideview Camera - Right

Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.

If the DTC is set

17. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing DTC B395C 66, 58, 4B

• During the day
40 of 88
All OK.

7. Test or replace the component: B225R Sideview Camera - Right
All OK.

Circuit/System Testing DTC B395C 53, 54
NOTE: DTC B395C 53 and 54 can set due to extreme environment temperature

All OK.

All OK.

Repair Instructions

DTC B399A
Vehicle
41 of 88
DTC Descriptor
DTC B399A
Frontview Camera

Coax - Camera Video Signal (B174G
B399A 02 or B399A 05 or B390F 08, 4B, 39, 53,
Frontview Camera - Grille to K157 B399A 05 or 1
1 1 54, 58, 66, 3C or 1
Video Processing Control Module)
1. Frontview Camera image distorted or black
Circuit Description
DTC B399A 02
The control module detects a short to ground.
DTC B399A 05
The control module detects a short to voltage.
Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference
42 of 88
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools

6. Test for 7 to 11 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal GN @ K157 Video Processing Control

8. Disconnect the electrical connector: B174G Frontview Camera - Grille

Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.
43 of 88

If the DTC is set

17. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Front View Driver Information Camera Replacement

DTC B399B
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B399B
Rearview Camera
Open/High Signal
B395A 08, 72 B395A 08, 72 B395A 08, 72 B395A 08, 72
or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1
44 of 88
Open/High Signal
Circuit Description
DTC B399B 02
DTC B399B 05
Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
45 of 88
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools



Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.

If the DTC is set
46 of 88
17. All OK.
Repair Instructions

DTC B399C
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B399C
Sideview Camera - Left

Coax - Camera Video Signal (B225L B395B 08, 4B, 39,
Sideview Camera - Left to K157 B399C 02 or 1 B399C 05 or 1 B399C 05 or 1 53, 54, 58, 66, 3C or
1. Left Sideview Camera image distorted or black
Circuit Description
DTC B399C 02
DTC B399C 05
47 of 88
Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools

48 of 88
8. Disconnect the electrical connector: B225L Sideview Camera - Left

Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.

If the DTC is set

17. All OK.
Repair Instructions

DTC B399D
Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B399D
Sideview Camera - Right
49 of 88

Circuit Ground Resistance Voltage
Signal Performance
Coax - Camera Video Signal (B225R B395C 08, 4B, 39,
B399D 02 or B399D 05 or
Sideview Camera - Right to K157 B399D 05 or 1 53, 54, 58, 66, 3C or
1 1
1. Right Sideview Camera image distorted or black
Circuit Description
DTC B399D 02
DTC B399D 05
Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference
50 of 88
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools


8. Disconnect the electrical connector: B225R Sideview Camera - Right

Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.

51 of 88
16. Verify DTC B399D is not set.
If the DTC is set

17. All OK.
Repair Instructions

SYMPTOMS - IMAGE DISPLAY CAMERAS
NOTE: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom lists.
1. In order to verify that all of the following conditions are fulfilled before using the symptom lists perform the
Diagnostic System Check: Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
• No DTCs Stored
2. Review the system description and operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer
to:
• Rear Vision Camera Description and Operation (UVB)
• Surround Vision Camera Description and Operation
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which may affect the operation of the system. Refer to: Checking
Aftermarket Accessories
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components, for obvious damage or conditions, which may
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to: Testing for
Symptom List
For more information see:
• Rear Vision Camera System Malfunction (UVB), or Rear Vision Camera System Malfunction (UVC), or
Rear Vision Camera System Malfunction (with UV2/UVI)
• Surround Vision Camera System Malfunction
REARVIEW CAMERA FULL DISPLAY MIRROR MALFUNCTION

52 of 88
Vehicle

Camera Video Signal 1 1 1 1
1. Rearview Camera Full Display Mirror image distorted or blank
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Rearview Camera Full Display Mirror Description and
Operation
B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror This camera delivers live video of what is behind the vehicle to
Camera a display on the instrument panel.
The mirror is used to show objects behind the vehicle and may
contain various other functions.
• Garage Door Opener Transmitter

A10 Inside Rearview Mirror • Control switches and status LEDs for the OnStar system.
• Rearview Camera Display
• Mirror Dimming
• Compass
Diagnostic Aids
The following conditions could cause component performance issues: B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror
Camera

Schematic Reference
53 of 88
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
1. Inspect the following for debris or dirt: B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror Camera & Clean the
components as necessary.
3. Inside Rearview Mirror = ON
4. Verify a clear rear vision image is displayed on the component: A10 Inside Rearview Mirror

5. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 @ A10 Inside Rearview Mirror
1. Disconnect the concerned ground connection.
The other end of the circuit @ Ground terminal
5. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: Ignition circuit terminal 2 & Ground
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ignition circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness &
54 of 88
Output terminal @ Fuse
If less than 2 ohms - Refer to: Power Mode Mismatch
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Ignition circuit terminal 2 & Ground
If infinite resistance - Test or replace the component: KR73 Ignition Main Relay
7. Connect the electrical connector: X1 @ A10 Inside Rearview Mirror
12. Test for 7 to 11 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal BK @ A10 Inside Rearview Mirror &
Ground (component side)
Replace the component: A10 Inside Rearview Mirror

14. Disconnect the electrical connector: B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror Camera
15. Connect appropriate EL-52552 pinout tool to Coax Cable
16. Test for less than 5 ohms between the test points: Coax Cable Center & The other end of the circuit
Replace the component: Coax Cable

17. Test for greater than 5 ohms between the test points: Coax Cable Outer Shield & The other end of the circuit

18. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Coax Cable Outer Shield & Coax Cable Center
55 of 88
19. Replace the component: B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror Camera
If the repair did not correct the DTC/symptom
Go to next step: If the repair corrected the DTC/symptom

23. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• High Mount Stop Lamp Replacement for B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror Camera replacement
• Inside Rearview Mirror Replacement

Vehicle

Camera Video Signal 1 1 1 1
1. Rearview Camera Full Display Mirror image distorted or blank
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Rearview Camera Full Display Mirror Description and
Operation
B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror This camera delivers live video of what is behind the vehicle to
Camera a display on the instrument panel.
The mirror is used to show objects behind the vehicle and may
contain various other functions.
A10 Inside Rearview Mirror • Garage Door Opener Transmitter

• Control switches and status LEDs for the OnStar system.
• Rearview Camera Display
56 of 88
• Mirror Dimming
• Compass
Diagnostic Aids
The following conditions could cause component performance issues: B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror
Camera

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
1. Inspect the following for debris or dirt: B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror Camera & Clean the
components as necessary.
57 of 88
5. All OK.

1. Disconnect the concerned ground connection.
The other end of the circuit @ Ground terminal
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ignition circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness &
Output terminal @ Fuse
If infinite resistance - Test or replace the component: KR73 Ignition Main Relay
7. Connect the electrical connector: X1 @ A10 Inside Rearview Mirror
10. Connect appropriate EL-52552 pinout tool to X2 @ A10 Inside Rearview Mirror (component side)
12. Test for 7 to 11 V between the test points: RED test point and BLACK test point of EL-52552 pinout tool.

14. Disconnect the electrical connector: B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror Camera
15. Connect appropriate EL-52552 pinout tool to Coax Cable
58 of 88
16. Test for less than 5 ohms between the test points: Coax Cable Center & The other end of the circuit

17. Test for greater than 5 ohms between the test points: Coax Cable Outer Shield & The other end of the circuit

18. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Coax Cable Outer Shield & Coax Cable Center

19. Replace the component: B352 Video Display Inside Rearview Mirror Camera

23. All OK.
Repair Instructions

REAR VISION CAMERA SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (UVB)

DTC Descriptor
DTC B127B
59 of 88
DTC B127B
Rearview Camera
DTC B395A
Rearview Camera

Camera Video Signal B127B 2B or B127B 2B or
B127B 2B or B127B 2B or B395A
B395A 08, 72 B395A 08, 72
B395A 08, 72 or 1 08, 72, 3A or 1
or 1 or 1
1. Rearview Camera = Malfunction
• Engine running
The video signal from the rearview camera has not been received by the Radio or is frozen for 2.5 s.


Diagnostic Aids
60 of 88
Schematic Reference
Rear Vision Camera Description and Operation (UVB)
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools

Clean the lens using water and a soft cloth. If the lens, bezel, or bezel seal are damaged, replace as
necessary.

NOTE: An open in the backup lamp control circuit, defective backup lamps, or
incorrect/aftermarket backup lamps can cause erratic circuit behavior such as
61 of 88
unwanted voltage on circuit when vehicle is no longer in REVERSE. The rear
vision image display remaining active after the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE can also be an indication of backup lamp control circuit issues.


NOTE: A poor quality image is an image that has flickering, blinking, excessively
blue/yellow hue, and/or fog/haze such that it obstructs the driver's view out the
rear of the vehicle.

7. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable connector at the B87 Rearview Camera, and wait for 5
sec.
3. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode, test for 7 - 11 V between the harness coax cable center conductor and the
ground shield.
If the value is within the range of 7 - 11 V
2. Engine Running, parking brake set, transmission in Reverse.
If a DTC or symptom exists
Go to next step: If no DTC or symptom exists
Go to next step: If the value is outside range of 7 - 11 V

4. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect X5 harness coax connector at the A11 Radio and wait for 5 sec.
6. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode, test for 7 - 11 V at the A11 Radio.
If the value is outside of range of 7 - 11 V
62 of 88
Go to next step: If the value is within the range of 7 - 11 V
7. Replace the coax cable.
Component Testing
reception issues.
Coax Cable Test
Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
REAR VISION CAMERA SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (UVC)

DTC Descriptors
B127B
Open/High
63 of 88
Open/High
Ignition B127B 08, 1 B127B 08, 1 -
Camera Module signal + B127B 08, 1 B127B 08, 1 B127B 08, 2
Camera Module signal - B127B 08, 3 B127B 08, 1 B127B 08, 1
Ground - B127B 08, 1 -
Shield - 3 -
1. Rear vision camera inoperative
2. Rear vision camera image always displayed
3. Poor Quality Image
The Rearview Camera receives ignition voltage and a constant ground to power the camera. Video signal + and video
signal - circuits carry the video image from the Rearview Camera to the Radio. The Radio sends the video
information to the Info Display Module through an additional pair of video signal + and a video signal - circuits.
Additionally, the video signal circuits are shielded to prevent any interference which may lead to a loss of video
signal resolution and a degraded video image. The shield is provided a ground path by the rear vision camera. When
the transmission is placed into REVERSE, the Radio sends a request to the Info Display Module via serial data to
display the video image.
• Engine running
The video signal from the rearview camera has not been received by the Radio for 2.5 s.


Diagnostic Aids
The rearview camera system is especially susceptible to interference from aftermarket electrical devices such as
charge cords, USB adapters, etc. To avoid mis-diagnosis, ensure any aftermarket electrical devices are
removed/disconnected before proceeding with this diagnostic.
Terminal fretting or incorrectly seated connectors can cause a poor image displayed condition. Check the circuit
terminals for fretting or incorrectly seated connector. If the condition is intermittent or cannot be duplicated,
disconnect the connectors and add Nyogel lubricant 760G. This procedure will correct the high resistance condition
64 of 88
due to terminal fretting corrosion.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: If the condition is intermittent or cannot be duplicated, disconnect the connectors

and add Nyogel lubricant 760G. This procedure will correct the high resistance
condition due to terminal fretting corrosion.

Clean the lens. If the lens, bezel, or bezel seal are damaged, replace as necessary.


65 of 88

7. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the B87 Rearview Camera harness connector. It may
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
Mismatch .
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the B87 Rearview Camera.
5. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A11 Radio, ignition ON.
NOTE: Before testing the two signal circuits, inspect for the wires being pinched, cut,
damaged, or having loose/poor connections or terminal tension at all related
components, which can cause camera image issues.
6. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminals listed below and ground:
If 1 V or greater

7. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminals listed below and ground:
66 of 88

8. Test for less than 2 Ω between the A11 Radio (+) circuit terminal 12 X2 and the B87 Rearview Camera signal
If 2 Ω or greater

9. Test for less than 2 Ω between the A11 Radio (-) circuit terminal 13 X2 and the B87 Rearview Camera signal
If 2 Ω or greater
Test the signal circuit for an open/high resistance.

10. Add Nyogel lubricant 760G to electrical terminals.
11. Reconnect all electrical connections.
If a blank blue screen or distorted image is displayed
If a clear rear vision image is not displayed

4. All OK.
If a blank black screen is displayed

If DTC B127B is set

15. All OK.
Repair Instructions
67 of 88
REAR VISION CAMERA SYSTEM MALFUNCTION (WITH UV2/UVI)

Vehicle
Open/High Signal
B395A 08, 72 B395A 08, 72 B395A 08, 72 B395A 08, 72
or 1 or 1 or 1 or 1
Coax - Camera Video Signal A11 Radio = A11 Radio =
A11 Radio =
(K157 Video Processing Control B395A 08, 72, B395A 08, 72, -
B395A 08, 72, 3A
Module to A11 Radio) 3A 3A
Circuit Description
Diagnostic Aids

If the Video Processing Control Module cannot calibrate all cameras, the rear vision image may be displayed without
projected path lines.
68 of 88
Starting the vehicle and immediately placing the shifter in Reverse can also cause the Rear Vision Camera guidelines
to not be present during that Reverse cycle due to the system not being given enough time to fully initialize. If safely
coming to a stop, placing the transmission in Park for a moment, and then shifting to Reverse again restores the Rear
Vision Camera guidelines, this scenario is normal and no repair attempts should be made.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools


If the DTC is set

• Visible Damage
• Dirty
69 of 88
5. Verify the surround vision camera system is calibrated.
If the surround vision camera image displays an hour glass.
Refer to Video Processing Control Module Calibration
Go to next step: If the surround vision camera image does not display an hour glass.
6. If equipped, remove SD card from X20 Memory Card Receptacle (with XVR).
If rear camera vision system works properly
Replace SD card with FAT32 formatted Class 10 or higher branded SDHC memory card and verify
Surround Vision Camera system displays properly.
Go to next step: If rear camera vision system does not work properly



Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.
70 of 88

17. All OK.
Repair Instructions

MEMORY CARD RECEPTACLE MALFUNCTION (SURROUND VISION CAMERA SYSTEM WITH

XVR)
The surround vision camera system has a X20 Memory Card Receptacle located in the luggage compartment. The
X20 Memory Card Receptacle interfaces with the K157 Video Processing Control Module via a USB cable. The X20
Memory Card Receptacle also receives fused battery voltage and ground from the K157 Video Processing Control
Module. The K157 Video Processing Control Module uses the memory card as a mass storage device, similar to a
USB storage device.
Diagnostic Aids
USB cables must be fully connected to function properly. Ensure USB cables are properly connected at all
components.
Schematic Reference
Surround Vision Camera Description and Operation
71 of 88
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
EL-50334-50 GM Infotainment Tester Kit
1. Ignition ON, Surround Vision Camera system ON.

2. Verify the Surround Vision Camera images displays properly.
If Surround Vision Camera images do not display properly
Refer to Surround Vision Camera System Malfunction
Go to next step: If Surround Vision Camera images displays properly

3. Verify the Surround Vision Camera system plays recordings on the P17 Info Display Module.
If Surround Vision Camera system displays NO SD CARD INSERTED
1. Ensure SD card is a FAT32 formatted Class 10 or higher branded SDHC memory card.
If SD card is a FAT32 formatted Class 10 or higher branded SDHC memory card
Go to next step: If SD card is not FAT32 formatted Class 10 or higher branded SDHC
memory card
Go to next step: Replace SD card with FAT32 formatted Class 10 or higher branded SDHC
memory card and verify Surround Vision Camera system displays properly.
If Surround Vision Camera system does not display or play recordings properly
Go to next step: If Surround Vision Camera system displays and plays recordings properly
4. Verify the Surround Vision Camera system records properly to an SD card.
If Surround Vision Camera system does not record properly
1. Verify a properly formatted SD card is inserted in X20 Memory Card Receptacle
If VIDEO PLAYER UNAVAILABLE or VIDEO FILE NOT SUPPORTED message displayed
Format SD card
Go to next step: If formatted SD card is inserted
72 of 88
Go to next step: Refer to Circuit/System Testing.
Go to next step: If Surround Vision Camera system records properly

5. All OK.

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X20 Memory Card Receptacle.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
4. Connect the X1 harness connector at the X20 Memory Card Receptacle.
5. Verify the USB cable is properly connected at all components and in-line connections, and there is no damage
to the cable or connections.

6. Connect the EL-50334-50 to the X20 Memory Card Receptacle connector X2 and the K157 Video Processing
Control Module connector X2.
7. Ignition ON, Surround Vision Camera system ON.
8. Verify the memory card receptacle operates properly while operating the Surround Vision Camera system.
If memory card receptacle does not operate properly
1. Replace the X20 Memory Card Receptacle.
2. Verify the memory card receptacle operates properly while operating the Surround Vision Camera
system.
If memory card receptacle does not operate properly
Replace the K157 Video Processing Control Module.
Go to next step: If memory card receptacle operates properly
73 of 88
Go to next step: If memory card receptacle operates properly
9. Replace the USB harness.
Repair Instructions
SURROUND VISION CAMERA SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

Vehicle
Circuit Description
Diagnostic Aids

If the Video Processing Control Module cannot calibrate all cameras, the rear vision image may be displayed without
projected path lines.
Schematic Reference
74 of 88
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools


3. Verify DTC B198E or B2545 is not set.
If the DTC is set
Refer to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

• Visible Damage
• Dirty
5. Verify the surround vision camera system is calibrated.
If the surround vision camera image displays an hour glass.
Refer to Video Processing Control Module Calibration
Go to next step: If the surround vision camera image does not display an hour glass.
Circuit/System Testing One camera image malfunction

2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: @ K157 Video Processing Control Module
75 of 88
6. Test for 7 to 11 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal @ K157 Video Processing Control Module &
Ground (component side)

8. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: @ Surround Vision Camera

Adaptor Kit.
load test adapter.

13. Replace the component: Surround Vision Camera

17. All OK.
Circuit/System Testing All camera images malfunction

3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 3 and 12 & Ground
1. Disconnect the appropriate ground connection:
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 3 and 12 @ Component
76 of 88
5. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: Each B+ circuit terminal & Ground
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Each B+ circuit terminal @ Component harness &
Fuse
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Each B+ circuit terminal @ Component harness &
Ground
Repair Instructions

REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
SIDE VIEW DRIVER INFORMATION CAMERA REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1.
Outside Rearview Mirror Housing Bezel (2) - Remove - Outside Rearview Mirror Housing Bezel
Replacement
77 of 88
2.
Outside Rearview Mirror Inner Actuator (2) - Remove - Outside Rearview Mirror Actuator Replacement
3.
Pull the outside mirror housing cover (1) from the lower part of the mirror and slide over internal components.
4.
Using the appropriate tool, press down and inward on the tab of the side view driver information camera
harness connector (1).
5.
78 of 88
Release the tabs on the side view driver information camera (1) and pull the camera from the case frame.
1.
Side View Driver Information Camera (1) - Install
2.
Connect the side view driver information camera harness connector (1).
79 of 88
3.
Outside Rearview Mirror Housing Cover (1) - Install
4.
Outside Rearview Mirror Inner Actuator (2) - Install - Outside Rearview Mirror Actuator Replacement
5.
Outside Rearview Mirror Housing Bezel (2) - Install - Outside Rearview Mirror Housing Bezel
Replacement
80 of 88
FRONT VIEW DRIVER INFORMATION CAMERA REPLACEMENT

Front Grille Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
4.7 N.m (42 lb in)
Front View Driver Information Camera
Procedure
2. After installation, perform the video processing control module calibration. Video
Processing Control Module Calibration
REARVIEW DRIVER INFORMATION CAMERA REPLACEMENT
81 of 88
Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Rearview Driver Information Camera Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
2 Rearview Driver Information Camera Bracket
Rearview Driver Information Camera
NOTE:
This kit is to
be used for
antenna
coax cables
ONLY. It
should not
be used for
rear view
3 camera coax
cable as
connector
ends are not
sealed and
could cause
corrosion.
Procedure
After installation, perform the video processing control module calibration. Video Processing
Control Module Calibration
82 of 88
VIDEO PROCESSING MODULE REPLACEMENT

Reposition the quarter lower rear trim panel. Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel Replacement
Video Processing Module Nut [2x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
Video Processing Module
Procedure
2
VIDEO PROCESSING CONTROL MODULE CALIBRATION
NOTE: • The surround vision camera system image will be slightly distorted at all
times, the camera (s) lens is a fish-eye lens meant to capture as much range as
possible.
• A Video Processing Control Module that is not calibrated adequately will
display an hour-glass icon on the surround vision camera system image
screen, a DTC should be set, and one or more of the scan tool Camera
Alignment Learn parameters will display Not Calibrated. Once calibration is
attained, the hour-glass will automatically disappear and the scan tool Camera
Alignment Learn parameters should display Stage 1, 2, or 3 showing no further
calibration is necessary.
• The Video Processing Control Module can disable rear camera display
guidelines if it is not calibrated adequately. Once calibration is attained, the
83 of 88
guidelines should return.
The calibration procedure is needed to have the Video Processing Control Module learn new cameras and their
positions. The calibration is performed automatically by the Video Processing Control Module.
If any one of the cameras is replaced on the Surround Vision Camera System, the camera image needs to be
calibrated to the system. For this reason, the Video Processing Control Module performs a calibration during its
power up and initialization during each ignition cycle in order to maximize the surround vision image quality.
A new Video Processing Control Module will have built-in default values for camera learn. However, the Video
Processing Control Module will automatically calibrate in order adapt to the vehicle.
To allow the Video Processing Control Module to complete calibration, drive the vehicle. Driving the vehicle in the
conditions listed below will reduce calibration time.
Diagnostic Aids
Ideal conditions to reduce the time needed for the Video Processing Control Module to complete the calibration
include:
• All moving points of vehicle access (doors, trunk/liftgate, fuel door, hood, etc.) of the vehicle Must be closed
and the corresponding vehicle access systems functional (no DTCs, etc.).
• No vehicle body or structural damage that may affect proper camera mounting or line of sight
• All surround vision cameras properly mounted, fully connected, and appropriately connected to the proper
terminal of the Video Processing Control Module.
• Vehicle driven reasonably flat and straight for at least 0.5 km (0.3 miles)
• Vehicle speed between 10-30 kph (6-19 mph)
• Steering wheel angle less than 0.5Â°
• It is a good practice to wipe camera lens' clean prior to alignment
• Vehicle should not be within 1.5 meters (5 feet) of a curb or roadside
• Dry weather, cloudy but bright sky

REARVIEW CAMERA FULL DISPLAY MIRROR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
If equipped, full display mirror provides a wider field of view than normally seen from the inside rearview mirror to
assist when driving and changing lanes. When the tab under the inside rearview mirror is pulled rearward, a view of
the area behind the vehicle displays on the mirror. The inside rearview camera full display mirror is connected to the
outside rearview camera via a shielded coaxial cable.
When the tab under the inside rearview mirror is pulled rearward, a view of the area behind the vehicle displays on
the mirror.
Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear view of the area behind the vehicle before turning on full display mirror. Use
the three buttons on the bottom of the mirror to adjust the brightness, zoom, and tilt of the display. Make sure the
light sensor is not covered when adjusting the brightness.
The inside rearview camera full display mirror may not work properly or display a clear image if:
• It is dark.
84 of 88
• The sun or the beam of headlamps are shining directly into the camera lens.
• Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and wipe it
with a soft cloth.
When the mirror detects that the camera is not sending a valid video signal, it "blue screens" with a "no video" decal
for 3 seconds, then reverts back to the mirror.
REAR VISION CAMERA DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (UVB)

Rear Vision Camera System Operation
The rear vision camera system consists of a video camera located at the rear of the vehicle and the Radio.
The following conditions may cause a degraded rear vision camera image:
• Ice, snow, or mud has built up on the rear vision camera

• Dark conditions
• Extreme light conditions, such as glare from the sun or the headlights of another vehicle
• Damage to the rear of the vehicle
• Extreme high temperatures or extreme temperature changes
If a malfunction is detected in the system, Service Rear Vision Camera may be displayed on the Info Display Module
as an indicator to the customer that a problem exists that requires service.
SURROUND VISION CAMERA DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
WARNING: The Surround Vision cameras have blind spots and will not display all objects near
the corners of the vehicle. Folding outside mirrors that are out of position may not
display surround view correctly. Always check around the vehicle when parking or
backing.
1. View Displayed by the Surround Vision Camera

2. Area Not Shown
85 of 88
1. View Displayed by the Surround Vision Camera
2. Area Not Shown
The surround vision camera system consists of the following components:
• B87 Rearview Camera

• B174G Frontview Camera - Grille
• K157 Video Processing Control Module
• A11 Radio OR K74 Human Machine Interface Module
• B225L Sideview Camera - Left
• B225R Sideview Camera - Right
• X20 Memory Card Receptacle (with XVR)
When the vehicle is traveling at speeds slower than 6 mph (10 kph) the video processing control module will power
up the cameras and send a video signal to the radio or human machine interface module.
The following conditions may cause a degraded surround vision camera image:
• Ice, snow, or mud has built up on the rear vision camera

• Dark conditions
• Extreme light conditions, such as glare from the sun or the headlights of another vehicle
• Damage to the rear of the vehicle
• Extreme high temperatures or extreme temperature changes
Surround Vision displays an overhead view of the area surrounding the vehicle, along with the front or rear camera
views in the center stack. The front camera is in the grille or near the front emblem, the side cameras are on the
bottom of the outside rearview mirrors, and the rear vision camera is above the license plate.
NOTE: Images from the Sideview Cameras are only displayed when both front doors are
properly closed.
Features of the Surround Vision System
• Rear camera (B87 Rearview Camera) view alongside overhead view is displayed in reverse
• Front camera (B174G Frontview Camera - Grille) view alongside overhead view is displayed after shifting out
of reverse to Neutral or Drive
• Will display front view when front park assist object is within trigger range calibration value (30 cm (12 in) in
86 of 88
a forward gear
• Image is removed from display when vehicle speed exceeds speed calibration (10 kph/6 mph) or button press /
screen touch
System Operation
The video processing control module is connected to each camera via a shielded coaxial cable. The coaxial cable
provides power for the camera and also carries the video image from the cameras to the video processing control
module for processing. The video processing control module will then send the processed image output to
infotainment system via another coaxial cable.
The video processing control module receives CAN information from Rear Park Assist object detection module and
Steering Wheel angle from body control module during Reverse. A warning triangle may display during the 360
surround view screen if Rear Parking Assist has detected an object during a reverse. This triangle changes from
amber to red and increases in size the closer the object. Also a dynamic guideline is displayed in Reverse to show the
projected path of the vehicle.
If equipped, the video processing control module system may have a memory card receptacle (with XVR) located in
the trunk. The memory card receptacle interfaces with the video processing control module via a USB cable. The
memory card receptacle also receives fused battery voltage and ground from the video processing control module.
The video processing control module uses the memory card as a mass storage device, similar to a USB storage
device.

SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool
Illustrations
Number/Description
87 of 88
Tool
Illustrations
Number/Description
EL-52552
COAX FAKRA
CABLE ADAPTER
KIT
88 of 88
Immobilizer System - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Theft Deterrent Module Bolt 1.2 N.m (11 lb in)

IMMOBILIZER WIRING SCHEMATICS
Immobilizer (UID)

DTC B2955
1 of 58
DTC Descriptor
DTC B2955
Security Sensor Data Circuit

Ignition B2955 00 B2955 00 - -
Serial Data B2955 00 B2955 00 B2955 00 B2955 00
Low Reference - B2955 00 - -
When a keyless entry transmitter is inserted into the transmitter pocket/slot and the ignition mode switch is
pressed, the transponder embedded in the transmitter is energized by the immobilizer antenna exciter coil. The
transponder transmits a signal to the body control module (BCM). The BCM then compares this value to a
value stored in memory. If the value is correct, the BCM will send the prerelease password via the serial data
circuit to the engine control module (ECM). If the learned key code does not match or a transponder value is not
received, the BCM will send the start disable password to the ECM.
Ignition is in the Accessory or Run position.
The BCM detects a circuit fault on the immobilizer antenna circuits.
• Vehicle starting will be disabled.

• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. A service message will be displayed
in the driver information center.
• A current DTC will be cleared when the condition for setting the DTC are no longer present.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Schematic Reference
Immobilizer Wiring Schematics
2 of 58
Immobilizer Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify DTC B2955 did not set immediately after the replacement or programming of the K9 Body
Control Module or after performing the Immobilizer System Component Programming procedure.
If the DTC set immediately after the replace or programming of the K9 Body Control Module
or after performing the Immobilizer System Component Programming procedure.
Perform the Immobilizer System Component Programming (without BTM), or Immobilizer

System Component Programming (with BTM) procedure using a new vehicle key. After the new
key has been learned, the existing vehicle keys may be learned to the vehicle.
Go to next step: If the DTC did not set immediately after the replace or programming of the
K9 Body Control Module or after performing the Immobilizer System Component
Programming procedure.
2. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K89 Immobilizer
Control Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
3. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the low reference circuit terminal 1 and B+.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
4. Ignition ON.
NOTE: In some instances, the K9 Body Control Module may only apply voltage for
3 s immediately after the ignition is turned ON. It may be necessary to
monitor the DMM while turning the ignition ON to observe the voltage.
5. Test for greater than 9 V between the ignition circuit terminal 3 and ground.
3 of 58
If 9 V or less
6. Ignition ON.
7. Test for 10 - 13 V between the serial data circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If less than 10 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
8. Replace the K89 Immobilizer Control Module.
9. Verify DTC B2955 does not set while operating the vehicle under the conditions for running the DTC.
If DTC B2955 is set
Replace the K9 Body Control Module.

10. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for body control module or immobilizer control module replacement,
programming, and setup
DTC B302A
4 of 58
DTC Descriptor
DTC B302A
Mobile Telephone Communications Interface Requested Immobilization
As part of the vehicle telematics enhanced services, a request may be sent to the body control module (BCM) to
disable vehicle starting. If a valid message is received by the BCM requesting that starting be disabled, the start
enable message will not be sent to the engine control module (ECM).
The BCM continuously monitors for this DTC.
A start disable message has been received from the telematics module.
Vehicle starting will be suspended and the security indicator will be illuminated.
• A current DTC will clear when the telematics start disable request is no longer received.
• A history DTC will clear after 100 ignition cycles in which the telematic start disable request is not seen.
Diagnostic Aids
• DTC B302A is only an indicator that a start disable request has been received from the vehicle telematics
system and does not indicate a fault in the immobilizer or telematics system.
• To remove the start disable request, the vehicle account must be updated with the OnStar stolen vehicle
team. This will require that a law enforcement agency or the customer contact OnStar to indicate that the
vehicle has been successfully and safely recovered.
• If the OnStar system has been disabled or damage during a theft attempt, the system will not be able to
communicate and the start disable request will not be removed. OnStar must be functioning properly for
the start disable request to be removed.
Schematic Reference
5 of 58
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify the OnStar system is not damaged and is operating properly, with no DTCs set.
If the OnStar system is damaged, inoperative, or any OnStar DTCs are set
These concerns must be corrected before the start disable can be removed.
Go to next step: If the OnStar system is not damaged and is operating properly
2. Press the blue OnStar button and ask the advisor to be transferred to the stolen vehicle team to verify the
vehicle account has been updated.
3. Verify that OnStar is aware the vehicle has been recovered and that the vehicle account has been updated.
If OnStar has not been notified that the vehicle has been recovered
Contact the customer and advise them that for security purposes, they must contact OnStar and the
law enforcement agency to update the vehicle account.
Go to next step: If the account has been properly updated

4. Once the vehicle account has been updated and the start disable request has been removed, DTC B302A
will transition to a history DTC. Clear the history DTC.
DTC B3031
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3031 00
6 of 58
Security Controller In Learn Mode Malfunction
When learning a keyless entry transmitter, the body control module (BCM) is placed in learn mode. DTC
B3031 will set automatically as an indicator that the system is in learn mode and not as a fault indicator. Once
the transmitter is learned, learn mode will be exited and the DTC cleared. If the BCM does not exit learn mode,
B3031 will remain current and indicate a fault. The instrument cluster security indicator will illuminate and the
driver information center will display a message.
The immobilizer system is learn mode.
The DTC will set any time the BCM enters the learn mode.
The security indicator will illuminate. The driver information center will display a message.
• A current DTC B3031 will be cleared upon the successful exit of learn mode.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free ignition cycles or when a scan tool is used to
clear DTCs.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
7 of 58
1. Verify all available keyless entry transmitters are correct for the vehicle. This can be accomplished by
comparing the part number that is laser etched on the transmitter to the part number listed in the parts
catalog.
If a transmitter is not correct
Replace the transmitter.
Go to next step: If all transmitters are correct

2. Verify the scan tool Immobilizer data displays two or more keys learned to the vehicle.
If two or more keys are not displayed
Add one additional key
Go to next step: If two or more keys are learned to the vehicle

3. Perform the Replacing Transmitters procedure. Refer to Remote Control Door Lock and Theft
Deterrent Transmitter Programming .
4. Verify the K9 Body Control Module learns the transmitter and exits the learn mode. The scan tool Master
Keys Learned parameter should increment to 1.
If the K9 Body Control Module does not exit the learn mode after the programming attempt
Go to next step: If the K9 Body Control Module exits the learn mode after the programming
attempt
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B3055
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3055
No Transponder Modulation or No Transponder
8 of 58
Without BTM and/or ATH/ATS
When an ignition key is inserted into the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition is switched ON, the transponder
embedded in the key is energized by the exciter coil surrounding the ignition lock cylinder. The transponder
transmits a signal to the immobilizer control module. The immobilizer control module translates this signal to a
serial data message which is sent to the body control module (BCM). The BCM then compares this value to a
With BTM and/or ATH/ATS
When a keyless entry transmitter is inserted into the transmitter pocket and the ignition mode switch is pressed,
the transponder embedded in the transmitter is energized by the immobilizer antenna exciter coil. The
transponder transmits a signal to the immobilizer control module. The immobilizer control module translates
this signal to a serial data message which is sent to the body control module (BCM). The BCM then compares
this value to a value stored in memory. If the value is correct, the BCM will send the prerelease password via
the serial data circuit to the engine control module (ECM). If the learned key code does not match or a
transponder value is not received, the BCM will send the start disable password to the ECM.
Ignition is in the Accessory or Run position.
The BCM is unable to measure the ignition key transponder value.

• The security indicator will illuminate. A service message will be displayed in the driver information
center.
• A current DTC will be cleared when the BCM detects a valid transponder value from the ignition key.
Diagnostic Aids
• Because DTC B3055 may be caused by a malfunctioning vehicle key or keyless entry transmitter, it is
necessary to have all available vehicle keys or transmitters at the time of diagnosis. A possible scenario
would be a customer leaving the vehicle with a spare key or transmitter during the service visit, but the
key or transmitter which they use everyday, not the spare key or transmitter, is the cause of the DTC. Not
having all available keys or transmitter in this instance would result in the customer concern not being
duplicate or a misdiagnosis.
• Ensure that the immobilizer control module is properly installed and fully seated. An audible and/or
tactile click will indicate that the immobilizer control module is fully seated. To ensure proper
transponder communication, the key must be in a specific location in relation to the immobilizer control
module. If the immobilizer control module is not fully seated, transponder communication may not occur
9 of 58
and DTC B3055 will set.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that DTC B1370, B1380, or B1441 is not set.

3. Verify the scan tool body control module Accessory parameter changes between Active and Inactive
when turning the ignition ON and OFF.
Refer to Vehicle Will Not Change Power Mode .

4. Verify that DTC B3055 does not set while attempting to start the vehicle which each available key.
If DTC B3055 sets when attempting to start the vehicle with only one of the available keys
Replace the appropriate key.
If DTC B3055 sets when attempting to start the vehicle with all of the available keys
10 of 58
Replace the K89 Immobilizer Control Module.
Go to next step: If DTC B3055 does not set

5. All OK.
1. Ignition ON.

3. Verify the scan tool body control module Accessory parameter changes between Active and Inactive
when turning the ignition ON and OFF.
Refer to Power Mode Mismatch .

4. Remove the battery from each of the available transmitter.
5. Verify that DTC B3055 does not set while attempting to start the vehicle which each available transmitter.
To start the vehicle with the transmitter battery removed, the transmitter must be placed in the transmitter
pocket.
If DTC B3055 sets when attempting to start the vehicle with only one of the available
transmitter
Replace the appropriate transmitter.
If DTC B3055 sets when attempting to start the vehicle with all of the available transmitters
Replace the K89 Immobilizer Control Module.
Go to next step: If DTC B3055 does not set

6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for immobilizer control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B305C
11 of 58
DTC Descriptor
DTC B305C
Immobilizer Transponder of Wrong Type Programmed
the serial data circuit to the engine control module (ECM). If the learned transponder code does not match or a
• Ignition is in the Accessory or Run position

• Battery voltage is greater than 9 volts
• Transponder authentication has occurred
• The programed transponder type does not match the equipped system on the vehicle.
• A transponder used for vehicles without BTM and/or ATH/ATS has been programmed to a vehicle with
BTM and/or ATH/ATS.
• A transponder used for vehicles with BTM and/or ATH/ATS has been programmed to a vehicle without
BTM and/or ATH/ATS.
No action is taken.
• A current DTC will be cleared when the BCM detects a programed transponder type that matches the
equipped system on the vehicle.
12 of 58
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Key Part Number parameter displays a Key Part Number when turning the ignition
ON with each key/transmitter.
If a Key Part Number is not read
Replace the appropriate key/transmitter.
Go to next step: If a Key Part Number is read for each key

3. All OK.
DTC B3060
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3060
Unprogrammed Transponder Identification Code Received
13 of 58
When a vehicle key is inserted into the key slot and the vehicle on/off switch is pressed, the transponder
embedded in the head of the key is energized by the exciter coils. The energized transponder transmits a signal
that contains its unique value, which is received by the body control module (BCM). The BCM then compares
this value to a value stored in memory. If the value is not correct, the BCM disables engine start.
Vehicle is ON or in Service Mode.
The transponder value measured by the BCM is incorrect or not learned to the vehicle.

• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. The driver information center will
display a service message.
• A current DTC will be cleared when the BCM detects a valid transponder value from the key.
• A history DTC will be cleared after 100 malfunction-free power mode cycles or when a scan tool is used
to clear DTCs.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
14 of 58
1. Perform the Vehicle Key Relearn procedure. Refer to Key with Integrated Transmitter Programming
(without BTM), or Key with Integrated Transmitter Programming (with BTM).
2. Verify the scan tool Key Part Number parameter reads a Key Part Number when turning the vehicle ON
with each key.
If a Key Part Number is not read
Replace the appropriate key.
Go to next step: If a Key Part Number is read with each key

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Key with Integrated Transmitter Programming (without BTM), or Key with Integrated Transmitter
Programming (with BTM)
DTC B3899
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3899
Incorrect Immobilizer Identifier Received
When certain modules are programmed and configured during installation, the module learns a specific
environment identifier which is unique to the vehicle. The environment identifier is used to prevent the
swapping modules between vehicles. The body control module (BCM) is the keeper of the environment
identifier. The instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control module, inflatable restraint
sensing and diagnostic module, engine control module (ECM), and steering column lock module (if equipped)
each learn the environment identifier during their configuration process. During vehicle operation, the BCM
sends the immobilizer identifier as a challenge and each module responds to the challenge by sending the
environment identifier back to the BCM. If the BCM sends an incorrect immobilizer identifier or a specific
number of incorrect environment identifiers are received, vehicle starting is disabled.
15 of 58
Ignition is in the ACCESSORY or RUN position.
The control module's environment identifier does not match the environment identifier stored by the BCM.
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

A current DTC will be cleared when the module learns a correct environment identifier.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Perform the Programming and Setup procedure for the control module that set DTC B3899.
NOTE: When performing the following step, Immobilizer System Component

Programming, the module may also need to be reset by using the SPS
function Prepare For Removal.
2. Perform the Immobilizer System Component Programming Immobilizer System Component

Programming (without BTM), or Immobilizer System Component Programming (with BTM).
3. Verify DTC B3899 does not set after programming.
16 of 58
If the DTC sets after programming
Replace the control module that set the DTC.
Go to next step: If the DTC does not set after programming

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for lock module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B389A
DTC Descriptor
DTC B389A
Environment Identification
An incorrect immobilizer identifier was broadcast by the BCM.

17 of 58
A current DTC will be cleared when the BCM broadcasts a correct immobilizer identifier.
Diagnostic Aids
If BCM programming is not completed after BCM replacement, the immobilizer identifier will not be learned.
If DTC B389A sets immediately after the replacement and programming of a BCM, perform the programming
procedure again.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify DTC B389A did not set immediately following the replacement and programming of the K9 Body
Control Module.
If the DTC set immediately after the replacement and programming of the K9 Body Control
Module
The immobilizer learn procedure was not properly completed. Perform the BCM immobilizer learn
using the body control module IMMO Function with Existing Transponder or Remote Key in SPS.
Refer to Immobilizer System Component Programming (without BTM), or Immobilizer
System Component Programming (with BTM).
Go to next step: If the DTC did not set immediately after the replacement and programming
of the K9 Body Control Module
2. Perform the K9 Body Control Module immobilizer learn using body control module IMMO Function
with Existing Transponder or Remote Key in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer System Component
18 of 58
3. Verify DTC B389A does not set after programming.

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for body control module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B3902
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3902
Incorrect Immobilizer Identifier Received
19 of 58
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: When performing the following step, Immobilizer System Component

Programming, the module may also need to be reset by using the SPS
function Prepare For Removal.
2. Perform the Immobilizer System Component Programming Immobilizer System Component

NOTE: If the Immobilizer System Component Programming with existing keys

procedure does not work then perform the procedure for new keys but
continue to use the existing keys.

20 of 58
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control module,
inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module, engine control module, or steering column lock module
replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B3924-B3928
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3924
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module
DTC B3925
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From HVAC Control Module
DTC B3926
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Instrument Cluster
DTC B3927
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Electronic Brake Control Module
DTC B3928
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
swapping of control modules between vehicles. The body control module (BCM) is the keeper of the
environment identifier. The instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control module,
inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module, and telematics communication interface control module each
learn the environment identifier during their configuration process. During vehicle operation, the BCM sends
the immobilizer identifier as a challenge and each module responds to the challenge by sending the environment
identifier back to the BCM. If the BCM sends an incorrect immobilizer identifier or a specific number of
incorrect environment identifiers are received, vehicle starting is disabled.
21 of 58

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Perform the Programming and Setup procedure for the control module that set the DTC.
2. Verify the DTC does not set after programming.

3. All OK.
22 of 58
Repair Instructions
inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module, or telematics communication interface control module
DTC B3935
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3935
Transponder Authentication
• Ignition is in the Accessory or Run position.

• A valid transponder value has been read.
23 of 58
The transponder calculation of the challenge from the BCM does not match the BCM calculation.

• The security indicator will illuminate. The driver information center will display a service message.
• A current DTC will be cleared when a valid transponder value has been read and authenticated.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Replace the suspected inoperative or malfunctioning key/transmitter.

If the DTC is set

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
24 of 58
DTC B3976
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3976
Unconfigured Transponder
• Ignition is in the Accessory or Run position.

• The BCM is in the learn coded key state.
The BCM has determined the current key/transmitter is not configured as a proper vehicle key/transmitter.
25 of 58
• The security indicator in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. A service message will be displayed
in the driver information center.
• A current DTC will be cleared when the BCM detects a properly configured vehicle key/transmitter.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify the engine starts with each available key/transmitter.

If the engine does not start with a key/transmitter
Replace the key/transmitter.
Go to next step: If the engine starts with all keys/transmitters

2. All OK.
DTC B3978-B3982
DTC Descriptor
26 of 58
DTC B3978
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module
DTC B3979
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From HVAC Control Module
DTC B3980
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Instrument Cluster
DTC B3981
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Electronic Brake Control Module
DTC B3982
Incorrect Environmental Identifier Received From Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
swapping of control modules between vehicles. The body control module (BCM) is the keeper of the
environment identifier. The instrument cluster, electronic brake control module, HVAC control module,
inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic Module, and telematics communication interface control module each
learn the environment identifier during their configuration process. During vehicle operation, the BCM sends
the immobilizer identifier as a challenge and each module responds to the challenge by sending the environment
identifier back to the BCM. If the BCM sends an incorrect immobilizer identifier or a specific number of
incorrect environment identifiers are received, vehicle starting is disabled.
An incorrect environment identifier was received by the BCM.

A current DTC will be cleared when the module learns a correct environment identifier and it is received by the
BCM.
27 of 58
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify the scan tool communicates with the vehicle.

If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle
Refer to Scan Tool Does Not Communicate with Vehicle
Go to next step: If the scan tool does communicate with the vehicle
2. Perform the Programming and Setup procedure for the control module that set the DTC.
3. Verify the DTC does not set after programming.

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for control module programming, and setup.
DTC B3984
28 of 58
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3984
Device 1 Environment Identifier Not Programmable
An incorrect environment identifier is programmed or no environment identifier is programmed.

Schematic Reference
29 of 58
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
inflatable restraint sensing and diagnostic module, engine control module, and steering column lock module
DTC P0513
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0513
Immobilizer Key Incorrect
The body control module (BCM) sends the pre - release information to the engine control module (ECM) via
the serial data circuit. The ECM then sends a challenge to the BCM. Both the ECM and BCM perform a
calculation on this challenge. If the calculated response from the BCM equals the calculation performed by the
ECM, the ECM will allow vehicle starting.
30 of 58
The calculated response from the BCM does not equal the calculation performed by the ECM.

• A current DTCwill be cleared when a valid calculation is received.

Diagnostic Aids
DTC P0513 may be caused by a loose connection or intermittent poor continuity on the ECM ground or at the
negative battery cable. Be sure to check the ECM ground (s) and negative battery cable if normal system
diagnosis does not correct the concern.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify there are no immobilizer DTCs set in the K9 Body Control Module.
31 of 58
If any immobilizer DTCs are set in the K9 Body Control Module
Go to next step: If no immobilizer DTCs are set in the K9 Body Control Module
2. Perform the K9 Body Control Module immobilizer learn using the body control module IMMO Function
3. Verify the engine starts after the K9 Body Control Module completes the learn procedure.
If the engine does not start
Perform the K20 Engine Control Module immobilizer learn using the engine control module
IMMO Learn in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer System Component Programming (without BTM),
or Immobilizer System Component Programming (with BTM).
Go to next step: If the engine starts

4. All OK.
DTC P0633
DTC Descriptor
DTC P0633
Immobilizer Key Not Programmed
When learning the immobilizer data, as well as the challenge and response sequence, the engine control module
(ECM) is placed in learn mode. DTC P0633 will set automatically as an indicator that the system is in learn
mode and not as a fault indicator. Once the immobilizer data and challenge/response are learned, learn mode
will be exited when the engine is successfully started. If the ECM does not exit learn mode, DTC P0633 will
remain current and indicate a fault.
The ECM is in learn mode.
DTC P0633 will set any time the ECM enters learn mode.
The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
32 of 58
• A current DTC will be cleared upon a successful engine start after exit of learn mode.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: DTC P0633 will clear upon a successful engine start. Any malfunction that will
cause a no-start condition will prevent DTC P0633 from clearing. Prior to
diagnosing DTC P0633, ensure that all power moding and engine control
systems are operating properly and all conditions that may cause a no-start
have been corrected. Do not replace the K20 Engine Control Module. Replacing
the K20 Engine Control Module will not correct the no-start condition.
2. Perform the K20 Engine Control Module immobilizer learn using the engine control module IMMO
Learn in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer System Component Programming (without BTM), or
Immobilizer System Component Programming (with BTM).
3. Verify the engine starts after the K20 Engine Control Module completes the learn procedure.
An undiagnosed no-start condition exists. Refer to the appropriate subsection and diagnostic to
33 of 58
correct the no-start condition.

4. All OK.
DTC P162B
DTC Descriptor
DTC P162B
Remote Vehicle Speed Limiting Signal Message Counter Incorrect
When a remote slow-down request is sent from OnStar, the vehicle communication interface control module
sends a serial data message to the engine control module (ECM) indicating that reduced vehicle speed has been
requested. Once the request is active, the ECM begins reducing engine torque to match the requested vehicle
speed and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed.
• The engine run time is greater than 5 s

• A remote slow-down request is sent from OnStar
• The VIN embedded in the slow-down request does not match the VIN stored in the ECM.
• The rolling code counter embedded in the slow-down request does not increment for ten consecutive
messages.
• ECM ignores all reduced vehicle speed request messages from the vehicle communication interface
module.
• The ECM stores DTC P162B in history.

• A history DTC will clear after 40 malfunction-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Schematic Reference
34 of 58
Remote Vehicle Speed Limiting Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify the vehicle is equipped with OnStar (RPO UE1) and DTC P162B is set
If the vehicle is not equipped with OnStar (RPO UE1) and DTC P162B is set
Replace the ECM.
Go to next step: If the vehicle is equipped with OnStar (RPO UE1) and DTC P162B is set
2. Perform the Remote Vehicle Speed Limiting Reset procedure with the scan tool.
3. Verify DTC P162B is not set.
If DTC P162B is set
1. Reprogram the ECM. Refer to Control Module References .
2. Verify the DTC does not set while operating the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the
DTC.
If the DTC sets, replace the ECM. If the DTC continues to set after ECM replacement,
replace the vehicle communication interface module.
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If DTC P162B is not set
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for telematics communication interface control module or engine control module
replacement, programming, and setup
35 of 58
DTC P1631
DTC Descriptor
DTC P1631
Immobilizer Fuel Enable Signal Not Correct
The body control module (BCM) sends the pre - release information to the engine control module (ECM) via
the serial data circuit. The ECM then sends a challenge to the BCM. Both the ECM and BCM perform a
calculation on this challenge. If the calculated response from the BCM equals the calculation performed by the
ECM, the ECM will allow vehicle starting. The BCM follows this action by sending the remaining immobilizer
data to the ECM. If the immobilizer data sent by the BCM matches that stored by the ECM, the ECM will allow
the engine to remain running.
The ECM receives incorrect immobilizer data from the BCM.

• A current DTC will be cleared when correct immobilizer data is received.

Schematic Reference
36 of 58
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
2. Perform the K9 Body Control Module immobilizer learn using the body control module IMMO Function
3. Verify the engine starts after the K9 Body Control Module completes the learn procedure.
Perform the K20 Engine Control Module immobilizer learn using the engine control module
IMMO Learn in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer System Component Programming (without BTM),
or Immobilizer System Component Programming (with BTM).

4. All OK.
DTC P1649
DTC Descriptor
DTC P1649
Immobilizer Security Code Not Programmed
37 of 58
When learning the security code, as well as the challenge and response sequence, the engine control module
(ECM) is placed in learn mode. Once the security code and challenge/response are learned, learn mode will be
exited when the engine is successfully started.
The ECM is in learn mode.
The ECM has not learned a security code.
The security indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
• A current DTC will be cleared upon a successful engine start after exit of learn mode.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
38 of 58
2. Perform the K20 Engine Control Module immobilizer learn using the engine control module IMMO
Learn in SPS. Refer to Immobilizer System Component Programming (without BTM), or
Immobilizer System Component Programming (with BTM).
3. Verify the engine starts after the K20 Engine Control Module completes the learn procedure.

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for engine control module replacement, programming, and setup.
SYMPTOMS - IMMOBILIZER
IMPORTANT: The following steps must be completed before using the symptom tables.
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data links.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to
Immobilizer Description and Operation.
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the systems.
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Symptom List
Refer to OnStar Stolen Vehicle Slowdown Active to diagnose the symptom.
ONSTAR STOLEN VEHICLE SLOWDOWN ACTIVE

NOTE: This procedure is not used in Brazil.
39 of 58
When a remote slow-down request is sent from OnStar, the Telematics Communication Interface Control
Module sends a serial data message to the engine control module (ECM) indicating that reduced vehicle speed
has been requested. Once the request is active, the ECM begins reducing engine torque to match requested
vehicle speed and the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed.
Schematic Reference
Remote Vehicle Speed Limiting Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify the vehicle is not in the OnStar initiated Stolen Vehicle Slowdown mode. This can be
accomplished by verifying the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Telematics Enhanced Service
Immobilization parameter is No.
If the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Telematics Enhanced Service Immobilization
parameter is Yes
1. Perform the Remote Vehicle Speed Limiting Reset procedure with the scan tool.
2. Press the blue OnStar button and inform the advisor that you need to be transferred to the stolen
vehicle team to update the vehicle account.
Go to next step: If the scan tool K9 Body Control Module Telematics Enhanced Service
Immobilization parameter is No
2. All OK.
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
40 of 58
THEFT DETERRENT MODULE REPLACEMENT

Theft Deterrent Module Bolt [4x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
1.2 N.m (11 lb in)
2 Theft Deterrent Module
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM COMPONENT PROGRAMMING (WITHOUT BTM)
This procedure will learn the immobilizer function. If the battery voltage is low, charge the battery before
proceeding with the learn. If the body control module (BCM) or engine control module (ECM) have been
replaced, they must be programmed before performing this learn procedure.
Depending on the immobilizer function being learned or the component replaced, different learn functions are
required to be performed. These learn functions are as follows:
Function name on SPS When the function

tool: Function description: should be used: Notes:
The BCM has been
Body Control Module The BCM will relearn the replaced and the existing
Use the procedure for new
IMMO Function with immobilizer passwords vehicle keys are being
transponder if this
Existing Transponder or and data while reusing the reused or a diagnostic
procedure is unsuccessful.
Remote Key existing vehicle keys has instructed to
perform the learn
41 of 58
Body Control Module The BCM will relearn the The BCM has been This procedure may be
IMMO Function with immobilizer passwords replaced and new used with existing keys if
New Transponder or and data while using new vehicle keys are being the existing keys
Remote Key vehicle keys reused procedure is unsuccessful.
The ECM has been
The ECM will relearn the
Engine Control Module replaced or a diagnostic
immobilizer passwords -
IMMO Learn has instructed to
and data
perform the learn
Because both the ECM
Both the ECM and BCM and BCM have been
Engine Control Module The ECM and BCM will have been replaced (this replaced and are learning
and Body Control Module learn new immobilizer selection will REQUIRE new immobilizer
IMMO Learn passwords and data new vehicle keys be passwords and data, all
used) vehicle keys must also be
replaced
This function may not be
available in all sales
A new vehicle key is
A new vehicle key will regions. Refer to the SPS
Program Transponder or being added (does not
learn the immobilizer application to determine if
Remote Key (Add) affect other vehicle
passwords and data a particular vehicle is able
keys)
to add keys using this
method.
All vehicle keys are This procedure may be
All existing vehicle keys desired to be invalidated used if a customer has had
Program Transponder or will be invalidated and and certain keys their keys lost or stolen
Remote Key (Delete) any desired keys are relearned or a diagnostic and wishes to invalidate
relearned has instructed to the keys, making them
perform the learn unable to start the vehicle
1. Connect a scan tool to the vehicle and access SPS.

2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
3. Ensure that all power consuming devices are turned OFF on the vehicle.
4. Select SPS application and follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Select Reprogram ECU.
6. Select IMMO Immobilizer Learn - Setup.
7. Select the appropriate programming function based on the component that was replaced or is being
programmed. Refer to the table at the top of this document for assistance in choosing the correct
programming function.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions.
9. After programming all keys "Programming Complete" is displayed.
10. Press the lock and unlock button on each transmitter that was programmed. This will awaken each
transmitter and allow keyless entry functions to be established.
11. With a scan tool, clear any DTCs.
12. Verify each key is operating properly. Operate each of the keyless entry functions using the buttons on the
transmitter and then start the vehicle. When verifying operation, make sure that no other keys are near the
42 of 58
vehicle.
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM COMPONENT PROGRAMMING (WITH BTM)
This procedure will learn the immobilizer function. If the battery voltage is low, charge the battery before
proceeding with the learn. If the body control module (BCM) or engine control module (ECM) have been
replaced, they must be programmed before performing this learn procedure.
Depending on the immobilizer function being learned or the component replaced, different learn functions are
required to be performed. These learn functions are as follows:

The BCM has been
Body Control Module The BCM will relearn the replaced and the existing
IMMO Function with immobilizer passwords vehicle keys are being
-
Existing Transponder or and data while reusing the reused or a diagnostic
Remote Key existing vehicle keys has instructed to perform
the learn
Body Control Module The BCM will relearn the The BCM has been
IMMO Function with immobilizer passwords replaced and new
-
New Transponder or and data while using new vehicle keys are being
Remote Key vehicle keys reused
The ECM has been
The ECM will relearn the
Engine Control Module replaced or a diagnostic
immobilizer passwords -
IMMO Learn has instructed to perform
and data
the learn
Because both the ECM
Both the ECM and BCM and BCM have been
Engine Control Module The ECM and BCM will have been replaced (this replaced and are learning
and Body Control Module learn new immobilizer selection will REQUIRE new immobilizer
IMMO Learn passwords and data new vehicle keys be passwords and data, all
used) vehicle keys must also be
replaced
A new vehicle key will A new vehicle key is This function may not be
Program Transponder or
learn the immobilizer being added (does not available in all sales
Remote Key (Add)
passwords and data affect other vehicle keys) regions
This procedure may be
All vehicle keys are
used if a customer has
All existing vehicle keys desired to be invalidated
had their keys lost or
Program Transponder or will be invalidated and and certain keys
stolen and wishes to
Remote Key (Delete) any desired keys are relearned or a diagnostic
invalidate the keys,
relearned has instructed to perform
making them unable to
the learn
start the vehicle

2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
4. Select SPS application and follow the on-screen instructions.
43 of 58
6. Select IMMO Immobilizer Learn.
7. Select the appropriate programming function based on the component that was replaced or is being
programmed. Refer to the table at the top of this document for assistance in choosing the correct
programming function.
NOTE: • At multiple times during the learn procedure, SPS will instruct you to
turn the ignition to the run position. Make sure the vehicle is actually
in the run mode before continuing on the SPS terminal. If the igniting
is not in the run mode, the learn procedure will fail. To verify the
vehicle is in Run mode, verify the green LED is illuminated on the
ignition mode switch.
• The transmitter pocket is the inside of the front cupholder in the
center console.

9. When the SPS procedure has completed, press and hold the ignition mode switch for 15 seconds.
Unable to Complete Programming
When attempting to program immobilizer components, various conditions may prevent the programming
operation from completing. These conditions may be caused by normal system operation, a system malfunction,
or an external influence. Common symptoms of a incomplete programming is receiving an error message during
the attempt or having the SPS application become unresponsive.
• DTCs are set in the body control module (BCM)
The immobilizer system is a function of the BCM software. If immobilizer DTCs are set in the BCM,
such as DTC B2955, a fault has been identified in the immobilizer system. If this is not corrected before
attempting to program components, the programming may not complete. Correct all immobilizer DTCs
before attempting to program any immobilizer components.
• The key has been programmed to another vehicle or is not the correct type for the vehicle
A key can only be programmed to a single vehicle. Once a key is programming to a vehicle, it is paired
for the life of the key. The key can be learned to the same vehicle again and again, but it is not able to be
programmed to a different vehicle.
Many vehicle are available with both a base keyless entry system and an optional passive entry system.
These keys typically look identical but cannot be substituted for one another. To verify the key is correct,
compare the part number that is etched on the key to the part number identified in the parts catalog. The
key should be correct for the system installed in the vehicle.
• The theft deterrent module is not properly secured or the key is not properly positioned in the pocket/slot.
A theft deterrent module that is not fully seated or is otherwise not properly secured may prevent a
coupling between the transponder located in the key and the theft deterrent module. Being out of place by
as little as 1 mm may prevent programming from completing. Make sure the theft deterrent module is
properly installed and fully seated in it's clip.
44 of 58
The key shank must be fully extended so that the entire key shank fits into the programming slot.
To determine if the theft deterrent module is properly secured, remove the battery from the key and place
the key into the pocket/slot. Attempt to change the vehicle mode by pressing the vehicle ON/OFF switch.
The vehicle should change modes. If the NO REMOTE DETECTED message is displayed on the DIC,
the theft deterrent module may not be properly secured.
• External interference is interrupting the programming operation
External RF interference and EMI may interrupt the low frequency coupling between the key and theft
deterrent module. This interference may come from many different locations. Devices plugged into the
vehicle power outlets such as cell phone chargers, laptop computers, GPS devices, etc. may cause
interference. Vehicle location may also cause interference. Locations near airports and military
installations may causer interference. Remove all customer installed devices and, if necessary, move the
vehicle if interference is suspected.
KEY WITH INTEGRATED TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING (WITHOUT BTM)
Keys can be programmed in various ways using the procedures outlined below. Using the Replacing Keys
procedures will first erase all the known keys from the vehicle. Any existing keys and any new keys will then
be programmed. This procedure should be used any time a key is required to be unlearned or erased from a
vehicle. If a new key is being learned to a vehicle to replace a damaged, inoperative, or stolen key, the
Replacing Keys procedure must be used. This ensures that the old key cannot be used to access or start the
vehicle after programming.
The Adding Keys procedure does not erase any keys prior to programming. The procedure will simply program
the key into the next available slot. The Adding Keys procedure should only be used when adding an additional
key to the vehicle. The Adding Keys procedure should never be used to program a key to a vehicle that is
having a key replaced, regardless of the cause for the replacement.
Replacing Keys (With SPS)
NOTE: • If no keys are present this procedure requires programming 2 keys during
the same programming event or the vehicle will not exit the procedure.
• A minimum of two transmitters must be learned during this procedure. The
vehicle will not exit the learn mode until at least a second transmitter is
learned.
• This procedure may be used with or without existing learned keys being
present.
• A total of eight keys may be learned to a single vehicle.
• This procedure will only learn the vehicle key information. This procedure
will not learn any immobilizer information between the body control
module (BCM) and engine control module (ECM).
• If the battery voltage is low, charge the battery before continuing with the
procedure.

3. Select the SPS application and follow the on-screen instructions.
45 of 58
6. Select the Program Transponder or Remote Key (Delete) function.
8. After programming all keys, "Programming Complete" is displayed.
9. Press the lock and unlock button on each key that was programmed. This will awaken each key and allow
keyless entry functions to be established.
key and then start the vehicle. When verifying operation, make sure that no other keys are near the
vehicle.
Replacing Keys (Without SPS) - United States and Mexico only
NOTE: • If no keys are present this procedure requires programming 2 keys during
the same programming event or the vehicle will not exit the procedure.
learned.
• This procedure should be used without existing learned keys being
present.
procedure.
1. With an unlearned master vehicle key, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
2. Observe the security indicator, after approximately 10 min the indicator will turn off.
3. Turn OFF the ignition and wait 5 s.
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 two more times for a total of 3 cycles or 30 min.
NOTE: The body control module learns the key transponder information upon the
ignition transition from OFF to ON. You must turn the ignition OFF before
attempting to start the vehicle.
5. Start the vehicle. The vehicle has now learned the key transponder information.
6. Additional keys may be learned using the Adding Keys procedure.
7. Clear all DTCs.
Adding Keys (With SPS)
NOTE: • This procedure may be used with or without existing learned keys being
present.
46 of 58
procedure.

6. Select the Program Transponder or Remote Key (Add) function.
keyless entry functions to be established.
vehicle.
Adding Keys (Without SPS) - North America only
NOTE: • To initiate, this procedure requires that 2 learned keys be available.

• This procedure adds keys only. The procedure does not erase previously
learned keys.
• The keys to be learned must duplicate the mechanical cut of the current
key.
1. With a previously learned key, turn the ignition ON.

2. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key.
3. With a second previously learned key, turn the ignition ON.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning OFF the ignition, insert the key to be learned and turn ON the ignition.
Keep the key in the ignition ON position for 5 seconds. The vehicle has now learned the new key and
integrated keyless entry transmitter.
KEY WITH INTEGRATED TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING (WITH BTM)
Keys can be programming in various ways using the procedures outlined below. Using the Replacing Keys
procedure will first erase all the known keys from the vehicle. Any existing keys and any new keys will then be
programmed. This procedure should be used any time a key is required to be unlearned or erased from a
vehicle. If a new key is being learned to a vehicle to replace a damaged, inoperative, missing, or stolen key, the
47 of 58
keys to the vehicle. The Adding Keys procedure should never be used to program a key to a vehicle that is
Replacing Keys (Without SPS)
NOTE: • This procedure will unlearn all previously learned keys. All keys that are to
be programmed must be with the vehicle.
learned.
• A total of eight keys maybe be learned to a single vehicle.
present. If existing keys are present, keep the keys away from the vicinity
of the vehicle. Failure to keep learned keys away from the vehicle will
result in the learn changing to the Adding Keys procedure.
key.
1. Insert the mechanical key of the new key into the key lock cylinder located on the outside of the driver
door and turn the key to the unlock position five times within ten seconds. The Driver Information Center
(DIC) will display Remote Learn Pending, Please Wait.
2. After ten minutes, the DIC will display Press Engine Start Button To Learn. Press the ignition mode
switch. The DIC will again display Remote Learn Pending, Please Wait.
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional times, for a total of thirty minutes. All previously known keys have now
been unlearned. Remaining keys can be learned during the next steps. The DIC display will now display
Ready For Remote # 1.
NOTE: The transmitter pocket is the inside of the front cupholder in the center
console.
4. Place the new key into the key pocket.
NOTE: If the programming does not complete or hangs during the programming
operation, refer to Unable to Complete Programming below.
5. Press the ignition mode switch. When the key is learned the DIC will indicate that it is ready to program
the next key.
6. Remove the key from the key pocket and press the unlock button. To program additional keys, repeat
Steps 4 through 6.
48 of 58
7. When all additional keys are programmed, press and hold the ignition mode switch for 5 seconds to exit
programming mode.
Replacing Keys (With SPS)
NOTE: • This procedure will unlearn all previously learned keys. All keys that are to
be programmed must be with the vehicle.
learned.
present. If no existing keys are available, this procedure must be used.
procedure.

in the run mode before continuing on the SPS terminal. If the ignition
is not in the run mode, the learn procedure will fail.
center console.
8. After programming all keys, Programming Complete, is displayed.

9. Press and hold the ignition mode switch for 15 seconds.
passive and active keyless entry functions to be established.
49 of 58
vehicle.
Adding Keys (Without SPS)
NOTE: • To initiate, this procedure requires that 2 learned keys be available.

learned keys.
key.
1. Place the recognized keys in the vehicle cupholder.

2. Insert the mechanical key of the new key into the key lock cylinder located on the outside of the driver
door and turn the key to the unlock position five times within ten seconds. The Driver Information Center
(DIC) will display Ready For Remote #2, 3, 4 or 5.
NOTE: The transmitter pocket is the inside of the front cupholder in the center
console.
3. Place the new key into the key pocket.

4. Press the ignition mode switch. When the key is learned the DIC will indicate that it is ready to program
the next key.
5. Remove the key from the key pocket and press the unlock button. To program additional keys, repeat
Steps 3 through 5.
6. When all additional keys are programmed, press and hold the ignition mode switch for 5 seconds to exit
programming mode.
present. If no existing keys are available, this procedure must be used.
• This procedure will only learn the vehicle key information.
procedure.

50 of 58
in the run mode before continuing on the SPS terminal. If the ignition
is not in the run mode, the learn procedure will fail.
center console.
8. After programming all keys, Programming Complete, is displayed.

passive and active keyless entry functions to be established.
vehicle.
Unable to Complete Programming
When attempting to program immobilizer components, various conditions may prevent the programming
operation from completing. These conditions may be caused by normal system operation, a system malfunction,
or an external influence. Common symptoms of a incomplete programming is receiving an error message during
the attempt or having the SPS application become unresponsive.
• DTCs are set in the body control module (BCM)
The immobilizer system is a function of the BCM software. If immobilizer DTCs are set in the BCM,
such as DTC B2955, a fault has been identified in the immobilizer system. If this is not corrected before
attempting to program components, the programming may not complete. Correct all immobilizer DTCs
before attempting to program any immobilizer components.
• The key has been programmed to another vehicle or is not the correct type for the vehicle
A key can only be programmed to a single vehicle. Once a key is programming to a vehicle, it is paired
for the life of the key. The key can be learned to the same vehicle again and again, but it is not able to be
programmed to a different vehicle.
Many vehicle are available with both a base keyless entry system and an optional passive entry system.
These keys typically look identical but cannot be substituted for one another. To verify the key is correct,
compare the part number that is etched on the key to the part number identified in the parts catalog. The
key should be correct for the system installed in the vehicle.
• The theft deterrent module is not properly secured or the key is not properly positioned in the pocket/slot.
51 of 58
A theft deterrent module that is not fully seated or is otherwise not properly secured may prevent a
coupling between the transponder located in the key and the theft deterrent module. Being out of place by
as little as 1 mm may prevent programming from completing. Make sure the theft deterrent module is
properly installed and fully seated in it's clip.
The key should be positioned in the proper orientation so that it lays flat in the pocket. If a large key ring
or other item attached to the key prevents the key from laying flat, remove the key ring.
To determine if the theft deterrent module is properly secured, remove the battery from the key and place
the key into the pocket/slot. Attempt to change the vehicle mode by pressing the vehicle ON/OFF switch.
The vehicle should change modes. If the NO REMOTE DETECTED message is displayed on the DIC,
the theft deterrent module may not be properly secured.
• External interference is interrupting the programming operation
External RF interference and EMI may interrupt the low frequency coupling between the key and theft
deterrent module. This interference may come from many different locations. Devices plugged into the
vehicle power outlets such as cell phone chargers, laptop computers, GPS devices, etc. may cause
interference. Vehicle location may also cause interference. Locations near airports and military
installations may causer interference. Remove all customer installed devices and, if necessary, move the
vehicle if interference is suspected.
PROGRAMMING ADDITIONAL KEYS (WITHOUT BTM)
key to the vehicle. The Adding Keys procedure should never be used to program a key to a vehicle that is
Using the Replacing Keys procedures will first erase all the known keys from the vehicle. Any existing keys
and any new keys will then be programmed. This procedure should be used any time a key is required to be
unlearned or erased from a vehicle. If a new key is being learned to a vehicle to replace a damaged, inoperative,
or stolen key, the Replacing Keys procedure must be used. This ensures that the old key cannot be used to
access or start the vehicle after programming. Refer to Replacing Keys (without BTM).
Adding Keys (Without SPS)
NOTE: • To initiate, this procedure requires that 2 learned key be available.

learned keys.
key.
1. With a previously learned key, turn the ignition ON.

3. With a second previously learned key, turn the ignition ON.
5. Within 10 seconds of turning OFF the ignition, insert the key to be learned and turn ON/RUN position
52 of 58
(do not turn to the crank position). Keep key in the ON/RUN position for 5 seconds and the theft light
turns off. The vehicle has now learned the new key.
NOTE: • Step 5 can be repeated until a maximum of 8 keys are learned

(including 2 factory keys) to the vehicle.
• Be sure to keep other keys and transmitters at least 12 in (30 cm)
away from the ignition cylinder while learning.
6. Verify each transmitter and key is operating properly. Remove key from the ignition cylinder and wait 30
seconds. Insert the key into the ignition cylinder and start vehicle.
NOTE: • When verifying operation, make sure that no other transmitters are
near the vehicle.
• If key fails to learn repeat steps 1-6 paying close attention to the time
limits at each step.
7.
present.
procedure.

10. Verify each transmitter and key is operating properly. Operate each of the keyless entry functions using
the buttons on the transmitter. On vehicles with a keyed ignition switch, verify the mechanical key by
starting the vehicle using the ignition switch. When verifying operation, make sure that no other
transmitters are near the vehicle.
REPLACING KEYS (WITHOUT BTM)
53 of 58
Keys can be programmed in various ways using the procedures outlined below. Using the Replacing Keys
procedures will first erase all the known keys from the vehicle. Any existing keys and any new keys will then
be programmed. This procedure should be used any time a key is required to be unlearned or erased from a
vehicle. If a new key is being learned to a vehicle to replace a damaged, inoperative, or stolen key, the
The Adding Keys procedure does not erase any keys prior to programming. Adding Keys will simply program
the key into the next available slot. The Adding Keys procedure should only be used when programming an
additional key to the vehicle. The Adding Keys procedure should never be used to program a key to a vehicle
that is having a key replaced, regardless of the cause for the replacement.
With SPS
present.
learned.
procedure.
key.

Without SPS (United States and Mexico only)
NOTE: • This procedure should be used without existing learned keys being
54 of 58
present.
learned.
procedure.
key.
1. With an unlearned master vehicle key, turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
2. Observe the security indicator, after approximately 10 min the indicator will turn off.
3. Turn OFF the ignition and wait 5 s.
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 two more times for a total of 3 cycles or 30 min.
5. Start the vehicle. The vehicle has now learned the key transponder information.
6. Additional keys may be learned using the Adding Keys procedure. Refer to Programming Additional
Keys (without BTM).
7. Clear all DTCs.

IMMOBILIZER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
55 of 58
The immobilizer system functions are provided by the Remote Control Door Lock Receiver, the Steering
Column Lock Module, the Body Control Module (BCM), and the Engine Control Module (ECM), as well as
any control modules which store and report the environment identifier. The Body Control Module uses low
frequency antennas in three different locations on the vehicle to determine the location of the transmitter.
Multiple transmitting antennas are used to ensure complete coverage of the vehicle interior and rear
compartment. These antennas transmit to the keyless entry transmitter.
When the vehicle Stop/Start switch is pressed, the low frequency antennas emit a challenge to the keyless entry
transmitter. The transmitter receives this challenge and emits it's response as an RF message. The transmitter
transmits a signal that contains its unique value, which is received by the BCM through the Remote Control
Door Lock Receiver. The BCM then compares this value to a value stored in memory. The BCM also monitors
various control modules to determine if the stored environment identifiers match.
If the correct transponder is detected, the electric steering column is unlocked, and there is no start disable from
OnStar the BCM will send the prerelease allowed message via serial data to the ECM. The vehicle will be
allowed up to 3 seconds run time. If the theft check is incorrect, the environment identifier check fails, the
incorrect transponder is detected, the electric steering column is locked, or there is a start disable from OnStar,
the BCM will send a negative response and the ECM will not start the vehicle or will immediately shut off the
vehicle if prerelease allowed the vehicle to start.
If RF communication is interrupted, a "No Remote Detected" message will be displayed on the DIC. In these
cases, the transmitter can be placed in the transmitter pocket. The immobilizer coil antenna is located in the
immediate vicinity of the transmitter pocket. Placing the transmitter in the pocket/slot will create a low powered
coupling between the transmitter and immobilizer coil antenna, allowing communications to occur and enabling
vehicle starting.
The components of the immobilizer system are as follows:
• BCM
• ECM
• Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
56 of 58
• Steering column lock control module
• Immobilizer coil antenna
• Low frequency antenna
• Ignition key/Keyless entry transmitter
• Security indicator
• Various control modules which store and report the environment identifier
Body Control Module (BCM)
The immobilizer system is an integral part of the BCM and is controlled internally within the BCM. The BCM
can learn up to 8 keys (transponder values). The BCM uses low frequency antennas in three different locations
on the vehicle to determine the location of the transmitter. Multiple antennas are used to ensure complete
coverage of the vehicle interior and rear compartment. The BCM monitors the ignition mode switch. When the
ignition mode is changed, the BCM will command, or "ping", the low frequency antenna.
The BCM uses the following inputs:
• Environment identifier exchange with various modules

• Encrypted code from the vehicle key, received by the immobilizer coil antenna if the keyless entry
transmitter signal isn't detected as indicated by the "No Remote Detected" message
• Encrypted code from the vehicle key, received by the Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
The BCM uses the following outputs:
• Prerelease Allowed signal communication with ECM

• Challenge/Response with ECM
When a transponder value is received by the BCM, the BCM will compare this value to the learned key code
stored in memory. The BCM then performs one of the following functions:
• If the encrypted code value matches the values stored in the BCM memory, the BCM will send the
Prerelease Allowed signal to the ECM via serial data.
• If the encrypted code unique value does not match the value stored in the BCM, the BCM will send the
start disable message to the ECM via serial data.
• If the BCM is unable to receive the vehicle key encrypted code value, the BCM will not send any
messages to the ECM.
Engine Control Module (ECM)
The ECM receives the BCM Prerelease Allowed signal and simultaneously the ECM sends a challenge to the
BCM via the serial data circuit upon seeing the vehicle transition from OFF to any other power mode. Both the
ECM and BCM perform a calculation on this challenge. If the calculated response from the BCM equals the
calculation performed by the ECM, the ECM will allow vehicle starting.
Low Frequency Antenna
When commanded, or "pinged", the low frequency antenna broadcast a challenge to the keyless entry
transmitter. Because of the low power of the antenna, this challenge is only broadcast in an approximate three
meter range of the antenna. Multiple antenna are used to ensure complete coverage of the vehicle interior and
rear compartment.
57 of 58
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
When the keyless entry transmitter is challenged by a low frequency antenna, it responds by emitting a response
as an RF message. The transmitter transmits a signal that contains its unique value, which is received by the
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver. The Remote Control Door Lock Receiver relays this information to the
BCM via a discreet serial data circuit.
Steering Column Lock Control Module
On vehicles with electronic steering column lock that use a steering column lock control module the
immobilizer system will prevent vehicle starting if there is a fault or no communication with the steering
column lock control module.
Keyless Entry Transmitter
Each keyless entry transmitter contains a transponder with a unique encrypted value. The transponder's
encrypted value is fixed and unable to be changed. The immobilizer system uses the keyless entry transmitter
transponder value to determine if a valid keyless entry transmitter is being used to start the vehicle.
Security Indicator
The BCM will command the Instrument Cluster to illuminate the security indicator when the vehicle is ON to
indicate a fault has occurred within the immobilizer system.
REMOTE VEHICLE SPEED LIMITING DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Certain vehicles equipped with OnStarÂ® now have an additional feature that allows for remote limiting of the
vehicle's speed. This OnStarÂ® feature is called Stolen Vehicle Slow-Down and is now part of the OnStarÂ®
Stolen Vehicle Assistance service. This feature, when used in conjunction with local law enforcement and strict
guidelines at the OnStarÂ® Call Center, will slow the vehicle by interacting with the engine control system.
When the engine control system receives a valid request from the OnStarÂ® telematics communications
interface module, it will enter into a reduced engine power/vehicle speed limiting mode, which will decelerate
the vehicle. Once the request is active the engine control module begins reducing engine torque to match
requested vehicle speed and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER indication is displayed. No DTCs will be set
during this process.
58 of 58
Instrument Panel And Console Trim - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Air Distributor Duct Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Data Link Connector Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Floor Console Bolt 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Front Floor Console Extension Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Floor Console Rear Cover Bolt 1 N.m (9 lb in)
Front Floor Rear Console Trim Plate Bolt 1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower
5 N.m (44 lb in)
Module Bolt
Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower
5 N.m (44 lb in)
Module Nut
Instrument Panel Airbag Bolt 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Instrument Panel Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Instrument Panel Center Support Bracket Nut 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate Bolt 1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Instrument Panel Tie Bar Bolt 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace Bolt 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Instrument Panel Upper Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Instrument Panel Upper Bolt @ Front Dash 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER TRIM PANEL INSULATOR REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE
1 of 101
Instrument Panel Lower Insulator Retainer [3x]
1 Procedure
Using a suitable tool, remove the retainer.
2 Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator
INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER TRIM PANEL INSULATOR REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE

Instrument Panel Lower Insulator Retainer [3x]
1 Procedure
Using a suitable tool, remove the retainer.
2 Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator
INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCH TRIM PLATE REPLACEMENT
2 of 101
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Replacement
Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate Bolt [4x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Instrument Panel Switch Trim Plate
2 Procedure
INSTRUMENT PANEL EXTENSION REPLACEMENT (UV6)
3 of 101
1. Remove the left and right windshield garnish molding. Windshield Garnish Molding
Replacement
2. Head-Up Display Bezel Replacement
Instrument Panel Extension
Procedure
1 1. Using a flat-bladed plastic trim tool, release the retaining clips.
INSTRUMENT PANEL EXTENSION REPLACEMENT (UEU)

Remove the left and right windshield garnish molding. Windshield Garnish Molding Replacement
Procedure
INSTRUMENT PANEL EXTENSION REPLACEMENT (BASE)
4 of 101
Remove the left and right windshield garnish molding. Windshield Garnish Molding Replacement
Procedure
INSTRUMENT PANEL KNEE BOLSTER REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Access Hole Cover (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Fuse Block Access
Hole Cover Replacement
2.
5 of 101
Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover (1) - Remove - Refer to Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover
Replacement - Right Side, or Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover Replacement - Left Side
3.
Data Link Connector Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
4. Disconnect the data link connector. (2)
5.
6 of 101
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Bolt (1) - Remove [10x]
7.
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster (1) - Remove
2.
7 of 101
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster (1) - Install
3.
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [10x] 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
4. Connect the data link connector.
5.
8 of 101
Data Link Connector Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
6.
Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover (1) - Install - Refer to Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover
Replacement - Right Side, or Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover Replacement - Left Side
7.
9 of 101
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Access Hole Cover (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Fuse Block Access
Hole Cover Replacement
INSTRUMENT PANEL TRIM PLATE APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE

1. Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover Replacement - Right Side, or Instrument Panel Outer
Trim Cover Replacement - Left Side
2. Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement - Right Side
3. Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad Replacement - Right Side
4. Open the instrument panel compartment door.
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique - Right Side
Procedure
2
INSTRUMENT PANEL TRIM PLATE APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE
10 of 101
1. Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Replacement

2. Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement - Left Side
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique - Left Side
Procedure
2
INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER TRIM PAD REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE
11 of 101
Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad-Left Side
1 Procedure
Using a flat-bladed plastic trim tool, release the retaining clips.
INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER TRIM PAD REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE

Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad-Right Side
1 Procedure
INSTRUMENT PANEL UPPER TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
12 of 101
{ If equipped } Head-Up Display Bezel (1) - Remove - Head-Up Display Bezel Replacement
2.
Instrument Panel Extension (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Extension Replacement (UV6), or
Instrument Panel Extension Replacement (UEU), or Instrument Panel Extension Replacement
(Base)
3.
13 of 101
Instrument Panel Trim Pad - Right Side (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement -
Right Side
4.
Instrument Panel Trim Pad - Left Side (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement - Left
Side
5.
14 of 101
Remove the left and right instrument panel outer trim cover (1). Refer to Instrument Panel Outer Trim
Cover Replacement - Right Side, or Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover Replacement - Left Side
6.
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique - Left Side (2) - Remove - Instrument Panel Trim Plate
Applique Replacement - Left Side
7.
15 of 101
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique - Right Side (2) - Remove - Instrument Panel Trim Plate
Applique Replacement - Right Side
8.
Radio Front Center Speaker (2) - Remove - Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement
9.
16 of 101
Remove both radio front speakers (1). Radio Front Speaker Replacement
10.
Instrument Panel Airbag Bolt (1) - Remove [3x]
11. Disconnect the instrument panel airbag electrical connector from the instrument panel harness.
12.
Instrument Panel Upper Bolt (1) - Remove [5x]
13. Air Distributor Duct Bolt (2) - Remove [4x]
14.
17 of 101
Instrument Panel Upper Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
15.
Instrument Panel Upper Trim Panel (1) - Remove
1.
18 of 101
Instrument Panel Upper Trim Panel (1) - Install
2.
Instrument Panel Upper Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
3.
19 of 101
Instrument Panel Upper Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [5x] 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
4. Air Distributor Duct Bolt (2) - Install and tighten [4x] 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
5.
Instrument Panel Airbag Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [3x] 9 N.m (80 lb in)
7.
20 of 101
Install both radio front speakers (1). Radio Front Speaker Replacement
8.
Radio Front Center Speaker (2) - Install - Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement
9.
21 of 101
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique - Right Side (2) - Install - Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique
10.
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique - Left Side (2) - Install - Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique
11.
Install the left and right instrument panel outer trim cover (1). Refer to Instrument Panel Outer Trim
12.
22 of 101
Instrument Panel Trim Pad - Left Side (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement - Left
Side
13.
Instrument Panel Trim Pad - Right Side (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement - Right
Side
14.
23 of 101
Instrument Panel Extension (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Extension Replacement (UV6), or
(Base)
15.
{ If equipped }Head-Up Display Bezel (1) - Install - Head-Up Display Bezel Replacement
HEAD-UP DISPLAY BEZEL REPLACEMENT
24 of 101
Head-Up Display Bezel
1 Procedure
INSTRUMENT PANEL FUSE BLOCK ACCESS HOLE COVER REPLACEMENT

Instrument Panel Fuse Block Access Hole Cover
1 Procedure
INSTRUMENT PANEL CLUSTER TRIM PLATE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
25 of 101
2.
3.
26 of 101
Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate Bolt (1) - Remove [4x]
4.
Use a flat bladed plastic trim tool in order to release the tabs on the bottom of the instrument panel cluster
trim plate closeout (1).
5.
Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate (1) - Remove
1.
27 of 101
Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate (1) - Install
2.
Install the tabs on the bottom of the instrument panel cluster trim plate closeout (1).
3.
28 of 101
Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [4x] 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
4.
5.
INSTRUMENT PANEL OUTER TRIM COVER REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE
29 of 101
Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover - Right Side
WARNING:
Verify the
proper
installation
of the airbag
disable
switch.
Ensure the
airbag
disable
switch is
functioning
properly by
activating
and
1 deactivating
the switch. If
the airbag
disable
switch is not
properly
installed,
and its
function is
not verified,
the airbag
may
discharge
improperly
and cause
personal
injury or
30 of 101
death.
Procedure
1. Pull away a segment of the front side door weather-strip to clear the edge of the trim
cover.
2. Using a flat bladed plastic trim tool, start at the back and work your way inboard to
release the tabs.
INSTRUMENT PANEL OUTER TRIM COVER REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE

Instrument Panel Outer Trim Cover - Left Side
Procedure
1 1. Pull away a segment of the front side door weather-strip to clear the edge of the trim
cover.
2. Use a flat bladed plastic tool to remove.
3. Start at the back and work your way inboard to release the tabs.
INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER CENTER TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the front floor console bolts and slide the console back to clear the front floor console trim plate
from the instrument panel. Front Floor Console Replacement
2.
31 of 101
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Replacement
3.
Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad-Right Side (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad
4.
32 of 101
Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad-Left Side (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad
5.
Heater and Air Conditioning User Interface Control (2) - Remove - Heater and Air Conditioning User
Interface Control Replacement
6.
Hazard Warning Switch (2) - Remove - Hazard Warning Switch Replacement
7.
33 of 101
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
8. Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel (2) - Remove
1.
Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel (2) - Install
2. Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
3.
34 of 101
Hazard Warning Switch (2) - Install - Hazard Warning Switch Replacement
4.
Heater and Air Conditioning User Interface Control (2) - Install - Heater and Air Conditioning User
Interface Control Replacement
5.
35 of 101
Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad-Right Side (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad
6.
Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad-Left Side (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Center Trim Pad
7.
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Replacement
8. Front Floor Console - Install - Front Floor Console Replacement
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPARTMENT DOOR REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
36 of 101
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator - Right Side (2) - Remove - Instrument Panel Lower
Trim Panel Insulator Replacement - Right Side
2.
Release the retaining tabs. (1)
3. Instrument Panel Compartment Door Hinge (2) - Remove [2x]
4.
37 of 101
Disconnect the instrument panel compartment door dampener (1) from the instrument panel compartment
door.
5. Squeeze the sides of the compartment and lower the compartment past the stops.
6.
Instrument Panel Compartment Door (1) - Remove
1.
38 of 101
Instrument Panel Compartment Door (1) - Install
2.
Squeeze the sides of the compartment and install the compartment past the stops.
3. Connect the instrument panel compartment door dampener (1) to the instrument panel compartment door.
4.
39 of 101
Instrument Panel Compartment Door Hinge (2) - Install [2x]
5.
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator - Right Side (2) - Install - Instrument Panel Lower Trim
Panel Insulator Replacement - Right Side
INSTRUMENT PANEL TRIM PAD REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE
40 of 101
Instrument Panel Trim Pad - Left Side
1 Procedure
INSTRUMENT PANEL TRIM PAD REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE

Instrument Panel Trim Pad - Right Side
1. Using a flat-bladed plastic trim tool, release the retaining clips.

1
INSTRUMENT PANEL CARRIER REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
41 of 101
Front Floor Console (1) - Remove - Front Floor Console Replacement
2.
{ If equipped }Head-Up Display Bezel (1) - Remove - Head-Up Display Bezel Replacement
3.
42 of 101
Instrument Panel Extension (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Extension Replacement (UV6), or
(Base)
4.
Instrument Panel Trim Pad - Right Side (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement -
Right Side
5.
Instrument Panel Trim Pad - Left Side (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement - Left
Side
6.
43 of 101
Remove the left and right instrument panel outer trim cover (1). Refer to Instrument Panel Outer Trim
7.
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique - Right Side (2) - Remove - Instrument Panel Trim Plate
Applique Replacement - Right Side
8.
44 of 101
Radio Front Center Speaker (2) - Remove - Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement
9.
Remove both radio front speakers (1). Radio Front Speaker Replacement
10.
45 of 101
11.
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Replacement
12.
13.
46 of 101
Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate Replacement
14.
Instrument Cluster (2) - Remove - Instrument Cluster Replacement
15.
47 of 101
Head-Up Display Bracket (2) - Remove - Head-Up Display Bracket Replacement
16.
Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille - Left Side (2) - Remove - Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille
17.
Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet (2) - Remove - Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Replacement
18.
48 of 101
Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel (2) - Remove - Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel
Replacement
19.
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator - Left Side (2) - Remove - Instrument Panel Lower Trim
Panel Insulator Replacement - Left Side
20.
49 of 101
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator - Right Side (2) - Remove - Instrument Panel Lower
Trim Panel Insulator Replacement - Right Side
21.
Turn Signal Switch (1) - Remove - Turn Signal Switch Replacement
22.
50 of 101
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch (1) - Remove - Windshield Wiper and Windshield Washer
Switch Replacement
23.
Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct Bolt (1) - Remove [2x] - Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet
Duct Replacement
24.
Instrument Panel Bolt (1) - Remove [19x]
25.
51 of 101
Instrument Panel Carrier (1) - Remove
26. Disconnect and reposition harness as necessary.
1. Install the wiring harness.
2.
Instrument Panel Carrier (1) - Install
3.
52 of 101
Instrument Panel Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [19x] 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
4.
Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct Bolt (1) - Install [2x] - Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet
Duct Replacement
5.
53 of 101
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch (1) - Install - Windshield Wiper and Windshield Washer Switch
Replacement
6.
Turn Signal Switch (1) - Install - Turn Signal Switch Replacement
7.
54 of 101
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator - Right Side (2) - Install - Instrument Panel Lower Trim
Panel Insulator Replacement - Right Side
8.
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator - Left Side (2) - Install - Instrument Panel Lower Trim
Panel Insulator Replacement - Left Side
9.
Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel (2) - Install - Instrument Panel Lower Center Trim Panel
Replacement
10.
55 of 101
Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet (2) - Install - Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Replacement
11.
Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille - Left Side (2) - Install - Side Window Defogger Outlet Grille
12.
56 of 101
Head-Up Display Bracket (2) - Install - Head-Up Display Bracket Replacement
13.
Instrument Cluster (2) - Install - Instrument Cluster Replacement
14.
Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Cluster Trim Plate Replacement
15.
57 of 101
16.
Instrument Panel Knee Bolster (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Knee Bolster Replacement
17.
58 of 101
18.
Install both radio front speakers (1). Radio Front Speaker Replacement
19.
Radio Front Center Speaker (2) - Install - Radio Front Center Speaker Replacement
20.
59 of 101
Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique - Right Side (2) - Install - Instrument Panel Trim Plate Applique
21.
Install the left and right instrument panel outer trim cover (1). Refer to Instrument Panel Outer Trim
22.
60 of 101
Instrument Panel Trim Pad - Left Side (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement - Left
Side
23.
Instrument Panel Trim Pad - Right Side (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Trim Pad Replacement - Right
Side
24.
61 of 101
Instrument Panel Extension (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Extension Replacement (UV6), or
(Base)
25.
{ If equipped } Head-Up Display Bezel (1) - Install - Head-Up Display Bezel Replacement
26.
62 of 101
Front Floor Console (1) - Install - Front Floor Console Replacement
INSTRUMENT PANEL TIE BAR REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1. Remove both front side doors. Front Side Door Replacement
2.
Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct (1) - Remove - Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct
Replacement
3.
63 of 101
Floor Front Air Outlet Duct - Left Side (2) - Remove - Floor Front Air Outlet Duct Replacement - Left
Side
4.
Steering Column (1) - Remove - Steering Column Replacement
5.
64 of 101
Brake and Accelerator Pedal Assembly (1) - Remove - Brake and Accelerator Pedal Assembly
Replacement
6.
Air Inlet Grille Panel (2) - Remove - Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement
7.
65 of 101
Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Nut (1) - Loosen - Heater and Air
Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Removal and Installation
8.
Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Nut (1) - Remove [2x]
9.
66 of 101
Instrument Panel Tie Bar Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
10.
11.
Instrument Panel Upper Bolt @ Front Dash (1) - Remove
12.
67 of 101
13.
Remove the left and right instrument panel tie bar brace (3). Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace
Replacement
14.
68 of 101
Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
15. Use a suitable tool to release the HVAC module tabs (2) from the tie bar.
16.
NOTE: Note the location and routing of the wiring harness to ensure proper
reinstallation.
With the aid of an assistant, remove the instrument panel tie bar (1) from the vehicle.
17. Support the HVAC module in order to prevent damage.

19. Radio Bracket - Remove - Radio Bracket Replacement
20. Communication Interface Module Bracket - Remove - Communication Interface Module Bracket
Replacement
1. Communication Interface Module Bracket - Install - Communication Interface Module Bracket

Replacement
2. Radio Bracket - Install - Radio Bracket Replacement
4.
69 of 101
Instrument Panel Tie Bar (1) - Install
5.
Seat the tabs (2) into the tie bar.
6. Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Bolt (1) - Install [2x] 5 N.m (44 lb in)
7.
70 of 101
Install the left and right instrument panel tie bar brace (3). Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace
Replacement
8.
Instrument Panel Tie Bar Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
9.
71 of 101
Instrument Panel Upper Bolt @ Front Dash (1) - Install and tighten 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
10.
11.
12.
72 of 101
Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Nut (1) - Install and tighten [2x] 5 N.m (44
lb in)
13.
Heater and Air Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Nut (1) - Install - Heater and Air
Conditioning Evaporator and Blower Module Removal and Installation
14.
73 of 101
Air Inlet Grille Panel (2) - Install - Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement
15.
Brake and Accelerator Pedal Assembly (1) - Install - Brake and Accelerator Pedal Assembly
Replacement
16.
74 of 101
Steering Column (1) - Install - Steering Column Replacement
17.
Floor Front Air Outlet Duct - Left Side (2) - Install - Floor Front Air Outlet Duct Replacement - Left
Side
18.
75 of 101
Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct (1) - Install - Instrument Panel Center Air Outlet Duct
Replacement
19. Install both front side doors. Front Side Door Replacement
INSTRUMENT PANEL TIE BAR BRACE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the front floor console bolts and slide the console back to access the tie bar braces. Front Floor
Console Replacement
2.
Instrument Panel Center Support Bracket Nut (1) - Remove
3. Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace Bolt (2) - Remove [2x]

4. Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace (3) - Remove
5.
Instrument Panel Center Support Bracket Nut (1) - Remove
6. Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace Bolt (2) - Remove [2x]

7. Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace (3) - Remove
76 of 101
1.
Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace (3) - Install
2. Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace Bolt (2) - Install and tighten [2x] 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
3. Instrument Panel Center Support Bracket Nut (1) - Install and tighten 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
4.
Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace (3) - Install
5. Instrument Panel Tie Bar Brace Bolt (2) - Install and tighten [2x] 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
6. Instrument Panel Center Support Bracket Nut (1) - Install and tighten 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE COMPARTMENT REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
77 of 101
Using a plastic trim tool, release the front floor console trim plate retainers (1) at the front floor console
compartment. Front Floor Console Trim Plate Replacement
2.
NOTE: Use a plastic trim tool if necessary.
Front Floor Console Compartment (1) - Remove

2.
78 of 101
Front Floor Console Compartment (1) - Install
3.
Front Floor Console Trim Plate (1) - Install - Front Floor Console Trim Plate Replacement
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE REAR TRIM PANEL REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
79 of 101
Front Floor Console (1) - Remove - Front Floor Console Replacement
2.
Front Floor Console Compartment (1) - Remove - Front Floor Console Compartment Replacement
3.
80 of 101
Front Floor Console Rear Cover Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
4.
Front Floor Console Rear Cover Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
5.
Front Floor Console Rear Trim Panel (1) - Remove

2.
81 of 101
Front Floor Console Rear Trim Panel (1) - Install
3.
Front Floor Console Rear Cover Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] 1 N.m (9 lb in)
4.
82 of 101
Front Floor Console Rear Cover Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] 1 N.m (9 lb in)
5.
Front Floor Console Compartment (1) - Install - Front Floor Console Compartment Replacement
6.
83 of 101
Front Floor Console (1) - Install - Front Floor Console Replacement
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE EXTENSION PANEL REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE

Removal Procedure
1. Move the front seat to access the retainers.
2.
Front Floor Console Extension Panel Bolt Access Hole Cover (1) - Remove
3. Front Floor Console Extension Bolt (2) - Remove
4.
5. Front Floor Console Extension Panel-Right Side (1) - Remove
1.
84 of 101
Front Floor Console Extension Panel-Right Side (1) - Install
2.
Front Floor Console Extension Bolt (2) - Install and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
3. Front Floor Console Extension Panel Bolt Access Hole Cover (1) - Install
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE EXTENSION PANEL REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE

Removal Procedure
1. Move the front seat to access the retainers.
2.
85 of 101
Front Floor Console Extension Panel Bolt Access Hole Cover (1) - Remove
3. Front Floor Console Extension Bolt (2) - Remove
4.
5. Front Floor Console Extension Panel-Left Side (1) - Remove
1.
86 of 101
Front Floor Console Extension Panel-Left Side (1) - Install
2.
Front Floor Console Extension Bolt (2) - Install and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
3. Front Floor Console Extension Panel Bolt Access Hole Cover (1) - Install
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
87 of 101
Front Floor Console Applique - Right Side (1) - Remove - Front Floor Console Applique Replacement
- Right Side
2.
Front Floor Console Applique - Left Side (1) - Remove - Front Floor Console Applique Replacement -
Left Side
3.
88 of 101
Front Floor Console Bolt (1) - Remove [3x]
4.
Front Floor Console Bolt (1) - Remove [3x]
5. Slide the front floor console back to clear the guide pins and front floor console trim plate.
7.
89 of 101
Front Floor Console (1) - Remove
2.
Front Floor Console (1) - Install
3.
90 of 101
Front Floor Console Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [3x] 9 N.m (80 lb in)
4.
Front Floor Console Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [3x] 9 N.m (80 lb in)
5.
91 of 101
Front Floor Console Applique - Left Side (1) - Install - Front Floor Console Applique Replacement -
Left Side
6.
Front Floor Console Applique - Right Side (1) - Install - Front Floor Console Applique Replacement -
Right Side
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE ARMREST REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
Front Floor Console Rear Trim Panel (1) - Remove - Front Floor Console Rear Trim Panel
Replacement
2.
92 of 101
Use a suitable tool to release the front floor console armrest hinge clip (1) from the pivot pin.
3. Remove the front floor console armrest pivot pin (2) from the armrest.
4.
Use a suitable tool to release the ends of the front floor console armrest hinge spring (1) from the armrest.
5.
93 of 101
Remove the front floor console armrest (1) from the front floor console.
1.
Install the front floor console armrest (1) to the front floor console.
2.
94 of 101
NOTE: Inspect the components and replace as necessary.
Attach the ends of the front floor console armrest hinge spring (1) to the armrest.
3.
Install the front floor console armrest pivot pin (2) to the armrest.
4. Install the front floor console armrest clip (1) to the end of the pivot pin.
5.
Front Floor Console Rear Trim Panel (1) - Install - Front Floor Console Rear Trim Panel Replacement
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE TRIM PLATE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1. Remove the front floor console bolts and slide the console back to clear the front floor console trim plate
from the instrument panel. Front Floor Console Replacement
2.
95 of 101
Using a plastic trim tool, start releasing the front floor console trim plate (1) retainers at the front floor
console compartment and work your way forward.
3.
Front Floor Console Trim Plate (1) - Remove

2.
96 of 101
NOTE: Make sure to seat the tabs around the shifter trim.
Front Floor Console Trim Plate (1) - Install
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE REAR TRIM PLATE REPLACEMENT

Front Floor Console Rear Trim Panel Replacement
Front Floor Rear Console Trim Plate Bolt [4x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
97 of 101
Tighten
1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Front Floor Console Rear Trim Plate
2 Procedure
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE

Front Floor Console Applique - Right Side
1 Procedure
FRONT FLOOR CONSOLE APPLIQUE REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE
98 of 101
Front Floor Console Extension Panel Replacement - Left Side
Front Floor Console Applique - Left Side
1 Procedure
ROOF CONSOLE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
CAUTION: Do not exert downward force at the forward or rearward edge of the roof
console assembly as irreversible damage will occur.
NOTE: Do NOT pull the back of the roof console down near the sunglass bin.
Fig. 1: Identifying Roof Console With Tightening Sequence

1. With a flat-bladed trim tool, release the tab at the most rearward of the roof console (1) and pull down on
console, then release the retaining tab in the middle of the console and pull down, then release the
retaining tab at the most forward of the console and pull down the console along the left side.
2. With a flat-bladed trim tool, release the tab at the most rearward of the roof console (1) and pull down on
console, then release the retaining tab in the middle of the console and pull down, then release the
retaining tab at the most forward of the console and pull down the console along the right side.
3.
99 of 101
Pull the roof console (1) rearward to remove the 2 front roof console tabs from the headliner.

2.
Install the roof console (1) and 2 roof console tabs into the headliner.
3.
100 of 101
Push up both sides of the roof console (1) along the retaining clips to install.
101 of 101
Mirrors - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Inside Rearview Mirror Set Screw 1.8 N.m (16 lb in)
Outside Rearview Mirror Actuator Bolt 0.8 N.m (7 lb in)
Outside Rearview Mirror Opening Applique Bolt 1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Outside Rearview Mirror Reinforcement Nut 9 N.m (80 lb in)
ADHESIVES, FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND SEALERS
GM Part Number
Application Type of Material United States Canada
Inside Mirror Adhesive Kit Adhesive 89021329 89020893

INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR WIRING SCHEMATICS
Inside Rearview Mirror (DD8 or DRZ)
1 of 47
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR WIRING SCHEMATICS
Driver and Passenger Controls and Position (-A45)
Driver Controls, Position and Folding (A45)
Passenger Controls, Position and Folding (A45)
2 of 47
Heating
Dimming (DNP/DR4)
3 of 47
DTC B154A OR B154B
DTC Descriptors
DTC B154A 39
Driver Mirror Internal Malfunction
DTC B154B 39
Passenger Mirror Internal Malfunction
The outside rearview mirror switch is a multiplex switch which signals the mirror control module which outside
rearview mirror to move (driver or passenger) and which direction to move it. The mirror control module and
the passenger window switch are on a serial data circuit with the memory seat module as the master. The mirror
select and directional control switches are inputs to the mirror control module. When the memory seat module
receives the switch inputs from the mirror control module, mirror output commands are sent to the appropriate
module/switch through the serial data circuit. The mirror control module and passenger window switch control
the left and right outside rear view mirrors through bi-directional motor control circuits. The motor control
circuits are floating while in an inactive state and the switches will apply power and ground to the control
circuits as necessary to move the mirror in the commanded direction.
Mirror position is determined by both horizontal and vertical position sensors in each of the power mirrors. The
mirror control module and passenger window switch supply a 5 V reference, low reference, and horizontal and
vertical position signal circuits to these sensors. The signal circuits are referenced from 5 V by the switches and
the signal circuit voltage levels represent the mirror positions. The mirror positions are sent to the memory seat
module through the serial data circuit where they are stored for memory mirror operation. When the memory
seat module receives a memory recall command, the memory seat module will send the go to position
commands to the mirror control module and passenger window switch. The switches will then drive the
appropriate mirror motors to the commanded position sensor settings.
Battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
B154A 39
An internal malfunction has been detected by the mirror control module while commanding the driver outside
rearview mirror UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT.
4 of 47
B154B 39
An internal malfunction has been detected by the passenger window switch while commanding the passenger
outside rearview mirror UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT.
The affected outside rearview mirror will be inoperative.
B154A 39
The driver outside rearview mirror must be replaced before the DTC can be cleared.
B154B 39
The passenger outside rearview mirror must be replaced before the DTC can be cleared.
Schematic Reference
Outside Rearview Mirror Wiring Schematics
Outside Mirror Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver moves when commanding the Driver Mirror Horizontal
Movement Right/Left and Driver Mirror Vertical Movement Up/Down with a scan tool.
If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver does not move RIGHT or LEFT or UP or
DOWN
5 of 47
Replace the M77D Outside Rearview Mirror Motor - Driver.
Go to next step: If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver moves RIGHT, LEFT, UP and
DOWN
3. Verify the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger moves when commanding the Passenger Mirror
Horizontal Movement Right/Left and Passenger Mirror Vertical Movement Up/Down with a scan tool.
If the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger does not move RIGHT or LEFT or UP or
DOWN
Replace the M77P Outside Rearview Mirror Motor - Passenger.
Go to next step: If the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger moves RIGHT, LEFT, UP
and DOWN
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Outside Rearview Mirror Actuator Replacement
SYMPTOMS - MIRRORS
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to the
following system descriptions:
• Outside Mirror Description and Operation
• Automatic Day-Night Mirror Description and Operation
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the system.
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Symptom List
• Heated Mirrors Malfunction
6 of 47
• Automatic Day-Night Mirrors Malfunction
• Power Mirror Folding Malfunction
• Power Mirror Malfunction (Without A45), or Power Mirror Malfunction (With A45)
HEATED MIRRORS MALFUNCTION


Left Heated Mirror Element
2 1 3 -
Control
Driver Outside Rearview Mirror
- 1 - -
Ground
Right Heated Mirror Element
2 1 3 -
Control
Passenger Outside Rearview
- 1 - -
Mirror Ground
1. Single Heated Mirror Inoperative
2. Both Heated Mirrors Inoperative
3. Heated Mirrors Always On
When the HVAC control module receives a rear window defog request from the radio/HVAC controls, the
HVAC control module will provide B+ voltage to the coil side of the rear defogger relay. This will energize the
relay causing the contacts within the relay to close and provide B+ voltage to the rear window defogger grid, the
driver outside review mirror and passenger outside rearview mirror heating elements.
Schematic Reference
7 of 47
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Engine running
2. Verify the E18 Rear Defogger Grid turns ON and OFF when commanding the Rear Defogger On and Off
with a scan tool
If the E18 Rear Defogger Grid does not turn ON or OFF
Refer to Rear Window Defogger Malfunction .
Go to next step: If the E18 Rear Defogger Grid turns ON and OFF
3. Verify the E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass-Driver and the E17P Outside Rearview Mirror Glass-
Passenger become warm when commanding the Rear Defogger On with a scan tool.
If the E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass-Driver or E17P Outside Rearview Mirror Glass-
Passenger do not become warm
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Single Outside Mirror Defogger Inoperative.
If both E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass-Driver and E17P Outside Rearview Mirror
Glass-Passenger never become warm or are always warm
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Both Outside Mirrors Defogger Malfunction.
Go to next step: If both the E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass-Driver and the E17P
Outside Rearview Mirror Glass-Passenger become warm
4. All OK.
Single Outside Mirror Defogger Inoperative
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the appropriate X510 or X610 inline harness
connector at the A9 Outside Rearview Mirror. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to
power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
8 of 47
3. Engine running, connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 8 and the ground circuit terminal
5.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the Rear Defogger On with a scan tool.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X53A Fuse Block -
Rear Body.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the E17 Outside Rearview Mirror Glass.
Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON
5. Test or replace the E17 Outside Rearview Mirror Glass.
Both Outside Mirrors Defogger Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X510 inline harness connector at the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver
and the X610 inline harness connector at the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger.
2. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 8 and ground, Engine running.
3. Verify the test lamp does not turn ON and OFF pressing the rear window defogger switch.
If the test lamp turns ON and OFF
Test or replace the E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass - Driver and E17P Outside Rearview
Mirror Glass - Passenger.
Go to next step: If the test lamp does not turn ON and OFF
4. Ignition OFF, connect the X510 and X610 inline harness connector at the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-
Driver and the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the
X53A Fuse Block-Rear Body, Ignition ON.
5. Verify the E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass - Driver and E17P Outside Rearview Mirror Glass -
Passenger are not activated.
If the E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass - Driver and E17P Outside Rearview Mirror
Glass - Passenger are activated
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the inline harness connector at the A9 Outside Rearview Mirror, Ignition
On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the X53A Fuse Block-Rear Body control circuit terminal 31 and
ground.
If less than 1 V, test or replace the E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass - Driver and E17P
Outside Rearview Mirror Glass - Passenger.
Go to next step: If the E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass - Driver and E17P Outside
Rearview Mirror Glass - Passenger are not activated
6. Connect a 10 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal 31 and B+.
Passenger activates.
9 of 47
Glass - Passenger do not activate
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the inline harness connector at the A9 Outside
Rearview Mirror.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the X53A Fuse Block-Rear Body control circuit terminal 31 and
ground.
If less than Infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass - Driver and E17P
Outside Rearview Mirror Glass - Passenger
Rearview Mirror Glass - Passenger activates
8. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, connect the X1 harness connector and disconnect the X2
harness connector at the X53A Fuse Block-Rear Body, it may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems
to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
10. Connect the X2 harness connector at the X53A Fuse Block-Rear Body. Disconnect the X2 harness
connector at the K33 HVAC Control Module, Ignition ON.
Passenger are not activated.
Glass - Passenger are activated
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X53A Fuse Block-Rear Body. Ignition
ON
2. Test for less than 1 V between the K33 HVAC Control Module control circuit terminal 19 and
ground.
If less than 1 V, replace the X50A Fuse Block-Underhood.
Rearview Mirror Glass - Passenger are not activated
Passenger activates.
Glass - Passenger do not activate
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X53A Fuse
10 of 47
Block-Rear Body, Ignition ON.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the K33 HVAC Control Module control circuit terminal 19 and
ground.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the X53A Fuse Block-Rear Body.
Rearview Mirror Glass - Passenger activates
14. All OK.
Repair Instructions

AUTOMATIC DAY-NIGHT MIRRORS MALFUNCTION


Ignition 1 1 - -
Automatic Day/Night Mirror
2 2 2 -
Signal
Backup Lamp Control B2545 02 1 1 -
Automatic Day/Night Mirror
- 2 2 -
Low Reference
Ground - 1 - -
1. Inside and Outside Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Malfunction
2. Outside Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Malfunction
The inside rearview mirror uses 2 photocell sensors. One sensor is the rear light sensor, located on the face side
of the mirror, facing the rear of the vehicle. The rear light sensor is used to determine light conditions present at
the mirror face. The other sensor is the front light sensor, located on the backside of the mirror, facing the front
of the vehicle. The front light sensor is used to determine the exterior light conditions at the front of the vehicle.
With a low exterior light condition detected by the front light sensor and a high light condition from the rear
11 of 47
light sensor, the inside rearview mirror will automatically darken the face of the inside rearview mirror and the
driver outside rearview mirror. The inside rearview mirror provides a control circuit and a low reference circuit
to the driver outside rearview mirror to darken the mirror when needed.
With the gear selector lever in the REVERSE position and the engine running, backup lamp control voltage is
supplied as an input to the inside rearview mirror. The mirror monitors this input to disable the automatic day-
night feature. This allows the driver to see objects in the mirrors clearly when backing up, regardless of the rear
light sensor status.
Diagnostic Aids
• Before replacing the rear window Sunshade Module, Rearview Camera, or the Inside Rearview Mirror,
verify the following:
Both backup lamps (left & right) are working properly. Refer to Backup Lamps Malfunction
The customer has not installed LED bulbs in the place of incandescent bulbs.
Schematic Reference
• Inside Rearview Mirror Wiring Schematics

• Outside Rearview Mirror Wiring Schematics
Automatic Day-Night Mirror Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Cover the windshield with a blanket or other suitable item.
3. Verify the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror face dims when shining a bright light into the rear light sensor
If the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror does not dim
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Inside Review Mirror Dimming Inoperative
12 of 47
Go to next step: If the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror dims
4. Verify the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror face transitions from dim to bright while commanding the Backup
Lamps Active and Inactive with a scan tool.
If the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror does not transition between dim and bright.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Day-Night Disable Malfunction
Go to next step: If the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror transitions between bright and dim states
5. Verify the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver face dims when shining a bright light into the rear light
sensor.
If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver does not dim
Refer to Outside Rearview Mirror Dimming Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver dims

6. Verify the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver face transitions from dim to bright while commanding
the Backup Lamps Active and Inactive with a scan tool.
If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver does not transition between bright and dim
states
Refer to Outside Rearview Mirror Dimming Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver transitions between bright and
dim states
7. All OK.
Inside Review Mirror Dimming Inoperative
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A10 Inside Rearview
Mirror. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
If less than 2 Ω, refer to Retained Accessory Power Malfunction .
13 of 47
5. Replace the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
Day-Night Disable Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
2. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground
3. Ignition ON, verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF while commanding the Backup Lamps Active and
Inactive with a scan tool.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Module.
If less than 2 Ω, refer to Backup Lamps Malfunction .
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Module, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, refer to Backup Lamps Malfunction
4. Replace the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
Outside Rearview Mirror Dimming Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X510 inline harness connector at the A9A
Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
14 of 47
If less than 2 Ω, replace the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
3. Ignition ON.
If 1 V or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V replace the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
5. Ignition ON, headlamps ON, vehicle in PARK, cover the front light sensor with a towel or other suitable
item. Shine a flashlight at the rear light sensor.
6. Test for greater than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If 1 V or less
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror, ignition ON.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
7. Replace E17D Outside Rearview Mirror Glass-Driver.
Repair Instructions

POWER MIRROR FOLDING MALFUNCTION


Folding Mirror Motor Fold
1 1 - -
Control
15 of 47
Folding Mirror Motor Unfold
1 1 - -
Control
1. Power Folding Mirror Inoperative
The outside mirror switch and passenger window switch control the fold/unfold motors through bi-directional
control circuits, voltage is sent to the commanded mirror via a mirror control circuit. The opposite mirror
control circuit acts as a ground circuit for the bi-directional mirror motor. Ground is applied through the switch,
The outside rearview mirror switch will also send a serial data message to the seat memory control module
requesting the mirror fold/unfold command, the seat memory control module will then send the command to the
passenger window switch which will also command the passenger mirror to fold or unfold.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver and the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger FOLD
and UNFOLD when pressing the mirror fold switch on the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver does not FOLD and UNFOLD
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Driver Outside Mirror Folding Command Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver does FOLD and UNFOLD
3. Verify the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger FOLD and UNFOLD when commanding the
Passenger Mirror Fold Motor to Fold and Unfold with a scan tool.
If the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger does not FOLD and UNFOLD
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Passenger Outside Mirror Folding Command Malfunction.
16 of 47
Go to next step: If the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger does FOLD and UNFOLD
4. All OK.
Driver Outside Mirror Folding Command Malfunction
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the control circuit terminal 4 and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
If 10 Ω or greater
4. Connect a test lamp between control circuit terminal 4 and control circuit terminal 18, ignition ON.
5. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the FOLD and UNFOLD with the S79D Window
Switch - Driver.
If the test lamp remains OFF during either of the commands
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S79D Window Switch -
Driver.
2. Test for infinite resistance between each control circuit and ground.
If infinite resistance, replace the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON during each of the commands
6. Test or replace the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver.
Passenger Outside Mirror Folding Command Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X610 inline harness connector at the A9B
Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the S79P Window Switch-Passenger.
17 of 47
If less than 2 Ω, replace the S79P Window Switch-Passenger.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the S79P Window Switch-Passenger.
5. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the FOLD and UNFOLD states with the S79D Window
Switch - Driver.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the S79P Window
Switch-Passenger.
If infinite resistance, replace the S79P Window Switch-Passenger.
6. Test or replace the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger.
Component Testing
Outside Rearview Mirror
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the inline harness connector at the appropriate A9 Outside Rearview Mirror.
2. Install a 10 A fused jumper wire between one of the control terminals and 12 V. Momentarily install a
jumper wire between the other control terminal and ground. Reverse the jumper wires at least two times,
the A9 Outside Rearview Mirror should perform the FOLD and UNFOLD functions.
If the function does not perform the FOLD and UNFOLD functions
Replace the A9 Outside Rearview Mirror.
Go to next step: If the function performs the FOLD and UNFOLD functions
3. All OK
Repair Instructions

POWER MIRROR MALFUNCTION (WITHOUT A45)
18 of 47

Outside Rearview Mirror Switch U1538 00, U1538 00, U1548
- -
B+ U1548 00, 1 00, 1
Driver Left/Right Mirror
1 2 2 -
Horizontal Motor Control
Driver Left/Right Mirror Vertical
1 2 2 -
Motor Control
Driver Mirror Motor Left/Up
1 2 2 -
Control
Passenger Left/Right Mirror
1 3 3 -
Horizontal Motor Control
Passenger Left/Right Mirror
1 3 3 -
Vertical Motor Control
Passenger Mirror Motor Left/Up
1 2 2 -
Control
Outside Rearview Mirror Switch
- 1 - -
Ground
1. Both Outside Power Mirrors Inoperative
2. Driver Outside Power Mirror Malfunction
3. Passenger Outside Power Mirror Malfunction
The outside rearview mirror switch controls the functions of the outside rearview mirrors based on the position
of the mirror selector switch and which movement position is selected. The outside rearview mirror switch has
four positions: up, down, left, and right. B+ is applied to the switch and when a movement position switch is
selected, B+ is sent to the mirror via a motor control circuit. The opposite motor control circuit acts as a ground
circuit for the bi-directional mirror motor.
Schematic Reference
19 of 47
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
1. Verify the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver and the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger
operates UP, DOWN, LEFT and RIGHT with the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
If both the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver and the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-
Passenger do not move
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Both Outside Mirrors Inoperative.
If only the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver or the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-
Passenger does not move UP, DOWN, LEFT or RIGHT
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Single Outside Mirror Malfunction.
Go to next step: If both the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver and the A9B Outside
Rearview Mirror-Passenger move UP, DOWN, LEFT and RIGHT
2. All OK.
Both Outside Mirrors Inoperative
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S79D Window Switch
- Driver. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
20 of 47
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Test for infinite resistance between each of the control circuit terminals listed below and ground:
• Terminal 2 control circuit
If infinite resistance, test or replace the appropriate M77 Outside Rearview Mirror Motor.
4. Test or replace the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
Single Outside Mirror Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate A9 Outside Rearview Mirror. Ignition
ON.
2. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 9 and the control circuit terminal 12.
3. Verify the test lamp illuminates when commanding the UP and DOWN functions with the S79D Window
Switch - Driver.
If the test lamp does not illuminate during either of the UP and DOWN commands
Driver.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in each control circuit end to end.
If less than 2 Ω, replace at the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
Driver, ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between each control circuit and ground.
If less than 1 V, replace the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates during UP and DOWN the commands
4. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 10 and the control circuit terminal 12.
21 of 47
5. Verify the test lamp illuminates when commanding the LEFT and RIGHT functions with the S79D
Window Switch - Driver.
If the test lamp does not illuminate during either of the LEFT and RIGHT commands
Driver.
If less than 2 Ω, replace at the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates during the LEFT and RIGHT commands
6. Test or replace the M77 Outside Rearview Mirror Motor.
Repair Instructions
POWER MIRROR MALFUNCTION (WITH A45)


Position Sensor 5 V Reference 1 1 1 -
Left/Right Mirror Horizontal
1 1 1 -
Position Sensor Signal
Left/Right Mirror Vertical
1 1 1 -
Position Sensor Signal
Left/Right Mirror Motor
1 1 1 -
Horizontal Control
22 of 47
Left/Right Mirror Motor
1 1 1 -
Common Control
Left/Right Mirror Motor Vertical
1 1 1 -
Control
Low Reference - 1 - -
1. Power Mirror Malfunction
The outside mirror switch (which is part of the driver window switch) and passenger window switch are on a
serial data circuit with the memory seat module as the master. The mirror select and directional control switches
are inputs to the memory seat module through the serial data circuit. When the memory seat module receives
switch inputs from the outside mirror switch, mirror output commands are sent to the appropriate switch
through the serial data circuit. The outside mirror switch and passenger window switch control the left and right
outside rear view mirrors through bi-directional motor control circuits. The motor control circuits are floating
while in an inactive state and the switches will apply power and ground to the control circuits as necessary to
move the mirror in the commanded direction.
outside mirror switch and passenger window switch supply a 5 V reference, low reference, and horizontal and
commands to the outside mirror switch and passenger window switch. The switches will then drive the
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
23 of 47
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Mirror Select Switch parameter changes between Left, Right, and None when cycling
the S79D Window Switch - Driver between the LEFT, RIGHT, and NONE positions.
If the parameter does not cycle between the specified values
Replace the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
Go to next step: If the parameter does cycle between the specified values
3. Verify the scan tool Mirror Direction Command parameter changes between Up, Down, Right and Left
while cycling the S79D Window Switch - Driver UP, DOWN, RIGHT and LEFT.
If the parameter does not cycle between the specified values
Replace the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
Go to next step: If the parameter does cycle between the specified values
4. Verify the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver moves when commanding the Driver Mirror Horizontal
Movement Right/Left and Driver Mirror Vertical Movement Up/Down with a scan tool.
If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver does not move RIGHT or LEFT or UP or
DOWN
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Driver Outside Mirror Movement Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver moves RIGHT, LEFT, UP and
DOWN
5. Verify the scan tool Driver Mirror Vertical Position parameters are between 0.2 - 4.8 V and change when
commanding the Driver Mirror Vertical Movement Up/Down with a scan tool.
If not between 0.2 - 4.8 V or does not change
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Driver Mirror Position Sensor Circuit Test.
Go to next step: If between 0.2 - 4.8 V and changes

6. Verify the scan tool Driver Mirror Horizontal Position parameters are between 0.2 - 4.8 V and change
when commanding the Driver Mirror Horizontal Movement Right/Left with a scan tool.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Driver Mirror Position Sensor Circuit Test.

7. Verify the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger moves when commanding the Passenger Mirror
Horizontal Movement Right/Left and Passenger Mirror Vertical Movement Up/Down with a scan tool.
If the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger does not move RIGHT or LEFT or UP or
DOWN
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Passenger Outside Mirror Movement Malfunction.
24 of 47
Go to next step: If the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger moves RIGHT, LEFT, UP
and DOWN
8. Verify the scan tool Passenger Mirror Vertical Position parameters are between 0.2 - 4.8 V and change
while commanding the Passenger Mirror Horizontal Movement Right/Left with a scan tool.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Passenger Mirror Position Sensor Circuit Test.

9. Verify the scan tool Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position parameters are between 0.2 - 4.8 V and change
while commanding the Passenger Mirror Vertical Movement Up/Down with a scan tool.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Passenger Mirror Position Sensor Circuit Test.

10. Verify the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver and A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger adjust to
the stored memory positions when operating the S47D Driver Seat Memory Switch.
If a A9 Outside Rearview Mirror does not adjust to the stored memory position
Refer to Memory Seat Feature Malfunction .
Go to next step: If the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver and A9B Outside Rearview
Mirror-Passenger adjust to the stored memory positions
11. All OK.
Driver Outside Mirror Movement Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S79D Window Switch
- Driver. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
25 of 47
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuits listed below and ground:
• Control circuit terminal 6
If infinite resistance, replace the S79D Window Switch - Driver.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the S79D Window Switch - Driver and disconnect the
X510 inline harness connector at the A9A Outside Rearview Mirror-Driver. Ignition ON
6. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 12 and control circuit terminal 9.
7. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the Up and Down states with a scan tool.
Driver.
9. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the Left and Right states with a scan tool.
Driver.
26 of 47
10. Test or replace the M77D Outside Rearview Mirror Motor-Driver.
Driver Mirror Position Sensor Circuit Test
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 17 and ground.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S79D Window Switch - Driver, ignition ON.
5. Verify the scan tool Driver Mirror Vertical Position parameter is less than 4.6 V.
If 4.6 V or greater
27 of 47
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the S79D Window Switch - Driver, ignition
ON.
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 18 and the 5 V reference circuit
terminal 17.
7. Verify the scan tool Driver Mirror Vertical Position parameter is greater than 0.6 V.
If 0.6 V or less
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the S79D Window
Switch - Driver.
8. Verify the scan tool Driver Mirror Horizontal Position parameter is less than 4.6 V.
If 4.6 V or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S79D Window Switch - Driver, ignition ON.
terminal 17.
10. Verify the scan tool Driver Mirror Horizontal Position parameter is greater than 0.6 V.
If 0.6 V or less
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the S79D Window
Switch - Driver.
11. Test or replace the M77D Outside Rearview Mirror Motor-Driver.
28 of 47
Passenger Outside Mirror Movement Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X610 inline harness connector at the A9B Outside Rearview Mirror-
Passenger. Ignition ON
3. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the Up and Down states with a scan tool.
Switch-Passenger.
Switch-Passenger, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the S79P Window Switch-Passenger
5. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the Left and Right states with a scan tool.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S79P Window Switch-
Passenger.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S79P Window Switch-
Passenger, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the S79P Window Switch-Passenger
29 of 47
6. Test or replace the M77P Outside Rearview Mirror Motor-Passenger.
Passenger Mirror Position Sensor Circuit Test
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X610 inline harness connector at the A9B
Outside Rearview Mirror-Passenger. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S79P Window Switch-Passenger.
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S79P Window Switch-Passenger.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S79P Window Switch-Passenger, ignition
ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the S79P Window Switch-Passenger.
5. Verify the scan tool Passenger Mirror Vertical Position parameter is less than 4.6 V.
If 4.6 V or greater
ON.
terminal 6.
7. Verify the scan tool Passenger Mirror Vertical Position parameter is greater than 0.6 V.
30 of 47
If 0.6 V or less
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the S79P Window
Switch-Passenger.
8. Verify the scan tool Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position parameter is less than 4.6 V.
If 4.6 V or greater
ON.
terminal 6.
10. Verify the scan tool Passenger Mirror Horizontal Position parameter is greater than 0.6 V.
If 0.6 V or less
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the S79P Window
Switch-Passenger.
11. Test or replace the M77P Outside Rearview Mirror Motor-Passenger.
Repair Instructions

POWER MIRROR TILT INOPERATIVE IN REVERSE

31 of 47
The outside mirror switch and passenger window switch are on a serial data circuit with the memory seat
module as the master. The mirror select and directional control switches are inputs to the memory seat module
through the serial data circuit. When the memory seat module receives switch inputs from the outside mirror
switch, mirror output commands are sent to the appropriate switch through the serial data circuit. The outside
mirror switch and passenger window switch control the left and right outside rear view mirrors through bi-
directional motor control circuits. The motor control circuits are floating while in an inactive state and the
switches will apply power and ground to the control circuits as necessary to move the mirror in the commanded
direction.
Diagnostic Aids
Not all vehicles have the Park Tilt Mirror feature, verify that the Park Tilt Mirrors option is available in the DIC
Vehicle Customization Feature Setting Menu before attempting diagnosis.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
32 of 47
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the park assist option is activated in the driver information center (DIC).
3. Select the driver outside mirror on S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch.
4. Verify mirror functions properly when operating the S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch in UP/DOWN
and LEFT/RIGHT positions.
If the mirror does not function properly
Refer to Power Mirror Malfunction (Without A45), or Power Mirror Malfunction (With A45).
Go to next step: If the mirror functions properly

5. Select the passenger outside mirror on S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch.
6. Verify mirror functions properly when operating the S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch in UP/DOWN
and LEFT/RIGHT positions..
If the mirror does not function properly
Go to next step: If the mirror functions properly

7. Operate the memory 1 and 2 recall switches on S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver.
8. Verify the outside rearview mirrors adjust to the stored memory positions.
If the mirrors do not adjust to the stored positions
Go to next step: If the mirrors adjust to the stored positions

9. Park brake on, vehicle running, shift the vehicle in REVERSE.
10. Verify that the outside rearview mirrors tilt.
If the driver outside mirror does not tilt
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Replace the S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch.
4. Verify the driver mirror tilts.
If the mirror does not tilt, replace the K40 Memory Seat Module.
Go to next step: If the mirror tilts
5. All OK.
If the passenger outside mirror does not tilt
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Replace the S79P Passenger Window Switch.
4. Verify the driver mirror tilts.
33 of 47
If the mirror does not tilt, replace the K40 Memory Seat Control Module.
Go to next step: If the mirror tilts
5. All OK.
Go to next step: If the mirrors tilt
11. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for door lock/window switches and memory seat control module replacement,
programming and setup

If equipped, full display mirror (FDM) provides a wider field of view than normally seen from the inside
rearview mirror to assist when driving and changing lanes. When the tab under the inside rearview mirror is
pulled rearward, a view of the area behind the vehicle displays on the mirror.
Diagnostic Aids
• Before replacing the Rearview Camera, or the Inside Rearview Mirror, or the rear window Sunshade
Module, verify the following:
Both backup lamps (left & right) are working properly. Refer to Backup Lamps Malfunction
The customer has not installed LED bulbs in the place of incandescent bulbs.
Schematic Reference
Inside Rearview Mirror Wiring Schematics
Automatic Day-Night Mirror Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
34 of 47
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify there is no debris on the B87 Rearview Camera lens, and the lens is not damaged or the rearview
camera is not out of alignment.
If debris is found on the lens, or the lens is damaged, or the rearview camera is out of
alignment
Clean the lens. If the lens is damaged or out of alignment, replace or adjust the mirror as necessary.
Go to next step: If there is no debris on the lens, or the lens is not damaged, or the rearview
camera is not out of alignment
2. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the A10 Inside
Rearview Mirror. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
If less than 2 Ω, refer to Retained Accessory Power Malfunction .
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
If infinite resistance, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
35 of 47
5. Connect a test lamp between control circuit terminal 1 and ground.
6. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Backup Lamps ON and OFF with a scan
tool.
If the test lamp is always ON or OFF
Refer to: Backup Lamps Malfunction

7. Ignition OFF/vehicle OFF, disconnect the coax cable connector at the B87 Rearview Camera.
8. Ignition On, test for 7 - 10 V between the center conductor of the coax cable and the coax cable ground
shield wires.
If the value within the range of 7 - 10 V
Replace the B87 Rearview Camera.
Go to next step: If the value outside range of 7 - 10 V

9. Disconnect the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror, and check the coaxal cable resistance
If the value is more than 5 Ω
Go to next step: If the value is less than 5 Ω

10. Test or replace the A10 Inside Rearview Mirror.
Component Testing
NOTE: • Before testing the coax cable, check the cable exterior for being pinched,
cut, damaged, or having loose connections at the components, which can
• To prevent false readings when testing the center coax terminals, use care
not to ground the test probe on the outer housing/shield.
Coax Cable Test
If 5 Ω or greater

If 5 Ω or greater
36 of 47

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for human machine interface control module replacement, programming,
and setup.
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR REPLACEMENT

WARNING:
Refer to
Glass and
Sheet Metal
Handling
Warning
Preliminary Procedure Remove the upper front side door water deflector. Front Side Door Water
Deflector Replacement
Outside Rearview Mirror Reinforcement Nut [3x]
1
CAUTION:
37 of 47
Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
Procedure
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
Outside Rearview Mirror
NOTE:
Inspect the
mirror for
2
proper
operation
before
installing the
door trim.
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR GASKET REPLACEMENT

Outside Rearview Mirror Replacement
Outside Rearview Mirror Gasket
NOTE:
Inspect the
1
mirror for
proper
operation
before
38 of 47
installing the
door trim.
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HOUSING BEZEL REPLACEMENT

Outside Rearview Mirror Opening Applique Bolt [4x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Outside Rearview Mirror Housing Bezel
2 Procedure
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT
39 of 47
Outside Rearview Mirror Actuator Bolt [3x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
0.8 N.m (7 lb in)
Outside Rearview Mirror Inner Actuator
Procedure
NOTE:
2 Inspect the
outside
rearview
mirror for
proper
operation.
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR GLASS REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
40 of 47
Place masking tape over the outside rearview mirror glass (1).
2.
Carefully push the outside rearview mirror glass (1) upward and into the inside corner of the mirror
housing.
3.
41 of 47
Grasp the bottom edge of the outside rearview mirror glass (1) firmly.
4.
Lift up on the outside rearview mirror glass (1) and pull rearward until the outside rearview mirror glass
retainers release from the outside rearview mirror inner actuator (2).
2.
Place the outside rearview mirror glass (1) retainers in line with the outside rearview mirror inner actuator
(2).
3. Place one hand on the back of the mirror housing, using the flat palm of the other hand press inward
locking the outside rearview mirror glass (1) retainers to the outside rearview mirror inner actuator (2).
4.
42 of 47
Remove the masking tape from the outside rearview mirror glass (1).
5. Inspect the outside rearview mirror for proper operation.
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR REPLACEMENT

WARNING:
While
operating,
electrical
control
modules can
produce heat
and become
hotter than
their
surroundings.
To prevent
43 of 47
burns allow
sufficient
time for the
module to
cool before
removal.
Preliminary Procedure Windshield Multifunction Sensor Mount Bracket Cover Replacement

Inside Rearview Mirror Set Screw
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
1.8 N.m (16 lb in)
Inside Rearview Mirror
Procedure
2. Loosen the set screw located at the base of the mirror.
3. Slide the mirror off the rearview mirror button.

AUTOMATIC DAY-NIGHT MIRROR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Inside Rearview Mirror with the Automatic Day-Night Feature System Operation
The inside rearview mirror uses 2 photocell sensors. One sensor is the headlight sensor, located on the face side
of the mirror. The headlight sensor is used to determine light conditions present at the mirror face. The other
sensor is the ambient light sensor, located on the rear of the mirror or windshield side. The ambient light sensor
is used to determine the exterior light conditions. With a low exterior light condition detected, and a high light
condition from behind the car, at the headlight sensor, the inside rearview mirror will automatically darken the
face of the mirror.
In the daytime, the mirror is in a normal state because of the high exterior light condition that is indicated by the
ambient light sensor. With the gear selector lever in the REVERSE position and the Ignition ON/Vehicle in
Service Mode, backup lamp supply voltage is supplied as an input to the inside rearview mirror. The mirror
monitors this input to disable the automatic day-night feature. This allows the driver to see objects in the mirror
clearly when backing up, even during the night.
Driver Outside Rearview Mirror with Automatic Day-Night System Operation (If Equipped)
The automatic day-night feature of the driver outside rearview mirror is controlled by the inside rearview
mirror. The inside rearview mirror supplies control and low reference to the driver outside rearview mirror. At
44 of 47
night, with the automatic day-night feature enabled, the driver outside rearview mirror will automatically darken
with the inside rearview mirror to reduce glare from headlamps behind the vehicle.
Inside Rearview Camera Full Display Mirror System Operation
The inside rearview camera full display mirror is connected to the outside rearview camera via a shielded
coaxial cable. When the tab under the inside rearview mirror is pulled rearward, a view of the area behind the
vehicle displays on the mirror. Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear view of the area behind the vehicle before
turning on full display mirror. Use the button on the back of the mirror to adjust the brightness of the display.
Make sure the light sensor is not covered when adjusting the brightness.
The inside rearview camera full display mirror may not work properly or display a clear image if:
• It is dark.
• The sun or the beam of headlamps are shining directly into the camera lens.
• Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and
wipe it with a soft cloth.
When the mirror detects that the camera is not sending a valid video signal, it "blue screens" with a "no video"
decal for 3 seconds, then reverts back to the mirror. Meanwhile, if a blue screen keeps on displaying instead of
the camera view, take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

A10 A10 Inside Rearview Mirror
B87 B87 Rearview Camera
OUTSIDE MIRROR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Power Mirror System Components
The power mirror system consists of the following components:
• Memory Seat Control Module

• Outside Rearview Mirror Switch
• Passenger Window Switch
45 of 47
• Driver Outside Rearview Mirror
• Passenger Outside Rearview Mirror

S52 S52 Outside Rearview Mirror Switch
A9A A9A Outside Rearview Mirror - Driver
A9B A9B Outside Rearview Mirror - Passenger
Power Mirror System Controls
The outside mirror switch and passenger window switch are on a serial data circuit with the memory seat
control module as the master. The mirror select and directional control switches are inputs to the memory seat
module through the serial data circuit. When the memory seat module receives switch inputs from the outside
mirror switch, mirror output commands are sent to the appropriate switch through the serial data circuit. The
outside mirror switch and passenger window switch control the left and right outside rear view mirrors through
bi-directional motor control circuits. The motor control circuits are floating while in an inactive state and the
switches will apply power and ground to the control circuits as necessary to move the mirror in the commanded
direction.
Mirror Folding
The outside rearview mirror switch sends the mirror select and mirror fold/unfold inputs to the passenger
window switch and the memory seat control module through LIN data. When the memory seat control module
receives a fold/unfold signal it will send a fold/unfold command to the outside rearview mirror switch and the
passenger window switch. The outside mirrors will fold or unfold depending on their current state. The outside
46 of 47
rearview mirror switch and the passenger window switch control the fold/unfold motors through bi-directional
control circuits. If equipped with auto folding mirrors, the BCM receives the input of the lock/unlock button
being held on the transmitter and sends the signal to the memory seat module through serial data to command
the mirrors to fold/unfold.
Heated Mirrors
The heated mirrors are controlled through the rear defog relay. Whenever the rear window defogger is turned on
battery voltage is supplied to the mirror heater elements through the left and right mirror heater element control
circuits.
47 of 47
Parking Assistance Systems - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Parking Assist Control Module Nut 4.5 N.m (40 lb in)

PARKING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS WIRING SCHEMATICS
Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Controls
Rear Sensors
1 of 59
Front Sensors (UD5/UKG)

DTC B0954-B0961, B096C, OR B096D
DTC Descriptors
DTC B0954
Parking Assist Front Sensor Left Corner Circuit
DTC B0955
2 of 59
Parking Assist Front Sensor Left Middle Circuit
DTC B0956
Parking Assist Front Sensor Right Middle Circuit
DTC B0957
Parking Assist Front Sensor Right Corner Circuit
DTC B0958
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Left Corner Circuit
DTC B0959
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Left Middle Circuit
DTC B0960
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Right Middle Circuit
DTC B0961
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Right Corner Circuit
DTC B096C
Parking Assist Side Sensor Left Front Circuit
DTC B096D
Parking Assist Side Sensor Right Front Circuit
For symptom byte information, refer to Symptom Byte List

B0954 06, B0955
06, B0956 06,
B0957 06, B0958
12 V Reference B1405 02 B1405 07 -
06, B0959 06,
B0960 06, B0961
06
Parking Assist Front Sensor Left B0954 02, B0954 04, B0954 B0954 08, B0954
B0954 01
Corner Circuit B0954 06 06 21
Parking Assist Front Sensor Left B0955 02, B0955 04, B0955 B0955 08, B0955
B0955 01
Middle Circuit B0955 06 06 21
Parking Assist Front Sensor B0956 02, B0956 04, B0956 B0956 08, B0956
B0956 01
Right Middle Circuit B0956 06 06 21
3 of 59
Parking Assist Front Sensor B0957 02, B0957 04, B0957 B0957 08, B0957
B0957 01
Right Corner Circuit B0957 06 06 21
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Left B0958 02, B0958 04, B0958 B0958 08, B0958
B0958 01
Corner Circuit B0958 06 06 21
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Left B0959 02, B0959 04, B0959 B0959 08, B0959
B0959 01
Middle Circuit B0959 06 06 21
Parking Assist Rear Sensor B0960 02, B0960 04, B0960 B0960 08, B0960
B0960 01
Right Middle Circuit B0960 06 06 21
Parking Assist Rear Sensor B0961 02, B0961 04, B0961 B0961 08, B0961
B0961 01
Right Corner Circuit B0961 06 06 21
Parking Assist Side Sensor Left B096C 02, B096C 04, B096C B096C 08, B096C
B096C 01
Front Circuit B096C 06 06 21
Parking Assist Side Sensor B096D 02, B096D 04, B096D 08 B096D
B096D 01
Right Front Circuit B096D 06 B096D 06 21
B0954 01, B0955
01, B0956 01,
B0957 01, B0958
Low Reference - 01, B0959 01, - -
B0960 01, B0961
01, B096C 01,
B096D 01
The parking assist sensors are 3-wire ultrasonic sensors that are used to determine the distance between the
vehicle and an object. The parking assist control module supplies 12 V to the parking assist sensors via the 12 V
reference circuit and provides ground via the low reference circuit. The parking assist control module triggers
the sensors in a sequential loop. After each sensor transmits, the parking assist control module uses the sensor
echo received through the signal circuit to calculate the distance and position of an object.
• Ignition ON
• Parking assist is activated.
B0954 01, B0955 01, B0956 01, B0957 01, B0958 01, B0959 01, B0960 01, B0961 01, B096C 01, or B096D
01
The parking assist control module has determined the voltage at the sensor circuit is high or the parking assist
sensor is not grounded.
B0954 02, B0955 02, B0956 02, B0957 02, B0958 02, B0959 02, B0960 02, B0961 02, B096C 02, or B096D
02
The parking assist control module has determined the sensor signal circuit is shorted to ground
B0954 04, B0955 04, B0956 04, B0957 04, B0958 04, B0959 04, B0960 04, B0961 04, B096C 04, or B096D
4 of 59
04
The parking assist control module has determined the sensor signal circuit is open
B0954 06, B0955 06, B0956 06, B0957 06, B0958 06, B0959 06, B0960 06, B0961 06, B096C 06, or B096D
06
The parking assist control module has determined the sensor signal circuit is shorted to ground or open
B0954 08, B0955 08, B0956 08, B0957 08, B0958 08, B0959 08, B0960 08, B0961 08, B096C 08, or B096D
08
The parking assist control module has received an invalid signal.
B0954 18, B0955 18, B0956 18, B0957 18, B0958 18, B0959 18, B0960 18, B0961 18, B096C 18, or B096D
18
The parking assist control module has received a low signal amplitude.
B0954 21, B0955 21, B0956 21, B0957 21, B0958 21, B0959 21, B0960 21, B0961 21, B096C 21, or B096D
21
The parking assist control module determines no change in the position of an object while the vehicle is in
motion.
B0954 22, B0955 22, B0956 22, B0957 22, B0958 22, B0959 22, B0960 22, B0961 22, B096C 22, or B096D
22
The parking assist control module determines no change in the position of an object while the vehicle is in
motion.
B0954 3A, B0955 3A, B0956 3A, B0957 3A, B0958 3A, B0959 3A, B0960 3A, B0961 3A, B096C 3A, or
B096D 3A
The parking assist control module determines the wrong sensor type is installed.
B0954 3B, B0955 3B, B0956 3B, B0957 3B, B0958 3B, B0959 3B, B0960 3B, B0961 3B, B096C 3B, or
B096D 3B
The parking assist control module determines the sensor failed a self test.
• The parking assist system is disabled.

Schematic Reference
5 of 59
Parking Assistance Systems Wiring Schematics
Parking Assist Description and Operation (UD7), or Parking Assist Description and Operation (UD5)
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
If the DTC is set
Refer to DTC B1405

3. Verify that DTC B0954 01, B0955 01, B0956 01, B0957 01 B0954 21, B0955 21, B0956 21 or B0957 21
is not set.
If the DTC is set
1. Verify the B306 Parking Assist Sensors are not contaminated with snow, mud, dirt, slush, or ice.
If contaminated, clean the B306 Parking Assist Sensors.
Go to next step: If there is no contamination
4. Verify that DTC B0954 3A, B0955 3A, B0956 3A or B0957 3A is not set.
If the DTC is set
Replace the appropriate B306 Parking Assist Sensor with the correct sensor type.

5. Ignition ON, transmission in R.
6. Verify the scan tool Parking Assist System Status parameter is Enabled.
If the parameter is Disabled
6 of 59
Go to next step: If the parameter is Enabled

7. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness at the appropriate B306 Parking Assist
Sensor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 15 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the appropriate harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control
Module.
If less than 2 Ω replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Test for at least 6 V between the 12 V reference circuit terminal 1 and ground.
If less than 6 V
Module.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
If less than 4.0 V
Module.
7 of 59
If less than 1 V, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
6. Test or replace the B306 Parking Assist Sensor.
Repair Instructions
• Advanced Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Replacement - Front

• Advanced Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Replacement - Rear
• Front Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Replacement
• Rear Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Replacement
DTC B095D OR B095E

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B095D
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Left Side Circuit
DTC B0955
Parking Assist Rear Sensor Right Side Circuit

8 to 12 V Reference - Terminal 4 B095D 04,
B1405 01,
X2 @ K182 Parking Assist B1405 02 B095D 06, B095E -
B1405 07
Control Module 04, B095E 06
Signal - Terminal 4 X3 @ K182 B095D 02, B095D 04, B095D 08, B095D
B095D 01
Parking Assist Control Module B095D 06 B095D 06 21
Signal - Terminal 5 X3 @ K182 B095E 02, B095E 04, B095E B095E 08, B095E
B095E 01
Parking Assist Control Module B095E 06 06 21
8 of 59
Low Reference - Terminal 8 X3 B095D 01,
@ K182 Parking Assist Control - B095D 06, B095E - -
Module 01, B095E 06
Circuit Description
8 to 12 V Reference Regulated voltage supplied by the control module.
Signal 8 to 12 V Reference
K182 Parking Assist Control Module Front Parking Assist
Rear Parking Assist
• B306M Parking Assist Sensor - Side The sensors can send and receive ultrasonic sounds. First a
Left Rear short sound is emitted. If there is an obstacle in front of the
• B306N Parking Assist Sensor - Side sensor, the obstacle will reflect the sound back to the
Right Rear sensor. The time difference between sending and receiving
is the measure for the distance to the obstacle.
• Ignition On
• Parking Assist System Status = Enabled
B095D 01, B095E 01
Low Reference circuit = Open/High Resistance or Signal circuit = Short to Voltage
B095D 06, B095E 06
Signal circuit = Short to Ground
B095D 04, B095E 04
Signal circuit = Open/High Resistance
B095D 06, B095E 06
Parking Assist Sensors - Low Voltage/Open
B095D 08, B095E 08
Parking Assist Sensors - Performance - Signal Invalid
B095D 18, B095E 18
9 of 59
Parking Assist Sensors - Low Signal Amplitude
B095D 21, B095E 21
Parking Assist Sensors - Incorrect Period
B095D 22, B095E 22
Parking Assist Sensors - Too Short Low-Time
B095D 3A, B095E 3A
Parking Assist Sensors - Incorrect Component Installed
B095D 3B, B095E 3B
Parking Assist Sensors - Self-Test Malfunction
Parking Assist Control Module = Disabled
Diagnostic Aids
For symptom byte 21, the parking assist control module only runs the diagnostic when the vehicle is driven
greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH). When diagnosing symptom byte 21, the vehicle must be driven greater than 40
km/h (25 MPH) after a repair to verify the concern has been corrected.
The following is a list of reasons this symptom byte 21 might have set:
• One or more of the sensors may be blocked by snow, mud, ice, or debris. This condition may occur after
going through a car wash in cold weather.
• One or more of the sensors may be scratched or the paint maybe chipped.
• Excessive paint thickness on a sensor may cause an excessive sensor ring time. When replacing or
refinishing a sensor, do not apply an excessive amount of paint or clear coat.
• The silicone insulator (ring) surrounding sensor maybe missing, cut, or twisted.
• The sensor may be improperly installed and not fully seated, or the sensor may be misaligned due to a
tight wiring harness.
Schematic Reference
10 of 59
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If the DTC is set
Refer to: DTC B1405

3. Verify DTC B095D 01, B095E 01, B095D 21, B095E 21 is not set.
1. Verify none of the B306 Parking Assist Sensors - Rear are contaminated with snow, mud, dirt,
slush, or ice.
If contaminated, clean the B306 Parking Assist Sensors - Rear.
Go to next step: If there is no contamination.
4. Verify DTC B095D 3A, B095E 3A is not set.
Replace the appropriate component: B306 Parking Assist Sensor - with the correct sensor type.

6. Verify the scan tool parameter: Parking Assist System Status = Enabled

7. All OK.
11 of 59

2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: B306 Parking Assist Sensor
1. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 @ K182 Parking Assist Control Module
harness & The other end of the circuit @ K182 Parking Assist Control Module
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K182 Parking Assist Control Module
5. Test for 7 to 12 V between the test points: 12 V Reference circuit terminal 1 & Ground
harness & Ground
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K182 Parking Assist Control Module
If less than 7 V
harness & Ground
harness & The other end of the circuit @ K182 Parking Assist Control Module
6. Test for 4 to 12 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 & Ground
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 & X3 @ K182 Parking Assist Control Module
Ground
12 of 59
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K182 Parking Assist Control Module
If less than 7 V
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 & X3 @ K182 Parking Assist Control Module
& Ground
The other end of the circuit @ K182 Parking Assist Control Module
7. Replace the component for which the DTC was set.
Repair Instructions
• Rear Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Replacement

DTC B0967 OR B0968

DTC Descriptor
DTC B0967 02
Parking Assist On/Off Switch Circuit Short to Ground
DTC B0968 01
Parking Assist On/Off Switch Indicator Circuit Short to Battery
DTC B0968 06
Parking Assist On/Off Switch Indicator Circuit Low Voltage/Open
DTC B0968 0B
Parking Assist On/Off Switch Indicator Circuit High Current
13 of 59

Parking Assist Switch Indicator
B0968 06, 2 B0968 06, 2 1 -
Ignition
Parking Assist Switch Signal B0967 02, 1 1 - -
Parking Assist Switch Indicator B0968 06, B0968 B0968 01,
B0968 06, 2 -
Control 0B, 2 B0968 0B
Parking Assist Switch Ground - 1 - -
1. Parking Assist Switch Malfunction
2. Parking Assist Switch Indicator Malfunction
The parking assist can be enabled/disabled by pressing the parking assist switch. If the parking assist is enabled,
engaging the reverse gear activates the parking assist feature. By subsequently pressing the parking assist switch
the parking assist can be disabled.
The indicator in the parking assist switch shows the status of the parking assist. If the lamp is ON, parking assist
is enabled.
For vehicles without UGN the indicator and switch are connected to the Park Assist Module and the system
operates as a stand-alone feature.
With UGN, the indicator and switch are connected to the Active Safety Control Module. The Active Safety
Control Module received input from several modules including the park assist module to provide additional
features. The park assist alerts and DTCs originate from the Park Assist Module with the exception of the
indicator DTCs which are set by the Active Safety Control Module. There are no switch DTCs for vehicles with
the Active Safety Control Module.
• Ignition ON
• The parking assist is activated. The activation takes place by putting in the reverse gear while the system
is enabled.
B0967 02
The Parking Assist Control Module has detected a short to ground.
B0968 01
The Parking Assist Control Module has detected a short to battery.
B0968 06
The Parking Assist Control Module has detected a short to ground or open.
B0968 0B
14 of 59
The Active Safety Module has detected a short to ground or open in the control circuit.
• The parking assist is disabled.

• The driver information center displays "Service Park Assist".
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Park Assist Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive when cycling the
parking assist switch.
If the Parking Assist Switch parameter does not change between Active and Inactive
Refer to Parking Assist Switch Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the Parking Assist Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive
3. Verify the Park Assist Switch Indicator turns ON and OFF when cycling the parking assist switch.
Refer to Parking Assist Indicator Malfunction.
15 of 59
Go to next step: If the indicator turns ON and OFF
4. All OK.
Parking Assist Switch Malfunction (without UGN)
Switch - Instrument Panel. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Park Assist Switch parameter is Inactive.
If not Inactive
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector X1 at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
If infinite resistance, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
Go to next step: If Inactive
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
6. Verify the scan tool Park Assist Switch parameter is Active.
If not Active
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module,
ignition ON.
Go to next step: If Active
Parking Assist Switch Malfunction (with UGN)
Switch - Instrument Panel. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
16 of 59
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Park Assist Switch parameter is Inactive.
If not Inactive
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector X1 at the K124 Active Safety Control Module.
If infinite resistance, replace the K124 Active Safety Control Module.
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 2 and ground.
6. Verify the scan tool Park Assist Switch parameter is Active.
If not Active
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K124 Active Safety Control Module, ignition
ON.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K124 Active Safety Control Module.
Parking Assist Switch Indicator Malfunction (without UGN)
Switch - Instrument Panel. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down. Ignition
ON.
NOTE: Verify interior dimming is set to full bright
2. Test for 11 V or greater between the control circuit terminal 10 and ground.
If the voltage is under 11 V and the circuit fuse is good
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the circuit end to end.
17 of 59
If the voltage is under 11 V and the circuit fuse is open
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument Panel.
Go to next step: If the test voltage 11 V or greater
3. Connect a test lamp between B+ and the control circuit terminal 3.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Parking Assist Switch Indicator ON and
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module,
ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
If infinite resistance, replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
Parking Assist Switch Indicator Malfunction (with UGN)
Switch - Instrument Panel. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down. Ignition
ON.
NOTE: Verify interior dimming is set to full bright
2. Test for 11 V or greater between the control circuit terminal 10 and ground.
If the voltage is under 11 V and the circuit fuse is good
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the circuit end to end.
If the voltage is under 11 V and the circuit fuse is open
18 of 59
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument Panel.
Go to next step: If the test voltage 11 V or greater
3. Connect a test lamp between B+ and the control circuit terminal 3.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Parking Assist Switch Indicator ON and
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K124 Active Safety Control Module,
ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K124 Active Safety Control Module.
If infinite resistance, replace the K124 Active Safety Control Module.
Repair Instructions
• Hazard Warning Switch Replacement for S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument Panel replacement
DTC B096B
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B096B
19 of 59
Parking Assist Switch Parallel Parking Circuit

Signal - Terminal 1 @ S48A
Multifunction Switch - Instrument B096B 02 1 B0967 01 -
Panel
Ground - Terminal 5 @ S48A
Multifunction Switch - Instrument - 1 - -
Panel
1. Parking Assist System Malfunction
Circuit Description
Parking Assist Parallel Parking Disable The control module input circuit has an internal resistance
Switch Signal connected to V.
Ground Ground Connection
Front Parking Assist
K182 Parking Assist Control Module
Rear Parking Assist
Advanced Parking Assist
• S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument
Panel The switch has a normally open contact.
B096B 02
Control Circuit or Signal circuit = Short to Ground
B0967 04, B0968 06
Control Circuit or Signal circuit = Open
Advanced Parking Assist = Disabled
20 of 59
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Operate the component: Advanced Parking Assist Switch - Cycle On and Off
Verify the scan tool parameter: Advanced Parking Assist Switch = Active/Inactive - The value should
change when selecting the different switch positions.
If not the specified values
Go to next step: If the specified values

3. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument Panel
1. Disconnect the ground connection:
& Ground
21 of 59
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Advanced Parking Assist Switch = Inactive
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K182 Parking Assist Control Module
& Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: K182 Parking Assist Control Module
6. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 & Ground
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Advanced Parking Assist Switch = Active
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K182 Parking Assist Control Module
Ground
Terminal 7 @ Control module harness
8. Test or replace the component: S48A Multifunction Switch - Instrument Panel
Repair Instructions
• Hazard Warning Switch Replacement

DTC B1015
22 of 59
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1015 00
Vehicle Identification Number Information Malfunction
When the ignition is turned ON, the parking assist control module, frontview camera module, radar sensor
modules and active safety control module receive the vehicle identification number (VIN) from the body
control module. The modules will compare the VIN received to the VIN stored in memory.
Ignition voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
The stored VIN does not match the received VIN.
• The parking assist system, lane departure warning system, forward collision alert system, and/or active
safety system is disabled.
• The driver information center displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST or SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE
SYSTEM or SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST.
The stored VIN matches the VIN stored in the body control module.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
23 of 59
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC B1015 is not.
If DTC B1015 is set
1. Program the control module the DTC originally set in.
If the DTC is sets, replace the control module the DTC set in.
3. All OK
3. All OK
Repair Instructions
DTC B1405
DTC Descriptors
DTC B1405
Control Module Voltage Reference Output 2 Circuit

B0954 04, B0955
04, B0956 04,
B0957 04, B0958
12 V Reference B1405 02 04, B0959 04, - -
B0960 04, B0961
04, B096C 04,
24 of 59
B096D 04
The parking assist sensors are 3-wire ultrasonic sensors that are used to determine the distance between the
vehicle and an object. The Parking Assist Control Module supplies 12 V to the parking assist sensors via the 12
V reference circuit and provides ground via the low reference circuit. The Parking Assist Control Module
triggers the sensors in a sequential loop. After each sensor transmits, the Parking Assist Control Module uses
the sensor echo received through the signal circuit to calculate the distance and position of an object.
Ignition ON
B1405 01
The Parking Assist Control Module has detected the 12 V reference circuit is shorted to voltage.
B1405 02
The Parking Assist Control Module has detected the 12 V reference circuit is shorted to ground.
B1405 03
The Parking Assist Control Module has detected the 12 V reference circuit is less than 7.2 V.
B1405 07
The Parking Assist Control Module has detected the 12 V reference circuit is shorted to voltage.
• Parking assist is disabled.

• The driver information center may display a system service message.
Schematic Reference
25 of 59
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Rear Park Assist (UD7)
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the 12 V reference circuit terminal 4 X2 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at each of the B306 Rear Parking Assist Sensors.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the appropriate B306 Rear Object Sensor.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Test for less than 1 V between the 12 V reference circuit terminal 4 and ground.
If 1 V or greater

5. Replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
Front and Rear Park Assist (UD5) and Advanced Park Assist (UFQ)
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect X2 and X3 harness connectors at the K182 Parking Assist Control Module,
ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the 12 V reference circuit terminals listed below and ground.
• X2 Terminal 4
• X3 Terminal 1
If 1 V or greater
26 of 59
3. Ignition OFF.
4. Test for infinite resistance between 12 V reference circuit terminals listed below and ground.
• X2 Terminal 4
• X3 Terminal 1
If not infinite resistance

5. Replace the K182 Parking Assist Control Module.
Repair Instructions
• Control Module References for Control Module replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC C15A3
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
Parking Assist System Performance
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Parking Assist Description and Operation (UD7), or
Parking Assist Description and Operation (UD5)
Ignition = On
K160 Brake System Control Module = Invalid Data Received From Parking Assist Control Module
Parking Assist = Disabled
27 of 59
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference


3. Replace the component: K182 Parking Assist Control Module
If the DTC sets
Replace the component: K160 Brake System Control Module

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
28 of 59
DTC P18CB
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
Parking Assist System Performance
Ignition = On
K20 Engine Control Module = Invalid Data Received From Parking Assist Control Module
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
29 of 59
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference


3. Replace the component: K182 Parking Assist Control Module
If the DTC sets

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
SYMPTOMS - PARKING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS
Note: The rear vision camera does not communicate on the serial data bus.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Parking
Assist Description and Operation (UD7), or Parking Assist Description and Operation (UD5).
30 of 59
cause the symptom.
• This system can use various sensors that need to be clean in order to function properly. Make sure to
check the parking assist sensors and ensure they are clean, installed correctly, undamaged, and free of any
obstructions.
Intermittent
Symptom List
• Parking Assist System Malfunction

• Parallel Parking Assist System Malfunction
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM MALFUNCTION


Parking Assist Switch Ignition B0968 06, 2 B0968 06, 2 - -
Parking Assist Switch Signal B0967 02, 1 1 1 -
Parallel Parking Assist Switch
B096B 02, 3 3 3 -
Signal
Parking Assist Switch Indicator B0968 01,
B0968 06, 2 B0968 06, 2 -
Control B0968 0B
Parking Assist Switch Ground - 1 - -
1. Parking Assist Switch Malfunction
2. Parking Assist Indicator Malfunction
3. Parallel Parking Assist Switch Malfunction
The parking assist system is enabled and disabled through the parking assist switch. When enabled, the parking
assist indicator will illuminate.
For vehicles without UGN, the switch and indicator are connected to the Parking Assist Control Module. The
Parking Assist Control Module supplies a reference voltage to the parking assist switch. When the switch is
pressed, the signal circuit is grounded. The Parking Assist Control Module can control the Park Assist Indicator
by grounding the control circuit to illuminate the LED which indicates that the system is enabled.
31 of 59
With UGN, the indicator and switch are connected to the Active Safety Control Module. The Active Safety
Control Module receives input from several modules including the Parking Assist Control Module to provide
additional features. Refer to Active Safety System Description and Operation for additional information on
UGN. A malfunction in with the UGN system may also disable parking assist. The parking assist alerts and
DTCs are from the Parking Assist Control Module with the exception of the indicator DTCs which are sent by
the Active Safety Control Module. There are no switch DTCs for vehicles with the Active Safety Control
Module.
The Parking Assist Control Module supplies a reference voltage and a low reference to the parking assist
sensors. The sensors will return a signal based on the reflections from objects within range of the sensors.
When an object is detected, the Parking Assist Control Module will send serial data to the radio and memory
seat module to provide either an audible alert or haptic feedback through the Active Safety Seat. The driver can
select between audible or haptic alerts in the vehicle personalization menu.
Diagnostic Aids
For vehicles with UGN, the parking assist feature can be disabled if the Active Safety Control Module detected
a problem in the active safety system. Check the Active Safety Control Module for DTCs.
The scan tool Park Assist Disable History parameters are a list of the seven previous reasons the parking assist
system was disabled. These parameters may help in the diagnosis of an intermittent concern or a customer
concern which is the result of normal system operation. The following is a brief description of potential causes
which may aid in diagnosis:
• Manual Disable - The parking assist system has been disabled through the parking assist switch or audio
system personalization menu.
• Hitch/Object Attached - The parking assist control module is detecting an object that is attached to the
vehicle. Common items such as a hitch receiver, trailer, or a bicycle rack may cause this concern.
Additionally, damage to the rear of the vehicle or a misaligned sensor may cause this concern. If the
vehicle is damaged in a manner that causes the sensor to detect the bumper itself, the parking assist
control module will interpret this as an attached object and disable the system. Carefully inspect the
bumper, bumper mounting surface, and sensor retainers before continuing with normal diagnosis. After
the detected cause has been addressed the vehicle must be driven at speed greater than 40 km/h (25 mph).
• Reverse Overspeed - The vehicle is travelling too fast in reverse at speeds of greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).
• Inhibit - The parking assist control module has lost or received invalid GMLAN signal(s).
• Sensor Disturbance - An outside interference is causing sensor movement. Such interference may be
caused a heavy pounding, like that of a nearby jackhammer, or large changes in pressure, such as a large
truck air brakes.
• Sensor Ring Time - If the sensor fails its own diagnostic initialization the parking assist control module
will set this error. After the detected cause has been addressed the vehicle must be driven at speed greater
than 40 km/h (25 mph). The following is a list of reasons this cause may have set:
One or more of the sensors may be blocked by snow, mud, ice, or other debris. This might happen
after going through a car wash in cold weather.
Silicone insulator surrounding sensor maybe missing, cut, or twisted.
Improperly installed sensor, sensor maybe be crooked due to a tight wire harness.
One or more of the sensors may be scratched or the paint maybe chipped.
Excessive paint thickness on a sensor may cause an excessive sensor ring time. When replacing or
32 of 59
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Park Assist Switch parameter while pressing and releasing the parking assist switch.
The parameter should change between Active and Inactive.
If the parameter does not change between Active and Inactive
Refer to DTC B0967 or B0968.
Go to next step: If the parameter changes between Active and Inactive

3. Command the Park Assist Switch LED output control On and Off with the scan tool. The parking assist
switch indicator should turn On and Off when changing between the commanded states.
Refer to DTC B0967 or B0968.
Go to next step: If the indicator does turn ON and OFF

4. Transmission in R, verify the Engine Control Module (ECM) scan tool Reverse Position Switch
parameter is Active.
If the parameter is not Active
Go to next step: If the parameter is Active
33 of 59
5. Transmission in R, verify the scan tool Park Assist System Status parameter displays Enable.
If the parameter is not Enabled
Refer to Diagnostic Aids to determine the cause.
Go to next step: If the parameter is Enabled

6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
PARALLEL PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

The parallel parking assist is activated/deactivated by pressing the parking assist switch at speeds below 30
km/h (18 mph). The activated parallel parking assist then searches for an appropriate parking spot. If a spot is
detected, feedback is given to the driver through the indicator in the driver information center. The driver
accepts the decision by stopping the vehicle. The system calculates the optimal path into the parking lot and will
then guide the vehicle into the chosen spot by taking over the steering control from the driver. The driver only
needs to shift gears, brake and accelerate following the instructions given on the driver information center.
The system consists of the 8 parking assist sensors from the normal parking assist located in the front and rear
bumper, and two additional parallel parking assist sensors on the side of the vehicle. The additional parallel
parking assist sensors are used to measure the parking lot size. The parallel parking assist system uses the 8
parking assist sensors to identify objects in the vehicle's path when moving into the parking lot.
Diagnostic Aids
The following is a brief description of potential causes which may aid in diagnosis:
• Possible disengagement reasons:

Steering input by driver. The driver must not interfere with the steering function during a parking
maneuver.
Vehicle speed. The vehicle is travelling at speeds of greater than 10 km/h (6 MPH) while
performing a parking maneuver.
Electronic stability control or anti-lock brakes are activated.
Failure within the system - check for DTCs.
• Manual Disable - The parking assist system has been disabled through the parking assist switch or audio
system personalization menu.
• Hitch/Object Attached - The parking assist control module is detecting an object that is attached to the
34 of 59
vehicle. Common items such as a hitch receiver, trailer, or a bicycle rack may cause this concern.
Additionally, damage to the rear of the vehicle or a misaligned sensor may cause this concern. If the
vehicle is damaged in a manner that causes the sensor to detect the bumper itself, the parking assist
control module will interpret this as an attached object and disable the system. Carefully inspect the
bumper, bumper mounting surface, and sensor retainers before continuing with normal diagnosis. After
the detected cause has been addressed the vehicle must be driven at speed greater than 40 km/h (25
MPH).
• Sensor Disturbance - An outside interference is causing sensor movement. Such interference may be
caused a heavy pounding, like that of a nearby jackhammer, or large changes in pressure, such as a large
truck's air brakes.
• Sensor Ring Time - If the sensor fails its own diagnostic initialization the parking assist control module
will set this error. After the detected cause has been addressed the vehicle must be driven at speed greater
than 40 km/h (25 MPH). The following is a list of reasons this cause may have set:
One or more of the sensors may be blocked by snow, mud, ice, or other debris. This might happen
after going through a car wash in cold weather.
Silicone insulator surrounding sensor maybe missing, cut, or twisted.
Improperly installed sensor, sensor maybe be crooked due to a tight wire harness.
One or more of the sensors may be scratched or the paint maybe chipped.
Excessive paint thickness on a sensor may cause an excessive sensor ring time. When replacing or
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify the correct operation of the parking assist system.

If the parking assist system malfunctions
35 of 59
Refer to Parking Assist System Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the parking assist system functions properly

2. Ignition ON.
3. Verify the scan tool Advanced Parking Assist Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive
while pressing and releasing the parallel parking assist switch.
Refer to DTC B096B.
NOTE: After completing the next step the vehicle might need to be driven in the
forward direction at speed greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
4. Verify the scan tool Park Assist System Status parameter is Enable.
If the parameter is not Enable
Refer to Diagnostic Aids to determine the cause of the inhibit.
Go to next step: If the parameter is Enable

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT

36 of 59
Parking Assist Control Module Nut
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
4.5 N.m (40 lb in)
2 Parking Assist Control Module Push-In Retainer
Procedure
References
FRONT PARKING ASSIST ALARM SENSOR REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
Front Bumper Fascia (1) - Remove - Front Bumper Fascia Removal and Installation
2.
37 of 59
NOTE: The object sensor is a one piece design. Do NOT twist the sensor cap to
try and remove the painted cap. Replacement sensor requires painting to
match fascia/bumper body color.
3. Lift the locking tabs on the housing and remove the object sensor (1).
Painting Procedure
NOTE: Do not refinish previously painted sensors. Excess paint build up will
cause the sensor to be inoperative.
Pay attention not to scratch sensor (1), sensor already comes prepared to be spray painted.
• Do not sand or prep the sensor head with a Scotch-Brite pad, sensor (1) does not need to be sanded to be
spray painted. Use only approved pre clean solvent from your paint manufacturer.
• Mask off the sensor 1/4 in up the sensor shaft (a) from the body of sensor (1) and mask the remainder of
the sensor body that will not be painted.
• Apply paint, paint thickness shall not exceed 4.4 mils of paint to the head of the sensor (1) using care to
38 of 59
ensure the sides maintain the same paint film thickness as the top.
• Verify paint film with a wet film paint thickness gauge or with a DeFelsko Positector 200B dry film
ultrasonic paint thickness gauge.
• Follow the drying conditions of the paint manufacturer before proceeding installation.
1.
NOTE: Ensure the silicone decoupling ring is installed on the sensor to avoid
sensor failure.
Insert the sensor (1) into the housing.
3.
Front Bumper Fascia (1) - Install - Front Bumper Fascia Removal and Installation
FRONT PARKING ASSIST ALARM SENSOR BRACKET REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1.
39 of 59
Front Bumper Fascia (1) - Remove - Front Bumper Fascia Removal and Installation
2.
Advance Parking Assist Front Object Sensor (1) - Remove - Advanced Parking Assist Alarm Sensor
Replacement - Front
3.
40 of 59
Using a flat bladed, tool carefully remove the bracket (1) from the fascia.
4.
NOTE: Do Not sand off alignment tabs / outline.
Sand sonic weld plastic residue (1) from the fascia.
1.
Apply structural adhesive epoxy, (1) Lord Fusor™ 127EZ or equivalent, to fascia at mating surface
according to manufacturer's directions.
2.
41 of 59
Using the alignment tabs / outline, install the sensor bracket (1) to the fascia.
3. Allow adhesive to cure according to manufacturer's directions.
4.
Install the sensor (1) to the sensor bracket. Advanced Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Replacement -
Front
6.
42 of 59
Front Bumper Fascia (1) - Install - Front Bumper Fascia Removal and Installation
ADVANCED PARKING ASSIST ALARM SENSOR REPLACEMENT - FRONT

Removal Procedure
1. Reposition the appropriate front wheelhouse liner:

• For right side, refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement - Right Side .
• For left side, refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement - Left Side .
2.
3. Lift the locking tabs on the housing and remove the advanced parking assist front object sensor (1).
Painting Procedure
43 of 59
1.
44 of 59
sensor failure.
Insert the advanced parking assist front object sensor (1) into the housing.

3. Install the appropriate front wheelhouse liner:
• For right side, refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement - Right Side .
• For left side, refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement - Left Side .
ADVANCED PARKING ASSIST ALARM SENSOR REPLACEMENT - REAR

Removal Procedure
1.
Reposition the rear wheelhouse liner (3). Rear Wheelhouse Liner Replacement
2.
45 of 59
3. Lift the locking tabs on the housing and remove the advanced parking assist rear object sensor (1).
Painting Procedure
1.
46 of 59
sensor failure.
Insert the advanced parking assist rear object sensor (1) into the housing.
3.
Rear Wheelhouse Liner (3) - Install - Rear Wheelhouse Liner Replacement
REAR PARKING ASSIST ALARM SENSOR REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
47 of 59
Rear Bumper Fascia (1) - Remove - Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement
2.
3. Lift the locking tabs on the housing and remove the object sensor (1).
Painting Procedure
48 of 59
• Do not sand or prep the sensor head with a Scotch-Brite pad, sensor does not need to be sanded to be
• Mask off the sensor 1/4 in up the sensor shaft (a) from the body of sensor and mask the remainder of the
sensor body that will not be painted.
• Apply paint, paint thickness shall not exceed 4.4 mils of paint to the head of the sensor using care to
1.
49 of 59
sensor failure.
Insert the sensor (1) into the housing.
3.
Rear Bumper Fascia (1) - Install - Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement
REAR PARKING ASSIST ALARM SENSOR BRACKET REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1.
Rear Bumper Fascia (1) - Remove - Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement
2.
50 of 59
Rear Parking Assist Alarm Sensor (1) - Remove - Rear Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Replacement
3.
Using a flat bladed tool carefully remove the bracket (1) from the fascia.
4.
51 of 59
NOTE: Do Not sand off alignment tabs / outline.
Sand sonic weld plastic residue (1) from the fascia.
1.
Apply structural adhesive epoxy, (1) Lord Fusor™ 127EZ or equivalent, to fascia at mating surface
according to manufacturer's directions.
2.
Using the alignment tabs / outline, install the sensor bracket (1) to the fascia.
3. Allow adhesive to cure according to manufacturer's directions.
4.
52 of 59
Rear Parking Assist Alarm Sensor (1) - Install - Rear Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Replacement
6.
Rear Bumper Fascia (1) - Install - Rear Bumper Fascia Replacement
PARKING ASSIST ALARM SENSOR RING REPLACEMENT - FRONT
53 of 59
Front Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Replacement
Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Ring
Procedure
Pull the parking assist alarm sensor ring from the sensor.
NOTE:
1 If the sensor
ring has any
type of
damage it
must be
replaced.
PARKING ASSIST ALARM SENSOR RING REPLACEMENT - REAR

54 of 59
Rear Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Replacement
Parking Assist Alarm Sensor Ring
Procedure
Pull the parking assist alarm sensor ring from the sensor.
NOTE:
1 If the sensor
ring has any
type of
damage it
must be
replaced.

PARKING ASSIST DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (UD7)
The parking assist system is designed to identify and notify the driver of an object in the vehicle path when
reversing at speeds of less than 8 km/h (5 MPH). The distance and location of the object is determined by four
Parking Assist sensors located in the rear fascia. The parking assist system will notify the driver using audible
beeps through the infotainment system.
The parking assist system is made up of the following components:
• Parking assist control module

• Parking Assist sensors
• Parking assist switch
• Parking assist switch indicator
The Parking Assist Control Module provides a reference voltage and a low reference to the four Parking Assist
sensors. The Parking Assist Control Module receives individual signals from each of the four sensors and
determines the location and distance of an object based on these inputs. When an object is detected, The Parking
Assist Control Module will send a message via serial data to the infotainment system requesting an audible
alert.
Parking Assist Sensors
The Parking Assist sensors are located in the rear fascia. The sensors are used to determine the distance between
an object and the rear of the vehicle. Each sensor emits an ultrasonic frequency which is reflected off an object
behind the vehicle. These reflections are received by the sensors. The time difference between the emission of
the frequency and when the reflection is received is known as sensor echo time, it is used to determine the
distance to the object. The sensors report this information to The Parking Assist Control Module.
Parking Assist Switch
The parking assist system can be activated and deactivated by pressing the parking assist switch. The Parking
55 of 59
Assist Control Module applies voltage and monitors the parking assist switch signal circuit. The parking assist
switch is a normally open switch. With the switch open, voltage seen at The Parking Assist Control Module is
high. When the parking assist switch is pressed, the switch is closed and the signal circuit is pulled to ground.
With the switch closed, voltage seen at The Parking Assist Control Module is low. The Parking Assist Control
Module will respond to this by activating or deactivating the parking assist function.
Parking Assist Switch Indicator
When the parking assist system is enabled, The Parking Assist Control Module will illuminate the indicator on
the switch. The indicator receives voltage through a high control circuit from the body control module (BCM)
and is controlled through a low control circuit by The Parking Assist Control Module.
Infotainment System
The infotainment system controls the audible alert for the park assist alert. If the an object is detected the
infotainment system will command beeps as an audible alert to the driver.
Parking Assist Operation
When an object is within the measuring range of the sensor, the ultrasonic pulse is reflected and is received by
the sending or a neighboring sensor. The sensor converts this signal into a voltage signal and sends this signal to
The Parking Assist Control Module. The Parking Assist Control Module evaluates the received sensor signals.
As soon as an object is within the measuring range, The Parking Assist Control Module sends a message via
serial data to the infotainment system to provide an alert signal.
The parking assist system can detect objects greater than 7.6 cm (3 in) wide and 25.4 cm (10 in) tall. The system
cannot detect objects below the bumper or underneath the vehicle.
The parking assist system can be activated and deactivated by pressing the parking assist switch. When the
transmission is in R, park assist is automatically activated, unless disable by the switch.
The Parking Assist Control Module carries out a self test and monitors the sensors for electrical and mechanical
faults. Monitored is the power supply of each sensor and the sensor signals. Mud, ice and snow may cause
obstruction of the function of the sensors. The Parking Assist Control Module also determines if the correct
type of sensor is installed. If any of these tests fails, a DTC with corresponding symptom is set and the parking
assist system is deactivated.
Parking Assist System Driver Information Center Messages
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
The driver information center displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST when The Parking Assist Control Module
detects a malfunction in the parking assist system and the system is disabled. The driver information center also
displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST when a loss of communication occurs with The Parking Assist Control
Module.
PARK ASSIST OFF
The PARK ASSIST OFF message is displayed in the driver information center when the parking assist system
is disabled due to conditions that disable or inhibit the system. The Parking Assist Control Module requests the
driver information center display PARK ASSIST OFF when it detects that one of the following conditions:
• The parking assist system is manually disabled using the parking assist switch.
56 of 59
• An object is attached to the rear of the vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle rack, trailer hitch receiver, or tow
bar. Also, an object extending beyond a lowered tailgate will disable the system.
• The Parking Assist sensors are covered by snow, mud, dirt, slush, or ice.
• The rear fascia is damaged.
• Excessive paint thickness on a replacement parking assist sensor.
• The Parking Assist sensors are disrupted by vibrations, like those caused by a large nearby vehicle or
from heavy equipment such as a jackhammer.
PARKING ASSIST DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (UD5)
The parking assist system is designed to identify and notify the driver of an object in the vehicle path when
moving forward or reversing at speeds of less than 8 km/h (5 MPH). The distance and location of the object is
determined by four Parking Assist sensor located in the rear fascia and four Parking Assist sensors located in
the front fascia. The parking assist system will notify the driver using audible beeps through the infotainment
system or haptic pulses through the driver's seat (if equipped).
The parking assist system is made up of the following components:
• Parking Assist Control Module

• Front Parking Assist sensors
• Rear Parking Assist sensors
• Parking assist switch
• Parking assist indicator
• Safety alert seat, if equipped.
The Parking Assist Control Module provides a reference voltage and a low reference to the eight Parking Assist
sensors. The Parking Assist Control Module receives individual signals from each of the eight sensors and
determines the location and distance of an object based on these inputs. When an object is detected, the Parking
Assist Control Module will send a serial data message to the infotainment system requesting an audible alert.
Parking Assist Sensors
The Parking Assist sensors are located in the fascias of the vehicle. The sensors are used to determine the
distance between an object and the bumper. Each sensor emits an ultrasonic frequency which is reflected off any
object located in front of or behind the vehicle. These reflections are received by the sensors. The time
difference between the emission of the frequency and when the reflection is received is known as sensor echo
time, it is used to determine the distance to the object. The sensors report this information to the Parking Assist
Control Module.
Parking Assist Switch (All except Cadillac with UGN)
The parking assist system can be activated and deactivated by pressing the parking assist switch. The Parking
Assist Control Module applies voltage and monitors the parking assist switch signal circuit. The parking assist
switch is a normally open switch. With the switch open, voltage seen at the Parking Assist Control Module is
high. When the parking assist switch is pressed, the switch is closed and the signal circuit is pulled to ground.
With the switch closed, voltage seen at the Parking Assist Control Module is low. The Parking Assist Control
57 of 59
Module will respond to this by activating or deactivating the parking assist function.
Parking Assist Switch (Cadillac with UGN)
The parking assist system can be activated and deactivated by pressing the parking assist switch. The active
safety control module applies voltage and monitors the parking assist switch signal circuit. The parking assist
switch is a normally open switch. With the switch open, voltage seen at the active safety control module is high.
When the parking assist switch is pressed, the switch is closed and the signal circuit is pulled to ground. With
the switch closed, voltage seen at the active safety control module is low. The active safety control module will
respond to this by sending a serial data message to the Parking Assist Control Module requesting the activation
or deactivation of the parking assist system.
Parking Assist Indicator (All except Cadillac with UGN)
When the parking assist system is enabled, the Parking Assist Control Module will illuminate the indicator on
the switch. The indicator receives voltage through a high control circuit from the body control module (BCM)
and is controlled through a low control circuit by the Parking Assist Control Module.
Parking Assist Indicator (Cadillac with UGN)
When the parking assist system is enabled, the active safety control module will illuminate the indicator on the
switch. The indicator receives voltage through a high control circuit from the body control module (BCM) and
is controlled through a low control circuit by the active safety control module.
Infotainment System
The infotainment system controls the audible alert for the park assist alert. If the an object is detected the
infotainment system will command beeps as an audible alert to the driver.
Safety Alert Seat
The memory seat module controls the haptic alert provided by the seats. If an object is detected, the memory
seat module will command pulses to the driver's seat.
Parking Assist Operation
When an object is within the measuring range of the sensor, the ultrasonic pulse is reflected and is received by
the sending or a neighboring sensor. The sensor converts this signal into a voltage signal and sends this signal to
the Parking Assist Control Module. The Parking Assist Control Module evaluates the received sensor signals.
As soon as an object is within the measuring range, the Parking Assist Control Module sends a message via
serial data to the infotainment system to provide an alert signal.
The parking assist system can detect objects greater than 7.6 cm (3 in) wide and 25.4 cm (10 in) tall. The system
cannot detect objects below the bumper or underneath the vehicle.
The parking assist system can be activated and deactivated by pressing the parking assist switch. When the
transmission is in R, park assist is automatically activated, unless disable by the switch.
The Parking Assist Control Module carries out a self test and monitors the sensors for electrical and mechanical
faults. Monitored is the power supply of each sensor and the sensor signals. Mud, ice and snow may cause
obstruction of the function of the sensors. The Parking Assist Control Module also determines if the correct
type of sensor is installed. If any of these tests fails, a DTC with corresponding symptom is set and the parking
assist system is deactivated.
58 of 59
Parking Assist System Driver Information Center Messages
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
The driver information center displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST when the Parking Assist Control Module
detects a malfunction in the parking assist system and the system is disabled. The driver information center also
displays SERVICE PARK ASSIST when a loss of communication occurs with the Parking Assist Control
Module.
PARK ASSIST OFF
The PARK ASSIST OFF message is displayed in the driver information center when the parking assist system
is disabled due to conditions that disable or inhibit the system. The Parking Assist Control Module requests the
driver information center display PARK ASSIST OFF when it detects that one of the following conditions:
• The parking assist system is manually disabled using the parking assist switch.
• An object is attached to the rear of the vehicle, such as a trailer, bicycle rack, trailer hitch receiver, or tow
bar. Also, an object extending beyond a lowered tailgate will disable the system.
• The parking assist sensors are covered by snow, mud, dirt, slush, or ice.
• The vehicle bumper is damaged.
• Excessive paint thickness on a replacement parking assist sensor.
• The parking assist sensors are disrupted by vibrations, like those caused by a large nearby vehicle or from
heavy equipment such as a jackhammer.
59 of 59
Power Outlets - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Wireless Charging System Module Bolt 1.2 N.m (11 lb in)
Wireless Charging System Module Bracket Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)

CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET WIRING SCHEMATICS
Cigar Lighter/Power Outlets
USB Receptacle and Wireless Charging (K4C)
1 of 31
SYMPTOMS - MOBILE DEVICE WIRELESS CHARGER
• Review the system description and operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions.
Refer to Mobile Device Wireless Charger Description and Operation.
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which can affect the operation of the power outlets.
Intermittent
Electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent
Conditions and Poor Connections
Symptom List
Refer to Mobile Device Wireless Charger Malfunction (with EL-51755) in order to diagnose the system.
SYMPTOMS - POWER OUTLETS

2 of 31
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which can affect the operation of the power outlets.
Intermittent
Electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent
Conditions and Poor Connections
Symptom List
Refer to Power Outlet Receptacle Malfunction (110V), or Power Outlet Receptacle Malfunction (12V) in
order to diagnose the system.
MOBILE DEVICE WIRELESS CHARGER MALFUNCTION (WITH EL-51755)

Check - Vehicle
• Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis:Strategy Based Diagnosis

Ignition 1 1 - -
Signal 3 2 - -
Ground - 1 - -
1. T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger Module=Inoperative
2. Wireless Charging Indicator=Off
3. Wireless Charging Indicator=On
Circuit Description
Ignition Supplied from a relay.
Signal connected to 12 V.
When the switch is closed it will pull the signal voltage low.
T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger Inductive charging, also known as "wireless charging", uses
Module a magnetic field to transfer energy between two objects.
3 of 31
The wireless charger has an induction coil to create an
alternating magnetic field. A second induction coil in a
portable device takes power from the magnetic field and
converts it back into electric current to charge the battery.
The two induction coils in proximity work similar as an
electrical transformer.
The T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger Module is controlled by an ignition operated relay and is operational
when the ignition is in the Accessory or On position. When a wireless charging device is placed on the charging
pad/pocket the charging of the device battery will start. The K9 Body Control Module detects the device battery
is charging and sends a serial data message to the P17 Info Display Module which illuminates the charge
indicator.
Diagnostic Aids
• Verify the mobile device can be charged with the proper wireless charging adapter. To check for phone or
other device compatibility, refer to GM Total Connect website.
• Verify the charging pad/pocket is free from debris or any obstruction that may impede charging.
• The component T22 contains an internal temperature switch that will open if it exceeds 85Â°C (185Â°F).
• The ambient operating temperature is between -20 and 60Â°C (-4 and 140Â°F) for the charging system
and between 0 and 35Â°C (32 and 95Â°F) for the mobile device. If the mobile device temperature
exceeds 35Â°C (95Â°F) the mobile device may stop accepting a charge (this may vary with different
mobile devices).
• Verify the mobile device is positioned correctly on the charging pad/pocket and there are no foreign
objects between the mat and the mobile device. It may be necessary to move the device around slightly or
rotate 180 degrees to properly align it on the charging pad/pocket until the device starts to charge. The use
of a protective case may require more precise device placement to allow charging or may inhibit
charging. Try removing the protective case.
• The mobile device may not charge if the charge mat is NOT completely flat or has an air gap which can
be verified by a finger push at the target graphic located at the center of the mat. If the charge mat is NOT
flat, replace the charge mat/rubber liner.
• While operating the vehicle in rough conditions, it is possible for the device to move out of position,
repositioning of the device may be necessary.
• If the mobile device battery is fully charged, the charge indicator on the P17 Info Display Module may
not illuminate.
Schematic Reference
Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Wiring Schematics
4 of 31
Mobile Device Wireless Charger Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Special Tools
EL-51755 Inductive Charging Test Tool
WARNING: Remove all objects from the charging pad before charging your mobile device.
Objects, such as coins, keys, rings, paper clips, or cards, between the phone
and charging pad will become very hot. On the rare occasion that the charging
system does not detect an object, and the object gets wedged between the
phone and charger, remove the phone and allow the object to cool before
removing it from the charging pad, to prevent burns.

2. Verify the charging pad is clear of any wireless device.
Verify the function: Wireless Charging Indicator = Off
If the indicator is On
Go to next step: If the indicator is Off
NOTE: There is a charging coil located in the center of the Charging Pad/Pocket.
The EL-51755 Inductive Charging Test Tool has a charging coil in the
center of the tool. These coils must be aligned in order for the test tool to
illuminate.
To complete successfully, the procedure may need to be repeated 5 times.

Between each attempt, remove the tool and wait 2 s.
3. Install the special tool: EL-51755 Inductive Charging Test Tool @ Charging Pad/Pocket, keeping it
centered.
Verify the function: Special Tools LED (Light Emitting Diode) = On
5 of 31
If the tool is Off
Go to next step: If the tool is On

4. Verify the function: Wireless Charging Indicator = On
If the indicator is Off
Go to next step: If the indicator is On
NOTE: The customer's device may not be compatible or is defective.
5. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger Module
1. Disconnect the ground connection: G305
& Terminal G305
1. Remove - Test Lamp
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ignition circuit terminal 1 & Output terminal @
F1DA Fuse
If less than 2 ohms Refer to:Retained Accessory Power Malfunction
1. Remove - Test Lamp
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger Module.
6 of 31
6. Verify the function: Wireless Charging Indicator = Off
If the indicator is On
& Ground
Go to next step: If the indicator is Off
terminal 2
8. Verify the function: Wireless Charging Indicator = On
If the indicator is Off
Ground
Go to next step: If the indicator is On
9. Test or replace the component: T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger Module
Repair Instructions
Wireless Charging System Module Replacement - T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger Module
POWER OUTLET RECEPTACLE MALFUNCTION (110V)


Circuit
7 of 31
B+ 1 1 - -
Ignition 1 1 - -
AC Terminal 2 1 1 1 -
AC Terminal 7 1 1 1 -
Signal 1 1 2 -
Ground - 1 - -
1. Accessory DC/AC Power Inverter Module Always OFF
2. Accessory DC/AC Power Inverter Module Always ON
The accessory DC/AC power inverter module converts 12 V direct current (DC) battery voltage to 110 - 120 V
alternating current (AC) in order to operate AC powered devices. The accessory DC/AC power inverter module
provides up to 150 watts of power. The accessory DC/AC power inverter module is connected to a chassis
ground circuit and receives fuse protected battery voltage.
The accessory power receptacle has an internal switch, that detects when an AC powered device is plugged into
the receptacle. When the ignition is ON and an AC powered device is plugged into the accessory power
receptacle, the normally open switch in the accessory power receptacle, closes. When the accessory DC/AC
power inverter module detects the voltage from the accessory power receptacle switch, the inverter module
begins to supply 110 - 120 V AC to the accessory power receptacle - 110V AC after a 1.5 s delay.
Schematic Reference
Power Outlets Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
1. Ignition ON.
2. Connect an AC powered device to the X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC.
3. Verify the T1 Accessory DC/AC Power Inverter Module is turned ON and the device works as expected.
If the device is not powered
8 of 31
Go to next step: If the device is powered

4. All OK.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always treat the accessory power receptacle,
accessory DC/AC power inverter module, AC circuit wires, and connectors as if
AC high-voltage is present.
1. Ignition OFF, scan tool disconnected, ignition key removed. Wait for 2 min. Nothing plugged into the
X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC, disconnect the harness connector at the T1 Accessory
DC/AC Power Inverter Module.
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
If greater than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the B+ circuit terminal 6 and ground.
If infinite resistance, replace the T1 Accessory DC/AC Power Inverter Module.
If greater than 1 V
Repair the short to voltage in the signal circuit.

Repair the short to ground in the signal circuit.
9 of 31
6. Test for less than 1 V between the AC circuit terminals listed below and ground.
• AC Terminal 2
• AC Terminal 7
If greater than 1 V
Repair the short to voltage in the AC circuit.

7. Test for infinite resistance between the AC circuit terminals listed below and ground:
• AC Terminal 2
• AC Terminal 7
Repair the short to ground in the AC circuit.

8. Disconnect X1 and X2 harness connectors at the X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V.
9. Test for less than 2 Ω between the AC circuit terminals listed below:
• X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC terminal 3 X1 and the T1 Accessory DC/AC Power
Inverter Module terminal 2.
• X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC terminal 3 X2 and the T1 Accessory DC/AC Power
Inverter Module terminal 7.
Repair the open/high resistance in the AC circuit.

10. Ignition ON.
11. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the ignition circuit terminal 1 X1 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
12. Ignition OFF, connect all harness connectors at the X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC.
Connect a 110 V extension cord without a connected device to the X81 Accessory Power Receptacle -
110V AC, ignition ON.
13. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the T1 Accessory DC/AC Power Inverter Module signal
circuit terminal 12 and ground.
10 of 31
1. Ignition OFF.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC.
14. Test or replace the T1 Accessory DC/AC Power Inverter Module.
Component Testing
Accessory Power Outlet 110V AC
1. Ignition OFF, remove the X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC.
2. Test for infinite resistance between terminal 3 X2 and terminal 3 X1.
Replace X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC.

3. Test for less than 2 Ω between the following terminals:
• The terminal 3 X2 and the applicable receptacle terminal
• The terminal 3 X1 and the applicable receptacle terminal
If greater than the 2 Ω
Replace the X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC.

4. Test for infinite resistance between terminal 1 X1 and terminal 1 X2.
If less than the specified range
Replace X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC.

5. Connect a 110 V extension cord without a connected device to the X81 Accessory Power Receptacle -
110V AC.
6. Test for less than 5 Ω between terminal 1 X1 and terminal 1 X2.
If greater than the 5 Ω
Replace the X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC.

7. All OK
Repair Instructions
POWER OUTLET RECEPTACLE MALFUNCTION (12V)
11 of 31

Ignition 1 1 - -
Ground - 1 - -
1. Accessory Power Receptacle Malfunction
The vehicle is fitted with a 12 V accessory power receptacle. The accessory power outlets are controlled by an
ignition operated relay. The accessory power receptacle is operational when the ignition is turned to either the
On or the Accessories positions.
Diagnostic Aids
It may be helpful to discuss with the customer the usage of any device that may have drawn too much current
and caused an open fuse/circuit breaker.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
1. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, connect an appropriate device to the X80 Accessory Power
Receptacle or E32 Cigarette Lighter Recptacle.
2. Verify the device is powered by the X80 Accessory Power Receptacle or E32 Cigarette Lighter Recptacle.
12 of 31
If the device is not powered
Go to next step: If the device is powered

3. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF/Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the
appropriate X80 Accessory Power Receptacle or E32 Cigarette Lighter Receptacle. It may take up to 2
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal C and ground.
4. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal A and ground.
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the fuse/circuit breaker is good
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse/circuit breaker is not open and there is voltage at the
fuse/circuit breaker. Refer to Retained Accessory Power Malfunction .
If the test lamp does not illuminate and the fuse/circuit breaker is open
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal A and ground.
If infinite resistance, replace the appropriate X80 Accessory Power Receptacle or E32
Cigarette Lighter Receptacle.
5. Replace the appropriate X80 Accessory Power Receptacle or E32 Cigarette Lighter Receptacle.
Repair Instructions
USB RECEPTACLE MALFUNCTION

13 of 31

Ignition 1 1 - -
Ground - 1 - -
1. USB Receptacle Malfunction
The vehicle is fitted with USB charge port receptacles which are used only for charging mobile devices. The
USB receptacles are controlled by an ignition operated relay and are operational when the ignition is turned to
either the On or the Accessories positions.
Diagnostic Aids
If USB port is used for auxiliary audio, refer to: Symptoms - Entertainment
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the X92 USB Receptacle. It may take up to 2 min for
all vehicle systems to power down.
1. Ignition OFF.
14 of 31
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify that a test lamp illuminates between the control circuit terminal 6 and ground.
1. Ignition OFF.
If less than 2 Ω, verify the fuse is not open and there is voltage at the fuse. Refer to Retained
Accessory Power Malfunction .
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the X92 USB Receptacle.
5. Test or replace the X92 USB Receptacle.
Repair Instructions
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
CIGARETTE LIGHTER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT
Special Tools
EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover
Equivalent regional tools:Special Tools
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the auxiliary power outlet fuse from the fuse block.
2.
15 of 31
Remove the accessory power receptacle (1) :
1. Look into the receptacle (1). There are two 3 mm (0.11 in) tab windows 12 mm (0.47 in) from the
front of the receptacle. The EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover pushes the plastic latches
from these tab windows and the receptacle can be pulled straight out.
2. Place one side of the "T" portion of the EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover into the tab
window. The EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover will not fit straight into the receptacle (1).
Angle the EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover slightly for insertion into the receptacle.
3. Insert the other side of the "T" into the opposite tab window.
You must move the EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover handle toward horizontal to engage
the other tab window.
4. Use the EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover to pull the receptacle (1) straight out.
3. If EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover tool fails to release the receptacle (1) from the retainer,
perform the following alternate method:
1. Insert a small grinding tool with a cutoff wheel into the socket.
2. Remove the plastic latches in the 3 mm (0.11 in) square windows.
3. Use the EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover as directed above to remove the socket.
1.
16 of 31
Route the connector through the accessory power receptacle retainer. Align the retainer to the slot in the
opening.
2. Install the retainer by pressing into place until fully seated.

3. Connect the electrical connector to the cigarette lighter receptacle (1).
4. Align the tabs on the receptacle (1) to the slots in the retainer. Install the accessory power receptacle by
pressing into place until fully seated.
5. Install the auxiliary power outlet fuse.
WIRELESS CHARGING SYSTEM MODULE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
2.
17 of 31
Wireless Charging System Module Bracket Bolt (1) - Remove
3. Wireless Charging System Module Bracket (2) - Remove
4.
Wireless Charging System Module Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
5. Wireless Charging System Module (2) - Remove
1.
18 of 31
Wireless Charging System Module (2) - Install
2. Wireless Charging System Module Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] 1.2 N.m (11 lb in)
3.
Wireless Charging System Module Bracket (2) - Install
4. Wireless Charging System Module Bracket Bolt (1) - Install and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
5.
19 of 31
WIRELESS CHARGING SYSTEM MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
2.
20 of 31
Wireless Charging System Module Bracket Bolt (1) - Remove
3. Wireless Charging System Module (2) - Remove
4.
Wireless Charging System Module Bolt (1) - Remove [2x]
5. Wireless Charging System Module Bracket (2) - Remove
1.
21 of 31
Wireless Charging System Module Bracket (2) - Install
2. Wireless Charging System Module Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [2x] 1.2 N.m (11 lb in)
3.
Wireless Charging System Module (2) - Install
4. Wireless Charging System Module Bracket Bolt (1) - Install and tighten 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
5.
22 of 31
ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE RETAINER REPLACEMENT

Accessory Power Receptacle Replacement
Accessory Power Receptacle Retainer
Procedure
1
1. Use a flat bladed plastic trim tool.
ACCESSORY POWER RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT
Special Tools
EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover
23 of 31
Removal Procedure
1. Remove the auxiliary power outlet fuse from the fuse block.
2.
Remove the accessory power receptacle (1) :
1. Look into the receptacle (1). There are two 3 mm (0.11 in) tab windows 12 mm (0.47 in) from the
front of the receptacle. The EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover pushes the plastic latches
from these tab windows and the receptacle can be pulled straight out.
2. Place one side of the "T" portion of the EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover into the tab
window. The EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover will not fit straight into the receptacle (1).
Angle the EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover slightly for insertion into the receptacle.
3. Insert the other side of the "T" into the opposite tab window.
You must move the EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover handle toward horizontal to engage
the other tab window.
4. Use the EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover to pull the receptacle (1) straight out.
3. If EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover tool fails to release the receptacle (1) from the retainer,
perform the following alternate method:
1. Insert a small grinding tool with a cutoff wheel into the socket.
2. Remove the plastic latches in the 3 mm (0.11 in) square windows.
3. Use the EL-42059 Cigar Lighter Socket Remover as directed above to remove the socket.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector to the accessory power receptacle (1).
1.
24 of 31
Route the connector through the accessory power receptacle retainer. Align the retainer to the slot in the
opening.
2. Install the retainer by pressing into place until fully seated.

3. Connect the electrical connector to the accessory power receptacle (1).
4. Align the tabs on the receptacle (1) to the slots in the retainer. Install the accessory power receptacle by
pressing into place until fully seated.
5. Install the auxiliary power outlet fuse.
DUAL CHARGE ONLY RECEPTACLE REPLACEMENT

Dual Charge Only Receptacle
1 Procedure
25 of 31
MOBILE DEVICE WIRELESS CHARGER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Mobile Device Wireless Charging System

T22 Mobile Device Wireless Charger Module
K74 Human Machine Interface Control Module
P17 P17 Info Display Module
The Mobile Device Wireless Charging System (WCS) is an system for wirelessly charging mobile devices. It is
capable of charging the batteries of compatible mobile devices. A compatible device is one that is compliant
with Power Matters Alliance (PMA) or Wireless Power Consortium (WPC) Standard, meaning that it is
equipped with a PMA or WPC wireless charge "receiver" that will work with the charge "transmitter" installed
in the vehicle. The devices may utilize built-in charging circuitry or an adapter (external plug-in device which
contains the charging circuitry). To check for phone or other device compatibility, refer to GM Total Connect.
WARNING: Remove all objects from the charging pad before charging your mobile device.
Objects, such as coins, keys, rings, paper clips, or cards, between the phone
and charging pad will become very hot. On the rare occasion that the charging
system does not detect an object, and the object gets wedged between the
phone and charger, remove the phone and allow the object to cool before
removing it from the charging pad, to prevent burns.
Charging
To charge a device, place it on the charging surface in the vehicle. There is a charging coil located in the center
of the charging surface. The device has a charging coil typically near the center of the device. These coils must
be lined up in order for charging to proceed. When the interruptible retained accessory power (IRAP) relay is
closed (this is true typically when vehicle ignition is in Run or Accessory position), the WCS will detect the
device, establish communications with the device to confirm it is a compatible device, and then deliver charging
power to the device via wireless interface. The WCS will be able to deliver up to 5W of power to compatible
devices. It shall only enter a charging state if communication is established and a compatible device is
identified.
26 of 31
The WCS shall not enter a charging state if there is no communication established with a compatible device. If a
non-compatible device or metallic foreign object is detected, the WCS will not transfer power. The charger
monitors its internal temperature and will shut down if the charger temperature exceeds 185F (85C).
Indicator
The body control module will detect the device battery is charging and send a serial data message on the
GMLAN bus to the radio display. The radio display will indicate a device is currently charging. When the
indicator is toggling on and off this indicates a thermal limit has been reached and the device will not charge.
For more information refer to the owners manual.
Cooling
The wireless charger is kept cool using the HVAC system. There is a dedicated HVAC duct that connects to the
Wireless Charging Module bracket (which holds the module and the mat).
POWER OUTLETS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

12 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Description and Operation
The 12 V accessory power receptacles are supplied with power by the accessory relay.
The vehicle is fitted with a cigarette lighter and/or with a 12 V accessory power receptacle. The cigarette lighter
and accessory power outlets are controlled by an ignition operated relay. The accessory power receptacle and
cigarette lighter are operational when the ignition is turned to either the On or the Accessories positions. To
operate the cigarette lighter, press in the lighter knob. When the element is hot, the lighter automatically pops
out and is ready for use.
110 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle System Description

T1 T1 Accessory DC/AC Power Inverter Module
X81 X81 Accessory Power Receptacle - 110V AC
The alternating current (AC) accessory power outlet system consists of the accessory DC/AC power inverter
module and the accessory power receptacle - 110 V AC. The accessory DC/AC power inverter module converts
12 V direct current (DC) battery power to 110 V at 60 Hertz (Hz) AC power to operate AC powered devices.
The accessory DC/AC power inverter module provides up to 150 watts of power. The accessory power
receptacle - 110 V AC provides the usual connection for AC powered devices.
110 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle System Operation
27 of 31
The accessory DC/AC power inverter module receives fuse protected battery voltage and is connected to the 12
V electrical system ground. The accessory power receptacle - 110 V AC has an internal switch, that detects
when an AC powered device is plugged into the outlet. When the ignition is ON, and an AC powered device is
plugged into the accessory power receptacle - 110 V AC, the normally open switch in the accessory power
receptacle - 110 V AC, closes. When the accessory DC/AC power inverter module detects the voltage from the
accessory power receptacle - 110 V AC switch, the inverter module begins to supply 110 V AC to the accessory
power receptacle - 110 V AC after a 1.5 s delay. The accessory AC power system is protected against circuit
overload and circuit shorts to ground.
110 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Isolation Fault Protection
The accessory DC/AC power inverter module contains a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI). GFCI monitors
the 110 V circuit for a short to vehicle chassis ground. If a 110 V AC short to ground is detected, the accessory
DC/AC power inverter module will turn OFF. The module remains OFF, until the AC powered device is
unplugged from the outlet, and then plugged into the outlet after a 3 s delay.
110 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Overload Shutdown
The accessory DC/AC power inverter module will turn OFF if the current in the 110 V circuit is greater than 3.8
A for 1 s, or 2.5 A for 10 s. The module will turn ON again, when the AC powered device is unplugged from
the outlet, and then plugged into the outlet after a 3 s delay.
110 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Internal Shutdown
The accessory DC/AC power inverter module will turn OFF if the B+ supply voltage is greater than 16.5 V or
less than 11 V. The module will also turn OFF if the device temperature is greater than 85Â°C (185Â°F). The
module will turn ON again, after the shutdown condition is corrected, and the AC powered device is unplugged
from the outlet, and then plugged into the outlet.
230 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle System Description

T1 T1 Accessory DC/AC Power Inverter Module
X81B X81B Accessory Power Receptacle - 220V AC
The alternating current (AC) accessory power outlet system consists of the accessory DC/AC power inverter
module and the accessory power receptacle - 220V AC. The accessory DC/AC power inverter module converts
12 V direct current (DC) battery power to 220 - 230 V at 50 Hertz (Hz) AC power to operate AC powered
devices. The accessory DC/AC power inverter module provides up to 150 watts of power. The accessory power
receptacle - 220V AC provides the usual connection for AC powered devices.
28 of 31
230 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle System Operation
The accessory DC/AC power inverter module receives fuse protected battery voltage and is connected to the 12
V electrical system ground. The accessory power receptacle - 220V AC has an internal switch, that detects
when an AC powered device is plugged into the outlet. When the ignition is ON, and an AC powered device is
plugged into the accessory power receptacle - 220V AC, the normally open switch in the accessory power
receptacle - 220V AC, closes. When the accessory DC/AC power inverter module detects the voltage from the
accessory power receptacle - 220V AC switch, the inverter module begins to supply 220 - 230 V AC to the
accessory power receptacle - 220V AC after a 1.5 second delay. The accessory AC power system is protected
against circuit overload and circuit shorts to ground.
230 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Isolation Fault Protection
The accessory DC/AC power inverter module contains a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI). GFCI monitors
the 230 V circuit for a short to vehicle chassis ground. If a 230 V AC short to ground is detected, the accessory
DC/AC power inverter module will turn OFF. The module remains OFF, until the AC powered device is
unplugged from the outlet, and then plugged into the outlet after a 3 s delay.
230 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Overload Shutdown
The accessory AC/DC power control module will turn OFF if the current in the 230 V circuit is greater than 3.8
A for 1 second, or 2.5 A for 10 seconds. The module will turn ON again, when the AC powered device is
unplugged from the outlet, and then plugged into the outlet after a 3 second delay.
230 Volt Power Outlet Receptacle Internal Shutdown
The accessory DC/AC power inverter module will turn OFF if the B+ supply voltage is greater than 16.5 V or
less than 11 V. The module will also turn OFF if the device temperature is greater than 85Â°C (185Â°F). The
module will turn ON again, after the shutdown condition is corrected, and the AC powered device is unplugged
from the accessory power receptacle - 220V AC, and then plugged into the accessory power receptacle - 220V
AC.
USB Receptacle Description and Operation (USS)
The vehicle is fitted with USB charge port receptacles at the rear of the floor console. These USB receptacles
are for charging devices only. The USB receptacles are controlled by an ignition operated relay and are
operational when the ignition is turned to either the On or the Accessories positions.

SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool
Number/
Illustration Description
29 of 31
Tool
Number/
EL 42059
J 42059
Cigar
Lighter
Socket
Remover
30 of 31
Tool
Number/
EL 51755
Inductive
Charging
Test Tool
31 of 31
Power Seats - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Driver or Passenger Seat Recliner Actuator Bolt 6 N.m (53 lb in)
Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Module Fastener 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Adjuster Memory Module Bracket Fastener 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Bolt 8 N.m (71 lb in)
Passenger Seat Adjuster Memory Module Fastener 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)

DRIVER SEAT WIRING SCHEMATICS
Seat Adjuster Switch and Motors (-A45)
Module Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Memory Controls (A45)
1 of 96
Seat Adjuster Switch and Position Motors (A45)
Lumbar and Massage (AF6)
2 of 96
PASSENGER SEAT WIRING SCHEMATICS
Seat Adjuster Switch and Motors (A7J/AT9)
Module Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Memory Controls (A7K)
3 of 96
Lumbar and Massage (AVU)

DTC B1405, B1825, B2355, B2365, OR B2375
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1405
Control Module Voltage Reference Output 2 Circuit
4 of 96
DTC B1825
Seat Recline Position Sensor Circuit
DTC B2355
Seat Front Vertical Position Sensor Circuit
DTC B2365
Seat Rear Vertical Position Sensor Circuit
DTC B2375
Seat Assembly Horizontal Position Sensor Circuit

B1405 02
B1825 06
B1825 06
B2355 06
12 V Reference B2355 06 - -
B2365 06
B2365 06
B2375 06
B2375 06
B1825 01
Signal - Seat Front Vertical B2355 01
B2355 06 B2355 06 B2355 5A
Position Sensor Circuit B2365 01
B2375 01
B1825 01
Signal - Seat Rear Vertical B2355 01
B2365 06 B2365 06 B2365 5A
Position Sensor Circuit B2365 01
B2375 01
B1825 01
Signal - Seat Assembly
B2355 01
Horizontal Position Sensor B2375 06 B2375 06 B2375 5A
B2365 01
Circuit
B2375 01
B1825 01
Signal - Seat Recline Position B2355 01
B1825 06 B1825 06 B1825 5A
Sensor Circuit B2365 01
B2375 01
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Memory Seats Description and Operation
Circuit Description
5 of 96
Circuit Description
Signal
• Seat Motors
K40D Seat Memory Control Module - • Adjustable Pedals
Driver • Outside Rearview Mirror

M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver An electric DC motor. & Driver Seat Position Sensor
M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver An electric DC motor. & Driver Seat Position Sensor
M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver An electric DC motor. & Driver Seat Position Sensor
M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver An electric DC motor. & Driver Seat Position Sensor
• Ignition - On / Vehicle - In Service Mode

• Seat Motor = Active
• DTC B1325 = Not set
• Control Module Voltage = 9 to 16 V
B1405 02
12 V Reference circuit = Short to Ground
B1825 01, B2355 01, B2365 01, B2375 01
Signal = Greater than 5 V
B1825 06, B2355 06, B2365 06, B2375 06
Signal = Short to Ground or Open/High Resistance
Seat Memory = Disabled by Seat Memory Control Module
• A current DTC will clear on the next malfunction-free ignition cycle.

6 of 96
Schematic Reference
Driver Seat Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify DTC B1405, B1825, B2355, B2365, B2375 is not set.
If DTC B1405 is set
If DTC B1825, B2355, B2365, B2375 is set

3. All OK.
Test 1
2. Disconnect all components on the circuit:
• M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver
• M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver
• M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver
• M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver
4. Clear the DTCs.
5. Operate the component: Seat Adjuster Switch - Press and hold the switch
7 of 96
If the DTC sets
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: 1 X5 @ Control module harness & Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver
• Signal circuit terminal 11 X5 & Ground
10. Connect the electrical connector: X5 @ K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver
11. Connect the component: M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver
If the DTC sets - Replace the component: M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver
16. Connect the component: M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver
If the DTC sets - Replace the component: M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver
21. Connect the component: M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver
If the DTC sets - Replace the component: M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver
26. Connect the component: M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver
8 of 96
If the DTC sets - Replace the component: M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver
30. All OK.
Test 2
2. Disconnect the electrical connector at one of the following components, depending on the DTC that is set:
• {B2355} M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver
• {B2375} M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver
• {B2365} M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver
• {B1825} M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver
5. Test for greater than 10.8 V between the test points:
• {M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver} 12 V Reference terminal 2 @ Component harness &
Ground
• {M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver} 12 V Reference terminal 4 @ Component harness &
Ground
• {M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver} 12 V Reference terminal 4 @ Component harness &
Ground
• {M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver} 12 V Reference terminal 2 @ Component harness & Ground
If 10.8 V or less
• {M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver} 12 V Reference terminal 2 @ Component
harness & Terminal 1 X5 @ Control module harness
• {M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver} 12 V Reference terminal 4 @ Component harness &
• {M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver} 12 V Reference terminal 4 @ Component harness
& Terminal 1 X5 @ Control module harness
• {M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver} 12 V Reference terminal 2 @ Component harness &
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver
6. Test for 0.2 to 2 V between the test points:
• {M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 4 @ Component harness &
Ground
9 of 96
• {M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & Ground
• {M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness &
Ground
• {M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 4 @ Component harness & Ground
If less than 0.2 V
• {M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 4 @ Component harness
& Ground
• {M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness &
Ground
• {M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness
& Ground
• {M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 4 @ Component harness &
Ground
• {M50D Seat Front Vertical Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 4 @ Component harness
• {M51D Seat Horizontal Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness &
• {M55D Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness
• {M56D Seat Recline Motor - Driver} Signal circuit terminal 4 @ Component harness &
If greater than 2 V
Go to next step: If between 0.2 and 2 V
10 of 96
7. Test or replace the component:
Repair Instructions
• Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Replacement

• Front Seat Cushion Frame Replacement
• Driver or Passenger Seat Recliner Actuator Replacement
DTC B1735, B1740, B1745, B1750, B1755, B1760, B1815, B1820, B1830, B1835, B1840, OR B1845
DTC Descriptors
DTC B1735
Seat Front Up Switch Circuit
DTC B1740
Seat Front Down Switch Circuit
DTC B1745
Seat Rear Up Switch Circuit
DTC B1750
Seat Rear Down Switch Circuit
DTC B1755
Seat Assembly Forward Switch Circuit
DTC B1760
Seat Assembly Rearward Switch Circuit
DTC B1815
11 of 96
Seat Recline Forward Switch Circuit
DTC B1820
Seat Recline Rearward Switch Circuit
DTC B1830
Seat Lumbar Forward Switch Circuit
DTC B1835
Seat Lumbar Rearward Switch Circuit

B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
B1750 59,
B1755 59,
B1760 59,
Front Vertical Up Switch Signal 1 - -
B1815 59,
B1820 59,
B1830 59,
B1835 59,
B1840 59,
B1845 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
B1750 59,
B1755 59,
Front Vertical Down Switch B1760 59,
1 - -
Signal B1815 59,
B1820 59,
B1830 59,
B1835 59,
B1840 59,
B1845 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
B1750 59,
Rear Vertical Up Switch Signal 2 - -
B1755 59,
B1760 59,
B1815 59,
B1820 59,
12 of 96
B1830 59,
B1835 59,
B1840 59,
B1845 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
B1750 59,
B1755 59,
Rear Vertical Down Switch B1760 59,
2 - -
Signal B1815 59,
B1820 59,
B1830 59,
B1835 59,
B1840 59,
B1845 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
B1750 59,
B1755 59,
Horizontal Forward Switch B1760 59,
3 - -
Signal B1815 59,
B1820 59,
B1830 59,
B1835 59,
B1840 59,
B1845 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
B1750 59,
B1755 59,
Horizontal Rearward Switch B1760 59,
3 - -
Signal B1815 59,
B1820 59,
B1830 59,
B1835 59,
B1840 59,
B1845 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
B1750 59,
Recline Forward Switch Signal B1755 59, 4 - -
B1760 59,
B1815 59,
B1820 59,
13 of 96
B1830 59,
B1835 59,
B1840 59,
B1845 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
B1750 59,
B1755 59,
B1760 59,
Recline Rearward Switch Signal 4 - -
B1815 59,
B1820 59,
B1830 59,
B1835 59,
B1840 59,
B1845 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
B1750 59,
B1755 59,
Seat Lumbar Forward Switch B1760 59,
6 - -
Signal B1815 59,
B1820 59,
B1830 59,
B1835 59,
B1840 59,
B1845 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
B1750 59,
B1755 59,
Seat Lumbar Rearward Switch B1760 59,
6 - -
Signal B1815 59,
B1820 59,
B1830 59,
B1835 59,
B1840 59,
B1845 59
1. The seat front vertical motor is inoperative
2. The seat rear vertical motor is inoperative
3. The seat horizontal motor is inoperative
4. The seat back recline motor is inoperative
5. The lumbar vertical support is inoperative (If equipped)
6. The lumbar horizontal support is inoperative
14 of 96
The seat memory control module supplies a reference voltage to each signal circuit of the driver seat adjuster
switch. When the power seat or lumbar switches are pressed, the appropriate signal circuit from the seat
memory control module is pulled low through the switch contacts indicating the power seat command. The seat
memory control module then commands the driver seat or lumbar to move in response to the switch signals.
• DTC B1325 must not be present.

• Module battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
• If a seat or lumbar switch circuit is active in one direction and the switch for the opposite direction is
pressed, this DTC will set.
• A short to ground on a switch signal circuit.
• A motor output driven in response to a switch considered failed, is deactivated for both directions.
• All memory recall commands are ignored.
• The seat memory control module will respond to any other switch signal that has not set a DTC.
• The current DTC will clear and set the DTC to history, when the fault is no longer present and the
ignition is cycled OFF then back to ACC or RUN.
• The history DTC will clear after 40 consecutive fault-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Diagnostic Aids
• If one of the switch signal circuits is shorted to ground, multiple DTCs will set.
• If a switch is stuck in one direction and the switch is pressed in the opposite direction, a single DTC will
set.
Schematic Reference
Memory Seats Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
15 of 96
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool seat switch parameters listed below change between Inactive and Forward/Rearward
or UP/Down when pressing the appropriate seat directional switch.
• Driver Seat Cushion Front Vertical Switch
• Driver Seat Cushion Rear Vertical Switch
• Driver Seat Horizontal Switch
• Driver Seat Back Switch
• Driver Lumbar Support Horizontal Switch

3. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 and X2 harness connectors at the S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver.
2. Verify that all scan tool driver seat switch parameters listed below are Inactive:
• Driver Lumbar Support Horizontal Switch
If not Inactive
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K40D Seat Memory Control Module -
2. Test for infinite resistance between the appropriate signal circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• Front vertical up switch terminal 10 X1
• Front vertical down switch terminal 6 X1
• Rear vertical up switch terminal 3 X1
• Rear vertical down switch terminal 1 X1
• Horizontal forward switch terminal 8 X1
• Horizontal rearward switch terminal 4 X1
16 of 96
• Recline forward switch terminal 7 X1
• Recline rearward switch terminal 2 X1
• Driver seat lumbar forward terminal 2 X2
• Driver seat lumbar rearward terminal 6 X2
If infinite resistance, replace the K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver.
3. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the appropriate signal circuit terminal listed below and the
ground circuit terminal 5 X1.
• Driver seat lumbar forward terminal 2 X2
• Driver seat lumbar rearward terminal 6 X2
4. Verify the appropriate scan tool seat switch parameter is Forward/Rearward or UP/Down.
If not Forward/Rearward or UP/Down
3. Ignition OFF.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver.
Go to next step: If Forward/Rearward or UP/Down
5. Test or replace the S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver.
Component Testing
Seat Adjuster Switch Test
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 and X2 harness connectors at the S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ground terminal 5 X1 and each signal terminal with the switch in
the open position.
17 of 96
Replace the S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver.

3. Test for less than 2 Ω between the ground terminal 5 X1 and each signal terminal with the appropriate
switch in the closed position.
If 2 Ω or greater

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Front Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement

• Control Module References for K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver replacement,
DTC B183B OR B183C

DTC Descriptors
DTC B183B
Seat Lumbar Support Switch Signal Circuit
DTC B183C
Seat Bolster/Massage Switch Signal Circuit

B183B 06, B183B 08,
5 V Reference B183B 06 -
B183C 06 B183C 08
Seat lumbar Support Switch Signal B183B 08 B183B 06 B183B 08 B183B 59
Seat lumbar Support Switch
- 1 - -
Ground
Seat Bolster/Massage Switch
B183C 08 B183C 06 B183C 08 B183C 59
Signal
18 of 96
Seat Bolster/Massage Switch
- 2 - -
Ground
1. The seat lumbar support function is inoperative.
2. The seat side bolster/massage function is inoperative.
Ground is supplied to the seat lumbar support and the seat back side bolster switches. Each switch is also
supplied with a 5 V reference and signal circuits from the seat memory control module. The reference voltage is
applied to a resistive network internal to the switches. When a switch is pressed, the output of the resistive
network results in a voltage drop on the signal circuit to the seat memory control module indicating the lumbar,
bolster, or massage request. In response to this signal, the seat memory control module sends a LIN serial data
message to the seat bolster memory control module commanding it to perform the required pneumatic
movements.

B183B 06
If the seat memory control module detects a short to ground or an open in the seat lumbar support switch signal
circuit this DTC will set.
B183B 08
If the seat memory control module detects an invalid signal on the seat lumbar support switch signal circuit this
DTC will set.
B183B 59
The seat memory control module detects a stuck lumbar support switch for a given amount of time.
B183C 06
If the seat memory control module detects a short to ground or an open in the seat bolster/massage switch signal
circuit this DTC will set.
B183C 08
If the seat memory control module detects an invalid signal on the seat bolster/massage switch signal circuit this
DTC will set.
B183C 59
The seat memory control module detects a stuck seat bolster or massage switch for a given amount of time.
19 of 96
B183B 06, B183B 08, or B183B 59
• Current and history DTCs are set.

• All seat lumbar support commands and are ignored.
B183C 06, B183C 08, or B183C 59

• All seat bolster and massage commands and are ignored.
Conditions for Clearing the DTCs
• The DTC automatically clears when the switch circuit setting the DTC is no longer active.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive fault-free ignition cycles have occurred.
Schematic Reference
• Driver Seat Wiring Schematics

• Passenger Seat Wiring Schematics
Lumbar Support Description and Operation (With Memory Seat A45), or Lumbar Support Description
and Operation (Without Memory Seat A45)
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC B183B 59 is not set as a current DTC.
If the DTC is set current
Replace the 65 Seat Lumbar Support Switch.
20 of 96
Go to next step: If the DTC is not set current
3. Verify DTC B183C 59 is not set as a current DTC.
If the DTC is set current
Replace the S66 Seat Back Side Bolster Adjuster Switch.
Go to next step: If the DTC is not set current

4. Verify DTC B183B 06 or B183B 08 is not set.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - DTC B183B Lumbar Switch Circuit Test.
Go to next step: If either DTC is not set

5. Verify DTC B183C 06 or B183C 08 is not set.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - DTC B183C Seat Back Side Bolster Switch Circuit Test.
Go to next step: If either DTC is not set

6. All OK.
DTC B183B Lumbar Switch Circuit Test
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate seat lumbar support switch listed below.
• S65D Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Driver
• S65P Seat Lumbar Support Switch - Passenger
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K40 Seat Memory Control Module.
21 of 96
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K40 Seat Memory Control Module.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the K40 Seat Memory Control Module,
ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the K40 Seat Memory Control Module.
If 1 V or greater
ignition ON.
2. Test for less that 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
NOTE: With the seat lumbar support switch disconnected, DTC B183B with
symptom byte 06 may already be set. However, the purpose of this test is
to verify DTC B183B will set with symptom byte 08 when the signal circuit
is shorted to voltage.
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 3 and the signal circuit
terminal 2.
7. Verify DTC B183B 08 is set.
If DTC B183B 08 is not set
Go to next step: If DTC B183B 08 is set
8. Test or replace the S65 Seat Lumbar Support Switch.
DTC B183C Seat Back Side Bolster Switch Circuit Test
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the seat back side bolster adjuster switch listed below.
• S66D Seat Back Side Bolster Adjuster Switch - Driver
• S66P Seat Back Side Bolster Adjuster Switch - Passenger
22 of 96
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 4.8 V
ignition ON.
If 1 V or greater
ignition ON.
2. Test for less that 1 V between the signal circuit and ground.
NOTE: With the seat back side bolster adjuster switch disconnected, DTC B183C
with symptom byte 06 may already be set. However, the purpose of this
test is to verify DTC B183C will set with symptom byte 08 when the signal
circuit is shorted to voltage.
6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the 5 V reference circuit terminal 3 and the signal circuit
terminal 2.
7. Verify DTC B183C 08 is set.
If DTC B183C 08 is not set
23 of 96
Go to next step: If DTC B183C 08 is set
8. Test or replace the S66 Seat Back Side Bolster Adjuster Switch.
Component Testing
Seat Lumbar Support Switch
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S65 Seat Lumbar Support Switch.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal terminal 2 and the ground terminal 1 with the switch in the
open position.
Replace the S65 Seat Lumbar Support Switch.

3. Test for 252 - 308 Ω between the signal terminal 2 and the 5 V reference terminal 3.

4. Test for 146 - 178 Ω between the signal terminal 2 and the ground terminal 1 while pressing the lumbar
rearward switch.

forward switch.

down switch.
24 of 96
7. Test for 3.02k - 3.7 kΩ between the signal terminal 2 and the ground terminal 1 while pressing the lumbar
up switch.
If not between 3.02k - 3.7 kΩ
Go to next step: If between 3.02k - 3.7 kΩ

8. All OK.
Seat Back Side Bolster Switch
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S66 Seat Back Side Bolster Adjuster Switch.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal terminal 2 and the ground terminal 1 with the switch in the
open position.

3. Test for 252 - 308 Ω between the signal terminal 2 and the 5 V reference terminal 3.

4. Test for 459 - 561 Ω between the signal terminal 2 and the ground terminal 1 while pressing the seat back
side bolster inflate switch.

5. Test for 1134 - 1386 Ω between the signal terminal 2 and the ground terminal 1 while pressing the seat
back side bolster deflate switch.

6. Test for 3.02k - 3.7 kΩ between the signal terminal 2 and the ground terminal 1 while pressing the
massage switch.

7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
25 of 96
• Control Module References for K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver or K40P Seat Memory
Control Module - Passenger replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B244A
DTC Descriptors
DTC B244A 39
Seat Adjuster Switch Internal Malfunction
The seat memory control module detects an internal fault with the seat adjuster switch. No external circuits are
involved.
Ignition ON.
The seat memory control module detects an internal fault with the seat adjuster switch.
The seat memory control module ignores all seat adjuster switch inputs.
• The DTC clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.

Schematic Reference

26 of 96
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
DTC B244A
1. Ignition ON.
If the DTC is set
Replace the appropriate S64 Seat Adjuster Switch.

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Front Seat Adjuster Switch Replacement
DTC B2755 OR B2765

DTC Descriptors
DTC B2755
Seat Memory Select Switch Circuit
DTC B2765
Seat Memory Set Switch Circuit
27 of 96

Memory Seat Switch Signal (1) B2755 02 1 B2755 01 B2755 59
Memory Seat Switch Set Signal B2765 59 1 - B2755 59
1. Memory recall is inoperative
Low reference is supplied to the seat memory switch from the seat memory control module. When a memory
switch is pressed, the signal circuit from the seat memory control module is pulled low through the switch
contacts and series of resistors indicating the memory recall request. In response to this signal, the seat memory
control module commands the appropriate seat motors to move to the pre-recorded seat positions stored in
memory.

B2755 01
If the seat memory control module detects a short to voltage on the memory seat switch signal circuit this DTC
will set.
B2755 02
If the seat memory control module detects a short to ground on the memory seat switch signal circuit this DTC
will set.
B2755 59
The seat memory control module detects a stuck Memory 1 or Memory 2 switch for a given amount of time.
B2765 59
If the memory set switch signal is active for greater than 15 s this DTC will set.

• All memory recall commands and are ignored.
Conditions for Clearing the DTCs
• The DTC automatically clears when the switch circuit setting the DTC is no longer active.
• A history DTC will clear once 50 consecutive fault-free ignition cycles have occurred.
28 of 96
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the appropriate scan tool Driver or Passenger Seat Memory Recall Switches parameter changes
between Inactive and Memory 1 when pressing the memory 1 switch.

between Inactive and Memory 2 when pressing the memory 2 switch.

between Inactive and Exit when pressing the Exit switch.
29 of 96
5. Verify the appropriate scan tool Driver or Passenger Seat Memory Set Switch parameter changes between
Inactive and Active when pressing the SET switch.

6. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate seat memory switch listed below,
ignition ON.
• S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver
• S47P Seat Memory Switch - Passenger
2. Press a power seat switch in order to wake up the K40 Seat Memory Control Module.
3. Test for 9 V or greater between each signal circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• Memory set switch signal terminal 5
• Memory switch signal terminal 6
If less than 9 V
4. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X6 harness connector at the K40 Seat Memory Control Module, ignition
ON.
5. Test for less than 1 V between each signal circuit terminal listed below and ground:
If 1 V or greater

6. Test or replace the S47 Seat Memory Switch.
Component Testing
Seat Memory Switch
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S47 Seat Memory Switch.
30 of 96
2. Test for infinite resistance between each signal terminal listed below and the low reference terminal 1
with the switch in the open position.
• Terminal 5
• Terminal 6
Replace the S47 Seat Memory Switch.

3. Test for less than 4 Ω between the signal terminal 5 and the low reference terminal 1 while pressing the
memory SET button.
If 4 Ω or greater

4. Test for 573 - 701 Ω between the signal terminal 6 and the low reference terminal 1 while pressing the
memory 1 button.

memory 2 button.

6. Test for 5.52k - 6.73 kΩ between the signal terminal 6 and the low reference terminal 1 while pressing the
Exit button.

7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Front Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement

Control Module - Passenger replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B3920
31 of 96
DTC Descriptors
DTC B3920
Seat Motors Group 1 Ground Circuit

Power Seat Front Vertical Motor B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 1 B3920 01
Down Control 0B
B3920 02 1 B3920 01
Up Control 0B
Power Seat Horizontal Motor B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 1 B3920 01
Forward Control 0B
B3920 02 1 B3920 01
Rearward Control 0B
Power Seat Rear Vertical Motor B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 1 B3920 01
Down Control 0B
B3920 02 1 B3920 01
Up Control 0B
Power Seat Recline Motor B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 1 B3920 01
Forward Control 0B
B3920 02 1 B3920 01
Rearward Control 0B
Power Seat Lumbar Motor B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 1 B3920 01
Forward Control 0B
Power Seat Lumbar Motor B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 1 B3920 01
Rearward Control 0B
1. All power seat and memory functions are inoperative
The seat memory control module controls the seat motors via half bridges that are connected to a power rail
internal to the module. The seat memory control module connects all of the motor control circuits on the power
rail to a common reference point whenever they are not in operation. The module monitors all seat motor
control circuits for a shorted to ground or voltage before enabling any seat motor.
When a power seat switch is pressed or when a memory recall is requested, each seat motor receives battery
voltage and ground from the seat memory control module via the motor control circuits. All motors are
reversible, so the direction the motor rotates depends on which control circuit voltage is applied and which
32 of 96
control circuit ground is applied. When the switch is operated in the opposite direction, the module reverses the
polarity and applies voltage and ground to the opposite circuits to move the seat in the opposite direction.

• Module battery voltage must be between 9 - 16 V.
B3920 00
Current out of the module does not match the current returning to the module from 1.5 - 5 A.
B3920 01
The voltage on any power rail 1 motor control circuit exceeds 2.78 V for 100 ms.
B3920 02
The voltage on any power rail 1 motor control circuit is below 1.47 V for 100 ms.
B3920 0B
The differential current measured through the high and low side of the power rail is within tolerance of each
other, but the absolute current or an over-current has exceeded the maximum value.
The seat memory control module will not allow operation of any motor on the power rail for which the DTC
was set.
• The current DTC clears when the fault is no longer present and the power mode changes to ignition OFF
then back to ignition ON.
Schematic Reference

33 of 96
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
B3920 01 or B3920 02
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the appropriate seat memory control module listed
below:
• K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver
• K40P Seat Memory Control Module - Passenger
2. Test for infinite resistance between each control circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• Seat front vertical motor up control terminal 3
• Seat front vertical motor down control terminal 4
• Seat rear vertical motor up control terminal 5
• Seat rear vertical motor down control terminal 6
• Seat horizontal motor forward control terminal 11
• Seat horizontal motor rearward control terminal 12
• Seat recline motor forward control terminal 1
• Seat recline motor rearward control terminal 2
• Seat lumbar motor forward control terminal 9
• Seat lumbar motor rearward control terminal 10

3. Ignition ON.
4. Test for less than 1 V between each control circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• Seat front vertical motor up control terminal 3
• Seat front vertical motor down control terminal 4
• Seat rear vertical motor up control terminal 5
• Seat rear vertical motor down control terminal 6
• Seat horizontal motor forward control terminal 11
• Seat horizontal motor rearward control terminal 12
• Seat recline motor forward control terminal 1
• Seat recline motor rearward control terminal 2
34 of 96
• Seat lumbar motor forward control terminal 9
• Seat lumbar motor rearward control terminal 10
If 1 V or greater

5. Replace the K40 Seat Memory Control Module.
B3920 00 or B3920 0B
1. Ignition ON.
2. Clear the current and history DTC.
3. Determine which motor set this DTC by operating each seat motor listed below one at a time in both
directions. Check for the DTC to set between each motor test.
• M50 Seat Front Vertical Motor
• M55 Seat Rear Vertical Motor
• M51 Seat Horizontal Motor
• M56 Seat Recline Motor
• M53 Seat Lumbar Motor
4. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the seat motor for which the DTC set, ignition ON.
5. Clear the DTC.
6. Verify that DTC B3920 00 or B3920 0B does not set while operating the seat motor adjuster switch in
both directions.
If DTC B3920 00 or B3920 0B sets
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminals.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the short between the circuits.
Go to next step: If DTC B3920 00 or B3920 0B does not set
7. Test or replace the seat motor.
Repair Instructions

Control Module - Passenger replacement, programming and setup
35 of 96
DTC B392B
DTC Descriptors
DTC B392B 00
Seat Lumbar/Bolster Pump

U1520 00,
B+ U1520 00 - -
U1528 00
Seat Bolster Memory Control
- U1520 00 - -
Module Ground
Seat Lumbar/Bolster Pump Control B392B 00 1 - -
Seat Lumbar/Bolster Pump Ground - 1 - -
1. The lumbar, bolster and massage functions are inoperative
When a seat lumbar, bolster, or massage function is commanded ON, the seat bolster memory control module
applies battery voltage and a low side drive pulse width modulated (PWM) signal through their respective
control circuits to the seat lumbar/bolster pump. The logic in the pump interprets this signal and pump runs to
inflate the lumbar/bolster bladders until the switch is released.
• Ignition ON.
• The voltage control circuit to the lumbar/bolster pump must be active.
The seat bolster memory control module detects a short to ground on the lumbar/bolster pump voltage control
circuit.
All lumbar, bolster, and massage functions are inoperative.

36 of 96
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF, all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate seat
lumbar/bolster pump listed below:
• G31D Seat Lumbar/Bolster Pump - Driver
• G31P Seat Lumbar/Bolster Pump - Passenger
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K134 Seat Bolster Memory Control Module.
3. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and ground, ignition ON.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON after pressing and holding the lumbar forward switch.
If the test lamp remains OFF
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K134 Seat Bolster
Memory Control Module.
37 of 96
5. Test or replace the G31 Seat Lumbar/Bolster Pump.
Repair Instructions
• Front Seat Back Lumbar Replacement

• Control Module References for K134D Seat Bolster Memory Control Module - Driver or K134P Seat
Bolster Memory Control Module - Passenger replacement, programming and setup
DTC B392C
DTC Descriptors
DTC B392C 39
Seat Bolster Memory Control Module Internal Malfunction
The seat memory control module detects an internal electronic fault in the seat bolster memory control module.
No external circuits are involved.
Ignition ON.
The control module detects an internal fault.
An internal electronic fault in the seat bolster memory control module will set this DTC.
All lumbar/bolster functions will be inoperative.
38 of 96
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
DTC B392C
1. Ignition ON.
If the DTC is set
Replace the appropriate K134 Seat Bolster Memory Control Module.

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for K134D Seat Bolster Memory Control Module - Driver or K134P Seat Bolster
Memory Control Module - Passenger replacement, programming and setup
SYMPTOMS - POWER SEATS
39 of 96
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle
• Verify that no DTCs are set.
2. Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis
3. Review the system description and operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions.
• Lumbar Support Description and Operation (With Memory Seat A45), or Lumbar Support
Description and Operation (Without Memory Seat A45)
• Memory Seats Description and Operation
• Power Seats System Description and Operation (Passenger With Seat Bolster Memory
Control Module), or Power Seats System Description and Operation (Driver Without
Memory or Passenger Without Seat Bolster Memory Control Module)
cause the symptom.
• Verify a condition does not exist with the component: power seat
blockage by debris
clutter
interference with other components - Wiring Harnesses
Intermittent
Symptom List
Refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure listed below:
• Lumbar/Bolster/Massage Malfunction (AF6 or AKE), or Lumbar/Bolster/Massage Malfunction

(AL9 without A45 or AT9), or Lumbar/Bolster/Massage Malfunction (AL9 with A45)
• Memory Seat Feature Malfunction
• Power Seat Malfunction (Driver with A45 without AF6), or Power Seat Malfunction (Driver
without Memory A45 or Passenger without A7K), or Power Seat Malfunction (Driver with AF6 or
Passenger with AKE)
LUMBAR/BOLSTER/MASSAGE MALFUNCTION (AF6 OR AKE)

40 of 96
U1520 00,
B+ U1520 00 - -
U1528 00
Linear Interconnect Network U1520 00 U1520 00 U1520 00 -
Seat Lumbar/Bolster Pump Supply
1 1 - -
Voltage Control
Seat Lumbar/Bolster Pump Ground
1 1 1 -
Control
Ground - U1520 00 - -
1. The lumbar, bolster, and massage functions are inoperative
Ground is supplied to the driver and passenger seat lumbar support and the seat back side bolster switches, each
switch is also supplied with a B+. When a switch is pressed, the output of switch is LIN serial data message
indicating the lumbar, bolster, or massage request. In response to this signal, the seat memory control module
sends a LIN serial data message to the seat massage valve assembly commanding it to perform the required
pneumatic movements.
The seat massage valve assembly contains the electronic circuitry for executing the commanded pneumatic seat
adjustments, air direction solenoids, pressure sensors for storing air bladder pressures, and outputs which
supplies battery power and a low side drive pulse width modulated (PWM) signal to the external seat air pump
motor when any of the air bladders require inflating.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
41 of 96
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the appropriate scan tool Driver or Passenger Lumbar Support Horizontal Switch parameter
changes between Inactive and Forward/Rearward when pressing the lumbar horizontal switch in the
Forward and Rearward directions.
If the parameter does not change in either direction
Test or replace the S64 Seat Adjuster Switch.
Go to next step: If the parameter changes for both directions

3. Verify the scan tool Lumbar Support Vertical Switch parameter changes between Inactive and Up/Down
when pressing the lumbar vertical switch in the Up and Down directions.

4. Verify the scan tool Seat Back Side Bolster Switch parameter changes between Inactive and
Inflate/Deflate when pressing the bolster switch in both directions.

5. Verify the scan tool Seat Massage Switch parameter changes between Inactive and Active when pressing
the seat massage switch.

1. Ignition OFF, all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate seat bolster
memory control module listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
• K134D Seat Bolster Memory Control Module - Driver
• K134P Seat Bolster Memory Control Module - Passenger
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
42 of 96
3. Ignition ON.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the K134 Seat Bolster Memory Control Module and
disconnect the harness connector at the G31 Seat Lumbar/Bolster Pump.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Disconnect the harness connector at the K134 Seat Bolster Memory Control Module.
8. Verify the test lamp turns ON when pressing the lumbar forward switch.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the teat lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K134 Seat Bolster
Memory Control Module.
If the test lamp remains ON
1. Ignition OFF, remove the teat lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K134 Seat Bolster
Memory Control Module, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the K134 Seat Bolster Memory Control Module.
9. Test or replace the G31 Seat Lumbar/Bolster Pump.
Repair Instructions
43 of 96
LUMBAR/BOLSTER/MASSAGE MALFUNCTION (AL9 WITHOUT A45 OR AT9)


B+ 1 1 - -
Power Seat Lumbar Motor
1 2 - -
Forward Control
Power Seat Lumbar Motor
1 2 - -
Rearward Control
Ground - 1 - -
1. The power seat and the lumbar support functions are inoperative
2. The lumbar support is inoperative
Battery voltage is supplied at all times to the seat adjuster switch through a 30 A fuse located in the underhood
fuse block. When a lumbar switch is pressed to move the lumbar support forward, battery voltage is applied
through the switch contacts and the forward control circuit to the seat lumbar support motor. In response to this
signal, the motor assembly energizes moving the lumbar support forward, until the switch is released. When the
switch is pressed to move the lumbar support rearward, battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts
and the rearward signal circuit to the seat lumbar support motor. The motor assembly energizes moving the
lumbar support rearward, until the switch is released.
Schematic Reference

44 of 96
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the seat lumbar operates in both directions - Forward/Rearward.
If either seat lumbar function does not operate
Go to next step: If both seat lumbar functions operate

3. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate seat
lumbar support switch listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
• S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver
• S64P Seat Adjuster Switch - Passenger
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.
• {S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver} Terminal X1 9
• {S64P Seat Adjuster Switch - Passenger} Terminal X1 6
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the appropriate B+ circuit terminal listed below and ground.
1. Ignition OFF.
45 of 96
If less than 2 Ω, verify the circuit fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the S64 Seat Adjuster Switch and disconnect the harness
connector at the appropriate M53 Seat Lumbar Support Motor.
6. Connect a test lamp between control circuit terminal A and control circuit terminal B, ignition ON.
7. Verify the test lamp turns ON when pressing the lumbar switch in the Forward and Rearward directions.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the S64 Seat Adjuster
Switch.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the S64 Seat Adjuster Switch.
8. Test or replace the M53 Seat Lumbar Support Motor.
Repair Instructions

LUMBAR/BOLSTER/MASSAGE MALFUNCTION (AL9 WITH A45)


B1735 02 or 59,
B1740 02 or 59,
B1745 02 or 59,
B1750 02 or 59,
Driver Seat Lumbar Forward
B1755 02 or 59, 1 - -
Switch Signal
B1760 02 or 59,
B1815 02 or 59,
B1820 02 or 59,
B1830 02 or 59,
46 of 96
B1835 02 or 59
B1735 02 or 59,
B1740 02 or 59,
B1745 02 or 59,
B1750 02 or 59,
Driver Seat Lumbar Rearward B1755 02 or 59,
1 - -
Switch Signal B1760 02 or 59,
B1815 02 or 59,
B1820 02 or 59,
B1830 02 or 59,
B1835 02 or 59
Driver power Seat Lumbar
B3920 02 1 B3920 01 -
Motor Forward Control
Driver Power Seat Lumbar
B3920 02 1 B3920 01 -
Motor Rearward Control
1. The seat lumbar support is inoperative
The lumbar support horizontal motor is reversible. For example, when the lumbar switch is operated to move
the lumbar support forward, the switch signal circuit from the seat memory control module is pulled low
indicating the lumbar forward command. In response to this signal, the seat memory control module applies
battery voltage through the lumbar motor forward control circuit and ground through the lumbar motor rearward
control circuit to the motor. The motor runs to drive the lumbar support forward towards the occupants back
until the switch is released. Moving the lumbar support rearward works similarly to moving the lumbar support
forward, except that battery positive voltage and ground are applied on the opposite circuits causing the motor
to run in the opposite direction.
Schematic Reference
Lumbar Support Description and Operation (With Memory Seat A45)
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
47 of 96
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that all power seat functions operate when being controlled by the S64D Seat Adjuster Switch -
Driver.
If any power seat function does not operate
Refer to Power Seat Malfunction (Driver with A45 without AF6), or Power Seat Malfunction
(Driver without Memory A45 or Passenger without A7K), or Power Seat Malfunction (Driver
with AF6 or Passenger with AKE).
Go to next step: If all power seat functions operate

3. Verify the scan tool Driver Seat Lumbar Horizontal Switch parameter changes between Inactive and
Forward/Rearward when pressing the lumbar switch in both directions.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Lumbar Support Switch Circuit Test.

4. Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Lumbar Horizontal Motor Circuit Test.
Lumbar Support Switch Circuit Test
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver.
2. Verify the scan tool Driver Seat Lumbar Horizontal Switch parameter is Inactive:
If not Inactive
Driver.
2. Test for Infinite resistance between the appropriate signal circuit terminal listed below and ground.
• Lumbar forward switch signal terminal 2
• Lumbar rearward switch signal terminal 6
If infinite resistance, replace the K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver.
3. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between each signal circuit terminal listed below and ground, one at a
time.
• Lumbar forward switch signal terminal 2
• Lumbar rearward switch signal terminal 6
4. Verify the scan tool Driver Seat Lumbar Horizontal Switch parameter is Froward or Rearward.
If not Froward or Rearward
48 of 96
Go to next step: If Froward or Rearward
Lumbar Horizontal Motor Circuit Test
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the M53D Seat Lumbar Support Motor - Driver.
2. Connect a test lamp between control circuit terminal A and control circuit terminal B, ignition ON.
NOTE: Once the lumbar motor is commanded On using the scan tool, the lumbar
function may not work using the seat adjuster switch until you back out of
the scan tool Control Functions menu.
3. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the Driver Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Movement
Forward and Rearward states with a scan tool.
Driver.
4. Test or replace the M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver.
Component Testing
Lumbar Support Switch
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 and X2 harness connector at the S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ground terminal 5 X1 and each lumbar signal terminal with the
switch in the open position.
49 of 96
3. Test for less than 2 Ω between the ground terminal 5 X1 and each lumbar signal terminal with the
appropriate switch in the closed position.
If 2 Ω or greater

4. All OK.
Lumbar Horizontal Motor
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor -
Driver.
NOTE: When performing the following tests, make sure that the lumbar support is
not already in the position the test is attempting to produce.
2. Install a 30 A fused jumper wire between control terminal A and 12 V.

3. Momentarily install a jumper wire between control terminal B and ground. The lumbar motor should
momentarily perform the appropriate FORWARD/ REARWARD function.
If the motor does not perform the FORWARD/ REARWARD function
Replace the M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Driver.
Go to next step: If the motor performs the FORWARD/ REARWARD function

4. Reverse the jumper wires; the motor should perform FORWARD/ REARWARD function.
If the motor does not perform the FORWARD/ REARWARD function
Replace the M52D Seat Lumbar Support Horizontal Motor - Drive.
Go to next step: If the motor performs the FORWARD/ REARWARD function

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions

MEMORY SEAT FEATURE MALFUNCTION

50 of 96

Memory Seat Switch Signal (1) B2755 02 1 B2755 01 B2755 59
Memory Seat Switch Set Signal B2765 59 1 - B2755 59
1. Memory seat feature is inoperative
Low reference is supplied to the seat memory switch from the seat memory control module. When a memory
switch is pressed, the signal circuit from the seat memory control module is pulled low through the switch
contacts and series of resistors indicating the memory recall request. In response to this signal, the seat memory
control module commands the appropriate seat motors to move to the pre-recorded seat positions stored in
memory.
Diagnostic Aids
• The seat memory control module must be awake when measuring voltage from either one of the memory
seat switch signal circuits. Voltage readings of 0.0 V or 5.0 V are possible if the module is not fully
awake and result in misdiagnosing the circuit.
• When using remote keyless entry for vehicle access, the driver seat memory functions will operate only
with transmitters 1 and 2. Transmitters 3 - 8 cannot be programmed for memory seat functions.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
51 of 96
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that all manual power seat functions operate when being controlled by the power seat adjuster
switches.
If any manual power seat function does not operate
Refer to Power Seat Malfunction (Driver with A45 without AF6), or Power Seat Malfunction
(Driver without Memory A45 or Passenger without A7K), or Power Seat Malfunction (Driver
with AF6 or Passenger with AKE)
Go to next step: If all manual power seat functions operate

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate seat memory switch listed below:
• S47D Seat Memory Switch - Driver
• S47P Seat Memory Switch - Passenger
If 30 Ω or greater
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end
3. Ignition ON, press a power seat switch in order to wake up the K40 Seat Memory Control Module.
4. Test for 9 V or greater between each signal circuit terminal listed below and ground:
If less than 9 V
ON.
6. Test for less than 1 V between each signal circuit terminal listed below and ground:
52 of 96
If 1 V or greater

7. Test or replace the S47 Seat Memory Switch.
Component Testing
Seat Memory Switch
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S47 Seat Memory Switch.
2. Test for infinite resistance between each signal terminal listed below and the low reference terminal 1
• Terminal 5
• Terminal 6

3. Test for less than 4 Ω between the signal terminal 5 and the low reference terminal 1 while pressing the
memory SET button.
If 4 Ω or greater

memory 1 button.

memory 2 button.

6. Test for 5.52k - 6.73 kΩ between the signal terminal 6 and the low reference terminal 1 while pressing the
Exit button.
53 of 96
7. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Front Seat Adjuster Memory Switch Replacement

POWER SEAT MALFUNCTION (DRIVER WITH A45 WITHOUT AF6)

Short to Open/High Signal

Circuit Ground Resistance Short to Voltage Performance
U0208 00 U0208 00 - -
B+ Terminal 1 X1
1 1 - -
B+ Terminal 2 X1
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
Driver Front Vertical Up B1750 59,
2 - -
Switch Signal B1755 59,
B1760 59,
B1815 59,
B1820 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
Driver Front Vertical Down B1750 59,
2 - -
B1760 59,
B1815 59,
B1820 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
Driver Rear Vertical Up Switch B1750 59, 4 - -
Signal B1755 59,
B1760 59,
B1815 59,
54 of 96
B1820 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
Driver Rear Vertical Down B1750 59,
4 - -
B1760 59,
B1815 59,
B1820 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
Driver Horizontal Forward B1750 59,
3 - -
B1760 59,
B1815 59,
B1820 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
Driver Horizontal Rearward B1750 59,
3 - -
B1760 59,
B1815 59,
B1820 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
Driver Recline Forward Switch B1750 59,
5 - -
Signal B1755 59,
B1760 59,
B1815 59,
B1820 59
B1735 59,
B1740 59,
B1745 59,
Driver Recline Rearward B1750 59,
5 - -
B1760 59,
B1815 59,
B1820 59
Driver Seat Front Vertical B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 2 B3920 01
Motor Down Control 0B
Driver Seat Front Vertical B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 2 B3920 01
Motor Up Control 0B
Driver Seat Horizontal Motor B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 3 B3920 01
Forward Control 0B
55 of 96
Driver Seat Horizontal Motor B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 3 B3920 01
Rearward Control 0B
Driver Seat Rear Vertical B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 4 B3920 01
Motor Down Control 0B
Driver Seat Rear Vertical B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 4 B3920 01
Motor Up Control 0B
Driver Seat Recline Motor B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 5 B3920 01
Forward Control 0B
Driver Seat Recline Motor B3920 00, B3920
B3920 02 5 B3920 01
Rearward Control 0B
Ground - U0208 00 - -
1. All power seat motors are inoperative
5. The seat recline motor is inoperative
Battery voltage is supplied at all times to the seat memory control module through a 5 A fuse located in the
underhood fuse block. This voltage is used by the module for logic power. Battery positive voltage is also
supplied at all times to the seat memory control module through a 30 A fuse also located in the underhood fuse
block. This voltage is connected to a power rail internal to the seat memory control module and is used to drive
all driver power seat motors. Each seat motor is controlled by the seat memory control module by applying
power and ground through the control circuits to the motor.
All motors are reversible. For example, when the seat switch is operated to move the entire seat forward, the
switch signal circuit from the seat memory control module is pulled low indicating the entire seat forward
command. In response to this signal, the seat memory control module applies battery voltage through the driver
seat horizontal motor forward control circuit and ground through the driver seat horizontal motor rearward
control circuit to the motor. The motor runs to drive the entire seat forward until the switch is released. Moving
the entire seat rearward works similarly to moving the entire seat forward, except that battery positive voltage
and ground are applied on the opposite circuits causing the motor to run in the opposite direction. All driver
power seat motors are powered this way.
Schematic Reference
56 of 96
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool seat switch parameters listed below change between Inactive and Forward/Rearward
or Up/Down when pressing the appropriate switch.
If any parameter does not change
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Seat Adjuster Switch Circuit Test
Go to next step: If all parameters change

3. Verify the seat directional motors listed below operate when pressing the appropriate seat switches in both
directions.
If any seat motor does not operate
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Seat Motor Control Circuit Test.
Go to next step: If all seat motors operate

4. All OK.
Seat Adjuster Switch Circuit Test
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S64D Seat Adjuster
Switch - Driver. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal 5 X1 and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
57 of 96
1. Ignition Off.
3. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the ground circuit terminal 5 X1 and the appropriate signal
circuit terminal listed below, ignition ON.
4. Verify the appropriate scan tool seat switch parameter is Forward/Rearward or UP/Down.
If not Forward/Rearward or UP/Down
3. Ignition OFF.
Go to next step: If Forward/Rearward or UP/Down
Seat Motor Control Circuit Test
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver,
ignition ON.
58 of 96
If the test lamp does not illuminate.
If less than infinite resistance, repair the shot to ground on the circuit.
Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the X1 and X2 harness connectors at the K40D Seat Memory Control Module -
Driver and disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate seat motor listed below:
NOTE: Once a seat motor is commanded On using the scan tool, the seat function
may not work using the seat adjuster switch until you back out of the scan
tool Control Functions menu.
7. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the seat motor in the Up/Down or Forward/Rearward
states with a scan tool.
Driver.
Component Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the ground terminal 5 X1 and each signal terminal with the switch in
the open position.
59 of 96

3. Test for less than 2 Ω between the ground terminal 5 X1 and each signal terminal with the appropriate
switch in the closed position.
If 2 Ω or greater

4. All OK.
Seat Motor
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate seat motor listed below:
NOTE: When performing the following tests, make sure that the seat is not
already in the position the test is attempting to produce.
2. Install a 30 A fused jumper wire between control terminal 1 and 12 V.

3. Momentarily install a jumper wire between control terminal 3 and ground. The seat motor should
momentarily perform the appropriate FORWARD/ REARWARD/ UP/ DOWN function.
If the motor does not perform the FORWARD/ REARWARD/ UP/ DOWN function
Replace the seat motor.
Go to next step: If the motor performs the FORWARD/ REARWARD/ UP/ DOWN function
4. Reverse the jumper wires; the motor should perform FORWARD/ REARWARD/ UP/ DOWN function.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions

60 of 96
POWER SEAT MALFUNCTION (DRIVER WITHOUT MEMORY A45 OR PASSENGER WITHOUT

A7K)

B+ 1 1 - -
Power Seat Front Vertical Motor
1 2 6 -
Down Control
Power Seat Front Vertical Motor
1 2 6 -
Up Control
Power Seat Horizontal Motor
1 3 6 -
Forward Control
Power Seat Horizontal Motor
1 3 6 -
Rearward Control
Power Seat Rear Vertical Motor
1 4 6 -
Down Control
Power Seat Rear Vertical Motor
1 4 6 -
Up Control
Power Seat Recline Motor
1 5 6 -
Forward Control
Power Seat Recline Motor
1 5 6 -
Rearward Control
Ground - 1 - -
1. All power seat motors are inoperative
5. The seat recline motor is inoperative
6. The seat motor operates until maximum travel is reached
The driver and passenger power seats are completely controlled through the seat adjuster switch. Battery
voltage is supplied at all times to the seat adjuster switch through a 30 A fuse located in the underhood fuse
block. When the seat switches are in an inactive state, the switch contacts are closed to the switch ground
circuit.
All seat motors are reversible. For example, when the seat horizontal forward switch is pressed to move the
entire seat forward, battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts and the seat horizontal motor
61 of 96
rearward control circuit to the motor. With the horizontal motor rearward switch contacts closed to the switch
ground circuit, the motor runs in order to drive the entire seat forward until the switch is released. Moving the
entire seat rearward works similarly to moving the entire seat forward, except that battery positive voltage and
ground are applied on opposite circuits causing the motor to run in the opposite direction. All seat motors are
powered this way.
Schematic Reference

Power Seats System Description and Operation (Passenger With Seat Bolster Memory Control Module),
or Power Seats System Description and Operation (Driver Without Memory or Passenger Without Seat
Bolster Memory Control Module)
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
1. Verify the appropriate driver or passenger seat directional motors listed below operate while operating the
seat switches in both directions.
If all seat motors do not operate
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Seat Adjuster Switch Circuit Test.
If 1 or more seat motors operate
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Seat Motor Circuit Test.

2. All OK.
62 of 96
Seat Adjuster Switch Circuit Test
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate seat adjuster switch listed below:
• S64D Seat Adjuster Switch - Driver
• S64P Seat Adjuster Switch - Passenger
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the appropriate ground circuit terminal listed below and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the appropriate B+ circuit terminal listed below and ground.
1. Ignition OFF
If less than 2 Ω, verify the circuit fuse is OK and there is voltage at the fuse.
5. Test or replace the S64 Seat Adjuster Switch.
Seat Motor Circuit Test
2. Ignition on.
If 1 V or greater, repair short to voltage in the control circuit.
Go to next step: If less than 1 V.
63 of 96
5. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the seat motor Up and Down or Forward and Rearward
using the seat adjuster switch.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S64 Seat Adjuster Switch.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the S64 Seat Adjuster Switch.
Component Testing
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S64 Seat Adjuster Switch.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the appropriate B+ terminal listed below and each control terminal
Replace the S64 Seat Adjuster Switch.

3. Test for less than 2 Ω between the appropriate B+ terminal listed below and each control terminal with
the appropriate switch in the closed position.
If 2 Ω or greater

4. Test for less than 2 Ω between the appropriate ground terminal listed below and each control terminal
If 2 Ω or greater
64 of 96
5. All OK.
Seat Motor

Replace the motor.
Replace the motor.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions

POWER SEAT MALFUNCTION (DRIVER WITH AF6 OR PASSENGER WITH AKE)

Circuit Short to Open/High Short to Signal
65 of 96
Seat Memory Control Module B+
U0208 00, 1 U0208 00, 1 - -
Terminal 1 X1
Seat Memory Control Module B+
1 1 - -
Terminal 2 X2
U1502 00, U1502 00,
Linear Interconnect Network Bus
U1520 00, U1520 00 U1520 00, -
13
U1528 00 U1528 00
B3920 02 2 B3920 01
Down Control 0B
B3920 02 2 B3920 01
Up Control 0B
B3920 02 3 B3920 01
Forward Control 0B
B3920 02 3 B3920 01
Rearward Control 0B
B3920 02 4 B3920 01
Down Control 0B
B3920 02 4 B3920 01
Up Control 0B
B3920 02 5 B3920 01
Forward Control 0B
B3920 02 5 B3920 01
Rearward Control 0B
Ground - U0208 00, 1 - -
1. All power seat and memory functions are inoperative
5. The seat back recline motor is inoperative
Battery voltage is supplied at all times to the seat memory control module through a 10 A fuse located in the
underhood fuse block. This voltage is used by the module for logic power. Battery positive voltage is also
supplied at all times to the seat memory control module through a 30 A fuse located in the underhood fuse
block. This voltage is connected to a power rail internal to the seat memory control module and is used to drive
the power seat motors. Each seat motor is controlled by the seat memory control module by applying power and
ground through the control circuits to the motor.
All motors are reversible. For example, when the seat switch is operated to move the entire seat forward, a serial
data message is sent from the seat adjuster switch to the seat memory control module indicating the entire seat
forward command. In response to this message, the seat memory control module applies battery voltage through
the driver seat horizontal motor forward control circuit and ground through the driver seat horizontal motor
rearward control circuit to the motor. The motor runs to drive the entire seat forward until the switch is released.
Moving the entire seat rearward works similarly to moving the entire seat forward, except that battery positive
voltage and ground are applied on the opposite circuits causing the motor to run in the opposite direction.
66 of 96
Schematic Reference

• Power Seats System Description and Operation (Passenger With Seat Bolster Memory Control
Module), or Power Seats System Description and Operation (Driver Without Memory or Passenger
Without Seat Bolster Memory Control Module)
• Memory Seats Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
If any DTC is set

3. Verify the appropriate scan tool Driver or Passenger seat switch parameters listed below change between
Inactive and Forward/Rearward or Up/Down when pressing the appropriate switch.
• Seat Horizontal Switch
• Seat Cushion Front Vertical Switch
• Seat Cushion Rear Vertical Switch
• Seat Back Switch

4. Verify the seat directional motors listed below operate while operating the appropriate seat switches in
67 of 96
both directions.
If any seat motor does not operate

5. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the appropriate seat memory control module listed
below:
• K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver
• K40P Seat Memory Control Module - Passenger
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
ON.
If the test lamp does not illuminate.
1. Ignition OFF.
Go to next step: If the test lamp illuminates.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the X1 harness connector at the K40 Seat Memory Control Module and disconnect
the harness connector at the appropriate seat motor listed below:
NOTE: Once a seat motor is commanded On using the scan tool, the seat function
68 of 96
may not work using the seat adjuster switch until you back out of the scan
tool Control Functions menu.
7. Verify the test lamp turns ON when commanding the seat motor in the Up/Down or Forward/Rearward
states with a scan tool.
Component Testing
Seat Motor
• M50P Seat Front Vertical Motor - Passenger
• M55P Seat Rear Vertical Motor - Passenger
• M51P Seat Horizontal Motor - Passenger
• M56P Seat Recline Motor - Passenger

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
69 of 96

REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
WIRE TO WIRE REPAIR - SEATS
Special Tools
• J-38125-8 GMNA Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool

• EL-38125-10 Except GMNA Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
• EL-38125-5A Ultra Torch Special Tool
• DuraSeal splice sleeves
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools .
WARNING: In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, loss of high voltage isolation to
ground and higher system impedance, do not attempt to repair any HV wiring,
connector, or terminal that is damaged. High voltage coaxial type cables are not
repairable. Never attempt to repair a coaxial type cable. The entire
cable/harness or component must be replaced. In order to maintain system
integrity and personal safety, never attempt to repair any high voltage wiring,
cables, or terminals. Performing this procedure on high voltage circuits may
result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: If the wiring harness internal to the transmission is damaged, the wiring
harness must be replaced. The use of splice sleeves in an attempt to repair the
internal transmission wires, connectors, or terminals could result in
performance issues.
NOTE: Do not splice wires in Door Harness Grommets.
NOTE: • Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the
splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
• When performing wire-to-wire repairs with wires of different sizes
(Example: installation of Terminated Leads or Pigtails), refer to the Folded-
Over Wire Selection Table Refer to: Folded-Over Wire Repair
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except high voltage and
specialty cables. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there are special requirements such as moisture sealing.
Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
70 of 96
Crimp Tool Nest Color Wire Gauge mm2 /
Splice Sleeve Color 3 Crimp Nests 4 Crimp Nests (AWG)
Salmon (Yellow-Pink)
Red (1) or Red/Green (1) Red (2) 0.13-0.35 /(22 - 26) *
19300089
Red (1) or Red/Green (1) Red (2) 0.5 - 0.8/(18 - 20)
19300089
Blue
Blue (2) Blue (3) 1.0 - 2.6/(14 - 16)
19300090
Yellow
Yellow (3) Yellow (4) 3.0 - 5.0/(10 - 12)
19300091
* Refer to: Folded-Over Wire Repair
NOTE: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the
procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip
with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:

• Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in
order to avoid wire insulation damage.
• Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except Tefzel and coaxial.
• Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the
location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness
branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:

• When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
• Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and
work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
• Strip approximately 5.0 mm (0.20 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
• Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
• If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. For high temperature wiring 150Â°C (302Â°F) continuous or 175Â°C (347Â°F) excursion, use high
temperature heat shrink tube (Raychem SCT1) over the DuraSeal splice area. Refer to High Temperature
Wiring Repairs below.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table above, at the
beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool
nests.
6.
71 of 96
Non GMNA Crimping Tool EL-38125-10 Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool has four crimp nests. The largest
crimp nest (4) is used for crimping 5.0 and 3.0 mm2 (10 and 12 gauge) wires. The second largest crimp
nest (3) is used for crimping 2.0 and 1.0 mm2 (14 and 16 gauge) wires. The third largest crimp nest (2) is
used for crimping 0.75 and 0.50 mm2 (18 and 20 gauge) wires. The smallest crimp nest (1) is used for
crimping 0.35 and 0.13 mm2 (22 to 26 gauge) wires. The crimp nests are referenced in the table (farther
above) under the crimp tool nest color.
7.
GMNA crimping tool J-38125-8 splice sleeve crimping tool has three crimp nests. The largest crimp nest
(3) is used for crimping 5.0 and 3.0 mm2 (10 and 12 gauge). The second largest crimp nest (2) is used for
crimping 2.0 and 1.0 mm2 (14 and 16 gauge) wires. The smallest crimp nest (1) is used for crimping 0.75
72 of 96
and 0.50 mm2 (18 and 20 gauge) wires. The crimp nests are referenced in the table (farther above) under
the crimp tool nest color.
8. Use the splice sleeve crimp tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of
the splice sleeve crimp tool. For the four crimp nest tool, use the three largest crimp nests to crimp the
splice sleeves. For the three crimp nest tool, use all three crimp nests to crimp the splice sleeves. Use the
four and three crimp tool diagrams (above) and the table (farther above) to match the splice sleeve with
the correct crimp nest. The crimp tool diagram call out numbers match the numbers in the table (under
crimp tool nest color).
9.
Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the
barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1)
from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice
sleeve in the proper nest.
10.
73 of 96
Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Refer to Folded-Over Wire
Repair for splicing wires 0.35 and 0.13 mm2 (22 to 26 gauge) wires and for splicing wires of different
gauges.
11. Tightly close the handles of the crimp tool until the crimper handles open when released.
The crimper handles will not open until you apply the proper amount of pressure to the DuraSeal splice
sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 6 for the opposite end of the splice.
12.
74 of 96
Using the EL-38125-5A Ultra Torch Special Tool, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
13. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
• The tubing will shrink completely as the heat is moved along the insulation.
• A small amount of sealant will come out of the end of the tubing when sufficient shrinkage is
achieved.
Weatherpack™ Wiring Repair
NOTE: Some replacement pigtail connectors may be delivered without the terminated
leads installed into the connector. For Weatherpack™ connectors, all
terminated leads included in the package should to be installed into the
connector. If the connector end view shows that a terminal is not occupied, the
extra terminated lead(s) need to be installed and the end(s) sealed using a
DuraSeal splice sleeve and taped back into the harness.
1. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Refer to Folded-Over Wire
gauges.
75 of 96
sleeve. Holding the DuraSEAL with one hand gently tug on the wire to ensure it is crimped in the
DuraSeal.
3. Using the EL-38125-5A Ultra Torch Special Tool, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
4.
Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
76 of 96
achieved.
5.
Tape the excess terminated lead(s) back into the harness. The tape should cover the harness by 25 mm (1
Inch). Use care to make sure the taping does not cause strain on the wiring and terminals, Improper taping
can cause wire and terminal fretting.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Use the following procedures to perform high temperature wiring repairs:
NOTE: All wiring repairs need to be 200 mm from the heat zone. Areas of consideration
would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter,
exhaust pipes, and turbocharged engines.
Items Required
• DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections

• High temperature heat shrink tubing (Raychen SCT1) to protect the splice sleeves
• Terminated leads or pigtails
• The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
NOTE: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150Â°C (302Â°F) continuous
temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair
damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair.
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures 150Â°C (302Â°F) continuous or 175Â°C (347Â°F) excursion for
prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating
77 of 96
than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
Wire to Wire Repair Incl High Temp
• Use GM approved high temperature bulk wire rated at 150Â°C (302Â°F) continuous temperature to
replace any damaged wire.
• Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
• Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with high temperature heat shrink tubing (Raychen SCT1).
• After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source.
CONNECTOR RECONNECTION - SEATS
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An
intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated.
Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an
intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following
items:
• Loose, corroded, or painted terminal stud/fastener

• Wiring broken inside the insulation
• Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
• A terminal not seated all the way into the connector body
• Poor terminal to wire connection - Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps,
poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire
to terminal contact area, etc.
• Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor
can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire
in the suspect circuits.
• Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or
short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
• Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
• Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order
to verify the customer concern.
• Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high
resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions.
• Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder
operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
78 of 96
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up
of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The
oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the
connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause
fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and
hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since
vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin,
copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to
see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add dielectric grease / lubricant (Nyogel
760G or equivalent, meeting GM specification 12345579) to both sides of the connector terminals. Then
reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact
resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect
component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between
the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged
connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause
contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion,
causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always
use the EL-35616 kit when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining
the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the
female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in
a bussed electrical center. Use the EL-35616 kit to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use the EL-35616
kit can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
Follow the procedure below in order to test terminal contact:
1. Separate the connector halves.

2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green
build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance,
intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of
contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal/terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different
between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire connectors on the harness side or the component side.
79 of 96
1. Remove the component in question.

2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the
connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to
ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter into the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
• Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to
a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may
also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any
intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM
may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current.
Operate the component to test the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing
, and Power Distribution Wiring Schematics .
• Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground
circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested.
Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point (screw or stud). Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Operate the component to test the
ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing , and Ground Distribution
Wiring Schematics .
Temperature Sensitivity
• An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating

temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the
component/connection is hot.
• Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of
intermittent condition, where applicable.
• If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
High ambient temperatures
Underhood/engine generated heat
Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
• If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
Low ambient temperatures - In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
The condition only occurs on a cold start.
The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
• Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature
80 of 96
related.
• If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition.
Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical
noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
• A mis-routed harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition
components, motors, generator etc. - These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could
interfere with normal circuit operation.
• Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or
switch - These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the
malfunctioning component is operating.
• Installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers,
electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc. - These accessories may create
interference in other circuits while operating and the interference would disappear when the accessory is
not operating. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may
contain a clamping diode.
• The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
• There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
A new service control module is installed.
A control module from another vehicle is installed.
Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
NOTE: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME

software/calibration files that are already present in the control module.
This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
• Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is
found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References for replacement, setup, and programming.
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTER SWITCH REPLACEMENT
81 of 96
Procedure
Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover Replacement
1 Front Seat Recliner Knob
2 Front Seat Adjuster Knob
3 Front Seat Adjuster Knob - Rotary
4 Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover Retainer
5 Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Switch
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTER MEMORY SWITCH REPLACEMENT

Front Seat Adjuster Memory Switch
1 Procedure
1. Use a plastic trim tool to release the switch from the door trim.
82 of 96
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTER MEMORY MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Front Seat Adjuster Memory Module Bracket Fastener [3x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Adjuster Memory Module Bracket
Procedure
2
DRIVER SEAT ADJUSTER MEMORY MODULE REPLACEMENT
83 of 96
Front Seat - Reposition - Front Seat Removal and Installation
Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Module Fastener [3x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Driver Seat Adjuster Memory Module
Procedure
References
PASSENGER SEAT ADJUSTER MEMORY MODULE REPLACEMENT
84 of 96
Front Seat - Reposition - Front Seat Removal and Installation
Passenger Seat Adjuster Memory Module Fastener [3x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Passenger Seat Adjuster Memory Module
Procedure
References
FRONT SEAT TILT ADJUSTER ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT
85 of 96
1. Front Seat Removal and Installation

2. Front Seat Cushion Front Finish Cover Replacement
Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator Bolt
CAUTION:
Refer to
Fastener
1 Caution .
Procedure
Adjust the seat to the highest position.
Tighten
8 N.m (71 lb in)
Front Seat Tilt Adjuster Actuator
2 Procedure
FRONT SEAT BACK LUMBAR REPLACEMENT
86 of 96
Front Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement
Front Seat Back Lumbar
NOTE:
The front
seat back
lumbar
should only
be serviced
as an
assembly.
1 Do not
disconnect
the hoses
from the
pump or the
bladder.
Procedure

2. Release the retainers.
DRIVER OR PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT
87 of 96
Front Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement - Reposition
Driver or Passenger Seat Recliner Actuator Rod
Procedure
1
Use a flat-bladed tool to push upward on the front seat recliner hub tab while gently tapping
the recliner rod outward until the rod is free of the recliner motor.
Driver or Passenger Seat Recliner Actuator Bolt
CAUTION:
Refer to
2 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
6 N.m (53 lb in)
Driver or Passenger Seat Recliner Actuator
Procedure
2. Pull up on the trim cover to gain access to the seat recliner actuator bolt.
3. Remove the seat recliner actuator.
FRONT SEAT WIRING HARNESS REPLACEMENT
88 of 96
WARNING:
Refer to SIR
Warning .
1. SIR Disabling and Enabling

2. Front Seat Removal and Installation
Front Seat Wiring Harness
NOTE:
Typical
wiring
harness
shown,
individual
harness may
be different
due to
option
1 content.
Various seat
components
may need to
be removed
from the
seat to
access the
harness
depending
on seat and
content
89 of 96
options.

LUMBAR SUPPORT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (WITH MEMORY SEAT A45)
The seat lumbar support system includes to following components:
• Seat lumbar support switch

• Seat bolster memory control module
• Seat memory control module
• Seat lumbar/bolster pump
• Air bladders
Seat Lumbar Switch
The driver seat lumbar support switch is a resistive ladder switch. The seat memory control module supplies the
switch with a 5 V reference circuit. When a lumbar switch is pressed, the signal circuit from the seat memory
control module is pulled low through the switch contacts and series of resistors indicating the lumbar support
request. In response to this signal, the seat memory control module then commands the seat bolster memory
module, via LIN serial data messages, to perform the required pneumatic lumbar movements.
Lumbar Operation
Once the seat memory control module receives a lumbar switch signal, the module will then command the seat
bolster memory control module to perform the required pneumatic movements via LIN serial data messages.
The seat bolster memory control module contains the electronic circuitry for executing the commanded
pneumatic seat adjustments, air direction solenoids and an output which supplies battery power to the external
seat air pump motor when any of the air bladders require inflating.
Based on the LIN command from the seat memory control module, the seat bolster memory control module
controls the appropriate air solenoids and activates or deactivates the external air pump in order to inflate or
deflate the air bladders in the correct combination. When an air bladder needs inflating its solenoid opens and
the pump motor is activated pumping air into the bladder. When an air bladder needs deflating its solenoid
opens the release valve and air is allowed to bleed out of the bladder into the vehicle cabin.
Refer to the Owner's Manual for more information regarding the seat lumbar support functions.
LUMBAR SUPPORT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT A45)
The seat lumbar support system includes to following components:
• Seat lumbar support switch

• Seat lumbar support valve assembly
• Seat lumbar support pump
• Air bladders
The driver seat lumbar support switch is a resistive ladder switch. The seat lumbar support valve assembly
90 of 96
supplies the seat lumbar support switch with a signal and low reference circuits. When a lumbar switch is
pressed, the signal circuit from the seat lumbar support valve assembly is pulled low through the switch
contacts and series of resistors indicating the lumbar support request. In response to this request, the lumbar
adjuster valve assembly energizes its internal inflate solenoid and applies battery voltage through the lumbar
support pump control circuit to the pump. The pump runs to inflate the appropriate support bladder until the
switch is released.
Refer to the Owner's Manual for more information regarding the seat lumbar support functions.
MEMORY SEATS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The memory seat system consists of the following components:
• K40 Seat memory control module

• S64 Seat adjuster switch
• S47 Seat memory switch
• M51 Seat horizontal motor
• M50 Seat front vertical motor
• M55 Seat rear vertical motor
• M56 Seat recline motor
Driver Seat Adjuster Switch
The seat memory control module supplies a low current voltage to each signal circuit of the seat adjuster switch.
When the driver seat adjuster switches are pressed, the appropriate signal circuit from the seat memory control
module is pulled low through the switch contacts indicating the power seat command. The seat memory control
module then commands the appropriate driver seat motor to move in response to the switch signal.
Seat Memory Control Module Power and Grounds
Battery voltage is supplied at all times to the seat memory control module through two different circuits. One
circuit is used by the module to apply power to the driver seat motors and lumbar motors, if equipped, when
commanded ON. The second battery voltage circuit is used to power up module and supply a reference voltage
to the seat position sensors. Ground is provided to the seat memory control module through a single ground
circuit and ground connection.
Seat Motors
There are 4 motors that move the position of the seat. These are the seat horizontal motor, seat front vertical
motor, seat rear vertical motor, and the seat back recline motor. The horizontal motor moves the entire seat
forward and rearward. The seat front vertical motor moves the front of the seat cushion up or down. The seat
rear vertical motor moves the rear of the seat cushion up and down. Due to the seat adjuster switch design the
front tilt and the seat height adjuster motor cannot be operated at the same time The recline motor moves the
angle of the seat back forward or rearward.
The seat memory control module controls all seat and lumbar motors via half bridges that are connected to a
single power rail internal to the module. The module connects all seat and lumbar motor outputs to a common
ground whenever they are not in operation. The seat memory control module checks to see if any motor control
circuits are shorted to ground or voltage before enabling any seat or lumbar motor. All of the motors operate
independently of each other. Each motor contains a electronic circuit breaker (PTC), which will reset only after
voltage has been removed from the motor.
91 of 96
All seat motors are reversible. For example, when a seat switch is pressed to move the entire seat forward,
ground is applied through the switch contacts onto the seat horizontal forward switch signal circuit to the seat
memory control module. In response to this signal, the module applies battery voltage through the driver seat
horizontal motor forward control circuit and ground through the driver seat horizontal motor rearward control
circuit to the motor. The motor runs in order to drive the entire seat forward. Moving the entire seat rearward
works similarly to moving the entire seat forward, except that battery voltage and ground are applied on the
opposite circuits causing the motor to run in the opposite direction. All of the motors are powered this way.
Position Sensors
To monitor seat position, each seat motor has an internal 2-wire hall-effect position sensor. The seat memory
control module supplies all the sensors with a common 12 V reference when the seat is moving and a unique
signal circuit for each sensor. During seat motor operation, the position sensors provide a specific number of
pulse signals for every revolution of the motor shaft.
The seat memory control module determines seat position by keeping a running counter where movement in the
forward/upward direction adds counts and movement in the rearward/down direction subtracts counts. The
value of the counter will be in the range of 0 - 65, 535
The value of these counters, which represent seat positions, are stored in memory for future seat memory recall
operation. During a memory seat position recall, the seat memory control module moves the seat in such a way
to return it the stored counter value.
Memory Functions
In all power modes except crank, memory recalls can be initiated by pressing and holding one of the memory
position buttons until the seat reaches the stored memory position associated with the activated button. This is
called a supervised recall.
The seat memory control module supplies a ground at all times through a low reference circuit to the driver seat
memory switch. The module also supplies memory set and memory recall signal circuits to the seat memory
switch. When a memory recall switch is pressed, the signal circuit from the seat memory control module is
pulled low through the switch contacts and a series of resistors indicating the memory recall request. In
response to this signal, the seat memory control module commands the appropriate seat motors to move to the
pre-recorded seat positions stored in memory.
Refer to the Owner's Manual for storing memory positions.
Auto Memory Recall and Easy Exit
The seat memory control module will not perform Auto Memory Seat Recall and Easy Exit functions unless
these options are enabled in vehicle personalization using the radio/HVAC controls.
Refer to Instruments and Controls/Vehicle Personalization in the Owner's Manual for the following memory
personalization options:
• Auto Memory Recall

• Easy Exit Options
The radio/HVAC controls reports the auto memory recall option settings to the seat memory control module via
serial data message. The module will then store the memory recall option setting and examine it before making
a memory seat adjustment. The auto memory recall option setting stored within the module will not change until
92 of 96
the auto memory recall option setting in vehicle personalization is changed.
POWER SEATS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (PASSENGER WITH SEAT BOLSTER
MEMORY CONTROL MODULE)
The passenger power seat motors controlled by a seat memory control module consists of the following
components:
• Seat adjuster switch

• Seat horizontal motor
• Seat front vertical motor
• Seat rear vertical motor
• Seat recline motor
Passenger Seat Adjuster Switch
The seat adjuster switch on vehicles equipped with the seat memory lumbar/bolster feature is a LIN Bus device.
When a power seat switch is pressed, a serial data message is sent from the seat adjuster switch to the seat
memory control module indicating the power seat command. The seat memory control module then commands
the appropriate seat motor to move in response to the switch signal.
Seat Memory Control Module Power and Grounds
Battery voltage is supplied at all times to the passenger seat memory control module through a 30 A fuse
located in the right instrument panel fuse block. This voltage is used by the module to apply power to the seat
motors when commanded ON. Battery voltage is also supplied at all times to the seat memory control module
through a 10 A fuse located in the left instrument panel fuse block. This voltage is used to power up module.
Ground is provided to the seat memory control module through a single ground circuit and ground connection.
Seat Motors
There are 4 motors that move the position of the seat. These are the seat horizontal motor, seat front vertical
motor, seat rear vertical motor, and the seat back recline motor. The horizontal motor moves the entire seat
forward and rearward. The seat front vertical motor moves the front of the seat cushion up or down. The seat
rear vertical motor moves the rear of the seat cushion up and down. Due to the seat adjuster switch design the
front tilt and the seat height adjuster motor cannot be operated at the same time The recline motor moves the
angle of the seat back forward or rearward.
The seat memory control module controls all seat motors via half bridges that are connected to a single power
rail internal to the module. The module connects all seat motor outputs to a common ground whenever they are
not in operation. The seat memory control module checks to see if any motor control circuits are shorted to
ground or voltage before enabling any seat motor. All of the motors operate independently of each other. Each
motor contains a electronic circuit breaker (PTC), which will reset only after voltage has been removed from the
motor.
All seat motors are reversible. For example, when a seat switch is pressed to move the entire seat forward,
ground is applied through the switch contacts onto the seat horizontal forward switch signal circuit to the seat
memory control module. In response to this signal, the module applies battery voltage through the seat
horizontal motor forward control circuit and ground through the seat horizontal motor rearward control circuit
to the motor. The motor runs in order to drive the entire seat forward. Moving the entire seat rearward works
93 of 96
similarly to moving the entire seat forward, except that battery voltage and ground are applied on the opposite
circuits causing the motor to run in the opposite direction. All of the motors are powered this way.
Memory Functions
The passenger power seat system controlled by the seat memory control module does not support seat memory
functions. Its purpose is to support the seat bolster memory control module.
POWER SEATS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (DRIVER WITHOUT MEMORY OR

PASSENGER WITHOUT SEAT BOLSTER MEMORY CONTROL MODULE)
The 8 - way power seat system consists of the following components:

• M50 Seat front vertical motor
The 6 - way power seat system consists of the following components:

Seat Motors
Each power seat motor contains an electronic circuit breaker (PTC) that opens in the event of a circuit overload
and will reset only after voltage has been removed from the circuit. The seat horizontal motor moves the entire
seat forward and rearward. The seat front vertical motor moves the front of the seat cushion up or down. The
driver 8 - way power seat, the rear vertical motor moves the rear of the seat cushion up or down, while the
passenger 6 - way power seat, the rear vertical motor moves the entire seat up or down. The seat recline motor
moves the angle of the seat back cushion forward or rearward.
Seat Operation
The seat adjuster switches provide both power and ground to the selected seat motors. When the switches are in
an inactive state, the switch contacts are closed to the switch ground circuit
All seat motors are reversible. For example, when the seat horizontal forward switch is pressed to move the
entire seat forward, battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts and the seat horizontal motor forward
control circuit to the motor. With the horizontal motor rearward switch contacts closed to the switch ground
circuit, the motor runs in order to drive the entire seat forward until the switch is released. Moving the entire
seat rearward works similarly to moving the entire seat forward, except that battery voltage and ground are
applied on opposite circuits causing the motor to run in the opposite direction. All seat motors are powered this
way.
SEAT SIDE BOLSTER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The memory lumbar/bolster system uses air bladders to adjust various aspects of the seat configuration to meet
94 of 96
an occupant's preference. It also allows these adjustments to be stored to a memory position along with the seat
position data.
Some vehicles may also be equipped with dynamic mode control which gives the chassis subsystem the ability
to request an automatic adjustment to the seat's bolster support depending on vehicle driving conditions.
The various seat adjustments and functionality which may be possible include:
• Lumbar support - forward and rearward

• Lumbar support - up and down
• Seat back side bolster
• Upper shoulder support
• Back massage functionality
The components of the system include:
• LIN based seat switch

• Bolster memory control module
• Radio
• Information display
• Seat air pump motor
• Air bladders
LIN Seat Switch
The seat switch communicates all customer requests for seat movement or adjustment via the LIN serial data
bus to the seat memory control module. The seat switch may consist of the following controls:
• Seat adjuster switch similar to the typical discrete seat switch

• Massage On/Off switch, if massage is equipped
• 4-way multi-function switch which can be activated Up/Down/Forward/Rearward
• Feature select rotary ring around the outside of the 4-way multi-function Switch
Manipulating the seat cushion and seat back control bar results in the seat memory control module responding
in the same way as it would if the resultant requests were made by discrete signals instead of the LIN messaging
this switch employs.
Information Feature Display
Due to the number of pneumatic lumbar/bolster features available, and that the 4-way multi-function switch
controls different operations depending on feature selection, the information display is used for the visual
feedback of the feature selected as well as which operations of the feature are under the control of the 4-way
multi-function switch.
The seat memory control module will track and maintain which lumbar/bolster features are available on the
vehicle as well as the current feature selection and its settings. This information is communicated via GMLAN
to the radio tuner which in turn communicates it to the information interface for display. The display will show
a seat image with the specific selected feature highlighted. In addition, arrows and text will indicate the
95 of 96
functions to be adjusted by the 4-way multi-function switch.
If the seat selection menu is not showing on the display, adjusting the lumbar/bolster seat switches will bring
this menu up. Only when the display is active and the various features are displayed by the infotainment system,
then customer can then use the rotary ring to move up or down the feature menu. The display will show a seat
image with the specific selected feature highlighted along with arrows and text to indicate the functions to be
adjusted by the 4-way multi-function switch.
Lumbar/Bolster Operation
Once the lumbar/bolster feature has been selected, the seat memory control module will command the seat
bolster memory control module to perform the required pneumatic movements via LIN serial data messages.
The seat bolster memory control module contains the electronic circuitry for executing the commanded
pneumatic seat adjustments, air direction solenoids, pressure sensors for storing air bladder pressures, and an
output which supplies battery power to the external seat air pump motor when any of the air bladders require
inflating.
Based on the LIN command from the seat memory control module, the seat bolster memory control module
controls the appropriate air solenoids and activates or deactivates the external air pump in order to inflate or
deflate the air bladders in the correct combination. When an air bladder needs inflating its solenoid opens and
the pump motor is activated pumping air into the bladder. When an air bladder needs deflating its solenoid
opens the release valve and air is allowed to bleed out of the bladder into the vehicle cabin.
To support memory recall and massage, the seat bolster memory control module uses internal air pressure
sensors to track, store and recall the positions of all the air bladders under its control.
The massage On/Off switch on the LIN seat switch allows the customer to turn the massage feature on and off
without having to go back into the seat feature menu for set-up.
Refer to Seat Adjustment in the Owner's Manual for the up level seat adjustment features listed above.
96 of 96
Programming And Setup - XT4

CONTROL MODULE REFERENCES
• Data Link References

• Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle
• Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle
• Symptoms - Vehicle
Control
Programming and
Code Module/Scan Tool Schematic Repair Instruction
Setup
Information
Radio/Navigation A11 Radio:
A11 Radio: Scan
A11 System Wiring Radio Replacement Programming and
Tool Information
Schematics Setup
A22 Radio Controls: Radio/Navigation Radio Control A22 Radio Controls:
A22 Scan Tool System Wiring Assembly Programming and
Information Schematics Replacement Setup
B174W Frontview B174W Frontview
Driver Assistance
Camera - Front View Camera Camera - Windshield:
B174W Systems Wiring
Windshield: Scan Replacement Programming and
Schematics
Tool Information Setup
• B218L Side
• B218L Side
Object Sensor
Object Sensor
Module - Left:
Module - Left:
Scan Tool
Programming
Information
Driver Assistance Side Obstacle and Setup
B218L/R • B218R Side Systems Wiring Detection Control • B218R Side
Object Sensor Schematics Module Replacement Object Sensor
Module -
Module - Right:
Right: Scan
Programming
Tool
and Setup
Information
B233B Radar Sensor B233B Radar Sensor

Driver Assistance Forward Range
Module - Long Module - Long Range:
B233B Systems Wiring Radar Sensor
Range: Scan Tool Programming and
Schematics Replacement
Information Setup
• Radar Sensor • B233LF Radar
Module - Short Sensor Module -
Driver Assistance Front Short Range
Range Left Short Range
B233LF/RF Systems Wiring Radar Sensor
Front Left Front:
• Radar Sensor Programming
Module - Short and Setup
1 of 76
Control
Programming and
Setup
Information
• B233RF Radar
Sensor Module -
Range Right Short Range
Front Right Front:
Programming
and Setup
B233R Radar Sensor

Driver Assistance Rear Short Range
Radar Sensor Module Module - Short Range
B233R Systems Wiring Radar Sensor
- Short Range Rear Rear: Programming
and Setup
K9 Body Control
K9 Body Control
Body Control System Body Control Module:
K9 Module: Scan Tool
Wiring Schematics Module Replacement Programming and
Information
Setup
K19 Suspension K19 Suspension
Electronic Suspension
Control Module: Suspension Control Control Module:
K19 Control Wiring
Scan Tool Module Replacement Programming and
Schematics
Information Setup
• Engine Control
• Engine Controls K20 Engine Control
Wiring Module:
K20 Module: Scan Tool Replacement -
Schematics - 2.0L Programming and
Information 2.0L (LSY)
(LSY) engine Setup
engine
K26 Headlamp K26 Headlamp

Headlights/Daytime
Control Module: Headlamp Control Control Module:
K26 Running Lights (DRL)
Wiring Schematics
Information Setup
• K29F Seat
• Front Seat
Heating Control
Heater Vent
Module - Front:
Control
Programming
Module
and Setup
Seat Heating Control Heated/Cooled Seat Replacement
K29 • K29R Seat
Module Wiring Schematics • Rear Seat
Heating Control
Heater Control
Module - Rear:
Module
Programming
Replacement
and Setup
K32 Steering Wheel

Heated Steering Heating Control
Steering Wheel Heat Steering Wheel Wiring
K32 Wheel Module Module:
Control Module Schematics
Replacement Programming and
Setup
K33 HVAC Control Heater and Air K33 HVAC Control
HVAC Wiring
K33 Module: Scan Tool Conditioning Remote Module:
Schematics
Information Control Replacement Programming and
2 of 76
Control
Programming and
Setup
Information
Setup
K36 Inflatable K36 Inflatable
Restraint Sensing Restraint Sensing and
Restraints Control
K36 and Diagnostic SIR Wiring Schematics Diagnostic Module:
Module Replacement
Module: Scan Tool Programming and
Information Setup
K39 Liftgate K39 Liftgate Control
Control Module: Liftgate Wiring Rear Gate Module Module:
K39
Scan Tool Schematics Replacement Programming and
Information Setup
• K40D Seat
Memory • K40D Seat
Control • Driver Seat Memory
Module - Adjuster Control Module
Driver: Scan • Driver Seat Memory - Driver:
Tool Wiring Module Programming
Information Schematics Replacement and Setup
K40 • K40P Seat • Passenger Seat • Passenger Seat • K40P Seat
Memory Wiring Adjuster Memory
Control Schematics Memory Control Module
Module - Module - Passenger:
Passenger: Replacement Programming
Scan Tool and Setup
Information
K43 Power Steering K43 Power Steering

Control Module: Power Steering Wiring Power Steering Assist Control Module:
K43
Scan Tool Schematics Motor Replacement Programming and
Information Setup
K47 Rear K47 Rear Differential
Differential Clutch Rear Differential Clutch Control
Rear Axle Wiring
K47 Control Module: Clutch Control Module:
Schematics
Information Setup
K56 Serial Data
Serial Data Gateway Data Communication Serial Data Gateway Gateway Module:
K56
Module Wiring Schematics Module Replacement Programming and
Setup
K60 Steering K60 Steering Column
Column Lock Column Lock Wiring Column Lock Lock Module:
K60
Module: Scan Tool Schematics Module Replacement Programming and
Information Setup
K68 Trailer Lighting Trailer Lamp K68 Trailer Lighting
Trailer
Control Module: Control Module Control Module:
K68 Connector/Provision
Scan Tool Replacement (Europe Programming and
Wiring Schematics
Information Model Only) Setup
3 of 76
Control
Programming and
Setup
Information
K71 Transmission
Control Module:
Scan Tool
Information (9T50
K71 Transmission
(M3H) or 9T60
Automatic Control Module:
(MJD)) , or K71 Transmission Control
K71 Transmission Controls Programming and
Transmission Module Replacement
Wiring Schematics Setup (9T50 (M3H) or
Control Module:
9T60 (MJD))
Scan Tool
Information (9T50
(M3H) or 9T60
(MJD))
K73 Telematics
Communication
Interface Control
Module:
Programming and
Setup (UI3 without
UDA), or K73
Telematics
K73 Telematics
Communication
Communication Communication
OnStar/Telematics Interface Control
K73 Interface Control Interface Module
Wiring Schematics Module:
Module: Scan Tool Replacement
Programming and
Information
Setup (UE1 without
UDA), or K73
Telematics
Communication
Interface Control
Module:
Programming and
Setup (UDA)
K84 Keyless Entry K84 Keyless Entry
Keyless Entry
Control Module: Remote Function Control Module:
K84 Control Module
Scan Tool Wiring Schematics Programming and
Replacement
Information Setup
K89 Immobilizer
Immobilizer Control Immobilizer Wiring Theft Deterrent Control Module:
K89
Module Schematics Module Replacement Programming and
Setup
Steering Column
Position Control
K99 Steering Column
Module Steering Column Tilt
Tilt/Telescoping Position Control
Refer to: Wheel and Telescope
K99 Steering Column Module:
K40D Seat Memory Control Module
Wiring Schematics Programming and
Control Module - Replacement
Setup
Driver: Scan Tool
Information
4 of 76
Control
Programming and
Setup
Information
• Fuel Pump
Power Control
Module
Replacement
Fuel Pump Power • Engine Controls
(AWD) , or Fuel Fuel Pump Power
Control Module Wiring
K111 Pump Power Control Module
Scan Tool Schematics - 2.0L Programming and
Control
Information (LSY) engine Setup
Module
Replacement
(FWD) - 2.0L
(LSY) engine
K124 Active Safety K124 Active Safety

Driver Assistance
Control Module: Image Processing Control Module:
K124 Systems Wiring
Schematics
Information Setup
Seat Bolster Memory
Control Module
Refer to:
• K134D Seat
• K40D Seat Bolster Memory
Memory Control Module
Control • Driver Seat - Driver:
Module - Wiring Programming
Driver: Scan Schematics Front Seat Back and Setup
K134 Tool Lumbar
• Passenger Seat • K134P Seat
Information Replacement
Wiring Bolster Memory
• K40P Seat Schematics Control Module
Memory - Passenger:
Control Programming
Module - and Setup
Passenger:
Scan Tool
Information
K157 Video
K157 Video
Processing Control
Processing Control Image Display Camera Video Processing
K157 Module:
Module: Scan Tool Wiring Schematics Module Replacement
Programming and
Information
Setup (UV2)
K160 Brake System K160 Brake System
Electronic Brake
Control Module: Antilock Brake System Control Module:
K160 Booster Control
Scan Tool Wiring Schematics Programming and
Module Replacement
Information Setup
K171 Hands-Free
Hands-Free Liftgate Rear Closure Hands Liftgate Sensor
Liftgate Wiring
K171 Sensor Control Free Module Control Module:
Schematics
Module Replacement Programming and
Setup
5 of 76
Control
Programming and
Setup
Information
K182 Parking Assist K182 Parking Assist
Parking Assistance Parking Assist
Control Module: Control Module:
K182 Systems Wiring Control Module
Scan Tool Programming and
Information Setup
P16 Instrument
Cluster:
P16 Instrument Programming and
Instrument Cluster Instrument Cluster
P16 Cluster: Scan Tool Setup, or P16
Wiring Schematics Replacement
Information Instrument Cluster:
Programming and
Setup (Terrain only)
P29 Head-Up Display:
Head-Up Display Head-Up Display
P29 Head-Up Display Programming and
Wiring Schematics Replacement
Setup
T3 Audio Amplifier: Radio/Navigation Radio Speaker T3 Audio Amplifier:
T3 Scan Tool System Wiring Amplifier Programming and
Information Schematics Replacement Setup
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
A11 RADIO: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
NOTE: • DO NOT program a control module unless directed to by a service procedure

or a service bulletin. If the control module is not properly configured with the
correct calibration software, the control module will not control all of the
vehicle features properly.
• Ensure the programming tool is equipped with the latest software and is
securely connected to the data link connector. If there is an interruption during
programming, programming failure or control module damage may occur.
• Stable battery voltage is critical during programming. Any fluctuation, spiking,
over voltage or loss of voltage will interrupt programming. When required,
install a battery maintainer or power supply that provides a steady and stable
voltage. Do not use a battery charger, as charging voltage will often fluctuate
when connected to the vehicle. This may interrupt programing. If a battery
maintainer is not available, connect a fully charged 12 V jumper or booster
pack disconnected from the AC voltage supply.
• Turn OFF or disable systems that may put a load on the vehicles battery such
as; interior lights, exterior lights (including daytime running lights), HVAC,
radio, etc.
• During the programming procedure, follow the SPS prompts for the correct
ignition switch position.
• Clear DTCs after programming is complete. Clearing powertrain DTCs will set
the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) system status indicators to NO.
Diagnostic Aids
• Check for Preliminary information or Technical Service bulletins before programming.
6 of 76
• During programming you may be required to select multiple calibrations dependent upon vehicle equipment.
Have the vehicle build/RPO information available during the following procedure to ensure the correct
calibrations are selected.
• If the control module calibration is only being updated, USB programming may not be required, depending on
the current software level, or the release of updates. If USB programming may not be required when
replacing/reprogramming the control module. If USB files for the application are not available via SPS, or
have not been received from General Motors in another manner, the USB process will not need to be
performed unless instructed otherwise in a service document or publication.
• The vehicle can be moved to an alternate location when performing the USB portion of the programming steps
which could allow the possibility of working on another vehicle while the USB programming event is taking
place.
• When transferring a large file (>1GB) from the Techline Connect server to the PC then to a USB stick, below
are some useful tips:
A wired connection to the network is the quickest, most stable way to download the file.
Wireless connections can be used, however slower connection speeds may increase the likelihood of
errors to occur during file download.
Once the file is downloaded to the PC, it will reside in chase unless the chase is cleared. Any additional
USB sticks made from that PC will be copied from chase and take a much shorter time compared to
downloading from the server.
Never take a USB stick directly to a vehicle for updating without starting a Techline Connect session for
that particular VIN. If software is already on the stick, Techline Connect will take only seconds to
confirm software on the stick is the latest and correct for that vehicle. Failure to perform this step will
result in no warranty claim code indicating a USB programming event was completed.
• If the radio displays "calibrate device, one or more devices need to be calibrated" in SPS program the radio
selecting replace and program.
Special Tools
• USB 2.0 flash drive with a minimum capacity of 16 GB.
Reprogram Control Module
To program an existing control module, perform the following procedure:
NOTE: The vehicle must remain in PARK and the driver's door closed during the
programming procedure.
1. Before proceeding with USB programming check for any Info Sys OTA updates under Settings>Updates on
the vehicles infotainment screen. If an update is available, it is more efficient to install the OTA update if it
will install successfully. If the OTA will not install and USB programming is necessary then before attempting
USB programming you should first decline the update by selecting Details and then the Decline Update
option, followed by confirming the Decline Update. If an Info Sys OTA update is not available, proceed with
USB programming.
NOTE: If using a pre-configured USB drive supplied by General Motors, proceed to

step 7.
2. Connect a USB drive to the computer.

3. Access the Service Programming System (SPS) and follow the on-screen instructions.
7 of 76
4. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select A11 Radio - USB Copy/USB File Transfer.
NOTE: • If USB programming is unavailable, or if the selected software description

is the following proceed to step 10: STOP. If you are seeing this text, the
controller already has the latest software available. If you try to proceed
further, SPS will generate an error. .
• Software currently loaded on the USB Drive will be verified and if files are
incorrect they will be deleted and correct files will be loaded. If files
residing on the USB Drive are correct for the vehicle being serviced, the
Techline terminal will not delete those files and allow the drive to be re-
used.
5. Upon completion of the file transfer, remove the USB drive from the computer.
NOTE: The Radio will not allow the installation of the same software version via USB.
If the same software is detected the installation process will not start.
7. Connect the USB drive to the USB port in the vehicle.

8. The infotainment system will recognize that update files are available. Follow the infotainment display on-
screen instructions and select Update when prompted. Programming will take several minutes.
NOTE: Once the update is initiated, there is no need to monitor the progress.
NOTE: If no instructions immediately appear on the infotainment display, select the

following menu options:
• Home
• Settings
• System
• Updates
9. Upon completion of programming, remove the USB drive. Follow the infotainment display on-screen
instructions.
11. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select A11 Radio - Programming and then follow the on-screen
instructions.
12. Clear DTCs.
13. Perform the Manufacturer Enable Counter (MEC) reset - Access the Global Diagnostic System 2 (GDS 2) and
identify the vehicle
14. On the GDS 2 screen select Module Diagnostics - Radio (select appropriate RPO) - Configuration/reset
functions - Reset Manufacturer Enable Counter and follow the on - screen instructions.
15. Ignition OFF, Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF, remove the key fob from range of the vehicle, and let
the vehicle sit for five minutes. Retest system operation to verify the repair.
Replace and Program Control Module
To program a replacement control module, perform the following procedure:
8 of 76
NOTE: The vehicle must remain in PARK and the driver's door closed during the
programming procedure.
NOTE: If using a pre-configured USB drive supplied by General Motors, proceed to

step 7.
1. Connect a USB drive to the computer.

3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select A11 Radio - USB Copy/USB File Transfer.
NOTE: • If USB programming is unavailable, or if the selected software description

is the following proceed to step 10: STOP. If you are seeing this text, the
controller already has the latest software available. If you try to proceed
further, SPS will generate an error. .
used.
4. Upon completion of the file transfer, remove the USB drive from the computer.
NOTE: The Radio will not allow the installation of the same software version via USB.
If the same software is detected the installation process will not start.
6. Connect the USB drive to the USB port in the vehicle.

7. The infotainment system will recognize that update files are available. Follow the infotainment display on-
screen instructions and select Update when prompted. Programming will take several minutes.
NOTE: Once the update is initiated, there is no need to monitor the progress.
NOTE: If no instructions immediately appear on the infotainment display, select the

following menu options:
• Home
• Settings
• System
• Updates
8. Upon completion of programming, remove the USB drive. Follow the infotainment display on-screen
instructions.
10. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select A11 Radio - Programming and then follow the on-screen
instructions.
11. Clear DTCs.
12. Perform the Manufacturer Enable Counter (MEC) reset - Access the Global Diagnostic System 2 (GDS 2) and
identify the vehicle
9 of 76
13. On the GDS 2 screen select Module Diagnostics - Radio (select appropriate RPO) - Configuration/reset
functions - Reset Manufacturer Enable Counter and follow the on - screen instructions.
14. Ignition OFF, Retained Accessory Power (RAP) OFF, remove the key fob from range of the vehicle, and let
the vehicle sit for five minutes. Retest system operation to verify the repair.
Unsuccessful Programming Recovery
In the event of an interrupted or unsuccessful programming event, perform the following steps:
NOTE: If USB programming was interrupted, a 5 minute recovery time period may be
necessary before the software will reinitialize. Wait 3 minutes with the ignition
OFF, all access doors closed, and all vehicle systems OFF. Upon restarting the
USB portion of the programming, the display will show a countdown timer for
up to 5 minutes before proceeding with the USB File Transfer.
1. Ignition ON. Ensure the control module, DLC and programming tool connections are secure and the SPS
software is up to date.
2. Verify the control module can be reprogrammed.
If the control module cannot be reprogrammed
1. Ignition OFF, all access doors closed, all vehicle systems OFF for one minute, ignition ON.
If the control module cannot be reprogrammed, replace the control module.
Go to next step: If the control module can be reprogrammed.
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If the control module can be reprogrammed
3. All OK.
A22 RADIO CONTROLS: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

radio, etc.
10 of 76
Replace Control Module
The replacement control module is fully programmed by the supplier and does not require SPS programming or any
setup procedures.
To reprogram an existing control module, perform the following procedure:
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, if available select A22 Radio Controls - Programming and follow
the on-screen instructions.
3. Clear DTCs.
1. Ignition OFF for one minute, ignition ON.
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
A26 HVAC CONTROLS: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

Vehicle
NOTE: • Do NOT program a control module unless directed to by a service procedure

• Verify the programming tool is equipped with the latest software and is
11 of 76
when connected to the vehicle. This may interrupt programming. If a battery
• Turn Off or disable systems that may put a load on the vehicle's battery. For
example, interior lights, daytime running lights, HVAC, and radio.
• During the programming procedure, follow the Service Programming System
(SPS) prompts for the correct ignition switch position.
the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) system status indicators to No.
Programming an Existing or New Control Module
This control module does not require SPS programming or any setup procedures.
Repair Instructions
B174W FRONTVIEW CAMERA - WINDSHIELD: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

over voltage or loss of voltage will interrupt programming. When required
install the EL-49642 SPS Programming Support Tool to maintain system
voltage. If not available, connect a fully charged 12 V jumper or booster pack
disconnected from the AC voltage supply. DO NOT connect a battery charger.
radio, etc.
• Anytime the B174W Frontview Camera Module is removed from its mount, it
must follow the Frontview Camera Module Learn procedure.
12 of 76
Following Replacement of Windshield
The B174W Frontview Camera Module must be calibrated, refer to Front View Camera Module Learn .
Replace and Program Frontview Camera Module or Reprogram Frontview Camera Module (without UGN)
NOTE: Due to continuous improvements, the on screen selections may vary from
instructions below.
To program a replacement or an existing Front View Camera Module, perform the following procedure:
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield - Programming and
follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Clear DTCs
4. Following B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield replacement and reprogramming, the module must be
calibrated. Refer to Front View Camera Module Learn .
Replace and Program Frontview Camera Module or Reprogram Frontview Camera Module (with UGN)
To program a replacement or an existing B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield, perform the following procedure:
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield - Programming and
NOTE: After programming is performed, it is normal to have DTC B101E 4B set until
calibration is complete.
3. If reprogramming an existing module that was previously calibrated, calibration is not required. The module
retains its calibration settings during reprogramming. If a new module was programmed the module alignment
must be calibrated. Using a scan tool, initiate the learn procedure for B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield.
The scan tool must remain connected and on the calibration screen during the entire process.
Refer to Front View Camera Module Learn .
1. DO NOT turn the ignition OFF. Ensure that all B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield, DLC and
programming tool connections are secure and the TIS terminal operating software is up to date.
2. Attempt to reprogram the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield.
3. If the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield can still not be programmed, turn the ignition OFF for at least
one minute.
4. Turn the ignition ON and attempt to reprogram the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield. The B174W
Frontview Camera - Windshield should program.
If the B174W Frontview Camera - Windshield still cannot be programmed, replace the B174W
Frontview Camera - Windshield.
B218L SIDE OBJECT SENSOR MODULE - LEFT: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
13 of 76
or a service bulletin. If the ECU is not properly configured with the correct
calibration software, the ECU will not control all of the vehicle features
properly.
programming, programming failure or ECU damage may occur.
over voltage or loss of voltage will interrupt programming. Install the EL-49642
SPS Programming Support Tool to maintain system voltage. If not available,
connect a fully charged 12 V jumper or booster pack disconnected from the AC
voltage supply.
radio, etc.
Special Tools
EL-49642 SPS Programming Support Tool
For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.
Replace and Program ECU or Reprogram ECU
To program a replacement or an existing ECU, perform the following procedure:
NOTE: • Due to continuous improvements, the on screen selections may vary from
instructions below.
• It is recommended to program both the left and right (if programmable) when a
programming event is required.
• Some systems only have one programmable Side Object Sensor Module.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select B218L/R Side Object Sensor Module or B218R Right Side
Object Sensor Module or B218L Left Side Object Detection.
3. On the SPS Select Function/Sequence screen, select Sequential Programming or Programming
4. Clear DTCs.
1. DO NOT turn the ignition OFF. Ensure that all ECU, DLC and programming tool connections are secure and
14 of 76
the TIS terminal operating software is up to date.
2. Attempt to reprogram the ECU.
3. If the ECU can still not be programmed, turn the ignition OFF for at least one minute.
4. Turn the ignition ON and attempt to reprogram the ECU. The ECU should program.
If the ECU still cannot be programmed, replace the ECU.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for Control Module replacement, programming and setup
B218R SIDE OBJECT SENSOR MODULE - RIGHT: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

properly.
voltage supply.
radio, etc.
Special Tools
NOTE: • Due to continuous improvements, the on screen selections may vary from
instructions below.
• It is recommended to program both the left and right (if programmable) when a
programming event is required.
15 of 76
• Some systems only have one programmable Side Object Sensor Module.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select B218L/R Side Object Sensor Module or B218R Right Side
Object Sensor Module or B218L Left Side Object Detection.
3. On the SPS Select Function/Sequence screen, select Sequential Programming or Programming
4. Clear DTCs.
Repair Instructions
B233B RADAR SENSOR MODULE - LONG RANGE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

or a service bulletin. If the Long Range Radar Sensor Module is not properly
configured with the correct calibration software, the Long Range Radar Sensor
Module will not control all of the vehicle features properly.
programming or programming failure, Long Range Radar Sensor Module
damage may occur.
radio, etc.
Replace and Program Radar Sensor Module - Long Range or Reprogram Radar Sensor Module - Long Range
16 of 76
To program a replacement or an existing Long Range Radar Sensor Module, perform the following procedure:
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select B233B Radar Sensor Module - Long Range - Programming
and follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
4. Following programming, the module alignment must be calibrated.
Refer to Radar Sensor Module - Long Range Learn .
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
B233LF RADAR SENSOR MODULE - SHORT RANGE LEFT FRONT: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

radio, etc.
17 of 76
Diagnostic Aids
NOTE: This programming document applies to the B233 Radar Sensor Module - Short
Range. For B218 Side Object Sensor Module (if equipped) refer to Side Object
Sensor Programming and Setup.
Replace and Program Control Module or Reprogram Control Module
To program a replacement or an existing control module, perform the following procedure:
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select B233LF Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Left Front -
Programming and follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Clear DTCs.
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
B233R RADAR SENSOR MODULE - SHORT RANGE REAR: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

18 of 76
radio, etc.
Diagnostic Aids
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select B233R Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Rear -
3. Clear DTCs.
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
19 of 76
B233RF RADAR SENSOR MODULE - SHORT RANGE RIGHT FRONT: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

radio, etc.
Diagnostic Aids
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select B233RF Radar Sensor Module - Short Range Right Front -
3. Clear DTCs.
20 of 76
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K9 BODY CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

voltage. DO NOT use a battery charger, as charging voltage will often fluctuate
radio, etc.
Special Tools
EL-46079 Tire Pressure Monitor Diagnostic Tool or EL-50448 Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor Activation Tool
To program a replacement K9 Body Control Module (BCM), perform the following procedure:
NOTE: Make sure the vehicle ignition switch state is in appropriate position for the
following step.
21 of 76
• For Key Ignition System, begin with the ignition in the RUN position.
• For Push Button Start System, begin with the vehicle in vehicle OFF
power mode. The Service Programming System will power mode the
vehicle.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K9 Body Control Module - Programming and follow the on-
screen instructions.
3. Perform the following for the appropriate ignition type prior to proceeding with the next step:
• Key Ignition System: Key in the ignition and any additional keys must be away from the vehicle at least
3 m (9.8 ft).
• Push Button Start System: Keyless entry transmitter must be in the programming pocket. Refer to the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation document located the Keys, Doors, and Windows >
Keys and Locks category in the owner's manual for the exact pocket location. All additional transmitters
must be away from the vehicle at least 3 m (9.8 ft).
NOTE: The following programming step may take between 10 - 12 min and progress
will appear to have stopped during this process. This is a normal security
timer response and a restart should not be performed. If the DTC B389A set
immediately after programming a replacement BCM, the Immobilizer Learn
procedure was not properly completed. The Immobilizer Learn procedure
needs to be performed again.
4. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select Z1 Immobilizer Learn. On the next screen, select Body
Control Module IMMO Learn with Existing Transponder or Remote Key and follow the on-screen
instructions. When Immobilizer Learn is complete, press the Unlock button on the keyless entry transmitter to
allow the keyless entry transmitter to exit the Immobilizer Learn mode.
NOTE: When performing the Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor Learn during BCM setup,
the EL-46079 tire pressure monitor diagnostic tool must be used to activate
each tire pressure sensor for vehicles with UJM.
• For Push Button Start System, begin with the vehicle in vehicle ON power
mode.
5. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K9 Body Control Module - Setup (or K9 Body Control
Module - Configuration & Setup) and follow the on-screen instructions.
6. Check the driver information center display for additional messages regarding further calibration instructions.
If there are no additional driver information center instructions present, programming is complete.
7. Clear DTCs.
8. If ABS, Traction Control and/or Stabilitrak indicators are ON and DTC C0161 is set in the K17 Electronic
Brake Control Module after performing K9 Body Control Module programming and setup, do the following:
1. Disconnect the scan tool from the X84 Data Link Connector.
away from the vehicle. It may take up to 10 min to power down.
3. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode, verify DTC C0161 is in history. If not, repeat the above step to
make sure the vehicle is in sleep mode.
4. Use the scan tool to clear the DTCs.
22 of 76
To program an existing K9 Body Control Module, perform the following procedure:
NOTE: Make sure the vehicle ignition switch state is in appropriate position for the
following step.
• For Push Button Start System, begin with the vehicle in vehicle ON power
mode.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K9 Body Control Module - Programming and follow the on-
NOTE: When performing the Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor Learn during K9 Body
Control Module setup, the EL-46079 tire pressure monitor diagnostic tool must
be used to activate each tire pressure sensor for vehicles with UJM.
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K9 Body Control Module - Setup (or K9 Body Control
Module - Configuration & Setup) and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Check the driver information center display for additional messages regarding further calibration instructions.
If there are no additional driver information center instructions present, programming is complete.
5. Clear DTCs.
6. If ABS, Traction Control and/or Stabilitrak indicators are ON and DTC C0161 is set in the K17 Electronic
Brake Control Module after performing K9 Body Control Module programming and setup, do the following:
1. Disconnect the scan tool from the X84 Data Link Connector.
away from the vehicle. It may take up to 10 min to power down.
3. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode, verify DTC C0161 is in history. If not, repeat the above step to
make sure the vehicle is in sleep mode.
4. Use the scan tool to clear the DTCs.
1. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode. Ensure the control module, DLC and programming tool connections are
secure and the SPS software is up to date.
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF for one minute, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
23 of 76
Repair Instructions
K19 SUSPENSION CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

radio, etc.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K19 Suspension Control Module - Programming and follow
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K19 Suspension Control Module - Setup or Configuration and
4. Clear DTCs.
5. With a scan tool, perform the suspension system calibration procedure, if applicable.
24 of 76
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K20 ENGINE CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
Special Tools

securely connected to the data link connector (DLC). If there is an interruption
during programming, programming failure or control module damage may
occur.
radio, etc.
• Note the engine oil life remaining percentage.
• If over 14k GVW, program the engine serial number with the scan tool.
To program a replacement K20 Engine Control Module (ECM), perform the following procedure:
1. Install EL-49642 SPS programming support tool.

25 of 76
3. Before removing the old control module, perform the SPS function Prepare Control Module for Removal, if
available.
NOTE: The Prepare Control Module for Removal function can only be performed when
communication with the old control module is still possible.
4. Replace the ECM.

5. Perform one of the following SPS Programming functions:
NOTE: If both controller options below are listed, select K20/K71 Engine and
Transmission Control Modules.
• K20/K71 Engine and Transmission Control Modules and follow the on-screen instructions.
• K20 Engine Control Module and follow on-screen instructions.
6. Clear the DTCs after completing the Programming procedure.
7. If equipped, perform the SPS function Immobilizer Learn and follow the on-screen instructions. Refer to
Immobilizer System Component Programming (without BTM) , or Immobilizer System Component
Programming (with BTM) .
8. Perform the following SPS function:
1. Setup
NOTE: If both controller options below are listed, select K20 Engine Control
Module.
2. Configuration - If applicable
9. If equipped, perform the Fuel Pressure Regulator Learn via GDS2, Engine Control Module,
Configuration/Reset Functions, Learn Functions.
10. Clear DTCs.
To reprogram an existing K20 Engine Control Module, perform the following procedure:

4. Clear DTCs after completing the Programming procedure.
NOTE: If vehicle fails to start during Configuration and Setup, perform the SPS
Function Immobilizer Learn and follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Perform the following SPS function:
26 of 76
1. Setup
NOTE: If both controller options below are listed, select K20 Engine Control
Module.
2. Configuration - If applicable
6. If equipped, perform the Fuel Pressure Regulator Learn via GDS2, Engine Control Module,
Configuration/Reset Functions, Learn Functions.
7. Clear DTCs.
If programming a control module is not successful, perform the following procedure:
1. Verify the control module, data link connector and programming tool connections are secure and the tool
4. Verify the control module programming is successful.
If the programming is not successful
1. Ignition/Vehicle - Off - For greater than 1 min
If the programming is not successful - Replace the appropriate component: K20 Engine Control
Module or K71 Transmission Control Module
Go to next step: If the programming is successful
4. All OK.
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
27 of 76
K26 HEADLAMP CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

pack disconnected from the AC voltage supply
radio, etc.
K26 Headlamp Control Module Programming
To program a replacement or existing control module, perform the following procedure:
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with Electronic Suspension Control, it may be necessary

to perform the Electronic Suspension Position Sensor Trim Height Calibration
procedure before programming the K26 Headlamp Control Module.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K26 Headlamp Control Module - Programming and follow
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K26 Headlamp Control Module - Setup while following the
on-screen instructions.
4. Clear DTCs.
28 of 76
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K29F SEAT HEATING CONTROL MODULE - FRONT: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
This device does not require programming or setup.
K29R SEAT HEATING CONTROL MODULE - REAR: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
K32 STEERING WHEEL HEATING CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
This device requires no programming or setup.
K33 HVAC CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

Vehicle

29 of 76
To program an existing or new control module, perform the following procedure:

2. Access SPS and follow the on-screen instructions for the control module: K33 HVAC Control Module
3. Perform the SPS function: Programming
Verify the control module programming is successful.

If the programming is not successful - Replace the component: K33 HVAC Control Module
4. All OK.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K36 INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND

SETUP
Vehicle

30 of 76

2. Access SPS and follow the on-screen instructions for the control module: K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and
Diagnostic Module
3. Perform the SPS function: Programming and Setup
NOTE: GMNA Regions: When SPS failure message E4489 occurs during programming or
calibration, do NOT call TCSC immediately. Record at which point the failure
occurred before it displayed the E4489 message. When this occurs, proceed to
GDS2. Download the appropriate vehicle configuration and select the Inflatable
Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module. Under Identification Information, look at
parameters: Software Module 1 Identifier and Software Module 2 Identifier. If either
of these are populated with a value of 1 or more, replace the Inflatable Restraint
Sensing and Diagnostic Module. Record these parameter values on the back of the
job card.
Non GMNA Regions: When SPS displays a message indicating that programming
may fail and the programming event fails at 0%, replace the Inflatable Restraint
Sensing and Diagnostic Module. Verify no other DTCs or issues exist with the
module prior to replacement. Record all DTCs and relevant information on the back
of the job card.
31 of 76

If the programming is unsuccessful, refer to K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic
Module: Configure New Module
4. All OK.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K36 INFLATABLE RESTRAINT SENSING AND DIAGNOSTIC MODULE: CONFIGURE NEW

MODULE
1. Using the scan tool, select K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module.
2. Select Configuration/Reset Functions.
3. Select Configure New Module and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. If any setup inhibit resents are present, they will be identified on the scan tool. Refer to the reference
information below for the inhibit reason and correct as necessary.
Inhibit Reasons
Incorrect Power Mode
Cause: The vehicle was in the incorrect power mode during SPS programming.
Correction: Program the control module, ensuring the vehicle power mode is correct.
Programming Incomplete - Immobilizer ID Not Learned
Cause: The K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module was unable to learn the vehicle immobilizer ID.
Correction: Verify there are no DTCs set in other vehicle control modules. If any DTCs are set, correct the condition.
Programing the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module
Programming Incomplete - Environment ID Not Learned
Cause: The K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module was unable to learn the vehicle environment ID.
32 of 76
Programming Incomplete - Security Code Not Programmed
Cause: The K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module was unable to learn the vehicle security code.
Programming Incomplete - No VIN
Cause: The K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module was unable to learn the vehicle VIN.
Configuration Mismatch - Primary Key Mismatch
Cause: The primary key in the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module does not match the primary
key in the K9 Body Control Module.
Correction: Programing the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module. If the condition persists,
program the K9 Body Control Module, then program the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module.
Incorrect Calibration
Cause: The K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module does not have a valid calibration
Correction: Programing the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module.
DTCs are Present
Cause: Current or history DTCs are set or stored in the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module.
Correction: Correct any fault conditions and clear any DTCs, then program the K36 Inflatable Restraint Sensing and
Diagnostic Module
Configuration Mismatch - Deployment Loops or Sensors
Cause: Based on the vehicle VIN, the configuration file loaded during SPS programming is specific to the as-built
equipment installed on the vehicle. This includes the number of deployment loops (air bags and pretensioners) and
the number of impact sensors. A mismatch is caused by the detected equipment on the vehicle (air bags,
pretensioners, and impact sensors) not matching the as-built configuration of the calibration file.
Correction: Determine the mismatch location using the information below and correct as necessary:
Loop Configuration Mismatch
1. Using the scan tool, select Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module.
2. Select Data Displays.
3. Select Loop Configuration.
4. Each Deployment Loop has the following scan tool parameters:
• Deployment Loop [x] Type
33 of 76
• Deployment Loop [x] Enabled Status
• Deployment Loop [x] Learn Status
5. Utilizing the vehicle schematics, identify the applicable deployment loops (air bags and pretensioners) that
vehicle is equipped with. In some cases, this may require comparing the schematic information to the vehicle
RPO list to determine which deployment loops the vehicle is equipped with.
6. Compare the applicable deployment loops that were identified using the schematics to the enabled deployment
loops identified on the scan tool.
Each enabled deployment loop should have the following information. This is only an example. The actual
deployment loops will vary:
• Deployment Loop 1 Type = Driver Steering Wheel Air Bag Stage 1

• Deployment Loop 1 Enabled Status = Enabled
• Deployment Loop 1 Learn Status = Learned
7. For each Deployment Loop [x] Type that is identified, ensure that the following Deployment Loop [x] Enabled
Status is Enabled and Deployment Loop [x] Learn Status is Learned.
If a Deployment Loop [x] Type is identified and the Deployment Loop [x] Learn Status is not
Learned
Equipment is missing from the vehicle. Ensure all the appropriate air bags and pretensioners are
installed on the vehicle. Ensure that all airbag and pretensioner electrical connectors are undamaged and
properly connected, with the TPA engaged. Ensure there is no circuit damage to related wiring and all
in-line connectors are secure. A DTC may also accompany this condition to aid diagnosis, indicating a
circuit fault at the appropriate component.
If a Deployment Loop [x] Type is not identified and the Deployment Loop [x] Learn Status is
Learned
Equipment has been added to the vehicle. Ensure all the appropriate air bags and pretensioners are
installed on the vehicle, with no additional components added. This may include resistors added to the
vehicle to simulate a deployment loop in livery vehicles such as hearses or limousines.
Sensor Configuration Mismatch
1. Using the scan tool, select Inflatable Restraint Sensing and Diagnostic Module.
2. Select Data Displays.
3. Select Sensor Configuration.
4. Each Sensor has the following scan tool parameters:
• Impact Sensor [x] Type
• Impact Sensor [x] Enabled Status
• Impact Sensor [x] Learn Status
5. Utilizing the vehicle schematics, identify the applicable impact sensors that vehicle is equipped with. In some
cases, this may require comparing the schematic information to the vehicle RPO list to determine which
impact sensors the vehicle is equipped with.
6. Compare the applicable impact sensors that were identified using the schematics to the enabled impact sensors
identified on the scan tool.
Each enabled impact sensor should have the following information. This is only an example. The actual impact
sensors will vary:
34 of 76
• Impact Sensor 3 Type = Center Front
• Impact Sensor 3 Enabled Status = Enabled
• Impact Sensor 3 Learn Status = Learned
7. For each Impact Sensor [x] Type that is identified, ensure that the following Impact Sensor [x] Enabled Status
is Enabled and Impact Sensor [x] Learn Status is Learned.
If an Impact Sensor [x] Type is identified and the Impact Sensor [x] Learn Status is not Learned
Equipment is missing from the vehicle. Ensure all the appropriate impact sensors are installed on the
vehicle. Ensure that all impact sensor electrical connectors are undamaged and properly connected, with
the TPA engaged. Ensure there is no circuit damage to related wiring and all in-line connectors are
secure. A DTC may also accompany this condition to aid diagnosis, indicating a circuit fault at the
appropriate component.
If an Impact Sensor [x] Type is not identified and the Impact Sensor [x] Learn Status is Learned
Equipment has been added to the vehicle. Ensure all the appropriate impact sensors are installed on the
vehicle, with no additional components added.
Repair Instructions
For the control module replacement, programming, and setup refer to: Control Module References
K39 LIFTGATE CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

radio, etc.
35 of 76
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with the hands-free liftgate control option (TC2), it
is important to select the correct calibration software for vehicles with or without
this option as programming the liftgate with the incorrect software will cause the
power liftgate system to become inoperative without any DTCs indicated
NOTE: The liftgate must be completely closed and latched, if the liftgate is open or ajar
during programming, the power liftgate system may become inoperative without
any DTCs indicated
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K39 Liftgate Control Module - Programming and follow the
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K39 Liftgate Control Module - Setup and follow the on-
4. At the end of programming, choose the "Clear All DTCs" function on the SPS screen.
5. With a scan tool, perform the Liftgate Relearn. Refer to Liftgate Calibration
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with the hands-free liftgate control option (TC2), it
is important to select the correct calibration software for vehicles with or without
this option as programming the liftgate with the incorrect software will cause the
power liftgate system to become inoperative without any DTCs indicated
NOTE: The liftgate must be completely closed and latched, if the liftgate is open or ajar
during programming, the power liftgate system may become inoperative without
any DTCs indicated
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K39 Liftgate Control Module - Programming and follow the
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K39 Liftgate Control Module - Setup and follow the on-
5. With a scan tool, perform the Liftgate Relearn - Refer to Liftgate Calibration
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for liftgate control module replacement, programming and setup
K40D SEAT MEMORY CONTROL MODULE - DRIVER: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

36 of 76
radio, etc.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K40D Seat Memory Control Module - Driver - Programming
3. Clear DTCs.
4. Move the seat to a central, middle range position, then perform the memory store operation for memory "1",
"2", and "Exit" or "3" if equipped. Refer to the Owner's Manual for storing memory seat positions.
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
37 of 76
K40P SEAT MEMORY CONTROL MODULE - PASSENGER: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

radio, etc.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K40P Seat Memory Control Module - Passenger -
3. Clear DTCs.
3. All OK.
38 of 76
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K43 POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

radio, etc.
Diagnostic Aids
The Electric Power Steering Control Module is part of the power steering assist motor assembly and is electronically
paired with the steering gear's sensors.
If communication with the OLD power steering control module cannot be established, then replace the entire steering
gear as an assembly. Do NOT proceed with replacement of just the power steering assist motor. Refer to Electric
Dual Pinion Rack and Pinion Steering Gear Replacement
NOTE: During the procedures listed below, critical data is retrieved from vehicle
components and stored in the scan tool computer's hard drive. This data is needed
during the programming and setup sequences. Ensure the same scan tool is used
and capable of reading, storing, and writing the vehicle's system data.
If communication with the OLD power steering control module cannot be

established, then replace the entire steering gear as an assembly. Do NOT proceed
with replacement of just the power steering assist motor. Refer to Electric Dual
39 of 76
Pinion Rack and Pinion Steering Gear Replacement
NOTE: When replacing the entire steering gear, follow the steps for Reprogram Control
Module.
NOTE: Step 1 copies the worm gear wear counter data from the power steering
control module PRIOR to the module's removal and stores it on the scan tool
computer's hard drive.
AFTER completing step 1, the power steering control module can now be
removed and replaced.
1. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K43 Power Steering Control Module - Prepare Control
Module for Removal and follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Replace the Power Steering Control Module. Refer to Control Module References.
NOTE: The next two steps will transfer the vehicle's critical data, including the worm
gear wear counter data saved in step 1, back to the vehicle components.
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K43 Power Steering Control Module - Programming and
5. Ignition ON.
6. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K43 Power Steering Control Module - Setup and
Configuration and follow the on-screen instructions.
7. Clear DTCs.
To reprogram an existing control module, or if a new steering gear assembly has been installed, perform the
following procedure:
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K43 Power Steering Control Module - Programming and
4. Ignition ON.
5. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K43 Power Steering Control Module - Setup and
Configuration and follow the on-screen instructions.
6. Clear DTCs.
40 of 76
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K47 REAR DIFFERENTIAL CLUTCH CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

properly.
radio, etc.
Diagnostic Aids
• If replacing the Rear Differential Clutch Control Module, but not the assembly, the module needs to be
configured with the rear differential clutch service calibration values. The rear differential clutch calibration
values will need to be retrieved from the old Rear Differential Clutch Control Module during Prepare the
Control Module for Removal process and programmed into the new Rear Differential Clutch Control Module
using SPS.
41 of 76
• If replacing only the Rear Differential Clutch Control Module, run Prepare the Control Module for Removal.
• If replacing the rear differential clutch assembly and keeping the old RDCM, the RDCM will only need to be
configured with the number stamped on the housing using a scan tool.
• If original Rear Differential Clutch Control Module is not communicating, skip the Prepare the Control
Module for Removal step.
Replace and Program Control Module Using Existing Rear Differential Assembly
NOTE: Steps 1-3 must be performed BEFORE the old K47 Rear Differential Clutch
Control Module is removed from the vehicle.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module - Prepare the
Control Module for Removal and follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Replace the K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module.
4. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module - Programming
5. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module - Setup and
NOTE: RPO G99 = Twin Clutch System
6. Clear DTCs.
Replace and Program Control Module With New Rear Differential Assembly
NOTE: When replacing a rear differential assembly in a 2015 - 2017 vehicle, the
service assembly will include a new K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control
Module. This new K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module has advanced
cyber security features for 2018 and newer vehicles and is incompatible with
2015 - 2017 vehicles. To ensure compatibility on 2015 - 2017 vehicles, the rear
differential clutch calibrations must be extracted from the new K47 Rear
Differential Clutch Control Module and programmed to the original K47 Rear
Differential Clutch Control Module. The following must be performed in the
specified order to ensure the calibration is successfully transferred. 2018 and
newer vehicles are programmed normally, with the new module.
1. Install the new rear differential assembly with new K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module.
42 of 76
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module - Prepare the
Control Module for Removal and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Replace the new K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module with the original K47 Rear Differential Clutch
Control Module.
7. Clear DTCs.
4. Clear DTCs.
2. Verify the K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module can be reprogrammed.
If the K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module cannot be reprogrammed
2. Verify the K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module can be reprogrammed.
If the control module cannot be reprogrammed, replace the K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control
Module.
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If the K47 Rear Differential Clutch Control Module can be reprogrammed
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
43 of 76
K56 SERIAL DATA GATEWAY MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

radio, etc.
To program a replacement or an existing K56 Serial Data Gateway Module, perform the following procedure:
NOTE: When programming K56 Serial Data Gateway Module, both processor 1 and
processor 2 need to be updated. After programming processor 1, re-enter SPS
and program processor 2.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K56A Serial Data Gateway Module Processor 1 -
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K56B Serial Data Gateway Module Processor 2 -
4. Clear DTCs.
1. Ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode. Ensure the control module, DLC and programming tool connections are
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF for one minute, ignition ON/Vehicle In Service Mode.
44 of 76
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K60 STEERING COLUMN LOCK MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

radio, etc.
Replace and Program Column Lock Control Module
To program a replacement column lock control module, perform the following procedure:
NOTE: Before reprogramming, to ensure that the column lock password from the BCM is
learned: turn ignition ON and then OFF, close all doors, and wait 5 minutes.
1. Ignition ON.
3. If available, on the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K60 Column Lock Control Module - Prepare
Control Module For Removal and follow the on-screen instructions.
45 of 76
NOTE: The Prepare Control Module for Removal function can only be performed when
communication with the old control module is still possible
4. Replace the Column Lock Module. Refer to: Control Module References
5. Ignition ON for 10 seconds, ignition OFF.
6. Close all doors and wait 5 minutes.
7. Ignition ON.
8. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K60 Column Lock Control Module - Programming and
9. Clear DTCs.
Reprogram Column Lock Control Module
NOTE: Before reprogramming, to ensure that the steering column lock password from the
BCM is learned: turn ignition ON and then OFF, close all doors, and wait 5 minutes.
To reprogram an existing column lock control module, perform the following procedure:
1. Ignition ON for 10 seconds, ignition OFF.

2. Close all doors and wait 5 minutes.
3. Ignition ON.
5. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K60 Column Lock Control Module - Programming and
6. Clear DTCs.
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K68 TRAILER LIGHTING CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
46 of 76
pack disconnected from the AC voltage supply
radio, etc.
Diagnostic Aids
Ensure that the following conditions exist in order to prepare for K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module programming
or configuration:
1. The battery is fully charged.

2. The MDI data link connectors are secure.
3. The scan tool is loaded with the most current software version.
4. All disconnected modules and devices are reconnected securely.
5. This entire procedure has been reviewed before proceeding.
The following service instructions reflect either a re-programming or configuration event performed to complete a
repair procedure.
K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module Programming
Do not re-program the K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module unless directed by a service procedure or a service
bulletin.
1. Access the Service Programming System (SPS) and follow the on-screen instructions. Refer to Service
Programming System (SPS).
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module - Programming and
3. Clear DTCs after completing the programming procedure.
If the trailer lighting control module fails to accept the program, verify all scan tool and trailer lighting control
module connections are secure.
47 of 76
K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module Configuration/Reconfiguration and Setup
If the K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module is replaced or installed as an after sales accessory, both the
configuration/reconfiguration and setup procedures must be performed.
1. Access the Service Programming System (SPS) and follow the on-screen instructions. Refer to Service
Programming System (SPS).
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K68 Trailer Lighting Control Module - Configuration and
Setup.
3. On the Control Module - Configuration and Setup Function(s) screen, select both ECU
Configuration/Reconfiguration and ECU Setup menu options and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Clear DTCs after completing the configuration/reconfiguration and setup procedures.
If the trailer lighting control module fails to accept the configuration/reconfiguration and setup procedures, verify all
scan tool and trailer lighting control module connections are secure.
1. Ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode. Ensure the control module, DLC and programming tool connections are
1. Ignition/Vehicle OFF for one minute, ignition ON/Vehicle in Service Mode.
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K71 TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP (9T50 (M3H) OR 9T60
(MJD))
Special Tools
NOTE: • DO NOT program a control module unless directed to do by a service

procedure or service bulletin. If the control module is not properly configured
with the correct calibration software, the control module will not control all of
the vehicle features properly.
48 of 76
as: interior lights (including daytime running lights), HVAC, radio, etc.
To program a replacement K71 Transmission Control Module (TCM), perform the following procedure:
1. Replace the K71 Transmission Control Module.

2. Install EL-49642 SPS programming support tool
NOTE: If both controller options below are listed, select K71 Transmission
Control Module
• K20/K71 Engine and Transmission Control Modules and follow the on-screen instructions
• K71 Transmission Control Module and follow on-screen instructions.
5. Perform the Refresh Characterization Data at the MCVM Characterization procedure, follow the on-screen
instructions.
6. Perform the Vehicle Setup, follow the on screen instructions.
7. With a scan tool, clear DTCs from the K71 Transmission Control Module.
8. Ignition OFF for 2 minutes.
To program an existing K71 Transmission Control Module, perform the following procedure.

Control Module
49 of 76
6. Ignition OFF, allow vehicle systems to power down.
NOTE: If may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
7. Perform the Service Fast Learn (SFL), follow the on screen instructions.
NOTE: If the transmission fluid temperature is not between 75 to 85Â°C (167 to

185Â°F) the scan tool will not allow the procedure to be performed.
Reprogram Control Module after Transmission Repair/Replacement
To program an existing K71 Transmission Control Module, after a transmission repair/replacement, perform the
following procedure:

Control Module
4. Perform the Refresh Characterization Data at the MCVM Characterization procedure, follow the on-screen
instructions.
7. Ignition OFF, allow vehicle systems to power down.
NOTE: If may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
8. Perform the Service Fast Learn (SFL), follow the on screen instructions.
NOTE: If the transmission fluid temperature is not between 75Â°C (167Â°F) and 85Â°C
(185Â°F) the scan tool will not allow the procedure to be performed.
In the event of an interrupted or unsuccessful programming event, perform the following:
1. Ignition ON. Ensure the control module, DLC, and programming tool connections are secure and the SPS
If the control module cannot be programmed
1. Ignition OFF for 2 minutes, ignition ON.
If the control module cannot be programmed, replace the K71 Transmission Control Module.
50 of 76
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for TCM replacement, programming and setup
K73 TELEMATICS COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND

SETUP (UI3 WITHOUT UDA)

radio, etc.
Diagnostic Aids
• It is critical to use the service replacement Communication Interface Module only in the vehicle for which it
was ordered.
• Failure to perform the following procedures will result in a red LED, DTC(s) being set, and limited or
incomplete OnStarÂ® services.
• A test call is required to complete the procedure.
• On vehicles up fitted with TTY capabilities, it is necessary to perform a power cycle of the OnStarÂ®
Interface Module (OTIM), and toggle the TTY mode after completing the Communication Interface Module
installation and setup procedures.
51 of 76
2. In the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K73 Telematics Communication Interface Control Module
Programming and Service Activation and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Ensure the ignition is ON and the vehicle has not moved for at least one minute.
5. Press and hold the TEST button on the telematics communication interface keypad assembly for at least 4 sec.
6. You will hear "Emergency call system test in progress", then follow the audible instructions.
7. Upon completion perform 3 ignition cycles.
3. All OK.
3. All OK.

SETUP (UE1 WITHOUT UDA)
52 of 76
radio, etc.
Diagnostic Aids
• It is critical to use the service replacement K73 Telematics Communication Interface Module only in the
vehicle for which it was ordered.
• Failure to perform the following procedures will result in a red LED, DTC(s) being set, and limited or
incomplete OnStarÂ® services.
• An OnStarÂ® button press to the OnStarÂ® call center is required to complete the procedure.
• To fully activate an OnStarÂ® module, both the setup and activation request procedures must be completed on
all vehicles with and without an active OnStarÂ® subscription to insure the unit has been setup properly for
the vehicle it has been installed into and also to update the OnStarÂ® with the correct unit information.
• To initialize the Turn-by-Turn feature, the vehicle must first be driven In open sky condition at speeds greater
than 10 mph (16 kph) or more for a minimum of 5 miles (8 km), and perform at least 2 left and 2 right 90
degree turns coming to complete stops prior to each turn.
• On vehicles up fitted with TTY capabilities, it is necessary to perform a power cycle of the OnStarÂ®
Interface Module (OTIM), and toggle the TTY mode after completing the Communication Interface Module
installation and setup procedures.
3. Clear DTCs.
4. Press the OnStarÂ® Blue Button to call OnStarÂ® and have the system activated.
53 of 76
3. All OK.
3. All OK.

SETUP (UDA)

radio, etc.
54 of 76
3. Clear DTCs.
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
K84 KEYLESS ENTRY CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
Special Tools

properly.
SPS programming support tool to maintain system voltage. If not available,
voltage supply. DO NOT connect a battery charger.
radio, etc.
55 of 76
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K84 Keyless Entry Control Module - Programming and
K85 PASSENGER PRESENCE MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

Vehicle
This control module does not require SPS programming but does require the following setup procedures after a new
control module is installed: Passenger Presence System Rezeroing
K89 IMMOBILIZER CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

This ECU does not require SPS programming or any setup procedures.
K99 STEERING COLUMN POSITION CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
When replacing the steering column tilt wheel and telescope control module, steering column tilt motor, or steering
column telescope motor, the steering column tilt wheel and telescope control module learn procedure must be
followed. Refer to Steering Column Tilt Wheel and Telescope Control Module Learn steering column tilt wheel
and telescope control module learn procedure.
K115 REDUCTANT CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

Vehicle

56 of 76

2. Access SPS and follow the on-screen instructions for the control module: K115 Reductant Control Module
3. Access SPS and follow the on-screen instructions for the control module: K115 Reductant Control Module

3. Access SPS and follow the on-screen instructions for the control module: K115 Reductant Control
Module
If the programming is not successful - Replace the component: K115 Reductant Control Module
4. All OK.
4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
57 of 76
K124 ACTIVE SAFETY CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

or a service bulletin. If the active safety control module is not properly
configured with the correct calibration software, the active safety control
module will not control all of the vehicle features properly.
programming or programming failure, active safety control module damage
may occur.
voltage supply.
radio, etc.
Replace and Program Active Safety Control Module or Reprogram Active Safety Control Module
NOTE: Due to continuous improvements, the on screen selections may vary from
instructions below.
To program a replacement or an existing K124 Active Safety Control Module, perform the following procedure:
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K124 Active Safety Control Module - Programming and
3. Clear DTCs.
1. Ignition ON. Ensure the active safety control module, DLC and programming tool connections are secure and
the SPS software is up to date.
2. Verify the K124 Active Safety Control Module can be reprogrammed.
If the K124 Active Safety Control Module cannot be reprogrammed
2. Verify the K124 Active Safety Control Module can be reprogrammed.
58 of 76
If the active safety control module cannot be reprogrammed, replace the K124 Active Safety
Control Module.
Go to next step: If the K124 Active Safety Control Module can be reprogrammed.
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If the K124 Active Safety Control Module can be reprogrammed
3. All OK.
K134D SEAT BOLSTER MEMORY CONTROL MODULE - DRIVER: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
K134P SEAT BOLSTER MEMORY CONTROL MODULE - PASSENGER: PROGRAMMING AND

SETUP
K157 VIDEO PROCESSING CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP (UV2)

radio, etc.
• Programming must begin with the Ignition/Vehicle OFF. Programming will
direct the appropriate control module(s) to change power mode as needed
during the procedure, independent of the vehicle's power mode.
• To prevent programming failure due to unintended wireless drops, it is
recommended that a wired MDI connection be used when programming the
control module.
Special Tools
EL-52100 Multiple Diagnostic Interface 2 (MDI 2)
59 of 76
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K157 Video Processing Control Module - Programming and
4. Clear DTCs.
5. Calibrate Vehicle Processing Control Module. Refer to: Video Processing Control Module Calibration
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K157 Video Processing Control Module - Programming and
4. Clear DTCs.
5. Calibrate Vehicle Processing Control Module. Refer to: Video Processing Control Module Calibration
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K160 BRAKE SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

60 of 76
radio, etc.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K160 Brake System Control Module - Programming and
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K160 Brake System Control Module - Setup and follow the
4. Clear DTCs.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select K160 Brake System Control Module - Programming and
3. Clear DTCs.
61 of 76
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
K171 HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE SENSOR CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

Replace and Program The Control Module
To program a replacement K171 Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor Control Module, perform the following procedure:
1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle.

2. Select Module Diagnosis:
3. Select K39 Liftgate Control Module:
4. Select Configuration/Reset Functions:
5. Select Remove/Reset Module:
6. Select K171 Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor Control Module Calibration:
7. Press "Enter" and follow the on screen instructions:
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for the hands-free liftgate sensor control module replacement, programming and setup
K182 PARKING ASSIST CONTROL MODULE: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

radio, etc.
62 of 76
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, under Select Controller, select K182 Parking Assist Control
Module.
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, under Select Function/Sequence, select Programming and follow on
4. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, under Select Function/Sequence, select Configuration and follow
5. Clear DTCs.
Do not reprogram the parking assist control module, unless directed by a service procedure, or a service bulletin.
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, under Select Controller, select K182 Parking Assist Control
Module.
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, under Select Function/Sequence, select Programming and follow on
4. Clear DTCs.
1. Ignition ON. Ensure the K182 Parking Assist Control Module, DLC and programming tool connections are
2. Verify the parking assist control module can be reprogrammed.
If the K182 Parking Assist Control Module cannot be reprogrammed
2. Verify the parking assist control module can be reprogrammed.
If the K182 Parking Assist Control Module cannot be reprogrammed, replace the parking assist
control module.
Go to next step: If the K182 Parking Assist Control Module can be reprogrammed.
3. All OK.
Go to next step: If the K182 Parking Assist Control Module can be reprogrammed
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
63 of 76
P16 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

properly.
as; interior lights, exterior lights (including daytime running lights), and HVAC.
• To prevent programming failure due to unintended wireless drops, It is
recommended that a wired MDI connection be used when reprogramming the
Instrument Cluster
Diagnostic Aids
The programming steps in the Service Programming System (SPS) screens may not be in functional order. Be sure to
follow the programming steps in the order listed below.
Replace and Program ECU
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select P16 Instrument Cluster - Programming and follow the on-
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select P16 Instrument Cluster - Setup and Configuration and follow
NOTE: • The USB File Transfer procedure is performed after the new Instrument
Cluster is installed in the vehicle. This procedure requires the use of a
USB memory stick. The radio must be on during this procedure. The USB
File Transfer procedure is not required for vehicles with UDC.
64 of 76
used.
• The USB File Transfer procedure is normally performed with the Ignition
ON/Vehicle in Service Mode. If USB File Transfer fails in Ignition
ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, attempt USB File Transfer again with the
engine running.
4. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select P16 Instrument Cluster - USB File Transfer and follow the
Reprogram ECU
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select P16 Instrument Cluster - Programming and follow the on-
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select P16 Instrument Cluster - Setup and Configuration and follow
NOTE: • The USB File Transfer procedure requires the use of a USB memory stick.
The radio must be on during this procedure. The USB File Transfer
procedure is not required for vehicles with UDC.
used.
• The USB File Transfer procedure is normally performed with the Ignition
ON/Vehicle in Service Mode. If USB File Transfer fails in Ignition
ON/Vehicle in Service Mode, attempt USB File Transfer again with the
engine running.
4. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select P16 Instrument Cluster - USB File Transfer and follow the
P16 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP (TERRAIN ONLY)
65 of 76
properly.
as; interior lights, exterior lights (including daytime running lights), and HVAC.
• To prevent programming failure due to unintended wireless drops, It is
recommended that a wired MDI connection be used when reprogramming the
Instrument Cluster
Diagnostic Aids
The programming steps in the Service Programming System (SPS) screens may not be in functional order. Be sure to
follow the programming steps in the order listed below.
Replace and Program ECU
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select Instrument Cluster - Programming and follow the on-screen
instructions.
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select Instrument Cluster - Setup and Configuration and follow the
NOTE: • The USB File Transfer procedure is performed after the new Instrument
Cluster is installed in the vehicle. This procedure requires the use of a
USB memory stick. The radio must be on during this procedure.
used.
• The USB receptacle used only for programming is the X22 USB Drive
Data Connector which is located behind the dash, to the left of the
66 of 76
steering column
4. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select Instrument Cluster - USB File Transfer and follow the on-
5. If Instrument Cluster fails to read file from USB memory stick, refer to Instrument Cluster Programming
Malfunction (with UDD only)
Reprogram ECU
2. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select Instrument Cluster - Programming and follow the on-screen
instructions.
3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select Instrument Cluster - Setup and Configuration and follow the
NOTE: • The USB File Transfer procedure requires the use of a USB memory stick.
The radio must be on during this procedure. The USB File Transfer
procedure is not required for vehicles with UDC.
used.
• The USB Receptacle used only for programming is the X22 USB Drive
Data Connector which is located behind the dash, to the left of the
steering column
4. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select Instrument Cluster - USB File Transfer and follow the on-
5. If Instrument Cluster fails to read file from USB memory stick, refer to Instrument Cluster Programming
Malfunction (with UDD only)
P29 HEAD-UP DISPLAY: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP
This device requires no programming or setup.
67 of 76
T3 AUDIO AMPLIFIER: PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

properly.
as; interior lights, exterior lights (including daytime running lights), HVAC, etc.
Diagnostic Aids
During programming you may be required to select multiple calibrations dependent upon vehicle equipment. Have
the vehicle build/RPO information available during the following procedure to ensure the correct calibrations are
selected.
1. Ignition ON, Vehicle OFF

3. On the SPS Supported Controllers screen, select T3 Audio Amplifier - Programming and follow the on-screen
instructions.
4. Clear DTCs.
68 of 76
3. All OK.
3. All OK.
FUEL PUMP POWER CONTROL MODULE PROGRAMMING AND SETUP

This ECU does not require SPS programming.
SERVICE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM (SPS)
For step-by-step control module programming instructions, please refer to the techline information system (TIS)
terminal.
Review the information below to ensure proper programming protocol.
NOTE: • DO NOT program a control module unless you are directed by a service
procedure or you are directed by a General Motors service bulletin.
Programming a control module at any other time will not permanently correct a
customers concern.
• It is essential that the TIS terminal, MDI/MDI2, and/or Scan Tool, is equipped
with the latest software before performing service programming.
• Some modules will require additional programming/setup events to be
performed before or after programming.
• Some vehicles may require the use of a CANDi or MDI/MDI2 module for
programming.
• Review the appropriate service information for these procedures.
• DTCs may set during programming. Clear DTCs after programming is
complete.
• Clearing powertrain DTCs will set the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) system
status indicators to NO.
Ensure the following conditions are met before programming a control module:
1. Vehicle system voltage:

• There is not a charging system concern. All charging system concerns must be repaired before
programming a control module.
• Battery voltage is greater than 12 volts but less than 16 volts. The battery must be fully charged before
programming the control module.
69 of 76
• Turn OFF or disable any system that may put a load on the vehicles battery, such as the following
components:
Interior lights
Exterior lights including daytime running lights (DRL) - Applying the parking brake, on most
vehicles, disables the DRL system
Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems
Engine cooling fans
Radio, etc.
2. The ignition switch must be in the proper position. SPS prompts you to turn ON the ignition, with the engine
OFF. DO NOT change the position of the ignition switch during the programming procedure, unless instructed
to do so.
3. Make certain all tool connections are secure, including the following components and circuits:
• Scan Tool
The RS-232 communication cable port
The connection at the data link connector (DLC)
The voltage supply circuits
• MDI/MDI2
The USB, Ethernet or Wireless communication port
The connection at the data link connector (DLC)
4. DO NOT disturb the tool harnesses while programming. If an interruption occurs during the programming
procedure, programming failure or control module damage may occur.
1. DO NOT turn the ignition OFF. Ensure that all control module and DLC connections are secure and the TIS
terminal operating software is up to date.
2. Attempt to reprogram the control module.
3. If the control module can still not be programmed, turn the ignition OFF for at least one minute.
4. Turn the ignition ON and attempt to reprogram the control module. The control module should program.
If the control module still cannot be programmed, replace the control module.
After successfully programming the control module, ensure that all post programming procedures are performed;
refer to Control Module References for the appropriate control module Programming and Setup document for any
required procedures.
Q77 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CHARACTERIZATION PROGRAMMING
The solenoids in this transmission require unique performance characteristic data in order to function at maximum
efficiency. This data is programmed and stored in the vehicle's transmission control module (TCM). When a
transmission assembly, TCM, or solenoids are replaced during service, the performance characteristic data for the
solenoids must be retrieved from a web server "cloud" repository and reprogrammed into the TCM.
Reprogramming also ensures that the characteristic data relationship is properly matched between the solenoids,
valve body, and transmission.
Solenoid characterization reprogramming is performed using the TIS2Web Service Programming System (SPS).
Solenoid Reprogramming Procedure
70 of 76
Perform solenoid characterization reprogramming after one of the following service procedures:
NOTE: Select "Replace Transmission" at the MCVM Characterization selection screen.
• Replace transmission assembly
NOTE: Select "Replace Valve Body" at the MCVM Characterization selection screen.
• Replace valve body assembly
NOTE: Select "Replace Solenoid" at the MCVM Characterization selection screen.
• Replace solenoid (currently not an available Service Procedure)
NOTE: Select "Refresh Characterization Data" at the MCVM Characterization selection

screen.
• Replace TCM
To perform solenoid characterization after a transmission component replacement:
1. Document the new Transmission Unique Number (TUN) or Part Unique Number (PUN) as required.
• The TUN location may be found here: Transmission Identification Information . Since the TUN can
be difficult to access when the transmission is installed in the vehicle, ensure you document the 16-digit
TUN prior to installing the transmission in the vehicle.
• The PUN location may be found here: Control Valve Solenoid Body Identification Information .
Before installing the control valve solenoid body onto the transmission, document the 16-digit PUN. If
the control valve solenoid body PUN has not been saved for reference, it may be necessary to
disassemble the control valve solenoid body from the transmission to clearly read the control valve
solenoid body PUN.
2. Log into TIS2Web/SPS.
3. Type the vehicle identification number (VIN).
4. Perform the SPS Transmission Control Module programming event.
• Select "Transmission Control Module - Programming" to update TCM calibrations and Solenoid
Characterization data.
OR
• Select "Transmission Control Module - MCVM Operations" to update Solenoid Characterization data
only.
5. From the "MCVM (Mechanical Characterization and Virtual Matching) Operation Selection" screen, select the
applicable service procedure to be performed. You will be prompted to provide the necessary Transmission
Unique Number (TUN) or Part Unique Number (PUN) when replacing a transmission part.
At this point, the system will read the VIN from the engine control module (ECM) using the multiple diagnostic
interface (MDI) and then retrieve the applicable genealogy data tree from the cloud. This data tree accesses the
original characterization data so that it may be updated with the new component information. The system acquires
characterization data for the given TUN/PUN via the cloud and updates the genealogy tree. The TCM is updated
with the correct solenoid characterization data, and the cloud is updated with the new genealogy relationship.
71 of 76
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool
EL-46079
Tire Pressure
Monitor Diagnostic
Tool
72 of 76
Tool
EL-47955
Multi Diagnostic
Interface (MDI)
73 of 76
Tool
EL-50448
Tire Pressure
Monitor Sensor
Activation Tool
74 of 76
Tool
EL-52100
Multi Diagnostic
Interface 2 (MDI 2)
75 of 76
Tool
EL-52545
Tire Pressure
Monitor Sensor and
RF Diagnostic Tool
76 of 76
Remote Functions - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Roof Console Bolt 1.5 N.m (13 lb in)

REMOTE FUNCTION WIRING SCHEMATICS
Keyless Entry - Active
Keyless Entry - Passive and Keyless Start
1 of 79
Garage Door Opener (UG1)

DTC B305D
DTC Descriptors
DTC B305D
Challenge Active Circuit
2 of 79

Challenge Active B305D 02 - B305D 01 -
The body control module (BCM) communicates with the remote control door lock receiver through the keyless
entry challenge active circuit. The challenge active signal is activated by the keyless entry control module and
sent to the BCM when active communication between the vehicle and the keyless entry transmitter is initiated.
• System voltage between 9 - 16 V

• Signal output activated by the keyless entry control module
B305D 01
A short to voltage is detected on the challenge active circuit.
B305DB 02
A short to ground is detected on the challenge active circuit.
No action is taken.
• The current DTC will clear when the malfunction is no longer present.
• A history DTC will clear after 50 malfunction-free ignition cycles.
Schematic Reference
• Power Moding Wiring Schematics

• Power Distribution Wiring Schematics
Power Mode Description and Operation
3 of 79
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay. It may
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON, connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 5 and ground circuit terminal 3.
4. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when switching the ignition ON and OFF.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry
Control Module.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry
Control Module, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.
5. Test or replace the KR76 Retained Accessory Power Relay.
Repair Instructions
4 of 79
• Electrical Relay Replacement (Attached to Wire Harness) , or Electrical Relay Replacement
(Within an Electrical Center)
• Control Module References for keyless entry control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B3101
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3101
Keyless Entry Data Link Circuit

B+ B3101 00 B3101 00 - -
Serial Data B3101 00 B3101 00 B3101 00 B3101 00
Serial Data B3101 00 B3101 00 B3101 00 B3101 00
Low Reference - B3101 00 - -
The body control module communicates with the remote control door lock receiver through the keyless entry
serial data circuits. When any button on the keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the transmitter sends a signal to
the remote control door lock receiver. The remote control door lock receiver sends a function request to the
body control module, depending on which button is pressed on the transmitter. The body control module
receives the message and performs the appropriate function.
The body control module monitors for this DTC at all times.
No response is received from the remote control door lock receiver after the body control module requests
information from or sends configuration commands to the remote control door lock receiver.
In the case of power loss, the remote control door lock receiver is disabled for 65 s. Otherwise no action is
taken.
5 of 79
• A current DTC will clear when the fault is no longer present.
• A history DTC will clear after 40 consecutive ignition cycles without a fault present.
Schematic Reference
Remote Function Wiring Schematics
Component Connector End Views
Keyless Entry System Description and Operation (Without ATH), or Keyless Entry System Description
and Operation (With ATH)
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, scan tool disconnected, disconnect the harness connector at the
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 30 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Test for greater than 11.5 V between the B+ circuit terminal 4 and ground.
If 11.5 V or less
Go to next step: If Infinite resistance.
6 of 79
If less than 1 V
If greater than 6 V
6. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 and X2 harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
7. Test for less than 1 V between the K9 Body Control Module serial data circuit terminal 27 X2 and
ground.
If 1 V or greater

8. Ignition OFF.
9. Test for infinite resistance between the K9 Body Control Module serial data circuit terminal 27 X2 and
ground.

10. Test for less than 2 Ω between the K9 Body Control Module serial data circuit terminal 27 X2 and the
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver serial data circuit terminal 2.
If 2 Ω or greater

11. Replace the K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver.
7 of 79
If the DTC sets
Replace the K9 Body Control Module

13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for body control module or remote control door lock receiver replacement,
DTC B3105
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3105
Keyless Entry System Transmitters
The body control module monitors the number of keyless entry transmitters programmed. Until at least one
transmitter is programmed, the body control module determines a malfunction condition exists.
The body control module has been set up without transmitters being programmed.
No keyless entry transmitter programmed to the body control module.
The keyless entry system is inoperative.
A current DTC is cleared when at least one transmitter has been programmed to the body control module.
8 of 79
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify that the transmitter is a correct transmitter for the vehicle. This can be accomplished by comparing
the part number printed on the transmitter to the appropriate part number in the parts catalog.
If the transmitter is incorrect
Go to next step: If the transmitter is correct

2. Program the transmitter. Refer to Remote Control Door Lock and Theft Deterrent Transmitter
Programming.
3. Verify the transmitter has successfully completed the programming procedure.
If the transmitter does not program successfully
Go to next step: If the transmitter programs successfully

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Remote Control Door Lock and Theft Deterrent Transmitter Programming
DTC B3106
9 of 79
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3106
Keyless Entry Data Link
The body control module communicates with the remote control door lock receiver through the keyless entry
serial data circuits. When any button on the keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the transmitter sends a signal to
the remote control door lock receiver. The remote control door lock receiver sends a function request to the
body control module, depending on which button is pressed on the transmitter. The body control module
receives the message and performs the appropriate function.
A keyless transmitter button is pressed.
The transmitter that is sending a signal to the remote control door lock receiver is different from those
transmitters stored in the body control module.
No action is taken.
• A current DTC will clear when the fault is no longer present and the ignition switch is cycled.
Schematic Reference
Component Connector End Views
10 of 79
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. With a valid and learned transmitter, press and release a button on the transmitter.
If DTC B3106 is set
Replace the K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver.

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for remote control door lock receiver replacement, programming, and setup.
DTC B3109-B3113
DTC Descriptors
DTC B3109
Keyless Entry Transmitter 1 Battery
DTC B3110
DTC B3111
11 of 79
DTC B3112
DTC B3113
With each press of a keyless entry transmitter button, a message containing the current battery state of the
transmitter is sent to the remote control door lock receiver, along with the commanded keyless entry function.
The remote control door lock receiver sends this to the body control module to perform the requested function.
Three consecutive low battery signals are received from the same transmitter.
The DTC is cleared when a normal transmitter voltage signal is received from the transmitter that set the DTC.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
12 of 79
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify none of the DTCs listed below are set:

• DTC B3109
• DTC B3110
• DTC B3111
• DTC B3112
• DTC B3113
1. Replace the battery in the appropriate keyless entry transmitter and operate the transmitter three
consecutive times.
If the DTC sets, replace the keyless entry transmitter.
3. All OK.
2. All OK.
DTC B310D-B310F
DTC Descriptors
DTC B310D
DTC B310E
DTC B310F
13 of 79
With each press of a keyless entry transmitter button, a message containing the current battery state of the
transmitter is sent to the remote control door lock receiver, along with the commanded keyless entry function.
The remote control door lock receiver sends this to the body control module to perform the requested function.
Three consecutive low battery signals are received from the same transmitter.
The DTC is cleared when a normal transmitter voltage signal is received from the transmitter that set the DTC.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify none of the DTCs listed below are set:

• DTC B310D
• DTC B310E
• DTC B310F
14 of 79
1. Replace the battery in the appropriate keyless entry transmitter and operate the transmitter three
consecutive times.
If the DTC sets, replace the keyless entry transmitter.
3. All OK.
2. All OK.
DTC B3119
DTC Descriptors
DTC B3119
Keyless Entry Antenna 1

Keyless Entry Antenna Signal -
B3119 02 B3119 05 B3119 05 -
Driver Door
Keyless Entry Antenna Low
B3119 02 B3119 05 B3119 05 -
Reference - Driver Door
The driver door handle antenna is located in the driver door handle assembly and is used to establish low
frequency communications with the keyless entry transmitter. As a vehicle with locked doors is approached
with a keyless entry transmitter and the exterior door handle button is pressed, the keyless entry control module
communicates with the driver door handle keyless entry antenna.
The exterior driver door handle button is pressed within 15 min of last door closing.
B3119 02
The keyless entry control module detects a short to ground on the driver door keyless entry antenna signal
15 of 79
circuit.
B3119 05
The keyless entry control module detects a short to voltage or an open on the driver door keyless entry antenna
signal circuit.
Doors will not unlock/lock when the driver exterior door handle button is pressed.
• A current DTC will clear when the conditions for setting the DTC are no longer present.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC B3122, B3123, or B3124 is not set.

16 of 79
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the T10M Keyless Entry Antenna - Driver Door
Handle, ignition ON.
If 1 V or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module, ignition
ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the T10M Keyless Entry Antenna - Driver Door Handle.
NOTE: When using the MIN MAX function, autorange on the DMM may not
function properly. To ensure accurate test results, turn off autorange and
manually set the DMM range to 000.0 V.
3. Ignition OFF, install a DMM between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground. Set the DMM to capture
DC voltage using the MIN MAX function. Turn off autorange and manually set the DMM range to 000.0
V.
4. Lock the vehicle doors using the keyless entry transmitter. Activate the antenna by pressing the exterior
door handle button.
5. Verify the MAX voltage captured by the DMM is greater than 1 V.
If 1 V or less
6. Test for less than 1 V between the low reference circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If 1 V or greater
ON.
17 of 79
7. Install a DMM between the signal circuit terminal 1 and the low reference circuit terminal 2. Set the
DMM to capture DC voltage using the MIN MAX function. Turn off autorange and manually set the
DMM range to 000.0 V.
door handle button.
If 1 V or less
10. Replace the T10M Keyless Entry Antenna - Driver Door Handle.
door handle button.
If DTC B3119 is set
Replace the K84 Keyless Entry Control Module.

13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Front Side Door Outside Handle Bracket Replacement

• Control Module References for keyless entry control module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B3120
DTC Descriptors
DTC B3120
18 of 79

B3120 02 B3120 05 B3120 05 -
Passenger Door
B3120 02 B3120 05 B3120 05 -
Reference - Passenger Door
The passenger front door handle antenna is located in the passenger front door handle assembly and is used to
establish low frequency communications with the keyless entry transmitter. As a vehicle with locked doors is
approached with a keyless entry transmitter and the exterior door handle button is pressed, the keyless entry
control module communicates with the passenger front door handle keyless entry antenna.
The exterior door handle button in the passenger front door handle is pressed within 15 min of the last change of
door ajar status for any door.
B3120 02
The keyless entry control module detects a short to ground on the passenger front door keyless entry antenna
signal circuit.
B3120 05
The keyless entry control module detects a short to B+ or an open on the passenger front door keyless entry
antenna signal circuit.
Doors will not unlock/unlock when the passenger exterior door handle button is pressed.
Schematic Reference
19 of 79
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the T10N Keyless Entry Antenna - Passenger Door
Handle, ignition ON.
If 1 V or greater
ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the T10N Keyless Entry Antenna - Passenger Door Handle.
20 of 79
V.
door handle button.
If 1 V or less
If 1 V or greater
ON.
door handle button.
If 1 V or less
10. Replace the T10N Keyless Entry Antenna - Passenger Door Handle.
21 of 79
door handle button.
If DTC B3120 is set

13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Front Side Door Outside Handle Bracket Replacement

• Control Module References for module replacement, programming, and setup
DTC B3121
DTC Descriptors
DTC B3121

B3121 02 B3121 05 B3121 05 -
Rear Fascia
B3121 02 B3121 05 B3121 05 -
Reference - Rear Fascia
The rear fascia antenna is located in the rear fascia assembly and is used to establish low frequency
communications with the keyless entry transmitter. As a vehicle with locked doors is approached with a keyless
entry transmitter and the exterior rear closure touch pad is pressed, the keyless entry control module
communicates with the rear fascia keyless entry antenna.
• The rear closure touch pad is pressed.
22 of 79
• The scan tool activates a device control function to simulate the above action.
B3121 02
The keyless entry control module detects a short to ground on the rear fascia keyless entry antenna signal
circuit.
B3121 05
The keyless entry control module detects a short to B+ or an open on the rear fascia keyless entry antenna signal
circuit.
Rear closure will not open when rear closure touch pad is pressed.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
23 of 79

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the T10G Keyless Entry Antenna - Rear Fascia,
ignition ON.
If 1 V or greater
ON.
V.
4. Lock the vehicle doors using the keyless entry transmitter. Activate the antenna by pressing the rear
closure touch pad.
If 1 V or less
If 1 V or greater
ON.
24 of 79
closure touch pad.
If 1 V or less
10. Replace the T10G Keyless Entry Antenna - Rear Fascia.
closure touch pad.
If DTC B3121 is set

13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Low Frequency Rear Bumper Antenna Replacement

DTC B3122
25 of 79
DTC Descriptors
DTC B3122

B3122 02 B3122 05 B3122 05 -
Center Console Front
Reference - Center Console B3122 02 B3122 05 B3122 05 -
Front
The front center console antenna is located in front of the center console assembly and is used to establish low
frequency communications with the keyless entry transmitter. When the driver attempts to change the ignition
status of the vehicle, the keyless entry control module communicates with the front center console antenna.
Pressing the ignition mode switch.
B3122 02
The keyless entry control module detects a short to ground on the front center console keyless entry antenna
signal circuit.
B3122 05
The keyless entry control module detects a short to B+ or an open on the front center console keyless entry
• Vehicle will not detect the transmitter in some locations inside the vehicle. If the transmitter is not
detected then vehicle will not change ignition modes when ignition mode switch is pressed.
• The exterior passive entry will be disabled.
26 of 79
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the T10J Keyless Entry Antenna - Center Console
Front, ignition ON.
If 1 V or greater
ON.
manually set the DMM range to 0 - 400/600 V.
DC voltage using the PEAK MIN MAX function. Turn off autorange and manually set the DMM range to
0 - 400/600 V.
4. Activate the antenna by pressing the ignition mode switch.
27 of 79
If 1 V or less
If 1 V or greater
ON.
manually set the DMM range to 0 - 400/600 V.
DMM to capture DC voltage using the PEAK MIN MAX function. Turn off autorange and manually set
the DMM range to 0 - 400/600 V.
If 1 V or less
10. Replace the T10J Keyless Entry Antenna - Center Console Front.
If DTC B3122 is set
28 of 79
13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Low Frequency Instrument Panel Antenna Replacement

DTC B3123
DTC Descriptors
DTC B3123

B3123 02 B3123 05 B3123 05 -
Center Console Rear
B3123 02 B3123 05 B3123 05 -
Reference - Center Console Rear
The rear center console antenna is located in rear of the center console assembly and is used to establish low
frequency communications with the keyless entry transmitter. When the driver attempts to change the ignition
status of the vehicle, the keyless entry control module communicates with the rear center console antenna.
B3123 02
The keyless entry control module detects a short to ground on the rear center console keyless entry antenna
signal circuit.
B3123 05
29 of 79
The keyless entry control module detects a short to B+ or an open on the rear center console keyless entry
Vehicle will not detect the transmitter in some locations inside the vehicle. If the transmitter is not detected then
vehicle will not change ignition modes when ignition mode switch is pressed. The exterior door handle buttons
will not operate the keyless entry system.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the T10K Keyless Entry Antenna - Center Console
Rear, ignition ON.
If 1 V or greater
ON.
30 of 79
V.
If 1 V or less
If 1 V or greater
ON.
If 1 V or less
31 of 79
10. Replace the T10K Keyless Entry Antenna - Center Console Rear.
If DTC B3123 is set

13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Low Frequency Console Antenna Replacement

DTC B3124
DTC Descriptors
DTC B3124
Keyless Entry Antenna 6 Short to Ground
DTC B3124
Keyless Entry Antenna 6 High Voltage/Open

B3124 02 B3124 05 B3124 05 -
Rear Compartment
32 of 79
B3124 02 B3124 05 B3124 05 -
Reference - Rear Compartment
The rear compartment antenna is located on the rear compartment floor near the seat back, centered, and is used
to establish low frequency communications with the keyless entry transmitter. When the driver attempts to
change the ignition status of the vehicle, the keyless entry control module communicates with the rear
compartment antenna.
Diagnostic Aids
• Objects in the trunk may block the reception of the rear mounted antennas. Verify the trunk is free of
large metal objects before performing any diagnostics.
• The keyless entry transmitter must be properly located within the range of an antenna.
B3124 02
The keyless entry control module detects a short to ground on the rear compartment keyless entry antenna
signal circuit.
B3124 05
The keyless entry control module detects a short to B+ or an open on the rear compartment keyless entry
Vehicle will not detect the transmitter in some locations inside the vehicle. If the transmitter is not detected then
vehicle will not change ignition modes when ignition mode switch is pressed.
Schematic Reference
33 of 79
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the T10E Keyless Entry Antenna - Rear Compartment,
ignition ON.
If 1 V or greater
ON.
V.
If 1 V or less
34 of 79
If 1 V or greater
ON.
If 1 V or less
10. Replace the T10E Keyless Entry Antenna - Rear Compartment.
If DTC B3124 is set

13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Low Frequency Rear Compartment Antenna Replacement
35 of 79
SYMPTOMS - REMOTE FUNCTIONS
1. Perform Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that all
of the following are true:
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Keyless
Entry System Description and Operation (Without ATH), or Keyless Entry System Description and
Operation (With ATH).
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Keyless Entry System. Refer to
Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Faulty electrical connections, wiring, terminals, connectors, poor voltage and ground connections, temperature
sensitivity, electromagnetic interference, electrical noise and/or incorrect control module installed may be the
cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .
Symptom List
• Keyless Entry System Malfunction

• Remote Vehicle Start Malfunction
GARAGE DOOR OPENER MALFUNCTION


B+ 1 1 - -
Ground - 1 - -
1. Universal Home Remote Malfunction
36 of 79
The universal home remote is a transmitter operating between 288 and 434 MHz. The universal home remote
has three buttons that may be programmed for individual transmitter/receiver combinations to control up to
three garage doors, security gates, lighting systems, etc. Each button represents a unique transmitter code
section, which operates independently of the other buttons, and may be considered a separate transmitter.
Diagnostic Aids
NOTE: This procedure will clear any learned transmitters from the S25 Garage Door
Opener. This will require reprogramming by the customer to reestablish
universal home remote functionality. The vehicle must be with the item being
programmed, for example at the customer's garage. Programming involves
time-sensitive actions, and may time out causing the procedure to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
1. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter for the garage door opener or device being programmed about 3
to 8 cm (1 to 3 in) away from the Universal Remote system buttons with the indicator light in view..
NOTE: Radio signals for some gate operators follow different rules. It may be
necessary to follow the instructions regarding gates at the end of the
second set of three steps.
2.
3. Press and release one of the three Universal Remote system buttons that you would like to program. Press
and hold the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the hand-held transmitter button until the
indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flashing light or a continuously on light. Then release the
button.
4. Press and hold the newly programmed Universal Remote system button for five seconds while watching
the indicator light and garage door activation.
• If the indicator light stays on continuously or the garage door moves when the button is pressed, then
programming is complete.
• If the indicator light does not come on or the garage door does not move, a second button press may be
required. For a second time, press and hold the newly programmed button for five seconds. If the light
stays on or the garage door moves, programming is complete.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds then changes to a solid light and the garage door does
not move perform the additional 3 steps below.
1. Locate the Learn or Smart button inside the garage on the garage door receiver. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
2. Press and release the Learn or SMart button. The following step, step 3, must be completed within 30
seconds of pressing this button.
3. Inside the vehicle, press and hold the newly programmed Universal Remote system button for three
seconds and then release it. If the garage door does not move or the lamp on the garage door receiver does
not flash, press and hold the same button a second time for three seconds then release it. Again, if the
door does not move or the garage door lamp does not flash, press and hold the same button a third time
for three seconds then release it.
The Universal Remote system should now activate the garage door. Repeat the process for additional buttons.
37 of 79
NOTE: Radio signals for some gate operators follow different rules. Follow these
instructions.
Some radio-frequency laws and gate operators require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several
seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for the Universal Remote system to pick up the signal
during programming.
If the programming did not work, replace Step 2 under "Programming the Universal Remote System" with the
following:
Press and hold the Universal Remote system button while pressing and releasing the hand-held transmitter
button every two seconds until the signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Remote system. The
Universal Remote system indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under
"Programming the Universal Remote System" to complete.
If available, J 41540 Universal Home Remote Tester may be used to diagnose the S25 Garage Door Opener. To
test, press and hold the two outer buttons on the S25 Garage Door Opener for greater than 30 s. The LED on the
S25 Garage Door Opener will illuminate for 20 s, then begin to flash quickly for another 10 s. When the LED
stops flashing, the system has been cleared and placed into default mode. Place the J 41540 Universal Home
Remote Tester so that it is adjacent to the S25 Garage Door Opener. Verify the appropriate J 41540 Universal
Home Remote Tester Indicator Lights illuminate when each button on S25 Garage Door Opener the is pressed,
one at a time. If the tester does not respond to each button press, replace the S25 Garage Door Opener. If the
tester does respond to the button presses, using the Hand Held Transmitter from the J 41540 Universal Home
Remote Tester kit, program a single button on the S25 Garage Door Opener. Refer to the instructions provided
with the J 41540 Universal Home Remote Tester for programming instructions. Verify the Programmed
indicator on the J 41540 Universal Home Remote Tester illuminates when the programmed button on the S25
Garage Door Opener is pressed. If the programmed button does not illuminate, replace the S25 Garage Door
Opener. If the button does illuminate, instruct the customer to program the S25 Garage Door Opener to their
device. Refer to the vehicle owners manual. If further malfunction occurs, a possible rolling code or
incompatibility with the S25 Garage Door Opener will prevent programming.
Schematic Reference
Garage Door Opener Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
38 of 79
Special Tools
J 41540 Universal Home Remote Tester
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S25 Garage Door Opener.
If 10 Ω or greater
Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.

3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the S25 Garage Door Opener.
5. Verify the LED on the S25 Garage Door Opener illuminates or flashes when each button on the S25
Garage Door Opener is pressed.
If the LED does not illuminate or flash when each button is pressed
Replace the S25 Garage Door Opener.
Go to next step: If the LED illuminates or flashes when each button is pressed
6. Instruct the customer to program the S25 Garage Door Opener to their device. Refer to the vehicle owners
manual. If further malfunction occurs, a possible rolling code or incompatibility with the S25 Garage
Door Opener will prevent programming.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for garage door opener replacement, programming, and setup
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
39 of 79
This procedure should be followed for any system malfunction, Service Keyless Start System message, No
Remote Detected message, or Key Missing Look For Key message that does not have a DTC present. All of the
functions and features of the active and passive keyless entry system, along with the tire pressure monitoring
system are tied together through the use of radio frequency to communicate. Determining which features and
functions of the systems have failed will suggest what the fault could be and therefore the best diagnostic
procedure to follow.
The keyless entry transmitters can only be programmed to one vehicle. They can be programmed more than
once but only to the same VIN. Once a keyless entry transmitter is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be
programmed to a different vehicle but it can be programmed to the same VIN as much as necessary to complete
the diagnostic procedures being followed.
The keyless entry antennas are used as short range low frequency (LF) transmitters. The LF signal is at 125
kHz. High frequencies are also used by the system and they are 315 MHz except for vehicles built to be
certified for use in Japan which are 433 MHz. As a vehicle with locked doors is approached with a keyless entry
transmitter (remote key) and the exterior door handle/rear closure touch pad is pressed, the keyless entry
antenna broadcasts a challenge to the remote key in an approximate one meter range. If the response from the
transmitter via radio frequency (RF) is valid, the locked door will be passively unlocked/unlatched and allow
the door to be opened.
A low transmitter battery may cause a system malfunction. More often a malfunction is the result of radio
frequency (RF) interference from aftermarket devices which could include unexpected items such as nearby flat
screen televisions, darkness sensing flood lights, or nearby cell phones. Other more common items that can
cause a malfunction are 2-way radios, power inverters, cellular phone chargers, wireless cellular phone
chargers, computers, 12 V power outlet USB adapters, etc. High RF traffic areas, such as gas stations which use
pay-at-the-pump RF transponders, may also cause interference that could lead to a malfunction.
Diagnostic Aids
The keyless entry antennas must be installed correctly for proper performance. The precise location and
orientation are important for the antenna to have the range and shape of range designed for each antenna
location. There is a possibility that the passive entry system set a false DTC due to the antenna being incorrectly
installed.
Unwanted or inadvertent door lock/unlock activation may be requested by the OnStarÂ® Remote Link app. It is
possible that a customer may be unaware of account usage, resulting in an unwanted or phantom door
lock/unlock. If normal system diagnosis results in an inability to verify the customer's concern, contact
Technical Assistance Center (TAC).
Schematic Reference
40 of 79
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Special Tools
EL-52545 Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor and RF Diagnostic Tool
NOTE: The passive entry system unlocking function can be disabled through the
transmitter or the center stack. The center stack displays the status of the
feature. If the feature is disabled the exterior lights will flash quickly 4 times
when the passive entry door button is pressed. Refer to owners manual for
more information.
In order to determine the best starting point to begin diagnosis first determine which features on the vehicle are
functioning correctly or not. By performing a simple and quick check on the vehicle it can be determined if
there is or isn't a fault in each feature. If any one part of the feature is faulty then the feature status is failed.
Match the status of all four features and go the suggested link to begin diagnosis.
Active Keyless Entry Verification
1. Ignition off, stand approximately 10 meters (33 feet) from the vehicle.
2. Verify the transmitter opens the trunk/rear closure of the vehicle, if equipped.
3. Verify the transmitter locks and unlocks the vehicle.
4. Verify the transmitter other optional functions operate (for example - Panic, Remote Start, Convertible
Top).
If equipped with a trunk/rear closure and not opening or any of the other optional functions
Refer to Keyless Entry Transmitter Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing below,
Go to next step: If the vehicle either does not lock or does not unlock
Go to next step: Continue verification of the other functions. This function is Failed.
Go to next step: If the vehicle locks and unlocks

5. All OK. This function Passed.
41 of 79
Passive Starting Function Status
NOTE: Perform this verification with each of the transmitters separately. If the
concern is only present with one transmitter then the fault is likely with the
one transmitter.
1. Enter the vehicle, ignition OFF.
NOTE: Some transmitters are equipped with a motion detector so that if the
transmitter is left idle for a period of time the vehicle will no longer
respond to the transmitter until it is moved or shaken to activate the
motion sensor. Whether the transmitter being used has the motion sensor
or not can be verified by looking up the part number in the Electronic Parts
Catalog. Starting in model year 2021 most vehicles have transmitters with
the motion sensor but some transmitter part numbers with the motion
sensor can be used as replacements for any year vehicle.
2.
3. Repeat this step with each transmitter separately and with the transmitter not being verified located 5
meters (15 feet) from the vehicle. Place the transmitter on the passenger seat and verify the vehicle starts
using the start/stop switch then move the transmitter to the rear seat and verify the vehicle starts using the
start/stop switch.
If the vehicle does not start with one transmitter
Refer to Keyless Entry Transmitter Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing below.
Go to next step: If the vehicle does not start with both transmitters
4. With the transmitter in the back up pocket and the transmitter battery removed, verify the vehicle starts
using the start/stop switch.
If the vehicle does not start with one transmitter
Go to next step: If the vehicle does not start with both transmitters
1. To verify RF operation place the EL-52545 and the transmitter together while standing 5 meters
(15 feet) from the vehicle and press the transmitter unlock button.
2. Verify the 125 kHz frequency signal output displays at least 20%.
If the 125 kHz frequency signal does not display.
Go to next step: If the 125 kHz frequency signal displays

5. Continue verification of the other functions. This function is Failed.
Go to next step: If the vehicle starts
Passive Entry Function Status
42 of 79
transmitter, the center stack, or an SPS programming event in the keyless
entry control module. The center stack displays the status of the feature.
Refer to owners manual for more information.
1. Ignition off, approach the locked vehicle.

2. Verify the trunk/rear closure, if equipped, opens using the passive entry button or touch pad.
NOTE: Some transmitters are equipped with a motion detector so that if the
transmitter is left idle for a period of time the vehicle will no longer
respond to the transmitter until it is moved or shaken to activate the
motion sensor. Whether the transmitter being used has the motion sensor
or not can be verified by looking up the part number in the Electronic Parts
Catalog. Starting in model year 2021 most vehicles have transmitters with
the motion sensor but some transmitter part numbers with the motion
sensor can be used as replacements for any year vehicle.
3.
4. Verify all the doors unlock and open using the passive entry button or touch pad.
If one or two doors on the same side do not unlock and open or only the trunk/rear closure
does not open
Refer to Keyless Entry Antenna Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing below.
Go to next step: If all the doors do not unlock and open through passive entry
Go to next step: Continue verification of the other functions. This function is Failed.
Go to next step: If all the doors unlock and open through passive entry and the trunk/rear
closure opens
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Function Status
1. Ignition on, enter the vehicle.

2. Verify all four tire pressures are displayed.
If one pressure is not displayed
Refer to
Symptoms - Tire Pressure Monitoring
Go to next step: If all of tire pressures do not display
Go to next step: This function is Failed. Go to the Circuit/System Testing below as indicated by the
Pass/Fail results in the chart.
Go to next step: If all the tire pressures are displayed

3. All OK. This function Passed. Go to the Circuit/System Testing below as indicated by the Pass/Fail
results in the chart.
43 of 79
Active Keyless Tire Pressure Most Probable
Passive Starting
Entry Function Passive Entry Monitoring System Diagnostic Starting
Function Status
Status Function Status Status Point
If one or all four Symptoms - Tire
Passed Passed Passed
readings are missing Pressure Monitoring
All four readings are Remote Control Door
Failed Failed Failed
missing Lock Receiver
All four readings are Malfunction, below in
Failed Passed Passed
missing Circuit/System Testing
All four readings are
Passed Passed Failed Keyless Entry Antenna
present
Malfunction, below in
Passed Failed Passed Circuit/System Testing
present
Passed Failed Failed
present
All four readings are Keyless Entry
Failed Failed Failed
present Transmitter
All four readings are Malfunction, below in
Failed Passed Passed Circuit/System Testing
present
Failed Passed Failed
present
transmitter, the center stack, or an SPS programming event in the keyless entry
control module. The center stack displays the status of the feature. Refer to
owners manual for more information.
Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, scan tool disconnected, disconnect the harness connector at the
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 30 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Test for greater than 11.5 V between the B+ circuit terminal 4 and ground.
If 11.5 V or less
44 of 79
Go to next step: If Infinite resistance.
5. Test for 0.001 - 12 V between the serial data circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If less than 0.001 V
2. Test for less than 0.001 V between the serial data circuit and ground.
If 0.001 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.
If less than 0.001 V, replace the K9 Body Control Module.
Go to next step: If between 0.001 - 12 V
6. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X8 harness connectors at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
7. Test for less than 0.001 V between the K9 Body Control Module serial data circuit terminal 17 X8 and
ground.
If 0.001 V or greater

8. Ignition OFF.
9. Test for infinite resistance between the K9 Body Control Module serial data circuit terminal 17 X8 and
ground.

10. Test for less than 2 Ω between the K9 Body Control Module serial data circuit terminal 17 X8 and the
K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver serial data circuit terminal 2.
If 2 Ω or greater
45 of 79
11. Replace the K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver.
12. Verify the keyless entry functions operate.
If the keyless entry functions do not operate
Go to next step: If the keyless entry functions operate

13. All OK.
Keyless Entry Antenna Malfunction
1. Verify the scan tool Exterior Driver Door Handle Switch, Exterior Passenger Door Handle Switch, and
Trunk Lid Exterior Unlatch Switch parameters change between Active and Inactive while operating their
respective exterior door handle/rear closure touch pad.
If any of the parameters does not change
Refer to Exterior Door Handle Switch Malfunction
Go to next step: If all of the parameters change

2. All OK.
3. Verify that DTC B3119, B3120, B3121, B3122, B3123, or B3124 is not set.

4. To verify RF operation place the EL-52545 and the transmitter together while standing 5 meters (15 feet)
from the vehicle and press the transmitter unlock button.
5. Verify the 125 kHz frequency signal output displays at least 20%.
If the 125 kHz frequency signal displays
All OK, this antenna is functioning. Refer back to the Circuit/System Verification to identify a
different likely cause or an intermittent condition.
Go to next step: If the 125 kHz frequency signal does not display.
6. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate T10 Keyless Entry Antenna that is
related to the fault condition, ignition ON.
If 1 V or greater
ON.
46 of 79
V.
9. Lock the vehicle doors using the keyless entry transmitter. Activate the antenna by operating the
appropriate exterior door handle/rear closure touch pad.
If 1 V or less
If 1 V or greater
ON.
If 1 V or less
47 of 79
Go to next step: If greater than 1V
15. Replace the appropriate T10 Keyless Entry Antenna.
17. Verify that the door/rear compartment unlocks and opens when the exterior door handle/rear closure touch
pad is operated.
If the door/rear compartment does not unlock and open
Go to next step: If the door/rear compartment unlocks and opens

18. All OK.
Keyless Entry Transmitter Malfunction
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that DTC B3119, B3120, B3121, B3122, B3123, or B3124 is not set.

3. Verify the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is functioning by adding air to one tire to see the air pressure
display increase.
If the pressure does not increases
Refer to Symptoms - Tire Pressure Monitoring
Go to next step: If the pressure increases

4. Verify the VIN information for the vehicle transmitter is correct using the EL-52545 .
If the VIN is blank
Refer to Remote Control Door Lock and Theft Deterrent Transmitter Programming.
If the VIN is incorrect
48 of 79
This transmitter is not for this vehicle, it may already be programmed to work with a different
vehicle but cannot be programmed to this vehicle.
Go to next step: If the VIN is correct

5. Verify the frequency of the transmitter matches the frequency of the tire pressure monitoring system and
the remote control door lock receiver using the EL-52545 .
If the transmitter frequency is incorrect
Replace the vehicle transmitter.
Go to next step: If the transmitter frequency is correct

6. Verify the part number information for the vehicle transmitter is correct using the EL-52545 .
If the vehicle transmitter part number is incorrect
Replace the vehicle transmitter.
Go to next step: If the vehicle transmitter part number is correct

7. Verify the transmitter output is above 20% on the EL-52545 signal strength meter by pressing a button on
the transmitter ten times.
If the transmitter output is lower than 20%
Replace the transmitter battery.
NOTE: Before replacing the transmitter, inspect the transmitter battery

contacts for any corrosion or damage. If no corrosion or damage is
found, replace the transmitter battery and retest before replacing the
transmitter.
Go to next step: If the transmitter output is higher than 20%

8. Using the scan tool read the number of transmitters learned in the K9 Body Control Module. Using the
EL-52545 read the number of transmitters learned in the transmitter.
If the transmitters learned is less than the number programmed
Program the transmitter. Refer to Remote Control Door Lock and Theft Deterrent Transmitter
Programming.
Go to next step: If the transmitters learned is equal to the number programmed

9. Using the EL-52545 verify the transmitter is responding to the antenna by placing the transmitter next to
the EL-52545 and pressing the start/stop button. The EL-52545 should display a high frequency (315
MHz or 433 MHz) reading when the start/stop button is pressed.
If the high frequency (315 MHz or 433 MHz) response does not display
Program the transmitter. Refer to Remote Control Door Lock and Theft Deterrent Transmitter
Programming.
1. Using the EL-52545 verify the transmitter is responding to the antenna by placing the transmitter
next to the EL-52545 and pressing the start/stop button. The EL-52545 should display a high
frequency (315 MHz or 433 MHz) reading when the start/stop button is pressed.
49 of 79
If the high frequency (315 MHz or 433 MHz) does not display. Replace the vehicle
transmitter
Go to next step: If the high frequency (315 MHz or 433 MHz) does display
10. Verify the scan tool Exterior Driver Door Handle Switch, Exterior Passenger Door Handle Switch, and
Trunk Lid Exterior Unlatch Switch parameters change between Active and Inactive while operating their
respective exterior door handle/rear closure touch pad.
If any of the parameters does not change
Refer to Exterior Door Handle Switch Malfunction
Go to next step: If all of the parameters change

11. Lock the vehicle using the keyless entry transmitter.
12. Verify that each door and the rear compartment unlocks and opens by approaching the vehicle with a
valid transmitter and operating their respective exterior door handle/rear closure touch pad.
If both doors and the rear compartment do not unlock/unlatch and open
Refer to Remote Control Door Lock Receiver Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing above.
If only one door or the rear compartment does not unlock/unlatch and open
Refer to Keyless Entry Antenna Circuit Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing above.
Go to next step: If both doors and the rear compartment unlocks/unlatches and opens
13. All OK.
14. The concern may be caused by temporary RF interference. Discuss the conditions in which the concern
occurs with the customer. RF interference from aftermarket devices such as 2-way radios, power
inverters, cellular phone chargers, computers, etc. may cause a system malfunction. High RF traffic areas,
such as gas stations which use pay-at-the-pump RF transponders, may also cause interference that could
lead to a malfunction.
Repair Instructions
• Remote Control Door Lock and Theft Deterrent Transmitter Programming

REMOTE VEHICLE START MALFUNCTION

• Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of each diagnostic approach.
Remote vehicle start begins as a radio frequency message received by the body control module (BCM) from a
keyless entry transmitter. The BCM monitors system conditions such as content theft deterrent, hood ajar status,
and body DTCs to determine if a remote vehicle start event will occur. If conditions are determined to be
50 of 79
acceptable, the remote vehicle start message is sent to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM monitors
system conditions such as engine control parameters and vehicle theft deterrent to determine if engine starting
will be allowed. If conditions are acceptable, the ECM will initiate engine starting. During the engine run time
in a remote vehicle start attempt, before the operator enters the vehicle, the ECM may discontinue engine
operation if system conditions require it or a message is received from the BCM requesting the engine be turned
OFF.
Diagnostic Aids
• Unwanted or inadvertent door lock/unlock activation may be requested by the OnStarÂ® Remote Link
application. It is possible that a customer may be unaware of account usage, resulting in an unwanted or
phantom door lock/unlock. If normal system diagnosis results in an inability to verify the customer's
concern, contact Technical Assistance Center (TAC).
• If the vehicle has a current DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), the cause of the
DTC must be diagnosed before proceeding with the Remote Vehicle Start Inoperative diagnostic.
• Only the first and second vehicle transmitters are able to control the remote vehicle start function.
• The remote vehicle start system will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:
A current vehicle DTC that illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
The fuel level is low enough to cause the low fuel indicator to be active
The vehicle is in valet mode
On passive entry equipped vehicles, an additional key fob is left in the vehicle
More than 2 remote starts have been attempted
The hazard switch is in the ON position
A current hazard switch DTC is set
The vehicle hood is ajar
A current hood ajar DTC is set
A current door ajar system fault
A vehicle door is ajar
Incorrect BCM software is installed and vehicle start is not enabled
The content theft deterrent system detects an alarm trigger
Excessive engine RPM
Excessive coolant temperature
Accelerator pedal position greater than 0 percent
Vehicle not in park
Vehicle theft deterrent malfunction
A current automatic transmission shift lock control system DTC is set
A vehicle speed sensor signal is detected by the ECM
Schematic Reference
51 of 79
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Verify that the keyless entry functions operate with all available keyless entry transmitters.
If any keyless entry functions do not operate properly
Refer to Keyless Entry System Malfunction.
Go to next step: If all keyless entry functions operate properly

2. Verify that no Diagnostic Status History or Start Disable items are present in the scan tool BCM Remote
Start Diagnostic Status History and the ECM Remote Vehicle Start Disable History parameters.
If remote vehicle start disable history items are present
Refer to the appropriate subsection in which the malfunction occurred.
Go to next step: If remote vehicle start disable history items are not present
3. Verify all scan tool BCM Content Theft Trigger History parameters display None.
If any BCM Content Theft Trigger History parameter does not display None
Refer to Content Theft Deterrent Malfunction (with UTR) , or Content Theft Deterrent
Malfunction (without UTR) .
Go to next step: If all BCM Content Theft Trigger History parameters display None
4. All OK.
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
IGNITION LOCK KEY TRANSMITTER ANTENNA BRACKET REPLACEMENT
52 of 79
Rear Compartment Floor Stowage Trim Compartment Replacement
Ignition Lock Key Transmitter Antenna Bracket
Procedure
LOW FREQUENCY INSTRUMENT PANEL ANTENNA REPLACEMENT

53 of 79
Low Frequency Instrument Panel Antenna
Procedure
1
2. Release the retaining tab.
LOW FREQUENCY CONSOLE ANTENNA REPLACEMENT

Low Frequency Console Antenna
1 Procedure
Release the retaining tab.
LOW FREQUENCY REAR COMPARTMENT ANTENNA REPLACEMENT
54 of 79
Rear Compartment Floor Stowage Trim Compartment Replacement
Low Frequency Rear Compartment Antenna
Procedure
1
LOW FREQUENCY REAR BUMPER ANTENNA REPLACEMENT

Low Frequency Rear Bumper Antenna
Procedure
1
LOW FREQUENCY REAR BUMPER ANTENNA BRACKET REPLACEMENT
55 of 79
Low Frequency Rear Bumper Antenna Bracket
Procedure
1
KEYLESS ENTRY CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT

Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator Replacement - Right Side
Keyless Entry Control Module
1
Procedure
56 of 79

3. Perform the necessary programming and setup procedure:Control Module
References
KEYLESS ENTRY CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel Insulator Replacement - Right Side
Keyless Entry Control Module Bracket
Procedure
2. Using a flat-bladed plastic trim tool, release the retaining clips.
REMOTE FUNCTION ACTUATOR MODULE REPLACEMENT
57 of 79
Procedure
1
GARAGE DOOR OPENER TRANSMITTER REPLACEMENT

Roof Console Bolt [2x]
1
CAUTION:
58 of 79
Fastener
Caution
Tighten
1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Garage Door Opener Transmitter
2 Procedure
GARAGE DOOR OPENER TRANSMITTER PUSHBUTTON REPLACEMENT

Garage Door Opener Transmitter Replacement
1 Garage Door Opener Transmitter Pushbutton
REMOTE CONTROL DOOR LOCK AND THEFT DETERRENT TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING

Programming Transmitters
Transmitters can be programming in various ways using the procedures outlined below. Using the Replacing
Transmitters procedures will first erase all the known transmitters from the vehicle. Any existing transmitters
and any new transmitters will then be programmed. This procedure should be used any time a transmitter is
required to be unlearned or erased from a vehicle. If a new transmitter is being learned to a vehicle to replace a
damaged, inoperative, or stolen transmitter, the Replacing Transmitters procedure must be used. This ensures
that the old transmitter cannot be used to access or start the vehicle after programming.
The Adding Transmitters procedure does not erase any transmitters prior to programming. The procedure will
simply program the transmitter into the next available slot. The Adding Transmitters procedure should only be
used when adding an additional transmitter to the vehicle. The Adding Keys procedure should never be used to
program a transmitter to a vehicle that is having a transmitter replaced, regardless of the cause for the
replacement.
59 of 79
Replacing Transmitters (Without SPS)
NOTE: • This procedure will unlearn all previously learned transmitters. All
transmitters that are to be programmed must be with the vehicle at the
time of service.
learned.
• This procedure will take approximately 30 minutes to complete.
• A total of eight transmitters can be learned to a single vehicle.
• This procedure will only learn the vehicle transmitter information. This
procedure will not learn any immobilizer information between the body
control module (BCM) and engine control module (ECM).
• This procedure may be used with or without existing learned transmitters
being present. If existing transmitters are present, keep the transmitters
away from the vicinity of the vehicle. Failure to keep learned transmitters
away from the vehicle will result in the learn changing to the Adding
Transmitters procedure.
1. Insert the vehicle key into the key cylinder on the driver door handle and turn the key, counterclockwise,
to the unlock position five times within ten seconds. The driver information center will display Remote
Learn Pending, Please Wait.
2. After ten minutes, the driver information center will display Press Engine Start Button To Learn. Press the
ignition mode switch. The driver information center will again display Remote Learn Pending, Please
Wait.
3. Repeat Step 2 two additional times, for a total of thirty minutes. All previously known transmitters have
now been unlearned. Remaining transmitters can be relearned during the next steps. The driver
information center display will now display Ready For Remote # 1.
NOTE: The transmitter pocket is the front cupholder.
4. Place the new transmitter into the transmitter pocket.

5. Press and release the ignition mode switch. When the transmitter is learned, the driver information center
will indicate that it is ready to program the next transmitter.
6. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket and press the unlock button. To program additional
transmitters, repeat Steps 4 through 6.
7. When all additional transmitters are programmed, press and hold the ignition mode switch for 5 seconds
to exit programming mode.
Replacing Transmitters (With SPS)
NOTE: • This procedure will unlearn all previously learned transmitters. All
transmitters that are to be programmed must be with the vehicle.
learned.
60 of 79
• This procedure may be used with or without existing learned transmitters
being present.
• This procedure will take more than 15 minutes to complete.
procedure.


8. After programming all transmitters, Programming Complete, is displayed.
transmitter and allow passive and active keyless entry functions to be established.
12. Verify each transmitter that was programmed is operating properly. Operate each of the keyless entry
functions using the buttons on the transmitter and then start the vehicle. When verifying operation, make
sure that no other transmitters are near the vehicle.
Adding Transmitters (Without SPS)
NOTE: • To initiate, this procedure requires that 2 learned transmitters be available.

• This procedure adds transmitters only. The procedure does not erase
previously learned transmitters.
61 of 79
1. Place both of the recognized transmitters in the vehicle cupholder.
2. Insert the vehicle key into the key cylinder on the driver door handle and turn the key, counterclockwise,
to the unlock position five times within ten seconds. The driver information center will display Ready For
Remote #2, 3, 4 or 5.
3. Place the new transmitter into the transmitter pocket.

4. Press and release the ignition mode switch. When the transmitter is learned, the driver information center
will indicate that it is ready to program the next transmitter.
5. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket and press the transmitter unlock button. To program
additional transmitters, repeat Steps 3 through 5.
6. When all additional transmitters are programmed, press and hold the ignition mode switch for 15 seconds
to exit programming mode.
Adding Transmitters (With SPS)
NOTE: • This procedure may be used with or without existing learned transmitters
being present.
• This procedure will take more than 15 minutes to complete.
procedure.

62 of 79
8. After programming all transmitters, Programming Complete, is displayed.
transmitter and allow passive and active keyless entry functions to be established.
12. Verify each transmitter that was programmed is operating properly. Operate each of the keyless entry
functions using the buttons on the transmitter and then start the vehicle. When verifying operation, make
sure that no other transmitters are near the vehicle.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The garage door opener is fixed and rolling code capable. Rolling code is a system that allows the code that the
customers receiver receives from the garage door opener to change every time the garage door opener is used
within operating range of the receiver. Rolling code programming requires the customer to push a learn/program
button on the garage door opener receiver at their home. This button is usually located on the receiver unit
under a cover (light cover) on one end of the unit. The customer must follow the garage door opener
manufacturers instructions to program/learn the receiver to accept the Universal Home Remote System as an
authorized opener for their unit. When the receiver and the garage door opener are initially programmed
together, a code is established and a new code is created for every new transmission. The software in the
receiver recognizes the garage door opener and accepts the new code.
The garage door opener is compatible with most, but not all types and brands of transmitters.
The garage door opener is a transmitter operating between 288 - 434 MHz. The power and range of the
transmitter is limited to comply with laws governing the generation of radio frequency interference. The
transmitter is programmed by the user to accept the signal generated by the user's transmitters.
The garage door opener has 3 buttons that may be programmed for individual transmitter/receiver combinations
to control up to 3 garage door openers, security gates, lighting systems, etc. Each button represents a transmitter
code section of the transmitter, which operates separately from any other button, and may be considered a
separate transmitter. Operation consists of simply pressing a button to activate the corresponding transmitter.
The garage door opener does not need any programming after it is replaced. However, for the opener function it
must be programmed to the customer's garage door or other devices such as a gate. The programming can only
be performed at the device being programmed, it cannot be programmed at a service facility. Instructions for
programming are listed in the Garage Door Opener Malfunction document in a Diagnostic Aid.
NOTE: Do not use the garage door opener (GDO) with any garage door opener that
does not have the stop and reverse safety feature. This includes any garage
door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (WITHOUT ATH)
63 of 79
T10J T10J Keyless Entry Antenna - Center Console Front
T10K T10K Keyless Entry Antenna - Center Console Rear
T10E T10E Keyless Entry Antenna - Rear Compartment
K77 K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Keyless Entry System Description and Operation
The keyless entry system is a vehicle entry device. The keyless entry system is used in conjunction with the
door locks to unlock the vehicle. Keyless entry will lock/unlock the vehicle doors or open the rear compartment
lid when a corresponding button on the keyless entry transmitter is pressed. This is accomplished by the
transmitter sending a radio frequency to the remote control door lock receiver antenna that has a direct link to
the body control module (BCM). The BCM interprets the signal and activates the requested function or requests
the appropriate control module to activate the function via a serial data message. A low transmitter battery or
radio frequency interference from aftermarket devices, such as 2-way radios, power inverters, computers, etc.,
may cause a system malfunction. High radio frequency traffic areas, such as gas stations that use pay-at-the-
pump radio frequency transponders, may also cause interference that could lead to a malfunction. Keyless entry
allows you to operate the following features:
• Door lock/unlock
• Liftgate lock/unlock
• Power liftgate, if equipped
• Illuminated entry lamps
• Panic alarm/vehicle locator
• Remote vehicle start
Keyless Entry System Description and Operation - Keyless Start
The keyless start portion of the keyless entry system allows vehicle starting, having only the transmitter as your
key. The keyless start system use low frequency antennas in three different locations on the vehicle to determine
the location of the transmitter. Multiple antennas are used to ensure complete coverage of the vehicle interior
and rear compartment. When using the keyless start system, a programmed transmitter must be in the vehicle's
64 of 79
interior, in the driver's pocket, purse, or briefcase.
When the ignition mode switch is pressed, the low frequency antennas emit a challenge to the keyless entry
transmitter. The transmitter receives this challenge and emits it's response as an RF message, which is received
by the remote control door lock receiver. If the response is correct, vehicle starting will be allowed. If RF
communication is interrupted, a "No Remote Detected" message will be displayed on the DIC. In these cases,
the transmitter can be placed in the transmitter pocket located in the center console. The immobilizer antenna
coil is located directly beneath the transmitter pocket. Placing the transmitter in the pocket will create a low
powered coupling between the transmitter and immobilizer antenna, allowing communications to occur and
enabling vehicle starting.
The keyless entry system has the following components:
• Keyless entry transmitter

• Front console antenna
• Rear console antenna
• Rear compartment antenna
• Keyless entry control module
• Immobilizer antenna coil assembly
• Remote control door lock receiver
Keyless Entry Transmitter
The keyless entry transmitters are used to perform various entry functions while away from the immediate area
of the vehicle. Keyless entry functions may work at up to 20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle. Ambient
conditions may affect the performance of the keyless entry transmitter and reduce the range at which keyless
entry functions operate. Up to eight transmitters may be programmed to a single vehicle.
When pressing the ignition mode switch to change power mode or start the vehicle, a nearby transmitter is
challenged by a passive keyless entry antenna. The transmitter will send an RF response to the remote control
door lock receiver, which communicates with the BCM. The BCM will interpret this communication and if the
transmitter response is valid, allow the vehicle to change power mode or start the vehicle.
Front Console Passive (Instrument Panel) Antenna
This antenna is located in the lower instrument panel near the front of the center console.
The front console antenna is used for vehicle starting functions. When the ignition mode switch is pressed, the
antenna is energized or "pinged". This emits a low frequency challenge signal that is received by the keyless
entry transmitter. The transmitter will then reply to this challenge with a response and, if correct, vehicle
starting will occur.
Rear Console Antenna
This antenna is located in the rear of the center console.
The rear console antenna is used for vehicle starting functions. When the ignition mode switch is pressed, the
65 of 79
Rear Compartment Antenna
This antenna is located in the center of the rear compartment metal floor pan, near the seatback.
The rear compartment antenna is used for vehicle starting functions. When the ignition mode switch is pressed,
the antenna is energized or "pinged". This emits a low frequency challenge signal that is received by the keyless
The remote control door lock receiver is control by and directly communicates with the body control module
(BCM). When the transmitter receives a low frequency challenge from an antenna, it responds with an RF
message. This RF message is received by the remote control door lock receiver and communicated to the BCM.
If the RF message is a valid response to the low frequency challenge, vehicle starting will be allowed.
Immobilizer Antenna Coil Assembly
The keyless entry immobilizer coil assembly is located in the center console, directly beneath the transmitter
pocket. If the transmitter battery is dead, weak, or the RF signal is being interrupted, the transmitter may be
placed in the pocket to create a low powered coupling between the transmitter and immobilizer antenna,
allowing communications to occur and enabling vehicle starting.
The immobilizer antenna coil is controlled by the BCM. The immobilizer control module is also active when
learning transmitters.
The keyless entry control module is a multi-function module which performs the following keyless entry system
functions:
• Activating vehicle antennas for keyless start functions

• Backup control for the ECM accessory wakeup and the run/crank relay
• Redundant power moding, in addition to the BCM
• Ignition mode switch monitoring
OnStarÂ® Remote Link
A vehicle operator may have the ability to perform some of the keyless entry functions using applications on
personal devices such as smart phones. Refer to OnStar Description and Operation (UI3) , or OnStar
Description and Operation (UE1) .
The BCM is a multi-function module that performs the following functions:
• Receive and authenticate active transmitter and keyless start signals from the remote control door lock
receiver
• Determines the functionality requested by the transmitter signal
• Performs the function requested by the transmitter signal
Unlock Driver Door Only
66 of 79
Momentarily press the transmitter UNLOCK button in order to perform the following functions:
• Unlock only the driver door

• Illuminate the interior lamps for a determined length of time, or until the ignition is turned ON
• Flash the exterior lights, if enabled through personalization
• Disarm the content theft deterrent system
• Deactivate the content theft deterrent system when in the alarm mode
Unlock All Doors - Second Operation
Momentarily press the transmitter UNLOCK button a second time, within 5 seconds of the first press, to
perform the following function:
• Unlock the remaining doors and liftgate
Lock All Doors
Press the transmitter LOCK button to perform the following functions:
• Lock all vehicle doors and the liftgate

• Immediately turn off the interior lamps
• Chirp the horn, if enabled through personalization
• Arm the content theft deterrent system
Power Liftgate, if equipped
Press and hold the power liftgate button to perform the following functions:
• Open or close the liftgate using the power liftgate function

• Flash the tail lamps
• Sound the interior power liftgate chime
Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm/Active
A single press of the panic button performs the following functions. Some functions may be dependent on
personalization settings:
• Pulses the horn three times

• Flashes the exterior lamps three times
A press and hold of the panic button performs the following functions:
• A press and hold of the panic button performs the following functions:
• Pulses the horn and flashes the parking lamps for 30 second or until the following conditions occur:
The panic button is pressed
The ignition mode is turned to the RUN position with a valid keyless entry transmitter
67 of 79
Remote Vehicle Start/Active
The remote vehicle start function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle
HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable, providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. The HVAC
system will operate in the following possible ways:
• If the vehicle is equipped with a manual HVAC system it will be on and operating in the same way that
the settings were adjusted when the vehicle was last used.
• If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic HVAC system it will operate as necessary to meet the
temperature setting it was left at. If the conditions are such that the system needs AC, rear defrost, or
defrost then those functions will operate. The indicator lights for these functions will not illuminate even
if the features are on.
• If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic HVAC system but the system is in manual mode then it will
operate the same as a manual system equipped vehicle with the HVAC operating however it was adjusted
when the vehicle was last used.
The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time a
remote vehicle start is performed, the vehicle doors are locked, however they may then be unlocked/locked with
the transmitter at any time. Only the first and second vehicle transmitters are able to control the remote vehicle
start function. Any additional remote transmitters programmed to the vehicle will perform all other remote
functions. Once activated, the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The remote vehicle start time may be
extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and
holding the remote vehicle start buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called a remote vehicle start continue
and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the remote vehicle start continue is performed at 7
minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out, a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The remote
vehicle start event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the remote vehicle start button on the
transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps.
In between ignition cycles, only two remote vehicle start events may occur or be attempted. Once two events or
attempts have been made, future remote vehicle start events will be suspended until the vehicle is started using
the ignition.
Enable/Disable Remote Vehicle Start/Active
On some vehicles, remote vehicle start may be enabled or disabled as a part of vehicle personalization by using
the driver information center controls. Refer to the vehicle owners manual for more information.
Hood Ajar Switch/Active
The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for remote vehicle start purposes. The switch is
integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides 2 separate inputs to the BCM. These
separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault.
Remote Vehicle Start Circuit Description/Active
The BCM receives a signal from the keyless entry transmitter indicating a remote vehicle start request. The
BCM uses the following inputs to verify the system is ready for a remote vehicle start event:
• Vehicle is not in valet mode

• Low fuel level indicator is not requested on
• All vehicle doors are closed
68 of 79
• Rear compartment lid is not ajar
• The hood is closed
• The doors are locked
• The hazard switch is OFF
• Battery reconnect has not occurred
• Vehicle power mode is correct
When the BCM determines all conditions meet those required for a remote vehicle start event, a message is sent
via serial data to the ECM. The ECM relies on the remote vehicle start message from the BCM to enable remote
vehicle start when the crank request signal is received. If the ECM does not receive a valid remote vehicle start
message, it will not ground the control circuit of the crank relay and start the engine. While the ECM is in
remote vehicle start mode it will cut fuel to the engine if any of the following additional conditions occur:
• Vehicle speed is greater than 0

• Transmission is not in P
• Excessive engine coolant temperature
• Low oil pressure
• The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is commanded ON
• Engine crank time is greater than 30 seconds
• Excessive engine speed
• Accelerator pedal position too high
• Remote start timer equals 0
• Immobilizer system indicates a theft attempt
Keyless Entry Personalization
Vehicle lock/unlock functions and remote vehicle start settings may be personalized for the vehicle. For
functional descriptions and programming instructions, refer to the vehicle owners manual.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (WITH ATH)
69 of 79
T10J T10J Keyless Entry Antenna - Center Console Front
T10K T10K Keyless Entry Antenna - Center Console Rear
T10E T10E Keyless Entry Antenna - Rear Compartment
T10M T10M Keyless Entry Antenna - Driver Door Handle
T10N T10N Keyless Entry Antenna - Passenger Door Handle
T10G T10G Keyless Entry Antenna - Rear Fascia
A23D A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
A23LR A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear
A23RR A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear
A23P A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger
K77 K77 Remote Control Door Lock Receiver
Keyless Entry System Description and Operation - Active
The keyless entry system is a vehicle entry device. The keyless entry system is used in conjunction with the
door locks to unlock the vehicle. Keyless entry will lock/unlock a door or open the rear compartment lid when a
corresponding button on the keyless entry transmitter is pressed. This is accomplished by the transmitter
sending a radio frequency to the remote control door lock receiver antenna that has a direct link to the body
control module (BCM). The BCM interprets the signal and activates the requested function or requests the
appropriate ECU to activate the function via a serial data message. A low transmitter battery or radio frequency
interference from aftermarket devices, such as 2-way radios, power inverters, computers, etc., may cause a
system malfunction. High radio frequency traffic areas, such as gas stations that use pay-at-the-pump radio
frequency transponders, may also cause interference that could lead to a malfunction. Keyless entry allows you
to operate the following features:
• Door lock/unlock
• Rear compartment lid release
• Illuminated entry lamps
• Panic alarm/vehicle locator
• Remote vehicle start
• Automatic window express down, if equipped. Automatic window express up, if equipped
Keyless Entry System Description and Operation - Passive
Passive keyless entry allows entry to a locked vehicle without pressing any buttons on the keyless entry
transmitter. The passive entry system uses low frequency antennas in several different areas on the vehicle to
determine the location of the transmitter. When passively opening a locked door or the rear compartment, you
must have a programmed transmitter with you in your pocket, purse, or briefcase within a one meter range.
When an exterior door handle button is pressed or the rear compartment touch pad is pressed, the keyless entry
control module activates the low frequency antenna which sends out a challenge to the keyless entry transmitter.
Because of the low frequency, communication range is limited. The antenna will emit the challenge in a one
meter range. The transmitter must be within this range to receive the challenge. The transmitter receives this
challenge and emits it's response as an RF message, which is received by the remote control door lock receiver.
If the response is correct, entry into the vehicle will be allowed.
70 of 79
As a customer convenience feature, the keyless entry system will notify the driver if the transmitter has been
left in the vehicle after exiting by chirping the vehicle horn three times. This may be turned off using vehicle
personalization. Also, if the transmitter is left in the vehicle after the central door lock switch has been used to
lock the vehicle, the driver door will remain unlock after exiting the vehicle. This is intended to prevent locking
the transmitter in the vehicle and being unable to access it.
Keyless Entry System Description and Operation - Keyless Start
The keyless start portion of the keyless entry system allows vehicle starting, having only the transmitter as your
key. The keyless start system use low frequency antennas in three different locations on the vehicle to determine
the location of the transmitter. Multiple antenna are used to ensure complete coverage of the vehicle interior and
rear compartment. When using the keyless start system, a programmed transmitter must be in the vehicle's
interior, in the driver's pocket, purse, or briefcase.
When the ignition mode switch is pressed, the low frequency antennas emit a challenge to the keyless entry
transmitter. The transmitter receives this challenge and emits it's response as an RF message, which is received
by the remote control door lock receiver. If the response is correct, vehicle starting will be allowed. If RF
communication is interrupted, a "No Remote Detected" message will be displayed on the DIC. In these cases,
the transmitter can be placed in the transmitter pocket located in the center console. The immobilizer antenna
coil is located directly beneath the transmitter pocket. Placing the transmitter in the pocket will create a low
powered coupling between the transmitter and immobilizer antenna, allowing communications to occur and
enabling vehicle starting.
The keyless entry system has the following components:
• Keyless entry integrated key/transmitter

• Driver and front passenger door antennas (part of the door handle assembly)
• Driver and front passenger door handle switches (part of the door handle assembly)
• Rear fascia antenna
• Front console antenna
• Rear console antenna
• Trunk antenna (rear compartment)
• Immobilizer antenna coil assembly
Keyless Entry Transmitters
By operating any of the exterior door handle buttons, a nearby transmitter is challenged by a keyless entry
antenna. The transmitter will send an RF response to the remote control door lock receiver, which
communicates with the BCM. The BCM will interpret this communication and either allow entry into the
vehicle or deny it. Transmitters programmed as number 1 or 2 will have certain corresponding features on
equipped vehicles. For example transmitter 1 will activate the memory seat associated with that transmitter and
the same for transmitter number 2. On vehicles equipped with approach logo lighting only transmitters 1 and 2
will activate the approach logo lighting.
Door Antennas
71 of 79
The keyless entry door antennas are used to transmit low frequency communications to the keyless entry
transmitters.
The keyless entry door antennas are located in the left front and right front exterior door handle bracket. The
antennas are serviced as part of the door handle assembly. The antennas are controlled by the keyless entry
control module. When the exterior door handle button is pressed, the respective antenna will send out a
challenge to the keyless entry transmitter, which begins the passive entry communications.
Rear Fascia Antenna
The rear fascia antenna is used to transmit low frequency communication to the keyless entry transmitters for
entry to rear compartment.
The rear fascia antenna is located behind the rear fascia. The antenna is controlled by the keyless entry control
module. When the rear compartment touch pad is pressed, the antenna sends out a challenge to the keyless entry
transmitter, which begins the passive entry communications.
Front Console Passive (Instrument Panel) Antenna
This antenna is located in the lower instrument panel near the front of the center console.
The front console antenna is used for vehicle starting functions. When the ignition mode switch is pressed, the
Rear Console Antenna
This antenna is located in the rear of the center console.
The rear console antenna is used for vehicle starting functions. When the ignition mode switch is pressed, the
Rear Compartment Antenna
This antenna is located in the center of the rear compartment metal floor pan, near the seatback.
The rear compartment antenna is used for vehicle starting functions. When the ignition mode switch is pressed,
the antenna is energized or "pinged". This emits a low frequency challenge signal that is received by the keyless
Immobilizer Antenna Coil Assembly
The immobilizer coil assembly is located in the center console, directly beneath the transmitter pocket. If the
transmitter battery is dead, weak, or the RF signal is being interrupted, the transmitter may be placed in the
pocket to create a low powered coupling between the transmitter and immobilizer antenna, allowing
communications to occur and enabling vehicle starting.
The immobilizer antenna coil is controlled by the BCM. The immobilizer control module is also active when
learning vehicle keys.
72 of 79
The keyless entry control module is a multi-function module which performs the following keyless entry system
functions:
• Activating vehicle antennas for passive keyless entry functions

• Activating vehicle antennas for keyless start functions
• Backup control for the ECM accessory wakeup and the run/crank relay
• If equipped, controls the electronic steering column lock
• Receiver of the exterior door handle switch inputs and door open switch (not the door ajar switch)
• Ignition mode switch monitoring
OnStarÂ® Remote Link
A vehicle operator may have the ability to perform some of the keyless entry functions using applications on
personal devices such as smart phones. Refer to OnStar Description and Operation (UI3) , or OnStar
Description and Operation (UE1) .
The BCM is a multi-function module that performs the following functions:
• Receive and authenticate active transmitter and keyless start signals from the remote control door lock
receiver
• Determines the functionality requested by the transmitter signal
• Performs the function requested by the transmitter signal
Unlock Driver Door Only - Active
Momentarily press the transmitter UNLOCK button in order to perform the following functions:
• Unlock only the driver door

• Illuminate the interior lamps for a determined length of time, or until the ignition is turned ON
• Disarm the Content Theft Deterrent (CTD) system
• Deactivate the CTD system when in the alarm mode
Unlock All Doors - Second Operation - Active
Momentarily press the transmitter UNLOCK button a second time, within 5 seconds of the first press, to
perform the following function:
Unlock the remaining doors
Unlock Driver Door Only - Passive
If enabled through personalization, approach the driver door with a valid keyless entry transmitter and press the
door handle button to perform the following functions:
• Unlock and open only the driver door
73 of 79
• Disarm the CTD system, if equipped
Unlock All Doors - Passive
Approach any non driver door (front or rear) or, if enabled through personalization, the driver door with a valid
keyless entry transmitter and press the door handle button to perform the following functions:
• Unlock all vehicle doors

• Disarm the CTD system, if equipped
Lock All Doors - Active
Press the transmitter LOCK button to perform the following functions:
• Lock all vehicle doors

• Immediately turn off the interior lamps
• Chirp the horn, if enabled through personalization
• Arm the CTD system
Lock All Doors - Passive
Exit the vehicle (with ignition off) with the keyless entry transmitter to automatically perform the following
functions, if equipped.
• Lock all vehicle doors after a delay

• Chirp horn, if enabled through personalization
• Arm the CTD system
When all doors are closed, they can also be locked from the exterior by pressing a front door handle button
while having a valid transmitter within range.
If more than one keyless entry transmitter is within a vehicle and the Keyless Entry System detects that one or
more transmitters have been left in the vehicle after vehicle is locked, any transmitter left within the vehicle will
be temporarily deactivated until:
• A button on the deactivated key fob is pressed (will only activate the fob whose button is pressed)
• A passive unlock of vehicle occurs
• Change in power mode occurs
Rear Compartment Lid Release - Active
If the vehicle transaxle is in PARK or NEUTRAL and the ignition is in the OFF position, a single press of the
transmitter rear compartment release button will open the rear compartment lid.
Rear Compartment Lid Release - Passive
74 of 79
Approach the rear of the vehicle with a valid keyless entry transmitter. Press the rear compartment lid release
touch pad. The rear compartment lid will open.
If vehicle is not equipped with trunk antenna, a keyless entry transmitter left inside the trunk will allow the
trunk to be reopened at any time. This feature will not allow a customer to lock the transmitter in the trunk.
If vehicle has a trunk antenna and one or more transmitters are left in the trunk or interior of the vehicle, those
transmitter (s) will be deactivated when the vehicle becomes locked.
Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm/Active
A single press of the panic button performs the following functions. Some functions may be dependent on
personalization settings:
• Pulses the horn three times

• Flashes the exterior lamps three times
A press and hold of the panic button performs the following functions:
• Pulses the horn and flashes the parking lamps for 30 second or until the following conditions occur:
The panic button is pressed
The ignition switch is turned to the RUN position with a valid key
Remote Vehicle Start/Active
The remote vehicle start function allows engine starting while not in the vehicle. It also allows the vehicle
HVAC system and other vehicle systems to enable, providing a comfortable vehicle upon entry. The HVAC
system will operate in the following possible ways:
• If the vehicle is equipped with a manual HVAC system it will be on and operating in the same way that
the settings were adjusted when the vehicle was last used.
• If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic HVAC system it will operate as necessary to meet the
temperature setting it was left at. If the conditions are such that the system needs AC, rear defrost, or
defrost then those functions will operate. The indicator lights for these functions will not illuminate even
if the features are on.
• If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic HVAC system but the system is in manual mode then it will
operate the same as a manual system equipped vehicle with the HVAC operating however it was adjusted
when the vehicle was last used.
The turn signal lamps will illuminate to indicate the vehicle has received the remote start request. Each time a
remote vehicle start is performed, the vehicle doors are locked, however they may then be unlocked/locked with
the transmitter at any time. Only the first and second vehicle transmitters are able to control the remote vehicle
start function. Any additional remote transmitters programmed to the vehicle will perform all other remote
functions. Once activated, the engine is allowed to run for 10 minutes. The remote vehicle start time may be
extended by an additional 10 minutes by again pressing and releasing the lock button and then pressing and
holding the remote vehicle start buttons on the transmitter. This feature is called a remote vehicle start continue
and allows a maximum of 20 minutes of engine running. If the remote vehicle start continue is performed at 7
minutes into the initial 10 minute time-out, a total of 17 minutes of engine running would occur. The remote
vehicle start event may be suspended at any time by pressing only the remote vehicle start button on the
transmitter or by entering the vehicle and turning ON the hazard lamps.
75 of 79
In between ignition cycles, only two remote vehicle start events may occur or be attempted. Once two events or
attempts have been made, future remote vehicle start events will be suspended until the vehicle is started using
the ignition.
Enable/Disable Remote Vehicle Start/Active
Using the driver information center, remote vehicle start may be enabled or disabled as a part of vehicle
personalization. Refer to the vehicle owners manual for more information.
Hood Ajar Switch/Active
The hood switch provides status of the hood to the BCM for remote vehicle start purposes. The switch is
integrated into the hood latch assembly. The hood ajar switch provides 2 separate inputs to the BCM. These
separate inputs allow the BCM to actively monitor for a hood ajar switch fault.
Remote Vehicle Start Circuit Description/Active
The BCM receives a signal from the keyless entry transmitter indicating a remote vehicle start request. The
BCM uses the following inputs to verify the system is ready for a remote vehicle start event:
• Vehicle is not in valet mode

• Low fuel level indicator is not requested on
• All vehicle doors are closed
• Rear compartment lid is not ajar
• The hood is closed
• The doors are locked
• The hazard switch is OFF
• Battery reconnect has not occurred
• Vehicle power mode is correct
When the BCM determines all conditions meet those required for a remote vehicle start event, a message is sent
via serial data to the ECM. The ECM relies on the remote vehicle start message from the BCM to enable remote
vehicle start when the crank request signal is received. If the ECM does not receive a valid remote vehicle start
message, it will not ground the control circuit of the crank relay and start the engine. While the ECM is in
remote vehicle start mode it will cut fuel to the engine if any of the following additional conditions occur:
• Vehicle speed is greater than 0

• Transmission is not in P
• Excessive engine coolant temperature
• Low oil pressure
• The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is commanded ON
• Engine crank time is greater than 30 seconds
• Excessive engine speed
• Accelerator pedal position too high
• Remote start timer equals 0
• Immobilizer system indicates a theft attempt
76 of 79
Keyless Entry Personalization
Vehicle lock/unlock functions and remote vehicle start settings may be personalized for the vehicle. For some
model years this may include the capability of turning the passive entry system completely off. For functional
descriptions and programming instructions, refer to the vehicle owners manual.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SENSOR AND RF DIAGNOSTIC TOOL DESCRIPTION AND

OPERATION
Radio Frequency Diagnostics
Vehicles use radio frequency, or RF, for two systems - the tire pressure monitoring system and the keyless entry
system. In both systems RF is used to transmit signals to and from components. There is no way to measure or
detect RF signals using traditional tools. To assist in diagnosing these systems the EL-52545 Tire Pressure
Monitor Sensor and RF Diagnostic Tool was introduced. This tool can detect RF signals. This allows for the
verification of component functionality where it was previously impossible.
RDR (Rotate - Diagnose - Relearn)
The RDR process is used anytime the vehicles Tire Pressure Monitoring System or tires are serviced. This
includes tire rotation and any other tire service including a vehicle with the TPMS light on. It ensures that the
TPMS sensors are functioning properly, the correct frequency for the vehicle being serviced, and prevents a
stray sensor from being learned to the vehicle. There is a prompt asking if the vehicle has had a flat tire.
Sometimes a vehicle that had a flat tire might have set a DTC for a TPMS Sensor which could lead to
unnecessary replacement of a sensor. If the vehicle recently experienced a flat tire then the DTC only needs to
be cleared.
RF Signal Detection
The Signal Detect function is used to display the keyless entry transmitter identification including the last eight
digits of the VIN associated with the transmitter, the transmitter ID, and the transmitter part number. It also has
the ability to check the transmitter signal strength and to check the low frequency antennas on the vehicle. This
also includes a function to detect the RF signal used for the Universal Garage Door Opener. The tool will
display the frequency detected along with the strength of the signal. The strength of the signal can vary widely
depending on many factors. Seeing a strength reading that appears low does not necessarily indicate a fault. A
low signal may possibly be indicated if a the same signal is measured in the same manner on an identical
vehicle and is shown to be much higher strength than the vehicle being diagnosed. The signal is sensitive to
even a small distance and orientation of the tool. There is an on screen image reminding you to hold the tool in
the correct position.
Trailer TPMS
The Trailer TPMS feature is used to learn and simulate the Trailer TPM System. The tool can be used without
the trailer present when the EL-52641 Trailer Presence Simulator Tester is used.
Tire Tread
The tool can measure tire tread depth to provide a more accurate measurement.
Service
The tool works with the available software to record service activity for the vehicle.
77 of 79
History
The tool provides a history of the vehicle.
Settings
The controls to change the available settings in the tool.
Other Makes
The tool can also be used on non GM vehicles.

SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool
Number/
78 of 79
Tool
Number/
EL 43241
Keyless
Entry Tester
79 of 79
Seat Hardware, Trim, And Upholstery - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Finish Cover Fastener 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Frame Bolt 45 N.m (33 lb ft)
Driver or Passenger Seat Bolt 45 N.m (33 lb ft)
Driver or Passenger Seat Inner Recliner Finish Cover
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Fastener
Front Seat Cushion Front Finish Cover Fastener 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover Fastener 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Rear Seat Armrest Fastener 3 N.m (27 lb in)
Rear Seat Back Cushion Hinge Fastener 45 N.m (33 lb ft)
Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Bolt 28 N.m (21 lb ft)
GM Part Number
Application Type of Material United States Canada
Thread Locking
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Frame Bolt 19333511 10953489
Adhesive
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
FRONT SEAT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1 of 44
WARNING:
Refer to SIR
Warning .
Preliminary Procedure Disable the SIR system. SIR Disabling and Enabling .
Driver or Passenger Seat Bolt [4x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
Caution .
1
Procedure
Adjust the seat to gain access to the bolts.
Tighten
45 N.m (33 lb ft)
Driver or Passenger Seat
Procedure
1. Engage the seat adjuster locking retainer to keep the seat track locked in position
during removal, if equipped.
3. With the aid of an assistant, remove the front seat.
4. Disengage the seat adjuster locking retainer to unlock the seat track after installation,
if equipped.
5. Enable the SIR System. SIR Disabling and Enabling .
FRONT SEAT HEAD RESTRAINT REPLACEMENT
2 of 44
Driver or Passenger Front Seat Head Restraint Guide Bezel [2x]
Procedure
1 1. Raise the headrest to gain access to the head restraint guide bezel.
2. Twist the bezel counter clockwise and push the bezel upward on the head restraint
adjuster rod.
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Clip [2x]

Procedure
2
Using a suitable pointed or flat bladed tool, push the metal clip rearward while pulling
upward on the head restraint.
3 Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint
DRIVER OR PASSENGER SEAT HEAD RESTRAINT GUIDE REPLACEMENT

3 of 44
Front Seat Head Restraint Replacement
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Guide
Procedure
1 Using a suitable flat-bladed tool, slide the tool on the outside of the guide until it finds the
slot. Then push the plastic slot inward and pull upward to remove the guide from the seat
back frame.
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTER FINISH COVER REPLACEMENT

1 Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover Bolt Cap
Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Finish Cover Fastener
CAUTION:
Refer to
2 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Driver or Passenger Seat Adjuster Finish Cover
3 Procedure
Disconnect and reposition harness as necessary.
FRONT SEAT INNER RECLINER FINISH COVER REPLACEMENT
4 of 44
Front Seat Removal and Installation
Front Seat Inner Recliner Finish Cover Screw [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
2 Front Seat Inner Recliner Finish Cover
FRONT SEAT CUSHION FRONT FINISH COVER REPLACEMENT

1 Front Seat Cushion Front Finish Cover Fastener
5 of 44
CAUTION:
Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Cushion Front Finish Cover
2 Procedure
Reposition the seat as necessary to access the bolts.
FRONT SEAT CUSHION FRAME REPLACEMENT

WARNING:
Refer to SIR
Warning .
Procedure Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement

Driver or Passenger Seat Back Frame Bolt [4x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
1
1. Remove the seat back frame bolts.
2. If NEW threaded components are being installed, loosen the adhesive using a metal
pick or similar tool before proceeding. If threaded components are reused, prepare the
threaded components using the following steps:
6 of 44
1. Remove any loose cured adhesive from the external threads of the component
using a lint free cloth.
2. Thread the cleaned component into the internal mating threads and remove to
loosen trapped cured adhesive.
3. Apply thread locking adhesive to the external threads of the component.
Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers
4. Ensure there are no gaps in the thread locking adhesive once applied to the
component.
Tighten
45 N.m (33 lb ft)
Driver or Passenger Seat Cushion Frame
NOTE:
The new
cushion
frame may
not have
adjuster
stops
installed.
Transfer the
adjuster
stops from
original
2 frame or
install new
as needed.
The frame
may need to
be adjusted
to access
the adjuster
stops.
Procedure

FRONT SEAT CUSHION PAD SUPPORT REPLACEMENT
7 of 44
Front Seat Cushion Pad Support
1 Procedure
FRONT SEAT CUSHION OUTER FINISH COVER REPLACEMENT

Front Seat Cushion Front Finish Cover Replacement
Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover Fastener [2x]
CAUTION:
1 Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
8 of 44
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover
Procedure
2 1. Squeeze retainer to release.
FRONT SEAT CUSHION COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT
WARNING: Refer to SIR Warning .
WARNING: To avoid personal injury, perform a passenger presence sensor rezeroing/ learn
on the passenger presence system whenever you remove or replace the seat
cushion trim. Failure to do so may cause the system to malfunction.
WARNING: The passenger seat cushion assembly is serviced in a kit with the airbag front
passenger presence module, cushion pad (and if equipped, heat mat, vent mat,
vent mat support, comfort pads). All components in the service kit are
assembled and calibrated as a unit and must be replaced as a complete
assembly to prevent possible injury to the occupant. Using only some of the
components in the service kit will cause the passenger presence system to
operate improperly.
Removal Procedure
1. Disable the SIR system. SIR Disabling and Enabling
2.
Front Seat (2) - Remove - Front Seat Removal and Installation
3.
9 of 44
Front Seat Cushion Front Finish Cover (2) - Remove - Front Seat Cushion Front Finish Cover
Replacement
4.
Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover (2) - Remove - Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover
Replacement
5.
10 of 44
Driver or Passenger Seat Inner Recliner Finish Cover (2) - Remove - Front Seat Inner Recliner Finish
Cover Replacement
6.
{ If equipped } Front Seat Cushion Ventilation Blower (1) - Remove - Front Seat Cushion Ventilation
Blower Replacement
7.
11 of 44
Disengage the J-channel retainers from the seat cushion frame.

9. Front Seat Cushion Cover (1) - Remove
10. { If equipped } Front Seat Cushion Heater (2) - Remove - Front Seat Cushion Heater Replacement
11. { If equipped } Front Seat Lane Departure Warning Actuator (3) - Remove [2x] - Front Seat Lane
Departure Warning Actuator Replacement
12. Front Seat Cushion Pad (4) - Remove
1.
Front Seat Cushion Pad (4) - Install
2. { If equipped } Front Seat Lane Departure Warning Actuator (3) - Install [2x] - Front Seat Lane
Departure Warning Actuator Replacement
3. { If equipped } Front Seat Cushion Heater (2) - Install - Front Seat Cushion Heater Replacement
4. Front Seat Cushion Cover (1) - Install
5. Connect the J-channel retainers.
6.
12 of 44
{ If equipped } Front Seat Cushion Ventilation Blower (1) - Install - Front Seat Cushion Ventilation
Blower Replacement
7.
Driver or Passenger Seat Inner Recliner Finish Cover (2) - Install - Front Seat Inner Recliner Finish
Cover Replacement
8.
Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover (2) - Install - Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover
Replacement
9.
13 of 44
Front Seat Cushion Front Finish Cover (2) - Install - Front Seat Cushion Front Finish Cover
Replacement
10.
Front Seat (2) - Install - Front Seat Removal and Installation
11. Enable the SIR System. SIR Disabling and Enabling

12. If servicing the passenger seat, re-zero the passenger presence system. Passenger Presence System
Rezeroing
FRONT SEAT BACK COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
WARNING: Refer to SIR Warning .
WARNING: Do not repair or replace the seat stitching or seams in the seat back trim
cover with an internal mounted seat side airbag module. Replace the
complete seat back trim cover from the OEM. Non-OEM seat stitching may
cause improper airbag deployment which could result in personal injury.
14 of 44
1. Disable the SIR system. SIR Disabling and Enabling
2.
Front Seat (2) - Remove - Front Seat Removal and Installation
3.
Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover (2) - Remove - Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover
Replacement
4.
15 of 44
Driver or Passenger Seat Inner Recliner Finish Cover (2) - Remove - Front Seat Inner Recliner Finish
Cover Replacement
5.
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint (3) - Remove - Front Seat Head Restraint Replacement
6.
16 of 44
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Guide (1) - Remove - Driver or Passenger Seat Head
Restraint Guide Replacement
7.
Front Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel (1) - Remove - Front Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel
Replacement
8.
{ If equipped } Front Seat Back Ventilation Blower (2) - Remove - Front Seat Back Ventilation Blower
Replacement
9.
17 of 44
Disengage the j-channel retainers.
10. Front Seat Outboard Seat Back Airbag Nut (1) - Remove Front Seat Outboard Seat Back Airbag
Replacement
11.
Disconnect all electrical connectors.
12. Front Seat Back Cover (1) - Remove

13. { If equipped } Driver or Passenger Seat Back Heater (2) - Remove - Front Seat Back Heater
Replacement
14. Front Seat Back Pad (3) - Remove
1.
18 of 44
Front Seat Back Pad (3) - Install
2. { If equipped } Driver or Passenger Seat Back Heater (2) - Install - Front Seat Back Heater
Replacement
3. Front Seat Back Cover (1) - Install
4.
Front Seat Outboard Seat Back Airbag Nut (1) - Install Front Seat Outboard Seat Back Airbag
Replacement

6. Connect all electrical connectors.
7.
19 of 44
{ If equipped } Front Seat Back Ventilation Blower (2) - Install - Front Seat Back Ventilation Blower
Replacement
8.
Front Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel (1) - Install - Front Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel
Replacement
9.
20 of 44
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint Guide (1) - Install - Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint
Guide Replacement
10.
Driver or Passenger Seat Head Restraint (3) - Install - Front Seat Head Restraint Replacement
11.
21 of 44
Driver or Passenger Seat Inner Recliner Finish Cover (2) - Install - Front Seat Inner Recliner Finish
Cover Replacement
12.
Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover (2) - Install - Front Seat Cushion Outer Finish Cover
Replacement
13.
Front Seat (2) - Install - Front Seat Removal and Installation
14. Enable the SIR System. SIR Disabling and Enabling
FRONT SEAT BACK FRAME REPLACEMENT
22 of 44
WARNING:
Refer to SIR
Warning .
Procedure Front Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement

Driver or Passenger Seat Back Frame Bolt [4x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
1. Remove the seat back frame bolts.

2. If NEW threaded components are being installed, loosen the adhesive using a metal
pick or similar tool before proceeding. If threaded components are reused, prepare the
threaded components using the following steps:
1 1. Remove any loose cured adhesive from the external threads of the component
using a lint free cloth.
2. Thread the cleaned component into the internal mating threads and remove to
loosen trapped cured adhesive.
3. Apply thread locking adhesive to the external threads of the component.
Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers
4. Ensure there are no gaps in the thread locking adhesive once applied to the
component.
Tighten
35 N.m (26 lb ft)
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Cushion Frame
2 Procedure
23 of 44

FRONT SEAT BACK CUSHION FINISH PANEL REPLACEMENT

Front Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel
1 Procedure
Use a thin flat-bladed tool to release the upper spring clip retainers.
REAR SEAT CUSHION REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Rear Seat Cushion
1
Procedure
24 of 44
1. Insert a 457 mm (18 in) prybar next to the inboard side of each wire loop and push
down, using the floor as leverage, to disengage the retainers.
2. If equipped, disconnect the rear seat wiring harness electrical connectors.
3. Pull up on the front of the seat cushion and lift out of the vehicle.
4. Inspect each high retention retainer and sheet metal interface for flushness. Replace
retainer as required if damage occurs during removal.
5. When installing new plastic retainers on the front of the seat, ONLY seat the retainer
to the first click, otherwise the insertion force into the sheet metal will be greatly
increased.
REAR SEAT BACK CUSHION REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (40%)

Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel Hole Cover Replacement
Rear Seat Back Cushion
Procedure
1
Pull up on the outer side of the rear seat back cushion and remove the rear seat back cushion
from the bracket and hinge.
REAR SEAT BACK CUSHION REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (60%)
25 of 44
Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel Hole Cover Replacement
Rear Seat Back Cushion
Procedure
1
Pull up on the outer side of the rear seat back cushion and remove the rear seat back cushion
from the bracket and hinge.
REAR SEAT ARMREST REPLACEMENT

Rear Seat Back Cushion Removal and Installation (40%), or Rear Seat Back Cushion Removal and
Installation (60%)
Rear Seat Armrest Hinge Finish Cover
Procedure
1
Reposition the seat back cushion cover as needed. Rear Seat Back Cover and Pad
Replacement (60%), or Rear Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement (40%)
26 of 44
Rear Seat Armrest Fastener [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
2 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
3 N.m (27 lb in)
3 Rear Seat Armrest Clip
4 Rear Seat Armrest Hinge Finish Bracket
Rear Seat Armrest
5 Procedure
Use a flat-bladed tool to release the retainer.
REAR SEAT HEAD RESTRAINT REPLACEMENT

Rear Seat Head Restraint
Procedure
1. Lower the rear seat back forward to gain space between the head restraint and the
1 roof.
2. Depress the large button on the head restraint guide and raise the head restraint to the
full up position.
3. Depress the smaller button on the opposite head restraint guide and pull upward to
remove from the seat.
REAR SEAT HEAD RESTRAINT GUIDE REPLACEMENT
27 of 44
Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement.
Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide
Procedure
1 Using a suitable flat-bladed tool, slide the tool on the outside of the guide until it finds the
slot. Then push the plastic slot inward and pull upward to remove the guide from the seat
back frame.
REAR SEAT CUSHION COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT

Rear Seat Cushion Removal and Installation
Rear Seat Cushion Cover
1 NOTE:
28 of 44
When
installing the
rear seat
cushion
cover, pull
the cover
tightly in all
corners to
ensure that
no creasing
occurs.
Procedure
1. Remove the hog rings that secure the rear seat cushion cover to the pad.
2. Pull the cover away from the pad to disengage any retainers.
2 Rear Seat Cushion Pad
REAR SEAT BACK CUSHION LATCH REPLACEMENT

Rear Seat Back Cover and Pad Replacement (60%), or Rear Seat Back Cover and Pad
Replacement (40%)
Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
1 Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
29 of 44
Tighten
28 N.m (21 lb ft)
2 Rear Seat Back Cushion Latch
REAR SEAT BELT OPENING BEZEL REPLACEMENT

Rear Seat Belt Opening Bezel
1 Procedure
REAR SEAT BACK COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT (60%)

Removal Procedure
1.
Rear Seat Back Cushion (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Back Cushion Removal and Installation (60%)
2.
30 of 44
Rear Seat Armrest (5) - Remove - Rear Seat Armrest Replacement
3.
Rear Seat Head Restraint (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement
4.
31 of 44
Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement
5.
Rear Seat Belt Opening Bezel (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Belt Opening Bezel Replacement
6.
Rear Seat Back Latch Release Handle Bezel (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Back Latch Release Handle
Bezel Replacement
7.
32 of 44
Rear Seat Anchor Plate Bezel (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Anchor Plate Bezel Replacement
8.
Disengage the J-channel retainers from the seat back cushion frame.
9. Open the right and left seat back cushion cover zippers.
10. Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover (1) - Remove
11. Rear Seat Back Cushion Pad (2) - Remove
1.
33 of 44
Rear Seat Back Cushion Pad (2) - Install
2. Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover (1) - Install

3. Close the zippers.
5.
Rear Seat Anchor Plate Bezel (1) - Install - Rear Seat Anchor Plate Bezel Replacement
6.
34 of 44
Rear Seat Back Latch Release Handle Bezel (1) - Install - Rear Seat Back Latch Release Handle Bezel
Replacement
7.
Rear Seat Belt Opening Bezel (1) - Install - Rear Seat Belt Opening Bezel Replacement
8.
35 of 44
Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide (1) - Install - Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement
9.
Rear Seat Head Restraint (1) - Install - Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement
10.
Rear Seat Armrest (5) - Install - Rear Seat Armrest Replacement
11.
36 of 44
Rear Seat Back Cushion (1) - Install - Rear Seat Back Cushion Removal and Installation (60%)
REAR SEAT BACK COVER AND PAD REPLACEMENT (40%)

Removal Procedure
1.
Rear Seat Back Cushion (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Back Cushion Removal and Installation (40%)
2.
37 of 44
Rear Seat Head Restraint (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement
3.
Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement
4.
38 of 44
Rear Seat Back Latch Release Handle Bezel (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Back Latch Release Handle
Bezel Replacement
5.
Rear Seat Anchor Plate Bezel (1) - Remove - Rear Seat Anchor Plate Bezel Replacement
6.
Disengage the J-channel retainers from the seat back cushion frame.
7. Open the right and left seat back cushion cover zippers.
8. Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover (1) - Remove
9. Rear Seat Back Cushion Pad (2) - Remove
1.
39 of 44
Rear Seat Back Cushion Pad (2) - Install
2. Rear Seat Back Cushion Cover (1) - Install

3. Close the zippers.
5.
Rear Seat Anchor Plate Bezel (1) - Install - Rear Seat Anchor Plate Bezel Replacement
6.
40 of 44
Rear Seat Back Latch Release Handle Bezel (1) - Install - Rear Seat Back Latch Release Handle Bezel
Replacement
7.
Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide (1) - Install - Rear Seat Head Restraint Guide Replacement
8.
41 of 44
Rear Seat Head Restraint (1) - Install - Rear Seat Head Restraint Replacement
9.
Rear Seat Back Cushion (1) - Install - Rear Seat Back Cushion Removal and Installation (40%)
REAR SEAT BACK HINGE REPLACEMENT

1. Rear Seat Cushion Removal and Installation

2. Rear Seat Back Cushion Removal and Installation (40%), or Rear Seat Back Cushion
Removal and Installation (60%)
42 of 44
Rear Seat Back Cushion Hinge Fastener [4x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
45 N.m (33 lb ft)
2 Rear Seat Back Cushion Hinge
REAR SEAT BACK LATCH RELEASE HANDLE BEZEL REPLACEMENT

Rear Seat Back Latch Release Handle Bezel
1 Procedure
REAR SEAT ANCHOR PLATE BEZEL REPLACEMENT
43 of 44
Rear Seat Anchor Plate Bezel
1 Procedure
Use a flat bladed plastic trim tool to release the retaining tabs.
44 of 44
Seat Heating And Cooling System - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Front Seat Back Ventilation Blower Screw 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Heater Control Module Bracket Fastener 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Heater Vent Control Module Fastener 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Rear Seat Heater Control Module Fastener 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)

HEATED/COOLED SEAT WIRING SCHEMATICS
Front Heated Seats (KA1)
Rear Heated Seats (KA6)
1 of 62
Driver Vented Seat (KU9)
Passenger Vented Seat (KU9)
2 of 62
DTC B191A OR B191B
DTC Descriptors
DTC B191A 39
Front Heated Seat Module
DTC B191B 39
Rear Heated Seat Module
An internal fault is detected inside the control module. No external circuits are involved.
Ignition ON.
The control module detects an internal fault.
The seat heating control module will disable all heated seat functions.

Schematic Reference
Heated/Cooled Seat Wiring Schematics
3 of 62
• Heated/Vented Seat Description and Operation
• Rear Heated Seats Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
DTC B191A
1. Ignition ON.
If the DTC is set
Replace the K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front.

3. All OK.
DTC B191B
1. Ignition ON.
If the DTC is set
Replace the K29R Seat Heating Control Module - Rear.

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front or K29R Seat Heating Control
Module - Rear replacement, programming and setup
DTC B243A OR B243B

4 of 62
DTC Descriptors
DTC B243A
Left Front Seat Heating Switch
DTC B243B
Right Front Seat Heating Switch
An internal fault is detected inside the switch. No external circuits are involved.
Ignition ON.
The control module detects an internal switch fault.
The seat heating control module will disable all heated seat functions.

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
5 of 62
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
DTC B243A
1. Ignition ON.
If the DTC is set
Replace the Left Front Seat Heating Switch.

3. All OK.
DTC B243B
1. Ignition ON.
If the DTC is set
Replace the Right Front Seat Heating Switch.

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
SYMPTOMS - SEAT HEATING AND COOLING
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System
Check - Vehicle
• Verify that no DTCs are set.
2. Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis
• Rear Heated Seats Description and Operation
6 of 62
cause the symptom.
• Verify a condition does not exist with the component: Seat Adjuster Track and Vent Fan
blockage by debris
clutter
blocked or obstructed movement
binding or sticking
interference with other components - Wiring Harnesses
Intermittent
Symptom List
Refer to the appropriate diagnostic procedure listed below:
• Front Heated Seat Malfunction (With Vented Seat KU9), or Front Heated Seat Malfunction
(Without Vented Seat KU9)
• Rear Heated Seat Malfunction
• Vented Seat Malfunction
FRONT HEATED SEAT MALFUNCTION (WITH VENTED SEAT KU9)


B+ Terminal 10 X1 U1524, 1 U1524, 1 - -
B+ Terminal 7 X1 6 6 - -
Driver Heated Seat Back
2 5 5 -
Temperature Sensor Signal
- 5 - -
Temperature Sensor Low Reference
Driver Heated Seat Element
1 2 1 -
Voltage Control Terminal 6 X1
1 2 1 -
Ground Control Terminal 4 X1
Driver Heated Seat Back Element
1 3 1 -
Voltage Control
7 of 62
1 3 1 -
Ground Control
Driver Heated Seat Cushion
2 5 5 -
- 5 - -
1 4 1 -
Element Voltage Control
1 4 1 -
Element Ground Control
Passenger Heated Seat Back
6 9 9 -
- 9 - -
Passenger Heated Seat Element
1 6 1 -
Voltage Control Terminal 2 X1
1 6 1 -
1 7 1 -
1 7 1 -
Passenger Heated Seat Cushion
6 9 9 -
- 9 - -
1 8 1 -
Element voltage Control
1 8 1 -
Front Seat Heating Control Module
- U1524, 1 - -
Ground
1. Driver and passenger heated seats are inoperative.
2. Driver heated seat is inoperative
3. Driver seat back heat function is inoperative
4. Driver seat cushion heat function is inoperative
5. Degraded driver heated seat operation
6. Passenger heated seat is inoperative
7. Passenger seat back heat function is inoperative
8. Passenger seat cushion heat function is inoperative
9. Degraded passenger heated seat operation
The driver and passenger heated seats switches are located on the center stack near the HVAC controls. When a
heated seat switch is pressed, a serial data message is sent from the switch to the body control module (BCM)
indicating the heated seat command. The BCM serves as the heated seat system master to determine the
8 of 62
requested operating mode. The BCM then sends a LIN bus serial data message to the seat heating control
module indicating the heated seat command. In response to this message, the seat heating control module
attempts to drive the appropriate seat heating elements per the BCM command. The BCM also controls the seat
temperature and mode indicators, via the serial data line, used to provide the operator with feedback as to the
operating status of the system.
The seat heating control module controls heated seat operation for the driver and passenger seats. When active,
power is applied to the seat cushion and back heater elements through a common pulse width modulated
(PWM) voltage supply control circuit. Each individual heater element is switched to ground by the module
through a common low side drive control circuit.
The seat back and cushion temperature sensors (thermistors) are packaged with the seat heating elements
located just under the seat covers. The seat heating control module supplies each temperature sensor with a 5 V
reference signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The module monitors the voltage from the signal circuit to
determine the temperature of the seat.
The temperature sensor varies in resistance based on the temperature of the heating element causing the signal
voltage to change. Once the module senses the seat reached the set temperature, it will then begin regulate the
current flow through the heater elements in order to maintain the desired seat temperature based on the feedback
voltage from the sensor.
Diagnostic Aids
• A short to ground or B+ in either the heating element voltage control circuit or ground control circuit will
cause both the driver and front passenger heated seats to be inoperative.
• An open in either the voltage control circuit or ground control circuit between the module and the splice
will cause the seat cushion and seat back the heated seat function to be inoperative for that seat.
• A short to ground on either the seat cushion or seat back temperature sensor signal circuit will cause the
heated seat function to be inoperative for that seat.
• An open in either the voltage control circuit or ground control circuit between the splice and the heating
element will cause just that one heating element to be inoperative.
• The following faults will cause a degraded heated seat operation for both the seat back and seat cushion.
An open or a short to voltage on either the seat cushion or seat back temperature sensor signal
circuit.
An open in either the seat cushion or seat back temperature sensor low reference circuit.
A fault in either the seat cushion or seat back temperature sensor.
• A broken wire in a heating element may cause a degraded heated seat operation for that particular heating
element.
• When inactive the seat heating control module connects the heating element low side outputs to a
common reference point internal to the module which is biased to approximately 3.5 V. The module uses
this biased voltage in order to check the high side and low side control circuits for a short to battery or
ground before enabling the driver and passenger seat heating elements.
• With both the seat cushion and seat back heater elements disconnected, if the high side output of the
module is measured it will display a low current 12 V bleed off voltage. This bleed off voltage does not
have a meaningful diagnostic purpose. With one or both of the heater elements connected you would just
see the 3.5 V biased voltage from this circuit.
• If the heated seats are on high, the temperature level may automatically be lowered after approximately
30 min of operation.
9 of 62
Schematic Reference
Heated/Vented Seat Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: Review the Diagnostic Fault Information table and Diagnostic Aids in order
to get a better understanding of the possible heated seat system faults
before proceeding Circuit/System Verification and Circuit/System Testing.
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Body Control Module Driver Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter changes
between Off and Seat Back and Cushion Heating when pressing the driver heated seat switch.
Replace the A26 HVAC Controls.

3. Verify the scan tool Passenger Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter changes between Off and
Seat Back and Cushion Heating when pressing the passenger heated seat switch.

4. Verify the driver and passenger heated seats operate.
If the driver and passenger heated seats are inoperative
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Both Heated Seats are Inoperative
10 of 62
If the seat cushion and back heating elements are inoperative of one seat
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - One Heated Seat is Inoperative
If just one of the heating elements is inoperative
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - One Heating Element is Inoperative.
If the driver seat exhibits a degraded heated seat operation
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Degraded Heated Seat Operation Driver Seat
If the passenger seat exhibits a degraded heated seat operation
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Degraded Heated Seat Operation Passenger Seat
Go to next step: If both heated seats operate

5. All OK.
Both Heated Seats are Inoperative

1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K29F Seat Heating
Control Module - Front, ignition ON.
If infinite resistance, replace the K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front.
3. Ignition OFF.
4. Test for infinite resistance between each control circuit terminal listed below and ground, one at a time.
• Terminal 2
• Terminal 3
• Terminal 4
• Terminal 6
11 of 62

5. Ignition ON.
6. Test for less than 1 V between each control circuit terminal listed below and ground, one at a time.
• Terminal 2
• Terminal 3
• Terminal 4
• Terminal 6
If 1 V or greater

7. Replace the K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front.
One Heated Seat is Inoperative

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front,
ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp
3. Ignition OFF, connect the X1 harness connector at the K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front.
Disconnect the harness connector at the E14 Seat Heating Element - Cushion and the E14 Seat Heating
Element - Back, ignition ON.
NOTE: When performing this test ensure that you are testing from the correct
terminal. Testing from the incorrect terminal will cause a misdiagnosis of
the circuit. Three of the four terminals in this connector will not only
display a voltage reading but a different voltage reading.
12 of 62
4. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between each signal circuit terminal listed below and ground, one at a time.
• E14 Seat Heating Element - Cushion terminal 2
• E14 Seat Heating Element - Back terminal 2
If less than 4.8 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K29F Seat Heating Control Module -
Front.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front.
Front, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front.
5. Connect a test lamp between control circuit terminal 1 and control circuit terminal 4 of the E14 Seat
Heating Element - Back, ignition ON.
NOTE: The test lamp should turn ON for approximately 10 s after the heated seat
is commanded ON.
6. Verify the test lamp turns ON after pressing the heated seat switch.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K29F Seat Heating
Control Module - Front.
7. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the E14 Seat Heating Element - Cushion, ignition ON.
NOTE: Because of the type of material used in the heater element, a reliable
resistance value is unavailable for a component test.
Test or replace the E14 Seat Heating Element - Cushion.
13 of 62
9. Test or replace the E14 Seat Heating Element - Back.
One Heating Element is Inoperative

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E14 Seat Heating Element.
4. Test or replace the E14 Seat heating Element.
Degraded Heated Seat Operation Driver Seat

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at each component listed below. It may take up to 2 min
for all vehicle systems to power down.
• E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion
• E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back
2. Test for less than 40 Ω between each low reference circuit terminal listed below and ground, one at a
time.
• E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion terminal 3
• E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back terminal 3
If 40 Ω or greater
Front.
14 of 62
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 4.8 V
Front.
Front, ignition ON.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion and the
E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back. Disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K29F Seat
Heating Control Module - Front.
6. Test for 500 Ω - 300 kΩ between the signal circuit and the low reference circuit terminals listed below,
one at a time.
• E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion terminal 6 and terminal 1
• E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back terminal 3 and terminal 1
If not between 500 Ω - 300 kΩ
Replace the E14 Seat Heating Element.
Go to next step: If between 500 Ω - 300 kΩ

Degraded Heated Seat Operation Passenger Seat

• E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion
• E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back
15 of 62
time.
• E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion terminal 3
• E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back terminal 3
If 40 Ω or greater
Front.
3. Ignition ON.
• E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion terminal 2
• E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back terminal 2
If less than 4.8 V
Front.
Front, ignition ON.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion and
the E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back. Disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K29F Seat
one at a time.
• E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion terminal 5 and terminal 2
• E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back terminal 4 and terminal 12
16 of 62
Repair Instructions
• Front Seat Back Heater Replacement

• Front Seat Cushion Heater Replacement
• Control Module References for K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front replacement, programming
and setup
FRONT HEATED SEAT MALFUNCTION (WITHOUT VENTED SEAT KU9)


B+ Terminal 10 X1 U1524, 1 U1524, 1 - -
Driver Heated Seat Switch LIN U1550, U1550,
U1550 -
Serial Data U1558 U1558
3 5 5 -
- 5 - -
1 2 1 -
1 3 1 -
Voltage Control
1 3 1 -
Ground Control
4 5 5 -
- 5 - -
1 4 1 -
1 4 1 -
Passenger Heated Seat Switch LIN U1550, U1550,
U1558 -
Serial Data U1558 U1558
7 9 9 -
17 of 62
- 9 - -
1 6 1 -
1 7 1 -
1 7 1 -
8 9 9 -
- 9 - -
1 8 1 -
Element voltage Control
1 8 1 -
Front Seat Heating Control Module
- U1524, 1 - -
Ground
1. Driver and passenger heated seats are inoperative.
2. Driver heated seat is inoperative
3. Driver seat back heat function is inoperative
4. Driver seat cushion heat function is inoperative
5. Degraded driver heated seat operation
6. Passenger heated seat is inoperative
7. Passenger seat back heat function is inoperative
8. Passenger seat cushion heat function is inoperative
9. Degraded passenger heated seat operation
The driver and passenger heated seat switches are located on the center stack near the HVAC controls. When a
heated seat switch is pressed, a serial data message is sent from the switch to the body control module (BCM)
indicating the heated seat command. The BCM serves as the heated seat system master to determine the
requested operating mode. The BCM then sends a LIN bus serial data message to the seat heating control
module indicating the heated seat command. In response to this message, the seat heating control module
attempts to drive the appropriate seat heating elements per the BCM command. The BCM also controls the seat
temperature and mode indicators, via the serial data line, used to provide the operator with feedback as to the
operating status of the system.
18 of 62
Diagnostic Aids
cause both the driver and passenger heated seats to be inoperative.
• An open in the ground control circuit between the module and the splice will cause the seat cushion and
seat back the heated seat function to be inoperative for that seat.
• An open in the ground control circuit between the splice and the heating element will cause just that one
heating element to be inoperative.
• The following faults will cause a degraded heated seat operation for a particular heating element.
An open or a short to ground on the temperature sensor signal circuit.
An open in either the seat cushion or seat back temperature sensor signal or low reference circuit.
A fault in the temperature sensor.
• A short to B+ on a temperature sensor signal circuit may cause a degraded heated seat operation for both
the seat back and seat cushion or just one heating element.
element.
ground before enabling the driver and passenger seat heating elements.
• With both the seat cushion and seat back heater elements disconnected, if the high side output of the
module is measured it will display a low current 12 V bleed off voltage. This bleed off voltage does not
have a meaningful diagnostic purpose. With one or both of the heater elements connected you would just
see the 3.5 V biased voltage from this circuit.
Schematic Reference
19 of 62
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Engine ON.
between Off and Seat Back and Cushion Heating when pressing the driver heated seat back and cushion
switch.

3. Verify the scan tool Passenger Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter changes between Off and
Seat Back and Cushion Heating when pressing the passenger heated seat back and cushion switch.

4. Verify the driver and passenger heated seats operate.
If the driver and passenger heated seats are inoperative
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Both Heated Seats are Inoperative
If the seat cushion and back heating elements are inoperative of one seat
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - One Heated Seat Inoperative
If just one of the heating elements is inoperative
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - One Heating Element is Inoperative.
If the driver seat exhibits a degraded heated seat operation
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Degraded Heated Seat Operation Driver Seat
If the passenger seat exhibits a degraded heated seat operation
20 of 62
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Degraded Heated Seat Operation Passenger Seat

5. All OK.

ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF.
• Terminal 1
• Terminal 2
• Terminal 3
• Terminal 4
• Terminal 5
• Terminal 6

5. Ignition ON.
• Terminal 1
• Terminal 2
• Terminal 3
21 of 62
• Terminal 4
• Terminal 5
• Terminal 6
If 1 V or greater


ignition ON.
3. Ignition OFF, connect the X1 harness connector at the K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front.
Disconnect the harness connector at the E14 Seat Heating Element - Cushion and the E14 Seat Heating
Element - Back, Engine/Vehicle ON.
• E14 Seat Heating Element - Cushion terminal 2
• E14 Seat Heating Element - Back terminal 2
If less than 4.8 V
Front.
22 of 62
Front, ignition ON.
5. Connect a test lamp between control circuit terminal 1 and control circuit terminal 4 of the E14 Seat
Heating Element - Back, engine ON.
is commanded ON.
7. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the E14 Seat Heating Element - Cushion, ignition ON.
Test or replace the E14 Seat Heating Element - Cushion.
9. Test or replace the E14 Seat Heating Element - Back.
One Heating Element is Inoperative
23 of 62
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E14 Seat Heating Element.
2. Connect a test lamp between control circuit terminal 1 and control circuit terminal 4, engine ON.
4. Test or replace the E14 Seat heating Element.
Degraded Heated Seat Operation Driver Seat

• E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion
• E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back
time.
If 40 Ω or greater
Front.
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 4.8 V
Front.
24 of 62
Front, ignition ON.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion and the
E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back. Disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K29F Seat
one at a time.
• E14B Seat Heating Element - Driver Cushion terminal 6 and terminal 1
• E14A Seat Heating Element - Driver Back terminal 3 and terminal 1

Degraded Heated Seat Operation Passenger Seat

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate component listed below. It may take up
• E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion
• E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back
If 40 Ω or greater
Front.
25 of 62
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 4.8 V
Front.
Front, ignition ON.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion and
the E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back. Disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K29 Seat
Heating Control Module.
one at a time.
• E14D Seat Heating Element - Passenger Cushion terminal 5 and terminal 2
• E14C Seat Heating Element - Passenger Back terminal 4 and terminal 12

Repair Instructions
• Front Seat Back Heater Replacement

• Front Seat Cushion Heater Replacement
26 of 62
and setup
REAR HEATED SEAT MALFUNCTION


B+ Terminal 10 X1 U1526, 1 U1526, 1 - -
Left Rear Heated Seat Cushion
2 3 3 -
- 3 - -
1 2 1 -
1 2 1 -
Right Rear Heated Seat Cushion
4 5 5 -
- 5 - -
1 4 1 -
1 4 1 -
Rear Seat Heating Control Module
- U1526, 1 - -
Ground
1. Left and right rear heated seats are inoperative.
2. Left rear heated seat is inoperative
3. Degraded left rear heated seat operation
4. Right rear heated seat is inoperative
5. Degraded right rear heated seat operation
The left and right rear heated seats switches are located with the auxiliary HVAC controls. When a heated seat
switch is pressed, a serial data message is sent from the auxiliary HVAC controls to the body control module
(BCM) indicating the rear heated seat command. The BCM serves as the heated seat system master to determine
the requested operating mode. The BCM then sends a LIN bus serial data message to the rear seat heating
control module indicating the heated seat command. In response to this message, the rear seat heating control
module attempts to drive the appropriate seat heating elements per the BCM command. The BCM also controls
the seat temperature and mode indicators, via the serial data line, used to provide the operator with feedback as
27 of 62
to the operating status of the system.
The rear seat heating control module controls heated seat operation for the left and right rear seats. When active,
power is applied to the seat cushion heater element through a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage supply
control circuit. The heater element is switched to ground by the module through a low side drive control circuit.
The seat cushion temperature sensor (thermistor) is packaged with the seat heating element located just under
the seat cover. The rear seat heating control module supplies the temperature sensor with a 5 V reference signal
circuit and a low reference circuit. The module monitors the voltage from the signal circuit to determine the
temperature of the seat.
Diagnostic Aids
cause both rear heated seats to be inoperative.
• A short to ground on the seat cushion temperature sensor signal circuit will cause the heated seat function
to be inoperative for that seat.
• The following faults will cause a degraded heated seat operation for both the seat back and seat cushion.
An open or a short to voltage on the seat cushion temperature sensor signal circuit.
An open in the seat cushion temperature sensor low reference circuit.
A fault in the seat cushion temperature sensor.
element.
ground before enabling the left and right rear seat heating elements.
• With the seat cushion heater element disconnected, if the high side output of the control module is
measured it will display a low current 12 V bleed off voltage. This bleed off voltage does not have a
meaningful diagnostic purpose. With the heater elements connected you would just see the 3.5 V biased
voltage from this circuit.
Schematic Reference
28 of 62
Rear Heated Seats Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Engine ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Body Control Module Left Rear Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter
changes between Off and Seat Back and Cushion Heating when pressing the left rear heated seat switch.
Replace the A34 HVAC Controls - Auxiliary.

3. Verify the scan tool Right Rear Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter changes between Off and
Seat Back and Cushion Heating when pressing the right rear heated seat switch.
Replace the A34 HVAC Controls - Auxiliary.

4. Verify the left and right rear heated seats operate.
If both rear heated seats are inoperative
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Both Rear Heated Seats are Inoperative
If just one of the rear heated seats is inoperative
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - One Rear Heated Seat is Inoperative
If the left rear seat exhibits a degraded heated seat operation
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Degraded Heated Seat Operation Left Rear Seat
If the right rear seat exhibits a degraded heated seat operation
29 of 62
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Degraded Heated Seat Operation Right Rear Seat

5. All OK.

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K29R Seat Heating Control Module - Rear,
ignition ON.
If infinite resistance, replace the K29R Seat Heating Control Module - Rear.
3. Ignition OFF.
• Terminal 2
• Terminal 6

5. Ignition ON.
• Terminal 2
• Terminal 6
If 1 V or greater

7. Replace the K29R Seat Heating Control Module - Rear.
30 of 62

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K29R Seat Heating Control Module - Rear,
ignition ON.
If infinite resistance, replace the K29R Seat Heating Control Module - Rear.
3. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, connect the X1 harness connector at the K29R Seat Heating
Control Module - Rear and disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate E14 Seat Heating Element
- Rear Cushion.
If less than 4.8 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K29R Seat Heating Control Module -
Rear.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K29R Seat Heating Control Module - Rear.
Rear, ignition ON.
31 of 62
If less than 1 V, replace the K29R Seat Heating Control Module - Rear.
5. Connect a test lamp between control circuit terminal 1 and control circuit terminal 4, engine ON.
is commanded ON.
6. Verify the test lamp turns ON after pressing the rear heated seat switch.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the K29R Seat Heating
Control Module - Rear.
7. Test or replace the E14 Seat Heating Element - Rear Cushion.
Degraded Heated Seat Operation Left Rear Seat

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the E14F Seat Heating Element - Left Rear Cushion. It
If 40 Ω or greater
Rear.
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 4.8 V
Rear.
32 of 62
Rear, ignition ON.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the E14F Seat Heating Element - Left Rear Cushion and
disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front.
6. Test for 500 Ω - 300 kΩ between the signal circuit terminal 6 and the low reference circuit terminal 1.
Replace the E14F Seat Heating Element - Left Rear Cushion.

Degraded Heated Seat Operation Right Rear Seat

1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the E14H Seat Heating Element - Right Rear Cushion.
If 40 Ω or greater
Rear.
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 4.8 V
Rear.
33 of 62
Rear, ignition ON.
5. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the E14H Seat Heating Element - Right Rear Cushion and
disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K29F Seat Heating Control Module - Front.
6. Test for 500 Ω - 300 kΩ between the signal circuit terminal 5 and the low reference circuit terminal 2.
Replace the E14H Seat Heating Element - Right Rear Cushion.

Repair Instructions
• Rear Seat Cushion Heater Replacement

• Control Module References for K29R Seat Heating Control Module - Rear replacement, programming
and setup
VENTED SEAT MALFUNCTION


Seat Back Blower Motor - Ignition 1 2 - -
Seat Blower Motor Control - Back 1 2 1 -
Seat Back Blower Motor - Ground - 2 - -
Seat Cushion Blower Motor -
1 3 - -
Ignition
Seat Blower Motor Control -
1 3 1 -
Cushion
34 of 62
Seat Cushion Blower Motor -
- 3 - -
Ground
1. Seat cushion and seat back ventilation functions are inoperative
2. Seat back ventilation function is inoperative
3. Seat cushion ventilation function is inoperative
The driver and front passenger vented seats switches are located on the center stack near the HVAC controls.
When a vented seat switch is pressed, a serial data message is sent from the HVAC controls to the body control
module (BCM) indicating the vented seat command. The BCM serves as the heated and vented seat system
master to determine the requested operating mode. The BCM then sends a serial data message to the seat
heating control module indicating the vented seat command. In response to this message, the seat heating
control module applies a low side pulse width modulation (PWM) signal through the seat blower motor control
circuit to the seat cushion and seat back blower motors indicating the vented seat command. The logic in the
blower motors set the blower speed to the switch set point.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the heated seat system operates.
If the heated seat system does not operate
Refer to Front Heated Seat Malfunction (With Vented Seat KU9)
35 of 62
Go to next step: If the heated seat system operates
between Off and Seat Venting/Cooling - High when pressing the driver vented seat switch.

4. Verify the scan tool Body Control Module Passenger Seat Heating/Venting/Cooling Mode parameter
changes between Off and Seat Venting/Cooling - High when pressing the passenger vented seat switch.

5. Verify the seat cushion and seat back blower motors turn ON and OFF.
If either one or both the seat cushion and seat back blower motors are inoperative
If the blower motors do not change speed or are always ON
Go to next step: If the seat cushion and seat back blower motors operate
6. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the appropriate seat
blower motor listed below. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
• M73C Seat Blower Motor - Driver Cushion
• M73A Seat Blower Motor - Driver Back
• M73D Seat Blower Motor - Passenger Cushion
• M73B Seat Blower Motor - Passenger Back
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
36 of 62
5. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal 2 and B+.
If 1 V or greater
Front.
6. Ignition ON.
7. Test for 9 V or greater between the control circuit terminal 2 and B+ after pressing the vented seat switch.
If less than 9 V
Front and the other M73 Seat Blower Motor - Back or Cushion, ignition ON.
8. Replace the M73 Seat Blower Motor.
Repair Instructions
• Front Seat Back Ventilation Blower Replacement

• Front Seat Cushion Ventilation Blower Replacement
and setup
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
WIRE TO WIRE REPAIR - SEATS
Special Tools
37 of 62
• J-38125-8 GMNA Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
• EL-38125-10 Except GMNA Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool
• EL-38125-5A Ultra Torch Special Tool
• DuraSeal splice sleeves
WARNING: In order to reduce the risk of personal injury, loss of high voltage isolation to
ground and higher system impedance, do not attempt to repair any HV wiring,
connector, or terminal that is damaged. High voltage coaxial type cables are not
repairable. Never attempt to repair a coaxial type cable. The entire
cable/harness or component must be replaced. In order to maintain system
integrity and personal safety, never attempt to repair any high voltage wiring,
cables, or terminals. Performing this procedure on high voltage circuits may
result in serious injury or death.
NOTE: If the wiring harness internal to the transmission is damaged, the wiring
harness must be replaced. The use of splice sleeves in an attempt to repair the
internal transmission wires, connectors, or terminals could result in
performance issues.
NOTE: Do not splice wires in Door Harness Grommets.
NOTE: • Use only DuraSeal splice sleeves. Other splice sleeves may not protect the
splice from moisture or provide a good electrical connection.
• When performing wire-to-wire repairs with wires of different sizes
(Example: installation of Terminated Leads or Pigtails), refer to the Folded-
Over Wire Selection Table Refer to: Folded-Over Wire Repair
Use DuraSeal splice sleeves to form a one-to-one splice on all types of insulation except high voltage and
specialty cables. Use DuraSeal splice sleeves where there are special requirements such as moisture sealing.
Follow the instructions below in order to splice copper wire using DuraSeal splice sleeves.
Crimp Tool Nest Color Wire Gauge mm2 /

Splice Sleeve Color 3 Crimp Nests 4 Crimp Nests (AWG)
Red (1) or Red/Green (1) Red (2) 0.13-0.35 /(22 - 26) *
19300089
Red (1) or Red/Green (1) Red (2) 0.5 - 0.8/(18 - 20)
19300089
Blue
Blue (2) Blue (3) 1.0 - 2.6/(14 - 16)
19300090
Yellow
Yellow (3) Yellow (4) 3.0 - 5.0/(10 - 12)
19300091
* Refer to: Folded-Over Wire Repair
NOTE: You must perform the following procedures in the listed order. Repeat the
38 of 62
procedure if any wire strands are damaged. You must obtain a clean strip
with all of the wire strands intact.
1. Open the harness by removing any tape:

• Use a sewing seam ripper, available from sewing supply stores, in order to cut open the harness in
order to avoid wire insulation damage.
• Use the DuraSeal splice sleeves on all types of insulation except Tefzel and coaxial.
• Do not use the crimp and DuraSeal splice sleeve to form a splice with more than 2 wires coming
together.
2. Cut as little wire off the harness as possible. You may need the extra length of wire in order to change the
location of a splice.
Adjust splice locations so that each splice is at least 40 mm (1.5 in) away from the other splices, harness
branches, or connectors.
3. Strip the insulation:

• When adding a length of wire to the existing harness, use the same size wire as the original wire.
• Perform one of the following items in order to find the correct wire size:
Find the wire on the schematic and convert to regional wiring gauge size.
If you are unsure of the wire size, begin with the largest opening in the wire stripper and
work down until achieving a clean strip of the insulation.
• Strip approximately 5.0 mm (0.20 in) of insulation from each wire to be spliced.
• Do not nick or cut any of the strands. Inspect the stripped wire for nicks or cut strands.
• If the wire is damaged, repeat this procedure after removing the damaged section.
4. For high temperature wiring 150Â°C (302Â°F) continuous or 175Â°C (347Â°F) excursion, use high
temperature heat shrink tube (Raychem SCT1) over the DuraSeal splice area. Refer to High Temperature
Wiring Repairs below.
5. Select the proper DuraSeal splice sleeve according to the wire size. Refer to the table above, at the
beginning of the repair procedure for the color coding of the DuraSeal splice sleeves and the crimp tool
nests.
6.
39 of 62
Non GMNA Crimping Tool EL-38125-10 Splice Sleeve Crimping Tool has four crimp nests. The largest
crimp nest (4) is used for crimping 5.0 and 3.0 mm2 (10 and 12 gauge) wires. The second largest crimp
nest (3) is used for crimping 2.0 and 1.0 mm2 (14 and 16 gauge) wires. The third largest crimp nest (2) is
used for crimping 0.75 and 0.50 mm2 (18 and 20 gauge) wires. The smallest crimp nest (1) is used for
crimping 0.35 and 0.13 mm2 (22 to 26 gauge) wires. The crimp nests are referenced in the table (farther
above) under the crimp tool nest color.
7.
GMNA crimping tool J-38125-8 splice sleeve crimping tool has three crimp nests. The largest crimp nest
(3) is used for crimping 5.0 and 3.0 mm2 (10 and 12 gauge). The second largest crimp nest (2) is used for
crimping 2.0 and 1.0 mm2 (14 and 16 gauge) wires. The smallest crimp nest (1) is used for crimping 0.75
40 of 62
and 0.50 mm2 (18 and 20 gauge) wires. The crimp nests are referenced in the table (farther above) under
the crimp tool nest color.
8. Use the splice sleeve crimp tool in order to position the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the proper color nest of
the splice sleeve crimp tool. For the four crimp nest tool, use the three largest crimp nests to crimp the
splice sleeves. For the three crimp nest tool, use all three crimp nests to crimp the splice sleeves. Use the
four and three crimp tool diagrams (above) and the table (farther above) to match the splice sleeve with
the correct crimp nest. The crimp tool diagram call out numbers match the numbers in the table (under
crimp tool nest color).
9.
Place the DuraSeal splice sleeve in the nest. Ensure that the crimp falls midway between the end of the
barrel and the stop. The sleeve has a stop (3) in the middle of the barrel (2) in order to prevent the wire (1)
from going further. Close the hand crimper handles slightly in order to firmly hold the DuraSeal splice
sleeve in the proper nest.
10.
41 of 62
Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Refer to Folded-Over Wire
gauges.
sleeve. Repeat steps 4 and 6 for the opposite end of the splice.
12.
42 of 62
Using the EL-38125-5A Ultra Torch Special Tool, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
13. Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
achieved.
Weatherpack™ Wiring Repair
NOTE: Some replacement pigtail connectors may be delivered without the terminated
leads installed into the connector. For Weatherpack™ connectors, all
terminated leads included in the package should to be installed into the
connector. If the connector end view shows that a terminal is not occupied, the
extra terminated lead(s) need to be installed and the end(s) sealed using a
DuraSeal splice sleeve and taped back into the harness.
1. Insert the wire into the splice sleeve barrel until the wire hits the barrel stop. Refer to Folded-Over Wire
gauges.
43 of 62
sleeve. Holding the DuraSeal with one hand gently tug on the wire to ensure it is crimped in the
DuraSeal.
3. Using the EL-38125-5A Ultra Torch Special Tool, apply heat to the crimped area of the barrel.
4.
Start in the middle and gradually move the heat barrel to the open ends of the tubing:
44 of 62
achieved.
5.
Tape the excess terminated lead(s) back into the harness. The tape should cover the harness by 25 mm (1
Inch). Use care to make sure the taping does not cause strain on the wiring and terminals, Improper taping
can cause wire and terminal fretting.
High Temperature Wiring Repairs
Use the following procedures to perform high temperature wiring repairs:
NOTE: All wiring repairs need to be 200 mm from the heat zone. Areas of consideration
would be any area located near the exhaust manifolds, catalytic converter,
exhaust pipes, and turbocharged engines.
Items Required
• DuraSeal splice sleeves to crimp and seal connections

• High temperature heat shrink tubing (Raychem SCT1) to protect the splice sleeves
• Terminated leads or pigtails
• The correct tools to remove the terminals from the connectors
NOTE: Use high temperature bulk wire rated at 150Â°C (302Â°F) continuous
temperature of the same or larger gauge size as the original wire when repair
damage wire. Also replace any reflective tape that you remove during the repair.
Wiring that is exposed to high temperatures 150Â°C (302Â°F) continuous or 175Â°C (347Â°F) excursion for
prolonged periods of time may use materials i.e. wires, connectors, and shielding that has a higher heat rating
45 of 62
than typical wiring. When making a repair in a high temperature area observe the following:
Wire to Wire Repair Incl High Temp
• Use GM approved high temperature bulk wire rated at 150Â°C (302Â°F) continuous temperature to
replace any damaged wire.
• Replace any heat shielding that is removed.
• Cover any DuraSeal splice sleeves with high temperature heat shrink tubing (Raychem SCT1).
• After making a wiring repair, ensure that the location of the wiring is not moved closer to the heat source.
CONNECTOR RECONNECTION - SEATS
Special Tools
EL-35616 Terminal Test Probe Kit
When the condition is not currently present, but is indicated in DTC history, the cause may be intermittent. An
intermittent may also be the cause when there is a customer complaint, but the symptom cannot be duplicated.
Refer to the Symptom Table of the system that is suspect of causing the condition before trying to locate an
intermittent condition.
Most intermittent conditions are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. Inspect for the following
items:
• Loose, corroded, or painted terminal stud/fastener

• Wiring broken inside the insulation
• Poor connection between the male and female terminal at a connector
• A terminal not seated all the way into the connector body
• Poor terminal to wire connection - Some conditions which fall under this description are poor crimps,
poor solder joints, crimping over the wire insulation rather than the wire itself, and corrosion in the wire
to terminal contact area, etc.
• Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring causing corrosion. The conductor
can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire
in the suspect circuits.
• Wiring which has been pinched, cut, or its insulation rubbed through may cause an intermittent open or
short as the bare area touches other wiring or parts of the vehicle.
• Wiring that comes in contact with hot or exhaust components
• Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required, in order
to verify the customer concern.
• Refer to Testing for Electrical Intermittents for test procedures to detect intermittent open, high
resistance, short to ground, and short to voltage conditions.
• Refer to Scan Tool Snapshot Procedure for advanced intermittent diagnosis and Vehicle Data Recorder
operation.
Testing for Terminal Fretting
46 of 62
Some intermittent conditions can be caused by wire terminal fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion is a build-up
of insulating, oxidized wear debris that can form when there is a small motion between electrical contacts. The
oxidized wear debris can pile up enough at the electrical contact spots that the electrical resistance across the
connection increases. Movement between the contacting surfaces as small as 10 to 100 microns can cause
fretting. To put this in perspective, a sheet of paper is about 100 microns thick, so fretting motion is small and
hard to see. Vibration and thermal expansion/contraction are the main sources that create fretting motion. Since
vehicles vibrate and can experience large temperature swings, they are a good source for fretting motion. Tin,
copper, nickel, and iron surfaces are all susceptible to fretting corrosion. Fretting corrosion can be difficult to
see but it looks like small, dark smudges on the terminals contact surface.
To correct a fretting condition disconnect the suspect connector and add dielectric grease/lubricant (Nyogel
760G or equivalent, meeting GM specification 12345579) to both sides of the connector terminals. Then
reconnect the connector and wipe away any excess lubricant. This will correct the additional terminal contact
resistance due to the terminal fretting corrosion.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact
It is important to test terminal contact at the component and any inline connectors before replacing a suspect
component. Mating terminals must be inspected to ensure good terminal contact. A poor connection between
the male and female terminal at a connector may be the result of contamination or deformation.
Contamination may be caused by the connector halves being improperly connected. A missing or damaged
connector seal, damage to the connector itself, or exposing the terminals to moisture and dirt can also cause
contamination. Contamination, usually in the underhood or underbody connectors, leads to terminal corrosion,
causing an open circuit or intermittently open circuit.
Deformation is caused by probing the mating side of a connector terminal without the proper adapter. Always
use the EL-35616 kit when probing connectors. Other causes of terminal deformation are improperly joining
the connector halves, or repeatedly separating and joining the connector halves. Deformation, usually to the
female terminal contact tang, can result in poor terminal contact causing an open or intermittently open circuit.
Testing for Proper Terminal Contact in Bussed Electrical Centers
It is very important to use the correct test adapter when testing for proper terminal contact of fuses and relays in
a bussed electrical center. Use the EL-35616 kit to test for proper terminal contact. Failure to use the EL-35616
kit can result in improper diagnosis of the bussed electrical center.
1. Separate the connector halves.

2. Visually inspect the connector halves for contamination. Contamination may result in a white or green
build-up within the connector body or between terminals. This causes high terminal resistance,
intermittent contact, or an open circuit. An underhood or underbody connector that shows signs of
contamination should be replaced in its entirety: terminals, seals, and connector body.
3. Using an equivalent male terminal/terminated lead, verify that the retention force is significantly different
between a known good terminal and the suspect terminal. Replace the female terminal in question.
Flat Wire Connectors
There are no serviceable parts for flat wire connectors on the harness side or the component side.
47 of 62
1. Remove the component in question.

2. Visually inspect each side of the connector for signs of contamination. Avoid touching either side of the
connector as oil from your skin may be a source of contamination as well.
3. Visually inspect the terminal bearing surfaces of the flat wire circuits for splits, cracks, or other
imperfections that could cause poor terminal contact. Visually inspect the component side connector to
ensure that all of the terminals are uniform and free of damage or deformation.
4. Insert the appropriate adapter into the flat wire harness connector in order to test the circuit in question.
Control Module/Component Voltage and Grounds
Poor voltage or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.
• Test all control module voltage supply circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying voltage to
a control module. Other components in the system may have separate voltage supply circuits that may
also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module/component connectors, fuses, and any
intermediate connections between the voltage source and the module/component. A test lamp or a DMM
may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current.
Operate the component to test the ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing
, and Power Distribution Wiring Schematics .
• Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground
circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested.
Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point (screw or stud). Inspect the
connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Operate the component to test the
ability of the circuit to carry sufficient current. Refer to Circuit Testing , and Ground Distribution
Wiring Schematics .
Temperature Sensitivity
• An intermittent condition may occur when a component/connection reaches normal operating

temperature. The condition may occur only when the component/connection is cold, or only when the
component/connection is hot.
• Freeze Frame, Failure Records, Snapshot, or Vehicle Data Recorder data may help with this type of
intermittent condition, where applicable.
• If the intermittent is related to heat, review the data for a relationship with the following:
High ambient temperatures
Underhood/engine generated heat
Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load
Higher than normal load conditions, towing, etc.
• If the intermittent is related to cold, review the data for the following:
Low ambient temperatures - In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or
component. Inspect for water intrusion.
The condition only occurs on a cold start.
The condition goes away when the vehicle warms up.
• Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature
48 of 62
related.
• If temperature is suspected of causing an intermittent fault condition, attempt to duplicate the condition.
Refer to Inducing Intermittent Fault Conditions in order to duplicate the conditions required.
Electromagnetic Interference and Electrical Noise
Some electrical components/circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference or other types of electrical
noise. Inspect for the following conditions:
• A mis-routed harness that is too close to high voltage/high current devices such as secondary ignition
components, motors, generator etc. - These components may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could
interfere with normal circuit operation.
• Electrical system interference caused by a malfunctioning relay, or a control module driven solenoid or
switch - These conditions can cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the condition will occur when the
malfunctioning component is operating.
• Installation of non-factory or aftermarket add on accessories such as lights, 2-way radios, amplifiers,
electric motors, remote starters, alarm systems, cell phones, etc. - These accessories may create
interference in other circuits while operating and the interference would disappear when the accessory is
not operating. Refer to Checking Aftermarket Accessories .
• Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may
contain a clamping diode.
• The generator may be allowing AC noise into the electrical system.
Incorrect Control Module
• There are only a few situations where reprogramming a control module is appropriate:
A new service control module is installed.
A control module from another vehicle is installed.
Revised software/calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
NOTE: DO NOT re-program the control module with the SAME

software/calibration files that are already present in the control module.
This is not an effective repair for any type of concern.
• Verify that the control module contains the correct software/calibration. If incorrect programming is
found, reprogram the control module with the most current software/calibration. Refer to Control
Module References for replacement, setup, and programming.
FRONT SEAT HEATER CONTROL MODULE BRACKET REPLACEMENT
49 of 62
Front Seat Heater Control Module Bracket Fastener [4x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Heater Control Module Bracket
Procedure
2
FRONT SEAT HEATER VENT CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT
50 of 62
Front Seat Heater Vent Control Module Fastener
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Heater Vent Control Module
Procedure
2
FRONT SEAT BACK HEATER REPLACEMENT
51 of 62
Driver or Passenger Seat Back Heater
Procedure
Remove the heater element leaving the old adhesive strips intact on the seat cushion. The
new seat heater adhesive strips will be placed over the old adhesive strips.
NOTE:
1 Apply low
heat with a
heat gun to
soften the
adhesive
before
removal.
FRONT SEAT CUSHION HEATER REPLACEMENT
52 of 62
WARNING:
To avoid
personal
injury,
perform a
passenger
presence
sensor
rezeroing/
learn on the
passenger
presence
system
whenever
you remove
or replace
the seat
cushion
trim. Failure
to do so may
cause the
system to
malfunction.
Preliminary Procedure Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement

1 Front Seat Cushion Pad
Front Seat Cushion Heater
Procedure
1. Note the routing of the wiring harness and connector location for installation.
2. Remove the heater element leaving the old adhesive strips intact on the seat cushion.
The new seat heater adhesive strips will be placed over the old adhesive strips.
2 NOTE:
Apply low
heat with a
heat gun to
soften the
adhesive
before
removal.
REAR SEAT HEATER SWITCH REPLACEMENT
53 of 62
Rear Seat Heater Switch
1 Procedure
REAR SEAT HEATER CONTROL MODULE REPLACEMENT

Rear Seat Cushion Removal and Installation
Rear Seat Heater Control Module Fastener
CAUTION:
1 Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
54 of 62
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Rear Seat Heater Control Module
Procedure
2
REAR SEAT CUSHION HEATER REPLACEMENT

Rear Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement
Rear Seat Cushion Heater
Procedure
2. Remove the heater element leaving the old adhesive strips intact on the seat cushion.
The new seat heater adhesive strips will be placed over the old adhesive strips.
FRONT SEAT VENT FAN MAT REPLACEMENT
55 of 62
WARNING:
To avoid
personal
injury,
perform a
passenger
presence
sensor
rezeroing/
learn on the
passenger
presence
system
whenever
you remove
or replace
the seat
cushion
trim. Failure
to do so may
cause the
system to
malfunction.
WARNING:
The
passenger
seat cushion
assembly is
serviced in a
kit with the
airbag front
passenger
56 of 62
presence
module,
cushion pad
(and if
equipped,
heat mat,
vent mat,
vent mat
support,
comfort
pads). All
components
in the
service kit
are
assembled
and
calibrated as
a unit and
must be
replaced as
a complete
assembly to
prevent
possible
injury to the
occupant.
Using only
some of the
components
in the
service kit
will cause
the
passenger
presence
system to
operate
improperly.
Preliminary Procedure Front Seat Cushion Cover and Pad Replacement

1 Front Seat Cushion Pad Front Support
Front Seat Vent Fan Mat
Procedure
2 1. Remove the mat leaving the old adhesive strips intact on the seat cushion. The new
mat adhesive strips will be placed over the old adhesive strips.
2. If servicing the passenger seat, re-zero the passenger presence system. Passenger
57 of 62
Presence System Rezeroing
FRONT SEAT BACK VENTILATION BLOWER REPLACEMENT

Front Seat Back Cushion Finish Panel Replacement
Front Seat Back Ventilation Blower Screw [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Front Seat Back Ventilation Blower
Procedure
2
2. Release the retainers.
FRONT SEAT CUSHION VENTILATION BLOWER REPLACEMENT
58 of 62
Front Seat Cushion Ventilation Blower
Procedure
1
2. Release the retainers to separate the blower from the front seat vent fan mat.
FRONT SEAT BACK VENT FAN MAT REPLACEMENT

Front Seat Back Cushion Vent Fan Mat
1 Procedure
Remove the mat leaving the old adhesive strips intact on the seat cushion. The new mat
59 of 62
adhesive strips will be placed over the old adhesive strips.

HEATED/VENTED SEAT DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Heated Seat Components
The heated/vented seat system consists of the following components:
• Heated and vented seat switches

• Body control module
• Seat heating control module
• Seat cushion heating element
• Seat cushion temperature sensor
• Seat back heating element
• Seat back temperature sensor
• Seat cushion blower motor
• Seat back blower motor
Heated/Vented Seat Switches
The driver and passenger heated and vented seat switches are located on the center stack near the HVAC
controls. The BCM is the heated and vented seat system master. It monitors heated/vented seat switch
activations to determine user requested operating mode. Based on the requested operating mode, the BCM
sends a LIN Bus serial data message to the front seat heating control module how to drive the self-regulated
heating pads or ventilation motors. The BCM also controls the indicators used to provide the operator with
feedback as to the operating status of the system. With each press of the switch, the system will cycle through
High, Medium, Low, and then back to Off again. The BCM also controls the seat temperature and mode
indicators, via the serial data line, used to provide the operator with feedback as to the operating status of the
system.
Heated Seat Operation
When inactive the seat heating control module connects the heating element low side outputs to a common
reference point internal to the module which is biased to approximately 3.5 V. The module uses this biased
voltage in order to check the high side and low side control circuits for a short to battery or ground before
enabling the driver and passenger seat heating elements. During heated seat operation, the seat heating control
module interrupts control of the heating elements every 10 s for approximately 10 ms to make this biased
voltage check.
With both the seat cushion and seat back heater elements disconnected, if the high side output of the module is
measured it will display a low current 12 V bleed off voltage. This bleed off voltage does not have a meaningful
diagnostic purpose. With one or both of the heater elements connected you would just see the 3.5 V biased
60 of 62
voltage from this circuit.
Temperature Regulation
If the heated seats are on high, the temperature level may automatically be lowered after approximately 30 min
of operation.
Front Vented Seat Operation
Each vented seat consists of 2 blower motors blower motors; one in the seat back and one in the seat cushion.
During vented seat operation, the vented seat blower motors move cabin air through channels in the foam pad
and small holes in the seat covers causing a cooling effect to the occupant.
With the ignition ON, battery voltage from the ignition main relay is applied through a 10 A fuse located in the
rear body fuse block to the seat cushion and seat back blower motors. Ground for each blower motor is provided
through separate ground circuits and a common ground connection.
When the seat heating control module receives a ventilation seat command, it sends a low side drive pulse width
modulation (PWM) signal through the blower motor control circuit to the seat back and cushion blower motors
indicating the seat ventilation command. The logic in the blower motors sets the blower speed to the switch set
point. The blower motors run causing a cooling effect to the occupant.
Heated and Cooled Seat Operation During Remote Start
Refer to Vehicle Personalization in the Owner's Manual for Remote Start Auto Heated and Ventilation Seats.
During remote start, the heated seats will turn ON when the ambient temperature is below 10Â°C (50Â°F).
During remote start, the seat ventilation system will turn ON when the ambient temperature is above 27Â°C
(80Â°F).
Load Shed Management
The electrical power management function is designed to monitor the vehicle electrical load and determine
when the battery is potentially in a high discharge condition. The heated seat system is one of the vehicle loads
that is subject to reduction during a battery discharge condition. For more information on load management
refer to Electrical Power Management Description and Operation .
REAR HEATED SEATS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Heated Seat Components
The rear heated seat system consists of the following components:
61 of 62
• Rear heated seat switches
• Body control module
• Rear seat heating control module
• Seat cushion heating element
• Seat cushion temperature sensor
Heated Seat Switches
When a heated seat switch is pressed, a serial data message is sent from the rear seat audio controls to the body
control module (BCM) indicating the rear heated seat command. The BCM serves as the heated seat system
master to determine the requested operating mode. The BCM then sends a LIN bus serial data message to the
rear seat heating control module indicating the heated seat command. In response to this message, the rear seat
heating control module attempts to drive the appropriate seat heating elements per the BCM command. The
BCM also controls the seat temperature and mode indicators, via the serial data line, used to provide the
operator with feedback as to the operating status of the system.
Rear Heated Seat Operation
The rear seat heating control module controls heated seat operation for the left and right rear seats. When active,
power is applied to the seat cushion heater element through a pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage supply
control circuit. The heater element is switched to ground by the module through a low side drive control circuit.
Temperature Regulation
The seat cushion temperature sensor (thermistor) is packaged with the seat heating element located just under
the seat cover. The rear seat heating control module supplies the temperature sensor with a 5 V reference signal
circuit and a low reference circuit. The module monitors the voltage from the signal circuit to determine the
temperature of the seat.
If the heated seats are on high, the temperature level may automatically be lowered after approximately 30 min
of operation.
62 of 62
Secondary And Configurable Customer Controls - XT4

STEERING WHEEL SECONDARY/CONFIGURABLE CONTROL WIRING SCHEMATICS
Left Steering Wheel Controls
Right Steering Wheel Controls
Drive Mode Select Switch
1 of 26
DTC B074B
Check - Vehicle
• An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions .
DTC Descriptor
DTC B074B
Drive Mode Select Switch Indicator Circuit 2

Control - Terminal 3 @ S48E
Multifunction Switch - Center 2 2 - -
Console
Control - Terminal 13 @ S48E
Multifunction Switch - Center 1 2 B074B 01 -
Console
1. Sport Mode - LED (Light Emitting Diode) = Always On
2. Sport Mode - LED (Light Emitting Diode) = Always Off
Circuit Description
2 of 26
Circuit Description
Control
component.
Control
component.
Depending on the version, the component can support
S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console • Sport Mode
• Tour Mode

K9 Body Control Module different functions:
Drive Mode
Control Circuit = Short to Ground
DTCs Stored
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
3 of 26

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console
4. Headlamp Switch = On
Refer to: Interior Backlighting Malfunction

7. Connect the electrical connector: S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console
10. Headlamp Switch = On
11. Verify the component works as specified: Sport Mode - LED (Light Emitting Diode) @ S48E
Multifunction Switch - Center Console = Off
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 8 X5 @ Control module
harness & Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console
12. Connect a 3 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control circuit terminal 8 X5 & Ground
Verify the component works as specified: Tour Mode - LED (Light Emitting Diode) @ S48E
Multifunction Switch - Center Console = On

harness & Ground
harness & Control circuit terminal 13 @ Component harness
4 of 26
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: S48E Multifunction Switch - Center Console
Repair Instructions
DTC B074C
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B074C
Drive Mode Select Switch Indicator Circuit 3

5 V Reference - Terminal 2 @
B074C B074C B074C B074C
S126 Drive Mode Select Switch
Signal Terminal 1 @ S126 Drive
B074C B074C B074C B074C
Mode Select Switch
Ground Terminal 3 @ S126
- B074C - -
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Drive Mode Description and Operation
Circuit Description
Signal
Low Reference Low Reference circuit
The control module contains a microprocessor used to
process input data to control outputs.
5 of 26
The switch S126 has an internal resistor ladder network. A
S126 Drive Mode Select Switch specific resistance is generated dependent on the position of
the switch.
Drive Mode Select Switch = Internal Malfunction
Drive Mode Select Switch = Inoperative
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference

2. Operate the component: S126 Drive Mode Select Switch - Rotate Left & Rotate Right - Multiple Buttons
Pressed
Verify the following information is correctly displayed: Drive Mode @ A5 Driver Information Center
6 of 26

3. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S126 Drive Mode Select Switch
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal @ Component harness &
Ground terminal
5. Test for 4.8 to 5.2 V between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal 5 & Ground
If less than 4.8 V
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal @ Component
harness & Ground
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal @ Component
harness & The other end of the circuit @ Control module harness
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: 5 V Reference circuit terminal @ Component harness
& Ground
7 of 26
If 1 V or greater
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal @ Component harness &
Ground
Ground

10. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 @ Component harness & The
other end of the circuit @ Control module harness

11. Test or replace the component: S126 Drive Mode Select Switch
12. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within
the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.
Verify the DTC does not set.
If the DTC sets

13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC B3622
8 of 26
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3622 39
Steering Wheel Controls Internal Malfunction
DTC B3622 59
Steering Wheel Controls Signal Circuit Protection Time-Out

1, 1,
B+ - -
U1510 00 U1510 00
Mute Signal 1 1 B3622 59 -
Talk Signal 1 1 B3622 59 -
1, 1, 1,
Serial Data -
U1510 00 U1510 00 U1510 00
1,
Low Reference - - -
U1510 00
1. Steering Wheel Controls Inoperative
The Steering Wheel Controls are divided into a right-hand set and left-hand set. The right-hand switch is
connected to the IPC LIN serial data and provides input from the left-hand switches. The IPC identifies the
switch selection and activates the feature.
Ignition ON.
B3622 39
An internal electrical malfunction has been detected in the steering wheel controls switch.
B3622 59
A stuck switch has been detected in the steering wheel controls switch.
9 of 26
No action is taken.
The DTC will clear when the conditions for setting the DTC are no longer present.
Schematic Reference
Steering Wheel Controls Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify all the associated primary controls on the radio (Volume, Mute, Seek, etc.) operate properly.
If any of the primary controls do not function properly
Refer to Symptoms - Entertainment
Go to next step: If all of the primary controls function properly

3. Verify all functions on the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right operate properly.
If some, but not all, functions on the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right do not
operate
Test or replace the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right
If all functions on the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right do not operate
Refer to All Controls Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing.
Go to next step: If all functions on the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right operate
10 of 26
properly
4. Verify the voice and mute functions of the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left operate properly.
If either the voice or mute function does not operate from the S70L Steering Wheel Controls
Switch - Left
Refer to Left Controls Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing.
Go to next step: If both the voice and mute functions of the S70L Steering Wheel Controls
Switch - Left operate properly
5. All OK.
All Controls Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right. It
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right.
If less than 2 V
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P16 Instrument Cluster.
11 of 26
If less than 2 Ω, replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P16 Instrument Cluster, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the P16 Instrument Cluster.
6. Test or replace S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right
Left Controls Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S70L Steering Wheel
Controls Switch - Left.
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the volt between the following signal circuits and ground
• Voice - Terminal 1
• Mute - Terminal 3
If less than 4.8 V
4. Replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
12 of 26
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for Instrument Cluster replacement, programming, and setup
DTC P159F, P15A0, OR P15A1

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P159F
Fuel Economy Mode Switch Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P15A0
Fuel Economy Mode Switch Circuit High Voltage
DTC P15A1
Fuel Economy Mode Switch Performance

5 V Reference P159F P159F P15A0 P15A1
Signal P159F P159F P15A0 P15A1
Ground - P15A0 - -
Circuit Description
Signal
13 of 26
the switch.
Signal circuit - Voltage = Out Of Range
DTCs listed in the DTC Descriptor Category = Type B
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
14 of 26
If the DTC sets

2. All OK.

Ground terminal
If less than 4.8 V
harness & Ground
& Ground
15 of 26
If 1 V or greater
Ground
Ground


If the DTC sets

13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
SYMPTOMS - SECONDARY AND CONFIGURABLE CUSTOMER CONTROLS
16 of 26
Refer to Steering Wheel Controls Description and Operation.
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the steering wheel controls.
• Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components, for obvious damage or conditions, which
could cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Symptom List
Refer to Steering Wheel Controls Malfunction in order to diagnose the symptom.
DRIVE MODE SWITCH MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC P159F
Fuel Economy Mode Switch Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P15A0
Fuel Economy Mode Switch Circuit High Voltage
DTC P15A1
Fuel Economy Mode Switch Performance

17 of 26
5 V Reference P159F P159F P15A0 P15A1
Signal P159F P159F P15A0 P15A1
Ground - P15A0 - -
Circuit Description
Signal
the switch.
Signal circuit - Voltage = Out Of Range
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
18 of 26
• Wiring Repairs
DTC Type Reference
Scan Tool Reference
If the DTC sets

2. All OK.

Ground terminal
If less than 4.8 V
harness & Ground
19 of 26
& Ground
If 1 V or greater
Ground
Ground


20 of 26
If the DTC sets

13. All OK.
Repair Instructions
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS MALFUNCTION


1, 1,
B+ - -
U1510 00 U1510 00
Mute Signal 1 1 B3622 59 -
Talk Signal 1 1 B3622 59 -
1, 1, 1,
Serial Data -
U1510 00 U1510 00 U1510 00
1,
Low Reference - - -
U1510 00
1. Steering Wheel Controls Inoperative
The Steering Wheel Controls are divided into a right-hand set and left-hand set. The right-hand switch is
connected to the IPC LIN serial data and provides input from the left-hand switches. The IPC identifies the
switch selection and activates the feature.
Schematic Reference
21 of 26
Steering Wheel Controls Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON. Verify the driver information center (DIC) illuminates.

If the DIC does not illuminate
Test or replace the instrument cluster.
Go to next step: If the DIC illuminates

2. Verify all the associated primary controls on the radio (Volume, Mute, Seek, etc.) operate properly.
If any of the primary controls do not function properly
Refer to Symptoms - Entertainment
Go to next step: If all of the primary controls function properly

3. Verify all functions on the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right operate properly.
If some, but not all, functions on the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right do not
operate
Test or replace the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right
If all functions on the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right do not operate
Refer to All Controls Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing.
Go to next step: If all functions on the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right operate
properly
4. Verify the voice and mute functions of the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left operate properly.
If either the voice or mute function does not operate from the S70L Steering Wheel Controls
Switch - Left
Refer to Left Controls Malfunction in Circuit/System Testing.
Go to next step: If both the voice and mute functions of the S70L Steering Wheel Controls
Switch - Left operate properly
22 of 26
5. All OK.
All Controls Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right. It
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right.
If less than 2 V
23 of 26
6. Test or replace S70R Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Right
Left Controls Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S70L Steering Wheel
Controls Switch - Left.
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the volt between the following signal circuits and ground
• Voice - Terminal 1
• Mute - Terminal 3
If less than 4.8 V
4. Replace the S70L Steering Wheel Controls Switch - Left.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for Instrument Cluster replacement, programming, and setup

DRIVE MODE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
24 of 26
The drive mode system is a customer configurable control that allows the vehicle operator to tailor the vehicle
operation and driveability parameters based on driving conditions. The drive mode is controlled by the vehicle
operator through the Drive Mode Select Switch. The Drive Mode Select Switch is a momentary rotary knob
with two internal switches and up to four LED indicators. Rotating the knob left or right will change to the next
drive mode and the corresponding drive mode indicator on the switch will illuminate.
The Drive Mode Select Switch is an input to the Engine Control Module. When the knob is rotated, the Engine
Control Module will broadcast a message to all modules indicating the requested drive mode. Control modules
that are involved in changing their operation based on differing drive modes will then change their operating
values. The Body Control Module will illuminate the appropriate drive mode indicator on the Drive Mode
Select Switch.
The components of the drive mode are:
• Drive Mode Select Switch

• Engine Control Module
• Body Control Module
Other control modules or components that may respond to the commanded drive mode are:
• Electronic Brake Control Module

• Power Steering Control Module
• Rear Differential Clutch Control Module
• Transmission Control Module
The Drive Mode Select Switch is a momentary rotary knob with two switches and up to four indicators. At rest,
the Drive Mode Select Switch remains in a neutral position with both switches open. When rotated to the left or
right, the corresponding switch is closed. When released, the rotary knob returns to the neutral position and both
switch will again be open. The two switches are situated within a resistor ladder. The Engine Control Module
applies 5 volts to the resistor ladder, which also receives a constant ground. The Engine Control Module
monitors the signal voltage. The signal voltage is measured within the resistor ladder. As each switch is closed,
current flows through a different number of resistors, changing the voltage drop across the resistors and
changing the voltage monitored by the Engine Control Module.
The Engine Control Module monitors the Drive Mode Select Switch as an input. The Engine Control Module
applies 5 volts to the switch resistor ladder and monitors the signal voltage from the switch. As the switch is
rotated to the left or right, current flows through different resistors and the voltage monitored at the Engine
Control Module also changes. The Engine Control Module uses this voltage change to determine if the rotary
knob is in the at rest position or has been turned left/right. The Engine Control Module will change the drive
mode based on this input.
When a drive mode change is requested by the drive through the Drive Mode Select Switch, the Engine Control
Module will broadcast a message to all modules indicating the requested drive mode. Control modules that are
involved in changing their operation based on differing drive modes will then change their operating values.
The Engine Control Module may also change operating values based on the drive mode, such as a more or less
aggressive throttle profile.
25 of 26
Body Control Module
The Body Control Module responds to the selected drive mode by illuminating the appropriate drive mode
indicator on the Drive Mode Select Switch. All indicators receive voltage via an indicator control circuit from a
PWM high side driver in the Body Control Module. Ground to each indicator is individually controlled by a
Body Control Module low side driver via a control circuit. For the selected drive mode, the Body Control
Module will ground the appropriate control circuit and the indicator will illuminate.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
The steering wheel control switches duplicate the function of the primary controls of the associated component.
The Steering Wheel Controls are divided into a right-hand set and left-hand set. The right hand switch,
depending on vehicle options, is connected to the BCM or to the IPC through a LIN serial data circuit and
provides hardwired serial data input from the left hand switches. The IPC identifies the switch selected and
sends a serial data message to the component controlled by the switch, activating the feature.
This section is intended to diagnose the circuits between the IPC and the steering wheel control switches. If the
primary control for the device is inoperative, refer to the appropriate section for the component the steering
wheel control switch is used for.
26 of 26
Theft Deterrent System - XT4

THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM WIRING SCHEMATICS
Content Theft Deterrent
Inclination and Intrusion Sensing (UTU/UTV) and Alarm (UTR)
Thatchem (UTT)
1 of 24
DTC B291B
DTC Descriptors
DTC B291B 00
Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Malfunction
DTC B291B 39
Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Internal Malfunction
DTC B291B 3B
Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Self-Test Malfunction
DTC B291B 42
Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Calibration Not Programmed
DTC B291B 4B
Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Calibration Not Learned

2 of 24
B+ B291B 3B B291B 3B - -
U1515, B291B U1515, B291B
Serial Data B291B 3B B291B 00
3B 3B
Ground - B291B 3B - -
The Body Control Module performs various communication fault detection tests to determine if a software,
hardware, or communication concern exists with the Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Module.
• The ignition is OFF.

• The vehicle is in Park.
The Body Control Module cannot establish communications with the Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Module.
The intrusion and inclination alarm output is disabled.
• A current DTC is cleared when the conditions for setting the DTC are no longer present.
Schematic Reference
Theft Deterrent System Wiring Schematics
Component Connector End Views - Index
Theft Systems Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
3 of 24
1. Ignition OFF and vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B165 Content Theft
Deterrent Sensor Module. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the B165 Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Module.
5. Ignition OFF, arm the content theft deterrent system.
6. Test for greater than 4.5 V between the serial data circuit terminal 4 and ground.
If 4.5 V or less
8. Test for less than 1 V between the B165 Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Module serial data circuit
4 of 24
If 1 V or greater

9. Test or replace the B165 Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Module.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for Body Control Module replacement, programming, and setup
SYMPTOMS - THEFT DETERRENT
1. Perform Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle in order to verify that all of the following are true:
following Theft Systems Description and Operation.
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Theft Deterrent System.
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Symptom List
• Content Theft Deterrent Malfunction (with UTR), or Content Theft Deterrent Malfunction
(without UTR)
• Security Indicator Malfunction
CONTENT THEFT DETERRENT MALFUNCTION (WITH UTR)

5 of 24
The content theft deterrent system is a software based system in which the body control module (BCM) actively
monitors certain inputs to determine if unauthorized vehicle access is being attempted. Based on inputs such as
the door ajar switches, the rear compartment ajar switch, the intrusion/inclination sensor, and the hood ajar
switch, the BCM determines whether a content theft deterrent alarm is warranted. If unauthorized access is
being detected, the BCM will sound the power sounder and flash the exterior lamps as a means of theft
deterrence.
Diagnostic Aids
The scan tool Content Theft Deterrent Trigger History 1, 2, and 3 parameters can be used to help isolate an
intermittent unwanted content theft deterrent alarm. These parameters are a rolling history of the previous three
causes of a theft deterrent alarm. If all three parameters are indicating the same alarm trigger, the indicated input
should be the starting point when diagnosing an intermittent concern.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF.
2. Verify each indicator/message transitions between the ajar and closed state while opening and closing
each vehicle door, hood, and rear compartment.
If the indicator/message does not change
Refer to Door Ajar Indicator Malfunction , Hood Ajar Indicator/Message Malfunction ,

Liftgate Ajar Indicator Malfunction (With TB5) , or Liftgate Ajar Indicator Malfunction
(Without TB5) . .
Go to next step: If each indicator/message changes
6 of 24
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the intrusion/inclination sensor disable LED turns ON and OFF as the intrusion/inclination sensor
disable switch is cycled.
If the LED does not turn ON and OFF
Refer to Inclination/Intrusion Sensor Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the LED turns ON and OFF

5. Completely lower the driver door window and close all vehicle doors, ignition OFF.
6. Arm the content theft deterrent system by locking the door with the keyless entry transmitter.
7. Verify the scan tool Content Theft Deterrent Alarm Status parameter is Armed.
If not Armed
Refer to Keyless Entry System Malfunction .
Go to next step: If Armed

8. Without disarming the system, reach in through the open driver window and open the driver door.
9. Verify the scan tool Content Theft Deterrent Alarm Status parameter is Alarm.
If not Alarm
Go to next step: If Alarm

10. Verify the P25 Power Sounder Content Theft Deterrent Alarm Module is sounding.
If the P25 Power Sounder Content Theft Deterrent Alarm Module is not sounding
Refer to Theft Deterrent Alarm Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the P25 Power Sounder Content Theft Deterrent Alarm Module is
sounding
11. All OK.
Repair Instructions
CONTENT THEFT DETERRENT MALFUNCTION (WITHOUT UTR)

The content theft deterrent (CTD) system is a software based system in which the body control module (BCM)
7 of 24
actively monitors certain inputs to determine if unauthorized vehicle access is being attempted. Based on inputs
such as the door ajar switches, the rear compartment ajar switch, and the hood ajar switch, the BCM determines
whether a CTD alarm is warranted. If unauthorized access is being detected, the BCM will pulse the vehicle
horn and flash the turn signals as a means of theft deterrence.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON, vehicle in gear, individually open and close each vehicle door while observing the door ajar
indicator/message. The indicator/message should accurately transition between the door ajar and door
closed state when each door is opened and closed.
If the door ajar indicator/message does not properly transition when each door is opened and
closed, refer to Door Ajar Indicator Malfunction .
2. Ignition ON, vehicle in PARK, open and close the liftgate while observing the rear access
indicator/message. The indicator/message should accurately transition between the rear access open and
rear access closed state when the liftgate is opened and closed.
If the indicator/message does not properly transition when the liftgate is opened and closed, refer to
Liftgate Ajar Indicator Malfunction (With TB5) , or Liftgate Ajar Indicator Malfunction
(Without TB5) .
3. Completely lower the driver door window and close all vehicle doors.
4. Without disarming the system, reach in through the open driver window, unlock and open the driver door.
Verify the scan tool CTD Status parameter displays Alarm Active.
If the parameter does not equal the specified value, replace the BCM.
5. With the door open, verify the vehicle horn is pulsing and the exterior lamps are flashing.
If the horn is not pulsing, refer to Horns Malfunction .
8 of 24
If the exterior lights are not flashing, refer to Turn Signal Lamps and/or Indicators Malfunction
.
1. Ignition OFF and vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B165 Content Theft
Deterrent Sensor Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
If 4.5 V or less
7. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module and any other
components or control modules sharing the serial data circuit with the B165 Content Theft Deterrent
Sensor Module, ignition ON.
9 of 24
If 1 V or greater

10. Fully arm then disarm the content theft deterrent system and verify no DTCs are set.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup and programming
INCLINATION/INTRUSION SENSOR MALFUNCTION


B+ B291B 3B B291B 3B - -
Control 1 1 1 -
Signal 2 2 2 -
U1515, B291B U1515, B291B
Serial Data B291B 3B B291B 00
3B 3B
Ground - B291B 3B - -
1. Intrusion/inclination sensor cannot be disabled
2. Intrusion/inclination sensor indicator malfunction
The ultrasonic intrusion sensor is used to determine if someone has gain unauthorized access to the vehicle
while the content theft deterrent system is armed by detecting any movement within the vehicle interior. The
ultrasonic intrusion sensor also senses the vehicle angle while the content theft deterrent system to monitor for
tow-away vehicle theft.
B+ and ground are applied at all time to the ultrasonic intrusion sensor. The ultrasonic intrusion sensor
communicates with the body control module via serial data. The theft deterrent sensor disable switch is used to
enable and disable ultrasonic intrusion sensor. The ultrasonic intrusion sensor monitors the theft deterrent sensor
disable switch signal circuit. When the switch is pressed, the signal circuit is pulled low, and the ultrasonic
intrusion sensor is enabled or disabled. The ultrasonic intrusion sensor applies voltage to the theft deterrent
sensor disable switch indicator control circuit to illuminate the theft deterrent sensor disable switch indicator.
10 of 24
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B165 Content Theft
Deterrent Sensor Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
11 of 24
If 4.5 V or less
If 1 V or greater

9. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the B165 Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Module.
Disconnect the harness connector at the S43 Theft Deterrent Sensor Disable Switch. It may take up to 2
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
11. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the S43 Theft Deterrent Sensor Disable Switch.
Disconnect the harness connector at the B165 Content Theft Deterrent Sensor Module, ignition ON.
12. Test for less than 1 V between the circuit terminal listed below and ground:
• Signal circuit terminal 1
If 1 V or greater

14. Verify the intrusion/inclination sensor disable LED is illuminated.
12 of 24
If the indicator is not illuminated
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the S43 Theft Deterrent
Sensor Disable Switch.
If 2 Ω or greater, replace the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the S43 Theft Deterrent Sensor Disable Switch.
Go to next step: If the indicator is illuminated
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S43 Theft Deterrent Sensor Disable Switch.
If infinite resistance, test or replace the S43 Theft Deterrent Sensor Disable Switch.
16. Test for less than 10 Ω between the signal circuit terminal 1 and ground with the intrusion/inclination
sensor disable switch pressed.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S43 Theft Deterrent Sensor Disable Switch.
If 2 Ω or greater, replace the open/high resistance in the circuit.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the S43 Theft Deterrent Sensor Disable Switch.
Repair Instructions
• Theft Deterrent Sensor Replacement

• Control Module References for body control module replacement, programming, and setup.
INCLINATION SENSOR MALFUNCTION

13 of 24
B+ 1 1 - -
Inclination Sensor Signal 1 1 1 -
Ground - 1 - -
1. Inclination Sensor Malfunction
The inclination sensor detects changes in the parked angle of the vehicle. If a change greater than 3 degrees for
a 7 second period is detected, the vehicles content theft alarm is sounded. The sensor recalibrates itself each
time the vehicle is parked, which allows it to account for parking on steep grades without unintentional
activation.
Diagnostic Aids
On some vehicles the inclination sensor is a dealer installed accessory. To determine if a particular vehicle is
equipped with an inclination sensor, visually inspect the installation location for the sensor based on the
information contained in the installation instructions.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Without Accessory Shock Sensor
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the inclination sensor.

2. Ignition ON, verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and ground.
14 of 24
If the test lamp does not illuminate, test the B+ circuit for a short to ground or an open/high
resistance.
3. Test for B+ between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
If not the specified value, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If
the circuit tests normal, replace the BCM.
4. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the inclination sensor. Disconnect the X7 harness
connector at the BCM.
5. Ignition ON, test for B+ between the signal circuit terminal 15 and ground.
If not the specified value, test the signal circuit for a short to ground or and open/high resistance. If
the circuit tests normal, replace the inclination sensor.
6. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the inclination sensor.
With Accessory Shock Sensor
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the inclination sensor and the harness connector at the
shock sensor.
2. Ignition ON, verify a test lamp illuminates between the inclination sensor B+ circuit terminal 1 and
ground.
resistance.
3. Test for B+ between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
4. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the inclination sensor. Disconnect the X7 harness
connector at the BCM.
5. Ignition ON, test for B+ between the BCM signal circuit terminal 15 and ground.
the circuit tests normal, test or replace the inclination sensor.
6. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the shock sensor.
If not the specified value, test or replace the shock sensor.
8. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the inclination sensor.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup, and programming
SECURITY INDICATOR MALFUNCTION

15 of 24
The security indicator acts as a status indicator for the content theft deterrent (CTD) system when the ignition is
OFF and as a fault indicator for the immobilizer system when the ignition is ON. When either the body control
module (BCM) or theft deterrent module (DTM) requires the security indicator to be illuminated, a serial data
message is sent to the instrument panel cluster (IPC), which will illuminate the indicator.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Ignition ON, verify the security indicator illuminates when performing the scan tool IPC Lamp Test.
If the security indicator does not illuminate, replace the IPC.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for IPC replacement, setup, and programming
SHOCK SENSOR MALFUNCTION

16 of 24

B+ 1 1 - -
Shock Sensor Signal 1 1 1 -
Ground - 1 - -
1. Shock Sensor Malfunction
The shock sensor is a component of the content theft deterrent (CTD) system which monitors the vehicle for
shock impacts. The shock sensor provides an alarm signal to the body control module (BCM) in the event that
the vehicle is being tampered with. The sensor ground is controlled through a switched ground from the BCM.
By providing ground from the BCM the sensor is powered-up and activated.
Diagnostic Aids
The shock sensor is a dealer installed accessory. Not all vehicles are equipped with an inclination sensor. To
determine if a particular vehicle is equipped with an inclination sensor, visually inspect the installation location
for the sensor based on the information contain in the installation instructions.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
Without Accessory Inclination Sensor
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the shock sensor.
17 of 24
2. Ignition ON, verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal A and ground.
resistance.
3. Test for B+ between the signal circuit terminal B and ground.
4. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the shock sensor. Disconnect the X7 harness connector at
the BCM.
5. Ignition ON, test for B+ between the signal circuit terminal 15 and ground.
the circuit tests normal, replace the shock sensor.
6. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the shock sensor.
With Accessory Inclination Sensor
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the shock sensor and the harness connector at the
inclination sensor.
2. Ignition ON, verify a test lamp illuminates between the shock sensor B+ circuit terminal A and ground.
resistance.
3. Test for B+ between the signal circuit terminal B and ground.
4. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the shock sensor. Disconnect the X7 harness connector at
the BCM.
the circuit tests normal, test or replace the shock sensor.
6. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the inclination sensor.
If not the specified value, test or replace the inclination sensor.
8. If all circuits test normal, test or replace the shock sensor.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for BCM replacement, setup, and programming
THEFT DETERRENT ALARM MALFUNCTION

18 of 24

B+ 1 1 1 -
Serial Data U1522 1 U1522 -
Ground - 1 - -
1. Content theft deterrent power sounder inoperative
The content theft deterrent system uses the power sounder to provide an audible alert when in the alarm mode.
The power sounder receives a constant B+ and ground. The body control module commands the power sounder
via serial data. The power sounder is also equipped with a battery backup. If the power sounder is disconnected
while the ignition is OFF, the battery backup will allow the power sounder to sound the audible content theft
deterrent alert.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the P25 Power Sounder
Content Theft Deterrent Alarm Module. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
19 of 24
3. Ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF.
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the P25 Power Sounder Content Theft Deterrent Alarm Module.
If 4.5 V or less
8. Test for less than 1 V between the P25 Power Sounder Content Theft Deterrent Alarm Module serial data
circuit terminal 3 and ground.
If 1 V or greater

9. Test or replace the P25 Power Sounder Content Theft Deterrent Alarm Module.
Repair Instructions
• Theft Deterrent Alarm Replacement
20 of 24
• Control Module References for body control module replacement, programming, and setup.

THEFT SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
When armed, the content theft deterrent system is designed to deter vehicle content theft by pulsing the horns
and exterior lamps for approximately 30 seconds when an unauthorized vehicle entry is detected. However, the
content theft deterrent system does not affect engine starting.
An unauthorized entry can be any of the following with the content theft deterrent system armed:
• Unauthorized entry into the underhood area

• Unauthorized entry into the rear compartment
• When any door is opened without using the UNLOCK command from a keyless entry transmitter
• After a battery reconnect, if the battery was disconnected with the content theft deterrent system armed
The components of the content theft deterrent system are:
• Body Control Module (BCM)

• Security indicator
• Door ajar switches
• Liftgate ajar switch
• Hood ajar switch
• Intrusion sensor (RPO UA2 or UTC)
• Intrusion sensor disable switch (RPO UA2 or UTC)
• Glass breakage sensor (RPO UA2, UTC, or UTT)
• Alarm siren (RPO UA2 or UTC)
Arming the Content Theft Deterrent System
Use the following procedure in order to arm the system:
1. Place the shift lever in P (park).

2. Turn OFF the ignition.
3. Open any door.
NOTE: The system is not armed if the doors are locked manually; the power door
lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter must be used to arm the
content theft deterrent system.
4. Lock the doors with the power door lock switch or by pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter. The
system is in standby mode and will not start the arming timer until all doors are closed.
5. The system will begin the arm sequence immediately after the last door is closed. If the keyless entry
transmitter is used to arm the system after the vehicle doors are closed, the arm sequence will begin as
21 of 24
soon as the LOCK command is received from the transmitter.
6. Pressing the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter a second time will bypass the delayed arming
function and force the system to arm.
Locking the Vehicle Without Arming the Content Theft Deterrent System
Locking the vehicle may be accomplished without arming the content theft deterrent system. Use of the manual
door locks will lock the vehicle, but will not arm the content theft deterrent system.
Disarming an Armed System/Silencing an Alarm
If system arming has been requested by the power door lock switch or the keyless entry transmitter, it must be
disarmed.
NOTE: Disconnecting the battery or removing fuses does not disable the arm or alarm
modes, since the BCM stores the content theft deterrent mode status in
memory.
• To disarm the content theft deterrent system in standby mode, perform one of the following:
Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.
Approach the vehicle with a valid keyless entry transmitter and pull the vehicle door handle (RPO
ATH).
Insert a valid key into the ignition and switch to the ON position.
• To disarm the content theft deterrent system in the armed mode (non-event) or when activated (during an
alarm event):
Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.
Insert a valid key into the ignition and switch to the ON position
Content Theft Deterrent Circuit Description
The following is a description of each component used in the content theft deterrent system:
Body Control Module
The content theft deterrent system is an internal function of the BCM which utilizes serial data and various
switch inputs information to perform content theft deterrent functions. When the BCM detects an unauthorized
entry, it activates the horns and exterior lamps. The BCM has 4 basic modes (disarmed, standby, armed, and
alarm) for operating the content theft deterrent system. The different modes are described below.
1. The BCM has the content theft deterrent system in a disarmed mode until the following conditions are
detected:
• Ignition key turned to the OFF position.
• Doors locked by either the power door lock switch or the LOCK button on the transmitter.
2. The BCM enters the standby mode when the above conditions are detected. If a door was already opened
when the arm mode was requested, the standby mode does not start the timer until the last door is closed.
3. When the last door is closed, a 15 second timer is activated. Once the timer has expired, the BCM enters
the armed mode. After this delay, any unauthorized entry will activate the alarm mode.
4. When the BCM detects an unauthorized entry, the BCM enters the alarm mode. The BCM activates the
horns and exterior lamps for 30 seconds. This is followed by a three minute time-out with the horn no
22 of 24
longer active. If no new intrusions are detected after the time-out, the horn is not active. The system must
be disarmed or the intrusion condition removed after the time-out for the system to exit alarm mode.
The passive keyless entry system can arm and disarm the content theft deterrent system. When a valid keyless
entry transmitter is detected while attempting to passively access the vehicle, the keyless entry module will send
a message via serial data to disarm the content theft deterrent system.
The keyless entry system can arm and disarm the content theft deterrent system. When the remote control door
lock receiver receives a door lock or unlock signal from the transmitter, the remote control door lock receiver
sends a message to the BCM via serial data to perform the appropriate arm/disarm functions.
Security Indicator
The security LED is illuminated on the upper I/P by the BCM. The content theft deterrent system uses the
security LED to inform the driver of system status prior to arming.
Door Ajar Switches
The content theft deterrent system uses the door ajar switches as a status indicator to activate the alarm. The
door ajar switches are monitored by the body control module via a discrete input from each door ajar switch. If
the BCM receives a signal indicating a door is opened when the content theft deterrent system is armed, the
BCM activates the alarm.
Hood Ajar Switch
The content theft deterrent system uses the hood ajar switch as a status indicator to activate the alarm. The BCM
monitors the hood ajar switch via a discrete input from the switch. If the BCM receives a signal indicating the
hood has been opened when the content theft deterrent system is armed, the BCM activates the alarm.
Liftgate Ajar Switch
The content theft deterrent system uses the liftgate ajar switch as a status indicator to activate the alarm. The
BCM monitors the liftgate ajar switch via a discrete input from the switch. If the BCM receives a signal
indicating the liftgate has been opened when content theft deterrent system is armed, the BCM activates the
alarm.
Intrusion Sensor (RPO UA2 and UTC)
The intrusion sensor is located in the overhead console and uses two ultrasonic sensors to detect any motion
inside the vehicle. If motion is detected inside the vehicle while the content theft deterrent system is armed, the
system will transition to the alarm mode. The intrusion sensor also acts as an inclination sensor. The inclination
sensor determines the vehicles level when the content theft deterrent system is armed. If the vehicle level is
changed while the system is armed, such as being lifted by a tow truck or raised with a jack, the alarm will be
activated. The intrusion sensor can be disabled using the intrusion sensor disable switch. The intrusion sensor
disable switch also shows the intrusion sensor status using a status LED.
Glass Breakage Sensor (RPO UA2, UTC, and UTT)
The glass breakage sensors are located on the rear side windows and are supplied B+ at all times. The BCM
23 of 24
monitors the glass breakage sensor signal circuit. If the rear side glass is broken, the glass breakage sensor
signal circuit will open and the BCM will enter the alarm mode.
Alarm Siren (RPO UA2 and UTC)
The content theft deterrent system uses the alarm siren as an audible alert device to alert individuals near the
vehicle that a vehicle intrusion is occurring. The siren is supplied power and ground for operation and
communicates with the body control module (BCM) via a dedicated LAN circuit.
Inputs
The BCM monitors the following inputs for content theft deterrent:
• Door ajar switches

• Keyless entry transmitter LOCK/UNLOCK buttons; a message from the remote control door lock
receiver
• Immobilizer status - The BCM uses the immobilizer status for disarming the system or silencing an alarm
when the correct vehicle key is used to start the vehicle
• Liftgate ajar switch
• Hood ajar switch
• Intrusion sensor (RPO UA2 and UTC)
• Glass breakage sensor (RPO UA2, UTC, and UTT)
Outputs
The BCM controls the following for content theft deterrent:
• Horn relay
• Exterior lamps
• Alarm siren (RPO UA2 and UTC)
24 of 24
2019-2023 SUSPENSION
Tire Pressure Monitoring - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS
Single Use Threaded Fastener/Component Tightening Specifications

NOTE:
All
fasteners/components
listed in this table
MUST BE
DISCARDED and
replaced with NEW
after removal.
Specification
Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Bolt 1.4 N.m (12.4 lb in)
Application Type of Material GM Part Number Canadian Part Number

Valve Stem Mounting Lubricant 12345884 5728223

DTC C0569
DTC Descriptor
DTC C0569
System Configuration = Malfunction
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Tire Pressure Monitor Description and Operation
Ignition Voltage 9 - 16 volts.
1 of 20
The tire type and tire pressure information have not been programmed.
• The tire pressure monitor indicator icon on the instrument panel cluster (IPC) flashes 60 to 90 seconds and
then remains illuminated after the ignition switch is cycled ON and the IPC bulb check is complete.
• If equipped, the DIC displays a service tire monitor type message and dashes for all 4 tires.
A current DTC will be cleared after all bytes in the tire type and placard DID's contain valid values.
A history DTC will clear after 40 ignition cycles.
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.

2. Enter the tire type and pressure (placard) information into the K9 Body Control Module with a scan tool. Refer
to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, and Anti-Theft Label , Control Module References .
3. Perform the following learn procedure: Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
4. Ignition OFF, then Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode.
5. Verify DTC C0569 is not set.
If the DTC is set

6. All OK.
Repair Instructions
DTC C0750, C0755, C0760, OR C0765

DTC Descriptors
DTC C0750 03
Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor = Low Voltage
2 of 20
DTC C0750 29
Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor = Too Few Pulses
DTC C0750 39
Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor = Internal Malfunction
DTC C0755 03
Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor = Low Voltage
DTC C0755 29
Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor = Too Few Pulses
DTC C0755 39
Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor = Internal Malfunction
DTC C0760 03
Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor = Low Voltage
DTC C0760 29
Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor = Too Few Pulses
DTC C0760 39
Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor = Internal Malfunction
DTC C0765 03
Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor = Low Voltage
DTC C0765 29
Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor = Too Few Pulses
DTC C0765 39
Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor = Internal Malfunction

• Ignition Voltage 9 - 16 volts.
• TPMS Sensors are properly learned.
• The BCM receives no or invalid data from a sensor for 17 minutes with vehicle speed between 40 km/h (25
3 of 20
mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph).
• The battery of a sensor is empty.
• If equipped, the DIC displays a service tire monitor type message and dashes will only appear for the particular
corner that triggered the failure.
A valid transmission is received from the faulty corner.
Diagnostic Aids
• Some aftermarket wheel valve stem holes are located further away from the wheel rim than on original
equipment wheels. When using the tire pressure monitor tool to activate a sensor, ensure the tool is placed
along the tire sidewall close to the sensor and not on the rim.
• If a sensor is not recognized, it may help to rotate the wheel so that the sensor is in a different position relative
to the vehicle.
• A sensor may have been damaged by a previous wheel/tire service or flat tire event
• Occasionally sensor transmissions are not received by the control module due to radio interference from
internal (aftermarket ignition systems, DVD players, CB radios, traffic video cameras, or metallic type
window tinting) or external RF sources.
• Before a defective sensor is replaced, execute the learn procedure for all sensors to make sure the DTC was set
for the correct position on the vehicle. The wheels may have been exchanged before without learning the new
positions.
• Aftermarket wheel valve stem locations can cause a sensor to not function correctly.
• The use of tire sealants can obstruct the sensor pressure sensing port and cause inaccurate tire pressure
readings. If this condition is verified, remove the sealer from the tire and replace the sensor. Refer to: Tire
Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement
• The sensor activation procedure may have to be repeated up to 3 times before determining a sensor is
malfunctioning. In the event a particular sensor is not learned and the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary
to rotate the wheel to a different position due to the RF signal being blocked by another component.
• Occasionally, sensors can become mislocated due to previous tire rotations where the sensor learn procedure
was not performed. Always learn the sensors to ensure the DTC set is for that actual physical corner of the
vehicle. Perform the following learn procedure: Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
Scan Tool Reference
With Available EL-52545 Tool
Perform the following learn procedure: Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
4 of 20
Without Available EL-52545 Tool
1. Verify there are no other DTCs set, except for DTC C0750, C0755, C0760 or C0765

2. Verify the scan tool Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Quality parameter of all 4 tire pressure sensors is
communicating maximum of 300 s and not rising while driving the vehicle above 40 km/h (25 mph) for
greater than 5 min.
NOTE: All TPM sensors should display a saw-tooth wave form that returns to zero,
ideally each 60 seconds (or 10 seconds for a period after a relearn). If any timer
reaches 1080 seconds a "too few pulses" code will set. It is not unusual for
transmissions to occasionally be missed due to many factors, however if an
individual location is growing to 300-500 seconds there is likely something
faulty or interfering with this transmission.
In this event, one should rotate and relearn the tires and then reevaluate. If the
same wheel, in the new position continues to infrequently reset to zero -
growing to 300-500 seconds replace the TPM Sensor in that wheel. If the large
accumulation of seconds remains in the same vehicle position after the
rotation, the fault is likely due to a radio frequency interference. Refer to
Diagnostic Aids.
3. If the Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Quality parameter is not communicating maximum of 300 s and
rising on one or more tires
1. Move the appropriate tire to a different location on the vehicle if possible or swap the two components,
the original component that is not responding with another known good component from the vehicle and
verify the Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Quality is communicating maximum of 300 s and not rising.
Refer to Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation .
If Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Quality parameter does not communicate maximum of 300 s and
rising after moving tire or component to different location, replace the appropriate B2 Tire
Pressure Sensor and perform the Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
If Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Quality parameter does communicate maximum of 300 s and not
rising after moving tire or components to different location, check for any aftermarket devices that
could be causing interference to the tire pressure sensor signal.
Go to next step: If the Tire Pressure Sensor Signal Quality parameter is communicating maximum
of 300 s and not rising on one or more tires
4. Perform the Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
5. Verify the scan tool Tire Pressure Sensor Mode parameter changes to Drive while driving the vehicle above 40
km/h (25 mph) for greater than 2 min.
If a Tire Pressure Sensor Mode parameter does not change to Drive
1. Replace the appropriate B2 Tire Pressure Sensor.
Go to next step: If the Tire Pressure Sensor Mode parameter does change to Drive
6. All OK.
5 of 20
Repair Instructions
If the sensors are not able to learn, they will need to be replaced. Refer to: Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor
Replacement
DTC C0775
DTC Descriptor
DTC C0775
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Sensors = Malfunction
Ignition Voltage 9 - 16 volts.
Incomplete or failed Manual Learn (due to either timing out after learning at least one sensor and not learning all
four sensors or exiting learn mode after learning at least one sensor and vehicle being out of PARK or vehicle power
mode not in RUN/Propulsion).
• If equipped, the DIC displays a service tire monitor type message and dashes for all 4 tires.
A current DTC will be cleared after tire pressure sensors are learned through a manual learn, autolearn, or sensor ID
write using EL-52545 tool.
Scan Tool Reference
6 of 20
Perform the following learn procedure: Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
Repair Instructions
SYMPTOMS - TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle , before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify that all
of the following are true:
• If all available vehicle transmitters/keys are inoperative. Refer to Keyless Entry System Description
and Operation (Without ATH) , or Keyless Entry System Description and Operation (With ATH)
• If one of the current or previous sensor learn is not successful.
• If there are dashes displayed in the driver information center.
2. Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor Description and Operation.
• Inspect if tires are inflated per placard values.

• Inspect for aftermarket devices which could affect the operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
System.
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Symptom List
Refer to Low Tire Pressure Indicator Malfunction in order to diagnose the symptom.
TIRE FILL ALERT MALFUNCTION

Instead of just warning the driver via the DIC when the vehicle tires are low, this feature provides audible and visual
indication to the driver when they are putting air into the low tire to aid in achieving optimal tire pressure. The
feature begins when the tire pressure telltale is illuminated for a low tire. When the driver starts to fill the low tire,
the vehicle will flash the turn lamp of the corner that is being filled. This will provide feedback to the driver that a
7 of 20
fill event is occurring. When the placard tire pressure is achieved, the vehicle will notify the driver with a single,
short, horn chirp, similar to the one heard when locking the vehicle. The turn signal lamp of that corner will then stop
flashing and become solid for a short period of time. If continuing to fill the tire and overfill occurs, the vehicle will
notify the driver by sounding the horn three short chirps.
Diagnostic Aids
The TPMS will not activate the tire fill alert properly under the following conditions:
• There is interference from an external device or transmitter.

• The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
• There is a malfunction in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
• There is a malfunction in the horn or turn signal lamps.
• The identification code of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor is not registered to the system.
• The battery of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor is low.
NOTE: Tire Fill Alert Service Procedure needs to be done consecutively within the same
day.
1. Verify all the tire pressure sensors installed on the vehicle are compatible with tire fill alert:
• Aluminum valve stem - scan tool Tire Pressure Sensor Identification parameter begins with 0 or B = Tire
fill alert compatible
• Rubber valve stem - 315 MHz - scan tool Tire Pressure Sensor Identification parameter begins with 9 =
Tire fill alert compatible
• Rubber valve stem - 433 MHz - scan tool Tire Pressure Sensor Identification parameter begins with a 4
= Tire fill alert compatible
2. If any tire pressure sensor installed on the vehicle is not compatible with tire fill alert. Replace the appropriate
incompatible tire pressure sensor.
3. Check sensors to ensure they are reporting properly.
4. If any of the sensors is not reporting properly, then follow Tire Pressure Monitoring sensor service procedure.
5. While vehicle is parked and in accessory power mode, release air from tire until the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System telltale is illuminated.
6. Using a high pressure compressor (flow rate has to be higher than 0.15psi per second), start filling the tire with
air.
7. Monitor vehicle corner lights and horn chirps.
8. If tire fill alert works and there is no issue with feature, then stop. If Tire Fill Alert is still not working, proceed
to step 8.
9. While vehicle is parked and in accessory power mode, release air from tire until the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System telltale is illuminated.
10. Monitor and log the Tire Fill Alert Current state parameter: NonMonitor, Monitor, Active, Achieved. Initial
state should be in Monitor Mode.
11. Using a high pressure compressor (flow rate has to be higher than 0.15psi per second), start filling the tire with
air.
12. Monitor the scan tool Tire Fill Alert parameter change its state from Monitor to Active to Achieved.
13. If parameter states ARE changing while the tire is being filled with air, and no lights or horn feedback are
being issued, then refer to Lighting diagnostics.
8 of 20
14. If parameter states ARE NOT changing while the tire is being filled with air, and no lights or horn feedback
are being issued, then refer to Body Control Module diagnostics.
LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR MALFUNCTION

Diagnostic Aids
• Some aftermarket wheel valve stem holes are located further away from the wheel rim than on original
equipment wheels. When using the tire pressure monitor tool to activate a sensor, ensure the tool is placed
along the tire sidewall close to the sensor and not on the rim.
• If a sensor is not recognized, it may help to rotate the wheel so that the sensor is in a different position relative
to the vehicle.
• A sensor may have been damaged by a previous wheel/tire service or flat tire event
• Occasionally sensor transmissions are not received by the control module due to radio interference from
internal (aftermarket ignition systems, DVD players, CB radios, traffic video cameras, or metallic type
window tinting) or external RF sources.
• Before a defective sensor is replaced, execute the learn procedure for all sensors to make sure the DTC was set
for the correct position on the vehicle. The wheels may have been exchanged before without learning the new
positions.
• Aftermarket wheel valve stem locations can cause a sensor to not function correctly.
• The use of tire sealants can obstruct the sensor pressure sensing port and cause inaccurate tire pressure
readings. If this condition is verified, remove the sealer from the tire and replace the sensor. Refer to: Tire
Pressure Indicator Sensor Replacement
• The sensor activation procedure may have to be repeated up to 3 times before determining a sensor is
malfunctioning. In the event a particular sensor is not learned and the horn does not chirp, it may be necessary
to rotate the wheel to a different position due to the RF signal being blocked by another component.
• Occasionally, sensors can become mislocated due to previous tire rotations where the sensor learn procedure
was not performed. Always learn the sensors to ensure the DTC set is for that actual physical corner of the
vehicle. Perform the following learn procedure: Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
Scan Tool Reference
NOTE: Low tire pressure in one or more tires is indicated by a continuously illuminated tire
pressure monitor indicator icon after the instrument cluster bulb check is
completed. If equipped with a driver information center, a tire pressure low-add air
message will also be displayed.
9 of 20
When a tire pressure monitor DTC is set, the tire pressure monitor indicator icon
will flash for approximately 1 min after the instrument cluster bulb check is
completed and then remains illuminated. If equipped with a driver information
center, a service tire monitor type message will also be displayed.
1. Adjust all tire pressures to the correct pressure. Refer to Vehicle Certification, Tire Placard, and Anti-Theft
Label .
2. Drive the vehicle over 40 km/h (25 mph) for greater than 2 min.
3. Verify the low tire pressure indicator is OFF.
If the low tire pressure indicator is ON
2. Compare the tire pressure sensor values to a digital air gauge, if the difference of 10% is noticed then
inspect for damage or contamination.
If damage or contamination is detected
Replace the sensor and perform the Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
Go to next step: If no damage or contamination is detected
Go to next step: Replace the sensor and perform the Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn.
3. Verify the Tire Type and Pressure selections are setup correctly with scan tool. Refer to the Vehicle
Certification, Tire Placard, and Anti-Theft Label , Control Module References .
If the BCM Tire Type and Pressure selections are incorrect
Input the proper placard values for the vehicle with the scan tool then drive the vehicle over 40
km/h (25 mph) for greater than 2 min. Refer to the K9 Body Control Module Control Module
References .
Go to next step: If the BCM Tire Type and Pressure selections are correct
4. Ignition ON / Vehicle In Service Mode
5. Verify the low tire pressure monitor indicator icon turns ON and OFF when commanding All Indicators
ON and OFF with a scan tool.
If the low tire pressure monitor icon does not turn ON and OFF
Go to next step: If the low tire pressure monitor icon turns ON and OFF
6. All OK
Go to next step: If the tire pressure indicator is OFF
4. All OK
Repair Instructions
• If the sensors are not able to learn, they will need to be replaced. Refer to: Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor
Replacement
10 of 20
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR SENSOR REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1. Raise and support the vehicle. Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle
2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation .
3. Dismount the tire from the wheel. Tire Dismounting and Mounting
4. If a tire sealant product was used/found within the tire/wheel, use a mild dish soap, clean water and shop cloths
to remove the sealant residue from the tire and wheel surfaces.
5.
Use a suitable tool (4) inserted into the hole of the valve stem (3) to prevent it from rotating.
6. Remove and DISCARD the tire pressure indicator sensor bolt (1).
7. Remove the tire pressure indicator sensor (2) by pulling it straight off of the valve stem (3).
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the clear coating on aluminum wheels with the tire
changing equipment. Scratching the clear coating could cause the aluminum
wheel to corrode and the clear coating to peel from the wheel.
8. Remove and DISCARD the valve stem (3) by pulling it through the wheel.
NOTE: Never install the tire pressure indicator sensor on unapproved wheel rims.
NOTE: Whenever the Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor is removed from the rim, install a
new valve stem and a new bolt. Do not reuse the old parts.
11 of 20
•
1.
NOTE: Illustration shows tire pressure indicator sensor in the final installation
position.
Before installation, verify the orientation of the valve stem (1) for the correct position of the tire pressure
indicator sensor (2).
2.
Remove the NEW bolt (3) from the NEW tire pressure indicator sensor (2) and pull it straight off of the NEW
valve stem (1).
12 of 20
3. Apply lubricant to the NEW valve stem (1). Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers
4.
Using a tire valve stem installation tool (2), pull the valve stem (1) through in a direction parallel to the valve
hole on the wheel.
5.
NOTE: Ensure the flat of the valve lines up with the flats of the snap in the enclosure.
Assemble the tire pressure indicator sensor (2) to the NEW valve stem (3).
6. Use a suitable tool (4) inserted into the hole of the valve stem (3) to prevent it from rotating.
13 of 20
7. Install and tighten the NEW tire pressure indicator sensor bolt (1) to 1.4 N.m (12.4 lb in).
8.
Check that the valve stem (1) is concentric and completely seated in the valve stem hole of the wheel (2).
9.
Make sure that there is a gap between the valve stem (1) and the tire pressure indicator sensor (2).
NOTE: The tire should not have contact with the tire pressure indicator sensor during
installation to prevent a damage of the tire pressure indicator sensor.
14 of 20
10. Mount the tire to the wheel. Tire Dismounting and Mounting
11. Inflate the tire to the specified pressure as stated on the tire placard.
12. Install the NEW dust cap.
13. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Tire and Wheel Removal and Installation
14. Perform the tire pressure indicator sensor learn procedure. Tire Pressure Indicator Sensor Learn
15. Remove the support and lower the vehicle.
TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR SENSOR LEARN

Special Tools
Tire Pressure Sensor Learn with EL-52545 (Preferred)
The EL-52545 allows the tire pressure sensors to be learned without transmitting RF data between the tire pressure
sensors and the vehicle. When using the EL-52545 each tire pressure sensor ID is learned to the EL-52545 and
stored internally. The EL-52545 is then connected to the vehicle DLC using the OBD2 Interface Module, which is
part of the EL-52545 kit. The stored tire pressure sensor information will then be loaded into the K9 Body Control
Module. Using the EL-52545 to learn tire pressure sensors will prevent the vehicle from learning errant nearby tire
pressure sensor from other vehicles in a service facility environment, especially if the tire pressure sensor batteries
are low. This is the GM recommended method to learn tire pressure sensors.
1. Turn on EL-52545
2. Select RDR from the on-screen display
3. If available, scan the QR code on the vehicle's tire placard or certification label. If QR is not available, select
MMY from the on-screen display and manually input the vehicle information.
NOTE: Make sure the TPM tool battery is sufficient to complete TPM learn process. Do
not place the TPM tool directly on the valve stem. The TPM tool should be
placed against the tire sidewall near the valve stem. The TPM sensor learn
activation procedure may have to be repeated up to 3 times before determining
a sensor is malfunctioning.
4. Approach the vehicle starting with the left front tire and read each tire pressure sensor information by pressing
the green trigger button with the EL-52545 located near the tire valve stem. Read each tire pressure sensor in
the order identified on the EL-52545 .
If any tire pressure sensors do not respond
Replace the tire pressure sensor only after several attempts have been made to identify all sensors.
Undetected sensor will be identified with "No Sensor Detected" displayed in the table. After sensor
replacement rerun RDR procedure.
Go to next step: If all tire pressure sensors do respond

5. Verify the BAT value for each tire pressure sensor in the table on the EL-52545 is OK
If not OK
Replace the tire pressure sensor and rerun RDR procedure.
15 of 20
6. Verify the pressure and temperature values are reasonable based on the ambient conditions and actual tire
pressure.
If either value is inaccurate
Replace the tire pressure sensor and rerun RDR procedure.
Go to next step: If both values are accurate

8. Connect the EL-52545 OBD2 Interface Module to the EL-52545 .
9. Verify the OBDII icon is displayed on the EL-52545 and the green com LED is flashing on the EL-52545
OBD2 Interface Module.
10. Connect the other end of the OBD2 Interface Module to the vehicle DLC.
11. Select OK on the EL-52545 and follow the on-screen instructions.
Tire Pressure Sensor Learn with EL-50448 (Alternative)
When EL-50448 Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor Activation Tool is used in activate mode, it produces a low frequency
transmission that activates the sensor. The sensor responds to a low frequency activation by transmitting in Learn
Mode-Remotely Triggered. When the BCM receives a learn mode transmission while in Learn mode, it will assign
that sensors ID to the location on the vehicle relative to the order in which it was learned.
NOTE: In the event a particular sensor is activated and the horn does not chirp, it may be
necessary to rotate the wheel so that the valve stem is in a different position due to
the sensor signal is being blocked by another component. Make sure the TPM tool
battery is sufficient to complete TPM learn process. Do not place the TPM tool
directly on the valve stem. The TPM tool should be placed against the tire sidewall
near the valve stem. The TPM sensor learn activation procedure may have to be
repeated up to 3 times before determining a sensor is malfunctioning.
1. Ignition On/Vehicle in Service Mode, using driver information center buttons, initiate the Tire Pressure
Sensors Learn mode. A double horn chirp will sound indicating the Learn mode has been enabled. The left
front turn signal will also be illuminated.
2. Starting with the left front tire, activate the sensor by holding the antenna of the tire pressure monitor
activation tool aimed upward against the tire sidewall close to the wheel rim at the valve stem location. Press
and release the activate button. Ensure that the transmit indicator on the special tool indicates that the sensor
activation signal is being transmitted. Wait for a horn chirp. If the horn does not chirp, repeat the sensor
activation sequence with the tool. Once the horn chirp has sounded, the sensor information is learned and the
turn signal in the next location to be learned will illuminate.
3. After the horn chirp has sounded and the right front turn signal is illuminated, repeat step 3 for the remaining 3
sensors in the following order:
1. Right front
2. Right rear
3. Left rear
4. When the left rear sensor has been learned and a double horn chirp has sounded, the learn process is complete
and the BCM exits the Learn mode.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
16 of 20
Special Tools
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Operation
The tire pressure monitor system warns the driver when a significant loss of tire pressure occurs in any of the
equipped tires. It allows the driver to display the individual tire pressures and their locations on the driver
information center.
The system uses the body control module (BCM), driver information center, instrument cluster, remote control door
lock receiver, and a radio frequency transmitting pressure sensor in each tire assembly. Each sensor has an internal
power supply.
Tire Fill Alert (TFA) (If Equipped) feature provides visual and audible alerts (light flashes and horn chirps) to drivers
to assist in inflating an underinflated tire to the recommended tire pressure without the need to check a gauge or the
instrument panel. TFA only functions once the tire pressure is low enough to trigger the telltale on the dashboard.
When the driver starts filling the underinflated tire, the corner lamp nearest to that tire will begin to flash. When the
recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once and the turn signal lamps will stop flashing and briefly turn
solid. If the tire is overinflated by more than 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will sound multiple times and the turn signal
lamp will continue to flash for several seconds after filling stops. To release and correct the pressure, while the turn
signal lamp is still flashing, briefly press the center of the valve stem. When the recommended pressure is reached,
the horn sounds once.
Software Auto-location (SAL) (If Equipped) is achieved by correlating information from the sensor with information
from the ABS system to make a location decision. Factors such as rolling radius, steering angle etc. cause each
vehicle wheel to rotate at a unique speed and difference in tire speeds helps software auto learn feature to assign
sensor IDs to the correct locations. If a new sensor has been installed or tire rotated, the vehicle must be stationary
for about 20 minutes before the system can start the process of calculating correct sensor locations. For this to
happen, the vehicle will need to be driven at speed greater than 20 km/h (12 mph) for about 10 min.
When the vehicle is stationary, the sensors internal shock sensor is inactive which puts the sensors into a Stationary
state. In this state the sensors sample tire pressure once every 30 sec and do not transmit at all if the tire pressure
17 of 20
does not change. As vehicle speed increases, the shock sensor pulses every wheel rotation, which puts the sensor into
Rolling mode. The remote control door lock receiver receives and then sends the tire pressure and temperature data
to the body control module (BCM). The BCM translates the data contained in the tire pressure sensor radio
frequency transmissions into sensor presence, sensor mode, and tire pressure. Once vehicle speed is greater than 40
km/h (25 MPH), the sensors begin to transmit once a minute keeping the pressure data up to date.
Each sensor has its own unique identification (ID) code which it transmits as part of each RF message and must be
learned into the BCM memory. Once all 4 ID's have been learned and vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25
mph), the BCM continuously compares ID's and pressure data in the received transmissions to the learned ID's and
pressures to determine if all 4 sensors are present and if one or more tires are low. If the BCM detects a low tire
pressure condition, or a malfunction in the system, it will send a serial data message to the instrument cluster
requesting the appropriate tire pressure monitor indicator illumination and also to display the appropriate data
message on the driver information center, if equipped.
The sensors continuously compare their last pressure sample to their current pressure sample and will transmit in
Alert mode if a 8.3 kPa (1.2 PSI) change in tire pressure has been detected in either a Stationary or Rolling state.
When the tire pressure system detects a significant loss, or gain of tire pressure, the tire pressure monitor indicator
icon is continuously illuminated on the instrument cluster and if equipped, a check tire pressure type message is
displayed on the driver information center.
Both the indicator icon and driver information center message can be cleared by adjusting the tire pressures to the
recommended kPa/PSI.
If power is disconnected from the BCM or if the vehicle battery is disconnected each tire pressure sensor ID is
retained but all of the tire pressure information is lost. Under these circumstances the BCM cannot assume that the
tire pressures were maintained over an unknown period of time. Cars equipped with the driver information center
will display dashes and the scan tool will indicate a default tire pressure value of 220 kPa (32 PSI) for each tire. To
reactivate the sensors, the vehicle must be driven above 40 km/h (25 MPH) for at least 2 min. When the sensors are
activated, the driver information center displays the current tire pressures. The EL-52545 tire pressure monitor
sensor and RF diagnostic tool may also be used to activate the sensors as well.
The BCM has the ability to detect malfunctions within the tire pressure monitor system. In the event a DTC is set,
the tire pressure monitor indicator icon on the instrument cluster will flash for approximately 1 min. and then remain
illuminated for the remainder of the key cycle. After a key cycle and the instrument cluster bulb check has been
completed the indicator will again flash for 1 min. and then remain illuminated if the DTC persists. Any malfunction
detected will cause the driver information center to display a service tire monitor system type message.

SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool
18 of 20
Tool
EL 50448
Tire Pressure
Monitor Sensor
Activation Tool
19 of 20
Tool
EL 52545
Tire Pressure
Monitor Sensor and
RF Diagnostic Tool
20 of 20
Vehicle Access System - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Front Side Door Latch Bolt 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Front Side Door Latch Screw 11 N.m (97 lb in)
Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Screw 4 N.m (35 lb in)
Front Side Door Lock Striker Screw 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Front Side Door Outside Handle Bracket Screw 5 N.m (44 lb in)
Front Side Door Outside Handle Insert Bolt 1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Front Side Door Outside Handle Lock Cylinder Screw 4.7 N.m (42 lb in)
Liftgate Latch Bolt 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Liftgate Latch Striker Bolt 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Rear Closure Hands Free Sensor Shield Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Rear Side Door Latch Bolt 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Rear Side Door Latch Screw 11 N.m (97 lb in)
Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Screw 4 N.m (35 lb in)
Rear Side Door Lock Striker Screw 22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Bracket Screw 4.7 N.m (42 lb in)
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Insert Screw 1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Lock Cylinder Screw 4.7 N.m (42 lb in)

DOOR LOCK/INDICATOR WIRING SCHEMATICS
Interior Switches
1 of 239
Ajar Switches and Lock Indicators
Door Handle Switches
2 of 239
Actuators
RELEASE SYSTEMS WIRING SCHEMATICS

Liftgate Release (TB4)
LIFTGATE WIRING SCHEMATICS

Power, Ground, Serial Data, and Front Controls (TB5/TC2)
3 of 239
Liftgate Actuation and Rear Controls (TB5/TC2)
Hands Free Liftgate Sensing (TC2)
4 of 239
DTC B1019 - LIFTGATE CONTROL MODULE
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1019 00
System Configuration Error
When calibrating the liftgate position, the liftgate control module is placed in a functional state to learn the
liftgate travel limits. DTC B1019 00 will set automatically as an indicator that the system is in learn mode and
not as a fault indicator. Once the travel limits are learned by the liftgate control module, the liftgate control
module will exit calibration mode and DTC B1019 00 become a history code.
The system voltage is 9 - 18 V.
Whenever the liftgate control module is replaced or in learn mode.
Inputs to the power liftgate may be disabled during the relearn procedure
• The DTC will be current until the liftgate calibration procedure has been completed.
• When the calibration procedure has been completed the DTC will be a history DTC.
Diagnostic Aids
Setting B1019 00 is normal after programming the liftgate control module. This DTC will be current after
programming and the DTC will go to history after learning. This is a normal behavior by design and is not
necessary to replace the liftgate control module.
Schematic Reference
Liftgate Wiring Schematics
5 of 239
Liftgate Description and Operation
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Perform the Liftgate Calibration. The K39 Liftgate Control Module should learn the travel limits, exit
the calibration mode, and B1019 00 will become a history code.
If the K39 Liftgate Control Module does not exit the calibration mode or if B1019 00 does not
become a history code.
Replace the K39 Liftgate Control Module
Go to next step: If the K39 Liftgate Control Module does exit the calibration mode and B1019
00 becomes a history code.
3. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Control Module References for liftgate control module replacement, programming setup
DTC B1474 OR B3849

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1474
Passenger Exterior Door Handle Switch Circuit
6 of 239
DTC B3849
Driver Exterior Door Handle Switch Circuit

Signal - B27D Door Handle
B3849 02 1 1 -
Switch - Driver Exterior
Signal - B27P Door Handle
B1474 02 2 2 -
Switch - Passenger Exterior
Ground - A24D Door Handle
- 1 - -
Assembly - Driver Exterior
Ground - A24P Door Handle
- 2 - -
Assembly - Passenger Exterior
1. B27D Door Handle Switch - Driver Exterior = Disabled
2. B27P Door Handle Switch - Passenger Exterior = Disabled
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Power Door Locks Description and Operation
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
B27D Door Handle Switch - Driver Exterior activated, the signal circuit to the control module is
grounded.
B27P Door Handle Switch - Passenger
activated, the signal circuit to the control module is
Exterior
grounded.
K84 Keyless Entry Control Module
• B1474 02: Signal circuit B27P Door Handle Switch - Passenger Exterior = Short to Ground - For greater
than 60 s
• B3849 02: Signal circuit B27D Door Handle Switch - Driver Exterior = Short to Ground - For greater
7 of 239
than 60 s
• B1474 02: B27P Door Handle Switch - Passenger Exterior = Disabled

• B3849 02: B27D Door Handle Switch - Driver Exterior = Disabled
Schematic Reference
• Door Lock/Indicator Wiring Schematics

• Remote Function Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Driver Door Handle Switch = Inactive

3. Operate the component: B27D Door Handle Switch - Driver Exterior - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Driver Door Handle Switch = Active
8 of 239
4. Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Passenger Door Handle Switch = Inactive

5. Operate the component: B27P Door Handle Switch - Passenger Exterior - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Passenger Door Handle Switch = Active

6. All OK.

2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: A24D Door Handle Assembly - Driver Exterior or A24P
Door Handle Assembly - Passenger Exterior
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal 5 Component harness &
Ground Connection
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Door Handle Switch Circuit = Inactive
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 K84 Keyless Entry Control Module
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 Component harness &
Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: K84 Keyless Entry Control Module
9 of 239
terminal 5
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Door Handle Switch Circuit = Active
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 Component harness &
Ground
• Signal circuit terminal 1 A24D Door Handle Assembly - Driver Exterior & Terminal 12 X2
Control module harness
• Signal circuit terminal 1 A24P Door Handle Assembly - Passenger Exterior & Terminal 11
X2 Control module harness
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K84 Keyless Entry Control Module
8. Test or replace the component: A24 Door Handle Assembly
Component Testing
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: A24D Door Handle Assembly - Driver Exterior or A24P
Door Handle Assembly - Passenger Exterior
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal terminal 1 & Ground terminal 5 - Switch - Not
Pressed
Replace the component: A24 Door Handle Assembly

4. Test for less than 3 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 1 & Ground terminal 5 - Switch -
Pressed

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
10 of 239
• Front Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
DTC B1534 OR B1535

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B1534
Left Rear Door Handle Switch Circuit
DTC B1535
Right Rear Door Handle Switch Circuit

Signal - B27LR Door Handle
B1534 02 1 1 -
Switch - Left Rear Exterior
Signal - B27RR Door Handle
B1535 02 2 2 -
Switch - Right Rear Exterior
Ground - B27LR Door Handle
- 1 - -
Ground - B27RR Door Handle
- 2 - -
1. B27LR Door Handle Switch - Left Rear Exterior = Disabled
2. B27RR Door Handle Switch - Right Rear Exterior = Disabled
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
11 of 239
B27LR Door Handle Switch - Left Rear
Exterior
grounded.
B27RR Door Handle Switch - Right Rear
Exterior
grounded.
B1534 02
Signal B27LR Door Handle Switch - Left Rear Exterior = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
B1535 02
Signal B27RR Door Handle Switch - Right Rear Exterior = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
B1534 02
B27LR Door Handle Switch - Left Rear Exterior = Disabled
B1535 02
B27RR Door Handle Switch - Right Rear Exterior = Disabled
Schematic Reference
Door Lock/Indicator Wiring Schematics
• Circuit Testing
12 of 239
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Left Rear Door Handle Switch = Inactive

3. Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Right Rear Door Handle Switch = Inactive

4. Operate the component: B27LR Door Handle Switch - Left Rear Exterior - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Left Rear Door Handle Switch = Active

5. Operate the component: B27RR Door Handle Switch - Right Rear Exterior - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Right Rear Door Handle Switch = Active

6. All OK.

2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: A24LR Door Handle Assembly - Left Rear Exterior or
A24RR Door Handle Assembly - Right Rear Exterior
13 of 239
Ground Connection
Ground
terminal 5
Ground
• Signal circuit terminal 1 A24LR Door Handle Assembly - Left Rear Exterior & Terminal 2
• Signal circuit terminal 1 A24RR Door Handle Assembly - Right Rear Exterior & Terminal 1
Component Testing
14 of 239
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: A24LR Door Handle Assembly - Left Rear Exterior or
A24RR Door Handle Assembly - Right Rear Exterior
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal terminal 1 & Ground terminal 5 - Not Pressed

4. Test for less than 3 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 1 & Ground terminal 5 - Pressed

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Rear Side Door Outside Handle Replacement

DTC B153A - LIFTGATE LATCH SWITCHES MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B153A
Liftgate Latch Switch Signal Circuit

Signal - Terminal 2 A23C
1 2 - -
Liftgate Latch Assembly
1 2 - -
15 of 239
1 B153A 08 - -
2 B153A 08 - -
Low Reference - A23C Liftgate
- B24A0 05 - -
Latch Assembly
1. Driver Information Display - Rear Body Closure Open = Always On
2. Power Liftgate (TB5) = Disabled
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Liftgate Description and Operation
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
The DC motor unlatches the liftgate. Once the liftgate is
unlatched, a switch in the latch will close, grounding the
A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly
signal circuit to the control module K39 indicating liftgate
status.
The control module K39 controls the liftgate motor function
K39 Liftgate Control Module depending on inputs from a variety of sensors, switches and
serial data information from other control modules.
• Signal circuit Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
• Signal circuit Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
Power Liftgate (TB5) = Disabled
16 of 239
Diagnostic Aids
Operate the component: Open the liftgate. & Close the liftgate.
Verify the condition does not exist: If DTC B153A is set & If the parameter value changes
• Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Active & Inactive

• Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch = Open & Closed
• Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch = Open & Closed
• Liftgate Latch Sector Switch = Inactive & Active & Inactive
Refer to: DTC B153E - Liftgate Angle Sensor Malfunction
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Operate the component: Open the liftgate.
• Body Control Module: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Active

• Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch = Open
• Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch = Open
• Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Sector Switch = Inactive
17 of 239
3. Operate the component: Close the liftgate. & A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly - Latching
• Body Control Module: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Active - Inactive

• Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch = Open - Closed
• Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch = Open - Closed
• Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Sector Switch = Inactive - Active - Inactive
If the parameter value does not change
Go to next step: If the parameter value changes

4. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly
3. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: Low Reference terminal 6 & B+
1. Disconnect the electrical connector: K39 Liftgate Control Module
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Low Reference terminal 6 Component harness &
Terminal 16 X1 Control module harness
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: K39 Liftgate Control Module
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Body Control Module: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Inactive
Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: K39 Liftgate Control Module
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch = Closed
Ground
18 of 239
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch = Closed
Ground
8. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Sector Switch = Inactive
Ground
terminal 6
10. Verify the scan tool parameter: Body Control Module: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Active
Ground
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 3 Component harness &
terminal 6
12. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch = Open
19 of 239
Ground
terminal 6
14. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch = Open
Ground
terminal 6
16. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Sector Switch = Active
Ground
20 of 239
17. Test or replace the component: A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly
Repair Instructions
• Liftgate Latch Replacement

DTC B153E - LIFTGATE ANGLE SENSOR MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B153E
Liftgate Position Sensor Signal Circuit

12 V Reference B153E 02 B153E 04 - -
Liftgate Position Sensor 1 Signal B153E 02, B153E 04, B153E B153E 01,
B153E 08
Circuit B153E 08 08 B153E 08
Liftgate Position Sensor 2 Signal B153E 02, B153E 04, B153E B153E 01,
B153E 08
Circuit B153E 08 08 B153E 08
Low Reference - B153E 04 - -
Circuit Description
21 of 239
Circuit Description
Liftgate Position Sensor 1 Signal Circuit
connected to 12 V.
Liftgate Position Sensor 2 Signal Circuit
connected to 12 V.
• The motor M17 is a bidirectional DC motor that moves
the component: Power Liftgate (TB5)
• The assembly also contains a 4-wire hall effect current
M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly sensor.
• When the sensor measures increased electrical current,
the control module can detect that the component has
reached an endstop.

Power Liftgate (TB5) - Activated
B153E 01
Liftgate Position Sensor 1 Signal Circuit = Short to Voltage
Liftgate Position Sensor 2 Signal Circuit = Short to Voltage
B153E 02
12 V Reference circuit = Short to Ground
Liftgate Position Sensor 1 Signal Circuit = Short to Ground
Liftgate Position Sensor 2 Signal Circuit = Short to Ground
B153E 04
12 V Reference circuit = Open/High Resistance
Liftgate Position Sensor 1 Signal Circuit = Open/High Resistance
Liftgate Position Sensor 2 Signal Circuit = Open/High Resistance
Low Reference circuit = Open/High Resistance
B153E 08
22 of 239
Liftgate Position Sensor 1 Signal Circuit = Signal Erratic
Liftgate Position Sensor 2 Signal Circuit = Signal Erratic
Liftgate Open/Close = Erratic
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

If the DTC is set
Refer to: DTC B384A

3. Perform the scan tool control function: Liftgate Open/Close - Open & Close
Verify the correct operation: Power Liftgate (TB5) = Full Open & Close
23 of 239
4. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly
3. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: Low Reference circuit terminal 3 & B+
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Low Reference circuit terminal 3 Component
harness & Terminal 11 Control module harness
5. Test for greater than 11 V between the test points: 12 V Reference circuit terminal 2 & Low Reference
circuit terminal 3
If less than 11 V
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: 12 V Reference circuit terminal 2 Component
harness & Ground
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: 12 V Reference circuit terminal 2 Component
harness & Terminal 8 Control module harness
6. Test for greater than 11 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 4 & Low Reference circuit
terminal 3
If less than 11 V
Ground
Terminal 9 Control module harness
24 of 239
7. Test for greater than 11 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 7 & Low Reference circuit
terminal 3
If less than 11 V
Ground
Terminal 10 Control module harness
8. Test or replace the component: M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly
Repair Instructions
• Liftgate Power Assist Actuator Replacement

DTC B153F - LIFTGATE OBJECT SENSOR MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B153F
Liftgate Object Sensor Signal Circuit

Signal terminal 1 B71L Liftgate
B153F 02 B153F 05 B153F 05 -
Object Sensor - Left
25 of 239
Signal terminal 1 B71R Liftgate
B153F 02 B153F 05 B153F 05 -
Object Sensor - Right
Low Reference - B153F 05 B153F 05 -
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 5 V.
B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right When the switch is closed it will pull the signal voltage low.
B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left When the switch is closed it will pull the signal voltage low.
B153F 02
Signal B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right or B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left = Short to Ground - For
greater than 60 s
B153F 05
Signal B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right or B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left = Short to Voltage or
Open/High Resistance - For greater than 60 s
B153F 02, B153F 05
Power Liftgate (TB5) - Close = Disabled
Schematic Reference
26 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Secondary Object Detection = Greater than 3 V or Less than 3.5
V
If not between 3 and 3.5 V
Go to next step: If between 3 and 3.5 V

3. Operate the component: B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Secondary Object Detection = Greater than 2.25 V or Less than
2.75 V
If not between 2.25 and 2.75 V

4. Operate the component: B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Secondary Object Detection = Greater than 2.25 V or Less than
2.75 V
If not between 2.25 and 2.75 V

5. All OK.
27 of 239

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right
5. Disconnect the electrical connector: B71L Liftgate Object Sensor - Left
Ground
Ground
5. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 B71L Liftgate Object
Sensor - Left & Signal circuit terminal 1 B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right
7. Test for 4.8 to 5.2 V between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 1 & Ground
If less than 4.8 V
Ground
28 of 239
Ground
If less than 1 V - Replace the component: K39 Liftgate Control Module
8. Test or replace the component: B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right or B71L Liftgate Object Sensor -
Left
Component Testing
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right or B71L Liftgate
Object Sensor - Left
3. Test for 8k ohms to 12 kohms between the test points: Signal terminal 1 & Low Reference terminal 2 -
Not Pressed
If not between 8k and 12k ohms
Replace the component: B71R Liftgate Object Sensor - Right or B71L Liftgate Object Sensor -
Left
Go to next step: If between 8k and 12k ohms

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Liftgate Side Sensor Replacement - Left Side

• Liftgate Side Sensor Replacement - Right Side
DTC B2494 - LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B2494 02
29 of 239
Liftgate Handle Switch Circuit - Short to Ground

Signal B2494 02 1 1 -
1. Liftgate Handle Switch = Disabled
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
When the switch is activated, the signal circuit to the
S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch
control module is grounded.
Signal circuit = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch = Disabled
Schematic Reference
30 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Handle Switch = Inactive

3. Operate the component: S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Handle Switch = Active

4. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch
3. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: Low Reference circuit terminal 1 & B+
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Low Reference circuit terminal 1 Component
harness & Terminal 16 X1 Control module harness
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Handle Switch = Inactive
31 of 239
Ground
circuit terminal 1
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Handle Switch = Active
Ground
8. Test or replace the component: S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch
Component Testing
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal terminal 3 & Low Reference terminal 1 -
Replace the component: S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch

4. Test for less than 3 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 3 & Low Reference terminal 1 - Switch
- Pressed
32 of 239
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Rear License Plate Lamp Module Replacement

DTC B2495 OR B24A0

DTC Descriptors
DTC B2495
Liftgate Latch Control Circuit
DTC B24A0
Liftgate Latch Control Circuit 2
For symptom byte information refer to: Symptom Byte List
Short to Short to Signal

High Resistance
Circuit Ground Open Voltage Performance
Liftgate Latch Release
B24A0 02 B24A0 05 B24A0 08 B24A0 01 -
Control
Cinch Latch Motor B2495 04, B2495 04,
B2495 02 B2495 01 -
Open Control B24A0 05 B24A0 05
B2495 02 B2495 01 -
Close Control B24A0 05 B24A0 05
The liftgate control module controls the liftgate release motor by supplying 12 V to the release control circuit.
The motor control circuits are monitored by the liftgate control module prior to activation for a high or low
condition and during motor operation for an insufficient current flow condition.
The ratchet, pawl, and sector switches are part of the liftgate latch assembly and are used by the liftgate control
module to determine the state of the latch during the process of latching or unlatching. The ratchet and pawl
switches will be inactive when the primary and secondary latches are latched, and the sector switch will be
active during the power cinch function. Each of the latch switch signal circuits are supplied battery voltage
through a resistor and monitored within the liftgate control module. When the switch contacts close the signal
33 of 239
circuit goes low and the liftgate control module determines the switch to be active.
The latch motor is a bi-directional motor and cinch or unlatch operation is the result of the direction of the
motor rotation. The liftgate control module controls the latch motor through the control circuits by supplying
power and ground in the appropriate polarity. The motor control circuits are monitored by the liftgate control
module prior to activation for a high or low condition and during motor operation for an insufficient current
flow condition.
B2495 01
The liftgate control module detects a short to battery in the liftgate latch motor cinch control circuit.
B2495 02
The liftgate control module detects a short to ground in the liftgate latch motor cinch control circuit.
B2495 04, B24A0 05
The liftgate control module detects an open/high resistance in the liftgate latch motor cinch control circuit when
cinching the liftgate to the closed position.
B24A0 01
The liftgate control module detects a short to battery in the liftgate latch motor release control circuit while
commanding the liftgate latch to release.
B24A0 02
The liftgate control module detects a short to ground in the liftgate latch motor release control circuit while
B24A0 08
The liftgate control module detects high resistance in the liftgate latch motor release control circuit while
B24A0 01, B24A0 02, B24A0 08
The liftgate will not release and will be inoperative in the power and manual modes.
B2495 01, B2495 02, B2495 04, B24A0 05
• Manual Mode: Liftgate will not cinch closed.

• Power Mode: The liftgate will not release and will be inoperative.
34 of 239
• The DTC will be current for as long as the fault is present.
• When the fault is no longer present, the DTC will be a history DTC.
• A history DTC will clear after 50 ignition cycles.
Diagnostic Aids
• If the liftgate will not release from the closed position, refer to Opening the Liftgate Without Electrical
Power for the appropriate procedure.
• Whenever the liftgate control module loses power or is disconnected, the ignition must be cycled OFF
then ON in order to reactivate the liftgate control module.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly releases the liftgate when pressing the S46B Liftgate Unlatch
Switch.
If the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly does not release
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Liftgate Release Inoperative.
Go to next step: If the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly does release

3. Verify the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly cinches the liftgate to the fully closed position while gently
pushing the liftgate closed.
If the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly does not cinch
35 of 239
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Liftgate Cinch Inoperative.
Go to next step: If the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly cinch works

4. All OK.
Liftgate Release Inoperative
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A23C Liftgate Latch
Assembly. It may take up to 2 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Disconnect the harness connector at the K39 Liftgate Control Module.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the K39 Liftgate Control Module.
3. Connect the harness connector at the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly.
4. Disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K39 Liftgate Control Module. Ignition ON.
If 1 V or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, test or replace the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly.
6. Manually move the latch to cinched position.
7. Briefly connect a 30 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal 13 and 12 V.
8. Verify the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly performs the release function.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly.
2. Test for infinite resistance the control circuit and ground.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly.
Go to next step: If the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly releases
9. Replace the K39 Liftgate Control Module.
Liftgate Cinch Inoperative
36 of 239
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K39 Liftgate Control Module.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminals listed below and ground:
• Control circuit terminal 1 X2
If 1 V or greater
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly. ignition ON.
3. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminals listed below and ground:
If infinite resistance, replace the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly.
4. Test for less than 10 Ω between the control circuit terminal 1 X2 and the control circuit terminal 2 X2.
If 10 Ω or greater
2. Test for less than 2 Ω between the K39 Liftgate Control Module control circuit terminal 1 X2 and
the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly control circuit terminal 8.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for liftgate control module replacement, programming and setup
DTC B297B OR B297C

37 of 239
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B297B
Driver Door Open Switch Circuit

Signal B297B 5A B297B 5A B297B 5A -
Ground - 1 - -
1. Door Ajar Indicator = Always Off
Body Control Module - Driver Door Ajar Switch

Operating Conditions: Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode
Parameter Normal Range:
• Inactive - Driver Door - Closed

• Active - Driver Door - Open
Signal Active Inactive Inactive

Ground - Inactive -
Keyless Entry Control Module - Driver Door Open Switch

Parameter Normal Range:
• Inactive - Driver Door - Closed

• Active - Driver Door - Open
Signal Active Inactive Inactive

Ground - Inactive -
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Steering Wheel and Column Description and Operation
Circuit Description
38 of 239
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver activated, the signal circuit to the control module is
grounded.
DTC B297B 5A may set when there is a condition with the component circuits:
• Condition 1
Control module K84 detects: Driver Door Open Switch = Inactive & Control module K9 detects: Driver
Door Ajar Switch = Active
• Condition 2
Control module K84 detects: Driver Door Open Switch = Active & Control module K9 detects: Driver
Door Ajar Switch = Inactive
• Driver Information Display = Service Driver Door Switch

• Audible Reminders = Continuously

Schematic Reference

• Column Lock Wiring Schematics
39 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Operate the component: Driver Door - Open
Verify the scan tool parameter: Body Control Module - Driver Door Ajar Switch = Active

3. Operate the component: Driver Door - Closed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Body Control Module - Driver Door Ajar Switch = Inactive

4. Operate the component: Driver Door - Open
Verify the scan tool parameter: Keyless Entry Control Module - Driver Door Open Switch = Active

5. Operate the component: Driver Door - Closed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Keyless Entry Control Module - Driver Door Open Switch = Inactive
40 of 239
6. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
Ground Connection
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Open Switch = Inactive
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K84 Keyless Entry Control Module
Ground
terminal 3
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Open Switch = Active
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: K84 Keyless Entry Control Module
Ground
6. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 2 & Signal circuit terminal
9 X1 Control module harness
41 of 239
8. Test or replace the component: A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
Component Testing
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal terminal 2 & Ground terminal 3 - The switch is
in the open position.
Replace the component: A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver

4. Test for less than 3 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 2 & Ground terminal 3 - The switch is
in the closed position.

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Front Side Door Latch Replacement

DTC B2A00
DTC Descriptors
DTC B2A00 00
Door Open Switch Signal - Door Ajar Switch Signal Not Plausible

Signal B297B 5A, B297B 5A, B297B 5A, -
42 of 239
B2A00 00 B2A00 00 B2A00 00
Ground - 1 - -
1. Ajar Indicator Inoperative
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Keyless Entry System Description and Operation
(Without ATH) , or Keyless Entry System Description and Operation (With ATH)
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver activated, the signal circuit to the control module is
grounded.
Battery voltage is between 9 - 16 V.
The chassis control module receives serial data message from the keyless entry control module there is a
plausibility error on the driver door latch
• Driver Information Display = Service Driver Door Switch

• Audible Reminders = Continuously
When the conditions for setting DTC B297B no longer exists
Schematic Reference

43 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC B297B is not set
If DTC B297B is set
Refer to DTC B297B or B297C

3. All OK.
Repair Instructions

DTC B3125, B3130, OR B3135 (WITHOUT N08)
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3125
Driver Door Only Unlock Circuit
DTC B3130
All Doors Unlock Circuit
DTC B3135
All Doors Lock Circuit
44 of 239
Symptom Byte Information:
Symptom Byte List

B3125 02,
B3125 02, B3130
B+ - Body Control Module B3130 02, - -
02, B3135 02
B3135 02
B3125 02, B3125 01,
Control - A23D Door Latch
B3130 02, 1 B3130 01, -
Assembly - Driver
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
Control - A23P Door Latch
B3130 02, 2 B3130 01, -
Assembly - Passenger
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
Control - A23LR Door Latch
B3130 02, 3 B3130 01, -
Assembly - Left Rear
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
Control - A23RR Door Latch
B3130 02, 4 B3130 01, -
Assembly - Right Rear
B3135 02 B3135 01
Ground - Body Control Module - 1, 2, 3, 4 - -
1. A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver = Inoperative
2. A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger = Inoperative
3. A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear = Inoperative
4. A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear = Inoperative
Circuit Description
B+ - Body Control Module Supplied from a fuse.
The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to
Control - Driver Door Unlock
activate the component.
Control - All Doors Lock
Control - Passenger Door Unlock
Ground - Body Control Module Chassis Ground
The door locks are actuated by a bidirectional DC motor that
A23 Door Latch Assembly locks/unlocks the door so that it can not be opened from
outside the vehicle (but still from inside).
45 of 239
B3125 01, B3130 01, B3135 01
A23 Door Latch Assembly - Control Circuit = Short to Battery
B3125 02, B3130 02, B3135 02 Condition 1
A23 Door Latch Assembly - Control Circuit = Short to Ground
B3125 02, B3130 02, B3135 02 Condition 2
B+ circuit terminal 4 X2 K9 Body Control Module = Open
B3125 02, B3130 02, B3135 02 Condition 3
B+ circuit terminal 4 X2 K9 Body Control Module = Short to Ground
All Doors Lock Command & All Doors Unlock Command = Inoperative
Diagnostic Aids
A short to ground or a short to voltage anywhere on circuits 294, 295 or 5911 will cause the power door lock
system to be disabled by the body control module. It may be necessary to disconnect all the door latches, the X6
harness connector at the body control module and inspect the appropriate inline harness connectors to determine
the source of the fault.
Schematic Reference

• Body Control System Wiring Schematics
46 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Operate the component: S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver - Lock Switch & Unlock Switch
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Lock Switch = Inactive & Lock & Unlock
Refer to: Power Door Locks Malfunction

• A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver = Lock & Unlock

• A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear = Lock & Unlock
• A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger = Lock & Unlock
• A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear = Lock & Unlock
{A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver} If the component does not activate
{A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear} If the component does not activate
{A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger} If the component does not activate
{A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear} If the component does not activate
47 of 239
Go to next step: If all functions work properly

4. All OK.
1. Verify the fuse is not open: F29DA Fuse

If the fuse is open
1. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 K9 Body Control Module
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 4 X2 & Output terminal Fuse
Go to next step: If the fuse is not open
5. Test for less than 10 V between the circuits:
• A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver Control terminal 8 & Ground

6. Test for greater than 1 V between the test points:
If less than 1 V

If 6.7 V or less
48 of 239
• Control terminal 8 A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver & Terminal 4 X6 Control module
harness
harness
If 8.1 V or greater

Connection
• A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver

• A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger
• A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear
• A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear
Component Testing
49 of 239
3. Connect a 25 A fused jumper wire between the test points:
• A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver Control terminal 7 & B+
• A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger Control terminal 8 & B+
• A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear Control terminal 7 & B+
• A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear Control terminal 8 & B+
CAUTION: Complete the testing as quickly as possible in order to prevent

overheating and damaging the component.
4. Momentarily connect a jumper wire between the test points:

• A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger Control terminal 9 & Ground
• A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear Control terminal 8 & Ground
• A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear Control terminal 9 & Ground
5. Reverse the jumper wires 2 times between the terminals.
Verify the component works as specified: A23 Door Latch Assembly = Lock & Unlock
Replace the component: A23 Door Latch Assembly

6. All OK.
Repair Instructions

• Rear Side Door Latch Replacement
DTC B3125, B3130, OR B3135 (WITH N08)
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3125
50 of 239
Driver Door Only Unlock Circuit
DTC B3130
All Doors Unlock Circuit
DTC B3135
All Doors Lock Circuit
Symptom Byte List

B3125 02,
B3125 02, B3130
B+ - Body Control Module B3130 02, - -
02, B3135 02
B3135 02
B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 1 B3130 01, -
Assembly - Driver
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 2 B3130 01, -
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 3 B3130 01, -
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 4 B3130 01, -
B3135 02 B3135 01
Ground - Body Control Module - 1, 2, 3, 4 - -
Circuit Description
B+ - Body Control Module Supplied from a fuse.
51 of 239
Circuit Description
Ground - Body Control Module Chassis Ground
The fuel fill door lock actuator is a bidirectional DC motor
M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator
that locks/unlocks the door.
B3125 01, B3130 01, B3135 01
A23 Door Latch Assembly - Control Circuit = Short to Battery
B3125 02, B3130 02, B3135 02 Condition 1
A23 Door Latch Assembly - Control Circuit = Short to Ground
B3125 02, B3130 02, B3135 02 Condition 2
B+ circuit terminal 4 X2 K9 Body Control Module = Open
B3125 02, B3130 02, B3135 02 Condition 3
B+ circuit terminal 4 X2 K9 Body Control Module = Short to Ground
All Doors Lock Command & All Doors Unlock Command = Inoperative
Diagnostic Aids
A short to ground or a short to voltage anywhere on circuits 294, 295, 5911 or 6800 will cause the power door
lock system to be disabled by the body control module. It may be necessary to disconnect all the door latches,
52 of 239
the fuel filler door lock actuator, the X6 harness connector at the body control module and inspect the
appropriate inline harness connectors to determine the source of the fault.
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Lock Switch = Inactive & Lock & Unlock


53 of 239

4. All OK.
1. Verify the fuse is not open: F29DA Fuse

If the fuse is open
2. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 4 X2 & Output terminal Fuse
3. Disconnect the electrical connector:
• M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator
5. Test for less than 10 V between the circuits:
• M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator Control terminal 1 & Ground

6. Test for greater than 1 V between the test points:
54 of 239
If less than 1 V

If 6.7 V or less
• X6 K9 Body Control Module
• X2 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
harness
harness
• Control terminal 7 A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver & Terminal B4 X2 X50A Fuse
Block - Underhood
• Control terminal 2 M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator & Terminal B2 X2 X50A Fuse Block -
Underhood
• Control terminal 1 M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator & Terminal 4 X6 Control module
harness
If 8.1 V or greater
• X6 K9 Body Control Module
55 of 239
• X2 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood

Connection

• M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator
Component Testing
• A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver Control terminal 7 & B+
• A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger Control terminal 8 & B+
56 of 239
• A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear Control terminal 7 & B+
• A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear Control terminal 8 & B+


• A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger Control terminal 9 & Ground
• A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear Control terminal 8 & Ground
• A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear Control terminal 9 & Ground

6. All OK.
Repair Instructions

DTC B3140, B3145, B3150, OR B3155

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3140
Driver Door Unlock Switch Circuit
DTC B3145
Passenger Door Unlock Switch Circuit
DTC B3150
57 of 239
Driver Door Lock Switch Circuit
DTC B3155
Passenger Door Lock Switch Circuit
Symptom Byte List

Signal - Terminal 2 S13D Door
B3150 2 2 -
Lock Switch - Driver
B3140 3 3 -
Signal - Terminal 2 S13P Door
B3155 5 5 -
Lock Switch - Passenger
B3145 6 6 -
Ground - Terminal 4 S13D Door
- 1 - -
Ground - Terminal 4 S13P Door
- 4 - -
1. S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver = Inoperative
2. Driver Door Lock Switch = Inoperative
3. Driver Door Unlock Switch = Inoperative
4. S13P Door Lock Switch - Passenger = Inoperative
5. Passenger Door Lock Switch = Inoperative
6. Passenger Door Unlock Switch = Inoperative
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
S13 Door Lock Switch activated, the signal circuit to the control module is
grounded.
58 of 239
Signal circuit = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
B3140, B3145
Unlock Switch = Disabled
B3150, B3155
Lock Switch = Disabled
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Lock Switch = Inactive
59 of 239
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Lock Switch = Lock & Unlock

4. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Lock Switch = Inactive

5. Operate the component: S13P Door Lock Switch - Passenger - Lock Switch & Unlock Switch
Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Lock Switch = Lock & Unlock

6. All OK.
Test 1

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver
Ground Connection
60 of 239
• Signal circuit terminal 2 Component harness & Ground
terminal 4
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Lock Switch = Lock
Ground
terminal 4
9. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Lock Switch = Unlock
Ground
61 of 239
10. Test or replace the component: S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver
Test 2

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S13P Door Lock Switch - Passenger
Ground Connection
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X6 or X7 K9 Body Control Module
terminal 4
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Lock Switch = Lock
Ground
62 of 239
terminal 4
9. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Lock Switch = Unlock
Ground
10. Test or replace the component: S13P Door Lock Switch - Passenger
Component Testing
S13 Door Lock Switch - Test
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: S13 Door Lock Switch
• Signal terminal 2 & Ground terminal 4 - Lock Switch - Not Pressed
• Signal terminal 3 & Ground terminal 4 - Unlock Switch - Not Pressed
Replace the component: S13 Door Lock Switch

• Signal terminal 2 & Ground terminal 4 - Lock Switch - Pressed
• Signal terminal 3 & Ground terminal 4 - Unlock Switch - Pressed
63 of 239
5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Door Lock Switch Replacement - Driver Side

• Door Lock Switch Replacement - Passenger Front
DTC B323A-B323C
DTC Descriptors
DTC B323A 08
Upper Hands Free Sensor Signal Invalid
DTC B323B 08
Lower Hands Free Sensor Signal Invalid
DTC B323C 39
Hands Free Liftgate Sensor Module Internal Hardware Failure
DTC B323C 42
Hands Free Liftgate Sensor Module Invalid Calibration Set

Liftgate Hands-Free Control
U1510 00 U1510 00 - -
Module B+
Upper Hands Free Sensor
B323A 08 B323A 08 B323A 08 B323A 08
Signal
Lower Hands Free Sensor
B323B 08 B323B 08 B323B 08 B323B 08
Signal
- U1510 00 - -
Module Ground
The power liftgate has a feature that detects the motion of a foot under the rear fascia, this allows the operator to
64 of 239
open the liftgate when his or her hands are full of packages. As an indicator that the action has been properly
preformed, the liftgate hands-free sensor control module will send a serial data message to the liftgate control
module to command the liftgate to release and power open and the liftgate control module will send a serial data
message to the body control module to command the tail lights to flash 3 times
B323A 08
• The liftgate control module has received a serial data message that an invalid signal from the upper hands
free sensor has been detected by the hands-free liftgate sensor control module.
• The condition must be present for greater than 30 seconds
B323B 08
• The liftgate control module has received a serial data message that an invalid signal from the lower hands
• The condition must be present for greater than 30 seconds.
B323C 39
An internal malfunction has been detected by the liftgate control module
B323C 42
The liftgate control module detects the calibration files in the hands-free liftgate sensor control module does not
match the calibration files contained within the liftgate control module.
The hands-free feature will be inoperative

Diagnostic Aids
The hands-free function will only be allowed if certain operating criteria are met. Any of the following may
cause the hands-free system not to function:
• The hands-free function has been disabled by a setting in the Vehicle Personalization menu
• The Keyless Access function has been disabled by a setting in the Vehicle Personalization menu
• The keyless entry transmitter is not within range
• The kicking motion is incorrectly preformed
65 of 239
• The interior liftgate control switch has not been set to the 3/4 or Max position
• A loose or misaligned hands-free sensor
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
NOTE: The keyless entry transmitter must be within 1 meter (3 feet) of the liftgate
2. Verify the tail lights flash 3 times and the power liftgate opens while performing a kicking motion behind
and under the rear fascia.
If the tail lamps flash but the liftgate does not open
Refer to Power Liftgate Malfunction
If the tail lamps do not flash
Go to next step: If the tail lamps flash and the liftgate does open
3. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K171 Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor Control
Module.
2. Test for less than 1 Ω between the B275A Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor - Upper signal circuit terminal 1
66 of 239
and the signal circuit terminal 2.
If 1 Ω or greater
Replace the B275A Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor - Upper
Module.
4. Test for less than 1 Ω between the B275B Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor-Lower signal circuit terminal 1 and
the signal circuit terminal 2.
If 1 Ω or greater
Replace the B275B Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor-Lower
5. If all circuits test normal, replace the K171 Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor Control Module.
Repair Instructions
• Rear Closure Hands Free Sensor Replacement

• Control Module References for liftgate hands-free sensor control module replacement, programming
and setup
DTC B3245
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3245
Rear Cargo Door Lock Actuator Circuit

For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Rear Hatch/Gate Description and Operation
67 of 239
Circuit Description
component.
B3245 01
Control circuit terminal B8 X1 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood = Short to Battery
B3245 02
Control circuit terminal B8 X1 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood = Short to Ground
B3245 04 Condition 1
Control circuit terminal B8 X1 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood = Open
B3245 04 Condition 2
Ground circuit terminal H2 X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood = Open
M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate = Inoperative
Schematic Reference
Release Systems Wiring Schematics
68 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

Verify the component produces a clicking sound: M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate
If the component does not produce a sound
Go to next step: If the component produces a sound

3. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Ground circuit terminal H2 X5 & Ground
Connection
4. Connect the electrical connector: X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
B+
Verify the component turns On and Off when connecting and disconnecting the jumper wire: M14B Door
Lock Actuator - Liftgate
69 of 239
4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 8 X4 Control module harness
& Ground
6. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 8 X4 Control module
harness & Ground
7. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 8 X4 Control module
harness & Terminal B8 X1 Fuse Block Harness
Repair Instructions

DTC B384A
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B384A
Liftgate Close Switch Indicator Circuit
70 of 239
Control B384A 02 1 B384A 01 -
Ground - 1 - -
1. B70 Liftgate Close Switch - Backlight Dimming = Inoperative
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Interior Lighting Systems Description and Operation
Circuit Description
Control High Control
Illumination lamps are used as backlight for switches or
B70 Liftgate Close Switch
panel areas.
• B384A 01 - Control Circuit = Short to Voltage - For greater than 60 s

• B384A 02 - Control Circuit = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
• B384A 01: Backlight Dimming = Always On

• B384A 02: Backlight Dimming = Inoperative
Schematic Reference
Interior Lights Wiring Schematics
71 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Open the liftgate.

2. Verify the correct operation: B70 Liftgate Close Switch - Backlight Dimming = On

3. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: B70 Liftgate Close Switch
Ground Connection
4. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: Control circuit terminal 2 & Ground circuit terminal 1
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Control circuit terminal 2 Component harness &
Ground
72 of 239
4. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 2 Component harness &
5. Test or replace the component: B70 Liftgate Close Switch
Repair Instructions
• Liftgate Close Switch Replacement

DTC B3938
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3938
Fuel Fill Door Actuator Lock Circuit

B3125 02, B3125 01,
Control - Terminal 1 M97 Fuel
B3130 02, 1 B3130 01, -
Fill Door Lock Actuator
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 1 B3130 01, -
B3135 02 B3135 01
1. M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator = Inoperative
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Fuel Fill Door Description and Operation
73 of 239
Circuit Description
component.
Control - Terminal 1 M97 Fuel Fill Door The output circuit is switched from ground to 12 V to
Lock Actuator activate the component.
KR132 Fuel Fill Door Lock Relay - The component is commanded On
B3938 01
Control - Relay Coil = Short to Voltage
B3938 02
Control - Relay Coil = Short to Ground
B3938 04
Control - Relay Coil = Open/High Resistance
M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator = Inoperative
Schematic Reference
74 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Operate the component: S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver - Lock Switch
Verify the component works as specified: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator = Locked

3. Operate the component: S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver - Unlock Switch
Verify the component works as specified: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator = Unlocked

4. All OK.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator
6. Verify the test lamp does not turn On and Off.
If the test lamp turns On and Off
Test or replace the component: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator
Go to next step: If the test lamp does not turn On and Off
75 of 239
• Control circuit terminal 1 Component harness & Terminal 4 X6 Control module harness
• Control circuit terminal 2 Component harness & Terminal B2 X2 Fuse Block Harness

11. Connect the electrical connector: X6 K9 Body Control Module
Connection
B+
Verify the component produces a clicking sound: KR132 Fuel Fill Door Lock Relay

4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 10 X7 Control module
harness & Ground
harness & Ground
76 of 239
harness & Control circuit terminal B3 X2 Fuse Block Harness
Component Testing
3. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control terminal 1 & 12 V

Verify the component works as specified: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator = Lock/Unlock
Replace the component: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions

• Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Housing Replacement
DTC B396A - LIFTGATE MOTOR POWER OPEN/CLOSE MALFUNCTION

DTC Descriptors
DTC B396A
Left Liftgate Motor Control Circuit
77 of 239

Liftgate Control Module B+
B396A 04 B396A 04 - -
Terminal 3 X2
Liftgate Motor Close Control B396A 02 B396A 04 B396A 01 -
Liftgate Motor Open Control B396A 02 B396A 04 B396A 01 -
The liftgate motor is a bi-directional motor and open or close operation is the result of the direction of the motor
rotation. The liftgate control module controls the liftgate motor through the control circuits by supplying power
and ground in the appropriate polarity. The motor control circuits are monitored by the liftgate control module
prior to activation for a high or low condition and during motor operation for any irregular current flow
conditions.
• The system voltage is 9 - 16 V.

• Power open or close function is initiated.
B396A 01
The liftgate control module detects a short to battery in the liftgate motor control circuits.
B396A 02
The liftgate control module detects a short to ground in the liftgate motor control circuits.
B396A 04
The liftgate control module detects an open/high resistance in the liftgate motor control circuits or an open/high
resistance in the terminal 3 X2 B+ circuit
The liftgate will release but will not power open or power close

Diagnostic Aids
Whenever the liftgate control module loses power or is disconnected, the ignition must be cycled OFF then ON
78 of 239
in order to reactivate the liftgate control module.
In some circumstances high or low control circuit faults may cause the liftgate control module to react as if the
liftgate has encountered an object in its travel and reverse direction.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
NOTE: Refer to Liftgate System Diagnosis for a guide to power liftgate functions
and failure modes to determine the course of action when the power
liftgate malfunctions
2. Verify DTC B153E is not set.

If DTC B153E is set
Refer to: DTC B153E - Liftgate Angle Sensor Malfunction
Go to next step: If DTC B153E is not set

3. Verify the liftgate will OPEN and CLOSE when commanding the Liftgate Open/Close with a scan tool.
If the liftgate does not OPEN or CLOSE
Go to next step: If the liftgate does OPEN and CLOSE

4. All OK.
79 of 239
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K39 Liftgate Control Module, Ignition ON
1. Ignition OFF
1. Ignition OFF
3. Disconnect the harness connector at the M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly.
If infinite resistance, replace the M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly.
3. Ignition OFF, connect the X2 harness connector at the K39 Liftgate Control Module and disconnect the
harness connector at the M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly.
4. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 1 and control circuit terminal 5, ignition ON.
NOTE: The liftgate must be opened and allowed to cinch closed each time this
test is performed, repeating this test without opening and closing the
liftgate will result in a misdiagnosis and replacement of a functional K39
Liftgate Control Module
5. Open and completely close the liftgate, verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when pressing the S46B
Liftgate Unlatch Switch.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K39 Liftgate
Control Module.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuits end to end.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K39 Liftgate
80 of 239
If less than 1 V, replace the K39 Liftgate Control Module
Go to next step: If the test lamp turns ON and Off
6. Replace the M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for the liftgate control module replacement, programming and setup
DTC B396C OR B396D - LIFTGATE INTERIOR RELEASE OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH

MALFUNCTION
Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B396C
Liftgate Mode Switch Circuit
DTC B396D
Front Liftgate Actuator Switch Circuit

Signal - Liftgate Mode Switch
B396C 08 B396C 08 B396C 08 -
Circuit
Signal - Liftgate Open/Close B396D 02 1 1 -
Ground - 1, 2 - -
1. Liftgate Open/Close S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior = Disabled
2. Power Liftgate (TB5) - 3/4 & Manual = Disabled
81 of 239
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
Each function has its own switch. The switches are
S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior connected to a resistor ladder so that a specific resistance is
generated for each switch.
B396C 08
Signal - Liftgate Mode Switch Circuit = Voltage Out of Range - For greater than 30 s
B396D 02
Signal - Liftgate Open/Close = Short to Ground - For greater than 60 s
B396C 08
Power Liftgate (TB5) - 3/4 & Manual = Disabled
B396D 02
Power Liftgate (TB5) - Liftgate Open/Close S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior = Disabled
Schematic Reference
82 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Front Control Switch = Inactive

3. Operate the component: S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Front Control Switch = Active

4. Operate the component: S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior - Select each position: Off/3/4/Max
Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Mode Switch = Off & 3/4 & Maximum
If the parameter value does not change
Go to next step: If the parameter value changes

5. All OK.
Test 1

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior
83 of 239
Ground Connection
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Front Control Switch = Inactive
Ground
terminal 1
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Front Control Switch = Active
Ground
Signal circuit terminal 12 X1 Control module harness
8. Test or replace the component: S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior
Test 2
4. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Mode Switch = Greater than 300 count (s)
If 300 counts or less
84 of 239
Ground
Go to next step: If greater than 300 counts
terminal 1
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Mode Switch = Less than 5 counts
If 5 counts or greater
Ground
Go to next step: If less than 5 counts
7. Test or replace the component: S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior
Component Testing
S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior-Static Test
Replace the component: S45B Liftgate Control Switch - Interior

85 of 239
5. Test for 600 to 700 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 3 & Ground terminal 1 - Switch S45B
in position: Off

6. Test for 6000 to 6500 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 3 & Ground terminal 1 - Switch
S45B in position: 3/4

7. Test for 1900 to 2100 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 3 & Ground terminal 1 - Switch
S45B in position: Maximum

8. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Liftgate Release Switch Replacement - Interior

DTC B396E - LIFTGATE CLOSE SWITCH MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B396E
Rear Liftgate Actuator Switch Circuit

86 of 239
Signal B396E 02 1 1 -
1. Liftgate Close Switch = Disabled
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
When the switch is activated, the signal circuit to the
B70 Liftgate Close Switch
Signal circuit = Short to Ground For greater than 60 s
B70 Liftgate Close Switch = Disabled
Schematic Reference
87 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Rear Close Switch = Inactive

3. Operate the component: B70 Liftgate Close Switch - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Rear Close Switch = Active

4. All OK.

5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Rear Close Switch = Inactive
88 of 239
Ground
terminal 4
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Rear Close Switch = Active
Ground
8. Test or replace the component: B70 Liftgate Close Switch
Component Testing
3. Test for infinite resistance between the test points: Signal terminal 3 & Low Reference terminal 4 -
Replace the component: B70 Liftgate Close Switch

4. Test for less than 3 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 3 & Low Reference terminal 4 - Switch
- Pressed
Replace the component: B70 Liftgate Close Switch

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
89 of 239
• Liftgate Close Switch Replacement

SYMPTOMS - VEHICLE ACCESS
1. Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle , before using the Symptom Tables in order to verify
that all of the following are true:
• There are no DTCs set
• The control modules can communicate via the serial data link
following systems description:
• Door Ajar Indicator Description and Operation
• Fuel Fill Door Description and Operation
• Liftgate Ajar Indicator Description and Operation
• Liftgate Description and Operation
• Power Door Locks Description and Operation
• Rear Hatch/Gate Description and Operation
cause the symptom.
Intermittent
Symptom List
• Exterior Door Handle Switch Malfunction

• Fuel Filler Door Release Malfunction
• Liftgate System Diagnosis
• Liftgate Handsfree Sensor Malfunction
• Liftgate Release Malfunction (With TB5), or Liftgate Release Malfunction (Without TB5)
• Liftgate Ajar Indicator Malfunction (With TB5), or Liftgate Ajar Indicator Malfunction (Without
TB5)
• Door Ajar Indicator Malfunction
• Power Door Lock Key Cylinder Switches Malfunction
90 of 239
• Power Door Locks Malfunction
• Power Liftgate Malfunction
DOOR LOCK INDICATOR MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle

Control - LED Backlight
B2625 02 2 - -
Dimming
Control - Terminal 4 A23D Door
1 2 - -
Latch Assembly - Driver
Control - Terminal 2 A23P Door
1 2 - -
Latch Assembly - Passenger
1. Door Lock Switch Indicator = Always On
2. Door Lock Switch Indicator = Always Off
Circuit Description
Control All Doors Lock
component.
The door lock indicator is illuminated when the doors are
Door Lock Switch Indicator
locked or dead locked.
Schematic Reference

• Interior Lights Dimming Wiring Schematics
91 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

Verify the component operates in both directions:


3. Operate the component: Driver Door - Open and close the door.
Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Ajar Switch = Active & Inactive
If the parameter state does not change
Go to next step: If the parameter state changes

4. Operate the component: Passenger Door - Open and close the door.
Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Ajar Switch = Active & Inactive

Verify the component turns On and Off: Door Lock Switch Indicator
92 of 239
Verify the component turns On and Off: Door Lock Switch Indicator

7. All OK.
Test 1
harness & Ground
Control circuit terminal 5 X1 Control module harness
If less than 2 ohms - Refer to: DTC B2625
Go to next step: If the test lamp is ON
5. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 6 & B+
7. Perform the scan tool control function: All Doors Lock/Unlock - Driver Door Unlock Command & All
Doors Lock Command

Control circuit terminal 4 A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
93 of 239
Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
Test 2
harness & Ground
Control circuit terminal 5 X1 Control module harness
If less than 2 ohms - Refer to: DTC B2625
Go to next step: If the test lamp is ON
5. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Control circuit terminal 6 & B+
7. Perform the scan tool control function: All Doors Lock/Unlock - Passenger Door (s) Unlock Command &
All Doors Lock Command

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger
Control circuit terminal 2 A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger
94 of 239
Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger
Repair Instructions

EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE SWITCH MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle

Signal - B27D Door Handle
B3849 02 1 1 -
Signal - B27P Door Handle
B1474 02 2 2 -
Signal - B27LR Door Handle
B1534 02 3 3 -
Signal - B27RR Door Handle
B1535 02 4 4 -
Ground - B27D Door Handle
- 1 - -
Ground - B27P Door Handle
- 2 - -
Ground - B27LR Door Handle
- 3 - -
Ground - B27RR Door Handle
- 4 - -
95 of 239
1. B27D Door Handle Switch - Driver Exterior = Disabled
2. B27P Door Handle Switch - Passenger Exterior = Disabled
3. B27LR Door Handle Switch - Left Rear Exterior = Disabled
4. B27RR Door Handle Switch - Right Rear Exterior = Disabled
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
B27 Door Handle Switch activated, the signal circuit to the control module is
grounded.
The keyless entry control module communicates via serial
K84 Keyless Entry Control Module data with the body control module and the auxiliary body
control module.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter:
96 of 239
• Exterior Driver Door Handle Switch = Inactive
• Exterior Passenger Door Handle Switch = Inactive
• Exterior Left Rear Door Handle Switch = Inactive
• Exterior Right Rear Door Handle Switch = Inactive

3. Operate the component: B27D Door Handle Switch - Driver Exterior - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Driver Door Handle Switch = Active

4. Operate the component: B27P Door Handle Switch - Passenger Exterior - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Passenger Door Handle Switch = Active

5. Operate the component: B27LR Door Handle Switch - Left Rear Exterior - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Left Rear Door Handle Switch = Active

6. Operate the component: B27RR Door Handle Switch - Right Rear Exterior - Pressed
Verify the scan tool parameter: Exterior Right Rear Door Handle Switch = Active

7. All OK.
97 of 239

2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: A24 Door Handle Assembly
Ground Connection
Ground
terminal 5
Ground
• Signal circuit terminal 1 B27D Door Handle Switch - Driver Exterior & Terminal 12 X2
• Signal circuit terminal 1 B27P Door Handle Switch - Passenger Exterior & Terminal 11 X2
• Signal circuit terminal 1 B27LR Door Handle Switch - Left Rear Exterior & Terminal 2 X2
98 of 239
• Signal circuit terminal 1 B27RR Door Handle Switch - Right Rear Exterior & Terminal 1 X2
Component Testing
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: A24 Door Handle Assembly


5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
• Front Side Door Outside Handle Replacement

• Rear Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
FUEL FILLER DOOR RELEASE MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3938
Fuel Fill Door Actuator Lock Circuit
99 of 239

B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 1 B3130 01, -
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 1 B3130 01, -
B3135 02 B3135 01
1. M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator = Inoperative
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Fuel Fill Door Description and Operation
Circuit Description
component.
KR132 Fuel Fill Door Lock Relay - The component is commanded On
B3938 01
Control - Relay Coil = Short to Voltage
B3938 02
Control - Relay Coil = Short to Ground
B3938 04
100 of 239
Control - Relay Coil = Open/High Resistance
M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator = Inoperative
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Operate the component: S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver - Lock Switch
Verify the component works as specified: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator = Locked

Verify the component works as specified: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator = Unlocked
101 of 239
4. All OK.
6. Verify the test lamp does not turn On and Off.
Test or replace the component: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator
• Control circuit terminal 1 Component harness & Terminal 4 X6 Control module harness
• Control circuit terminal 2 Component harness & Terminal B2 X2 Fuse Block Harness

Connection
B+
102 of 239
Verify the component produces a clicking sound: KR132 Fuel Fill Door Lock Relay

4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 10 X7 Control module
harness & Ground
harness & Ground
harness & Control circuit terminal B3 X2 Fuse Block Harness
Component Testing
3. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control terminal 1 & 12 V

Verify the component works as specified: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator = Lock/Unlock
Replace the component: M97 Fuel Fill Door Lock Actuator

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions
103 of 239
• Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Housing Replacement
LIFTGATE SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

The power liftgate system is a standard liftgate that has an added electric motor, a spindle drive arm, an electric
latch/cinch system and an optional handsfree liftgate release system. The liftgate can be either manually or
power opened and closed. Power opening or closing of the liftgate can be done through the interior liftgate
switch, pushing either the open or close switch at the liftgate, pressing open or close buttons on the keyless
entry transmitter or the motion of a foot under the rear fascia. The powered liftgate function can be disabled
using the interior liftgate on/off control switch.
Diagnostic Aids
Check the calibration software installed on the liftgate control module prior to performing extensive
diagnostics, vehicles with the handsfree liftgate control option (TC2) require specific calibration software.
Incorrect calibration software may cause the power liftgate system to become inoperative without setting any
DTCs
If the liftgate will not release from the closed position, refer to Opening the Liftgate Without Electrical
Power for the appropriate procedure
Power liftgate function will only be allowed if certain operating criteria are met. Any of the following may
cause the power liftgate not to function:
• Vehicle is not in park

• System voltage is below 10.5 V
• Engine is cranking
• The vehicle doors are locked
• A liftgate control module DTC is set
• Liftgate motor excess current is detected which may be caused by a misaligned liftgate striker
• Interior trim and/or liftgate wedge/bumper misalignment
• Remote power liftgate functions may be disabled if a second keyless entry transmitter is inside the vehicle
Whenever the liftgate control module loses power or is disconnected, the ignition must be cycled OFF then ON
in order to reactivate the liftgate control module.
Schematic Reference
104 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the K39 Liftgate Control Module is programmed with the latest and correct software.
If the software is not the latest or is not the correct software
Refer to Control Module References for liftgate control module replacement, programming and
setup.
Go to next step: If the software is the latest and is correct

3. Verify the K39 Liftgate Control Module does not have any current DTCs set.
If the K39 Liftgate Control Module has current DTCs set
Go to next step: If the K39 Liftgate Control Module does not have any current DTCs set
4. Verify DTC B2494 or B153F is not set as a history DTC.
DTC B2494 is set only as history
Refer to Rear License Plate Lamp Module Replacement
DTC B153F is set only as history
Refer to Liftgate Side Sensor Replacement - Left Side, or Liftgate Side Sensor Replacement -
Right Side
Go to next step: If the K39 Liftgate Control Module does not have any history DTCs set
5. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Mode Switch parameter changes from Off to 3/4 to Maximum while rotating
the S45B Liftgate Control Switch-Interior.
105 of 239
Refer to DTC B396C or B396D - Liftgate Interior Release Open/Close Switch Malfunction.

6. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Front Control Switch parameter changes between Inactive and Active when
pressing the S45B Liftgate Control Switch-Interior.
Refer to DTC B396C or B396D - Liftgate Interior Release Open/Close Switch Malfunction.

7. Liftgate Closed, verify the scan tool Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch, Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch, and
Liftgate Latch Sector Switch parameters are as listed below:
• Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch parameter Close
• Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch parameter Close
• Liftgate Latch Sector Switch parameter Inactive
If any of the parameters are not as listed
Refer to DTC B153A - Liftgate Latch Switches Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the parameters are as listed

8. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Handle Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive when
pressing the S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch.
Refer to DTC B2494 - Liftgate Handle Switch Malfunction.

9. Verify the liftgate will release and smoothly power open when commanding Liftgate Open with a scan
tool.
If the liftgate does not release
Refer to Liftgate Latch Release/Cinch Malfunction
If the liftgate releases but does not open
If the liftgate releases but performs an erratic power open/close motion
Go to next step: If the liftgate smoothly opens

10. Liftgate Open, verify that the liftgate will remain at or near the full open position and does not slowly
close.
If the liftgate will not remain open or begins to slowly close
Refer to Liftgate Strut Replacement .
106 of 239
Go to next step: If the liftgate remains in the full open position
11. Liftgate Open, verify the scan tool Liftgate Secondary Obstacle Detection parameter is between 3 V-3.5
V.
If not between 3 V-3.5 V
Refer to DTC B153F - Liftgate Object Sensor Malfunction.
Go to next step: If between 3 V-3.5 V

12. Liftgate Open, verify the scan tool Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch, Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch, and
Liftgate Latch Sector Switch parameters are as listed below
• Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch parameter Open
• Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch parameter Open
• Liftgate Latch Sector Switch parameter Inactive
If any of the parameter are not as listed
Refer to DTC B153A - Liftgate Latch Switches Malfunction.
Go to next step: If the parameters are as listed

13. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Rear Close Switch parameter changes between Active and Inactive when
pressing the B70 Liftgate Close Switch.
Refer to DTC B396E - Liftgate Close Switch Malfunction.

14. Verify the liftgate will smoothly power close when commanding Liftgate Close with a scan tool.
If the liftgate does not power close and sets DTC B396A
Refer to DTC B396A - Liftgate Motor Power Open/Close Malfunction
If the liftgate performs an erratic open/close motion and does not set a DTC
Go to next step: If the liftgate smoothly power closes
NOTE: Refer to the owner's manual for the location of the kick sensors prior to
performing the kicking motion
15. If equipped, liftgate Closed, with the keyless entry transmitter within 3 feet (1 meter) of the liftgate,
activate the handsfree liftgate release system with a kicking motion of a foot under the rear fascia. The
tail lamps will flash 3 times if the liftgate handsfree sensors detect the motion.
Refer to Liftgate Handsfree Sensor Malfunction
Go to next step: If the tail lamps flash

16. All OK.
107 of 239
LIFTGATE HANDSFREE SENSOR MALFUNCTION
DTC Descriptors
DTC B323A 08
Upper Hands Free Sensor Signal Invalid
DTC B323B 08
Lower Hands Free Sensor Signal Invalid
DTC B323C 39
Hands Free Liftgate Sensor Module Internal Hardware Failure
DTC B323C 42
Hands Free Liftgate Sensor Module Invalid Calibration Set

U1510 00 U1510 00 - -
Module B+
Upper Hands Free Sensor
B323A 08 B323A 08 B323A 08 B323A 08
Signal
Lower Hands Free Sensor
B323B 08 B323B 08 B323B 08 B323B 08
Signal
- U1510 00 - -
Module Ground
The power liftgate has a feature that detects the motion of a foot under the rear fascia, this allows the operator to
open the liftgate when his or her hands are full of packages. As an indicator that the action has been properly
preformed, the liftgate hands-free sensor control module will send a serial data message to the liftgate control
module to command the liftgate to release and power open and the liftgate control module will send a serial data
message to the body control module to command the tail lights to flash 3 times
108 of 239
B323A 08
• The liftgate control module has received a serial data message that an invalid signal from the upper hands
• The condition must be present for greater than 30 seconds
B323B 08
• The liftgate control module has received a serial data message that an invalid signal from the lower hands
• The condition must be present for greater than 30 seconds.
B323C 39
An internal malfunction has been detected by the liftgate control module
B323C 42
The liftgate control module detects the calibration files in the hands-free liftgate sensor control module does not
match the calibration files contained within the liftgate control module.
The hands-free feature will be inoperative

Diagnostic Aids
The hands-free function will only be allowed if certain operating criteria are met. Any of the following may
cause the hands-free system not to function:
• The hands-free function has been disabled by a setting in the Vehicle Personalization menu
• The Keyless Access function has been disabled by a setting in the Vehicle Personalization menu
• The keyless entry transmitter is not within range
• The kicking motion is incorrectly preformed
• The interior liftgate control switch has not been set to the 3/4 or Max position
• A loose or misaligned hands-free sensor
Schematic Reference
109 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
NOTE: The keyless entry transmitter must be within 1 meter (3 feet) of the liftgate
2. Verify the tail lights flash 3 times and the power liftgate opens while performing a kicking motion behind
and under the rear fascia.
If the tail lamps flash but the liftgate does not open
Go to next step: If the tail lamps flash and the liftgate does open
3. All OK.
Module.
2. Test for less than 1 Ω between the B275A Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor - Upper signal circuit terminal 1
and the signal circuit terminal 2.
If 1 Ω or greater
Replace the B275A Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor - Upper
Module.
4. Test for less than 1 Ω between the B275B Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor-Lower signal circuit terminal 1 and
the signal circuit terminal 2.
110 of 239
If 1 Ω or greater
Replace the B275B Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor-Lower
5. If all circuits test normal, replace the K171 Hands-Free Liftgate Sensor Control Module.
Repair Instructions
• Rear Closure Hands Free Sensor Replacement

• Control Module References for liftgate hands-free sensor control module replacement, programming
and setup
LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE/CINCH MALFUNCTION

DTC Descriptors
DTC B2495
DTC B24A0

High Resistance
B24A0 02 B24A0 05 B24A0 08 B24A0 01 -
Control
B2495 02 B2495 01 -
B2495 02 B2495 01 -
111 of 239
flow condition.
B2495 01
B2495 02
B2495 04, B24A0 05
B24A0 01
B24A0 02
B24A0 08
B24A0 01, B24A0 02, B24A0 08
B2495 01, B2495 02, B2495 04, B24A0 05
112 of 239

Diagnostic Aids
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
Switch.
113 of 239

4. All OK.
If 10 Ω or greater
If 1 V or greater
114 of 239
If 1 V or greater
If 10 Ω or greater
Repair Instructions

115 of 239
LIFTGATE RELEASE MALFUNCTION (WITH TB5)
DTC Descriptors
DTC B2495
DTC B24A0

High Resistance
B24A0 02 B24A0 05 B24A0 08 B24A0 01 -
Control
B2495 02 B2495 01 -
B2495 02 B2495 01 -
flow condition.
116 of 239
B2495 01
B2495 02
B2495 04, B24A0 05
B24A0 01
B24A0 02
B24A0 08
B24A0 01, B24A0 02, B24A0 08
B2495 01, B2495 02, B2495 04, B24A0 05


Diagnostic Aids
117 of 239
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
Switch.


4. All OK.
118 of 239
If 10 Ω or greater
If 1 V or greater
If 1 V or greater
119 of 239
If 10 Ω or greater
Repair Instructions

LIFTGATE RELEASE MALFUNCTION (WITHOUT TB5)

Check - Vehicle
Short to Short to Short to Signal

Circuit Ground Ground Voltage Performance
B+ - Relay Switch 2 2 - -
120 of 239
Short to Short to Short to Signal
Circuit Ground Ground Voltage Performance
Signal - S46B Liftgate Unlatch
1 1 1 -
Switch
Ground - S46B Liftgate Unlatch
- 1 - -
Switch
Ground - M14B Door Lock
- 2 - -
Actuator - Liftgate
1. S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch - Inoperative
2. M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate - Inoperative
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Rear Hatch/Gate Description and Operation
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
Control - Component
component.
component.
Ground - Component Chassis Ground
• The switch has a normally open contact.
S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch • When the switch is activated, the signal circuit to the

M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate unlatched, a switch in the latch will close, grounding the
signal circuit to the BCM.
Schematic Reference
121 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Verify the scan tool parameter: Trunk Lid/Liftgate Window Exterior Unlatch Switch = Inactive

Verify the scan tool parameter: Trunk Lid/Liftgate Window Exterior Unlatch Switch = Active

Verify the component produces a clicking sound: M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate
If a click cannot be heard or felt
Go to next step: If a click can be heard or felt

5. All OK.
Test 1

122 of 239
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Trunk Lid/Liftgate Window Exterior Unlatch Switch = Inactive
Ground
terminal 1
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Trunk Lid/Liftgate Window Exterior Unlatch Switch = Active
Ground
8. Test or replace the component: S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch
Test 2

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate
123 of 239
4. Verify the fuse is not open: F6UA Fuse
If the fuse is open
1. Replace the component: F6UA Fuse
2. Verify the fuse does not open.
If the fuse opens - Test or replace the component: X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
If the fuse does not open, go to the next step.
Verify the test lamp does not turn On and Off.
Test or replace the component: M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate
9. Connect the electrical connector: M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate
10. Disconnect the electrical connector: X1 & X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
12. Momentarily connect a 7.5 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control circuit terminal B5 X1
& B+

4. Test for less than 1 V between the test points: Control circuit terminal 3 Component harness &
Ground
124 of 239
Ground
Control circuit terminal B5 X1 Fuse Block Harness
If less than 2 ohms - Test or replace the component: M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate
14. Verify the fuse is not open: F6UA Fuse
If the fuse is open
Test or replace the component: X50A Fuse Block - Underhood

Connection
16. Connect the electrical connector: X1 & X5 X50A Fuse Block - Underhood
B+

harness & Ground
harness & Terminal B8 X1 Fuse Block Harness
125 of 239
Component Testing
M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate - Test
3. Connect a jumper wire between the test points: Ground terminal 1 & Ground
4. Momentarily connect a 7.5 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control terminal 3 & 12 V
Replace the component: M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate

5. All OK.
S46B Liftgate Unlatch Switch - Test


5. All OK.
Repair Instructions

• Rear License Plate Lamp Module Replacement
126 of 239
LIFTGATE AJAR INDICATOR MALFUNCTION (WITH TB5)

Check - Vehicle

Signal - Liftgate Latch Ratchet
1 2 - -
Switch
Signal - Liftgate Latch Pawl
1 2 - -
Switch
Signal - Rear Closure Ajar
1 B153A 08 - -
Switch
Low Reference - A23C Liftgate
- B24A0 05 - -
Latch Assembly
1. Driver Information Display - Rear Access Open = Always On
2. Power Liftgate (TB5) = Disabled
Body Control Module: Rear Closure Ajar Switch

Parameter Normal Range: Active/Inactive
• Active - Liftgate - Ajar

• Inactive - Liftgate - Closed
Signal Active Inactive -

Low Reference - Inactive -
Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch

Parameter Normal Range: Open/Closed
• Open - Liftgate - Ajar

• Closed - Liftgate - Close
Signal Open Closed -
127 of 239
Low Reference - Closed -
Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch

Parameter Normal Range: Open/Closed
• Open - Liftgate - Ajar

• Closed - Liftgate - Close
Signal Open Closed -

Low Reference - Closed -
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Liftgate Ajar Indicator Description and Operation
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly
status.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
128 of 239
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

• Body Control Module: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Active

• Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch = Open
• Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch = Open

3. All OK.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly
3. Test for less than 10 ohms between the test points: Low Reference terminal 6 & Ground
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Body Control Module: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Inactive
Ground
129 of 239
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch = Closed
Ground
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch = Closed
Ground
terminal 6
9. Verify the scan tool parameter: Body Control Module: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Active
Ground
terminal 6
11. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch = Open
130 of 239
Ground
terminal 6
13. Verify the scan tool parameter: Liftgate Control Module: Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch = Open
Ground
14. Test or replace the component: A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly
Repair Instructions

LIFTGATE AJAR INDICATOR MALFUNCTION (WITHOUT TB5)

131 of 239
Check - Vehicle

Signal 1 2 2 -
Ground - 3 - -
1. Driver Information Display - Rear Access Open = Always On
2. Driver Information Display - Rear Access Open = Always Off
3. M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate = Inoperative
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Liftgate Ajar Indicator Description and Operation
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate
status.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
132 of 239
Scan Tool Reference

2. Operate the component: Close the liftgate.
Verify the scan tool parameter: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Inactive

Verify the scan tool parameter: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Active

4. All OK.
4. Verify the scan tool parameter: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Inactive
Ground
terminal 1
6. Verify the scan tool parameter: Rear Closure Ajar Switch = Active
133 of 239
Ground
7. Test or replace the component: M14B Door Lock Actuator - Liftgate
Component Testing


5. All OK.
Repair Instructions

DOOR AJAR INDICATOR MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
134 of 239

Signal - Ajar A23D Door Latch
1 2 - -
Assembly - Driver
Signal - open A23D Door Latch
B297B 5A B297B 5A - -
Assembly - Driver
Signal - Ajar A23P Door Latch
1 2 - -
Signal - Ajar A23LR Door Latch
1 2 - -
Signal - Ajar A23RR Door
1 2 - -
Latch Assembly - Right Rear
Ground - A23D Door Latch
- 2 - -
Assembly - Driver
Ground - A23P Door Latch
- 2 - -
Ground - A23LR Door Latch
- 2 - -
Ground - A23RR Door Latch
- 2 - -
1. Door Ajar Indicator = Always On
2. Door Open - Door Ajar Indicator = Not Displayed
For an overview of the component/system, refer to: Door Ajar Indicator Description and Operation
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
The lock assemblies also contain a door ajar switch that is
A23 Door Latch Assembly
open when the door is closed.
The motor M74 is a bidirectional DC motor that moves the
M74 Window Motor
component: Front Power Windows & Rear Power Windows
Schematic Reference
135 of 239
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference

2. Operate the component: Driver Door - Open and close the door.
• Body Control Module: Driver Door Ajar Switch = Active & Inactive
• Keyless Entry Control Module: Driver Door Open Switch = Active & Inactive

3. Operate the component: Passenger Door - Open and close the door.
Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Ajar Switch = Active & Inactive

4. Operate the component: Left Rear Door - Open and close the door.
Verify the scan tool parameter: Left Rear Door Ajar Switch = Active & Inactive

5. Operate the component: Right Rear Door - Open and close the door.
136 of 239
Verify the scan tool parameter: Right Rear Door Ajar Switch = Active & Inactive

6. All OK.
Test 1

Ground Connection
• Body Control Module: Driver Door Ajar Switch = Inactive
• Keyless Entry Control Module: Driver Door Open Switch = Inactive
• M74D Window Motor - Driver
• K84 Keyless Entry Control Module
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver or K84
• Signal circuit terminal 2 & Ground circuit terminal 3
137 of 239
• Signal circuit terminal 1 & Ground circuit terminal 3
• Body Control Module: Driver Door Ajar Switch = Active
• Keyless Entry Control Module: Driver Door Open Switch = Active
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: M74D Window Motor - Driver or K84 Keyless Entry Control
Module
• Signal circuit terminal 2 Component harness & Signal circuit terminal 9 X1 K84 Keyless
Entry Control Module
• Signal circuit terminal 1 Component harness & Signal circuit terminal 6 M74D Window
Motor - Driver
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: M74D Window Motor - Driver or K84 Keyless
Entry Control Module
8. Test or replace the component: A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
Test 2

Ground Connection
138 of 239
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Ajar Switch = Inactive
Ground
terminal 3
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Ajar Switch = Active
Ground
Signal circuit terminal 6 M74P Window Motor - Passenger
8. Test or replace the component: A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger
Test 3

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear
Ground Connection
139 of 239
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Left Rear Door Ajar Switch = Inactive
Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
terminal 3
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Left Rear Door Ajar Switch = Active
Ground
Terminal 2 S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: S79LR Window Switch - Left Rear
8. Test or replace the component: A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear
Test 4

2. Disconnect the electrical connector: A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear
Ground Connection
140 of 239
5. Verify the scan tool parameter: Right Rear Door Ajar Switch = Inactive
Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
terminal 3
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Right Rear Door Ajar Switch = Active
Ground
Terminal 2 S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: S79RR Window Switch - Right Rear
8. Test or replace the component: A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear
Component Testing
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: A23 Door Latch Assembly
• A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver Signal terminal 1 & Ground terminal 3 - The switch is in the
open position.
• A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger Signal terminal 5 & Ground terminal 3 - The switch is in
the open position.
• A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear Signal terminal 1 & Ground terminal 3 - The switch is in
141 of 239
the open position.
• A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear Signal terminal 5 & Ground terminal 3 - The switch is

• A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver Signal terminal 1 & Ground terminal 3 - The switch is in the
closed position.
• A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger Signal terminal 5 & Ground terminal 3 - The switch is in
the closed position.
• A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear Signal terminal 1 & Ground terminal 3 - The switch is in
the closed position.
• A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear Signal terminal 5 & Ground terminal 3 - The switch is

5. All OK.
Repair Instructions

POWER DOOR LOCK KEY CYLINDER SWITCHES MALFUNCTION

Check - Vehicle
142 of 239
Signal - Terminal 4 A23D Door
1* 1 1 -
Latch Assembly - Driver
Ground - 1 - -
* All Doors Lock Malfunction = Intermittent
1. B29D Door Lock Key Cylinder Switch - Driver = Inoperative
Circuit Description
Signal
connected to 12 V.
The S79D sends a serial data message to the K9 indicating
the A23 function that has been requested.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
143 of 239
2. Verify the component activates: A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear & A23P Door Latch Assembly
- Passenger & A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear = Unlock

3. Operate the component: B29D Door Lock Key Cylinder Switch - Driver - Turn the ignition key to the
LOCK position.
4. Verify the component activates: A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear & A23P Door Latch Assembly
- Passenger & A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear = Lock

5. All OK.

Ground Connection
4. Connect the electrical connector: A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
6. Connect a test lamp between the test points: Signal circuit terminal 14 & B+
7. Operate the component: B29D Door Lock Key Cylinder Switch - Driver - Lock & Unlock

Ground
144 of 239
Terminal 4 A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
If less than 2 ohms - Replace the component: A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
Component Testing


5. All OK.
Repair Instructions

POWER DOOR LOCKS MALFUNCTION

145 of 239
Check - Vehicle

B3125 02,
B3125 02, B3130
B+ - K9 Body Control Module B3130 02, - -
02, B3135 02
B3135 02
B3150 00 2 2 -
B3140 00 3 2 -
B3155 00 4 4 -
B3145 00 5 5 -
B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 7 B3130 01, -
Assembly - Driver
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 8 B3130 01, -
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 9 B3130 01, -
B3135 02 B3135 01
B3125 02, B3125 01,
B3130 02, 10 B3130 01, -
B3135 02 B3135 01
Ground - S13P Door Lock
- 6 - -
Switch - Passenger
Ground - S13D Door Lock
- 1 - -
Switch - Driver
Ground - K9 Body Control
- 7, 8, 9, 10 - -
Module
1. S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver = Inoperative
2. Driver Door Lock Switch = Inoperative
3. Driver Door Unlock Switch = Inoperative
4. Passenger Door Lock Switch = Inoperative
5. Passenger Door Unlock Switch = Inoperative
6. S13P Door Lock Switch - Passenger = Inoperative
146 of 239
Circuit Description
B+ - K9 Body Control Module Supplied from a fuse.
Signal
connected to 12 V.
Ground - S13 Door Lock Switch Chassis Ground
Ground - K9 Body Control Module Chassis Ground
• The switch has a normally open contact.
S13 Door Lock Switch • When the switch is activated, the signal circuit to the
Schematic Reference

• Circuit Testing
147 of 239
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference


Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Lock Switch = Lock & Unlock


Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Lock Switch = Lock & Unlock


148 of 239

7. All OK.
Test 1

Ground Connection
149 of 239
terminal 4
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Lock Switch = Lock
Ground
terminal 4
9. Verify the scan tool parameter: Driver Door Lock Switch = Unlock
Ground
Test 2
150 of 239

Ground Connection
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X6 or X7 K9 Body Control Module
terminal 4
7. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Lock Switch = Lock
Ground
151 of 239
terminal 4
9. Verify the scan tool parameter: Passenger Door Lock Switch = Unlock
Ground
Test 3
Test or replace the component: A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver
• Control circuit terminal 7 A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver & Terminal 1 X6 Control module
harness
• Control circuit terminal 8 A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver & Terminal 4 X6 Control module
harness
9. Test or replace the component: K9 Body Control Module
152 of 239
Test 4

3. Connect a test lamp between the test points:
• A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger Control circuit terminal 9 & Control circuit terminal 8
• A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear Control circuit terminal 7 & Control circuit terminal 8
• A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear Control circuit terminal 9 & Control circuit terminal 8
Test or replace the component: A23 Door Latch Assembly
• Control circuit terminal 7 A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear & Terminal 2 X6 Control
module harness
• Control circuit terminal 8 A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear & Terminal 4 X6 Control
module harness
• Control circuit terminal 8 A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger & Terminal 4 X6 Control
module harness
• Control circuit terminal 9 A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger & Terminal 2 X6 Control
module harness
• Control circuit terminal 8 A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear & Terminal 4 X6 Control
module harness
• Control circuit terminal 9 A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear & Terminal 2 X6 Control
module harness
10. Test or replace the component: K9 Body Control Module
Test 5
153 of 239
2. Disconnect the electrical connector: X2 & X6 K9 Body Control Module
Connection
5. Verify a test lamp turns On between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 4 X2 & Ground
2. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: B+ circuit terminal 4 X2 & Output terminal Fuse
• Control circuit terminal 1 X6 K9 Body Control Module & Ground
If infinite resistance - Replace the component: A23 Door Latch Assembly
8. Disconnect the electrical connector: A23 Door Latch Assembly
9. Test for less than 2 ohms between the test points: Control circuit terminal 8 A23 Door Latch Assembly &
154 of 239
If greater than 1 V
Go to next step: If 1 V or less


Component Testing
S13 Door Lock Switch - Test
2. Disconnect the appropriate electrical connector: S13 Door Lock Switch
• Signal terminal 2 & Ground terminal 4 - Lock Switch - Not Pressed
• Signal terminal 3 & Ground terminal 4 - Unlock Switch - Not Pressed

4. Test for less than 3 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 2 & Ground terminal 4 - Lock Switch -
Pressed

5. Test for less than 3 ohms between the test points: Signal terminal 3 & Ground terminal 4 - Unlock Switch
155 of 239
- Pressed

6. All OK.
A23 Door Latch Assembly
3. Connect a 25 A fused jumper wire between the test points: Control terminal 8 & B+


• A23D Door Latch Assembly - Driver: Control terminal 7 & Ground
• A23P Door Latch Assembly - Passenger: Control terminal 9 & Ground
• A23LR Door Latch Assembly - Left Rear: Control terminal 7 & Ground
• A23RR Door Latch Assembly - Right Rear: Control terminal 9 & Ground

6. All OK.
Repair Instructions

156 of 239
POWER LIFTGATE MALFUNCTION

U0230 00 U0230 00 - -
Terminal 4 X2
B396A 04 B396A 04 - -
Terminal 3 X2
Liftgate Motor Open Control B396A 02 B396A 04 B396A 01 -
Liftgate Motor Close Control B396A 02 B396A 04 B396A 01 -
Liftgate Position Sensor 12 V
B153E 02 B153E 04 - -
Reference Voltage
B153E 02, B153E 04, B153E B153E 01,
Liftgate Position Sensor 1 Signal B153E 08
B153E 08 08 B153E 08
B153E 02, B153E 04, B153E B153E 01,
Liftgate Position Sensor 2 Signal B153E 08
B153E 08 08 B153E 08
Liftgate Position Sensor Low
- B153E 04 - -
Reference
Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch
3 B153A 08 - -
Signal
Liftgate Ajar Switch Signal 3 2 - -
Liftgate Latch Sector Switch
B153A 08 1 - -
Signal
Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch
B153A 05 B153A 08 - -
Signal
B24A0 05,
Liftgate Latch Low Reference - - -
B153A 08
1. Liftgate Will Not Unlatch/Open
2. Liftgate Will Unlatch But Will Not Power Open Or Power Close
3. Liftgate Will Unlatch But Will Not Power Open
The unlatch, ratchet, pawl, and sector switches are part of the liftgate latch assembly and are used by the liftgate
control module to determine the state of the latch during the process of cinching or unlatching. The ratchet and
pawl switches will be inactive when the primary and secondary latches are latched, and the sector switch will be
active during the power cinch function. Each of the latch switch signal circuits are supplied signal through a
resistor and monitored within the liftgate control module. The latch switches share a common low reference
circuit from the liftgate control module and when the switch contacts close, the signal circuit goes low and the
liftgate control module determines the switch to be active.
157 of 239
The liftgate control module continuously monitors power liftgate operation and calculates its location and
direction of travel using 2 Hall effect sensors that are part of the liftgate motor. The Hall effect sensors are 12 V
3-wire sensors and are supplied with a 12 V reference, ground and signal circuits from the liftgate control
module. The Hall effect sensor signal circuits are referenced from voltage within the liftgate control module and
pulsed low by the Hall effect sensors.
Diagnostic Aids
• Check the calibration software installed on the liftgate control module prior to performing extensive
diagnostics, vehicles with the handsfree liftgate control option (TC2) require specific calibration software.
Incorrect calibration software may cause the power liftgate system to become inoperative without setting
any DTCs
• Remote power liftgate functions may be disabled if a second keyless entry transmitter is inside the vehicle
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
158 of 239
3. Verify the liftgate will release and smoothly power open when commanding Liftgate Open with a scan
tool.
Refer to Liftgate Latch Release/Cinch Malfunction
If the liftgate releases but does not open
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Liftgate Power Open/Close Malfunction
If the liftgate releases but performs an erratic power open/close motion
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Liftgate Erratic Operation

4. Verify the liftgate will smoothly power close when commanding Liftgate Close with a scan tool.
If the liftgate does not power close
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Liftgate Power Open/Close Malfunction
If the liftgate performs an erratic open/close motion
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Liftgate Erratic Operation
Go to next step: If the liftgate does smoothly power close

5. All OK.
Liftgate Power Open/Close Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X2 harness connector at the K39 Liftgate Control Module. Ignition ON
If infinite resistance, replace the K39 Liftgate Control Module.
159 of 239
3. Ignition OFF, connect the X2 harness connector at the K39 Liftgate Control Module and disconnect the
harness connector at the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly. Ignition ON
4. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch parameter is Closed.
If not Closed
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K39 Liftgate Control Module.
Go to next step: If Closed
terminal 6.
6. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Latch Pawl Switch parameter is Open
If not Open
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K39 Liftgate Control Module, ignition ON.
Go to next step: If Open
7. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch parameter is Closed.
If not Closed
Go to next step: If Closed
terminal 6.
9. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Latch Ratchet Switch parameter is Open
If not Open
Go to next step: If Open
160 of 239
10. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Latch Sector Switch parameter is Inactive.
If not Inactive
terminal 6.
12. Verify the scan tool Liftgate Latch Sector Switch parameter is Active
If not Active
13. Verify the scan tool Body Control Module Rear Closure Ajar Switch parameter is Inactive
If not Inactive
terminal 6.
15. Verify the scan tool Body Control Module Rear Closure Ajar Switch parameter is Active
If not Active
1. Ignition OFF, remove the 3 A fused jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K39
Liftgate Control Module, ignition ON.
16. Test or replace the A23C Liftgate Latch Assembly.
161 of 239
Liftgate Erratic Operation
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the M17 Liftgate Motor
If 20 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Test for greater than 11 V between the 12 V reference circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If 11 V or less
4. Test for greater than 11 V between the Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit terminal 4 and ground.
If 11 V or less
2. Test for infinite resistance between the Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit and ground.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the Position Sensor Signal 1 circuit end to end.
5. Test for greater than 11 V between the Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit terminal 7 and ground.
If 11 V or less
2. Test for infinite resistance between the Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit and ground.
3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the Position Sensor Signal 2 circuit end to end.
162 of 239
6. Replace the M17 Liftgate Motor Assembly.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for the liftgate control module replacement, setup and programming
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
FRONT SIDE DOOR INSIDE HANDLE CABLE REPLACEMENT

Front Side Door Latch Replacement
Front Side Door Inside Handle Cable
Procedure
1 1. Using the appropriate tool, open the access cover to release the cable from the latch
assembly.
2. Ensure that the door lock system operates properly before installing the door trim.
REAR SIDE DOOR INSIDE HANDLE CABLE REPLACEMENT
163 of 239
Rear Side Door Latch Replacement
Rear Side Door Inside Handle Cable
Procedure
1 1. Using the appropriate tool, open the access cover to view the cable end.
2. Release the cable from the latch assembly.
3. Ensure that the door lock system operates properly before installing the door trim.
FRONT SIDE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
164 of 239
NOTE: When performing this procedure the latch and handle bracket assembly
Must be removed from the vehicle to replace the door lock cylinder
assembly.
Front Side Door Latch (2) - Remove - Front Side Door Latch Replacement
2.
Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Rod (1) - Remove
3.
165 of 239
From the back side of the outside handle bracket, use a suitable tool, push up and down on the lock
cylinder retainers (1) releasing the retainer from the cylinder (2).
4.
With the lock cylinder retainer (1) removed, pull the lock cylinder (2) rearward releasing it from the
handle bracket (3).
1.
166 of 239
NOTE: Ensure that the door lock cylinder is engage all the way into the side door
handle locator tabs. Insert the key into the door lock cylinder, turn left to
right checking for binding before install the assembly to the vehicle.
Install the lock cylinder retainer (1) to the front side door outside handle bracket assembly (3).
2. Install the door lock cylinder (2) in the front side door outside handle bracket, push forward locking the
lock cylinder (2) into the lock cylinder retainer.
3.
Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Rod (1) - Install
4.
167 of 239
Front Side Door Latch (2) - Install - Front Side Door Latch Replacement
5. Ensure that the door lock system operates properly before installing the trim.
LIFTGATE CALIBRATION
Liftgate Relearn
NOTE: To ensure proper relearning of the liftgate, the liftgate assembly must be at
room temperature during the relearn process.
NOTE: DTC B1019 00 will set automatically as an indicator that the system is in learn
mode and not as a fault indicator. Once the travel limits are learned by the
liftgate module, the liftgate module will exit learn mode and DTC B1019 00
become a history code.
If any portion of the power liftgate assembly is replaced, repaired or disassembled, perform the following
liftgate relearn procedure:
1. Connect the scan tool to the vehicle.

2. Select Module Diagnosis:
3. Select K39 Liftgate Control Module:
4. Select Configuration/Reset Functions:
5. Select Liftgate Maximum Open Position Learn:
6. Press "Enter" and follow the on screen instructions:
Garage Height Calibration
If any portion of the power liftgate assembly is replaced, repaired or disassembled, perform the following
168 of 239
liftgate relearn procedure:
1. Ensure that the rotary switch on the overhead console or driver door panel is set to 3/4.
2. Press the liftgate handle switch and allow the liftgate to power open.
3. Stop movement at the desired height by pressing any operation switch.
4. If required, manually move the stopped liftgate to the desired position.
NOTE: The opening height of the liftgate should be positioned approximately

parallel with the roof, the liftgate control module will reject the setting if
the liftgate is positioned too low.
5. Press and hold the liftgate close switch for at least 3 seconds. The tail lights will flash if the setting has
been successfully programmed.
6. Close the liftgate completely using one of the following switches:
• The rotary switch on the overhead console or driver door panel
• The liftgate close switch on the liftgate
• The remote control switch on the keyless entry transmitter
OPENING THE LIFTGATE WITHOUT ELECTRICAL POWER
1.
NOTE: Gain access to the liftgate from inside vehicle.
Using a flat bladed tool, release the latch cover (1) to access the rear latch.
2.
169 of 239
NOTE: • Gate may not open at this point.
• Rotation to release latch should be approximately 30 degrees.
Excessive rotation can cause damage to the latch.
Insert a flat bladed service type tool into the square hole (1) and turn it counterclockwise until the primary
latch releases.
3.
NOTE: The latch does not need to be restaged.
To disengage the gear train of the latch, use a small flat blade tool to push the white plastic lever (1) all
the way to the right and at the same time pushing on the liftgate to release the secondary latch.
FRONT SIDE DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1. Front Side Door Water Deflector - Remove - Front Side Door Water Deflector Replacement
2.
170 of 239
Front Side Door Access Hole Cover (1) - Remove
NOTE: • USE HAND TOOL ONLY. Using a battery operated gun or power tool
can BREAK the component.
• Loosen the Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Screw
enough to allow the Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover to
be removed.
3. Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Screw (2) - Loosen
4.
Pull the front side door outside handle (1) to the open position.
5.
171 of 239
Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Bezel (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Bezel
Replacement
6.
Disconnect the electrical connector. (1)
7.
172 of 239
Slide the front side door outside handle (1) rearward and then outwards in a swing motion releasing the
rear part of the handle from the front side door outside handle bracket.
8.
Swing the front part of the front side door outside handle (1) to remove.
1.
Install the front part of the front side door outside handle (1) into the front side door outside handle
bracket.
2.
173 of 239
Install the rear part of the front side door outside handle (1) into the front side door outside handle bracket
and slide the front side door outside handle forward.
3.
Connect the electrical connector. (1)
4.
174 of 239
Pull the front side door outside handle (1) to the open position.
5.
Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Bezel (1) - Install - Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Bezel Replacement
6.
Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Screw (2) - Tighten to 4 N.m (35 lb in)
7. Front Side Door Access Hole Cover (1) - Install

8. Front Side Door Water Deflector - Install - Front Side Door Water Deflector Replacement
FRONT SIDE DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
175 of 239
Front Side Door Outside Handle (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
2.
Front Side Door Outside Handle Bracket Screw (1) - Remove
3.
176 of 239
Front Side Door Lock Rod (1) - Remove
4. Front Side Door Lock Cylinder (2) - Remove
5.
Lower the front side door outside handle bracket (1) to the inside door opening.
6.
177 of 239
Remove the front side door outside cable (1) from the retainers (2).
7.
Remove the front side door outside handle bracket cable (1) from the counter balance (2).
NOTE: It may be necessary to transfer the wire harness retainers from the old
handle bracket.
178 of 239
1.
Reset the front side door outside handle bracket counter balance as follows:
1. The outside door handle Can Not be installed until the counter balance is reset.
2. Grasp the front side door outside handle bracket (1) with one hand.
3. From the back side of the counter balance (2) push forward on the counter balance until it can be
held in place using the bracket clip (3).
2.
179 of 239
Install the front side door outside handle bracket cable (1) to the counter balance (2).
3.
Install the front side door outside cable (1) into the retainers (2).
4.
180 of 239
Install the front side door lock rod (1) to the front side door lock cylinder (2).
5.
Raise the front side door outside handle bracket (1) up to the outside door opening.
6.
181 of 239
Front Side Door Outside Handle Bracket Screw (1) - Install and tighten to 5 N.m (44 lb in)
7.
NOTE: • Ensure that the counter balance is reset and locked in the detent of
the handle bracket. The counter balance Can Not be reset after the
handle bracket has been reinstalled in the door.
182 of 239
• Bracket should be slid full rearward prior to tightening bracket screw.
Front Side Door Outside Handle (1) - Install - Front Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
8. Ensure the door system operates properly.
FRONT SIDE DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE CABLE REPLACEMENT

Front Side Door Outside Handle Cable
Procedure
1 1. Remove the front side door outside handle cable from the handle retainers.
2. Release the cable from the back of the latch assembly.
3. Remove the front side door outside handle cable from the front side door outside
handle bracket.
REAR SIDE DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE BRACKET REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
2. Rear Side Door Outside Handle - Remove - Rear Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
3.
183 of 239
Remove the rear side door outside handle bracket screw (1) that retains the rear side door outside handle
bracket to the door panel.
4.
Pull the rear side door outside handle bracket (3) down to the inside door opening.
5. Remove the cable (2) from the rear side door outside handle bracket retainers (1) and counter balance (4).
6. Rear Side Door Outside Handle Bracket (3) - Remove
1.
184 of 239
Set the rear side door outside handle bracket counter balance (1) as follows:
1. The outside door handle Can Not be installed until the counter balance (1) is reset.
2. Grasp the front side door outside handle bracket (3) with one hand.
3. From the back side of the counter balance (1) push forward on the counter balance until it can be
held in place using the bracket clip (2).
2.
Install the rear side door outside handle bracket cable (2) to the counter balance (4).
3. Install the rear side door outside handle bracket cable (2) into the rear side door outside handle bracket
retainers (1).
4. Rear Side Door Outside Handle Bracket (3) - Install
5.
185 of 239
NOTE: • Ensure that the counter balance is reset and locked in the detent of
the handle bracket. The counter balance Can Not be reset after the
latch and handle bracket has been reinstalled in the door.
• Bracket should be slid full rearward prior to tightening bracket screw.
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Bracket Screw (1) - Install and tighten to 4.7 N.m (42 lb in)
6. Rear Side Door Outside Handle - Install - Rear Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
8. Ensure the door system operates properly before installing the door trim.
LIFTGATE LATCH REPLACEMENT

Liftgate Lower Trim Finish Panel Replacement
186 of 239
Liftgate Latch Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Liftgate Latch
2 Procedure
REAR SIDE DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
2.
Rear Side Door Access Hole Cover (1) - Remove
• Loosen the Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Screw
enough to allow the Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Bezel to
be removed.
3. Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Screw (2) - Loosen
4.
187 of 239
Pull the rear side door outside handle (1) to the open position.
5.
Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening
Cover Replacement
6.
188 of 239
Disconnect the electrical connector. (1)
7.
Slide the rear side door outside handle (1) rearward and then outwards in a swing motion releasing the
rear part of the handle from the rear side door outside handle bracket.
8.
Swing the front part of the rear side door outside handle (1) to remove.
1.
189 of 239
Install the front part of the rear side door outside handle (1) into the rear side door outside handle bracket.
2.
Install the rear part of the rear side door outside handle (1) into the rear side door outside handle bracket
and slide the rear side door outside handle forward.
3.
190 of 239
Connect the electrical connector. (1)
4.
Pull the rear side door outside handle (1) to the open position.
5.
Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening
Cover Replacement
6.
191 of 239
Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover Screw (2) - Tighten to 4 N.m (35 lb in)
7. Rear Side Door Access Hole Cover (1) - Install

REAR SIDE DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE CABLE REPLACEMENT

Rear Side Door Latch Replacement
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Cable
Procedure
1 1. Remove the rear side door outside handle cable from the handle retainers.
2. Release the cable from the back of the latch assembly.
3. Remove the rear side door outside handle cable from the rear side door outside handle
192 of 239
bracket.
FRONT SIDE DOOR LATCH REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
2.
Front Side Door Window Regulator (2) - Remove - Front Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
3.
193 of 239
Front Side Door Window Rear Channel Retainer (2) - Remove - Front Side Door Window Channel
4.
Front Side Door Outside Handle Bracket (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Outside Handle Bracket
Replacement
194 of 239
6.
Fig. 1: Identifying Front Side Door Latch Bolts And Screw With Loosening Sequence And
Tightening Sequence
Front Side Door Latch Bolt (1) - Remove [3x]
7. Front Side Door Latch Screw (2) - Remove
8.
195 of 239
Front Door Outside Handle Bracket (1) - Remove
9. Front Side Door Latch (2) - Remove
10.
Front Side Door Outside Handle Cable (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Outside Handle Cable
Replacement
11.
Front Side Door Inside Handle Cable (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Inside Handle Cable
Replacement
1.
196 of 239
Front Side Door Inside Handle Cable (1) - Install - Front Side Door Inside Handle Cable Replacement
2.
Front Side Door Outside Handle Cable (1) - Install - Front Side Door Outside Handle Cable
Replacement
197 of 239
3.
Fig. 2: Identifying Front Side Door Latch Bolts And Screw With Loosening Sequence And
Tightening Sequence
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution
NOTE: Install and torque the four latch bolts in proper sequence to prevent
damage to the latch mechanism.
Front Side Door Latch Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [3x] to 9 N.m (80 lb in)
4. Front Side Door Latch Screw (2) - Install and tighten to 11 N.m (97 lb in)
6.
198 of 239
Front Side Door Outside Handle Bracket (1) - Install - Front Side Door Outside Handle Bracket
Replacement
7.
Front Side Door Window Rear Channel Retainer (2) - Install - Front Side Door Window Channel
8.
199 of 239
Front Side Door Window Regulator (2) - Install - Front Side Door Window Regulator Replacement
9.
10. Inspect the door latch and outside handle for proper operation before installing the door trim.
REAR SIDE DOOR LATCH REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
200 of 239
Rear Side Door Water Deflector (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Water Deflector Replacement
2.
Rear Side Door Window Channel Rear Retainer Rear Bolt (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Window
Weatherstrip Replacement
3.
201 of 239
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Bracket (3) - Remove - Rear Side Door Outside Handle Bracket
Replacement
4.
Fig. 3: Identifying Rear Side Door Latch Bolts And Screw With Loosening Sequence And
Tightening Sequence
Rear Side Door Latch Bolt (1) - Remove [3x]
5. Rear Side Door Latch Screw (2) - Remove

6. Rear Side Door Latch - Remove
7.
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Cable (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Outside Handle Cable
202 of 239
Replacement
8.
Rear Side Door Inside Handle Cable (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Inside Handle Cable Replacement
1.
Rear Side Door Inside Handle Cable (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Inside Handle Cable Replacement
2.
203 of 239
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Cable (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Outside Handle Cable
Replacement
3. Rear Side Door Latch - Install
4.
Fig. 4: Identifying Rear Side Door Latch Bolts And Screw With Loosening Sequence And
Tightening Sequence
CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution
NOTE: Tighten in proper sequence to prevent damage to the latch mechanism.
204 of 239
Rear Side Door Latch Bolt (1) - Install and tighten [3x] to 9 N.m (80 lb in)
5. Rear Side Door Latch Screw (2) - Install and tighten to 11 N.m (97 lb in)
6.
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Bracket (3) - Install - Rear Side Door Outside Handle Bracket
Replacement
7.
Rear Side Door Window Channel Rear Retainer Rear Bolt (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Window
Weatherstrip Replacement
8. Connect all electrical connectors.
9.
205 of 239
Rear Side Door Water Deflector (1) - Install - Rear Side Door Water Deflector Replacement
10. Inspect the door latch, window and outside handle for proper operation before installing the door trim.
REAR SIDE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER OPENING COVER REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
Rear Side Door Access Hole Cover (1) - Remove
• Around 10 to 12 rotations is enough to allow the Front Side Door
Outside Handle Lock Cylinder to be removed.
2. Rear side door outside handle lock cylinder screw (2) - Loosen
3.
206 of 239
Pull the rear side door outside handle (1) out to the open position.
4.
Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover (1) - Remove
1.
207 of 239
Pull the door handle (1) out to the open position.
2.
Rear Side Door Lock Cylinder Opening Cover (1) - Install
3.
Place the rear side door outside handle (1) in the closed position.
4.
208 of 239
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Lock Cylinder Screw (2) - Tighten to 4.7 N.m (42 lb in)
5. Rear Side Door Access Hole Cover (1) - Install
FRONT SIDE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER BEZEL REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1.
Front Side Door Access Hole Cover (1) - Remove
• Around 10 to 12 rotations is enough to allow the Front Side Door
Outside Handle Lock Cylinder to be removed.
2. Front Side Door Outside Handle Lock Cylinder Screw (2) - Loosen
3.
209 of 239
4.
Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Bezel (1) - Remove
1.
210 of 239
2.
Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Bezel (1) - Install
3.
Place the Front Side Door Outside Handle (1) in the closed position.
4.
211 of 239
Front Side Door Outside Handle Lock Cylinder Screw (2) - Tighten to 4.7 N.m (42 lb in)
5. Front Side Door Access Hole Cover (1) - Install
REAR GATE MODULE REPLACEMENT

Remove the left side quarter lower rear trim panel. Quarter Lower Rear Trim Panel Replacement
212 of 239
Accessory and Liftgate Control Module
Procedure

References
REAR CLOSURE HANDS FREE MODULE REPLACEMENT

Rear Closure Hands Free Sensor Shield Replacement
Rear Closure Hands Free Module
Procedure
1
1. Disconnect all electrical connectors.
REAR CLOSURE HANDS FREE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
213 of 239
Rear Closure Hands Free Sensor
Procedure
2. Disengage the wire at the connector, disengage opposite end, then pull back on each
tab, and apply slight force on sensor to push the sensor out of the tabs.
REAR CLOSURE HANDS FREE LOWER SENSOR REPLACEMENT

214 of 239
Rear Closure Hands Free Lower Sensor
Procedure
2. Disengage the wire at the connector, disengage opposite end, then pull back on each
tab, and apply slight force on sensor to push the sensor out of the tabs.
REAR CLOSURE HANDS FREE SENSOR SHIELD REPLACEMENT

Rear Closure Hands Free Sensor Shield Bolt
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Rear Closure Hands Free Sensor Shield
Procedure
2
Release the retainer tab at the bottom of the shield and pull up and away form the rear
bumper fascia.
FRONT SIDE DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE INSERT REPLACEMENT
215 of 239
Front Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
Front Side Door Outside Handle Insert Bolt
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Front Side Door Outside Handle Insert
Procedure
2 1. Using an appropriate tool, release the front side door outside handle insert from the
front side door outside handle.
2. Pass the electrical connector through the grommet of the front side door outside
handle.
FRONT SIDE DOOR LOCKING ROD CLIP REPLACEMENT
216 of 239
Front Side Door Locking Rod Clip
Procedure
1 1. Reposition the front side door locking rod to gain access to the front side door locking
rod clip.
2. Twist the front side door locking rod clip and pull away from door.
FRONT SIDE DOOR LOCKING ROD KNOB REPLACEMENT

217 of 239
Front Side Door Locking Rod Knob
1 Procedure
Turn the locking rod down, while twisting it out to releasing it from the latch.
FRONT SIDE DOOR LOCK CYLINDER ROD REPLACEMENT

Front Side Door Lock Cylinder Rod
Procedure
1 1. Remove the front side door lock cylinder rod from the lock cylinder by turning the
housing bracket clockwise.
2. Release the lock cylinder rod from the latch only. Do NOT remove the door handle
cables from the latch.
LIFTGATE POWER ASSIST ACTUATOR REPLACEMENT
218 of 239
Lower the rear of the headliner to access the connector. Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (With
C3U) , or Headlining Trim Panel Replacement (Without C3U)
Liftgate Power Assist Actuator
WARNING:
When a lift
gate hold
open device
is being
removed or
installed,
provide
alternate
support to
avoid the
possibility of
damage to
1 the vehicle
or personal
injury.
CAUTION:
DO NOT
exceed the
limit of the
liftgate
power assist
actuator ball
socket
joint's free
motion
during
219 of 239
installation
to prevent
possibility of
damage to
the actuator.
Procedure
1. Disconnect the electrical.

2. Disconnect the pass through grommet.
3. Release the strut retainers/clips using a small flat bladed tool to retract clip slightly
while removing actuator end from stud.
4. Install the actuator to the body bracket pivot first and then install to the liftgate pivot.
5. Ensure the retainer/clip is fully seated when actuator is reinstalled. If clip cannot be
fully seated, a new actuator should be installed.
6. If any portion of the power liftgate assembly is replaced, repaired or disassembled,
perform the following liftgate calibration procedure. Liftgate Calibration
REAR SIDE DOOR LOCKING ROD KNOB REPLACEMENT

Rear Side Door Trim Replacement
Rear Side Door Locking Rod Knob
1 Procedure
Turn the locking rod down, while twisting it out to releasing it from the latch.
REAR SIDE DOOR OUTSIDE HANDLE INSERT REPLACEMENT
220 of 239
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Replacement
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Insert Screw
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
1.5 N.m (13 lb in)
Rear Side Door Outside Handle Insert
Procedure
2
Using the appropriate tool, release the rear side door outside handle insert from the rear side
door outside handle.
LIFTGATE SIDE SENSOR REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE
221 of 239
1. Liftgate Power Assist Actuator Replacement

2. Liftgate Upper Side Trim Finish Panel Replacement
1 Liftgate Side Sensor Retainer [7x]

Liftgate Side Sensor
2 Procedure
LIFTGATE SIDE SENSOR REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE

Liftgate Upper Side Trim Finish Panel Replacement
1 Liftgate Side Sensor Retainer [7x]
Liftgate Side Sensor
2 Procedure
DOOR LOCK SWITCH REPLACEMENT - DRIVER SIDE
222 of 239
1. Front Side Door Trim Replacement

2. Reposition insulator, as required.
Door Lock Switch - Driver Side
Procedure
1 1. From the backside of the door trim panel, use a plastic trim tool to gently push in on
the side tabs to release the switch from the front side door trim.
FRONT SIDE DOOR LATCH STRIKER COVER REPLACEMENT

Open the front side door.
223 of 239
Front Side Door Latch Striker Cover
Procedure
1 1. Using the appropriate tool, place the tool between the outboard side of cover and pull
upward from the striker.
2. Align the inboard tabs on the rear side door lock striker cover to the outboard side of
the striker and press into place.
FRONT SIDE DOOR LOCK STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
To determine if striker adjustment is required, proceed as follows:
1.
Ensure the door is properly aligned within the door opening before proceeding with the lock striker
adjustment.
2. Close the door onto the striker (1) and note if the door drags on the striker causing the door to move
upward or downward upon contact with the striker. Also note the closing effort to fully engage the lock.
3.
224 of 239
Front Side Door Latch Striker Cover (1) - Remove - Front Side Door Latch Striker Cover
Replacement
4. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for reference of the original position. Loosen the striker.
5. Move the striker to eliminate drag on the striker and door lock and to achieve the proper door position
within the door opening. Start with the up/down position, then position the striker to achieve proper
alignment to the door opening. Set the in/out adjustment for the proper door seal engagement making sure
the door closing efforts are correct.
6. Tighten the front side door lock striker screws to 22 N.m (16 lb ft).
FRONT SIDE DOOR LOCK STRIKER REPLACEMENT

Front Side Door Latch Striker Cover Replacement
Front Side Door Lock Striker Screw [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Front Side Door Lock Striker
Procedure
2
After installation, adjust door lock striker, if needed. Front Side Door Lock Striker
Adjustment
LIFTGATE LATCH STRIKER REPLACEMENT
225 of 239
Liftgate Lock Striker Cover Replacement
Liftgate Latch Striker Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Liftgate Latch Striker
Procedure
2
Mark the location of the striker with a grease pencil to ensure proper alignment during
installation.
REAR SIDE DOOR LOCK STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
To determine if striker adjustment is required, proceed as follows:
1.
226 of 239
NOTE: Ensure the door is properly aligned within the door opening before
proceeding with the lock striker adjustment.
Close the door onto the striker (1) and note if the door drags on the striker causing the door to move
upward or downward upon contact with the striker. Also note the closing effort to fully engage the lock.
2.
Rear Side Door Lock Striker Cover (1) - Remove - Rear Side Door Lock Striker Cover Replacement
3. Using a grease pencil, mark around the striker for reference of the original position. Loosen the striker.
4. Move the striker to eliminate drag on the striker and door lock and to achieve the proper door position
within the door opening. Start with the up/down position, then position the striker to achieve proper
alignment to the door opening. Set the in/out adjustment for the proper door seal engagement making sure
the door closing efforts are correct.
5. Tighten the rear side door lock striker screws to 22 N.m (16 lb ft).
227 of 239
REAR SIDE DOOR LOCK STRIKER REPLACEMENT

Rear Side Door Lock Striker Cover Replacement
Rear Side Door Lock Striker Screw [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
22 N.m (16 lb ft)
Rear Side Door Lock Striker
2 Procedure
Adjust the rear side door lock striker if needed. Rear Side Door Lock Striker Adjustment
REAR SIDE DOOR LOCK STRIKER COVER REPLACEMENT
228 of 239
Open the rear side door.
Rear Side Door Lock Striker Cover
Procedure
1 1. Using the appropriate tool, place the tool between the outboard side of cover and pull
upward from the striker.
2. Align the inboard tabs on the rear side door lock striker cover to the outboard side of
the striker and press into place.
LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH REPLACEMENT - INTERIOR
229 of 239
Liftgate Release Switch - Interior
Procedure
LIFTGATE CLOSE SWITCH REPLACEMENT

Liftgate Trim Finish Panel Pull Cup Replacement
Liftgate Close Switch
Procedure
2. Release the liftgate close switch retainers and push out from the liftgate trim finish
panel pull cup.
DOOR LOCK SWITCH REPLACEMENT - PASSENGER FRONT
230 of 239
1. Front Side Door Trim Replacement

2. Reposition insulator, as required.
Door Lock Switch - Passenger Front
Procedure

DOOR AJAR INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Door Ajar Indicator System Components
The door ajar indicator system consists of the following components:

• Driver door latch
• Passenger door latch
• Left rear door latch
• Right rear door latch
• Driver window motor (AXG)
• Driver window switch (AEC)
• Passenger window motor (AEF)
• Passenger window switch (AED)
231 of 239
• Left rear window switch
• Right rear window switch
Door Ajar System (Standard and Optional)
It is the power window system that monitors the status of the door ajar switches and either the power window
motors or the power window switches will report the status of the door ajar switches to the body control body
control module depending upon how the vehicle is configured.
Fig. 5: Identifying Door Ajar Indicator System Block Diagram (Standard And Optional)

M74D M74D Window Motor - Driver
M74P M74P Window Motor - Passenger
Driver and Passenger Door Ajar (With AXG and AER Power Windows)
The driver and passenger window motors each provide a 12 V signal to their respective door ajar switch signal
circuits. The door ajar switches are integral to each door latch assembly. When a door is opened, the normally
232 of 239
open door ajar switch closes. With the door ajar switch closed, ground is provided to the door ajar switch signal
circuit and the voltage within the signal circuit drops. The window motor will detect the voltage drop and will
send a serial data message to the body control module which will then send a message to the instrument cluster
to command the door ajar message
Fig. 6: Identifying Door Ajar Indicator System Block Diagram (With AXG And AER Power Windows)

S79D S79D Window Switch - Driver
Driver and Passenger Door Ajar (With AEC and AED Power Windows)
The driver and passenger window switches each provide a 12 V signal to their respective door ajar switch signal
circuits. The door ajar switches are integral to each door latch assembly. When a driver or passenger door is
opened, the normally open door ajar switch closes. With the door ajar switch closed, ground is provided to the
door ajar switch signal circuit and the voltage within the signal circuit drops. The window switches will detect
the voltage drop and will send a serial data message to the body control module which will then send a message
to the instrument panel cluster to command the door ajar message.
233 of 239
Rear Door Ajar
The rear window switches each provide a 12 V signal to their respective rear door ajar switch signal circuits.
The door ajar switches are integral to each rear door latch assembly. When a rear door is opened, the normally
open door ajar switch closes. With the door ajar switch closed, ground is provided to the door ajar switch signal
circuit and the voltage within the signal circuit drops. The rear window switches will detect the voltage drop
and will send a serial data message to the body control module which will then send a message to the instrument
panel cluster to command the door ajar message.
FUEL FILL DOOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Fuel Door Unlatch System Components

• Fuel door unlatch actuator
• Fuel door relay
The locking and unlocking of the fuel door is a function of the power door lock system. The fuel door unlatch
actuator is supplied by the door lock signal circuit and the driver door unlock signal circuit which is switched
through the fuel door relay. The fuel door relay coil is controlled by the body control module (BCM). When the
vehicles doors are unlocked, the body control module (BCM) will respond by applying voltage to the fuel door
relay coil control circuit. This energizes the coil causing the switch contacts to close. With the switch contacts
closed, the driver door unlock circuit supplies B+ or ground to the fuel door unlatch actuator, unlocking the fuel
door.
LIFTGATE AJAR INDICATOR DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

LIFTGATE OPEN Indicator
Manual Liftgate
The instrument panel cluster illuminates the LIFTGATE OPEN indicator when the body control module (BCM)
detects that the liftgate is open. The instrument panel cluster receives a serial data message from the BCM
requesting illumination. If the vehicle is in the forward or reverse gear position, the BCM activates an audible
warning.
Power Liftgate
The liftgate control module detects the liftgate ratchet switch is closed to ground indicating the liftgate is open.
The instrument panel cluster receives a serial data message from the liftgate control module indicating the
liftgate ajar status and the driver information center illuminates the LIFTGATE OPEN indicator.
LIFTGATE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

System Description
The power liftgate system consists of the following components:
• Liftgate control module

• Liftgate position sensor (part of the power assist actuator)
• Interior liftgate rotary switch
• Liftgate handle switch
234 of 239
• Liftgate close switch
• Liftgate latch assembly
• Liftgate power assist actuator
• Left and right liftgate object sensors
• Hands free liftgate sensor control module
• Upper and lower liftgate hands free sensors
• Keyless entry transmitter
Operation
The power liftgate can be commanded to power open and power close by the following methods:
• An open or close command from the interior liftgate rotary switch

• An open command from the liftgate handle switch
• A close command from the liftgate close switch
• An open or close request by a signal from the keyless entry transmitter to the remote control door lock
receiver (3/4 or the MAX modes only)
• The kicking motion of a foot and lower leg under the rear fascia - Sensor location may vary depending
upon make and model, refer to owner's manual for the location of the sensors
The liftgate control module will respond to a request by commanding the liftgate latch to release the liftgate and
activate the liftgate motor in the liftgate power assist actuator and raise the liftgate to the open position or to
lower and cinch the liftgate closed.
Power Latch
The liftgate control module continuously monitors power liftgate operation and calculates its location and
direction of travel from an liftgate position sensor (part of the power assist actuator). One input returns the
position of the liftgate relative to the x-axis and y-axis. The liftgate control module then uses these 2 inputs
together to calculate its angle relative to the liftgate. The interior liftgate rotary switch contains resistors which
will incrementally drop the voltage level in the signal circuit as the switch rotated from the OFF position to the
3/4 position or the MAX position, the liftgate control module will detect the change in voltage and will monitor
the x-axis and y-axis as the liftgate is in motion to stop the liftgate parallel to the vehicle roof if the rotary
switch is in the 3/4 setting or to open fully if the rotary switch is in the MAX setting.
The liftgate latch assembly is a bi-directional motor and latch or unlatch operation is the result of the direction
of the motor rotation. The liftgate control module controls the liftgate latch assembly through the control
circuits by supplying power and ground in the appropriate polarity. The motor control circuits are monitored by
the liftgate control module prior to activation for a high or low condition and during motor operation for an
insufficient current flow condition. The unlatch, ratchet, pawl, and sector switches are part of the liftgate latch
assembly and are used by the liftgate control module to determine the state of the latch during the process of
latching or unlatching and will send the status of the latches to the body control module which is used to
determine if the liftgate is closed or ajar. Each of the latch switch signal circuits are supplied battery voltage and
monitored within the liftgate control module. The latch switches share a common low reference circuit from the
liftgate control module and when the switch contacts close the signal circuit goes low and the liftgate control
module determines the switch to be active.
The liftgate handle switch and liftgate close switch signal circuit are each supplied battery voltage by the
235 of 239
liftgate control module. The switches share a common low reference circuit from the liftgate control module
and when the switch is pressed the contacts close and the appropriate signal circuit goes low, the liftgate control
module will detect the voltage drop and will command the liftgate to release and power open or to power close.
For vehicles without the optional passive keyless entry, when the liftgate handle switch is pressed, the liftgate
control module will check the status of the vehicle door locks by sending a serial data message to the body
control module requesting the door lock status. If the vehicle doors are locked, the liftgate control module will
ignore the signal from the liftgate handle switch. If the vehicle doors are unlocked, the liftgate control module
will permit the liftgate to unlatch and power open when the liftgate handle switch is pressed.
For vehicles with the optional passive keyless entry system, the keyless entry control module monitors the
proximity of the keyless entry transmitter. If the liftgate handle switch is pressed and the keyless entry
transmitter is within range, the keyless entry control module will send a serial data message to the liftgate
control module indicating the presence of the keyless entry transmitter and the liftgate control module will
permit the liftgate to unlatch and power open. If the doors are locked and the keyless entry transmitter is not
within range, the liftgate control module will ignore the signal from the liftgate handle switch.
Liftgate Hands Free Sensor
The sensors are located behind the rear fascia (location may vary depending upon make and model, refer to
owner's manual for the location of the sensors) and is designed to detect the motion of the operator's foot by
way of a kicking motion. When the keyless entry transmitter is within 3 feet (1 meter) of the liftgate and the
operator kicks his or her foot under the rear fascia, the sensors will detect the motion of the foot and the lower
leg and if the procedure has been performed correctly the hands free liftgate sensor control module will send a
serial data message to the liftgate control module. The tail lamps will then flash to indicate that the command
has been received and the liftgate will power open or power close. The liftgate hands free functions can be
modified within the Vehicle Personalization:
• Open and close with the kicking motion

• Open only with the kicking motion
• Hands free function disabled
• Keyless Access function disabled
Object Detection
The power liftgate system uses an object detection method which consists of object sensors fixed to both sides
of the liftgate near the seal area. The object sensors consist of an internal fixed resistor and normally open
switch contacts which when closed will bypass the resistor. The signal circuit is supplied 5 V through a resistor
and monitored within the liftgate control module, and during normal power liftgate operation the signal circuit
should remain a fixed value. When an object presses one of the sensors the contacts close and the resistor is
bypassed causing the signal circuit voltage at the module to go low. If the liftgate is being power closed at that
time, the liftgate control module will command the power liftgate to reverse direction. All power close liftgate
operations will be suspended until the obstruction pressing on the object sensor is removed
Manual Liftgate Operation
NOTE: The interior liftgate rotary switch must be in the 3/4 position or the MAX
position for the remote keyless entry transmitter (key fob) to command the
liftgate, The OFF setting will disable the liftgate release of the remote keyless
entry transmitter (key fob)
236 of 239
The operator has the option to disable the power liftgate operations by selecting the "OFF" position on the
interior liftgate rotary switch. The releasing and cinching for the liftgate latch will function normally, however,
the operator must manually pull the liftgate open and push the liftgate closed. All power liftgate operations will
be suspended for as long as the liftgate rotary switch is in the "OFF" position.
POWER DOOR LOCKS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Door Lock System Components
The power door lock system consists of the following components:
• Driver door lock switch

• Passenger door lock switch
• Key cylinder switch
• Driver door latch
• Passenger door latch
• Left rear door latch
• Right rear door latch
• Exterior door handle switches
Fig. 7: Identifying Power Door Locks System Block Diagram

237 of 239
S13D S13D Door Lock Switch - Driver
S13P S13P Door Lock Switch - Passenger
B27RR B27RR Door Handle Switch - Right Rear Exterior
B27LR B27LR Door Handle Switch - Left Rear Exterior
B27P B27P Door Handle Switch - Passenger Exterior
B27D B27D Door Handle Switch - Driver Exterior
Door Lock and Unlock Operation
When the driver or passenger door lock switch is activated in the lock or unlock position, the BCM will receive
a ground signal on either the door lock switch lock or unlock signal circuits.
The BCM, upon receipt of a lock switch lock or unlock signal, will supply battery voltage to the door lock
actuator lock or unlock control circuits. Since the opposite side of the lock actuator is connected to ground
through the other lock actuator control circuit, the doors will then lock or unlock as commanded.
The following three circuits are used to operate the lock:
• Driver door unlock

• Passenger door unlock
• All door lock
The driver door lock actuator is isolated so it can be unlocked by itself using the keyless entry transmitter.
Key Cylinder Switch
The driver window switch monitors the voltage level of the driver door lock motor status signal circuit. When
the key is inserted into the driver door key cylinder and turned to the Lock position, a switch within the driver
door latch closes causing the voltage to drop within the driver door lock motor status signal circuit. The driver
window switch will detect the drop in voltage and will send a serial data message to the BCM commanding all
the doors to Lock.
The driver key cylinder switch is used by the customer for programming the keyless entry transmitters, The
driver window/outside rearview mirror switch monitors the voltage level of the key switch unlock signal circuit
and when it detects a reprogramming request, it will send a serial data message to the body control module.
Passive Door Lock/Unlock Operation
The exterior door handle switch signal circuits provide inputs to the keyless entry control module when the
exterior door handle switches are activated. These inputs allow the keyless entry control module to detect a door
lock or a door unlock request. The keyless entry control module provides a 12 V signal to each exterior door
handle switch via the door handle switch signal circuits. When a door handle switch is pressed, the switch
closes and the voltage signal within the signal circuit is pulled to ground. The keyless entry control module will
238 of 239
detect the voltage drop and a low frequency antenna will transmit a challenge to the keyless entry transmitter. If
the challenge is met, the keyless entry transmitter will respond and the keyless entry control module will send a
serial data message to the body control module to command the door (s) to be locked or unlocked
REAR HATCH/GATE DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Liftgate Release System Components

• Underhood fuse block-liftgate unlatch PCB relay
• Liftgate unlatch switch
• Liftgate door lock actuator
Liftgate Release Operation
Liftgate Unlatch Switch
The BCM monitors supplies a 12 V signal to the liftgate unlatch switch so that when the switch is pressed, the
voltage within the signal circuit is pulled low and in response, the BCM will detect the voltage drop and check
the status of the door lock system. If the doors are locked, the BCM will ignore the request, if the All Doors
Unlocked has been commanded, the BCM will recognize the request and command the liftgate to release.
Liftgate Door Lock Actuator
When BCM receives a liftgate release command from the liftgate unlatch switch, the BCM applies voltage and
ground to the liftgate unlatch relay control circuit, which energizes the coil side of the relay. The switch side of
the release relay then momentarily closes, supplying a brief pulse of battery positive voltage to the liftgate door
lock actuator. The liftgate door lock actuator is continuously grounded and when it receives the voltage pulse, it
will become energized and the latch will activate releasing the liftgate so that it may be manually raised to an
open position.
239 of 239
Wiper Systems And Washer Systems - XT4
SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:
All fasteners
listed in this
table can be
reused after
removal.
Specification
Air Inlet Grille Panel Bolt 2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Rear Window Wiper Arm Nut 10 N.m (89 lb in)
Rear Window Wiper Motor Bolt 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Windshield Washer Solvent Container Nut 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Windshield Wiper Arm Nut 30 N.m (22 lb ft)
Windshield Wiper Motor Bolt 9 N.m (80 lb in)
Windshield Wiper Transmission Bolt 8 N.m (71 lb in)

WIPER/WASHER WIRING SCHEMATICS
Front and Rear Wipers
Front and Rear Wiper/Washer Controls
1 of 84
Washers

DTC B370A
DTC Descriptor
DTC B370A
Rain Sensor
2 of 84

B+ U151A U151A - -
Serial Data U151A U151A U151A -
Ground - U151A - -
B+ and ground is supplied at all times to the rain sensor. The rain sensor communicates with the body control
module (BCM) via serial data. When the ignition is in the ON or ACCESSORY position and the windshield
wiper/washer switch is in the intermittent delay position, the BCM monitors the rain sensor data to determine
the rain build up on the windshield. As rain builds up on the windshield, the BCM will command the wipers to
activate. The sensitivity of the wiper frequency is controlled by the intermittent delay of the windshield
wiper/washer switch. As the sensitivity is increased, the BCM will command more frequent wiper activation
based on rain build up on the windshield.
Communication between the BCM and the rain sensor is interrupted, and an interruption in communication is a
serial data fault.
• If the BCM loses communication with the rain sensor while operating with single wipes, the windshield
wiper operation will default to intermittent operation with a fixed dwell time of 4 s.
• If the BCM loses communication with the rain sensor while operating at low speed, the windshield wiper
operation will default to low speed.
• If the BCM loses communication with the rain sensor while operating at high speed, the windshield wiper
operation will default to high speed.
The DTC will clear when communication is established between the BCM and rain sensor.
Schematic Reference
Wiper/Washer Wiring Schematics
Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation
3 of 84
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC U151A is not set.
If the DTC is set
Please Refer to DTC U1500-U15FF

3. Place the S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch in the intermittent delay setting and spray the outside of
the windshield in the area of the B200 Rain Sensor Module with a water bottle. It may be necessary to
increase the sensitivity of the intermittent delay to achieve windshield wiper operation.
4. Verify the windshield wipers operate at low speed.
If the wipers are not operating at low speed
Go to next step: If the wipers are operating at low speed

5. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF, all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B117 Rain Sensor Module.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
4 of 84
If infinite resistance, replace the B117 Rain Sensor Module.
4. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, ignition ON.
5. Test for 5.0 - 10.0 V between the serial data circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If less than 5.0 V
6. Test or replace the B117 Rain Sensor Module.
Repair Instructions
• Inside Air Moisture and Windshield Temperature Sensor Replacement

• Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming and setup
DTC B370B
DTC Descriptor
DTC B370B
Rear Wiper Function Control Circuit
5 of 84

Control B370B 02 1 2 -
Ground - 1 1 -
1. Rear Wiper Inoperative.
2. Rear Wiper Always ON.
The rear wiper motor is controlled by the body control module (BCM) via a printed circuit board (PCB) relay.
The BCM will respond by commanding the specific rear wiper function based on an input from the rear wiper
switch, which is part of the windshield wiper/washer switch. The rear wiper switch uses a resistor ladder to
determine low speed, intermittent, and rear washer operation. A constant B+ and ground are supplied to the rear
wiper motor. When the rear wiper switch is placed in the low speed, intermittent, or rear washer position, the
voltage is pulled down through a different resistor in the resistor ladder, reducing the voltage seen at the BCM.
The BCM monitors the liftgate ajar signal circuit, and the BCM will disable the function of the rear wiper motor
if the liftgate of liftglass is ajar or open
• Ignition ON
The BCM detects a short to ground in the rear window wiper control circuit.
Rear wiper operation is suspended.
A current DTC clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
Diagnostic Aids
The rear liftgate must be closed in order for the rear wiper to work. The liftgate ajar switch signal circuit
provides information to the rear window wiper module about the status of the liftgate. If the liftgate or liftglass
is open the rear wiper operation is not performed.
Schematic Reference
6 of 84
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Rear Closure Ajar Switch parameter changes between Inactive and Active when
opening and closing the liftgate.
Refer to Liftgate Ajar Indicator Malfunction (With TB5) , or Liftgate Ajar Indicator
Malfunction (Without TB5)

3. Verify the rear wiper turns ON and OFF when commanding the Rear Wiper Active and Inactive with a
scan tool.
If the rear wiper does not turn ON and OFF
Go to next step: If the rear wiper turns ON and OFF

4. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
2. Verify the M45 Rear Wiper Motor is not activated.
If the M45 Rear Wiper Motor is activated
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, ignition
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal K8 and ground.
If less than 1 V, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
Go to next step: If the M45 Rear Wiper Motor is not activated
7 of 84
4. Verify the M45 Rear Wiper Motor activates.
If the M45 Rear Wiper Motor does not activate
Block - Underhood.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal K8 and ground.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
Go to next step: If the M45 Rear Wiper Motor activates
5. Test or replace the K9 Body Control Module.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References or BCM replacement, programming and setup
DTC B3715 OR B3875

DTC Descriptors
DTC B3715
Windshield Wiper Relay Circuit
DTC B3875
Windshield Wiper High Speed Relay Circuit

Windshield Wiper Relay Control B3715 02 B3715 04 B3715 01 -
Windshield Wiper Speed Control
B3875 02 B3875 04 B3875 01 -
Relay Control
8 of 84
The windshield wiper motor is controlled by the body control module (BCM) through the windshield wiper
replay and the windshield wiper speed control relay. When low speed windshield wiper operation is requested,
the BCM will apply voltage to the windshield wiper relay control circuit. This will cause the contacts in the
windshield wiper relay to close and apply B+ to the windshield wiper motor through the windshield wiper low
speed control circuit, enabling low speed wiper operation. When high speed windshield wiper operation is
requested, the body control module continues to apply voltage to the windshield wiper relay control circuit and
also applies ground to the windshield wiper speed control relay control circuit. This will cause the contacts in
the windshield wiper speed control relay to close and apply B+ to the windshield wiper motor through the
windshield wiper high speed control circuit, enabling high speed wiper operation. When the windshield wiper
request is no longer present, the contacts in the windshield wiper relay and windshield wiper speed control relay
will open, removing B+ from the wiper motor control circuits. The windshield wiper motor will continue to
operate using a discrete B+ circuit provided by the BCM until the wipers are in the park position.
• A wiper output is actively being requested by the BCM.

B3715 01
A short to voltage is detected in the windshield wiper relay control circuit.
B3715 02
A short to ground is detected in the windshield wiper relay control circuit.
B3715 04
An open or high resistance is detected in the windshield wiper relay control circuit.
B3875 01
A short to voltage is detected in the windshield wiper high speed relay control circuit.
B3875 02
A short to ground is detected in the windshield wiper high speed relay control circuit.
B3875 04
An open or high resistance is detected in the windshield wiper high speed relay control circuit.
The BCM will not activate the wiper output.
• A current DTC will clear when the condition for setting the fault is no longer present.
9 of 84
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor changes between Off, Low, and High when cycling the S82
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch between Off, Low, and High.
If the Windshield Wiper Motor does not cycle between Off, Low, and High
Go to next step: If the Windshield Wiper Motor cycles between Off, Low, and High
3. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block -
Underhood. It may take up to 10 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal H2 and ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
10 of 84
3. Connect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, disconnect the harness
connector at the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
5. Ignition ON.
6. Verify the scan tool Windshield Wiper Park Switch parameter is Inactive.
If not Inactive
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor park switch signal circuit
7. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground circuit terminal 5.
8. Verify the scan tool Windshield Wiper Park Switch parameter is Active.
If not Active
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body
9. Connect a test lamp between the following control circuits and ground, ignition ON.
• Windshield Wiper Motor Low Speed Control Circuit Terminal 1
• Windshield Wiper Motor High Speed Control Circuit Terminal 4
10. Verify the test lamp does NOT turn ON and OFF when commanding the Windshield Wiper Relay High
and Low with a scan tool.
If the test lamp turns ON and OFF for both terminals
Test or replace the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor.
Go to next step: If the test lamp does not turn ON and OFF for one or both terminals
11. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor. Disconnect the X1
harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
11 of 84
12. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminals listed below, one at a time, and
B+.
• Terminal J5
• Terminal K7
13. Verify the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor activates.
If the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor does not activate
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor.
Go to next step: If the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor activates
14. Ignition OFF, connect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood. Disconnect the X4
harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
15. Verify the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor low speed is not activated.
If the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor low speed is activated
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal C5 and ground.
If less than 1 V, test or replace the replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
Go to next step: If the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor low speed is not activated
17. Verify the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor High Speed is not activated.
If the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor high speed is activated
ON.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit terminal G5 and ground.
Go to next step: If the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor high speed is not activated
18. Connect a 10 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal 16 X4 and B+.
Block - Underhood.
12 of 84
20. Connect a 10 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal 24 X5 and ground.
Block - Underhood.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for body control module replacement, programming and setup.
DTC B371A
DTC Descriptor
DTC B371A 39
Windshield Wiper Motor Internal Malfunction
B+ voltage and ground are supplied to the windshield wiper motor. Whenever the ignition is ON or in accessory
position, the body control module (BCM) sends the wiper/washer switch status through the LIN communication
bus. If a fault occurs at any time in the windshield wiper motor, the BCM will set the DTC.
13 of 84
The BCM runs the diagnostic to detect an internal fault when power up is commanded. The only requirements
are voltage and ground. This diagnostic runs even if the voltage is out of the valid operating range.
The BCM receives an invalid signal from the windshield wiper motor.
The BCM ignores all additional inputs.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify that there is no communications DTC set.
If there is a communications DTC set
Go to next step: If there is no communications DTC set

3. Verify that DTC B371A is not set.
If DTC B371A is set
14 of 84
Replace the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor.
Go to next step: If DTC B371A is not set

4. All OK.
Repair Instructions
Windshield Wiper Transmission Replacement
DTC B3811
DTC Descriptor
DTC B3811
Rear Washer Relay Circuit

Control B3811 02 B3811 04 1 -
Ground - B3811 04 - -
1. Rear Washer Always ON
The rear windshield washer pump is controlled by the body control module (BCM) via a printed circuit board
(PCB) relay. The BCM monitors the rear windshield wiper/washer switch signal circuit and when rear washer
activation is requested, the BCM applies voltage through the rear window washer pump relay control circuit.
With the relay energized, fused battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts of the relay and the
windshield washer pump control circuit to activate the windshield washer pump.
• Ignition ON.
B3811 01
The body control module detects a short to B+ in the rear windshield washer pump relay control circuit
15 of 84
B3811 02
The body control module detects a short to ground in the rear windshield washer pump relay control circuit
B3811 04
The body control module detects an open or high resistance in the rear windshield washer pump relay control
circuit or the ground circuit
Washer operation is suspended.
• A current DTC clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.

Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the rear window washer turns ON and OFF when commanding the Rear Washer Relay Active and
If the rear window washer does not turn ON and OFF
16 of 84
Go to next step: If the rear window washer turns ON and OFF
3. All OK.
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood ground circuit terminal H2 and
ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Connect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood and disconnect the X5 harness
connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
4. Verify the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump is not activated.
If the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump is activated
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood control circuit terminal G6 and
ground.
If less than 1 V, test or replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
Go to next step: If the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump is not activated
6. Verify the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump activates.
If the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump does not activate
Block - Underhood.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood control circuit terminal G6
and ground.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
Go to next step: If the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump activates
Repair Instructions
17 of 84

DTC B3873
DTC Descriptors
DTC B3873
Front Washer Relay Circuit

Circuit
Control B3873 02 B3873 04 B3873 01 -
Ground - B3873 04 - -
The windshield washer pump is controlled by the body control module (BCM) via a printed circuit board (PCB)
relay. The BCM monitors the windshield wiper/washer switch signal circuit and when washer activation is
requested, the BCM applies voltage through the window washer pump relay control circuit. With the relay
energized, fused battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts of the relay and the windshield washer
pump control circuit to activate the windshield washer pump.
• Ignition ON.
B3873 01
The body control module detects a short to B+ in the windshield washer pump relay control circuit.
B3873 02
The body control module detects a short to ground in the windshield washer pump relay control circuit.
B3873 04
18 of 84
The body control module detects an open or high resistance in the windshield washer pump relay control circuit.
Washer operation is suspended.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the G24 Windshield Washer Pump activates when commanding the Windshield Washer Relay On
and Off with a scan tool.
If the G24 Windshield Washer Pump does not activate
Go to next step: If the G24 Windshield Washer Pump activates

3. All OK.
19 of 84
2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood ground circuit terminal H2 and
ground.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Connect the X5 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood and disconnect the X4 harness
connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
4. Verify the G24 Windshield Washer Pump is not activated.
If the G24 Windshield Washer Pump is activated
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood control circuit terminal K6 and
ground.
If less than 1 V, test or replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
Go to next step: If the G24 Windshield Washer Pump is not activated
6. Verify the G24 Windshield Washer Pump activates.
Block - Underhood.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood control circuit terminal K6
and ground.
Repair Instructions

• Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming and setup.
SYMPTOMS - WIPER/WASHER SYSTEMS
20 of 84
1. Perform Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle , in order to verify that all of the following conditions are
true:
• No DTCs are set.
2. Refer to Wiper/Washer System Description and Operation in order to familiarize yourself with the
system functions.
• Inspect for aftermarket devices which may affect the operation of the windshield wiper/washer system.
cause the symptom.
• Inspect the washer fluid reservoir for the proper fluid level.
Intermittent
Symptom List
• Windshield Wiper System Malfunction

• Washer Malfunction
• Low Washer Fluid Indicator Malfunction
• Rear Wiper System Malfunction
• Rear Washer System Malfunction
• Rain Sensor Malfunction
WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM MALFUNCTION


B+ 1 1 - -
Windshield Wiper Switch Signal
4 2 - -
Terminal 2
Windshield Wiper Switch Signal
1 1 1 -
Terminal 3
21 of 84
Underhood Fuse Block Control
B3715 02 B3715 04 B3715 01 -
Terminal 16 X2
Underhood Fuse Block Control
B3875 02 B3875 04 B3875 01 -
Terminal 14 X2
Windshield Wiper Motor Control
3 3 - -
Terminal 3
1, 2 1 4 -
Terminal 1
1, 2 2 4 -
Terminal 4
Windshield Wiper Switch Low
- 1, 2 - -
Reference Terminal 1
Windshield Wiper Motor Ground
- 1, 2, 3 - -
Terminal 5
Underhood Fuse Block Ground
- B3715 04 - -
Terminal 38 X2
1. Delay or Low Speed Wipers Inoperative
2. High Speed Wipers Inoperative
3. Wipers Do Not Park
4. Wipers Always ON
The body control module (BCM) controls the windshield wiper motor based on inputs from the windshield
wiper/washer switch. The BCM monitors the windshield wiper/washer switch through two separate signal
circuits and a low reference circuit. The windshield wiper/washer switch uses a resistor ladder to determine low
speed and intermittent operation. The BCM applies and monitors voltage on the windshield wiper switch signal
circuit. When the wiper switch is placed in the low speed or intermittent position, the voltage is pulled down
through a different resistor in the resistor ladder, reducing the voltage seen at the BCM. The BCM will respond
by commanding on the low speed or intermittent wipers. The high speed wipers are controls through a discrete
signal circuit. With the windshield wiper/washer switch is in the high speed position, the windshield wiper high
speed switch signal circuit is pulled directly to ground. The BCM will respond by commanding on the high
speed wipers.
The windshield wiper motor is controlled by the BCM through the windshield wiper replay and the windshield
wiper speed control relay. A constant ground is supplied to the rear wiper motor. When low speed windshield
wiper operation is requested, the BCM will apply voltage to the windshield wiper relay control circuit. This will
cause the contacts in the windshield wiper relay to close and apply B+ to the windshield wiper motor through
the windshield wiper low speed control circuit, enabling low speed wiper operation. When high speed
windshield wiper operation is requested, the BCM continues to apply voltage to the windshield wiper relay
control circuit and also applies ground to the windshield wiper speed control relay control circuit. This will
cause the contacts in the windshield wiper speed control relay to close and apply B+ to the windshield wiper
motor through the windshield wiper high speed control circuit, enabling high speed wiper operation. When the
windshield wiper request is no longer present, the contacts in the windshield wiper relay and windshield wiper
speed control relay will open, removing B+ from the wiper motor control circuits. The windshield wiper motor
will continue to operate using a discrete B+ circuit provided by the BCM until the wipers are in the park
position.
22 of 84
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Windshield Wiper Switch parameter changes between Off and Low when activating
the low speed windshield wipers.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Malfunction.

3. Verify the scan tool Windshield Wiper Switch parameter changes between Delay 1 and Delay 5 when
cycling the intermittent speed windshield wipers.
Test or replace the S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch.

4. Verify the scan tool Windshield Wiper High Speed Switch parameter changes between Active and
Inactive when activating the high speed windshield wipers.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Malfunction.

5. Verify the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor changes between Off, Low, and High when cycling the S82
23 of 84
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch between Off, Low, and High.
If the Windshield Wiper Motor does not cycle between Off, Low, and High
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Windshield Wiper Motor Malfunction
Go to next step: If the Windshield Wiper Motor cycles between Off, Low, and High
6. Ignition OFF.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Windshield Wiper Motor Malfunction.

8. All OK.
Windshield Wiper Switch Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S82 Windshield
Wiper/Washer Switch. It may take up to 11 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Windshield Wiper High Speed Switch parameter is Inactive.
If not Inactive
terminal 1.
6. Verify the scan tool Windshield Wiper High Speed Switch parameter is Active.
If not Active
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
24 of 84
7. Test for greater than 8 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.
If less than 8 V
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit and ground
9. Test for less than 1 V between the S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch signal circuit terminal 3 and
ground.
If 1 V or greater

10. Test or replace the S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch.
Windshield Wiper Motor Malfunction
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
connector at the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
25 of 84
5. Ignition ON.
6. Verify the scan tool Windshield Wiper Park Switch parameter is Inactive.
If not Inactive
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor park switch signal circuit
7. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground circuit terminal 5.
If not Active
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the X4 harness connector at the K9 Body
9. Connect a test lamp between the following control circuits and ground, ignition ON.
• Windshield Wiper Motor Low Speed Control Circuit Terminal 1
• Windshield Wiper Motor High Speed Control Circuit Terminal 4
10. Verify the test lamp does NOT turn ON and OFF when commanding the Windshield Wiper Relay High
and Low with a scan tool.
If the test lamp turns ON and OFF for both terminals
Test or replace the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor.
Go to next step: If the test lamp does not turn ON and OFF for one or both terminals
11. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor. Disconnect the X1
harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
12. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminals listed below, one at a time, and
B+.
• Terminal J5
• Terminal K7
26 of 84
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the M75 Windshield
Wiper Motor.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor.
14. Ignition OFF, connect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood. Disconnect the X4
15. Verify the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor low speed is not activated.
If the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor low speed is activated
ON.
If less than 1 V, test or replace the replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
Go to next step: If the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor low speed is not activated
17. Verify the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor High Speed is not activated.
If the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor high speed is activated
ON.
Go to next step: If the M75 Windshield Wiper Motor high speed is not activated
Block - Underhood.
20. Connect a 10 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal 24 X5 and ground.
27 of 84
Block - Underhood.
Component Testing
Windshield Wiper Switch
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch.
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal terminal 2 and the low reference terminal 1 with the high
speed switch in the open position.
Replace the S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch.

3. Test for less than 2 Ω between the signal circuit terminal 2 and the low reference circuit terminal 1 with
the high speed switch in the closed position.
If 2 Ω or greater

4. Test for infinite resistance between the signal terminal 3 and the low reference terminal 1 with the low
speed switch in the open position.

5. Test for the resistance values listed below between the signal circuit terminal 3 and the low reference
circuit terminal 1 by cycling the switch between Delay 1 and Delay 5.
• Delay 1 : 7.50-8.00kΩ
• Delay 2 : 1.29-1.34kΩ
• Delay 3 : 1.95-2.00kΩ
• Delay 4 : 2.78-2.82kΩ
• Delay 5 :3.84-3.90kΩ
28 of 84
If not within the resistance values listed
Go to next step: If within the resistance values listed

6. All OK
Repair Instructions
• Windshield Wiper Motor Replacement

• Windshield Wiper and Windshield Washer Switch Replacement
• Control Module References for BCM replacement, programming and setup.
LOW WASHER FLUID INDICATOR MALFUNCTION


Signal 2 1 - -
Ground - 1 - -
1. Low washer fluid message always displayed
2. Low washer fluid message never displayed
The Adding Washer Fluid message is controlled by the instrument cluster. This message is controlled by using a
signal message input from the washer fluid level switch. The washer fluid level signal circuit is supplied voltage
through a resistor then monitored within the instrument cluster. The washer fluid level switch is normally closed
when the washer fluid level is full. The instrument cluster detects ignition voltage on the washer fluid level
signal circuit. When the washer fluid reaches the point where the driver should be informed that the washer
fluid is low, the washer fluid level switch opens. When the washer fluid level switch is opened, the washer fluid
level signal circuit voltage is pulled high, and the instrument cluster displays the Adding Washer Fluid message
on the driver information center. In order to prevent the Adding Washer Fluid message from being displayed
while sloshing is occurring in the washer fluid container, the instrument cluster is programed with a 1 min delay
before changing states of the Adding Washer Fluid message during an ignition cycle.
Schematic Reference
29 of 84
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B118B Windshield
Washer Fluid Level Switch. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Washer Fluid Level Switch parameter is Off.
If not Off
Go to next step: If Off
5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 1 and the ground circuit terminal 2.
6. Verify the scan tool Washer Fluid Level Switch parameter is On.
If not Off
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the P16 Instrument
Cluster, ignition ON.
30 of 84
Go to next step: If On
7. Test or replace the B118B Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch.
Repair Instructions
• Windshield Washer Solvent Container Level Sensor Replacement

• Control Module References for instrument cluster replacement, programming and setup
WASHER MALFUNCTION

Circuit
B+ 2 2 - -
Windshield Washer Switch
2 1 - -
Signal
Windshield Washer Fluid Pump
1 1 2 -
Control
Windshield Washer Relay
B3873 02 B3873 04 B3873 01 -
Control
Windshield Washer Fluid Pump
- 1 - -
Ground
Windshield Washer Switch Low
- 1 - -
Reference
Underhood Fuse Block Ground - B3873 04 - -
1. Washer Inoperative
2. Washers Always ON
The windshield washer function is controlled by the body control module. When the washer switch is pressed,
low reference is applied through the switch contacts and the signal circuit to the body control module indicating
the wash request. The body control module then applies voltage through the control circuit to the coil side of the
windshield washer pump relay energizing the relay. With the relay energized, battery voltage from the fuse is
applied through the switch contacts of the relay and the control circuit to the windshield washer fluid pump.
31 of 84
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Windshield Washer Switch parameter changes between Inactive and Active when
pressing the washer switch.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Windshield Washer Switch Malfunction.

3. Verify the G24 Windshield Washer Pump activates when commanding the Windshield Washer Relay On
and Off with a scan tool.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Windshield Washer Pump Malfunction

4. All OK.
Windshield Washer Switch Malfunction
Wiper/Washer Switch. It may take up to 11 minutes for all vehicle systems to power down.
32 of 84
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify the scan tool Windshield Washer Switch parameter is Inactive.
If not Inactive
terminal 1.
6. Verify the scan tool Windshield Washer Switch parameter is Active.
If not Active
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 Body Control
Windshield Washer Pump Malfunction
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
33 of 84
connector at the G24 Windshield Washer Pump. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power
down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
6. Verify the test lamp does not turn ON and OFF when commanding the Windshield Washer Relay On and
Off with a scan tool.
Test or replace the G24 Windshield Washer Pump.
7. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the G24 Windshield Washer Pump. Disconnect the X5
harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block-Underhood, ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the G24 Windshield Washer Pump, ignition ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal H3 and ground.
If less than 1 V, test or replace the G24 Windshield Washer Pump.
Go to next step: If the G24 Windshield Washer Pump is not activated
9. Connect a 25 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal H3 and B+.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the G24 Windshield
Washer Pump, ignition ON.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the G24 Windshield Washer Pump.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block-Underhood.
34 of 84
2. Test for less than 1 volt between the K9 Body Control Module control circuit terminal 14 X4 and
ground.
If less than 1 V, test or replace the X50A Fuse Block-Underhood.
Block-Underhood, ignition ON.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the X50A Fuse Block-Underhood.
Component Testing
Windshield Washer Switch
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal terminal 7 and the low reference terminal 1 with the switch

3. Test for less than 2 Ω between the signal circuit terminal 7 and the low reference circuit terminal 1 with
the switch in the closed position.
If 2 Ω or greater

4. All OK
Repair Instructions
• Windshield Washer Pump Replacement

35 of 84
RAIN SENSOR MALFUNCTION

DTC Descriptor
DTC B370A
Rain Sensor

B+ U151A U151A - -
Serial Data U151A U151A U151A -
Ground - U151A - -
B+ and ground is supplied at all times to the rain sensor. The rain sensor communicates with the body control
module (BCM) via serial data. When the ignition is in the ON or ACCESSORY position and the windshield
wiper/washer switch is in the intermittent delay position, the BCM monitors the rain sensor data to determine
the rain build up on the windshield. As rain builds up on the windshield, the BCM will command the wipers to
activate. The sensitivity of the wiper frequency is controlled by the intermittent delay of the windshield
wiper/washer switch. As the sensitivity is increased, the BCM will command more frequent wiper activation
based on rain build up on the windshield.
Communication between the BCM and the rain sensor is interrupted, and an interruption in communication is a
serial data fault.
• If the BCM loses communication with the rain sensor while operating with single wipes, the windshield
wiper operation will default to intermittent operation with a fixed dwell time of 4 s.
• If the BCM loses communication with the rain sensor while operating at low speed, the windshield wiper
operation will default to low speed.
• If the BCM loses communication with the rain sensor while operating at high speed, the windshield wiper
operation will default to high speed.
36 of 84
The DTC will clear when communication is established between the BCM and rain sensor.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify DTC U151A is not set.
If the DTC is set
Please Refer to DTC U1500-U15FF

3. Place the S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch in the intermittent delay setting and spray the outside of
the windshield in the area of the B200 Rain Sensor Module with a water bottle. It may be necessary to
increase the sensitivity of the intermittent delay to achieve windshield wiper operation.
4. Verify the windshield wipers operate at low speed.
If the wipers are not operating at low speed
Go to next step: If the wipers are operating at low speed

5. All OK.
1. Ignition OFF, all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the B117 Rain Sensor Module.
37 of 84
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
If infinite resistance, replace the B117 Rain Sensor Module.
4. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, ignition ON.
5. Test for 5.0 - 10.0 V between the serial data circuit terminal 2 and ground.
If less than 5.0 V
6. Test or replace the B117 Rain Sensor Module.
Repair Instructions
38 of 84
• Inside Air Moisture and Windshield Temperature Sensor Replacement
REAR WIPER SYSTEM MALFUNCTION


B+ 1 1 - -
Rear Window Wiper Switch
1 1 2 -
Signal
Rear Window Wiper Motor
1 1 2 -
Control
Rear Window Wiper Relay
B370B 02 B370B 04 B370B 01 -
Control
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
- 1 - -
Low Reference
- 1 - -
Ground
- 1 - -
Terminal 18 X1
1. Rear Wiper Inoperative.
2. Rear Wiper Always ON.
The rear wiper motor is controlled by the body control module (BCM) via a printed circuit board (PCB) relay.
The BCM will respond by commanding the specific rear wiper function based on an input from the rear wiper
switch, which is part of the windshield wiper/washer switch. The rear wiper switch uses a resistor ladder to
determine low speed, intermittent, and rear washer operation. A constant B+ and ground are supplied to the rear
wiper motor. When the rear wiper switch is placed in the low speed, intermittent, or rear washer position, the
voltage is pulled down through a different resistor in the resistor ladder, reducing the voltage seen at the BCM.
The BCM monitors the liftgate ajar signal circuit, and the BCM will disable the function of the rear wiper motor
if the liftgate of liftglass is ajar or open
Diagnostic Aids
The rear liftgate must be closed in order for the rear wiper to work. The liftgate ajar switch signal circuit
provides information to the rear window wiper module about the status of the liftgate. If the liftgate or liftglass
is open the rear wiper operation is not performed.
39 of 84
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Rear Closure Ajar Switch parameter changes between Inactive and Active when
opening and closing the liftgate.
Refer to Liftgate Ajar Indicator Malfunction (With TB5) , or Liftgate Ajar Indicator
Malfunction (Without TB5)

3. Verify the scan tool Rear Wiper Switch parameter changes between Off and On when turning the rear
wipers ON and OFF.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Malfunction.

4. Verify the M45 Rear Wiper Motor turns On when commanding the Rear Wiper Active and Inactive with a
scan tool.
If the Rear Wiper Motor does not turn ON
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Rear Wiper Motor Malfunction
Go to next step: If the Rear Wiper Motor turns ON

5. Verify the Rear Wiper finishes the wiping cycle and will park at the end of the rear window when cycling
40 of 84
the S82 Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Malfunction from Rear Wiper to Off.
If the Rear Wiper does not park at the end of the rear window
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Wiper Park Feature Malfunction
Go to next step: If the Rear Wiper park at the end of the rear window
6. All OK.
Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Malfunction
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 8 V
ground.
If 1 V or greater

Rear Wiper Motor Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, and all vehicle systems OFF. Disconnect the harness connector at the M45 Rear Wiper
41 of 84
Motor. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
3. Ignition ON.
4. Verify a test lamp illuminates between the B+ circuit terminal 1 and the ground circuit terminal 2.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp. Disconnect the X2 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block -
Underhood.
2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit terminal J2 X2 end to end.
5. Connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal 3 and the ground circuit terminal 2.
6. Verify the test lamp does NOT turn ON and OFF when commanding the Rear Wiper On and Off with a
scan tool.
Test or replace the M45 Rear Wiper Motor.
Go to next step: If the test lamp does NOT turn ON and OFF
7. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the M45 Rear Wiper Motor. Disconnect the X5 harness
connector at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood, It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power
down.
If 10 Ω or greater
9. Ignition ON.
10. Verify the M45 Rear Wiper Motor is NOT activated.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the M45 Rear Wiper Motor, ignition ON.
If less than 1 V, replace the M45 Rear Wiper Motor.
42 of 84
11. Connect a 20 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit listed below and B+:
• Terminal J2 X2
• Terminal L7 X1
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the M45 Rear Wiper
Motor, ignition ON.
If less than 2 Ω, replace the M45 Rear Wiper Motor.
13. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connectors at the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood. Disconnect the X4
14. Verify the M45 Rear Wiper Motor is not activated.
ON.
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal K8 and ground.
If less than 1 V, replace the X50A Fuse Block - Underhood.
Block - Underhood.
17. Test or replace the M45 Rear Wiper Motor.
Wiper Park Feature Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the M45 Rear Wiper Motor. Ignition ON
43 of 84
3. Test or replace the M45 Rear Wiper Motor.
Component Testing
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal terminal 5 and the low reference terminal 1 with the rear
window washer switch in the open position.

3. Verify the resistance reading is within the range specified below between the signal circuit terminal 5 and
the low reference circuit terminal 1 by cycling the switch between Rear Wiper position and Rear Washers
position.
• Rear Wiper : 624-644Ω
• Rear Wiper Sweep : 1.99-2.01kΩ
• Rear Washer : 6.11-6.13kΩ
If not within range specified
Go to next step: If within range specified

4. All OK
Repair Instructions

• Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement
REAR WASHER SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

44 of 84

B+ 1 1 - -
Rear Washer Switch Signal 1 1 - -
Rear Window Washer Pump
1 B3811 04 B3811 01 -
Relay Control
Rear Windshield Washer Pump
1 1 2 -
Control
- 1 - -
Ground
- 1 - -
Terminal 32 X1
1. Rear Washer Inoperative
2. Rear Washer Always ON
The rear windshield washer pump is controlled by the body control module (BCM) via a printed circuit board
(PCB) relay. The BCM monitors the rear windshield wiper/washer switch signal circuit and when rear washer
activation is requested, the BCM applies voltage through the rear window washer pump relay control circuit.
With the relay energized, fused battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts of the relay and the rear
windshield washer pump control circuit to activate the rear windshield washer pump.
Schematic Reference
• Circuit Testing
• Wiring Repairs
Scan Tool Reference
45 of 84
1. Ignition ON.
2. Verify the scan tool Rear Washer Relay Command parameter changes between Active and Inactive when
cycling the rear washer switch ON and OFF.
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Malfunction

3. Verify the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump turns on and off when commanding the Rear Washer Relay
Inactive and Active with the scan tool
If the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump does not turn ON and OFF
Refer to Circuit/System Testing - Rear Washer Pump Malfunction
Go to next step: If the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump turns ON and OFF
4. All OK.
Rear Wiper/Washer Switch Malfunction
1. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the S82 Windshield
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
3. Ignition ON.
If less than 8 V
46 of 84
ground.
If 1 V or greater

Rear Washer Pump Malfunction
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
connector at the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to
power down.
If 10 Ω or greater
1. Ignition OFF.
6. Verify the test lamp does not turn ON and OFF when commanding the Rear Washer Relay Active and
Test or replace the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump.
7. Ignition OFF, connect the harness connector at the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump. Disconnect the X5
harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block-Underhood, ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump, ignition
ON.
47 of 84
2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit terminal F2 and ground.
If less than 1 V, test or replace the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump.
Go to next step: If the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump is not activated
9. Connect a 15 A fused jumper wire between the control circuit terminal F2 and B+.
1. Ignition OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the harness connector at the G19 Rear Window
Washer Pump, ignition ON.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump.
11. Ignition OFF, X5 harness connector at the K9 Body Control Module, ignition ON.
1. Ignition OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the X50A Fuse Block-Underhood.
2. Test for less than 1 volt between the K9 Body Control Module control circuit terminal 11 X5 and
ground.
If less than 1 V, test or replace the X50A Fuse Block-Underhood.
Block-Underhood, ignition ON.
If less than 2 Ω, test or replace the X50A Fuse Block-Underhood.
Component Testing
48 of 84
1. Install a 15 A fused jumper wire between the B+ terminal 1 and 12 V. Install a jumper wire between the
ground terminal 2 and ground.
If the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump does not activate.
Replace the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump.
Go to next step: If the G19 Rear Window Washer Pump does activate.
3. All OK
Repair Instructions

• Windshield Washer Pump Replacement
• Control Module References for body control module replacement, programming and setup.
REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WINDSHIELD WASHER SWITCH REPLACEMENT
Removal Procedure
1.
2. Steering Column Upper Trim Cover - Remove - Steering Column Upper Trim Cover Replacement
3. Steering Column Lower Trim Cover - Remove - Steering Column Lower Trim Cover Replacement
(N38) , or Steering Column Lower Trim Cover Replacement (N37)
4.
49 of 84
Disengage the windshield wiper and washer switch lower retaining tab (1).
5.
Disengage the windshield wiper and washer switch upper retaining tab (1).
6.
50 of 84
7. Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch (1) - Remove
1.
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch (1) - Install

3. Steering Column Lower Trim Cover - Install - Steering Column Lower Trim Cover Replacement
(N38) , or Steering Column Lower Trim Cover Replacement (N37)
4. Steering Column Upper Trim Cover - Install - Steering Column Upper Trim Cover Replacement
5.
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE HOSE REPLACEMENT
51 of 84
Air Inlet Grille Panel Replacement
Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose
Procedure
1
1. Disconnect the windshield washer nozzle hose at both windshield washer nozzles.
2. Remove the windshield washer hose from the air inlet grille panel retainers.
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REPLACEMENT

Windshield Washer Nozzle
1
Procedure
52 of 84
1. Disconnect the windshield washer nozzle hose at the windshield washer nozzle being
serviced.
2. Compress the locking tabs on the windshield washer nozzle.
3. Push the windshield washer nozzle outward from the air inlet grille panel.
4. Remove the windshield washer nozzle from the air inlet grille panel.
REAR WINDOW WASHER NOZZLE REPLACEMENT

Rear End Spoiler Replacement (TB4) , or Rear End Spoiler Replacement (TB5)
Rear Window Washer Nozzle
Procedure
1
1. Disconnect the rear window washer nozzle hose from the rear window washer nozzle.
2. Release the plastic retaining tabs.
WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP HOSE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure
1. Headlamp - Left Side - Remove - Front Headlamp Replacement

2. Place a clean suitable drain pan under the windshield washer solvent container area to recover the
windshield washer solvent when the windshield washer pump hose is disconnected.
3.
53 of 84
Windshield Washer Pump Hose (2) @ Windshield Washer Solvent Container (1) - Remove
4.
Windshield Washer Pump Hose (1) @ Window Washer Hose Retainer Clip (2) - Remove [3x]
5.
54 of 84
Windshield Washer Pump Hose (1) @ Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose (2) - Remove
1.
Windshield Washer Pump Hose (1) @ Windshield Washer Nozzle Hose (2) - Install
2.
Windshield Washer Pump Hose (1) @ Window Washer Hose Retainer Clip (2) - Install [3x]
3.
55 of 84
Windshield Washer Pump Hose (2) @ Windshield Washer Solvent Container (1) - Install
4. Remove the drain pan.

5. Headlamp - Left Side - Install - Front Headlamp Replacement
WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP HOSE REPLACEMENT - SOLVENT CONTAINER

Windshield Washer Pump Hose - Solvent Container
Procedure
1. Place a drain pan under the vehicle.

1
2. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from the windshield washer pump.
3. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose from the windshield washer pump hose
- solvent container.
4. Remove the windshield washer pump hose from the windshield washer solvent
56 of 84
container.
REAR WINDOW WASHER NOZZLE HOSE REPLACEMENT

Rear Window Washer Nozzle Hose
Procedure
1
1. Disconnect the rear window washer nozzle hose from the rear window washer nozzle.
2. Slide the hose through the grommet before installing the rear end spoiler.
REAR WINDOW WASHER SOLVENT CONTAINER HOSE REPLACEMENT
57 of 84
Rear Window Washer Solvent Container Hose
Procedure
1. Place a drain pan under the vehicle.

1 2. Disconnect the rear window washer pump hose from the rear washer pump.
3. Disconnect the rear window washer pump hose from the rear window washer nozzle
hose.
4. Remove the rear window washer pump hose from the windshield washer solvent
container.
WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLVENT CONTAINER FILLER TUBE REPLACEMENT

Open and support the hood.
1 Windshield Washer Solvent Container Filler Tube Retainer
2 Windshield Washer Solvent Container Filler Tube
WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLVENT CONTAINER REPLACEMENT
58 of 84
1. Windshield Washer Solvent Container Filler Tube Replacement

2. Front Bumper Fascia Removal and Installation
Windshield Washer Solvent Container Nut [4x]
CAUTION:
Fastener
1 Caution
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
Windshield Washer Solvent Container
Procedure
2
1. Disconnect all electrical connectors.
WINDSHIELD WASHER PUMP REPLACEMENT
59 of 84
Windshield Washer Pump
Procedure

2. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose.
3. Using 2 flat-bladed tools under the washer pump, pry upward to remove the pump
from the washer solvent container.
Windshield Washer Pump Grommet
NOTE:
Install a new
2
grommet.
DO NOT
reuse the old
grommet.
REAR WINDOW WASHER PUMP REPLACEMENT
60 of 84
Windshield Washer Pump
Procedure

2. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose.
3. Using 2 flat-bladed tools under the washer pump, pry upward to remove the pump
from the washer solvent container.
Windshield Washer Pump Grommet
NOTE:
Install a new
2
grommet.
DO NOT
reuse the old
grommet.
WINDSHIELD WASHER SOLVENT CONTAINER LEVEL SENSOR REPLACEMENT
61 of 84
Windshield Washer Solvent Container Level Sensor
Procedure
1
Using 2 flat-bladed tools under the level sensor, pry upward to remove the level sensor from
the washer solvent container.
Windshield Washer Solvent Container Level Sensor Grommet
NOTE:
Install a new
2
grommet.
DO NOT
reuse the old
grommet.
DASH UPPER EXTENSION PANEL EXTENSION REPLACEMENT
62 of 84
Air Inlet Grille Panel Bolt [6x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
Dash Panel Upper Extension Panel Extension
Procedure
2 1. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector.
2. Pull the connector and grommet through the dash panel upper extension panel
extension.
AIR INLET GRILLE PANEL REPLACEMENT

1. Windshield Wiper Arm Replacement

2. Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension Replacement
3. Hood Rear Outer Air Inlet Seal Replacement
Air Inlet Grille Panel Bolt [6x]

1
CAUTION:
63 of 84
Refer to
Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
2.5 N.m (22 lb in)
2 Air Inlet Grille Panel Retainer [2x]
Air Inlet Grille Panel
Procedure
1. Using an appropriate tool, release the air inlet grille panel from the windshield lower
molding.
3
2. Lift up the front edge of the air inlet grille panel, slide the grille panel forward from
both hood hinges.
3. Disconnect the windshield washer nozzle hose from the windshield washer hose.
AIR INLET GRILLE PANEL EXTENSION REPLACEMENT

Air Inlet Grille Panel Extension
Procedure
1
Grasp the air inlet grille panel extension and disengage the retainers from the top edge of the
fender and the end of the air inlet grille panel.
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM REPLACEMENT
64 of 84
Windshield Wiper Arm Finish Cap
1 Procedure
Using an appropriate trim tool, remove the finish cap on the wiper arm.
Windshield Wiper Arm Nut
CAUTION:
Refer to
2 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
30 N.m (22 lb ft)
Windshield Wiper Arm
Procedure
1. Grasp the outer end of the wiper arm and gently rock the arm back and forth to
remove from the pivot shaft.
3 2. Clean the wiper motor pivot shaft knurls with a soft wire brush before installing the
wiper arm.
4. Position the wiper arm on the wiper motor pivot shaft.
5. Properly align the windshield wiper arm. Windshield Wiper Arm Adjustment
REAR WINDOW WIPER ARM REPLACEMENT
65 of 84
Rear Window Wiper Arm Nut
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
10 N.m (89 lb in)
Rear Window Wiper Arm
Procedure
1. Use the J-39822 Wiper Arm Puller to remove the rear window wiper arm from the
rear window wiper transmission pivot shaft.
2. Clean the pivot shaft knurls with a soft wire brush before installing a new rear window
wiper arm.
2
3. Align and position the wiper arm on the wiper motor pivot shaft.
4. Cycle the wiper arm with a spray of solvent, PARK the wiper arm and re-check the
alignment of the wiper arm on the park ramp.
Special Tools
J-39822 Wiper Arm Puller
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT
66 of 84
Windshield Wiper Blade
NOTE:
Do not lock
wiper arm
away from
the
windshield
without a
wiper blade
1 installed on
the arm.
Procedure
1. Lift the windshield wiper arm from the windshield.

2. Disengage the windshield wiper blade lock from the windshield wiper arm.
3. Release the retention tab securing the windshield wiper blade to the windshield wiper
arm.
4. Remove the windshield wiper blade.
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT
67 of 84
Rear Window Wiper Blade
Procedure
1. Position rear window wiper arm in down position to gain access to the rear window
1 wiper blade.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm blade off the rear liftgate glass.
3. Depress the unlocking tab while sliding wiper blade off the shepherd's hook.
4. Replace the rear window wiper blade.
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT

Windshield Wiper Transmission Replacement
68 of 84
Windshield Wiper Motor Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
Windshield Wiper Motor
Procedure
1. Use the B0-39232 Wiper Linkage Separator to separate the transmission drive link
from the wiper motor crank arm ball stud.
2. Use the B0-39529 Wiper Linkage Installer to install the transmission drive link onto
the wiper motor crank arm ball stud.
NOTE:
Apply a
small
amount of
2 grease to the
inner cup on
the
transmission
link to aid in
installation.
Special Tools
• B0-39232 Wiper Linkage Separator

• B0-39529 Wiper Linkage Installer
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR REPLACEMENT
69 of 84
1. Rear Window Wiper Arm Replacement

2. Liftgate Upper Center Trim Finish Panel Replacement
Rear Window Wiper Motor Bolt [3x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
9 N.m (80 lb in)
2 Procedure
WINDSHIELD WIPER TRANSMISSION REPLACEMENT
70 of 84
Windshield Wiper Transmission Bolt [2x]
CAUTION:
Refer to
1 Fastener
Caution .
Tighten
8 N.m (71 lb in)
Windshield Wiper Transmission
Procedure
2. Remove the windshield wiper transmission from the plenum brackets.
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR GROMMET REPLACEMENT
71 of 84
Rear Window Wiper Motor Replacement
Rear Window Wiper Motor Grommet
NOTE:
Apply a very
small
amount of
lithium
grease to the
inner
1
grommet
where the
grommet
seals to the
glass, to aid
in the
installation
of the
grommet.
WINDSHIELD MULTIFUNCTION SENSOR MOUNT BRACKET COVER REPLACEMENT
72 of 84
WARNING:
While
operating,
electrical
control
modules can
produce heat
and become
hotter than
their
surroundings.
To prevent
burns allow
sufficient
time for the
module to
cool before
removal.
Preliminary Procedure Windshield Multifunction Sensor Mount Bracket Cover Insert

Replacement
Windshield Multifunction Sensor Mount Bracket Cover
Procedure
1
1. Use a plastic trim tool to release the tabs below the insert that was removed.
2. Pull the cover away from the windshield to remove.
WINDSHIELD MULTIFUNCTION SENSOR MOUNT BRACKET COVER INSERT REPLACEMENT
73 of 84
Windshield Multifunction Sensor Mount Bracket Cover Insert
WARNING:
While
operating,
electrical
control
modules can
produce heat
and become
hotter than
their
1 surroundings.
To prevent
burns allow
sufficient
time for the
module to
cool before
removal.
Procedure
Use a plastic trim tool to release the upper tabs first and pull the insert up and away from the
cover.
WINDSHIELD GLASS CLEANING

Exterior
Clean the windshield with windshield cleaner. The cleaner should not harm the paint finish or scratch the glass.
The glass is clean when the water no longer beads, but sheets across the entire glass surface.
Interior
74 of 84
The interior glass should be cleaned with plain water only applied with a clean terry cloth towel. Water only
eliminates any film or haze on the window and helps prevent fogging.
WIPER BLADE ELEMENT CLEANING
Lift each wiper blade off of the windshield and clean the element with a cloth saturated with full strength
washer solvent. Hold the blade in one hand and wipe the element with the saturated cloth until the black residue
disappears. Then rinse the blade assembly elements with clean water.
WIPER CHATTER REPAIR
Some vehicles may exhibit a condition where the windshield wipers chatter and/or wipe unevenly. Several items
may contribute to this condition. To completely repair this condition, ALL of the items listed should be
inspected and corrected as necessary.
1. Inspect the wiper blade elements and replace as needed. Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
2. Clean the wiper blade elements. Wiper Blade Element Cleaning
3. Clean the windshield. Windshield Glass Cleaning
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM ADJUSTMENT

Windshield Wiper Arm
Procedure
1. Lubricate the windshield with washer fluid.

1 2. Run the windshield wipers and turn off the windshield wipers.
3. Ensure the windshield wipers are in the full park position.
4. Inspect the windshield wipers for proper position to the circle on the windshield.
5. Realign the windshield wiper arm to the circle, if required. Windshield Wiper Arm
Replacement
75 of 84
WIPER/WASHER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
Wiper/Washer System Components
The wiper/washer system consists of the following electrical components:
• Rain Sensor
• Windshield Washer Pump Relay
• Windshield Washer Fluid Pump
• Windshield Wiper Motor
• Window Wiper/Washer Switch
• Windshield Wiper Motor Fuse
• Windshield Washer Fluid Pump Fuse
• Body Control Module (BCM)
• Rear Window Wiper Motor
• Rear Window Wiper Motor Fuse
• Rear Window Wiper Relay
• Rear Window Washer Pump Relay
• Rear Window Washer Pump Fuse
• Headlamp Washer Fluid Pump Relay
• Headlamp Washer Fluid Pump Fuse
• Windshield Washer Fluid Level Switch
• Underhood Fuse Block (Contains Windshield Washer Pump PCB Relay)
Windshield Wiper System
The body control module (BCM) controls the wiper motor via two removable relays (Windshield Wiper Relay
and Windshield Wiper Speed Control Relay). The BCM determines the wipe/wash system mode of operation by
monitoring several signals from the Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch.
The BCM has 3 signal circuits, the first signal circuit is the Windshield Wiper Switch Low Reference, where the
BCM provides a low reference signal to the Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch. Each input of the BCM provides
a switched battery pull-up for each Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch output signal it receives.
The second signal circuit is the Windshield Wiper Switch Low Signal, and it consists of 6 resistors in the
windshield wiper/washer switch configured as a resistor ladder network. The BCM monitors the voltage, and
when high speed windshield wiper operation is requested, the windshield wiper control switch is connected to a
different set of resistors into the circuit resulting in different voltages appearing on the BCM A/D input. To
initiate low speed operation, the BCM only energizes the front wiper motor on/off relay. This allows battery
voltage from the wiper fuse to be applied through the switched contacts of the wiper motor on/off relay, through
the normally closed contacts of the wiper high/low speed relay, to the low speed control circuit of the
windshield wiper motor.
The third signal circuit is the Windshield Wiper Switch High Signal, the BCM monitors the voltage, and when
76 of 84
high speed windshield wiper operation is requested, the BCM continues to apply voltages to the windshield
wiper relay control circuit and also applies ground to the windshield wiper speed control relay control circuit.
This will cause the contacts in the windshield wiper speed control relay to close and apply B+ to the windshield
wiper motor through the windshield wiper high speed control circuit, enabling high speed wiper operation.
Parking the wiper motor, the BCM monitors the park circuit until the park switch pulls the park circuit to
ground. At this time, the BCM will immediately deactivate the wiper motor on/off relay. The relay contacts will
switch back to their normally closed position and will apply ground to the wiper motor power inputs through
the normally closed contacts of the wiper high/low relay. This deactivates and dynamically brakes the wiper
motor in the park position. When the wiper switch is turned to the OFF position while the wiper motor is
somewhere in mid-cycle, the BCM will continue to operate the motor until the wipers reach the park position. If
the BCM is running the wiper motor and does not see a state transition of the park switch after 8 s, the wipers
will stop immediately when the wiper switch is turned to OFF. If the ignition is turned OFF while the wipers are
in mid-cycle, the wipers will stop immediately, regardless of position. The BCM will park the wipers next time
the ignition is turned ON.
The windshield wiper system MIST operation is identical to LOW speed operation, except that the MIST switch
is a press and release type switch. When the wiper switch is moved to the MIST position and released, low
speed wiper motor operation is started and will continue until 1 cycle is complete. If the wiper switch is moved
to the MIST position and held, the wiper motor will operate in the LOW speed mode until the switch is
released.
Windshield wiper intermittent operation is a low speed wiper motor function with a variable delay interval
between the wiper motor cycles. The duration of the delay is controlled by the front wiper control switch's
intermittent 1 thru intermittent 5 settings. The wiper operation is as follows
1. The BCM will initiate a single wipe by activating its front wiper ON/OFF relay output.
2. At the completion of a single wipe, the BCM will park the wipers as described above.
3. The BCM will then pause the wipers in their park position for the time duration associated with
intermittent delay switch setting.
4. When the delay time expires repeat Steps 1 and 3 until the system is turned off or taken out of intermittent
mode. If the wiper switch is moved from a longer delay interval to a shorter delay interval, the BCM will
command an immediate wipe cycle and reset the delay timer to the shorter delay interval.
Intermittent wiper operation may be vehicle speed sensitive. When enabled, the speed compensated intermittent
feature causes the intermittent wiper delay intervals to become shorter as a function of increased speed. As
vehicle speed is reduced the intervals will become closer to the predetermined
77 of 84
S82 S82 Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
M75 M75 Windshield Wiper Motor
Windshield Washer System
The windshield washer pump is controlled by the body control module (BCM) via a printed circuit board (PCB)
relay. When the washer switch is depressed, the BCM monitors the Windshield Washer Switch signal circuit
from the Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch.The BCM then applies voltage through a control circuit to the PCB
windshield washer pump relay. With the relay energized, fused battery voltage is applied through the switch
contacts of the relay and the control circuit to activate the windshield washer pump. To initiate wash operation,
the Windshield Wiper/Washer switch should be pressed, causing the windshield washer to spray the washer
fluid into the windshield, and the wiper automatically starts wiping.

G24 G24 Windshield Washer Pump
78 of 84
Rain Sense Mode and Rain Sense Indicator
The rain sensor communicates with the body control module (BCM) via serial data. When the ignition is in the
ON or ACCESSORY position and the windshield wiper/washer switch is in the intermittent delay position, the
BCM monitors the rain sensor data to determine the rain build up on the windshield. As rain builds up on the
windshield, the BCM will command the wipers to activate. The sensitivity of the wiper frequency is controlled
by the intermittent delay of the windshield wiper/washer switch. As the sensitivity is increased, the BCM will
command more frequent wiper activation based on rain build up on the windshield.
Headlamp Washer System
The headlamp washer pump is controlled by the body control module (BCM) via a removable relay. If the
headlamp lights are on, the BCM will activate the headlamp washer pump the first time and the windshield
washer pump is activated. After the initial headlamp washer activation, the BCM will only allow headlamp
washer function every 5 windshield washer cycles. When the headlamp washer function is requested by the
BCM's internal logic, it applies voltage through a control circuit to the headlamp washer pump relay. With the
relay energized, fused battery voltage is applied through the switch contacts of the relay and the control circuit
to activate the headlamp washer pump.

G24 G24 Windshield Washer Pump
Rear Wiper System
79 of 84
On vehicles equipped with a Rear Wiper, the rear wiper system consists of the rear wiper relay and the rear
wiper motor. The BCM determines of the Rear Wipe/Wash System Mode of Operation (Intermittent, ON, OFF)
by monitoring the output of the Rear Wipe/Wash Switch. The rear wiper switch provides a request to the BCM.
The BCM activates the output and applies Battery to the coil of the relay, the relay energizes, allowing Battery
voltage from the fuse to be applied through the switched contacts of the Rear Wiper Motor Relay to the Rear
Wiper Motor. The rear wiper motor then operates continuously at low speed, uses a reference ground signal
from the BCM for the Rear Wiper/Washer Switch output signal it receives. The Rear Wiper/Washer signal
received by the BCM is the result of 3 resistors in the Rear Wiper Switch configured as a resistor ladder
network. This signal is connected to a BCM Analog to Digital Input which also provides a switched Battery
pull-up for the circuit. Depending on the function selected (Intermittent, ON, OFF, Wash), the Rear Wiper
Control Switch connects a different set of resistors into the circuit resulting in different voltages appearing on
the BCM A/D input. By monitoring this voltage, the BCM determines how to control the Rear Wiper Motor
Relay and the Rear Washer Relay.
The BCM does not control the parking of the Rear Wiper Motor, it is self parking. When the BCM deactivates
its output, the contacts of the Rear Wiper Motor Relay switch back to ground. The Rear Wiper's internal park
switch and circuitry will sustain motor operation until the wiper arm has returned to its Park position.

M45 M45 Rear Wiper Motor
Rear Washer System
On vehicles equipped with a Rear Washer, the rear washer system consists of the rear window washer
pump/relay and the rear washer switch which is located at the windshield wiper/washer switch. When the rear
switch is pressed, the Body Control Module detects that the request from the rear wiper/washer switch, the
BCM sends a request to the rear window washer pump relay and supplies Battery to the coil of the Rear Washer
Pump Relay. This energizes the Relay, which provides voltage to the rear window washer pump. The window
washer pump provides the washer fluids, and the rear wiper is activated.
80 of 84
G19 G19 Rear Window Washer Pump

SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool
Number/
81 of 84
Tool
Number/
BO 39232
J 39232
Wiper
Linkage
Separator
82 of 84
Tool
Number/
BO 39529
J 39529
Wiper
Linkage
Installer
83 of 84
Tool
Number/
J 39822
Wiper Arm
Puller
84 of 84

All Cadillac Repair and Service Manuals

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

All Cadillac Repair and Service Manuals

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

All Cadillac Repair and Service Manuals

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

For full manual go to https://repairmanualnow.

2019-2023 ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT

SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS

DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES

Symptom Byte Information: Symptom Byte List

Diagnostic Fault Information

Short to Open/High Short to Signal

Conditions for Running the DTC

• Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode

Conditions for Setting the DTC

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

Active Noise Cancellation - Disabled

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

Greater than 300 RPM & Less than 9000 RPM

Active Noise Cancellation Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

Master Electrical Component List , or Component Connector End Views - Index

Electrical Information Reference

DTC Type Reference

1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off

DTC B0560 (UQG)

Diagnostic Fault Information

Short to Open/High Short to Signal

Conditions for Running the DTC

• Ignition - On/Vehicle - In Service Mode

Conditions for Setting the DTC

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets

Active Noise Cancellation - Disabled

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

Greater than 300 RPM & Less than 9000 RPM

Active Noise Cancellation Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

Master Electrical Component List , or Component Connector End Views - Index

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

1. Ignition/Vehicle & All vehicle systems - Off

DTC B126F, B1277, B127C, OR B127D

Microphone 1 Input Signal Circuit

Microphone 2 Input Signal Circuit

Microphone 3 Input Signal Circuit

Microphone 4 Input Signal Circuit

For symptom byte information refer to Symptom Byte List

Diagnostic Fault Information

Short to Open/High Short to Signal

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC B1277 01, B127C 01, B127D 01, B126F 01

• DTC B1325 is not current

DTC B1277 02, B127C 02, B127D 02, B126F 02

• DTC B1325 is not current

DTC B1277 04, B127C 04, B127D 04, B126F 04

• DTC B1325 is not current

DTC B1277 1A, B127C 1A, B127D 1A, B126F 1A

• DTC B1325 is not current

Action Taken When the DTC Sets

The active noise cancellation system is disabled.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC

• Installation of aftermarket replacement speakers, additional speakers/subwoofers, or aftermarket exhaust

Active Noise Cancellation Wiring Schematics

Connector End View Reference

Description and Operation